JP7124902B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, a variable performance is executed according to the result of the lottery, and an operation means capable of being pressed by a player is arranged to operate during the variable performance. A pachinko machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying characters, comments, etc. is executed in addition to the variable effect executed by operating the .

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-228798

However, further enhancement of interest is required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means. determination means for executing a determination based on the information stored in the determination means; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, wherein the identification information is composed of a plurality of identification pattern rows, and is configured to indicate that the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result by displaying a combination of specific identification patterns, and the motion The target display means is a specific dynamic display mode capable of displaying, of the plurality of identification pattern strings, other than one identification pattern string in a ready-to-win display mode that can be combined to indicate the specific determination result. The identification information can be dynamically displayed by the display means, and the notification pattern corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means can be displayed on the display means. and pattern display area changing means capable of changing from a displayed state to non-display area information indicating that the notification pattern is displayed, and The machine is capable of displaying area information indicating an area in which the notification pattern is displayed even in a state in which the notification pattern is not displayed, and the area information of the area in which the notification pattern is not displayed. is variable, and the area information of the area where the notification pattern is not displayed is displayed based on the establishment of the first condition. It is possible to execute a first specific effect as the specific effect when the display is changed from to non-display, and the notification pattern is displayed based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. a second specific effect different from the first specific effect can be executed as the specific effect when the area information of the non-existing area is changed from a displayed state to a non-display state , and the first condition is configured so that the second condition is not satisfied during the period in which the area information is varied based on the establishment of the above, and the period in which the area information is varied based on the establishment of the second condition. inside A situation in which the first condition is not satisfied and the area information is changed to non-display based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied during the period of display in the ready-to-reach display mode. When the information is stored up to a predetermined specific number in the storage means, it is possible to notify that the information has been stored up to the specific number in a notification mode different from the notification pattern. , the area information indicating that the area information corresponding to the specific number of the information among the displayed area information is an area in which the notification pattern corresponding to the specific number of the information is displayed, during the period when the reach display mode is displayed, the It is possible to change to non-display and display based on the establishment of two conditions .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means determination means for executing determination based on information; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period; a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the determination result of is stopped and displayed, wherein the identification information includes a plurality of identifications The dynamic display means is configured to indicate that the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result by being composed of a pattern row and displayed in a combination of specific identification patterns. The identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode that can be displayed in a ready-to-reach display mode that can be combined to indicate the specific determination result, except for one identification pattern string among the plurality of identification pattern strings. A pattern display means capable of dynamically displaying, and capable of displaying, on the display means, a notification pattern corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. and pattern display area varying means capable of changing from a displayed state to non-display area information indicating that the notification symbol is displayed in the area, wherein the game machine comprises: It is possible to display area information indicating an area in which a pattern is displayed even in a state in which the notification pattern is not displayed, and the area information of the area in which the notification pattern is not displayed is variable. It has means capable of executing a specific effect under certain circumstances, and the area information of the area where the notification pattern is not displayed is changed from being displayed to being non-display based on the establishment of a first condition. When a second condition different from the first condition is established, it is possible to execute a first specific effect as the specific effect, and the area of the area where the notification pattern is not displayed based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition. A second specific effect different from the first specific effect can be executed as the specific effect when the information is changed from the displayed state to the non-display state , and the first condition is satisfied. The second condition is not satisfied during the period in which the area information is varied based on the condition, and the first condition is configured during the period in which the area information is varied based on the satisfaction of the second condition. condition met A predetermined specific information is provided under a situation in which the area information is changed to non-display based on the fact that the second condition is satisfied during the period when the area information is displayed in the reach display mode. When the information is stored up to the number in the storage means, it is possible to notify that the information has been stored up to the specific number in a notification mode different from the notification pattern, and the displayed Among the area information, the area information indicating that the notification pattern corresponding to the specific number of the information is displayed indicates that the second condition is satisfied while the ready-to-win display mode is being displayed. It is possible to be hidden and displayed based on .

Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6(a). (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6; FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. It is a back perspective view of an operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a back exploded perspective view of an operation device. (a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device on line XIVc; It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. Fig. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device; (a) is a front view of the driving device, and (b) is a side view of the driving device viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a). It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. 18. (a) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. (a) and (b) are front views of a release member and a rotary pawl member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. 38; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a side view of a slide claw member in a second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of a releasing member. (a) and (b) are side views of a release member, a rotary plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. (a) and (b) are side views of the operation device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of an operation device according to a fifth embodiment; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is FIG. 59(a). is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc. 59(a) and 59(b) are sectional views of the vibrating device taken along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and 59(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive. (a) is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft. (a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc of FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a); is. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a); is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member and a second transmission member of the left disk cam; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a); (a) is a front view of a right disc cam in a seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and (b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). is. (a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). (a) is a front view of an engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). (a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disc cam. 78(d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78(c); (e) is a front view of the right disc cam; (f) [ Fig. 78 ] is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Fig. 78(e) ; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. 7(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6. FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device on a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened from an outer frame and a back pack is opened from the inner frame (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is closed with respect to an outer frame and a front frame is opened (deployed); FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a front frame removed; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members arranged below the window portion of the front frame are shown exploded; (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a movable binding member in which a released state and a fixed state of the movable binding member are shown side by side. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb of FIG. 94(a). (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95(a). (a) is a rear view schematically illustrating the movable binding member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a), and (c) is the movable binding member and the harness. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c). FIG. (a) And (b) is a front frame which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and the upper surface schematic diagram of a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a first bending region. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate unit. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member taken along line CXVb-CXVb of FIG. 115(a). It is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member; It is an exploded rear perspective view of an upper frame member. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly; FIG. Fig. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly; (a) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and (c) is a view of FIG. FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124(a); is a partial cross-sectional view of the front side assembly, the rear side assembly, the upper frame member, the body frame and the upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (a) is a back view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and 127(b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) is a front perspective view of a board support device, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. (a) and (b) are side views of the board support device. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI of FIG. 86; FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded rear perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit. (a) and (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit. (a) to (c) are front views of the ball launching unit showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device. 1 is a front perspective view of a metal member for cutting; FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball shooting unit viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146(a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball shooting unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147(a). FIG. 10 is a partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after launching the ball; It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the production operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal motion device taken along line CLIV-CLIV of FIG. 153; Fig. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device; It is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat plate member and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal, the flat plate member and the slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. Fig. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor; (a) and (b) are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device and loose fitting device; It is a back perspective view of a petal motion device, a drive-side arm member, and a driven-side arm member. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the back plate; It is an exploded front perspective view of a back plate, a side base material, and a 2nd production|presentation member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive-side arm member, a slide plate, and a second effect member. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. It is a front view of a petal motion device, an advancing/retreating motion unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal motion device and an advancing/retreating motion unit. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. (a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device, (b) is a front view of the petal motion device, and (c) is a transparent front view of the petal motion device with the central shaft rotating device omitted. It is a figure and (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (a) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal motion device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, and (d) is a petal motion device. is a rear perspective view of the. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit in a ninth embodiment; It is a back perspective view of a passage formation unit. Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; Fig. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit; FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit according to a tenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage forming unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; Fig. 3 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail; (a) and (b) are partial front enlarged views of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting device according to a twelfth embodiment; (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal motion device. (a) and (b) are front views of the petal motion device. It is a front view of a petal motion device. FIG. 21 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of the twelfth embodiment; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member; FIG. FIG. 32 is a front perspective view of an operation device according to a thirteenth embodiment; It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the operation device. (a) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203(a), and (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, 203(d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203(a), and FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) and (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit according to the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward recess recessed in the light guide member in region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206A; 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in region CCVId of FIG. 206(a), and (e) is FIG. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVIe of (a); It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which three reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing, and (b) is a view showing four reserved balls are set while the third pattern is changing. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode in which the character J0 appears from the display area C after the character J0 is displayed. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which four reserved balls are set during the variation of the third symbol, and no vacant recommended value is increased, and (b) is from the state of FIG. 6 (a) It is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of held balls further increases and exceeds the recommended value. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of held balls increases in a short period of time, and (b) shows a character J0 in the display area C indicating the optimum number of held balls according to the state. It is the figure which showed the display aspect in a case. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the character J1 is displayed in the display area C while the third symbol is changing, and (b) is a change to a held ball while the third symbol is changing. , and a character J2 is displayed in the display area C. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the number of pending balls reaches the maximum number, and (b) is a display mode in which the character displayed in the display area C changes when an over-win is won. It is a figure showing. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the player accumulates the number of reserved balls up to 6 during reach, and (b) shows that the number of reserved balls is accumulated up to 6, and the pattern arrangement changes. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display mode when (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the lucky display of the last big hit pending, and (b) is a display mode when the player presses the button after the number of pending balls has accumulated up to 6. It is a diagram. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of the long open effect, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the variable effect of the long open winning prize. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the first control example; It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal random number table in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table that is part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table for time reduction, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning command table in the first control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a suspension change selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a suspension effect mode selection table in the first control example. . (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows a normal holding lid range selection table in the first control example. FIG. 4C is a schematic diagram showing an advance notice A mode reservation lid range selection table in the first control example, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed the selection table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning holding lid range selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a ready-to-win effect holding lid range selection table in the first control example. 2 is a schematic diagram shown in FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a holding lid command selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a holding lid color change selection table in the first control example. is. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reserve command table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a background mode selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a pending character change table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a balloon selection table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal balloon selection table in the first control example. , (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the announcement A balloon selection table in the first control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the announcement B balloon selection table in the first control example. is. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a short-term winning balloon table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win effect balloon table in the first control example. be. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reserved speech balloon selection table in the first control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win effect lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ready-to-win start time calculation table in the first control example. There is, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a lucky reservation lottery table in the first control example. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. 8 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design 1 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the special design 2 fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation start processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing a lucky display determination process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a reach-in-progress pending effect setting process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a holding lid setting process executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a pending character setting process executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a balloon lid setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing short-term winning determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a lucky pending storage process executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing short-term winning management processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pending|holding effect management process during reach performed by MPU in the sound ramp control apparatus in a 1st control example. 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 8 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flow chart showing an announcement effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing mode switching processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a holding lid command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing a pending character display process. 8 is a flowchart showing balloon display processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process which carries out. (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second control example. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the continuous effect and the background display in the second control example; (a) is a display mode showing the display screen during the continuous effect in the second control example, and (b) is a display mode showing the display screen during the special effect in the second control example. It is the display mode which showed the background change during continuous production|presentation in the 2nd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the second control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 2nd example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 2nd example of control. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process 2 executed by an MPU in a main control device in a second control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing stop command processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the process during time saving performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 10 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation return processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; 13 is a flow chart showing effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the continuous production return processing performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. 14 is a flowchart showing special effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen when the power is turned on in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a customer waiting screen after power is turned on in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a variable game screen for the first rotation after power is turned on in the fourth control example. . It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fourth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a volume table in the fourth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start-up processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing initial sound volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing volume setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing volume-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a storage error A screen when the power is turned on in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage error B screen during a game operation in the fifth control example. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. 4 is a timing chart when the tilting device performs a retry operation; 4 is a timing chart when a touch sensor is detected in the tilting device; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an operation effect selection table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario table in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario A table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting motion scenario B table in the fifth control example. be. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection operation A table in a fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an origin detection B table in a fifth control example. and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a tilting initial operation table in the fifth control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing retry processing during touch input executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing tilting device control processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing operation effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing tilting initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a process during operation presentation executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an effect backtracking operation process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing retry operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 346(a) is a diagram showing a display mode in which the retained ball has a variation of the jackpot A and the third symbol is varying; It is the figure which showed the display mode when one is digested and it becomes a jackpot A. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a state in which one more held ball is digested from the state of FIG. ), one more is digested, and this time variation is a diagram showing a display mode when a big win is achieved. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode of a chance, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode during probability variation. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when a big win is started, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the effect for the 1st round of the big win. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case of notifying that there is a button effect during the big win, and (b) is a diagram showing the button pressed from the state of FIG. It is the figure which showed the display mode in the case of informing a player that probability variation was provided. (a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the big win is over, and (b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the big win is over and the variable probability mode is entered. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example, and (b) schematically shows a promotion lottery table in the sixth control example. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing 2 performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 6th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing variation pattern reception processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing stop symbol switching processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing winning command reception processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing stop symbol change processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot related command reception process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 6th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing opening processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a big prize winning ball process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing round processing executed by an MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing ending processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a stop symbol replacement process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; It is a flow chart showing a game state setting process to be performed. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a jackpot-related display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a big winning process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; (a) is a diagram showing a display mode during the effect when long open is won in the seventh control example, and (b) is a view showing a display mode in the case of the long open effect in the seventh control example. It is a diagram of FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a display mode during long opening effect regulation in the seventh control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the seventh control example; It is the flowchart which showed the design variation processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 7th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing long opening effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing long open-related processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a front perspective view of a frame button in an eighth control example, and (b) is a front perspective view of a frame button in a first modification of the eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged front view of the holding area in the internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600 in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the effect area in the internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600 in the eighth control example, with the upper left side facing the front side; (a) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rendering area in the internal flow path of the second specific prize winning port 600 in the eighth control example, and (b) is a perspective view of the second specific prize winning port 600 in the eighth control example. It is the elements on larger scale which looked at the production|presentation area|region in an internal flow path from the top. (a) and (b) are partial enlarged perspective views obliquely showing the rendering area in the internal channel of the second specific prize winning port 600 in the eighth control example, and (c) is the second specific prize winning opening in the eighth control example. FIG. 11 is a partially enlarged view of the effect area in the internal flow path of the winning opening 600 as viewed from above. (a) and (b) are enlarged front views of the rotation effect device 296 in the eighth control example. (a) and (b) are enlarged front views of the rotation effect device 296 in the eighth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing a display screen area division setting and effective line setting in an eighth control example, and (b) is a diagram exemplifying an actual display screen in the eighth control example. . (a) and (b) are diagrams exemplifying display modes displayed during the jackpot ending period in the eighth control example. (a) and (b) are the figures which illustrated the display mode of the result display effect|action which displays the result of the rotation distribution effect|action in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a diagram exemplifying a display mode of a result display effect for displaying the result of the rotation apportionment effect in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a diagram exemplifying a display mode of a composite touch effect in the eighth control example; It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the eighth control example. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the eighth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the eighth control example, and (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the eighth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol jackpot random number table in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table in the eighth control example. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal winning random number table in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a jackpot type selection table in an eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a state setting table in the eighth control example. . FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a normal variation pattern selection table that is part of the variation pattern selection table in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern selection table for reducing working hours, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the eighth control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning command table in the eighth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing a case where the ball is entered into 100 in the rotation operation A in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing a case where the button is pressed to cancel the storage and the ball is entered into 100 in the rotation operation A in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing a case where the holding is canceled by pressing a button in the rotation operation A in the eighth control example, and the switching operation A is performed and the ball is entered into 100. FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a case where a ball is landed with LUCKY in the rotation motion B in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing a case where a ball is entered into 100 in rotation motion C in the eighth control example and a resurrection effect is performed; FIG. FIG. 21 is a timing chart showing a case where the button is pressed to release the retention and the ball is entered into LUCKY in the rotation operation B in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing a case where the retention is released by pressing the button in the rotation operation B in the eighth control example, and the switch operation B occurs and the ball is entered into LUCKY. FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing a case where the retention is canceled by pressing a button in the rotation operation C in the eighth control example, and the ball enters 100 to perform a resurrection effect. FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart showing a case where the retention is released by pressing a button in the rotation operation C in the eighth control example, and the ball enters 100 in the switching operation A to perform a revival effect. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a rotation effect selection table in an eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a rotation operation time setting table in the eighth control example. is. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a rotating device operation table in an eighth control example; (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an initial operation table in an eighth control example; c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a reversing/returning operation table in the eighth control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a rotation operation A table in an eighth control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a rotation operation B table in an eighth control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a rotation operation C table in an eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a switching operation A table in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a switching operation B table in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a result display determination table in the eighth control example; FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an input effect setting table in the eighth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effective timer setting table in an eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a composite determination table in the eighth control example. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in an eighth control example; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the eighth control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the eighth control example; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the eighth control example; FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the eighth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a starting prize-winning process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the design variation processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 8th control example. It is the flowchart which showed the design fluctuation|variation start processing normally performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a through gate passing process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the eighth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main controller in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a variation pattern reception process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing reverse operation setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot completion|finish setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the 8th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing rotation control processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing rotation initial operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing result display processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing switching operation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a reversal return process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing operation timer setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing frame button operation processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. 12(a) is a flowchart showing an advance notice effect display process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; 4 is a flow chart showing mode switching processing. (a) is a flowchart showing rotation effect execution command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example. 10 is a flow chart showing result display command processing performed. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process which carries out. (a) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing drawing processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in an eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram exemplifying a display mode of a complex operation effect in the eighth control example in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a diagram exemplifying a display mode of a complex operation effect in the eighth control example in the ninth control example; (a) is a timing chart showing an example of the content of a compound operation effect in the ninth control example; (b) is a schematic showing effect data used for the compound operation effect in the ninth control example; It is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an effect content setting table in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing operation level determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing a familiar effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, Figures 1 to 4
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine").
) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12 .
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. Front view (
(See FIG. 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side, with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is, for example, the third pattern display device 81 (Fig. 2
), or to change the contents of the super ready-to-win effect.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated parts 29 to 3 containing light-emitting means such as LEDs are mounted on the periphery of the window part 14c.
3 is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, the front view of the front frame 14 (Fig. 1
(See) At the upper left part, there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . pachinko machine 1
When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, the ball is lent according to the operation. done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 that are operated by the player to hit the ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. Note that the operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51 are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, and a shooting stop switch 51 for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation.
b, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61 and 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable winning device 330, through gate 67,
It is configured by assembling the variable display unit 80 and the like, and its peripheral portion is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
attached to the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. General winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable display device unit 8
0 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The central portion of the front of the game board 13 is positioned through the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
can be seen from the front side. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 is formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
is planted, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate is planted inside the outer rail 62, like the outer rail 62. As shown in FIG. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided,
area where the launched ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. The tip portion of the inner rail 61 (Fig. 2
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the upper left part of the game board 13) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display whether the ball has entered the first winning port 64 or the second
It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not a prize has been won in the prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In particular,
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while
When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first symbol display device 37B is activated.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. In addition, multiple L
The ED is configured so that the respective LEDs emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared. In the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B,
Not only is it indicated whether the result of the lottery is a big hit or not as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is the maximum number of rounds after the jackpot of 15 rounds,
Along with moving to a low probability state, during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations) is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of The high-probability state (during variable probability) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of winning a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 . "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 640 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normal, it is a game state (
This is a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the winning probability of the second symbol is increased.

During the probability change and the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the second winning port 64
The time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is set compared to normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 during the probability change or the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640a is released more than during normal times. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol does not change, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time may be changed. In addition, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are triggered by the winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (start winning).
A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640
is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times.
Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment.
37B and part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
A part of the third symbol display device 81 may light up the symbol reserve lamp. Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, through gate 67
is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Also, the first pattern display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of balls on hold, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When a ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 640 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4).
It is indicated by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In addition, in this embodiment,
The number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same, but the balls enter the first prize winning port 64. The number of prize balls paid out when a wins a prize and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the prize paid out when a ball enters the first prize winning port 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second winning hole 640 may be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball enters the second winning hole 6
It will be in a state where it is easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, during variable probability and short time, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal,
In addition, since the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short,
is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and the shorter working hours than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of winning a 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 640 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 640, and the ball can always win a prize.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 640. to shoot the ball so that it passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed hitting”).
), it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big win by obtaining many chances of a big win lottery by winning in the first winning hole 64 .

On the other hand, during the probability variation and the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
The electric accessory 640a associated with 0 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to win. It is better to shoot the ball (so-called "right shot"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory, and aim to win a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640. , to the player's advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 640 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state,
The specific prize winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through an out opening 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

In addition, the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are accommodated in substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100-10
4 includes a box base and a box cover covering the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seals are made of a brittle material.
If the board boxes 100 and 102 are forced to open, they are cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side of the case rail 132; ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the firing control device 11
2 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122 . The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. Some RAM 203
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device is executed.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. The work area where the values are stored (
working area). The RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 and retains data (backup) even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off.
All the data stored in the RAM 203 are backed up.

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 253) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes
Payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol reservation lamp, opening and closing driving to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis A solenoid 209 including a large-opening solenoid for driving and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected.

Further, the input/output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown), a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1 .
15 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253 which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 .
Various processes are executed based on the AM elimination signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110,
A stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, etc., and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. have. The RAM 213 is used for the pachinko machine 10
Data can be held (backed up) by supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like.
1 is input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is the payout control device 1
11 but not connected to the main controller 110 .

The ball launching control device 112 controls the ball launching unit 112 so that the ball launching strength corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
It controls a. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (
is not operated), the firing solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51. .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation display) and a display control device 114 such as an advance notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed in . The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. Input/output port 22
5 are connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or change the content of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio ramp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, the sound corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and the display content is made to correspond. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 .

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, displays the third pattern display device 81.
It controls the display such as the variation effect of the third symbol in . Also, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command, so that the third symbol display device 8
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (Fig. 3
), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 is an alternating current 2 supplied from the outside.
A voltage of 4 volts is taken in, and various switches such as the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
9, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are generated. Necessary voltage is supplied to each of the controllers 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the MPU of the main controller 110 when power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
201 and a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 . The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, power failure (
It judges that the power failure, power interruption) has occurred, and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111, NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operating device 3
00 is arranged at the center of the inner frame 12 in the left-right direction (that is, the center of the pachinko machine 10 in the left-right direction) when viewed from the front.

The operation device 300 is provided with a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable when pushed by the player, and is positioned in a region formed by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. are placed. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a, a clearance is provided that is at least large enough for a finger to be comfortably inserted. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the fingertip is placed on the back side of the top surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the tilting device 310 is often operated with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, it is assumed that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

FIG. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a view of VI in FIG.
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line b-VIb, and FIG.
0, and FIG. 7(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb of FIG. 7(a).

6 and 7 partially show the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 6 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the vertical direction, and FIG. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward is illustrated. Note that in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340 . Details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed, for example, by displaying a specific display (for example, a display of "press the button") on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
is what the player does when the appears.

Here, for example, if the tilting device 310 is pushed in by dropping the hand downward forcefully as in the case of pushing a button that advances and retreats up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves forward depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the operation surface 312a1 is easily rubbed against the palm of the hand. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and to prevent the player from performing a pressing operation by dropping the hand downward forcefully.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to drop the hand vigorously downward. As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in how the tilting device 310 looks from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In addition, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's point of view, while its area is reduced to such an extent that it is invisible in the second state. (the operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). This allows the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the state and the second state.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
The area of 1i is configured to gradually increase, and accordingly, the amount of light from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 is visually recognized to gradually increase.
The difference in the amount of light visible to the player (degree of brightness) between the first state and the second state increases, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be greatly changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist as an axis), The tilting device 310 can be comfortably pushed and operated while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by dropping the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the player to drop the hand downward.
As a result, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. Figure 10
is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the operating device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that imparts an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310, and detection sensors 324L and 324 that detect the pushing operation from the first state.
4R and are arranged outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for applying the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 can be used for tilting. Device 310 can be housed in lower frame member 320 . This will
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the operation device 30.
0 is a rear exploded perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1 disposed at each of the left and right ends at the back side end (the far side end of the paper surface of FIG. 12), and a tilting device 310 having a ring member BR1. A lower frame member 320 that has a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. It is a member that has a recessed portion that is arranged to face the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner in which the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 together with the tilting device 3
A driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement in the second state of 10 and an arm member 345 that is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A driving device 340 for transmission, and a protective cover device 3 that is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protects the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from three sides, ie, the lateral direction and the rear.
50 and .

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface slope downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 slopes downward toward the front side. Horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-shaped member horizontally arranged at the upper end on the far side of
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below; A left side detection sensor 324L and a right side detection sensor 324R are arranged as a pair on the left and right side.
and an opening portion 325 that is an opening formed by scraping a portion arranged below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 .

The bottom plate portion 321 abuts on the tilting device 310 to determine the end of the movement of the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 is exposed to the bottom plate portion 3 .
21 can pass through.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled in the central portion on the front side, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
and an insertion hole 321c that is symmetrically drilled on the left and right sides of the .

The transmission hole 321a is arranged in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and formed with a size that allows the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes below the bottom plate portion 321, the tilting device 310 can be provided with a driving force in the linear motion direction.

The detection hole 321b is formed by detecting pieces 311gL and 311 projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
This is a through hole through which gR can be inserted. Detection piece 31 projecting from detection hole 321b
By arranging 1gL and 311gR in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted therein, and the arm member Through-holes are formed up to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and has a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side. A locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so that it does not move backward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in the direction of moving the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310 . Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are located on the bottom plate portion 32 of the lower frame member 320.
1 (the position of the detection groove) is the same on the left and right.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor is equipped with a light projecting part that projects light and a light receiving part that receives the light from this light projecting part, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted. means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 , the rotary claw member 347 , and the like to enter the lower frame member 320 . Therefore, the lateral width thereof is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary pawl members 347 .

On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f to the upper front side (see FIG.
By pushing up the driving device 340 after passing through the LED device 341
f can be arranged above the opening 325, and the rotating claw member 34 from the LED device 341f.
7, the vertical width of the opening 325 can be shortened.

The upper frame member 330 is arranged to face the opening 331, which is large enough to catch the extended portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. and an upper bearing portion 332 configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom and an upper bearing portion 332 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 .

The protective cover device 350 is structured to be vertically divisible and covered in three directions except for the front side. A voice coil motor 352 that is supported by the bottom plate and arranged on the front side so that the vibration surface faces obliquely forward and upward, a left detection sensor 353L that is a detection sensor having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351, and a right side detection sensor 353L. A detection sensor 353R is mainly provided.

Note that FIG. 12 shows a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R arranged on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left-right center can be visually recognized.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface that is the lower frame member 3 .
20 is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of the 20. As shown in FIG. As a result, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 . Disk cams 344L, 3 of drive device 340
44R are arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are the detection sensors 353L and 353L.
It is possible to detect whether or not the disk cams 344L and 344R are arranged in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are arranged in the detection groove of 53R.

In this embodiment, since the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive device 340 are provided with the detection holes 344eL, 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L, 35
There are two types of specific phases detectable by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. Figure 14(a)
) is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. ) of XIVc
- XIVc is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310; 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the tilting device 310 includes a case body 311 which is a box-shaped body having fan-shaped side surfaces and openings in the upper and lower sides, and the upper opening of the case body 311 is covered. Lid 312 fastened and fixed to case main body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front side end of lid 312 and hanging down, and a mode sandwiched between the rear ends of case main body 311 and lid 312. , a torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314 , and a rear end of the case body 311 and the lid 312 at the case body 3
and a ring-shaped ring member BR1 for fixing the lid 312 and the lid 312 indivisibly.

The case main body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening portion 311b opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right sides of the opening portion 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending toward the center in the left-right direction from a flange projecting downward along the edge of the shaft 311c, and a concave portion 311d having a semicircular cross-section supporting the shaft portion 314 at the rear end. , an insertion groove 311e which is a groove arranged at a position where both arm portions 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. , a pair of left detection pieces 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) which are extended below the bottom plate portion 311a, and extension portions which are extended from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a to the front side by a predetermined amount. a provision portion 311h, a protective lens member 311i which is arranged on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314, and is formed of a light-transmitting material, and a bottom plate portion. 311a mainly includes an overhang projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the front side end portion of 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by the player, the bottom plate portion 311a is supported by the lower frame member 3.
20 is a portion that abuts on the bottom plate portion 321 of the member 20. FIG.

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is inserted into the guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 (see FIG. 17(b)).
45b, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to and from the driving device 340. As shown in FIG.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. is longer than the right detecting piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL is about 3° centered on the shaft portion 314 (from the first state (see FIG. 22) to the push end (see FIG. 22). 23)), the left detection piece 311gL is projected more than the right detection piece 311gR.

The extended portion 311h projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and projects to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). configured in a manner.

The protective lens member 311i is configured in a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14A).
) and is curved in the left-right direction (see FIG. 14(c)), so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be easily relieved (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The protruding protruding portion 311j protrudes perpendicularly from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a smaller cross-sectional shape than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
is pushed (see FIG. 29), it is inserted through the transmission hole 321a and the tip is projected downward from the lower frame member 320. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and an intermediate plate member 312b.
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a, and in the first state (see FIG. 6), the LED device 34
and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape having a size surrounding 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 by its rigidity in the axial direction. While it is fixed inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such limitation is lifted, and the light from the LED device 341f can be widely irradiated.

The lens member 313 is made of a light-transmitting material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has a shape conforming to the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , and a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape in the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 at a pair of left and right twisted portions, and has both arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the twisted portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of twisted portions. , provided.

Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. Fig. 17(a)
is a front view of drive device 340, FIG. 17(b) is a side view of drive device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17(a), and FIG. is.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft rod 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (
left disk cam 344L, right disk cam 344R) and a connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344
and a release member 346 that is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341 and comes into contact with the first projecting portion 344c1 and the second projecting portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction. , a rotating pawl member 347 that is coaxially supported with the releasing member 346 and moves relative to the releasing member 346 as it rotates, and a coil spring-like member that generates an urging force in the direction of tilting the rotating pawl member 347 downward. 1st spring SP1 which is a spring member of, release member 34
6 and the rotary pawl member 347 are mainly provided with a second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates an urging force in a direction to separate them from each other.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward on the left and right sides to form a U-shaped motor housing portion 3 when viewed from above.
41a and a shaft support hole 341b which is drilled at the same position of the opposing plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a and which supports the disc cam 344, and an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. A shaft portion 341c projecting in the left-right direction at a position shifted to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d extending from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a motor A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341a
e, and an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and having an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface, and has a portion that refracts light (
part that refracts light). This makes it possible to evenly irradiate the light from the LED device 341f upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is positioned inside the motor accommodating portion 341a in the U-shape.
A fixing member 342a is provided which is fastened and fixed to 1a.

The fixed member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

One end of the arm member 345 has a perfectly circular shaft support hole 345a that is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and the other end of the arm member 345 has a rectangular shaft support hole 345a. and a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end of the guide hole 345b is formed so that the disk cam 344 rotates more than once. It is formed in a position sufficient to allow rotation.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. FIG. The transmission shaft 343 has a columnar member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and is supported by the columnar member 343a.
a transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotary gear of the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a, a movable clutch 343c capable of switching between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by moving in the axial direction whether or not to transmit the driving force, and the movable clutch 343c and a coil spring 343d that presses against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cams 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 343a2, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. Here, the fixing portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
43c is formed with a length that allows it to move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b includes a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
A clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness along the axial direction is formed at a circumferential position of the axial center from a surface arranged to face the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 is perfectly circular, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1, and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 while forming unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position centered on the shaft from a surface that faces the transmission gear 343b. .

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an angle of about 100 degrees at the top.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex part and a concave part of °.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transferred to the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. As a result, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disk cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

In addition, the movable clutch 343c is normally engaged with the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
43b, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3
43a2 so as to move away from the transmission gear 343b.

Disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. The disk cam 344 has a shape that mirrors the left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R.
Since there are only positions 44eL and 344eR, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. be. 20(a) and 20(b) illustrate a state in which the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20(a) and 20(b), the left disc cam 344L is a member having portions protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disc, and is positioned at the center of the disc. A central shaft portion 344a protruding inwardly in a cylindrical shape, a circular rib 344b protruding inwardly as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and an outer side of the circular rib 344b. As a rib lower in height than the circular rib 344b, it protrudes inward and has two
Engagement rib 344c having a portion projecting radially outward at a point, and circular rib 344b
and the engaging rib 344c, the arm member 3
45 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL drilled near the outer circumference.

The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is arranged at a position forming an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that mirrors the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
, and the outer circumference is configured to be fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disc cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. As a result, misalignment of the disc cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engaging rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80° in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is arranged. a protruding portion 344c1; At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment), a second projecting portion 344c3 projecting radially outward again, and the second projecting portion 344c.
3, and a second lead-in portion 344c4 that is retracted radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ3 (angle θ3=20° in this embodiment).

In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connecting pin 344d is arranged at the position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are arranged as a pair on the left and right, and the configurations thereof are the same on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21(a) shows a large angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated with respect to the release member 346 to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2, and FIG. 21(b) shows the release member 346 A small angle state in which the rotary pawl member 347 is rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the releasing member 346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (when the projecting pin 346b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b). state) (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and includes a shaft support hole 346a supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), A protruding pin 346b projecting in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and from the shaft support hole 346a and an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting with the maximum diameter.

The engaging portion 346d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 10) so that the engaging rib 34 of the disc cam 344
4c (see FIG. 20). In this embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By forming the outer periphery of d to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotary pawl member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. A long guide hole 347b is drilled along which the projecting pin 346b of the releasing member 346 can be guided (drilled with a size that includes the movement locus of the projecting pin 346b inside), and a second spring SP2.
an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the shaft support hole 347a is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d protruding downward at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18). and a pull-down hole 347e drilled so as to be able to be inserted therethrough.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21(a), the release member 346 is arranged at the end position of the rotation claw member 347 in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21(a)). Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the downward direction, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate together in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the upward direction is applied to 346d, only the releasing member 346 can be rotated to maintain the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 until reaching the small angle state shown in FIG. 21(b).

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example when the player performs the pushing operation when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In addition, in the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

22 to 24 show the operation device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. 22 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the terminal position, and FIG. 23 shows the state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand repeatedly operating the tilting device 310 .

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the direction of backward rotation (clockwise in FIG. 22) by a torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a engages the hooked portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347. As shown in FIG.
be hooked on As a result, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the tilting device 310 is always biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 32
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an action of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31
0 rotates about 3° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted through the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted through the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection states of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is hit repeatedly, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated.
5, the tilting device 310 is not returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at an incomplete position, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this can be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 , but in this embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 moves against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 . It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) for pushing down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342 . As a result, there are problems such as an increase in product cost and an inability to save space.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of effecting by vibrating motion is arranged at a position facing the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. be.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG.
A return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player presses the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and the player cannot Since unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and if the number of times is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the voice coil is turned on. By driving the motor 352, the load for returning the tilting device 310 can be improved only when the player performs a repeated hitting operation. This will
A player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts to reciprocate vertically from the first state (tilting operation) will be described. Figure 25 to Figure 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).

25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 28 shows a state in which the rotating claw member 347 has returned to its posture after being rotated in the forward direction.
29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is pushed back and forth from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the terminal position, and FIG. By rotating the plate cam 344 in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount, the engagement rib 34
4 c reaches the second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344 c 3 of the release member 346 contacts the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346 . 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
10 is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilting device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, it is possible to ensure a large amount of light irradiated in the axial direction. Thereby, the cylindrical member 312c serves as a rib of the lid 312 to improve the strength, and in the first state of the tilting device 310, the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f can be adjusted.

As shown in FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in direction), the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, thereby rotating the releasing member 346 in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotary pawl member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction until it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 .

The change in posture of the release member 346 causes the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d until the disc cam 344 rotates until the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is arranged at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position on the far side from the rotation shaft of the disc cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345 , the upward movement of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344 .

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27),
When the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 rotate forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 27) due to the biasing force of the first spring SP1. 25), and the rotary pawl member 347 returns to the state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in the direction of increasing the angle between the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 (upper angle in FIG. 27). 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

In this state, the lid 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the tilting device 31 when the area where the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is in the first state.
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player).
It is also possible to irradiate to Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the LED device 3
It is possible to change the traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f, and to improve the presentation effect of the light.

In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned ON, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating motion can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, from the state shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction ( Figure 2
8 clockwise), the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313
41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and the vertical direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 28). can be done.

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light from the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light from the LED device 341f is also emitted in the direction toward the player (frontal direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313 .

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. When the member 347 rotates backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and subsequently pushes the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a is moved to the hooked portion 347d.
, the rotary pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down.
After depressing 0, the tilting device 310 can remain in the first state if the player releases the hand.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (repeatedly moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 310 can be performed.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the upward movement of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect. can be used for

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 310 moves toward the lower frame member 320.
, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the push end.

Therefore, compared to a game machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pressed, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 vibrates at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can grasp it.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 . Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pressed.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to perform a vibration effect when a big win is confirmed, it is possible to improve the sense of anticipation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 value as a look-ahead means of
As a result, the tilting device 310 can be easily operated by the player, and the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the second projecting portion 344c1.
By rotating the disk cam 344 forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until it abuts against the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, the driving device 340 can be brought into the second initial state. .

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 are in contact with each other in the rotational direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first projecting portion 344c1 contacts the engaging rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second projecting portion 344c3 contacts the engaging rib 344c.

29, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) so that the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes through the engaging portion 346d, and then reversely rotates. 29 can be returned to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load is applied to the release member 346 in a direction to push up the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward (FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained.
counterclockwise direction).

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting motion) from the state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (tilting operation) to reciprocate up and down after passing through the second state.

FIGS. 31 to 34 show the operation device 300 on line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG.
counterclockwise) and the releasing member 346 and the rotary pawl member 347 are rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 31).
is rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 reaches the second state.
2 shows how the disk cam 344 reciprocates and rotates from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state in which the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the terminal position from the state shown in FIG.
In addition, in FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing the tilting device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves toward the disk cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be lifted with low resistance without being pulled by the tilting device 310, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disk cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 310 can be placed in the second state (disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state).
rotated posture). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the situation that the tilting device 310 takes a long time to reach the second state because the cam 344 is slow to rotate by a predetermined angle.

As shown in FIG. 33, from the state shown in FIG. 32, the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), and then the disc cam 344 is rotated by the same amount in the backward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32). Figure 3
2 clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of . As a result, it is possible to change how the tilting device 310 looks to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300 .

In addition, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting upward from the upper frame member 331 changes in accordance with the repeated vertical motion of the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light visible through the protective lens member 313 can be changed according to the operation of the tilting device 310. FIG. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313
41f (the left side of FIG. 33), the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-rear direction and up-down direction but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 33). can be done.

That is, according to this embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of the light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. As a result, the tilting device 310 attracts more attention.

The range of angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the up-down motion of the tilting device 310 includes the up-down motion shown in FIG.
Two types of up-and-down motions (tilting motions), namely the up-and-down motion shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to create two modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 .

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in the expectation of a big win), and the tilting device 310
It is possible to improve the player's attention to.

As shown in FIG. 33, the player can push the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and there is no load to lift the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being subjected to the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. As a result, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large load on the player, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. As shown in FIG. The rotating pawl member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347 .

Therefore, the player moves the tilting device 31 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down.
After pressing 0 (see FIG. 34), if the player releases the tilting device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 35 to 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
The operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by 47 will be described. By this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of vertical motions (tilting motions) of the tilting device 310, or to perform one of them continuously.

Figures 35 to 37 show the operating device 300 on line XXII-XXII of Figure 6(a).
is a cross-sectional view of. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (as shown in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
clockwise) and the releasing member 346 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). clockwise), and then the disc cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. , the disk cam 344 rotates forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) to open the protective cover device 3
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in an ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above on the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 346d. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346 to change the posture of the release member 346. The stop, rotary pawl member 347 is shown in FIG.
5 is maintained.

35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35) to release the engagement between the engaging rib 344c and the releasing member 346. Regulation of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35), thereby , the drive device 340 can be in a second initial state.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the vertical motion (tilting motion) from the second initial state within the range of the angle D2, as described above.

Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 can perform an action of keeping his hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press". be.

This is, for example, an action that occurs when the user forgets to release the hand that pushed the tilting device 310 too much to concentrate on the performance. Therefore, even if the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) for vertically moving (tilting motion) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2,
The posture of the tilting device 310 cannot be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) maintains the ON state (while the tilting device 310 tilts to the first state or lower), the disk cam 344 is not reversely rotated, and the protective cover device 350 is shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned ON, the rotation of the disk cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, so that the tilting device 310 does not move upward.
7 is caused by rotating drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37, the player's hand continues to be placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (normal/reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

It should be noted that when the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, it may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate and return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be quickly returned to the second initial state, and no unnecessary load is applied to the driving device 340, so that the motor life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing breakage of the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. Note that in FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The player's hand holding and fixing is shown in phantom lines, and in FIG. 39, illustration of the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grabs and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
5 is restricted, disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, the drive motor 342
and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be idly rotatable with respect to the transmission shaft 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, thereby the clutch portion 343b.
2, 343c2, and the movable clutch 343c moves away from the transmission gear 343b. As a result, the transmission gear 343b is disengaged from the movable clutch 343c, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. As a result, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from failing.

Note that when the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 goes through the first state by rotating the disk cam 344 once due to the structure of the operation device 300. FIG. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360°).
20 is not in the ON state (when the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while displaying, for example, a display on the third pattern display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select a case in which the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and only at that time, it is possible to notify the user to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 at an early stage.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disc cam 344, which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (with the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disc cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting that the drive device 340 is in the first state, it can be specified that the drive device 340 is in the first initial state. By resetting the initial phase, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are adjusted again. It can be performed.

As a result, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
This rotation control prevents deviation between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 . Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be properly operated to perform an effect.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c has a shape that idles with respect to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). In addition, in FIG. 40, the disk cam 3 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
44 is shown rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction), and FIG. 41 shows a state where the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CCW direction from the state shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 42, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG.
43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CCW direction, the tilting device 31
0 moves through the first state shown in FIG. 40 and moves toward the second state. On the other hand, Figure 4
3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engaging rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
This is because, when is rotated in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346, the fixation by the rotary pawl member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346 from below. member 3
A load in the direction of pushing up 47 is not generated. Therefore, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is never released.

Here, when viewing the operation of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view, FIGS. 38 to 40 and 42
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 4, both appear to be the same operation, and the movement after the first state is different from that shown in either FIG. 41 or FIG.

For example, the difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is determined by the drive motor 342
(See FIG. 39), but the difference in the drive sound due to the change in the number of revolutions of the drive motor 342 makes the player aware of the mode of control being performed, and the effect to be executed from now on. There is a risk that the player will grasp it and lose the player's interest. Also, the tilting device 3
10 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load on the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may decrease.

On the other hand, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG.
The only difference is the direction of rotation, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation due to the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). For this reason, for example, when the degree of expectation for the presentation changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, by confirming whether the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 rotates to raise the tilting device 310 or maintain the first state,
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the performance, the player can understand the following when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and the driving motor 342 moves toward the first state. It can be induced to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 .

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the tilting device 310 from being held by the player. It is possible to prevent the device 340 from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped, the drive motor 3
42 can be eliminated, and the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, regarding the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 44, from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340, the disc cam 3
44 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is held at an angle such that the overhanging portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outline of the tilting device 310 after rotating backward (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first projecting portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 are engaged with the releasing member 346. By reciprocatingly rotating the disc cam 344 while maintaining a positional relationship that does not pass through 346d, it is possible to reciprocate the tilting device 310 up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346. FIG.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 changes in the backward rolling direction (
44 clockwise), the tilting device 31 is rotated in the manner shown in FIG.
0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 does not engage with the rotating claw member 347, and when the player releases the tilting device 310
moves above the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues the vertical movement. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, the above-described first operation mode, the second operation mode, and the third operation mode shown in FIG. Manipulation of the device 300 can have non-traditional meanings. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first motion mode or the second motion mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. It is possible to know whether the robot was moving up and down in the third motion mode.

As a difference in production, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first action mode and the second action mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). case) is compared to the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (the case where the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released). If a difference is provided in that the degree of expectation for a big win is high, the player recognizes the degree of expectation as to whether or not a big win will occur not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since it is possible to obtain opportunities, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300 . Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the releasing member 346 is pushed up has been described. In addition, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 23
48 is constructed in such a manner that it slides. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

FIG. 45(a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5(b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the releasing member 2346. FIG.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, showing interlocking between the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. FIG. .

In FIG. 46(a), the rotary plate member 2347 is positioned against the release member 2346 by the second spring S.
46(b), the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 against the releasing member 2346. In FIG. Angular sub-states are shown. The state in which the releasing member 2346 is rotated by being brought into contact with the disk cam 344 is the state between the large angle state and the small angle state (projecting pin 3).
46b is arranged at the intermediate position of the guide slot 347b) (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
47), a releasing member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) disposed on the opposite side of the releasing member 2346 across the rotating plate member 2347 ), and a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arcuate trajectory centered on the rotation axis. In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to the structures having the same functions as in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), the slide claw member 2348 includes a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b that protrudes in a hook-like shape (to the left in FIG. 45), and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are stacked in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 47(a)). Mainly, a reinforcing portion 2348c formed in a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a and a projecting pin 2348d projecting cylindrically toward the releasing member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c. Prepare.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portions 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348
It is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 in a state of being internally fitted to 347f.

The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a bottom plate portion 2311 of a tilting device 2310, which will be described later.
It is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force that attracts a.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotary plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is wider than the curved portion 2348a. , which reinforce the slide claw member 2348 .

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted through the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is composed of a metal rod that is inserted through and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. Release member 234
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347 so that the projecting pin 2348d moves into the function slot 23
Pushed by the side surface of 46e, the slide claw member 2348 slides.

The rotating plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, an insertion hole 347c,
In addition to the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding motion of the slide claw member 2348, and a long support hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted are provided.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347. Side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are arranged such that the rotating plate member 2347 moves forward (see FIG. 3). 46 counterclockwise), the shank 314 (see FIG. 47)
It is formed from a curved shape along an arc centered at .

Like the rail portion 2347f, the support long hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). A projecting pin 2348 is inserted into the support slot 2347g.
d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the long support hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling. can.

The releasing member 2346 includes a functional elongated hole 2346e that is elongated in the thickness direction, in addition to the pivot hole 346a, the projecting pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engaging portion 346d. .

The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d of the slide pawl member 2348, and has a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. a hole portion 2346e1, a second elongated hole portion 2346e2 extending from one end of the first elongated hole portion 2346e in an inclined direction toward the opposite direction of the pivot hole 346a,
Mainly provide

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes state between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide pawl member 2348 is moved to the rail portion 234 .
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the projecting pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the releasing member 2346, and the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is the same as the movement of the projecting pin 2348d. reflected in speed.

That is, if the releasing member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide pawl member 2348 slides quickly.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in the linear direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in this embodiment, the slide pawl member 2 is moved by rotating the release member 2346 .
Even if the slide claw member 347 slides, the slide claw member 2347 is not slid because the slide claw member 2347 is pulled in the large angle state. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310 .

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the attitude of the tilting device 2310 in chronological order, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). 47, the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is the release member 234.
48, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 49, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG.
A state restored by the biasing force of 2 is illustrated.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 23
Since the attraction between the magnet portion 2311 a 1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348 b is released due to the change in posture of 10, the tilting device 2310 does not apply a large load to the slide claw member 2348 .

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide pawl member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the operation. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that if the releasing member 2346 operates quickly, the tilting device 2310 also operates quickly.

Therefore, by causing the slide claw member 2348 to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the tilting device 2310 is released from the upward movement restriction by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves upward can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disk cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the number of operation modes increases, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means for foreseeing by associating the operation modes with the degree of expectation of the big win. Attention can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348 as shown in FIG.
8b and the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310
Therefore, by securing a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to when the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 .

That is, normally, when the player puts his/her hand on the tilting device 2310 and the regulation by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising. Also (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then FIG.
In the state shown in , the tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner that lifts the player's hand.

As a result, when the tilting device 2310 is lifted, it is possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in load.

For example, by associating the difference in load with the degree of expectation of a big win, it becomes easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of foreseeing. can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. is configured in such a manner that detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed by the player, or pushed by the player. be. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311, and the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the axis and arranged at the center position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extended length is shortened compared to the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
1(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51(b), the tilting device 331
A state in which 0 is being pressed is illustrated. Moreover, FIG.51(a) and FIG.51(b)
3, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines. While being illustrated, the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is in contact with the left detection sensor 324L.
while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).
.

By detecting changes in the states of these detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing, it is possible to detect the state in the middle of pushing. , or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
In 2(a), the tilting device 3310 is shown pushed to the end of the push, and FIG.
At 2(b), the tilting device 3310 is shown from the end of the push to the first state. 51(a) and 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 52(a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 33
11gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in FIG. 52(b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state arranged at the end of the push, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L while the left detection sensor 324L is inserted. , the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle state between the first state and the state pushed to the end of pushing. The sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state has changed from the state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 so that the tilting device 3
310, rather than having the voice coil motor 352 collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves downward, the voice coil motor 352 tilts while the tilting device 3310 moves upward. Collision with the device 3310 can provide a load that effectively raises the tilting device 3310 .

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of the detection sensors 324L and 324R. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when it is not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after the tilting device 3310 is pushed from the first state.
The rising speed of 310 slows down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 3310, the rising motion of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is more stable than when the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. The tilting device 3310 can improve the speed of ascending.
It is possible to comfortably perform the continuous hit operation.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. FIG. In the first embodiment, the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or pushed by the player. 3 detects the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 while it is changing from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k projecting in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding projecting portion 311j of the case body 4311. As shown in FIG.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through detection grooves (slits) of an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This portion is for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the depression operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In addition, in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
0 is the second state, and in FIG. 54(b), the tilting device 4310 is shifted from the state shown in FIG.
is pushed and the front detection piece 4311k passes the lower detection sensor 4321e downward. 54(a) and 54(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines for easy understanding. Detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 352 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side portion of the bottom plate portion 4321. As shown in FIGS. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler-type sensors, and are arranged in such a manner that the detection groove is oriented in a direction that allows the front detection piece 4311k to pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged on an arc orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310 at intervals of 20°.

When the state shown in FIG. 54(a) changes to the state shown in FIG.
321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in order. By detecting the timing interval of the passage, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 is large or small, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the length of the push is long (because the acceleration period is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, the tilting device 4310 must be made strong as a safety measure for when the player pushes with all his might, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A challenge arises.

It is also possible to incorporate an elastic spring that exerts a biasing force on the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the push end, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak strength or a player who decides to perform the pressing operation softly, the increased reaction force in the vicinity of the pressing position becomes a burden on the pressing operation, and the player is likely to feel fatigued. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 cannot be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the interval between the timings of switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a strong reaction force can be applied to the tilting device 4310 even when it is not necessary. can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively, is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned on. While it is not driven, if the timing interval described above is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

As a result, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily moved even with a weak force. Push operation is possible.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is fast, the tilting device 4310
As a reaction force against this, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
11j is pushed out below the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is preliminarily pushed out to the side close to the tilting device 4310. be.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is tilted while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.
and the voice coil motor 352, the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. In addition, Fig. 5
5(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the push end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state where the tilting device 4310 has reached the push end.

In addition, in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), for ease of understanding, the lower frame member 4
320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 are shown in solid lines.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the tilting device 4310 protrudes convexly in the middle of reaching the end of pushing from the first state. The setting portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are brought into contact with each other.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 becomes the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so that the voice coil motor 352 is retracted. It is possible to consume the force of the pushing operation to move to. Therefore, while the tilting device 4310 continues to move, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can apply a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure that applies a load by friction like a disc brake, but a structure that applies a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55(a), the overhang projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact with each other, so the state shown in FIG. By gradually increasing the current supplied to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state, the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the tilting device 4310 decelerates from the first state to the end of pushing while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging projecting portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 come into contact with each other. You can improve the effect.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it becomes unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 .

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55(b), the voice coil motor 352 vibrates (moves in the extension direction and in the contraction direction repeatedly). This will
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end of the pushing operation, an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of vibrating the tilting device 4310 arranged at the pushing end position to perform a vibration effect.

Next, an operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68. FIG.

In the first embodiment, by vibrating the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 31
Although the case where vibration is transmitted to the player who presses 0 has been described, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment includes a lower frame member 5320 and a weight member 5 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
412 is provided with a drive motor 5411, and based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411, vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the lower frame member 5320. FIG. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is the lower frame member 5320, and the driving device 340
is a driving device 5340, and the protective cover member 350 to the voice coil motor 35
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

A vibrating device 5400 having a drive motor 5411 is arranged on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is arranged on the drive device 5340. As shown in FIG. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5 that rotates a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 made of a flexible material and accommodating a transmission device 5410 and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, a bottomed dish shape with an open upper surface, a weight member 5412 and a flexible member 5420. The lower frame member 53
and a housing member 5430 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of 20 .

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotationally driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a portion corresponding to the pivot of the fan pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. and are mainly provided.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of left and right fixed portions 5411a formed from a metal material in a flange shape on the side surface on which the shaft protrudes.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported with respect to the rotating shaft of the driving motor 5411 . Therefore, when the driving motor 5411 rotates, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 changes, and the driving motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a main body portion 5421 in the shape of a cylindrical container in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and has a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted. A pair of rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding in the left and right direction and downward in the radial direction of the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 are connected to each other. Posture maintaining portion 5423 in which fixing portion 5411a is embedded
and a pair of projecting leg portions 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the body portion 5421 in the form of a pair of columns.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the length of the drive motor 5411 in the axial direction, and has a depth of a container shape. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the body portion 5421, the shaft side end face of the drive motor 5411 and the opening side end face of the body portion 5421 are formed on the same plane. Also, in this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423 .

The rib-shaped leg portions 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the rib-shaped leg portions 5422 on the left and right sides are formed on the left and right sides by the amount of the posture maintaining portions 5423 arranged on the left and right sides. Deformation resistance is greater than that of the rib-like leg portion 5422 on the lower side.

Since the projecting leg portion 5424 is projectingly provided in a columnar shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilting of the tilting device 310, the tilting angle of the tilting device 310 corresponds to the tilting angle of the flexible member 54.
The resolution of the 20 degrees of deformation can be made finer.

The accommodating member 5430 includes a first accommodating portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are accommodated, and a weight member 5 adjacent to the first accommodating portion 5431 in the assembled state.
412 are accommodated in the second accommodation portion 5432, and the first accommodation portion 5431 and the second accommodation portion 5
A groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface of the connection surface of 432 is mainly provided.

The depth of the first receiving portion 5431 is increased by the flexible member 54 until the lower rib leg 5422 bottoms out.
20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the protruding leg portion 5424 protrudes from the upper surface.

The depth of the second housing portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 and the flexible member. The depth is such that it interferes with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the weight member 5420 is deformed (in an assembly load state).

The recessed groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth extending slightly below the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembly load state. be.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59(a), and FIG. )teeth,
FIG. 59(a) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). In addition, in FIG.59(a), the part corresponding to the vibration apparatus 5400 is partially cross-sectionally viewed. again,
In FIG. 59(a), the first area S51, which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and the first region S51, which is the region where the tilting device 310 is pushed three times from the first state, is pushed. An end region S52, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when placed in the end position, is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 59(a), a projecting leg portion 5424 is projected in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the circular arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
(See FIG. 56), the maximum amount of deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be ensured with respect to the angle change.

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodating portion 5432 in the assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the projecting leg portion 5424 .

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the projecting legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line of the lower frame member 5320 when viewed in the extension direction. Therefore, since the projecting leg portion 5424 can be evenly pushed in on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting to the left or right (inclining to the left or right in the plane of FIG. 59(b)) when pushed. The protruding leg portion 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture shown in FIG. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a projecting leg portion 5424.
A pair of through-holes 5321d are provided so that they can be inserted. Since the through-hole 5321d has a lateral width slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting leg portion 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the bottom surface of the tilting device 310 is projected. When pressed against the leg portion 5424, the lateral deformation of the projecting leg portion 5424 can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the main body portion 5421 along with the protruding leg portion 5424 is
can be made easier to translate downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 along line LXa-LXa of FIG. 59(a). In addition, FIG. 60(a) illustrates the assembly load release state, and FIG.
In 0(b), the assembly load state after the projecting leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first accommodation portion 5431 in the state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal end region S52 (see FIG. 59(a)) is illustrated. Note that the outlines of the second accommodating portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60(a) and 60(b), the vibration device 540
0 is applied to the assembly load state, the projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5
422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. 310 can mitigate the impact when it collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57).
Moreover, since the load is due to the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed down. In this case, even if the player repeatedly hits the tilting device 310, the rising motion of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the repeated hitting operation cannot be comfortably performed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is effectively used, so that the tilting device 310 is more stable than when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the tilting device 310 can be comfortably hit repeatedly.

As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load-released state, vibration due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 does not occur.

In addition, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the slight vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420,
Propagation to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411 .

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembly load state, the body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is constructed in a mode in which vertical displacement is permitted by deformation of the upper projecting leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 .

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 changes to a state of being more vertically compressed, and the rib-like leg portion 5422 hardens slightly. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Also, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the rib-like leg portion 54 on the lower side
22 extend along the axial direction of the cylinder of the body portion 5421 and are arranged in a left and right pair at uniform intervals from the center axis to the left and right. The radially outer end portion of 5422 is deformed in such a manner that it moves left and right outward (the side with the smaller resistance at the connection position between main body portion 5421 and rib-like leg portion 5422) (see FIG. 60(b)).
In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body portion 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, the lateral load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second housing portion 5432 is
22 can be partially absorbed. As a result, it is possible to suppress displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction.

Figures 61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of Figure 59(a).

FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b) show the assembly load state, FIG. 61(a) shows the state where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis, and FIG. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged below the rotation axis is illustrated. Fig. 6
In 1(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the end region S52
A state of the vibrating device 5400 in a state of occupying is illustrated.

The operation of transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is positioned upward in the assembly load state, the driving motor 5411 rotates to a position where the distance from the lower base of the second housing portion 5432 is the distance Q1. Axes are placed. In this embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

In other words, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 moves toward the second accommodation portion 543 .
2 abuts (rubs). Therefore, the vibration caused by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes compared to the state in which the assembly load is released, and a different kind of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

Due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432, the weight member 5412
upward (upward in FIG. 61(b)). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 move toward and away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). ) can be easily directed. This repulsive force causes the drive motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5 to move.
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 pushing back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the moving direction of the tilting device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is applied to the flexible member 542.
The force that pushes back the tilting device 310 is adjusted by combining the force generated as the elastic recovery force of 0 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, which are generated separately. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts contacting the projecting leg portion 5424, the end region S52 (FIG. 59)
(a)), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force pushing back the tilting device 310, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the weight member 5412
and the second receiving portion 5432 are added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310 . As a result, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the end region S52, so that the tilting device 310 can be easily operated and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced. This adjustment can be performed while the drive motor 5411 is kept rotating. Therefore, complicated control can be made unnecessary.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57). ) is higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km/h), and the placement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

For example, if the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is determined to be greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 may be used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
is desired to increase the load on the tilting device 310 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is moved in advance so as to assume the downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the lowering motion of the drive motor 5411 is positioned so that the rotary shaft of the drive motor 5411
2 can be raised to a position that is raised by a radius Ra from the lower end of the inner wall of 2. As a result, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61(a)) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the driving motor 5411 can be increased when the projecting leg 5424 is pushed down by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although not described in this embodiment, the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 generates the force to push back the tilting device 310 by keeping the driving motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61(a)). It is also possible to prevent the force due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 from being generated.

Here, contact between the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320 , not between the tilting device 310 . Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm or a part of the side of the hand placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum for pushing can be moved. Vibration can be transmitted to the player through the device. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61(a) and 61(b), the player tilts the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56).
is pushed in, and the weight member 5
412 and the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed. Vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where vibration is generated from the body.

That is, when the player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the hand is released immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse pushing state), vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed. In this case, there is a possibility that vibration cannot be generated (vibration is not started in time) before the player releases his/her hand, and the player may not be able to experience the effects of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are completed. As a result, the player can experience the effect of the vibration.

In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodating portion 5431 . Therefore, the driving motor 5411
is driven, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

Therefore, by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed, a state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized.

Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 . Others are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, so the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, an elongated concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344, which are composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Note that the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 534R
4L is composed of a symmetrical shape, so only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of clamping arm portions A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft rod 5343 are arranged at the connecting portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. is.

That is, the right disc cam 5344R is separated from the disc portion by the circular rib 344 at its center position.
A support cylinder P1 that extends in a cylindrical shape toward the side where b is disposed, and an axially symmetric long hole shape extending along the axial direction of the support cylinder P1 to a position about half the extension distance. A long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion and an axial end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 extend toward the disc portion side along the axial direction. and a pair of holding arms A1.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343 . The support cylinder portion P1 includes a deformed portion P1a that is not recessed in the long hole recess C1 and remains in the same axial arrangement as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformed portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged to sandwich the elongated concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disc cam 5344R is axially deformed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). configured as a part to

The long hole recess C1 is formed with a width dimension slightly longer than the width dimension of the clamping arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arms A1 are arranged in a direction (
longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed as a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed as an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. As a result, the cylindrical member 5
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The holding arm portion A1 is formed of a pair of arm portions, from the side facing the other arm,
It has an engagement projection A1a projecting in a direction approaching the arm of the other party. Engagement protrusion A1a
engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

The shape of the tip of the engagement projection A1a corresponds to the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It consists of a shape that matches the arc shape of 4. As a result, the radial overlapping length (Fig. 65 (b) length in the left-right direction) can be ensured to be long.

The engaging convex portion A1a has a side surface of the right disc cam 5344R on the side closer to the connecting pin 344d in the axial direction, and a recessed surface portion C2 (a long hole recessed portion) recessed along the shaft near the shaft. It is arranged at a position that is the plane position with the side surface on the opening side of C1.

As a result, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement projection A1a can be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65(b)). reference). Therefore, on the outside of the recessed surface portion C2 (the upper side in FIG. 63(b)), compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted in the cylindrical member 5343a, the length of the cylindrical member 5343a protruding from the recessed surface portion C2 is
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, there is no need to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (a space required for sliding the e-ring in contact with the surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the width of the recess (the width in the radial direction) of the recessed surface portion C2.
Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft rod 5343
is a front exploded perspective view of the. A difference between the transmission shaft rod 5343 and the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof, and a fitting groove 5343a3 from the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view.
A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 across the , and a disc cam 534 which is a groove into which the e-ring is fitted and which is formed by the e-ring.
4 and the e-ring fitted in the fitting groove 5343a3. An engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove with which the portion A1a engages, is mainly provided. The fitting grooves 5343a3 are arranged laterally outside the pair of plates in which the pivot holes 341b are formed in the assembled state.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted through the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion in which the movable clutch 343c slides under the biasing force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

By fitting the e-ring into the fitting groove 5343a3 from behind, a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a whose diameter is partially increased is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter uniform, the columnar member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62) by a predetermined amount, and then the e-ring is fitted, thereby adjusting the axial direction of the columnar member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b with the e-ring. In addition, the e-ring can prevent the disk cam 5344 from axially dislocating.

With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disc cam 5344
can be assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch. That is, when the disk cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is positioned on the side of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disk cam 5344 on which the engagement protrusion A1a is arranged. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
343a4 is inserted to the position where the engaging protrusion A1a is fitted. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the engaging protrusions A1a are inserted to the position where the engaging protrusions A1a are fitted, the tip of the columnar member 5343a enters between the engaging protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engaging protrusions A1a are pushed apart from each other. The clamping arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in a manner. After that, when the tip of the columnar member 5343a passes through the engagement protrusion A1a, the engagement protrusion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Then, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 functions not only for one-touch assembly, but also as a destruction prevention structure in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a view of the right disc cam 53 along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a).
44R, and FIG. 65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG.
It is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R along line XVIb-LXVIb.

FIG. 66 shows the right disc cam 5344R after being deformed when the player gives an overload to the unloaded right disc cam 5344R shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in this embodiment, the columnar member 5343a is supported by the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position spaced apart from the disc portion of the right disc cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, only the engaging protrusion A1a engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when the columnar member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded, the columnar member 5343a can be tilted about the extended distal end portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in FIG. 65(b), since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is reduced. on the other hand,
As shown in FIG. 65(c), in the direction in which the supporting cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right circular disc cam 5344R are in contact with each other along the axial direction of the right circular disc cam 5344R, the resistance of the cylindrical member 5343a to axial tilt displacement is increased.

Therefore, when the player forcibly holds down (pulls up) the tilting device 310 and an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R (displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). is applied), the deformation direction of the right disk cam 5344R with respect to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

In other words, the right disk cam 5344R deforms in the direction of less resistance, so that FIG.
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66(b), when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded,
The disk portion is axially tilted and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R compared to the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In FIG. 67(b), illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the releasing member 346 are illustrated. Further, in FIG. 67(a), for ease of understanding, the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R in a state in which it is perpendicularly inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is illustrated by a solid line. The outline of the folded state is illustrated by imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) shows the second state of the tilting device 310, the player's hand holding the tilting device 310, and an enlarged state of the vicinity of the connecting pin 344d. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disk cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the axial tilting deformation described above, so that the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after its axial tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating and the outer circumference of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by the dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are displaced,
In order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation.

Since the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment causes the right disk cam 534
Since the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the driving motor 342 (
62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding the tilting device 310 fixedly. In this case, the load applied to arm member 345 connecting disk cam 5344 and tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but the second spring The elastic force of SP2 acts on disc cam 5344 via release member 346 . In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is blocked by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates forward (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts against it. disc cam 5344 through release member 346 and rotating pawl member 347
acts on In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disk cam 5344 are in contact with each other and the releasing member 346 moves along the direction of movement of the disk cam 5344, regardless of the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344, the first
Among the elastic forces of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disc cam 5344
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the direction of rotation of can be increased.
As a result, the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 can be increased,
Since the consumption amount of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
5 can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation of the disk cam 5344 .

In this embodiment, the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a shape symmetrical with respect to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). ), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in the same manner regardless of the direction of rotation of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction in which the connecting pin 344d is displaced from the arm member 345). It can be axially deformed by resistance.

FIG. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 68(b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). 5300 is a partial rear view of device 5300. FIG. In addition, in FIG.68(b), illustration of the protective cover apparatus 350 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, in FIG. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when it is vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown by solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in the state of being tilted due to overload is shown by imaginary lines.

FIG. 68(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and is tilted downward by an angle D2. A player's hand is shown holding a

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when the player grips the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is in motion, the right disc cam 5344 is held regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not.
The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R by the tilt of the R axis, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described for the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIGS. 67(b) and 68(b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, causing an overload. When,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting motion in the axial direction, it is possible to quickly notice the occurrence of overload. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
2 is driven during one rotation of the right disc cam 344R, the detection hole 3 of the right disc cam 344R is detected.
44eR passes the right detection sensor 353R, but if the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R will not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs before the occurrence of overload is detected.
Since it takes a period of time to rotate 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem that overload detection is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the overload occurs. Occurrences can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c, the engagement rib 34
The method by the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is exemplified (illustrated by imaginary lines in FIG. 66(a))
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input portion, and is arranged in pairs at positions where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arm portions A1 and the engagement rib 344c intersect. and the input portion protrudes toward the support cylinder portion P1. In the no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65(b)), and in the overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder portion P1 are formed in a contact relationship (see FIG. 65(b)). 66(b)). Accordingly, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, an operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 344c and 344c are composed of separate members and configured to be relatively rotatable with each other. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. First, differences in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2 and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. is. Although the configuration of the right disc cam 6344R is also different from that of the first embodiment, the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image of the left disc cam 6344L. , and the description of the right disc cam 6344R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disc cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L includes a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and a connecting pin 344d, as in the first embodiment.
and a disc member 6344L1 provided with a detection hole 344eL and pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported with the disc member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disc member 6344L1.

The disc member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment arranged at the center of the disc portion, and is spaced radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided protruding along.

The ring member 6344L2 has a ring-shaped body 6344g having the same outer diameter as the engaging rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. and receiving gear teeth 6344i formed on and disposed radially outwardly at the thickened portion thereof.

Since the inner diameter of the ring main body 6344g is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, in the assembled state, the ring main body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby forming the central shaft portion 344a. A ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable around .

It should be noted that the end surface of the annular main body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
44f. As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the disc member 634
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case of contact with 4L1. Therefore, relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear tooth 6344i meshes with the speed reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348 . Therefore, the rotation of the second transmission device 6348 causes the ring member 6344L2 to rotate. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of revolutions of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to that of the disk member 6344L1.
(While the ring member 6344L2 rotates three times, the disc member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set in a mode in which 44L1 rotates once).

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343. The auxiliary column member 6348 is arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear fixed to its auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and the ring member 63
and a deceleration transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the tilting device 310 is lifted in a plurality of ways after the tilting device 310 is unlocked from the rotating claw member 347 in the first state.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 6300 along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6(a). 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 shows a posture in which the ring member 6344R2 has made one rotation in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. , after rotating more than one rotation, the state in which the disk member 6344R1 rotates in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) by 1/3 rotation. is illustrated. Moreover, in FIG. 73, FIG.
2, the ring member 6344L2 rotates in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) by a predetermined angle, and the tilting device 310 moves upward.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 immediately (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) moves up, the reaching position is the second state. It was limited to the position to be arranged (see FIG. 34).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the disc member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other. can change the relative relationship of the tilting device 31
The types of 0 arrival positions can be increased.

That is, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this manner, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) is released from the state shown in FIG. without waiting for 344 rotation)
, and the position reached can be varied.

As a result, for example, when the tilting device 310 is configured to change the degree of expectation for the performance depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 can be increased. can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower elevation position.

However, by keeping the ascending reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the degree of expectation reaches its maximum, the degree of expectation It is possible to associate the magnitude of the amount of displacement with which the player pushes and operates the tilting device 310, thereby making it easy for the player to understand the difference in expectations due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.例文帳に追加

In this case, it is possible to motivate the player to check to what position the tilting device 310 rises, so that the player does not have to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. can be directed to Therefore, the tilting device 3
A game method in which the tilting device 310 is operated chaotically can be suppressed regardless of the 10 presentation modes.

Next, an operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engaging rib 344c are integrally formed. 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are arranged on separate members, and these separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. In addition, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same parts as those of the above-described embodiments,
The explanation is omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of a disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is the LX of FIG. 74(a)
FIG. 75(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R along line XVa-LXXVa;
74(a) is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a); FIG. Since the right disk cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that is a mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disc cam 7344R has a disc member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
44R2, and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 that is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and that fits into the equally divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3 and .

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at its center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a flange-like portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup.
and the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member configured with a shape in which the portion between the retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

The disk member 7344R supports the surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in the assembled state, and the first circular recessed portion 7 is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recessed portion 7420 which is a circular recessed portion smaller in diameter and axially deeper than the first circular recessed portion 7410, a first projecting portion 344c1, and a first retracting portion 344c2. and an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 formed in the radial direction between them, and in the vicinity of the insertion hole 7430, radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (the outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1). and a fixing protrusion 7440 that is protrudingly provided.

The insertion hole 7430 extends from an intermediate position between the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2.
A first elongated hole 7431, which is a rectangular elongated hole portion elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a displaced position, and the end of the first elongated hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1. A second long hole 74, which is a rectangular long hole portion extending along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1
32 and the second long hole 74 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
A return portion 7433 configured to protrude toward the 32 side is mainly provided.

The dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (transverse direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is direction(
short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 (lower end portion in FIG. 75(b)) as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 moves toward the second elongated hole 743 .
2 are formed to be movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protrusion height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, referring to FIG. 76, the ring member 7344R2 will be described. Figure 76(a)
is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(b) is a ring member 7344R2
76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in Figures 76(a) to 76(c), the ring member 7344R2
A ring-shaped plate portion 7510 in which 44d is protruded, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
and a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center thereof.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the recess depth of the first circular recessed portion 7410 , and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recessed portion 7410 . be. As a result, in the assembled state, the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be aligned with each other while preventing excessive resistance to relative rotation.

The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 to a length that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)). is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420 . As a result, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be moved in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75(a)) while preventing the relative rotation resistance between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick portion 7520 includes a deformed through-hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and recesses radially outward in the deformed through-hole 7521 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal intervals in this embodiment). It mainly includes an equally divided concave portion 7522 provided.

The deformed through-hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the later-described engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1. Configured.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77(b) is a front view of FIG.
) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb.

As shown in FIGS. 77(a) and 77(b), the engaging member 7344R3, in the assembled state (see FIG. 74(b)), is radially outward of the first projecting portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2. The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 arranged on the side and the back side end portion of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 (FIG. 77 (
b) The extension part 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end) and the engagement extending from the extension tip of the extension part 7620 along the front-rear direction (left-right direction in FIG. 77(b)) It mainly includes a portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side of the arcuate plate portion 7610 facing the engaging portion 7630 .

The arcuate plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing projection 7611, which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the distal end portion of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

The extension part 7620 is a part inserted through the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state,
When pushed inward in the radial direction against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension end has an extension length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction that is slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75(a)).

As will be described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and is displaced, and a function that positions the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 78(a)
78(b) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(b) is an arrow LXX in FIG. 78(a).
78(c) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(d) is an arrow LXXVIII in FIG. 78(c).
FIG. 78(e) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in direction d, and FIG.
78(f) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78(e).

78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f), a ring member 7344R2 and an engaging member 7344R2 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. To facilitate understanding, FIG. 78(b),
In FIGS. 78(d) and 78(f), illustration of the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted.

As a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R, first, the engaging member 734 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431.
Insert the engaging portion 7630 of 4R3 (see FIGS. 78(a) and 78(b)). As described above, the widthwise dimension of the second long hole 7432 is made shorter than the widthwise dimension of the engaging portion 7630, thereby preventing the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second long hole 7432. can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous assembly can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432, in the depth direction of FIG. 78(d), the engaging portion 7
The engagement member 7344R3 is slid to the position where the positions of 630 and the fixing projection 7440 are aligned.

At this position after the movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engaging member 7344R3 suppresses positional displacement of the disk member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 78(d)) and engages. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted from moving in the circumferential direction by the return portion 7433 . This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outside the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the vertical direction is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved to the second position by elastic recovery force. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(d)).

When the tip of the return portion 7433 is in contact with the extension portion 7620 of the engaging member 7344R3 in the state of entering the second long hole 7432, the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large). direction) (see FIG. 78(d)), movement of the extended portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engaging member 73
Since the movement of 44R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the engaging member 7344R3 from being displaced during operation.

Once the engaging member 7344R3 is held on the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
4R3 is pushed radially inward of the disc member 7344R1, and the disc member 734
A ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move along the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

Through the steps described above, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. note that,
The right disc cam 7344L has a symmetrical shape that mirrors the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates backward will be described. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347
and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotary pawl member 7347 in this embodiment differs from that in the first embodiment in the length of the guide elongated hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes through.

The releasing member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is obliquely shaved in order to minimize interference with the engaging rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 show how the disk cam 7344 rotates backward (clockwise direction in Fig. 79(a)). are shown in chronological order.

In FIG. 79(a), the releasing member 7346 is engaged with the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R.
79(b) shows a state where the right disk cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a), and FIG.
(a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has been pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end of the push, and in M6-2(b), the disk member 73 is pushed from the state shown in FIG.
81, the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the backward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG.
The state after moving away from 346 is illustrated. 79(a), 79(b), and 80
80(a) and 80(b) show a state (small angle state) in which the releasing member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which the releasing member 7346 can relatively rotate with respect to the rotating claw member 7347. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start contacting each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than that of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of protruding outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79(b), the releasing member 734 is provided on the outermost side surface of the engaging member 7344R3.
6 are in contact with each other, the releasing member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In this embodiment, the release member 7346 rotates forward, and the rotation pawl member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state. The inner peripheral surface and the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c and the first retracting portion 3
The disk cam 7344 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 while the engaging member 7344R3 is in contact with 44c2 (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the release member 7346 rotates toward the small angle state due to the rotation of the disk cam 7344, and when the release member 7346 becomes unable to rotate further (small angle state), the release member From 7346 , a load is applied to the engaging member 7344 R3 to push the engaging member 7344 R3 radially inward of the disk cam 7344 .

As shown in FIG. 79(b), in a state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the backward rotation cannot be continued. , the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed state, the engaging portion 7630 is arranged radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through-hole 7521 .

Therefore, since the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, as shown in FIG.
Even if 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its posture.

Due to this deviation in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 shifts from the originally arranged one equally divided recessed portion 75.
22 to another equally divided concave portion 7522, the phases of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are relatively rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R rotates further, the engaging member 73
Since the contact between 44R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, and the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally divided recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, the equally divided concave portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

79(a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engaging rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged in the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided into recessed portions 7522. can be relatively displaced by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the recessed portions.

Referring to FIG. 82, when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, engaging member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described. Figure 82(a), Figure 82(b), Figure 83(a) and Figure 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 7300 taken along line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 82, the releasing member 7346, the rotary pawl member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are mainly illustrated, and the illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)) in chronological order. In FIG. 82(a), the release member 734
6 and the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R are shown in FIG. FIG. 83(a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated forward from the state shown in FIG. 82(b), and FIG. The state after separation from the engaging member 7344R is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 82(a) to 83(b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, the release member 7346 and the rotary pawl member 7347 rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise rotation in FIG. 82(a)). direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 can only be loaded in the forward rolling direction.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 does not contact the releasing member 7346 until it separates from the releasing member 7346.
R3 maintains a state of projecting radially outward. Therefore, when rotating the disk cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, it is possible to prevent the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 from rotating relative to each other.

By switching the rotation direction of the disc cam 7344 from these configurations, the disc member 7
It is possible to switch whether 344R1 and ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the direction of rotation in which relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width, as in the first embodiment. Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81) that causes relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the direction of rotation of the disc member 7344R1 that relatively rotates the disc member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is the direction opposite to the direction of releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction in which the fixation is not released). Since they match, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
) (the attitude is kept constant), the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated.

As a result, the state in which the player does not pay attention (the state in which the tilting device 310 stops) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative posture between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a place invisible to the player.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, it will be described that, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of manipulation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG.
Ring member 7344R2 is shown fixed to disc member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that allows displacement (without rotating
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 has rotated relative to the disc member 7344R1 by one equally divided concave portion 7522 through the process described in FIG.
In both cases, a state in which the second protruding portion 344c3 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotation claw member 347 is removed from the first state.
By releasing the fixation by , it is possible to change the movement range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2).

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Moves until it is sunk below the 2nd state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state.
The position that 10 reaches immediately (without rotation of disk cam 7344) by the upward motion can be varied. As a result, it is possible to increase the types of presentations by the operation of the tilting device 310, and to improve the attention of the operation device 7300 as a presentation device.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179. FIG.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment has a covering cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the front side of the paper surface is the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper surface is the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Furthermore, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the pachinko machine 8010.
The up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction are shown, respectively. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description referring to the drawings before 6.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. Inner frame 1
89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployed) opened with respect to 2, FIG.
90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (developed), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko machine with the front frame 14 removed. 8010 is a front view of machine 8010. FIG. Note that, in FIG. 90, the reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for the sake of convenience.

The outer frame 11 is formed in the shape of a frame whose upper and lower sides are made of wooden plates and whose left and right sides are made of aluminum plates and whose four sides are fixed. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11. It is good also as a structure with which the member which has is equipped with the game hall.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. In a front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side. (opening/closing front end side) is rotatable forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, with the left side as the base end of rotation (opening/closing base end) and the right side as viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as the moving tip side (opening/closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at the tip of rotation thereof, and has a function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. , the front frame 14 has a function of locking the inner frame 12 so that the front frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in FIG. By doing so, they are canceled respectively.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 . As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 are provided on the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14. The front door mounting brackets 57 and 58 (the bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion and the bracket 58 is a shaft) are provided as shown in FIG. The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the metal plate having a hole with the inner frame 12 .

Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the tip to the back side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) provided with a fitting size. In addition, the front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped columnar shape projecting upward from the hinge 19 on the lower side of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which columns with different diameters are connected vertically, the diameter of the upper column It is axially supported by being externally fitted on a support pin 19a having a shape with a small diameter.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12 . The front frame 14 includes a body frame 14a formed of a metal plate in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. Various members (electrical decoration parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front side and the back side of the body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing the units (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c having an opening smaller than that of the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86). This window part 1
4c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 is covered by the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached. Therefore, game board 1
3 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89).

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window portion 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. and have. The fixed frame is a transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to a fixed frame, whereby the glass unit 16 is formed into an integrated multi-layered glass.

Although the glass unit 16 is made of transparent glass 16a and 16b and is transparent and colorless, it is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin and transparent and colorless. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, it may be formed in a colored transparent form instead of a colorless transparent form.

Around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, as shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of decorative portions 8029 to 8033 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. These illumination parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting and blinking are performed according to changes in the game state such as when a big hit is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached. In addition, the illumination portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls to be paid out and a light emitting means that lights up during prize ball payout are built in.

In addition, speaker covers 27 (thin plate members made of punching metal) are provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c to cover the speaker assemblies 450 that output sound effects according to the game state. . Below the window 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper tray 17 and a lower tray 50 are arranged so as to protrude forward and are vertically arranged side by side.

The upper tray 17 has the function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball shooting unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. Also, the lower plate 50
has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17 . A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower tray 50 is formed in the rear side surface of the lower tray 50 .

It should be noted that there is no need to separate the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 and provide a plurality of portions for storing game balls, and the lower tray 50 is eliminated and only the upper tray 17 is provided, and only one storage section is provided. Also good.

An operation device 300 manually operated by the players is provided on the front side of the upper tray 17 (game ball storage area). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the player's operation is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another location such as the periphery of the lower tray 50 in addition to the upper tray 17.
It may be provided at a plurality of locations, and may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured to enable information input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

A passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 as shown in FIG. The passage forming unit 140 is molded of synthetic resin, and includes a front door side upper tray passage portion 141 leading to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 leading to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( See FIG. 92).

A put-out ball receptacle 143 that protrudes rearward and is open upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14). A passage entrance of the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 are formed by partitioning the passage 143 to the left and right by a partition wall 144 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a into the lower tray 50 as foul balls.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 that opens upward. A foul ball received in the foul ball receiving portion 146 is discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). It should be noted that the foul ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50 so that the foul ball is discharged to the upper plate 17 .

The foul ball passage portion 145 merges with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which an unfired ball flowing down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 is guided by the player's ball removal operation. is formed as

On the rear side of the front frame 14, multi-function cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to the left and right corners of the upper portion, are attached to protrude toward the rear side. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring connector for conducting electricity to the electrical decoration part 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, an internal substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is arranged, and the electronic board and the connector are covered with the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 .

In the portion covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 of the front frame 14, there are a wiring groove 14h communicating toward the left and right electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032, and an electric decoration part 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031, 8031 and 8031, An electronic board 14i is formed (see FIG. 103) to which the wiring drawn out from the 8032 is connected, and the terminal of each wiring is pulled out rearward through the wiring through groove 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the rear side. be

Therefore, when the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is supplied to the illumination section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper surface of FIG. 89). A connector for conductive wiring and a connector whose one end is connected to the inner substrate of the electrical decoration parts 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted into and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

A pair of multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the front end side of the front frame 14 are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the inner frame 12 at the front end side of the rotation.
0 (see FIG. 126) and the upper device in the front and rear direction, and can abut against each other depending on the situation, the details of which will be described later.

On the back side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member made of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame 14. A long cover member 173 that accommodates the wiring is attached from the rear side. The long cover member 173 is configured such that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation distal end side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring is An upper wall portion 173b that is arranged parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, is arranged above the lower wall portion 173a so as to face the lower wall portion 173a, and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring. Consists of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged to contact the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b. An upward extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

The upward extending wall portion 173c is curved so that the end portion of the side connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b protrudes in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame . , a space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is secured from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, the wiring accommodated in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), and the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. Protruded proximally. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

On the rear side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (front frame 14
The part closest to the rotation base end of the front frame 14) and the vertically elongated plate portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, which is part of the main body frame 14a. An inverted cup-shaped inverted cup portion 178 that opens downward is provided.

The reverse cup part 178 is, for example, a part that countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as illegally spreading the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, and entering the game area. is. That is, even if the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from near the hinge 18 on the lower side, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the movement of the piano wire can be hindered, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against cheating by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire whose tip is heated is inserted into the inverted cup portion 178 and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat generated by the inverted cup portion 178
can pass through the inverted cup portion 178 as well as the elongated cover member 173
will also melt. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out. , can make fraud easier to detect.

In particular, in this embodiment, the wall portion 178a of the reverse cup portion 178 on the side of the long cover 173 has a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173 and abuts (approaches) to each other. In addition, since the normal line of the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the reverse cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. Since the long cover 173 can also be melted with a high probability when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts.

The wall portion 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the horizontal direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted through the gap forced into the rotation base end of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the reverse cup portion 178, when the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire reaches the wall portion. 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a. It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the tip of the piano wire advances through the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 (
The piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force applied to the person who cheats via the piano wire from increasing. By arranging a detection device for detecting the entrance of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to detect the fraudulent activity before the fraudulent person escapes, making it easier to secure the fraudulent person. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the fraud cannot discern it, so he/she will believe that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Then, until the tip of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window part 14c
(until the end of the piano wire can be seen from the front side through the front side) and the action of inserting the piano wire further deeply (without making the person who commits the fraud have suspicion that the insertion of the piano wire is not going well). . Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for a person who commits a fraudulent act to realize that the fraudulent act has been discovered and to plan an escape.

The detection device may be a photocoupler device, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be arranged on the locking mechanism 20RK or may be arranged on the rear side portion of the operation handle 51 . In the case where it is arranged on the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally arranged on the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine whether the piano wire has entered.

The ball shooting unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 90, this ball shooting unit 112a has an electromagnetic shooting solenoid 701 provided as a shooting device, and a game ball shot by the shooting solenoid 701 is disposed between an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the playing ball so that it is launched towards the area between
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball feeding device 720 feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to the launch rail 730.
Serve one at a time. In this case, the supplied game ball is arranged on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as the hitting portion in the shooting solenoid 701 . By inputting an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701 , the plunger 702 moves toward the firing rail 7 .
It moves toward the game ball on 30, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball shooting unit 112a is not limited to the shooting solenoid 701, and a shooting motor or the like may be used. A detailed configuration of the ball shooting unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the launch rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. is set. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through-hole extending in the front-rear direction through the portion where the disc passage forming member 160 is provided. Fixed.

The plate passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and a main body side lower plate passage portion 162, as shown in FIG. The main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 are
One end is opened toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with a through hole penetrating the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration:
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end, and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is attached to the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160 .
4 of the passage forming unit 140 (see FIG. 89) enters. A front door side upper tray passage portion 141 is arranged below the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 , and a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 is arranged below the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 .

As shown in FIG. 90, a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is provided on the lower side of the dish passage forming member 160.
And a shutter 163 is provided to regulate the outflow of game balls from the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 . The shutter 163 has a blocking position that narrows the exit portions of both passages to block the outflow of game balls,
It is provided so as to be switchable between a permissible position and a permissible position for permitting outflow of game balls.

A biasing member (such as a coil spring) is attached to the inner frame 12 to bias the shutter 163 toward the blocking position. It is configured such that the shutter 163 stays at the blocking position by force. As a result, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state in which game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162, the inconvenience of the stored balls falling out is avoided. there is

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pressed against the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the put-out ball socket portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. is pushed back to the permissible position. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, so that the game balls flow down. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. The substrate 167 is formed by separate substrates for the portions where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged and the portion where the connector CN3 is arranged. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are connected to main controller 1.
10, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the sound lamp control device 113. Since the object of transmission is different, the intention is to prevent malfunction by using a separate board. according to.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are shown exploded, and FIG. 92 is a window portion of the front frame 14. 14c is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are shown exploded. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the body frame 14
On the front side of c, the operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the lower tray 50 to the right, and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A covering cover 370 is arranged on the front side of the .

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a lateral width that is approximately the same as the lateral width of the front frame 14 . That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are arranged vertically below the electrical decoration portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends thereof, and a main body curved portion 371 configured in a curved shape in which the left and right central portions protrude toward the front side; Extending downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left-right central portion and the left-right end portion of the portion 371 toward the side adjacent to each other in the width direction, they merge at the extending lower end and are viewed from front V. A drooping portion 372 configured in a letter shape, a body curved portion 371 and a drooping portion 3
A translucent portion 373, which is a plate-like member that closes the opening surrounded by 72, is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372, and the main body curved portion 371. A left flat support portion 374 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right flat support portion 375 is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support portion 375 is supported from the rear side. Mainly provided is a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width is increased (tapered) toward the rear side.

The main body curved portion 371 has a rounded front edge, and a rear edge that matches the front edge of the upper plate 17. When the upper plate is assembled (see FIG. 86), the main body curved portion 371 has a curved shape. 1
The rear left edge 371a abuts on the front side edge of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction, and the rear left edge 371a is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300. A rear middle edge portion 371b that abuts on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge portion 371b.
1b on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a, has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball rental operation unit 40, and contacts the ball rental operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state; Mainly provide

The drooping portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body curved portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported.
0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other) to prevent access to the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the drooping portion 372 is positioned closer to the front side than the recessed portion 15a, which will be described later.
By screwing a screw inserted from below into the bottom plate on which 5a is formed, it is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which recessed portion 15a is formed.

The translucent portion 373 is a portion that allows the light emitted from the operation device 300 to pass through to the front side, and is a portion that can perform an effect with the light, and is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. It is arranged close to the lower frame member 320 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in this embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, it irradiates light upward (arranged on the upper surface of the lighting support portion 341e).
Six LEDs emit light downward (arranged on the lower surface of the lighting support portion 341e)
are arranged respectively.

The light emitted from the LED device 341f that emits light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. FIG. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the translucent portion 373. do. On the one hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310, but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then through the translucent portion 373. .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the translucent portion 373 is compared to when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Thus, it is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control for changing the amount of light), the tilting device 310 can be adjusted according to the state change of the tilting device 310 . An effect of changing the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the translucent portion 373 can be performed.

As another effect control method, it is also possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from an LED that emits light downward in accordance with a change in the state of the tilting device 310 . For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the amount of light is strongly changed (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 changes to the first state (see FIG. 22). The amount of light is controlled to be weaker (stepwise) in accordance with the change from the state 1 to the second state, so that the light visible through the translucent portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is reduced. It is possible to reduce the degree of change in the amount of light in (can be eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electrical decoration portion 8031. . As a result, it is possible to suppress downward positional displacement of the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The right plane support portion 375 abuts on the lower end of the electrical decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the electrical decoration portion 8032 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electrical decoration portion 8032. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the downward displacement of the electrical decoration part 8032 .

Although the details will be described later, the electrical decoration portion 8031 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 are provided in the upper panel unit 40.
0, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the electrical decoration part 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400 . for that reason,
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the electrical decoration part 8031, the electrical decoration part 8032, and the covering cover 370 fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a. The force required to prop up the can be widely distributed.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electrical decoration part 8032 is in a state of being inserted to the deepest part of the support groove 376. In this state, the front lower corner end of the electrical decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right plane support part 375 are aligned. matches the position of

The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electrical decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engaging relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 can be respectively fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state. A separate fixing part that fastens the covering cover 370 and the electrical decoration part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is attached to the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17 The passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a on the back side of the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. The body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member that constitutes the upper plate 17), and the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 covers the passage forming unit 140 from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or another member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (a member constituting the upper plate 17, etc.) sandwiches the main body frame 14a).

Even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated through the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or piano wire whose tip is heated is pressed and melted), the front frame is It functions as an entry prevention member that prevents entry from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed against the sheet metal member 150 made of metal, it will not penetrate, and the wire can be prevented from entering the rear side of the front frame 14 . .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 on the left side in the front view, and the opened front side is the passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 to be fitted to 140 and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back surface of the lower side portions of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball extraction passage 147 .

Since the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145, the fitting box portion 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion. 145 is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction,
Even if the wire is penetrated in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction,
Entry beyond 40 can be prevented.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when a wire exemplified by the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole, Even so, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 . In a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the operation device 300 is removed, and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion (a portion obliquely upward to the rear of the recessed portion 15a) where the front and back thickness is reduced accordingly. A case is exemplified in which a through-hole is opened by being pressed, and the exemplified wire enters.

Further, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating portion back member 155 is arranged with the cylinder lock 20 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position where it is located.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation section back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly from the outer edge of a plate member elongated in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction. There is a through hole 156 drilled in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can pass through, and the through hole 1
56, and a pair of insertion holes 157 through which screws for fastening and fixing the operation unit back member 155 to the body frame 14a are inserted; A pair of connecting insertion holes 158 are drilled side by side, and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 protruding rearward from the through hole 156 on the rotation base end side.

The connection insertion hole 158 is formed in the connection portion 1 formed at the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140.
48 in the longitudinal direction. Here, the connection portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is positioned so as to coincide with the upper connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
The projecting portion 148a, which has a columnar shape with an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and protrudes toward the rear side, is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position where it coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. and a threaded portion 148b drilled as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operating portion back member 155 is placed on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operating portion back surface are connected by passing the projecting portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 on the upper side. After aligning with the member 155, the operation unit back surface member 1 can be easily assembled by inserting a screw through the lower coupling insertion hole 158 and screwing it into the screw-in portion 148b.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140 .

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 to the rear side so as to partition the area. 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L-shape that can face up, down, left, and right with the wall portion 158a.

Therefore, when assembling the operation section back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the projection 148a is passed through the connection insertion hole 158, and the wall 158a is positioned vertically with respect to the extension wall 148c. The position and posture of the operation section back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be adjusted quickly and easily by the lateral contact.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that faces front and rear of the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and will be described later in detail.
Under predetermined conditions, the front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13
4 is prevented from being closed.

In the present embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and made of synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and compared to the case where it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped opening, the required amount of material is required while ensuring rigidity. can be reduced. Therefore, the plate thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portions of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low, and the portion is formed as thin as possible). The strength of the open/close restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability by forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 with a plate thickness).

Note that the cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to the U-shape as long as it is a shape that ensures rigidity and maintains the shape. For example, instead of a flat cross section, a curved (wavy) cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

In addition, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear surface member 155, but is formed as part of the body frame 14.
It may be composed of a metal part that is bent and extended from a to the back side, or that is extended to the back side from another member that is fixed to the back side of the body frame 14a. However, as in this embodiment,
Forming the open/close restricting portion 159 from a synthetic resin prevents the board support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes into contact with the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. As a result, a worker who changes the state of the board surface supporting device 600 to attach and detach the game board 13 can be less likely to be injured by touching the cracks or dents formed in the board surface supporting device 600.例文帳に追加

Here, since the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is arranged closer to the rotation proximal end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is arranged, the cylinder lock arranged further toward the rotation distal end side is arranged. A long interval can be secured between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at 20 points. Therefore, in a state in which the opening/closing regulating portion 159 is in contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the leading end of the rotation are locked by mistake. can.

As a route through which a foreign object such as a wire enters, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable from the main body frame 14a toward the front side. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even if the operation device 300 is traced through the gap.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying electric power to the operation device 300 has a wiring through hole 14 drilled in the front-rear direction of the body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is attached to the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 103).
57) is connected to the operation device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall.

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like can reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 having a substantially case shape. Therefore, foreign matter such as wires can be easily prevented from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

It should be noted that the foreign matter entering the operation device 300 may be liquid. For example, a player who feels bad about the result of a game may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10 . that time,
A conveniently located operating device 300 is likely to fall prey to being splashed with drinking water.
3) may fail.

Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic substrate or the like. Since the operation device 300 is separably independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water poured on the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the body frame 14a.

A concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recessed portion 15a is configured as a deep recessed portion.
It is not a perfect case shape, and gaps are formed here and there (for example, see FIG. 13,
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap).
The concave portion 15 a serves to temporarily store the liquid that drops downward from the operation device 300 .

In the operation device 300, the drive motor 342 is arranged closer to the rear side of the opening 325, so the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)) and is connected to wiring. Since the portion is arranged below the horizontal plate portion arranged between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18), liquid such as drinking water does not reach the drive motor 3.
42 can be directly applied to prevent failure.

Also, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, it may be exposed to liquid such as drinking water. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the voice coil motor 352 from breaking down.

With the above-described configuration, even if a liquid such as drinking water is splashed on the player on his way home, the next player can continue playing normally by simply wiping off the touched portion of the upper surface of the operation device 300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from putting pressure on the business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 to 9
6 shows a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG.

93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the movable binding member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the movable binding member 180 are shown side by side. be. In FIG. 93(b), the movable binding member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the movable binding member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and is a member that binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
and the harness HN2 connected to the ball rental operating portion 40 (see FIG. 92) are each guided to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board and bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the illumination parts 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86
) are once connected (gathered) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and a bundle of extension harnesses HN is connected from the relay board.
3 moves to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm portion 182 that is pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm portion 182 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 (the side facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the opposite side) and a movable arm 182
93(a) on the side opposite to the main body 181) and is capable of locking the binding arm 183. A pair of locking portions 184
and a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arm portions 183 and having an opening.

In the binding movable member 180 , the binding arm portion 183 is formed with high flexibility, while the other portion is formed at least with lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The body portion 181 includes a portion to be fixed 181a having a substantially horseshoe-shaped cross section and a through-hole in the center through which a screw is passed, and projecting from the left and right lower corners of the portion to be fixed 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stop portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front side end portion of the fixed portion 181a, and the extending tip thereof curving close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96(a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion which is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and is formed of a cylindrical shape having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the screw head to be fastened. 181e;
Mainly provide

The plate member 14d includes a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which is composed of through holes arranged in the same arrangement as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screws passing through the fixed portion 181a are fastened and fixed to the corresponding fastening holes of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b are fitted into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fixing.
d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between them and the plate member 14d.
In the present embodiment, by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from slipping down, and the center of the harnesses can be positioned on the plate member 14d side. The area (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper portion 18) that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation due to the shape that is curved along the arranged circle.
1c) can be ensured to have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer peripheral surface of e is fitted in the proximal end portion of the movable arm portion 182 to pivotally support the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 has a proximal end that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from the axial support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a portion that is externally and pivotally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as a proximal end. 182a and an elongated thin plate portion 182b provided continuously on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivotal support position.

The base end portion 182a includes the left and right ends (the portion where the straight line connecting to the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the back side end (the portion closest to the plane OS1) of the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion that is fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Extending from each of the adjacent portions are rotational sidewalls. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radii are arranged on the same side. equal to the thickness.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since a pair of binding arm portions 183 are configured to have the same shape, one will be described and the description of the other will be omitted. The binding arm portion 183 has a small width portion 183a formed in the vicinity of the tip portion with a width equivalent to the width of the root, and a large width portion 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at regular intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)).

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening portion 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening portion 184a.
A small opening 184b formed on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the 84a and having an opening width smaller than that of the large opening 184a is mainly provided (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through. , and the large-width portion 183b are of such a size that they cannot be passed through (locked).

According to this embodiment, when the binding arm portion 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, it is arranged on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 becomes smaller). ,
When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging it on the side of the small opening 184b. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole through which a binding band can be inserted in the central portion thereof. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bundled.

A movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94(b) is XCIVb of FIG. 94(a).
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. XCV of a)
2 is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 along line b-XCVb. FIG.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95(a) and 95 ( In b)
A state in which the movable arm portion 182 rotates away from the plate member 14d and abuts on the vertically long metal portion constituting the left portion of the body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range) is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 has an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (
rotatable about 160 degrees around a vertical axis). Considering the situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are installed in the amusement arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machines 8010 are arranged side by side and are rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of collision with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010), this angle is normally used. It is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 cannot be elastically deformed and cannot be rotated relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm portion 182, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 will be deteriorated and broken due to elastic deformation.

Next, the manner in which the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported will be described. Harness HN1-HN
3 is supported by the binding movable member 180 so that the arrangement is defined, for example, it is possible to prevent accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

FIG. 96(a) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(a). FIG. 96(c) is a schematic rear view of the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96(d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96(c) and 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stop portion 181c is located at a position moved from the opening opened leftward in the upper end portion of the upward extending wall portion 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. be. That is, since the intermediate stop portion 181c and the opening opened toward the left at the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are on the same horizontal line, the upper end portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm portion 182, the upward extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stop portion 181c is formed.
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side to the movable arm portion 18 of the binding movable member 180
2 along the shape. As a result, FIGS. 96(b) and 96(d)
), the bending portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are curved, and extreme bending deformation can be prevented.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
3 can be arranged on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm portion 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. As a result, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97(a) and 97(b) schematically show the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, which schematically illustrate the movable binding member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. 97(a) shows one limit state of the movable binding member 180, and FIG. 97(b) shows the other limit state of the movable binding member 180. As shown in FIG.

97(a) and 97(b), the rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 are schematically shown. The imaginary lines schematically show the members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and pivotally supported at the rotation center point P57, respectively. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14. Similarly to the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates about the rotation center point P57 with respect to the inner frame 12. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
The base end portion 182a of the movable arm portion 182 rotates about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby moving the inner frame 12.
and the opening and closing of the front frame 14, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (see FIG. 9).
6(b), see also FIG. 96(d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is opened or closed with respect to the inner frame 12.
The vertically elongated metal portion (in FIG. 96(d),
The base end 182a of the movable arm 182 is routed along a path that passes through the vicinity of the contact. That is, by forcibly detouring the harnesses HN1 to HN3, the harness HN
1 to HN3 can be prevented from deviating to the front end of the front frame 14 when turning.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work performed by the operator when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed.
It is possible to improve the fit of N1 to HN3 (set by bending only once on the base end side of rotation) (see FIGS. 96(b) and 97(a)).

In this embodiment, the intermediate stop portion 181c is arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stop portion 181c arranged vertically above the reverse cup portion 178. For example, by heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature, the reverse cup portion 178 is melted and penetrated. , it is possible to take countermeasures against a fraudulent act of inserting a wire between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12. - 特許庁

That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melted, penetrates the wire, and advances toward the game area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178, the temperature rises. A harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
It is pressed against N1 to HN3. As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burnt out and rendered non-conductive.

By controlling to output an error signal and sound an alarm (to display an error screen) when the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, fraud can be quickly discovered. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from gaining fraudulent profits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be shot even by rotating the operating handle 51. Gone. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the fraudulent act is discovered after the fraudulent act is committed (the fraudulent act can be detected early).

In this case, after inserting a wire into the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending a nail to make it easier to illegally win a prize), the ball is inserted into the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. Since it is possible to make it impossible to shoot balls to a person who commits a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining a prize ball by winning a prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being given. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to commit a specific fraudulent act.

Also, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Accordingly, a person who commits fraud shall:
Since there is a risk that due to one's own fraudulent behavior, it will be impossible to collect the bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown). be able to.

Furthermore, in order to eliminate the risk of being unable to collect bills and balls for the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown), the card unit (ball lending unit) Unit) is 0 yen, but the player commits the fraudulent act without leaving the seat, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent act.

In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is cut off, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
(not shown) is output at a game machine shop where a disconnection error (CR error) is output, the disconnection error (C
By confirming the R error), the possibility of fraud can be easily grasped.

98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outline of 0 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 98 , the ball guide opening 53 is arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145 . In addition, in this embodiment, the front door side lower tray passage portion 1
The lower end of 42 occupies about 2/3 of the lateral width of ball guide opening 53 in the left part of ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of foul ball passage part 145 occupies the remaining area in the right part of ball guide opening 53. The partition plate portion 53a is arranged so as to occupy an area (an area of about 1/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53).
partitioned by

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower tray 50. , the extension direction is directed (switched) to the left and right sides at least once each, S-shaped paths SL1, S
L2 respectively.

Due to the S-shaped path SL1, it is possible to increase the flow path length of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the liquid stays inside the front door side lower tray passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. As a result, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
While securing a large vertical dimension of the lower tray 50, the number of balls that can be retained on the upstream side of the lower tray 50 can be increased. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side), the stress of replenishing balls is given to the player (when the balls for 50 minutes of the lower tray are exhausted, the player is required to replenish the balls from the senryo box). ) can be configured.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are respectively provided with bend regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions in which the extension direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common. Features That is, the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NEa1 formed upstream of the first bending region NEa1 and having a characteristic portion thereof reversed left and right. and an area NEa2.

Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 is composed of a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region NE formed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 by reversing the right and left of the characteristic portion.
and b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending region NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, the side wall Na and the side wall Na disposed on the side opposite to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. , a ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na; and a neighboring wall Nc, each wall Na,
Nb and Nc are extended from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving a surface Nc1 on the opposite side of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a spherical guide surface. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or piano wire). It functions as a surface to support the surface, and the details will be described later. Note that the adjacent wall Nc has a gap Nin between the lower end of the extension and the side wall Na, which is the length of the wire H.
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, due to the shape of the first bending region NEa1, the incorrectly inserted wire HM
can be prevented from penetrating deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, as an entrance path for the illegally inserted wire HM, the ball guide opening 53 is used as an entrance and the front door side lower tray passage portion 14 is used.
2 is conceivable.
M is pressed against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 to advance.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1 by a person who commits fraud, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending region NEa1. Even in this case, the wire HM advances rightward due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, so that the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending region NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. It will be. That is, a pair of bending regions NEa1,
By arranging the NEa2 with the left and right reversed, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without exception.

FIG. 99 shows an example of the advancing route of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin. The position of the tip of the wire HM at each timing is indicated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is indicated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM is caught (caught) at this point, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from advancing any further, to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly discover the fraudulent act. can.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to advance, if the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes downward.
advances, the tip of the wire HM advances downward. Therefore, wire HM
The payout device 133 arranged upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143, and the foul ball receiving portion 146
It is possible to prevent reaching the game area arranged on the upstream side of.

As a result, by causing the wire HM to reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causing the payout device 133 to malfunction, an illegal payout ball can be obtained, or the wire HM can be made to reach the game area and the electric accessory 64
By forcibly opening a movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) to make it easier to illegally win a prize, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts from gaining illegal profits by obtaining illegally dispensed balls. .

Returning to FIG. 98, description will be made. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of the portion downstream from the confluence region CE where the ball extraction passage 147 merges is about twice the diameter of the ball (twice or more in this embodiment). As a result, when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are arranged in the confluence area CE, the balls flowing down the foul ball passage portion 145 enter the confluence passage CE (the balls enter the confluence area CE at the same time). , even if two balls are arranged vertically, the possibility of the balls being caught between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other can be extremely reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being hindered from flowing down in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a that is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage portion 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the passage forming unit 1
The rear side bottom plate portion 40 is formed to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The back side bottom plate portion of is positioned flush with the downstream end portion of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a is closer to the passage portion 14
The front-to-rear width is set larger than that of the region on the downstream side of 5a. In this embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 downstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 upstream of the passage portion 145a is set slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 145
In the case where the balls stay in the upper stream of the passage 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged with their positions shifted forward and backward. Since they are prevented from lining up (because they are slightly shifted left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two balls from entering the passage portion 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to restrict the balls from entering the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage portion 145 in a row, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the confluence area CE at the same time. It is possible to reduce the possibility of being sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and meshing with each other.

The foul ball receptacle 146 extends from the bottom plate on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 toward the front side, and the left end is connected to the left side wall, and the flow-down surface of the ball faces rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a inclined downward as
46, and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
A curved guide plate portion 146c extending from the back side bottom plate portion of 40 to the back side in a plate shape and curved in such a manner that the extension direction is directed upward toward the back side is mainly provided.

While the ball is guided toward the foul ball passage portion 145 (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the blocking portion 146b causes the foul ball receiving portion 1
The passing position of the ball passing through 46 to the front side can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146 . That is, the ball that rolls down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow rightward, and the block portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball socket portion 146. can be done.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (because the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage part in the S-shaped path SL2 While setting the width of 145 to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the sphere can flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed in a range forming the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a
), the width of the passage is set to be small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), so it is possible to prevent an illegal tool with a larger outer shape from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145 .

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 100 and 101 illustrate a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 that constitute the electrical decoration portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit elongated in the left and right direction, and the left and right ends of the upper panel unit 400 are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration parts 8031 and 8032 . In this support structure, at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 is recessed from the back side to the front side. (see FIG. 118) are formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 are fitted to the left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. By doing so, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50
0 is concatenated.

As a result, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing to the body frame 14a, respectively, without the need to directly fasten and fix the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500. FIG. The shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400 defines the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a as the order in which the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed after the right panel unit 500 is fastened and fixed. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right are fitted with left and right hooks forming the supported groove 417. Due to the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, the heavy plate units 500R, 500R, 500R and 500R
00L can be prevented from being left or right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86).

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 102 and 103, the body frame 14a is located on the front side of the body frame 14a.
and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89), and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 and the upper side plate member 14e are shown disassembled from the body frame 14a.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the rear side thereof, and the screw passing through the through-hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, whereby the upper frame is This is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. In addition, in FIG. 104, the body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into the insertion holes drilled in the body frame 14a, is shown disassembled from the body frame 14a. and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 are omitted, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

As for the actual assembly procedure, the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall forming the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510,
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking unit 500L and a right stacking unit 500R, which are stacked in the horizontal direction, and the stacking unit 50.
0L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a plate-shaped support plate portion 510 elongated vertically is mainly provided, which is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is fixed by screws inserted through the support plate portion 510 from the back side to the front side.
L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510
It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted through the body 4a from the back side to the front side.

The support plate portion 510 is formed to have an L-shaped cross section by extending a plate-like extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is assembled. (Fig. 86
), a fixing plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, and A plurality of cover-side through holes 513 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens-side through holes 514 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens-side through holes 514. and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514 .

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps the substrate member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion on the side of the substrate member 512 protrudes toward the front side in a pedestal shape. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 .

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b is mounted on the heavy plate units 500L and 500R.
in the width direction (see FIG. 115(b)), the heavy plate units 500L, 50
It is possible to suppress tilting of 0R in the left-right direction. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 51
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extended portion 511
While the outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of a, the fixing plate 5
11 is formed up to the back side end as a surface that is substantially at the same plane as the side surface of the base portion 511 b , so that the back side end of the inner cover member 520 is aligned with the back side end of the support plate portion 510 . The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 contacts the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a row curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs 512a. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light from directly behind the light guide member 540 toward the light guide member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other. Illuminate (see FIG. 107).

Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (the lateral width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a passes through the light guide member without leakage. The light enters 540 and exits from one of the surfaces of the light guide member 540. The entry and exit of light and its path will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 527 arranged on the inner cover member 520 and through which a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the rear fastening portion 527 , the inner cover member 520 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The lens-side through-hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and through which the screw fastened to the back fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back side. By fastening screws to the back fastening portion 556 , the outer lens member 550 is attached to the support plate portion 51 .
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projecting portion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a horizontal width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566 and a vertical width approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566 . Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed can be improved.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (projecting portion 566 ), the projecting portion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 . As a result, the projection 566
are inserted into the pin support holes 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount corresponding to the positional deviation, the positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking unit 500L has a window portion 14c (see FIG. 86).
See), the inner cover member 520 that constitutes the right edge and is formed of a light-impermeable resin material
and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and formed of a light-transmitting colorless resin material.

The right stacking unit 500R has a light guide member 540 arranged to face the left stacking unit 500L.
and an outer lens member 550 which faces the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and whose front side end is opposed in the front-rear direction and which is formed of a light-transmitting white resin material, and the outer lens member. The light guide member 54 is arranged on the right side of 550 and is made of a resin material that does not transmit light.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. FIG. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and FIG. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side. is shown exploded.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560 .
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5
a plurality of short fastening portions 525, which are cylindrical portions inserted through the lens 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed; The inner cover member 520 is an outer cover member 560 which is a cylindrical portion inserted through the lens member 530 .
A plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 521, and a plurality of rear fastening portions protruding on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws are screwed to fix the support plate portion 510 from the back side. 527
and are mainly provided.

The main body plate portion 521 has a wave-shaped front end portion 521a, and a connection plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at the short width portion of the wave shape (portion closer to the back side). Prepare.

The back-side base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
It has an inner side surface 521b1 that contacts (matches in shape with) the left side surface.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is arranged in an attitude that inclines leftward toward the rear side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at regular intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged such that the intervals increase in order from the lower side toward the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of light is produced by the openings 524.
can be different for each

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed. and a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a, which is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and a fitting groove 523b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by two screws inserted at the upper end and one screw at the lower end.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged side by side at four upper and lower positions, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
It functions as a window through which the Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape projecting rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is recessed rightward from the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is arranged at the boundary portion between the back-side base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary part is designed in this embodiment, and the inner cover member 52
The surface (left side) of 0 corresponds to the portion that projects leftward (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is recessed and curved to the right as designed between the boundary portions described above.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates to the left and right as it advances in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back side of the portion projecting to the design surface side. When the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, the back surface of the design-like protruding portion is, conversely, formed with a recess that tends to become a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, the dead space can be effectively utilized, and the space on the back side of the inner cover member 520 (on the side of the inner lens member 530) can be effectively used. Efficiency can be improved.

The front and rear end portions of the inner lens member 530 are formed to follow the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520 . That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed on the body plate portion 5 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape.
A front end portion 531 a of the inner cover member 520 has a corrugated shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front-side end portion 531a forms a curved surface that extends rightward from the front-side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is perforated in the front-rear direction at the position where the curve forming the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction. support hole 531 through which the projecting portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the corrugated front portion of the front end portion 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 passes is formed on the rear side thereof. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wavy rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the light guide member 540 can come into contact is arranged on the rear side thereof. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31c, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531c from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 has a through hole 531d which is sized to allow the long fastening portion 526 to pass through and is drilled in the horizontal direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is arranged at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 vertically connecting the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
and b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill the gap between them and the light guide member 540. As shown in FIG. Namely
Similar to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes leftward toward the back side, and thus the width of the left and right becomes longer toward the back side (the front end is the tip when viewed from above). It is assumed to be a triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 that overhangs leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening portion 524 . The protruding portion 533 includes a light scattering portion 533a on the side opposite to the protruding side, which protrudes in a wavy shape and has a wavy curved surface with a shape that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a halftone dot pattern on both left and right sides in which recessed portions that change the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED 512a arranged on the back side to the left and right directions are arranged in a grid pattern. A so-called light guide plate is formed. That is, at least part of the light emitted from the LED 512a to the rear end portion of the light guide member 540 is redirected in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. be. In addition, the light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is changed from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to the front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
) is a processed part for changing the light from the surface into a uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a so that the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40 .

In this embodiment, as an example, the recessed portion is formed by a thermoplastic mold plate having a pattern in which conical portions having an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of about 1 mm are arranged in a grid pattern at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (heat pressing) against resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

The thermoplastic resins used in the present invention are not particularly limited, but those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, etc. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer) can be exemplified. Among them, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average brightness and a small decrease in brightness distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the light guide member 540 has a thickness of 5 mm at the end on the LED 512a side. By setting the thickness between 3 mm and 8 mm, it is possible to efficiently guide the light from the LED 512a, improve shape retention after thermal bending, and obtain practical strength.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 has a corrugated front end portion that is slightly displaced from the front end portion 531a of the inner lens member 530 toward the rear side, and has a wavy shape. are also formed from undulating corrugations.

The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. For the degree of corrugation,
Although there is no particular limitation, the curved surface portion has a radius of curvature (R) of 200 mm or more and 700 mm
The following are preferred. By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting a three-dimensional degree of freedom while reducing distortion after heat bending and maintaining good practical mechanical properties. .

Details of the wave shape undulating to the left and right will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the inner cover member 520
Positioned leftward at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and positioned rightward at a position between positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c (located away from the inner cover member 520) It has a wavy shape.

The wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by thermally bending the base material having the recessed portions, as described above. As a method of thermal bending of the present invention, a curved concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (
This is done by pressing the substrate into a mold with a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin contains an acrylic resin as a main component, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferably performed at 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is not destroyed, and the light from the light source is emitted before and after the heat bending process. can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and an uneven luminance distribution in the light guide plate. Further, by setting such heating temperature conditions, it is possible to suppress distortion of the light guide plate.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and a body plate portion 541 of the body plate portion 541 .
A fastening part 542 extending vertically from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which a screw to be fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, there is no portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is composed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection plane on which the opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, the rendering effect of the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear-side end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear-side end of the inner lens member 530 .

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 which is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and internally supported. Inner fitting part 5
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 projecting rightward through the outer cover member. A projecting portion 554 that can be visually recognized, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a support plate portion projecting from the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and extending from the back side. It mainly includes a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The shape of the front and rear ends of the outer lens member 550 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the light guide member 540 . That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a that extends leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and forms a curved surface that substantially matches the shape of the front end portion of the light guide member 540. It has a corrugated shape and is arranged slightly shifted to the front side with respect to the front side end of the light guide member 540 . In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guide member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be spaced equally apart in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. be.

The front-side end portion 551a is located at a switching position in the front-rear direction of the curved line that forms the wave shape.
It has a plurality of projecting portions 551b projecting toward the front side and fitted into the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

To the front side, on the opposite side of the side facing the light guide member 540 of the front side end portion 551a,
Numerous bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a)) bulging in a semicircular shape in a side view are formed vertically. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light guide member 540 The light emission on the front side end surface can be made into a band-shaped light emission mode that is continuous in the vertical direction.

The insertion hole 553 is arranged in a recessed deep portion that is recessed inwardly (inwardly of the surface of the main body plate portion 551 ) as the shape of the overhanging portion 554 . Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560 .

In the right double plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which screws for fastening and fixing with the support plate portion 510 are screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550 and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. FIG. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (it can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). can). As a result, the area facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 5
40 and the main body plate portion 551 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

As a result, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which it faces the main body plate portion 551 . In addition, since the body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 , the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the body plate portion 551 .

Therefore, the LED 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
It is possible to prevent misalignment with the light guide member 540, and allow light to enter the light guide member 540 from the LED 512a with high accuracy.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically elongated plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561. It has a long hole formed in an oval shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and a plurality of screws are inserted from the opposite side. A receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper to-be-fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561,
The lower side to be fastened has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side. 563 and the long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end portion of the main body plate portion 561 .
26, and is formed in an elongated hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a projecting portion from the body plate portion 561 to the back side. and a plurality of protrusions 566 that are

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the lateral width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522 . The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower part to be fastened 563 has a fitting groove 563b recessed in the horizontal width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening part 523 . The fitting groove 563b is
70 (see FIG. 92) is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 are fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting through the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Since the right panel unit 500 contacts the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 vertically (see FIG. 86), the cover 370 protrudes the right panel unit 500 toward the front. The upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the right panel unit 500 that is stably supported. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in such a shape that the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted therein (
formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang 554). Therefore, it is possible to narrow the access path to the lateral gap between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 , thereby suppressing an illegal act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 .

112 and 113, left stacking unit 500L and right stacking unit 500
A method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 112(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb of FIG. 112(a), and FIG. 113a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb of FIG. 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) illustrate a state in which the projecting portion 551b is arranged on the back side of the support hole 531b, and FIGS. Part 55
1b is shown inserted through the support hole 531b.

To assemble the right panel unit 500, the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right stacking unit 500R are brought into contact with each other in the left-right direction (see FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right stacking unit 500R, and the projections 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this way, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the projections 551b, 551
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are fixed by inserting c into the support hole 531b and fitting them together, the degree of freedom in designing the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end of the right panel unit (
It is possible to reduce the number of screws that are arranged on the front side of the light guide member 540 and fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, thereby blocking light by the screws. Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the front-side end surface of the light guide member 540 can be easily visually recognized in a strip shape extending in the vertical direction.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, by reducing the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten and fix the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to prevent misleading during fastening. The light guide member 540
can reduce the range where there is a risk of damage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded to near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being discontinued and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500 .

When the left plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right plate unit 500R and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left plate unit 500L and , and the light guide member 540 of the right stack unit 500R,
Surfaces parallel to each other are configured along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship in which they can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left stacking unit 500L.
functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving in the front-rear direction with respect to the right panel unit 500R, the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. The right panel unit 500 has the support plate portion 510 attached to the left stack unit 5 as described above.
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are respectively assembled by fastening and fixing, and at least two procedures are conceivable for the assembly procedure.

The first procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the left plate unit 500L and the right plate unit 500R to each other and then fastening and fixing them to the support plate section 510. The second procedure is a method of fastening and fixing the right plate unit 500R. is fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 alone, then the left stacking unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking unit 500R, the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
In this method, the left stacking unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right stacking unit 500R and the support plate section 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly adopted when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker who performs maintenance or the like can use which procedure to install the right panel unit 50 according to the parts that need to be replaced.
0 can be disassembled or assembled, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that, regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R must be disassembled in order to disassemble the left board unit 500L and the right board unit 500R.
must slide over each other in the plane direction. Protruding portions 551b and 551c and support hole 531b
This is because it is necessary to release the engagement with. When the left stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R are to be slid relative to each other in the plane direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate section 510 .

In this manner, the projections 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted into the right panel unit 500 by prying (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). 500 and is useful for preventing fraudulent acts that enter the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by tightening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and cheating can be easily performed. As in this embodiment, the left panel unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right stacking unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws that are inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104). By making it difficult to disassemble the stacking unit 500L and the right stacking unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500 .

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of light guide member 540 of right panel unit 500 and its effect in presentation will be described. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, in FIGS. 114(a) to 114(c),
Illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light guide member 540 is irradiated with light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved to the left and right by the action of the light guide member 540. be redirected. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the light guide member 540 .

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), light is condensed on the concave side, and light is diffused on the convex side. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thereby, the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) thereof has a convex shape, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 faces the outer lens member 550. It can be used for production by diffusing the light emitted to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (whether light is condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right sides of the light guide member 540. It can be provided, and the production effect can be improved.

It should be noted that the difference in the mode of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the notched concave portion of the light guide member 540 according to regions, or by dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to regions, it is possible to change the mode of light production on both the left and right sides. .

The light guide member 540 is always concave on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524 , and the radius of curvature of the concave surface changes according to the size of the opening 524 . That is, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the same as that of the second opening from the top, corresponding to the fact that the upper three openings 524 have a larger vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is made shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1>R2>R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit the condensed light differs for each opening 524. The amount of light emitted can be varied for each opening 524 . That is, according to the present embodiment, the upper opening 524 can increase the amount of visible light compared to the lower opening 524 .

In addition, the curvature radius R4 at the position corresponding to the lowest opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top is formed to be the same as the curvature radius R1 (R4≈R1), and the center of the concave surface The normal line coming out from the shape is a shape that points slightly upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be increased, and the light production can be sharpened. Can be directed upwards.

As shown in FIG. 114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion with the curvature radius R3. The width of the openings 524 facing each other is the vertical width W3, and the width of the openings 524 facing the portion with the radius of curvature R4 is the vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, among the openings 524, the lower openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 are reduced (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the curvature radii R1 to R3, the relationship between the magnitudes of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitudes of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. As a result, a portion where the degree of light condensing is weak (for example, the radius of curvature R
1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light can enter the opening 524 sufficiently. The vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to avoid too much light entering the opening 524 . Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center point of each radius of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. is arranged at approximately the middle position of

The light guide member 540 is convex leftward in the region KE of the boundary of the opening 524 . Here, the region KE is a strip-shaped region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with adjacent openings 524 . That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent above it, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent below it. Therefore, in area KE, LED 512
The light emitted in the front-rear direction from a is viewed from the left side of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114(c)).
), it advances in a state hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 passes through the inner cover member 520
Therefore, even if the light condensing action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, in the area KE, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming a convex shape on the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side. can be formed. As a result, it is possible to improve the presentation effect of the presentation of light visually recognized through the opening 565 .

That is, depending on whether or not light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a, it is possible to change the light seen through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light seen through the opening 524. .

For example, the LED 512a that makes light enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning ON 12a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with light without gaps. At this time, the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE is concave, so that the light emitted to the right from above and below the area KE intersects on the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being seen darkly in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, and the edge is visually recognized by the player. You can increase the amount of light. Therefore, overhang 554 (Fig. 106
) can be sharpened.

It should be noted that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524 . In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the region KE, the corresponding portion (the region corresponding to the region KE) of the projecting portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. can be made

The region KE has a shorter front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (a shorter distance from the LED 512a) than the upper and lower portions thereof. Therefore, the light incident on the area KE easily reaches the front end portion even if the amount of light is weak. The light that reaches the front end portion may be used to produce an effect.

That is, the front end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530 cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c.
31a (see FIG. 105), a light effect that can be visually recognized (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the player's eye position is set by setting a high degree of expectation for the big win of the effect. , can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 from the front side end of the right panel unit 500 . As a result, the degree of eyestrain of the player can be reduced, and the player can play games for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side. Therefore, a player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and plays the pachinko machine 8010 is not visually recognized, but a clerk who is viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

As a result, while the cheating player is not noticed, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed, so that the cheating player is prevented from trying to escape. can be prevented.

By reversing the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be made visible only to the player and not visible to the store clerk.

115(a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115(b) is a schematic side view of FIG.
FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb of (a);

The light guide member 540 has a shape that gradually tapers from the end face (thickness of about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. Note that the maximum end of the front side of the light guide member 540 (the LED 512
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the horizontal width dimension is reduced with a similar gradient over the entire area in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is more LED5 than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end surface on the side of 12a becomes longer, the tapered portion is excessively tapered and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thin. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the luminescence mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the portions near the support hole 531b and is recessed toward the rear side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b.
Due to the shadow created by the nearby portions, the portion near the support hole 531c is more likely to be visually recognized darker than the portion near the support hole 531b.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that is arranged to face the support hole 531b
0, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion facing the support hole 531c is formed to have a greater width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light guide member 540, so that the light emitted from the LED 512a is received. It is possible to ensure a large area of the light-emitting surface.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visible in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is
The amount of light visible in the vicinity of 1b can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be reduced. As a result, the front end portion 531 of the inner lens member 530
With a as the foreground, the degree of light emission visually recognized at the end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side can be easily made uniform over the top and bottom (difference in intensity can be reduced).

116 is a partial rear view of right panel unit 500. FIG. 116, illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (advancing direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed due to the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and passes through the inner lens member 530 to be slightly It is diffused and progresses outward.

Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as a result of the curving of the light guide member 540 . Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is fixed, both surfaces of the light guide member 540 can have different light emission modes (roughness and density, brightness and darkness). In other words, the player can be made to visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is
0 is bent to the side of the player instead of right sideways by being curved as shown in FIG. 115(b) (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. The line arrow
shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the lighting effect.

Returning to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via e and arranged at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end thereof.
, and is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14 .

117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and a front surface of the upper frame member 410. The illumination unit 401 is arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly 450 is arranged on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly provide 117 and 118, illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit decorated with a model name, etc. on the front side.
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is included. By emitting light from the enclosed LED,
Perform a performance with light.

The illumination unit 401 includes a box-shaped main body 402 made of a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall 403 formed on the rear outer wall of the main body 402, and the wavy wall 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending from the lower edge to the back side in a horizontally long plate shape, and a portion above the plate-like portion 404 that protrudes from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the back side in a cylindrical shape and is inside the cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 405 having a shape penetrating the waved wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted through the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , is mainly provided.

The main body part 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap each other with their open sides, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the included LED is arranged on the electronic board,
The electronic board is fixed to the body portion 402 .

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction, and the illumination unit 4 to the upper frame member 410.
01 to improve the workability of assembly.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410 , and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 . The front side wall of the upper frame member 410 is recessed with a horizontally long groove that sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through-hole for wiring through which the wiring of the electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the body portion 402 are arranged is passed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to a plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410 . Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and access to the inside is made possible. formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the body frame 14a after the electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 41. FIG.
0 is an exploded rear perspective view of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a lower edge plate member formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411. 420, a right corner supporting member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, and the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411. The left corner support member 430L is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the rear side, and is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position projecting from the opening 414 to the front side, and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. and a lens member 440 that is restricted from coming off to the back side and that constitutes the electrical decoration part 8033 .

The main body member 411 is a member elongated in the left and right direction, in which openings are formed on both left and right sides thereof for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker covers 27 are arranged so as to cover the openings. On the front side, a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 facing the tubular portion 405 of the illumination unit 401 is larger than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. a support through-hole 413 penetratingly formed with a slightly larger inner shape;
and an opening 414 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electrical decoration unit 401 . This makes it possible to easily perform alignment in the horizontal direction when fitting the illumination unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 .

The tubular portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
As a result, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411 . Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the illumination unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. It is possible to prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted.
Thereby, the support through-holes 413 can be used for positioning the electrical decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410 .

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visually recognized when viewed from the front. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position aligned with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
e2 is arranged, and the light emission of this LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414. - 特許庁

The main body member 411 has, on its back side, a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower end surface of the right corner, and a recessed portion from the back side at the lower end surface of the left corner. a supported groove 418 formed at a position close to the upper end, a fastening portion 419 formed at a symmetrical position near the upper end and formed so that a screw can be screwed therein; A fastening portion 419b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the front end portion of the lower edge). This makes it possible to easily position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 .

The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right hook portions can be fitted into the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitting state (FIG. 86) is formed.
), a load (such as weight) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electrical decoration portion 8031, and the fitted state (
86), the upper panel unit 40
It is configured such that a load (such as weight) given from 0 can be applied to the electrical decoration part 8031 .

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from the base to a position where the tip does not reach. and an enlarged rib 419a.

As will be described later, screws inserted through through holes 463a and 483a are fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e are attached to the main body frame 14a. (see FIG. 125(a)), the details of which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the enlarged ribs 419a are three same-shaped ribs arranged at 120° intervals around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of screws to the fastening portion 419 .

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is connected to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at the lower position of the main body member 411.
2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at the upper position of the body member 411. Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at the front side edge of the lower edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it extends upward from the extending end, and the cross section L
A plurality of L-shaped extensions 423 formed in a letter shape and a plurality of extending portions 423 which are arranged at positions equidistant left and right from the center position of the main body plate portion 421 (upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically. and an opening 424 configured by a small-diameter through hole.

In a state in which the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, it is possible to increase the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the portion where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 through which the vibration wave (sound) output from the back side of the speaker assembly 450 to the inside passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L are provided with circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings through which vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450 pass.

The right corner support member 430R has a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
A player can see the light radiated through the lens member 440 through the opening 414 .

121 is an exploded front perspective view of speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of speaker assembly 450. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. Note that the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450R having substantially symmetrical shapes.
0L, the speaker assembly 450R will be explained, and the speaker assembly 4
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone-shaped speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave, and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 inserted through a through hole 466. A front assembly 460 that is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front,
Rear assembly 48 forming a space with front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)
0 and .

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460 .
and emits a sound effect in relation to the game, and its speaker 451
A through-hole through which a speaker connection wire 453 (for example, an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) extending with one end connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) is drilled , and the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102
), so that it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows passage of sound emitted from the speaker 451 . And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 covered with 54 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front portion aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 cannot be heard. You can play back and output with high sound quality without any loss. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front portion of the speaker 451 without degrading the sound quality.

The front assembly 460 includes a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is elongated in the left and right direction and has an open back side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portions 462. An extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 461
A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the back side end of the main body 461 toward the front side, a light passage through hole 465 formed through the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction, and a speaker 451 on the right side of the main body 461 , a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 toward the back side, and the rear assembly 480. a plurality of fastening portions 468 to which screws are fastened and fixed; connecting holes 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted; A front recessed portion 471 recessed from the back side toward the front side is mainly provided at the lower end portion of the portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided in the left-right direction into a base-side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a left-right center side of the base-end main body portion 461B (FIG. 12).
1 (left side)), and a distal end side main body portion 461T that is connected to the center side (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate body portion 461M in the left-right direction. A space is continuously formed between the proximal side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M, and the distal side main body portion 461T and the rear side assembly 480 .

The main body portion 461 includes a rear side wall portion 461H formed as a wall portion that surrounds substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape when viewed from the front. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge portion without barbs on the inside (an edge portion on the inside where no flange or the like is formed).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. be done.

The extension plate 463 has through holes 463a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 463
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e (see FIG. 102) and through hole 483a of rear assembly 480.
and the through hole 463a, and screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411. As shown in FIG.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411 from the rear side of the main body frame 14a. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480 . Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the body member 411, thereby being firmly fixed to each other.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms part of an opening through which a speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 is passed. The recess width of the wire passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 . As a result, pressure is applied to the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passage recess 464 , thereby preventing a gap from occurring between the wire passage recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes. 121 and 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in this embodiment, the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled. The speaker connection line 453 that is connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 . As a result, the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passage through-hole 465 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage-forming rib 467 abuts on the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap in the front and rear, forming a curved passage (
123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. A front side end portion of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to a front side plate of the main body portion 461 . This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467 .

The front recessed portion 471 is formed in a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a body part 48 that is elongated in the left and right direction and formed in a cup shape with an open front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width in a semicircular shape at the tip, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482. An extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside of the upper and lower widths, and the main body portion 481
A wiring pressing convex portion 484 projecting toward the front side of the body portion 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed through the front and rear direction at the upper right corner of the body portion 481, and a cup-shaped bottom plate (back side plate) of the body portion 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending like ribs toward the front side and the fastening portion 4 of the front assembly 460
A plurality of through-holes 488 formed as through-holes through which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to 68 in the front-rear direction, and front recessed portions 471 of the front assembly 460 at positions corresponding in the front-rear direction. and a rear recessed portion 491 that is recessed toward.

The body portion 481 extends in a plate shape toward the front side in such a manner as to surround the outer periphery of the body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the plate thickness of the body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. The front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that fits inside the inner side surface of the back side wall portion 461H of
1H is provided.

Since the speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion that is fitted with the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H on the entire outer periphery, it is possible to prevent air from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions projecting toward the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusions 484 at positions sandwiching the wire pressing protrusions 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection line 453 to pass through. 481 Ha.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460 . That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen to the left and right toward the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)), the speaker connection line 45
3 deviates from the wiring passage concave portion 464 and shifts to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

As a result, the speaker connection wire 453 can be returned to the wire passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection wire 453 is formed from the wire passage recess 464 and the wire pressing projection 484. can be easily accommodated in an opening in the

The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle. It is a concave portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has through holes 483a through which screws are inserted from the rear side. Through hole 483
The screws to be inserted through a are threaded from the rear side of the main body frame 14a through the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1.
4e through the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102), through hole 483a and front assembly 46.
0 through the through hole 463a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the back side of the body frame 14a to the extent that the screw is tightened by screwing a screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the body member 411. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460 . Accordingly, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruded along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body 481 and formed with a width that fits inside the wiring passage recess 464. The protruding length is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 .

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464 .
53, the covered portion of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and an opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passage recess 464. can be prevented. As a result, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the acoustic effect is lowered due to sound leakage from the opening for passing the sound.

The light passage through-hole 485 is the LED 14e arranged in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 through which the light emitted toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passing through-hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds one LED. The light passage through-hole 465 has a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through hole 485, and is tapered so that the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side. ), the light passage through-holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage-forming ribs 487 are formed at the same position as the passage-forming ribs 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and are in contact with each other without gaps in the front and rear. It is a rib that forms a curved path (see FIG. 123). This curved path is a path through which vibration waves (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and is attached to the front side wall portion 481H.
are formed at the front and rear ends and surface positions of the That is, the rear side end portion of the passage forming rib 487 is located at the main body portion 48
1 back side plate. This prevents the formation of a gap on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487 .

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have dimensions such that the front side end abuts the passage forming rib 467 and a compressive force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, the passage forming rib 467 is applied with a compressive force directed toward the back side from the passage forming rib 467, and the passage forming rib 4 is compressed by the compressive force.
67, 487 will close the gap while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction (Fig. 124(b)).
reference).

At this time, if the passage-forming rib 487 has a low rigidity in the left-right direction and bends in the left-right direction, the compressive force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the passage-forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is increased by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (furthermore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the overlapped rear surface is reduced). strength to be reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity in the lateral direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and the lateral bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. can be done.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed to have a shape inverted from the front recessed portion 471 and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471 . The opening is formed in a size surrounding the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (protruding slightly outside the outer shape). It is placed in a position surrounding the outer shape.

123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460 and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
0 is a front view. In FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), for ease of understanding,
A speaker connection line 453 is shown in phantom lines, and a state in which a front assembly 460 and a rear assembly 480, which are arranged to face each other, are unfolded with their surfaces facing each other toward the front of the paper are shown. 123(a) and 123(b) are folded along a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the left-right center of the paper surface, so that the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are adjusted. can be matched. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembly state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), inside the speaker assembly 450 is the proximal body 46 of the front assembly 460.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, with the acoustic chamber as the base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the tip side main body portion 461T. This acoustic path is configured as a curved path by path forming ribs 467 and 487 .

As shown in FIGS. 123(a) and 123(b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed laterally inward (to the left) of the wire passage recesses 464 through which the wires pass, and alternately vertically toward the left. Rib portions 467a and 467b arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) in
, 467c, 467d, 467e.

By forming the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) of the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, each rib portion 467 can be positioned at the time of assembly.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and each rib portion 487a of the rear assembly 480,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

Since the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the body portion 461. As shown in FIG.

Each of the rib portions 467 a , 467 b , 467 c , 467 d , 467 e together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While the vibration wave generated from the groove 467 travels linearly, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467 .

That is, as shown in FIG. 123(a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws travels to the left side (arrow L side) and the nearest rib portion (for example, rib portion 467b) in the left-right direction is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (directions of arrows L and U).

On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is arranged on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is arranged on the left side (arrow L side) of the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is closest in the left-right direction. , rib portion 467c) are arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, like this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4
When 67e are arranged alternately in the vertical direction, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a curved path in the vertical direction, and the length of the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws is ensured to be longer than the lateral width of the space. can do.

As a result, it is possible to easily adjust the travel path length of the vibration wave Ws until it passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471 and 491, thereby suppressing the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is caused to move in the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Arrows L, U directions).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 serves as the wiring pressing protrusion 4 for pressing the wiring.
Ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, and 484 are formed on the inner side (left side) of 84 in the left-right direction and arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in this embodiment) alternately vertically toward the left side.
87d and 487e.

Since each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected to the main body portion 481 and the front side wall portion 481H, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can increase the rigidity of the body portion 481. As shown in FIG.

Here, each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of 60 are formed in a shape that matches in the front-rear direction, and are arranged to face each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, so description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in this embodiment, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is placed between the recessed portion 482 arranged in the immediate vicinity of the rear recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483b arranged above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be advanced in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recessed portion 48
2, 483b has an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws in addition to the effect of assembling.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is narrowed in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 increases, and is narrowed once at the position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, at a position away from the speaker 451 , the vertical width is expanded at once, and then communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471 and 491 . Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451
Since the base end side body portion 461B side to which is assembled is sealed by the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, it advances to the tip side body portion 461T side, which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (sound) reaching 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order, and then reaches the speaker assembly. The sound is emitted to the outside of the solid 450R (the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the rear portion of the speaker 451 is the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 and the recessed portion 47 .
1, 491 and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120), the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside, so the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is You can play back and output with high sound quality without being stuck.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 and the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 are in phase with each other. Sound can be emitted from the opening formed by That is, the bass-reflex type speaker assembly 450 can emphasize the sound output from the back side of the speaker 450 by superimposing the sound output from the front side and the sound output from the front side by superimposing them in the same phase without canceling each other due to the opposite phase. That is, it becomes possible to amplify heavy bass. This will
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
It is possible to raise the player's interest and excitement for the game.

In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is arranged on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the low frequency sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is transmitted through the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is released to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (released downward to the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with the effect of the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 toward the front side.

The tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound) is performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
This can be done by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in this embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
0 rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are defined as the path of the vibration wave Ws. Therefore, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
7d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e can be individually set for their arrangement and vertical extension length to tune the sound of the vibration wave Ws (sound).

In addition, in the present embodiment, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467c of the front assembly 460
67d, 467e and each rib portion 487a, 487b, 487c, 487 of the rear assembly 480
d and 487e are arranged at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to reinforce the speaker assembly 450, in addition to the above purpose.

For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the fastening portion 468 and the vicinity of the through hole 488 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screws are screwed.

Further, the extension plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125(a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 which are closest thereto. Therefore, even after the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing screws into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48 are fixed.
Screws are screwed into the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of No. 3, and when the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the rib portions 467c, 467c and 467c are inserted.
By bringing the 87c, 467d, and 487d into contact with each other, the front side assembly 460 and the rear side assembly 48
0 deformation can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, respectively. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is positioned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is positioned on the upper side plate member. 14e, the speaker assembly 45
0 recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, the recessed portion 462
, 482 is subjected to an upward load from the fastening portion 14 e 1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14 e 1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482 and improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 .

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, fraudulent acts such as illegally entering the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 with a wire, piano wire, or the like are prevented. It can be made easier to control.

In addition, in such fraudulent acts, wires, piano wires, etc. are illegally entered into the game area and nails are deformed. and the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening formed by the wire passing concave portion 464 and the wire pressing convex portion 484. A gap in the opening formed by the wire pressing projection 484 is closed by the speaker connection wire 453 . Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire, or the like enters the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly 450 may be displaced through an opening other than the place where the wire or the piano wire entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 through the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection wires 453 through the upper side plate member 14e are arranged near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, so that wires and piano wires are not required. It is possible to lengthen the distance between the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 , which is the location where the sound and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 .

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be lowered, and it is possible to easily prevent fraudulent profit from being generated.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(c). 124(a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG.
It is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R viewed in the Vd direction. Note that FIG.
) and FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding, while the illustration of the speaker connection line 453 is omitted in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c). .

As shown enlarged in FIG. 124(b), the inner side surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that slopes inward toward the rear side. , the outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124(b)
The upper surface) has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the back side and has an inner surface 461H.
It is shaped so as to fit with i in the assembled state. As a result, the work efficiency of inserting the front sidewall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear sidewall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. A compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124(c), the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed shorter in front-rear dimension than the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal end side main body portion 461T. Therefore, the tip side body portion 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (squeezed) in the intermediate body portion 461M. Thereby, the improvement of an acoustic effect can be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 124(d), the internal space of the tip side body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the interior of the intermediate body portion 461M. A large space is ensured in a form that bulges in the front-rear direction compared to the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easier to hear deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 along line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a).
0, a partial cross-sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional view of the side assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e;

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 extends through the through holes 463a and 463a.
The screw inserted through 483a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are sandwiched between them and the body frame 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a on the front surface of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is attached at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450 .

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction without coming into contact with each other).
And, without the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened and fixed.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is arranged inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is arranged inside). At the lower position of the body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is recessed portion 462,
482 (the part extending to the front side is arranged inside).

In this embodiment, the separate left and right speakers 451 are arranged in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
Conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 arranged in 450L can be avoided, and the reproduced sound can be reproduced with high quality as transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are in contact with each other at the upper part of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125(a)). In the lower part, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side in a portion arranged to face the lower end of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. Namely
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to be in contact (sticky) with the upper side plate member 14e over the entire surface, but is in a line-contact manner particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper side plate member 14e and contacts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member made of ebony, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when arranging a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, it is possible to add depth to the sound.

Moreover, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. Examples include cast iron, steel, glass, and ceramics. By using these members, the rise performance of sound can be improved.

As for the shape, they may protrude in the shape of an elongated plate, may protrude in the shape of spikes, or may protrude in a form with rounded ends. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

In addition, the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is the same as that of the speaker assembly 45.
It is not limited to the back surface of the lower end of 0. For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
The side or front of 50 may also be used.

For example, when arranged on the rear surface of the upper end portion, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw to be inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. Positioning may be done by In this case, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the insulator function depending on the degree of tightening of the screw inserted through the through hole 483a. It is possible to adjust the sound effect by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (the load applied to each other).

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through-hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 remains unaffected by the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting hole 469.
A screw inserted through a through-hole arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction with the same shape as , and a through-hole arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right position where the through-hole is arranged. As a result, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper side plate member 14e.

Regarding fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 41 is fixed.
0 indicates the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (Fig. 1
00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125(b)) to fasten and fix. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, no load is applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely tightening the screws inserted through the through holes 483a (adjusting the degree of tightening).

Also, the same relationship as the above-described speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e is
The same applies to the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can be made to function as an insulator, and the material and contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In addition, Fig. 127
(b) shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the supporting portions 12a,
12b will be explained. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are spaced forward and backward for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13. are placed.

The left end front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that inclines backward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 extending in the left-right direction is formed leftward from the left end. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 are in surface contact.

The rear left end support portion 12b has a rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside thereof and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in a posture of projecting toward the front side as it goes to the left in the state of its natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 and the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a jointly
A tapered shape that expands to the side (to the right) where the game board 13 is arranged in the horizontal direction is formed. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 . Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG.

Figures 128(a) and 128(b) are CXXVIIIa-CXXV of Figure 127(b)
129(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support device 600 and the game board 13. FIG. is. 128 and 129 show the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 in chronological order, and FIG. 128(b) and 129(a) show the game board 13 just before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and FIG. 129(b) shows the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
A part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the drawing.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after adjusting the vertical position of the game board 13 to some extent, the game board 13 is installed.
is slid between the left end front support portion 12a and the left end rear support portion 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128(a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis facing the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the front side is provided. There is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere
can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
1 and the front surface of the game board 13), the game board 13 is rotated so as to approach the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied toward the game board 13 from the elastic support portions 12b1. Namely
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12 .

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction in an arrangement and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and is in an assembled state (see FIG. 90).
A guide rib 1 that supports the game board 13 from below and whose front upper end is cut as an inclined surface
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128(a) to FIG. 128(b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Since the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 each time, the rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side. . Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to approximately 15°, which is larger than the backward inclination (approximately 10°) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement arcade. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from reversing in the front-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
Workability can be improved when the game board 13 is assembled to the inner frame 12 without depending on the backward inclination of the 013. - 特許庁

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 is not limited to this, and may be formed at an inclination angle equivalent to the backward inclination at the time of installation of the amusement arcade. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 rides
The slope of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128(b), as shown in FIG. 129(a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in a released state to be described later, and the rear surface of the game board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640 .

Here, in the released state, the board support device 600 has the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the pre-regulation pawl member 630 (the portion arranged on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed)
Since the game board 13 is constructed so as to retreat from the entry route, the workability of the assembly work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 toward the rear side, a load is applied to the post-rotation pawl member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60 is rotated.
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 . That is, the game board 13
, the state of the upper and lower board support devices 600 changes almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom portion 12c and its vertical position is regulated. Figure 129(a)
) and as shown in FIG. 129(b), between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 does not touch the board surface). It is not pushed up by the support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached as the board support device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when the game board 13 near the right end is pushed to the back side, the game board 13 rotates around the left end as a fulcrum.
The force required for applying a load to 0 can be weakened by the long width dimension of the game board 13, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end portion of the game board 13 is attached to the left end front support portion 12a.
And since it is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the right end of the game board 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. Even if there is, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board surface support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is pushed in to close against the inner frame 12, and the game board 13 The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board surface support device 600 from changing due to the recoil when the front frame 14 is pushed in to close it with respect to the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is restricted in vertical position by the support bottom 12c.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)), the game board 13
is arranged at the lower end of the back side of the game board 13, and is connected to wirings connected to various members and various devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported by the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13. The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged on the inner frame 12 in the vicinity of the board surface support device 600 on the lower side, and the wiring connected to the control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) etc. is connected on the back side. They are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13 .

The floating connector 13a and the receiving side connector 12d are arranged in an inclined posture so that the connection direction is directed along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (Refer to FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 includes a board surface supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12 . Since the pair of upper and lower board support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one of the board support devices 600 will be explained, and the other board support device 600 will be omitted.

130(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600, FIG. 130(b) is a back perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board support device 600. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. Fig. 130
130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIGS. 131(a) and 131(b) show the game board 1
A released state in which the fixation of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the board support device 600 displaces the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotating claw member 620 and the rear rotating claw member 640 in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the top, a front rotating claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and a rotating claw member 620. A regulating front claw member 630 arranged on the front side of the front claw member 620 and rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 inserted through and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and arranged on the back side of the front rotation claw member 620. The post-rotation pawl member 6 is rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation pawl member 620.
40 and .

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at its corners, and a pair of parts of the main body plate portion 611 that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right sides. A pair of support holes 612 formed through the plate portion 611a in a straight line, and an arcuate hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc around the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612. , the plate portion 6 along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612
11 a from below, and the plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612 .
The inner frame 12 is secured by a rod-shaped regulating rod 615 inserted through and fixed to the frame 1a, and a screw extending from the plate portion 611a to the left and right in a flange shape and inserted through the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)). and a pair of fixing plates 616 fastened and fixed to.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member with an enlarged diameter at the end on the insertion base end side.
fixed to This fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
63 is the same, so the explanation is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 includes a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 that are formed through the plate portions 621a that are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right and are axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and through the plate portions 621a on a straight line at the upper corners on the front side. A pair of support holes 623 formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a plate portion 621
A pair of support holes 624 are formed so as to penetrate in a straight line in the rear side part of the part a and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

Note that when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the pre-regulation claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of No. 0, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624.
At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the rotation rear claw member 640.
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion arranged opposite to the left and right, and has a longitudinally long long portion 621a1.
and an extension portion 621a2 extending vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1 connect a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in a side view and the upper edges of the plate portions 621a. A connecting plate portion 621b to be fixed, a rear side extending plate 621c extending from the rear side end portion of the connecting plate portion 621b to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b with a downward inclination of about 45 degrees, Part 621a
2, the hanging back plate portion 621d extends perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a toward the opposite side plate portion 621a, and the hanging back plate portion 621d extends from the lower end of the hanging back plate portion 621d. and a front side extension plate 621e that extends obliquely to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the plane.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging rear plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear-side extended plate 621c is arranged so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, in the released state, the torsion spring NBb abuts and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). By retracting NBb upward, the torsion spring NBb moves toward the body plate portion 611.
begin to come into contact with

As a result, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated on the operator side. Immediately before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, it is possible to suppress the force of rotation of the game board 13 by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while reducing the force required at the start of pushing.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts on the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 . The front-side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the front regulating claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to move the lower end of the post-rotation claw member 640 away from the rear side wall of the body plate portion 611 .

The pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged to face the main body plate portion 631, which is formed in the shape of a letter in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner portion, and a part of the main body plate portion 631, which is arranged to be opposed to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 penetrating the plate portion 631a on a straight line and supported by the second shaft member P62, and a front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the lower end of the front connecting plate 631b are inclined to the front side. It is mainly provided with an inclined extension plate 633 extending in the same direction and a curved surface 634 curved as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The obliquely extending plate 633 is a plate portion arranged opposite to the front frame 14, and
is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), thereby regulating the free posture change of the front regulating claw member 630 .

The post-rotation claw member 640 includes a main body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in a side view by bending a sheet metal member at right angles at corners, and a part of the main body plate portion 641, which is arranged opposite to the left and right. A pair of supported holes 642 penetrating through the plate portion 641a on a straight line and supported by the third shaft member P63, and a front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of plate portions 641a to the rear side from the lower end portion thereof. and an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

The front connecting plate 641b is a portion that abuts on the back side of the game board 13 and regulates the front and rear positions of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is inclined at an angle of contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129(a)). It is formed.

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a), and 135(b) show the process of changing the board support device 600 from the released state to the fixed state in chronological order. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135
In (b), the arrangement of the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged close to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the released state of the board support device 600 is shown in FIG. 135(b).
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated. In addition, in the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is arranged right behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation pawl member 640 rotates too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is applied with a biasing force in the direction of approaching the hanging rear plate portion 621d by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, when no other external force acts, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging rear plate portion 621d. on the other hand,
A change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is regulated by the contact between the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the regulation rod 615 .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the rotation front claw member 6
20 tilts on the front side where the extended portion 621a2 is arranged, while the front regulating claw member 630 rises on the front side in such a manner as to separate from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

More specifically, the regulating rod 615 is the front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
134(a) to FIG. 13
5( a )), the front side end of the regulation front claw member 630 rises as the rotation front claw member 620 tilts. In other words, the pre-regulation pawl member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 .

On the other hand, a non-resisting portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resisting portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is arranged to face the regulating rod 615,
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction about the second shaft member P62, the rising motion of the front regulating pawl member 630 is released, and the front regulating pawl member 630 faces the inclined extension plate 633. The tip portion is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (Fig. 135(a) to Fig. 135
(b)).

The angular range in which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is raised (Fig. 134(a) to Fig. 135(a)
), even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting the front end portion of the front regulation claw member 630, is applied to the regulation front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the change in posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 at this time is a change in posture toward the direction facing the downward load (posture change in the rising direction), the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 against the downward load becomes excessive. Attitude change of 630 is restricted.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the pre-rotation pawl member 620 by applying a downward load to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 .
can be suppressed from rotating. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the front regulating claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting motion of the front claw member 620 can be suppressed. In this embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 is released, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 is positioned so as to abut on the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630 . , the shape of the front connection plate 631b, and the length and inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the back side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the back side extension plate 621c
and the game board 13, rubbing friction occurs. As a result, the game board 1 is in the state of FIG. 134(b).
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13,
It is possible to prevent the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the recoil.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the release state of the board surface support device 600, in the case of a structure in which the front rotation claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, it is arranged on the front frame 14. Depending on the manner of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 may reach the fixed state, and the board surface support device 600 may not reach the fixed state and may be stabilized at an incomplete angle. may occur.

The board support device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle, and in that state the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
can be closed, the distance between the rear surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 is shortened, which may interfere with the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function When the cover member 171 and the front regulating claw member 630 abut against each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from being closed. As a result, it is possible to make the store clerk who is performing the work of closing the front frame 14 aware that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

Upon noticing this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state. You can stabilize the distance from the front.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 and the restricting front claw member 171 are in a state immediately before the rotation front claw member 620 is fixed. Depending on the manner of contact of the member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach the fixed state, or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach the fixed state and will be stabilized at an incomplete angle. The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 projects to a position where it can contact the front regulation claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not regulated by the regulation bar 615 .

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the contact between the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13. None.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation pawl member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is fixed, the tilting operation of the front side end portion of the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is allowed. there is

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed at the position just before the board surface support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk's force to push the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 9
To solve the situation that the front frame 14 does not close even when it is installed stably in the splitting direction, and in this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 to the board surface support device 600
When a load is applied to the board support device 600, the load can change the board support device 600 into a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state so that the rear surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact (FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the rear side. That is, the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, the pre-rotation pawl member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front side end portion of the pre-regulating pawl member 630, the state of the board support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board support device 600 facing the game board 13 come into contact with each other in the front-rear direction. In this state, the game board 13
moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the hanging back plate portion 621d. is given as a resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13
can be suppressed from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

Between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b), the front regulating pawl member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resisting portion 634b is disposed facing the regulating rod 615. (See FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the first shaft member P61 is the center. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resisting portion 634b abuts against the regulation bar 615, and the resistance against movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side due to the reaction. can be suppressed.

Also, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
135(b), a curved surface whose radius gradually increases around the second shaft member P62 is formed.

135(a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed rearward by the multifunctional cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates to rotate the second shaft member P62.
is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are momentarily separated from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the front regulating pawl member 630 from the regulating rod 615 is momentarily reduced, and the front regulating pawl member 630 vigorously approaches the hanging rear plate portion 621d due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, in the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135(a), the front frame 14 is set to the closed position in the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, so that the multifunctional cover member 171 can be replaced by the front regulating claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , and then the board support device 600 can be brought into a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the back side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 and the multifunctional cover member 171 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14. , can improve the work efficiency of workers.

When the board support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
is pulled upward in the front direction to rotate the front regulating pawl member 630 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 6
15 are not in contact with each other), the front regulation pawl member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is in the released state.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129(a) and 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
3 abuts on the lower surface of the back-side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. As shown in FIG. This eliminates the risk of the game board 13 falling forward when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

It should be noted that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be switched between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support device 600 changes, as in the present embodiment, if the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 will not match up and down. , the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the pre-rotation claw member 620, and the post-rotation claw member 64, which are operated when the board support device 600 is brought into the released state, are controlled.
0 behavior is inconsistent. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135(a) and 135(b), the pre-rotation pawl member 6 supporting the game board 13 is larger than the amount by which the pre-regulation pawl member 630 is displaced.
20 and the amount by which the post-rotation pawl member 640 is displaced is smaller.

Therefore, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (to the extent that the return is regulated by the regulation rod 615), the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 are displaced. Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 . Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

Further, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620 . That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135(b)) to the released state (see FIG. 13)
4(a)), the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be displaced in the direction of widening the angle between the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is said that

Therefore, compared with the displacement amount of the pre-rotation pawl member 620, since the displacement amount of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation pawl member 640 can be suppressed, 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. As a result, the game board 1
The load applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described. Figures 136 to 139 are CXXXVI-
It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

136 shows the released state of the board support device 600, FIG. 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, and FIG. 139 shows the rotated state, the state immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 is shown in phantom lines. be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the board support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. To facilitate understanding, FIGS. 136 and 1
138 and 139, the opening/closing regulating portion 159 cross-sectionally viewed at 37 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the open/close regulating portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
While the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed when it is disengaged, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted when the game board 13 is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), the interference between the opening/closing regulation part 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, by arranging the game board 13 on the back side compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13 interferes with the operation part back member 155 above the opening/closing regulation part 159. is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed state side by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is arranged at the closed position (FIG. 1
38), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 prevents the pre-rotation claw member 620 from rotating in the direction of rotation. (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (
Since the reaction force becomes excessive due to the counterclockwise direction) being the opposite direction, it is difficult with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 134(b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13, closing the front frame 14 is restricted. In particular, when the game board 13 is arranged, there is a possibility that the lower end of the front side of the game board 13 and the rear side extension plate 621c may come into contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is strengthened.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139), the open/close restricting portion 159 and the , and the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the action of the regulating rod 615 causes the pre-rotation claw member 620 to rotate. direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front regulating pawl member 630 (
8 (counterclockwise direction) is not reversed, and it can be easily pushed in with a normal load as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG.
can be fixed, allowing the front frame 14 to be closed.

140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and inner frame 12. FIG. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover member that closes the rear surface of the ball shooting unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will now be described with reference to FIGS. 142-148. FIG. 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 142(b)
is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In addition, FIG. 143(a) shows a disassembled state after the cover member 721 is opened, and FIG. 143(b) shows a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then turned back and forth. . That is, in FIG. 143(b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the rear side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball shooting unit 112a includes a base member 710 made of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 made of resin attached to the base member 710. The closed state (see FIG. 142(a)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered (see FIG. 142(a)), and the open state (see FIG. 23 (
a) See) a ball feeding device 720 having a cover member 721 pivotably supported between
and are mainly provided.

The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721. The base member 711 is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like that is elastically deformable, is disposed on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of synthetic resin or the like. , a firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a firing rail 730 that guides the ball P8 shot by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and a ball receiving member 731 to regulate the posture. a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically projected toward the front side at an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line toward the front side from the base member 710 and into which a screw for fastening and fixing the ball receiving member 731 is screwed; mounting holes 718 and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719 .

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 7 that is bored to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portions 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a projecting portion 714 protruding toward the front side close to the right side of the locking portion 713, and an attraction force generating solenoid 741 is arranged to face the attraction force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)). and a defect determination convex portion 715 provided convexly.

The protruding portion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142(a)), and extends to the left inner side of the ball passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is closed. A facing plane 714a formed as a plane facing the side surface 724c and parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the left-right opposite side of the facing plane 714a and inclined rightward toward the rear side. and a surface 714b.

When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generating solenoid 741, but the fastening force generating solenoid 741 is loosened ( It abuts against the cover member 721 when it is floating above the cover member 721 , and is formed with a protrusion height that restricts the rotation of the cover member 721 .

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the attractive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened. It is possible to make the user aware that the fastening of the generation solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, it is possible to perform repair (fasten and fix the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a problem occurs in the ball shooting unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably and axially supported by a base member 711,
Switching is controlled to change the state between a regulation state that regulates the flow of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721 and a permitting state that permits the flow of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) onto the launch rail 730. and a device 740 .

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed into a cup shape with the back side (the front side of the paper surface in the posture of FIG. a bar P
8 (see FIG. 144). a cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 that pivotally supports a ball guide arm member 742 of a switching device 740
6 and .

The switching device 740 includes an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft portion 726 .
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not 41 generates a magnetic force, and a sheet metal member that is locked to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attracting force generating solenoid 741. A metal plate 743, a guide slanted portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and which is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and which is inclined downward as it moves away from the ball passage opening 724, and upward from the base of the guide slanted portion 744. It is extended by a distance that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is the axial rod portion 72
6, and a regulating projecting portion 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage through which the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be guided.
a, and a rib portion 724b which is arranged above the flow-down plate portion 724a so as to face it and which extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, the extending tip surface of which is inclined downward toward the back side,
A left inner side surface 724 that is continuous with the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface formed along the vertical direction.
and c. With these configurations, the ball P8 that has flowed into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and rightward.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142(a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, sphere P8
flows downward from the cutting metal member 725 in a lateral direction, so that the cutting metal member 7
25 is arranged in such a manner as to protrude inside the ball passage opening 724, collision between the ball P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member that extends upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. Ball P8 (Fig. 14) near the lower end of the rail member.
4) are arranged at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball receiving member 731 .

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is regulated in a posture in which the extending direction of the launch rail 730 and the elongated direction are parallel, and that is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as an elongated hole along the direction and through which a fastening screw is passed.
Similarly to the bulging portion 716a, it is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through hole 731a). and a regulating groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protrusion height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened to the base member 710, the position of the through hole 731a to be fastened together with the fastening portion 716 is selected.
6a can be slid along the inflated straight line, thereby allowing the sphere P8 (Fig. 14
4) can be adjusted (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P81 (the operation handle 51
(see FIG. 86)) can be easily adjusted.
Since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be maintained unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed by bending a metal plate to have a substantially M-shaped cross section, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed to have a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending obliquely upward to the left, and a rolling plate portion 730a. It has mounting plate portions 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730a.
0b and 730c are attached to the base member 710 with screws inserted through a plurality of (two in this embodiment) attachment holes 732 formed.

A rail guard 733 made of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c to prevent noise and vibration caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface that has a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is shaped like a ball P8 (FIG. 146(b)
)) are configured to guide the sphere P8 upward by contacting two front and rear portions on the peripheral surface of ).

FIGS. 144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing in chronological order how the ball is delivered by the ball delivery device 720. FIG. 144(a) to 144
In (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

144(a), the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulated state (the power supply to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). , the regulating projecting portion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, contacts the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. is regulated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (state in which power is supplied to the attracting force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protruding portion 745 retreats above the sphere, and the restriction on the flow of the sphere P8 is released, so that the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. As shown in FIG. In this state, the sphere P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711 to prevent it from further flowing down, and stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state, so that the ball P8 riding on the guide slope portion 744 descends to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. be done. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744 and is guided to the launch rail 730. As shown in FIG.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144(c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144(a), even in the state shown in FIG. flow is regulated. Thus, balls can be fed to launch rail 730 one ball at a time. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 86) and stored in the upper tray 17. be.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. A cut with an acute angle is formed between the lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and the same plate as the plate on the proximal side of the lower blade portion 725b. Upper blade portion 72 extending from
5c and .

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip thereof is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side projects upward from the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower edge of the upper blade portion 725c slopes downward toward the proximal side (left side), and the upper edge of the lower blade portion 725b slopes upward toward the proximal side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a kite string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIGS. 146 and 147, the sphere P
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 147(a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in 46(a), FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 147(b) is FIG. 147(a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a, a partial front view of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. FIG. 146 and 14
7, the illustration of some components of the ball launching unit 112a is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146(a) and 146(b), the ball P guided to the launch rail 730
8 stays in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146(a)). From this state, the firing solenoid 701 is energized, causing the plunger 702 to protrude vigorously. , a launch force is applied to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is launched along the launch rail 730 (see FIG. 147(a)).

Here, the ball P8 is launched with one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the string Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the string Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. , loosening, etc., is known to cause the ball P8 to be repeatedly detected by the winning opening.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner that it is drawn to the right as it goes toward the rear side. (See FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is launched in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and the launch rail 730
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the upper blade It enters the lower side of the portion 725c and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

While the player is gripping the front end (the other end) of the string Y8, a load is applied to one end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8 as the ball P8 is launched, causing the string Y8 to is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the thread Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize winning opening.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a possibility that the string Y8 will not be cut due to insufficient tensile force applied to the string Y8. The ball flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the thread Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the prize-winning opening, so that the fraudulent act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the prize-winning opening can be eliminated.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the effect operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the effect operation unit 1000. FIG. The game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 is different from the game board 13 shown in FIG. are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and a forward/backward motion unit 900 arranged on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advance/retreat operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operation device 800 by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advance/retreat operation, i.e., movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and movement toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, movement including at least one of the movement of retracting toward the outside of the display area of the pattern display device 81), and the petal movement device 800 is connected to one end, and the other. is pivotally supported on the back plate 1100 and the arm gear 9
24, a drive-side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921, and a drive motor 92 that generates the drive force for driving the drive-side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 composed of a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, and the drive side arm member 910 slides in the left and right direction in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930, a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding motion of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal motion device on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910. and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 connecting the 800 .

Next, the structure of the petal motion device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 shows the petal motion device 80
0, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of petal motion device 800 taken along line CLIV--CLIV of FIG. In addition, in FIG. 154, the supporting base material 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

The petal motion device 800 is configured such that members such as petals 802 are supported by a supporting base material 801 . As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is arranged on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing, it is made of a resin material and is a substantially rectangular plate. It comprises a shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position near the upper right portion of the central body portion of the supporting base material 801 , and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 extends forward through a narrow gap formed in the supporting base material 801 . A first gear 804G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the projection.

An opening 8 is located slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central body of the support base 801 .
01P is drilled, is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, an arc plate 88 for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, is provided.
A doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass.
(see FIG. 152) is formed.

Central motor 804 of support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side below (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically long, roughly oval area in the central portion. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper end portion.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 as a whole has a shape that extends slightly vertically.
If the support base 801 is formed in a shape that is long in the vertical direction rather than in the shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the operation space can be reduced.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively concentrically arranged with a second gear 830G and a third gear 810 overlapping the position of the opening 801P as will be described later.
Since it is interlockingly connected (linked) to G, it can be arranged at any position as long as it is on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and does not interfere with each other. They are arranged to the right through the 2nd gear 830G and the 3rd gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal motion device 800 that is supported in a slightly tilted posture toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from sagging downward. can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base 801 and the drive-side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801. driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base 801 by

155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 155 and 156, illustration of the supporting base material 801 is omitted in order to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of the five petals separated from each other, which constitutes a hibiscus flower in an open state as a whole. , and has a plate-like flat plate member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arcuate front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arranged state, and has a shape that gently bulges forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
4).

The surface of the petal 802 is formed with irregular unevenness including a large number of wrinkles, and the periphery also has an irregularly uneven shape when viewed from the front. Strictly speaking, the five petals 802 do not have the same shape, and although there are slight differences in unevenness and the like, they are formed in roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red), but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is darkened in the specific color (red) without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. Coloring is done.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a threaded portion 802S extending cylindrically rearward and having a screw hole inside, at two locations near the outer circumference of the rear side surface of each petal 802 and at the center portion in the radial direction. there is

The petals 802 are arranged on the side of the rounded tip from the position where they are fastened to the flat plate member 803 (the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front, the right side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)).
The front side portion 802b arranged on the side of the sharp tip shape from 2a (the clockwise side when viewed from the front, the left side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is positioned closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fit device 880 than the rear side 802a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of one adjacent petal 802, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus five petals. petals 802 are arranged so that the tips on the inner peripheral side are directed toward the same center and gathered.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear directions, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are separated from each other in the concentrated position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
Since the positional relationship between b and b can be superimposed in the front and back, the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is made noticeable. be able to.

The five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) posterior side surface with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

The flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS.
02, they are long plate-shaped resin members separated from each other.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending from the center to the outer peripheral side in a substantially rectangular shape in the arranged state, and further has a shape in which the outer peripheral edge extends forward.

Also, the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner circumference) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state
A pair of threaded portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (transverse direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with each other. A slide rib 803a which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting 803S and extends rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S. , formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, there are screw insertion holes at two locations corresponding to the screw-insertion portions 802S of the petals 802.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 8 of the corresponding petal 802 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 .
02S is abutted from the front and screws are screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat plate member 803 is fixed to the corresponding petal 802, respectively.

158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. FIG. 155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 158 and 159 as appropriate. A slit member 810 is arranged behind the flat plate member 803 as shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-shaped member made of resin having a front shape in which five similar shaped portions are continuous in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front side peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear side peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

Returning to FIG. 156, description will be made. On the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, two adjacent two out of five equally spaced places in the circumferential direction and one place in the middle of the three places excluding the two are cylindrically shaped in the front and rear direction. A threaded portion 813S having a threaded hole is formed integrally therewith.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to protrude in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of this bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, the details of which will be described later.

The slit member 810 has a central slit 814 and side slits 815 as shown in FIG. Each of the central slits 814 is formed to linearly extend further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 . However, in the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 81
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in the pachinko machine 8010) counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight gap.

In this manner, a set of three slits, that is, the central slit 814 and the two-side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five points in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72° intervals). Note that each end of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two-side slit 815 located on the outermost side in the set of these three slits, that is, among the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the smaller diameter side are the two-side slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape extending in the direction of extension of 815 (with a rectangular cut). This rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803. As shown in FIG.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side ends of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral side ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815. is provided with an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811 .

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed. Therefore, the central slit 814 and the side slits 81
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which 5 is formed in the circumferential direction and the axial direction.

Also, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since the sets each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the five sets of central slits 814 and the two side slits 815 are arranged so as to come together inwardly. , are arranged more densely, and this also results in the slit member 81
0 has a compact profile.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are circular openings 811
In the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, rather than in the case of being arranged and formed so as to extend radially along this radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the , the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 can be laid out more densely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , slide members 820 are arranged in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 from behind the slit member 810 . slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin member having a long plate-like front shape. , a central portion that bulges out with a greater thickness than the effecting portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 that is drilled in the extending portion, and the slide member 820 from the center to the front. A guide pin 822 protruding on the side and inserted through the central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to protrude from the center of the slide member 820 to the rear side and pass through the slide member 820 back and forth. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the sliding member 820 is positioned so that the central slit 814 and the longitudinal direction of the slit member 820 intersect each other at right angles with the extending direction of the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 . and the slits 815 on both sides.

On the other hand, in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 810,
The threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810 very slightly. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted through the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820 from the rear side, and are screwed into the screw portions 803S of the plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
03 is fixed on the rear side. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with little clearance, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost aligned along the corresponding outer edges of the slits 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. inserted without gaps.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is held by the guide pin 8.
It is restrained by slide rib 803a so that it slides in a constant outward orientation without turning around 22. As shown in FIG.

160 is a front perspective view of slide member 820 and central motor 804, FIG.
161(b) are rear perspective views of slide member 820 and central motor 804. FIG. Note that the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted in FIG. 161(a). In addition, Fig. 16
155 and 156 will be referred to in the description of 0 and 161 as appropriate.

A rotating plate 830 is further arranged from the rear side of the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached as described above. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and has a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the peripheral wall
It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 . The width of the inner side of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight clearance of play. The edge corner portion at the extending end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be rounded.

From the position where the guide rail 832 is in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831,
It extends clockwise in the front view along a direction substantially intermediate between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831, and then arcuately further clockwise in the front view than the intermediate direction. While curving, it extends to a position near the outer circumference of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 175(a)).

The end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion that contacts the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the central end, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall on the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end portion thereof protrudes forward from the front end portion of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 .

Around the peripheral wall of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above. It extends so as to expand in a spiral shape from the surroundings to the outside.

As shown in FIG. 161, on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, a second gear 830G extending rearward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 in the form of a peripheral wall and having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed. The second gear 830G is arranged so as to mesh with the first gear 804G and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804. As shown in FIG.

The rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 154 . At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174(c)).

Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five locations as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is linearly rather than surface-wise. As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is fitted over the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is smoothly rotatably supported.

Further behind the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), the second gear 830G
A third gear 810G having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the pivot opening 831 and having a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed so as to be concentric, and is arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is bored in the center of the third gear 810G.
0a, there are screw insertion holes 810b at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a. A positioning hole 810c is drilled in each.

The third gear 810G is arranged so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G fitted on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
Positioning is performed by inserting the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) into the positioning hole 810c, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 810b into the screw portion 813S (see FIG. 1).
56).

As a result, the slit member 810 is linked to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805. is held by the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to come off.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a central shaft rotating device 850 is arranged from the front side of the slit member 810 . The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably loosely fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

162 is an exploded front perspective view of the center shaft rotating device 850 and loose fit device 880, FIG.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the cylindrical peripheral wall is cut along the axial direction, and a shaft portion 852 of the shaft portion 852. A disk-shaped flange 855 is provided at the front end to increase the diameter, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a bore portion 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 in the front-rear direction. Around the bore portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front side threaded portion 857 having a screw hole inside and a threaded portion 857 on the side of the bore portion 856 from the front side threaded portion 857 are provided at two locations on the left and right sides of the bore portion 856. A holding portion 858 that has a counterbore at a deviated position and is drilled toward the rear side, and two columnar support projections 859 that slightly extend slightly forward are integrally formed. . The front end of the front threaded portion 857 and the base of the support projection 859 have the same extension height.

On the inner peripheral surface of the inner cavity portion 856, there are cylindrically extending along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 so as to be parallel to two opposing locations, extend further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and extend inside. A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. Further, rear positioning bosses 854 are integrally formed at positions equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 on the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is mounted on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
is placed. The LED board 861 is a substantially disc-shaped board having a slightly smaller diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED board 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 for positioning, and the screw is passed through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861 to the central shaft member 8 .
51 , the LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 .

In addition, an insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and has a size that allows the threaded portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, there are a central point and a number of points arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles extending in multiple (double) directions around this one point. LE
Each D865 is arranged and fixed, and emits light toward the front.

Sideways LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a large number of positions arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is designed to The lateral LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 and the forward LEDs 865 are alternately arranged concentrically. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 so as to face rearward.

A central decorative member 868 is arranged on the front side of the LED substrate 861 . central decorative member 868
, which has a specific color (yellow) but is made of a resin material that is almost transparent, extends from a long plate-shaped base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and has a screw hole in the center that can be screwed in. A pair of threaded portions 869 are provided.

The threaded portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 . LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 is inserted into the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D board 861 interposed therebetween.
The central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by screwing a screw into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855 . Thereby, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861 .

The loose fitting device 880 includes a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed in a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. A large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter It mainly includes a body cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and rotatably and loosely fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 .

The main body cylindrical member 883 is provided with screw-in portions 883S, which extend cylindrically in the front-rear direction and have screw holes therein, integrally at two of the four locations equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the portion where the threaded portion 883S is not formed among the above-mentioned four portions.

At four locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a, the body cylindrical member 8 is
83 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction. In addition, on the main body cylindrical member 883, rib-like projections are projected in the outer diameter direction at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with a projection length similar to that of the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. Sliding rib 88 extending over
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 149), the decorative member 884 covering the LED board 861 from the front side and the decorative member 884 are arranged on the outside. A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter, forms a cup shape with an empty bottom rising toward the front from the outer peripheral side of the fastening portion, abuts on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side, and is fastened and fixed. , are provided.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in this pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, so that the side surfaces are mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the lateral LEDs 866 arranged on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 near the outer periphery, it is possible to perform light emission effects.

The decorative member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 arranged on the LED substrate 861. The decorative member 884 is shaped like a hibiscus flower and transmits light in a specific color (red). a front side plate portion made of a resin material having a specific property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the rear side plate portion forming a disc shape with a peripheral wall standing upright on the rear side thereof. An opening 885 having a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted is formed in the central portion.

The body cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851 . The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G arranged behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161(a), a fourth gear 880G having a slightly smaller diameter than the third gear 810G and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed.
It is meshed with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that are rotatably supported by the supporting base material 801 and mesh with each other.

One gear of the intermediate gear 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear that meshes with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is the intermediate gear 8
08 in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is bored in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and the pivot opening 880a
0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at positions corresponding to the two threaded portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are formed at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. there is

The fourth gear 880G is arranged so as to be superimposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted on the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. 883a (see FIG. 163) is inserted into the positioning hole 880c for positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the screw insertion hole 880b into the screw portion 883S (FIG. 16).
3) is screwed into place.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from slipping off, and the slit The member 810 is held by the body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to come off.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending rearward in an arc around the rotation shaft on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. The detection arc plates 880d are arranged at five locations with equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is positioned at the doughnut-shaped concave portion 80
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler-type detection sensor 801C arranged to detect a member passing through the doughnut-shaped concave portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from any posture, the detection arc plate 88
The rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (center angle 72°) can be detected (minimum angle 7
2° detection can be performed, and rotations of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

Assembly of the central shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their rear ends slightly protrude rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base 801 .
(See FIG. 152) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning notch (not shown), and the rear screw portion 853 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into the screw insertion portion 801S of the support base 801. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting it into the insertion hole and screwing it.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the bore portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the mounting structure described above, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base member 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG.
The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted on the outside, and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 is fitted with the front side peripheral wall portion 8
12 is fitted on the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is provided at eight places along the circumferential direction, and the threaded portions 883S,
Since the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b bulge out locally, the slit member 810 contacts the inner peripheral surface of the rear side peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 linearly rather than surfacely. The rear side peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted around the body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is smoothly rotatably supported.

FIG. 164 shows the petal motion device 800, the drive side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
0 and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the backplate 1100. FIG. The petal motion device 800 vertically moves (advances and retreats) by receiving a load in the vertical direction from the drive-side arm member 910 . 150 to 15 in the description after FIG.
2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a laterally elongated rectangular member that is fastened and fixed to the deepest part inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the game board 13. A support column 1110 that protrudes in the front side in a columnar shape, a gear housing portion 1120 that is recessed above the support column 1110 so that a plurality of gears can be accommodated from the front side, and a vertical straight line at the center position of the left and right. The rail fixing portion 1130 arranged in the rail fixing portion 1130
and a supporting long hole 1140 formed as a long hole inclined downward toward the rail fixing portion 1130 on the left and right opposite sides of the supporting column 1110 across the rail.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910,
In the vicinity of the outer circumference of the front side end, a screw-in portion 1111 formed as a pair of left and right holes into which a screw can be screwed, and a pair of upper and lower screw portions 1111 on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111 on the front side. a locating boss 1112 extending into the .

As shown in FIG. 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and one end thereof is perforated in a circular shape in the front-rear direction and has a support column. 1110, a rotary shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110; A transmission long hole 913 is drilled in a linear long hole shape from the bending point of the long main body member toward the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the other end of the long main body member supports the petal motion device 800. A support portion 914 is mainly provided.

The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting convex portion 925 that is fitted in the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162 . In conjunction with it, it rotates about the support column 1110 as an axis.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed. A first accommodation portion 1121 and a second accommodation portion 11 connected to the first accommodation portion 1121
22 and a third accommodation portion 112 that accommodates an arm gear 924 that is arranged directly opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween and that is fitted with the drive-side arm member 910 .
3 and .

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, illustration is omitted in FIG. 165) that is supported so as to be vertically slidable by stacking a plurality of metal plates in the front-rear direction. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits into the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. placed on a line.
The rigidity of the motion rail 1000R keeps the attitude of the petal motion device 800 constant.

The support elongated hole 1140 is an elongated hole for slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is inclined at an angle of about 50° in a front view so as to descend toward the left. An extension wall 1141 extending to the front side is provided.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven-side arm member 950 is composed of a long bar-shaped main body member that is formed in a substantially straight line when viewed from the rear. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported in the support slot 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 that supports the petal motion device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted in the supported convex portion 951 , and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state in which the collar is fitted in the long support hole 1140 . Thus, the driven side arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100 . That is, the inner diameter of the collar is made slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side base material 1000S and the second effect member 940, and FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive side arm member 910, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940. be.

The slide plate 930 is slidably supported in the lateral base 1000S by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported elongated holes 931 drilled in the front-rear direction in the form of elongated holes extending in the left-right direction. It is connected to the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive-side arm member 910 through a base-end-side elongated hole 932 that is drilled in the front-back direction in the shape of a vertically-extending elongated hole provided on the left-end side, and is provided on the right-end-side. It is connected with the second effect member 940 through a tip side insertion hole 933 drilled in the front-rear direction.

The base-side elongated hole 932 has a stopping portion 932a formed at its upper end along the trajectory of the connecting projection 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a. and a displacement portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a columnar portion arranged in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side of the back plate 1100 in a front view, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed. a plate-shaped member that is fastened and fixed to the support column portion 1150 that has a fastening plate portion 1001S that is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; The support projections 1002S are provided in a columnar shape to the rear side in a positional relationship (three locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931, and the support projections 1002S are provided circularly in the front-view right corner in the front-rear direction. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940 together with the shaft support hole 1003S, and an arc recess 1004S that is recessed in an arc shape having the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Protrusive streak portion 1005S protruding on the front side along an arc shape having the same center as
and are mainly provided.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar extends from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and supported elongated hole 931, and in this state, a retaining screw is screwed from the tip of the support projection 1002S to support the slide plate 930 in a slidable manner. be.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc recessed portion 1004S and the protruding portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second effect member 940. It is the part that In addition, the protrusion 1005S does not contact when the second effect member 940 is in the regular position, but is formed with a protrusion height that allows contact when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body part whose lower end is bifurcated and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support 941. A shaft support pillar 941 which is provided in a columnar shape and is pivotally supported with a collar interposed in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary projection which is arranged close to the shaft support pillar 941 and is provided in a columnar shape to the rear side. a portion 942;
Mainly provide

The shaft support 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S. It has an inlet 941a (see FIG. 152). The shaft supporting support portion 941 is placed in the shaft support hole 1003 with the collar interposed therebetween.
A disc-shaped cover member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S is placed at the tip of the cover member 945 inserted into the shaft S.
5 plays a role of retaining. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted through the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar to the distal end thereof. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the tip end side insertion hole 933 .

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second effect member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary projections 942 come into contact with the arc recesses 1004S to generate resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

Description will be made with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screw-in portions 1161 into which screws can be screwed when fastening the plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 that detects the flange portion 926 projecting radially outward within a range of a predetermined angle from the arm gear 924, and a collar that guides the coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal motion device 800 are rotatably shafted. A shaft support 1163 to be supported, a cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the substrate cover 1000C on the lower right side of the long support hole 1140, and the substrate cover 1000C arranged close to the cover support portion 1164.
00C, which is hidden from the front view, and a threaded portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the direction of movement of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the part that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 when viewed from the front is missing,
The displacement of the second effect member 940 can be restricted by the screw-in portion 1006S.

In this way, the board cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are arranged in a back-and-forth layered manner and fastened to each other. 1000C, side base material 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. This makes it easy to suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base member 1000S even when the petal motion device 800, which is a heavy device, is moved up and down by rotating the drive-side arm member 910. can be done.

Next, referring to FIGS. 168 to 173, the vertical motion of the petal motion device 800 by the forward/backward motion unit 900 will be described. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100, FIG. 169, FIG.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal motion device 800 and the forward/backward motion unit 900. FIG.

168 and 169 illustrate a state in which the drive-side arm member 910 is arranged on the upper end side of the movement range, and FIGS. ) is arranged at the connecting position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the proximal side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS.
is arranged on the lower end side of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, when the driving side arm member 910 is located at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is aligned with the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 173). 151) as a base point and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 . Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting convex portion 9
25 is displaced, and the drive-side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive motor 921 idles).

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the petal motion device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, while the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are kept in the same position. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal motion device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 .

From FIGS. 170 and 171 to FIGS. 172 and 173, it is visually recognized that the petal operating device 800 and the second effect member 940 are interlocked due to the interlocking of the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930. can be made

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 toward the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, the second effect member 940 moves to the position where the petal motion device 800 was originally arranged, so that the second effect member 940 moves to the position of the petal motion device 800.
It can be visually recognized as if it is operating following 00.

Next, the collection and rotation operation of the petal motion device 800 will be described. 174(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 174(b) is a front view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 174(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
175(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 176(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
177(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal motion device 800, and FIG. 178(b).
is a front view of the petal motion device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a front view showing the petal motion device 800 with the central shaft rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a slit member 810 and a front view of the rotating plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is the petal motion device 8. FIG.
179(c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(d) is a rear perspective view of the petal motion device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal motion device 800 is lowered by the up-and-down motion and is at the lowest position, it moves from the initial position (collected position) shown in FIGS.
178 and 179 to the fully open position shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, perform a rotating operation (second operation) at the fully open position, and then gather It is configured to perform an operation (third operation) and return to the initial position (collecting position).

At the initial position (collected position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
4 (the end on the side of the circular opening 811), and along with this, as shown in FIGS. in position and clustered together to form an open hibiscus flower.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (collected position) as described above, the central motor 804 drives the first
When the gear 804G is rotated counterclockwise in rear view as indicated by arrow A9 in FIG.
0 is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in rear view as indicated by arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front side peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance. can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted on the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 through the circular opening 811 as described above. Since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a torque small enough to initiate the above-described rotary plate 830. FIG.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotor plate 8 is initially rotated.
30 is rotated as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotary plate 830 is driven to rotate as described above, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the guide rail 832 on its front side rotates counterclockwise in a front view as indicated by an arrow A11.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) so as to be guided by the guide rail 832 and pushed outward along the radial direction.

At this time, the slide pin 823 moves along the slit member 81 as shown in FIG. 174(d).
0 center slit 814 , the slide pin 823 moves along the center slit 814 while being linearly guided from the inner end to the outside.

At this time, since the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, some torque is also applied to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque. While the slit member 810 is held stationary, the slide pin 823 moves toward the center slit 8 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.
It will move linearly outward along 14 .

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start expanding radially outward from the concentrated position. In this spreading operation, the slit member 8
As described above, the 10 central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. A relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but on the other hand, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to this inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in front view, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large, but the slide pin is moved by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, so that the petals 802 can be expanded more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the case described above, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and furthermore, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed increases. Both declines become more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 as shown in FIG. After that, it extends outward from the direction D15 while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view, and the five guide rails 832 extend outward in a spiral shape as a whole. .

The more the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the more the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rail 832
is curved more arcuately toward the clockwise side in front view than the direction D15, the more the slide pin 823
Both the decrease in load on and the decrease in movement speed become more pronounced.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in a front view and curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830 is formed in a groove shape, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, it is configured to reduce the load on the slide pin 823 while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 to reduce it.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates therethrough, there is little fear of deviation. is configured to

In this way, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 with the guide rail 832, troubles such as deviation can be prevented and power transmission can be ensured.
14, the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is increased.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted
4 (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position, and the expanding operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially apart, so that they are continuously visible outside the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. A petal 802 is arranged in the . As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are viewed as one piece like a slightly larger hibiscus flower compared to the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized (see FIG. 174(b)). 178(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and can no longer move outward, the slide pin 823
is locked at the outer end of the central slit 814, the rotary plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805.
Therefore, by stopping the operation of the central motor 804, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the expansion operation is completed.

After completion of the opening operation, the center motor 804 transmits rotational power in the same direction to the rotary plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotary plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as indicated by arrow A12 in FIG. 178(d) together with the rotary plate 830. In this way, after the opening operation, the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully opened state as indicated by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the expanding operation and the rotary plate 830 is continuously applied with rotational power, the expanding operation and the rotating operation can be performed immediately without any interval. can be transferred.

When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in a fully open state as indicated by an arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A14 in FIG. 178(b). Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

After completing the rotation operation, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G,
179(b), when the slit member 810 is rotated clockwise in the rear view as indicated by the arrow A15, the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state. b), as indicated by an arrow A15, it is rotationally driven in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, thereby performing the collecting operation in the direction opposite to the spreading operation.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 , to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit of the central slit 814 . 174 and 175, and returns to the gathering state to complete the gathering operation.

Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal motion device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Once again, the central motor 804 drives the first gear 804
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction shown by the arrow A15 in FIG.
174(b), rotates in the clockwise direction in the assembled state as indicated by an arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b).

When the petals 802 rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front as indicated by arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front) as indicated by arrow A17 in FIG. 174(b). rotate to Therefore, compared with the case where the decorative member 884 is stopped, the decorative member 8
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 with reference to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, the rotational speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear higher than the actual rotational speed.

By controlling the central motor 804 as described above, even from this gathering operation to the rotation operation,
It can be paused and transitioned after a pause, or it can be transitioned immediately so that it is continuous without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. , the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal motion device 800 is rotating by determining the output of the detection sensor 801c.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145 .
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 protrudes along the notch 9145b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. be. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145 and a lower end portion and a front portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment. The vertical positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front side end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the rear side in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . Then, the sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending upward from the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2,
The recess depth is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of a top stop projection (not shown) projecting from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) toward the back side, and the upward force generated from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 9145. configured to withstand the load.

This thin plate blade part 9153 passes the thread Y8 through the foul ball passage part 9145, and by pulling or loosening the thread Y8, illegally manipulates the ball inside the game area to take countermeasures against fraudulent profits. It is arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 passed through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Possible cheating is described here.

Returning to FIG. 148, description will be made. As described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
is provided with a cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by utilizing the momentum of the ball being shot, but if the momentum of the ball is weak, the yarn Y8 will be cut. The ball was sometimes launched without

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146 , passes through the foul ball passage portion 145 , and is discharged to the lower tray 50 . Therefore, there is no risk that the ball will enter the game area directly.

On the other hand, for example, if the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the thread Y8
8 is weakly hit and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the firing rail 730, the thread Y8 is arranged on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701), so that the ball P9 is vigorously moved. Even if the yarn Y8 is hammered out, the yarn Y8 will not be cut by the metal member 725 for cutting.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut by the string Y8. The ball P8 shot in advance is the foul ball passage part 1
45, discharged to the front side of the player, and stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a person who commits fraud can pull or loosen the string Y8 by grabbing the ball P8 stored in the lower tray 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and gain illicit benefits.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the thread Y8 to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends thereof is used to commit a fraudulent act as described above, the thin plate blade is attached to the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

That is, when a person who commits fraud pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in this embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the front side, that is, on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, so that the thread Y8 is arranged inside the notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled. , and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153 .

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 contacts the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145, thereby increasing the resistance force against the upward load. This prevents the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 toward the outside of the foul ball passage portion 9145 when the thread Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, from the thread Y8 to the thin plate blade portion 915
Most of the load directed towards 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153 . As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140 , the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is positioned lower than the lower end of the front door side lower dish passage portion 9142 . More specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. This makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to be damaged by the payout ball. That is, since the person who commits the fraudulent act is afraid that the fraudulent act will be discovered, the sphere P
After holding the ball P8, in order to prevent the clerk from suspicion, hold the ball P8 close to the body (for example,
It is easy to cheat by pulling or loosening the thread 8 by keeping it in a trouser pocket, etc.). In this case, the thread Y8 is maintained in a state of extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (in contact with the upper surface). At this time, the thread Y8 is stretched through a position above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 by about the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the lower tray 5 from the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142
When the ball ejected to 0 collides with the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it steps on the thread Y8 arranged on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, or collides with the thread Y8. ) flows down to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening arranged behind the ball extracting lever 52 . That is, by arranging the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 above the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the upper limit position for jumping around), the front door side lower tray Passage 9
The balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 can come into contact with the thread Y8, increasing the possibility of damaging the thread Y8 and cutting the thread Y8 early.

Thirdly, the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is formed with a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right. The right sloping surface 9142a makes it easy to impart a rightward velocity to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 .

As a result, the yarn Y8 is pulled out before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower tray 50 declines.
You can direct the ball towards That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (foul ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower tray 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the thread Y8 or hit the thread Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is the ball guide opening 5
3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (left and right of the ball guide opening 53) in the right part of the ball guide opening 53. 1/3 of the width), and a boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a consists of the right end (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the foul disposed on the right side of the right inclined surface 9142a. It is configured as a flat portion that connects the left end (left end side) of the bottom portion near the exit of the ball passage portion 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation stepped portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the front door side lower tray passage portion 91 is formed by the space V9.
42 and the foul ball passage portion 9145 are communicated with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 can flow rightward along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought closer to the thread Y8.

Note that the vertical width of the boarding restricting stepped portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
As a result, the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage portion 9145 and comes into contact with the riding restriction stepped portion 9053a can be restricted from riding up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. In other words, the riding restricting stepped portion 9053a allows the passage of the ball in the horizontal direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts it in the other direction (direction from right to left). Acts as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

Figures 184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 seen from the oblique upper left, and FIG. A state seen obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, passage forming unit 10140 differs from passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of foul ball passage portion 10145. FIG.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 recessed from the front side end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
145c. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending toward the front side in a manner covering the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is set to be approximately twice the radius Ra of the sphere (see FIG. 180) (diameter). be. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a. The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the rear side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is arranged inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of the front view shape of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary protrusion 1 protruding from the side surface of the back side to the back side
4d2. 184 and 185, the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and is omitted from the drawing in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)). It is about the radius Ra of P8. Therefore, the foul ball passage portion 101
45 can be prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, so that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be prevented from being cracked or chipped due to collision with the ball P8. The durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

A projecting distal end 14d3 of the auxiliary projecting portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the back side toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 side (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 is
The closer it is to 5a, the wider it becomes. As a result, the thread Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is passed through the thin plate blade portion 1.
0153, 10154 can be easily inserted into the clearance on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is located on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a part constituting a forked blade part, the first thin plate blade part 10153
It extends to the left from the right end of the front side edge of the in a slightly upwardly inclined manner. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, there is formed an acute-angled recess 1015 with an acute-angled deep recess portion.
5 is formed.

Note that the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8, like the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute-angled concave portion 10155 is arranged on the rear side of the projecting tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the thread Y8 enters the rear surface side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, the thread Y8 is caused to enter the acute recess 10155 and the thread Y8
can be easily damaged.

Since the second thin plate blade portion 10154 arranged on the front side is arranged on the upper side compared to the first thin plate blade portion 10153, the thread Y8 is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by the person who commits the fraudulent act. can easily enter deep into the acute recess 10155 .

A plate-like portion connected to the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand an upward load originating from the interior of the foul ball passage portion 10145 .

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are arranged to face opposite left and right sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in the left and right opposite directions. be. That is, at these two points, the thread Y8 is pulled in the left-right opposite direction.

For example, a person who commits a fraudulent act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area, thereby avoiding the discovery of the fraudulent act. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 in the left-right opposite direction at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are kept inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By lengthening the time that 8 is exposed to the game area, it is possible to expedite the discovery of fraud.

Note that an adhesive member (glue, trimming, etc.) may be disposed deep in the acute recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute recess 10155 . In this case, even if the string Y8 that is attached to the ball P8 that has come to the hand of the cheater is cut, the string is adhered to the adhesive member provided in the acute recess 10155, and the ball P9 is returned to the game area. Since the yarn Y8 is not ejected from the yarn Y8 and is maintained there, it is possible to hasten the discovery of fraudulent use of the yarn Y8.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball (foul ball) that has a weak launch strength and has not reached the playing area is discharged to the lower tray 50. A foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the disc passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is arranged at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is made of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. a tip member 206 formed and positioned proximate the ball firing unit 112a;
2a, and a guide member 2062b formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 with a width in which the ball can flow down between the tip member 2062a.

A foul ball passage 2062c communicating with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed at the right corner of the interior of the main body side upper dish passage portion 161 is formed downstream of the gap V11. Foul ball passage 2
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through the furniture, and a spare of the return ball prevention member 68 is arranged above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are exclusively supplied to the upper tray 17 via the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side. When the number of balls on the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full-tank switch (not shown) protruding inside the ball flow path on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the balls. It is configured so that the ball payout from 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c also passes through the payout device 133 (
87) is also supplied to the upper tray 17. FIG. Therefore, as described above, by bonding balls to both ends of the thread Y8 and passing one of the balls through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can be
into the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 by striking the yarn Y8 with the payout ball can be produced regardless of how the balls accumulate on the upper plate 17. - 特許庁This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 at an early stage.

189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, a spare of the return-ball prevention member 68 disposed above the foul-ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, FIG. 188 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 with a long metal screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the front side.

Specifically, the guide member 2062b is hollowed on the back side of the return ball prevention member 68. As shown in FIG. In the cavity, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed which protrudes from the rear side surface of the guide member 2062b toward the front side in a cylindrical shape and has an inner wall formed with a threaded groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side abuts against the tip of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
b1 is in contact with the base member 68b1, the long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole previously drilled as a mounting hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the blocking plate 2062b4 in alignment with the through hole. is inserted, and in this state it is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, whereby the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The upper surface and the left surface of the closing plate 2062b4, which are the sides that contact the guide member 2062b, are formed so as to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is a guide member 20
It is formed as an inclined surface with the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of 62b.

The slope increasing portion 2062d is sloped downward toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface forming the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b. That is, the gradient increase section 206
A straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of 2d is below the upper end of the surface (upper surface) forming the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the ball It intersects with the tip member 2062a at about ⅓ lower side).

By configuring in this way, when shooting a ball toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the sphere, and collision between the lower tip of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the sphere can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end portion of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so the ball moves left and right in the gap V11. It is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through and returning to the ball shooting unit 112a side beyond the tip member 2062a.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the increasing gradient portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
Incision 206 with a width smaller than the diameter of the sphere and allowing the thread to enter (about 2 [mm] in this embodiment)
It is recessed toward the back side to a position where 2b1 can be formed. The cut 2062b1 is formed at a point where the path of the ball hit into the game area and the foul ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular notch 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. When the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends thereof is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can rub against the long screw B11 in the event of a fraudulent act.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, the thread Y8 is pressed against the long screws B11 arranged deep in the notches 2062b1 when subjected to a load that pulls both ends (Fig. 190 (
a) see). In this state, the thread Y8 is slid in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed against the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be quickly cut.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is arranged closer to the front than the position through which the center of the sphere passes. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being arranged at a position (vertical lower part of the center of the ball) where the ball to be shot contacts the outer rail 2062, so that the notch 2062b1 collides with the ball to be shot. It is possible to prevent the direction of the ball from being affected.

Also, a person who commits cheating through the thread Y8, to which the balls P8 and P9 are fixed at both ends, through the foul ball passage 2062c, will not be able to handle the end of the thread Y8 that protrudes toward the player side (the ball P8 is fixed). 182) is pulled forward to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front side, it is possible to make it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

A button-type switch SW11 having a detecting portion projecting downward is disposed in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pushed under a load extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the button type switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes, the O
It is arranged so as to be switchable between N-OFF.

Figures 190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
190(b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the ball passing through the gate member 68a.
The opening/closing portion 68a1 side of is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c side. again,
In FIG. 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference, and the button switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190(b), the button switch SW11 is It is illustrated that it is OFF.

As shown in FIG. 190(b), the return-ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul-ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening/closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state shown in 190(a) is restored, the foul ball passage 20
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds at the shortest).

On the other hand, the ball-return preventing member 68 provides great resistance to an object that does not flow away like a ball, for example, an object that advances while filling the passage, such as an endoscope. This is a structure as an anti-fraud measure.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope advances through the foul ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, reaches the inside of the game area, and attempts to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, Bending a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, grasping a ball and putting it into the winning slot, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning slot, and emitting a laser from the tip (e.g. cutting nails).

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of foul ball passageway 2062c. In addition, in FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that is illegally intruded is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the present embodiment, when the tip of a device such as an endoscope is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the direction in which the ball flows down, the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is displaced while advancing. Become. Here, when the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end portion of the endoscope) shifts to the state shown in FIG. The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is still arranged below weight portion 68a2, and weight portion 68a
2 will be maintained in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to disengage the opening/closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from advancing further.

Here, if the endoscope is forcibly advanced to destroy the gate member 68a and enter the inside, it is impossible to prevent fraud. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is turned off.
1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, a fraudulent act can be detected at an early stage.

Also, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button type switch SW11 is turned on immediately.
Since it is set to N (see FIG. 190(a)), the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the dispensing of balls from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

It should be noted that the member arranged above the foul ball passage 2062c need not be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in this embodiment, the return ball prevention member 68
By arranging , if the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be quickly replaced. As a result, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it has the effect of being able to play a role in preventing fraudulent acts before replacement, and the trouble of forgetting and searching for a storage place can be saved. It is possible to achieve the effect of Further, it is not necessary to include the entire structure of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

Also, if the return ball prevention member 68 cracks or bends and is replaced, whether or not the above-described fraudulent act prevention effect is achieved depends on the degree of damage to the return ball prevention member 68. , that the fraudulent party does not know whether or not the exchange has taken place, and
Even if it has been replaced, the degree of damage is not known, so the deterrence against fraud can still be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal motion device 800 rotates only at the gathered position or the fully opened position has been described, but the petal motion device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanded position. configured in a manner. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. Figure 192
, the back cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the configuration of the back cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
887 and a restricting portion 2888 projecting from the extended tip of the flange portion 2887 toward the rear side. The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
80, the only difference is the rear cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 . That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886 .
Next, actions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194. FIG.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal motion device 2800, and FIG.
4(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. 193 and 194 show an operation example of the petal operating device 2800 in chronological order.
) shows the state at the same point in time.

194(a) and 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are shown in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of threaded portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803 are shown.
S is seen in cross section. Also, in FIG. 193, the petal 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 is shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of threaded portions 2803S arranged inside the slits 815 on both sides are provided with opposite threaded portions centered on the screw insertion portion 803H. It has a sloped surface 2803T that slopes away from 2803S.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
Formed at an angle. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193(a) and 193(b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( Rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), restricting portion 2888 and front side portion 802b of petal 802 come into contact, and petal 802 receives a load from restricting portion 2888.

When the petals 802 are further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise when viewed from the front) while the petals 802 are receiving the load from the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802 receive the load. To do so, change your posture.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in the normal posture shown in FIG. , as shown in FIG. 194(b), the central slit 814
and a posture change to a tilted posture with respect to the slits 815 on both sides. petal 8
At 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

By changing the attitude of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802 in this manner, the restricting portion 28
The resistance between slide member 2820 and slit member 810 changes while the load from 88 is deflected.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), only the narrow slide ribs 803a of the slide member 2820 are in contact with the slits 815 on both sides.
The slide member 2820 can move smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814,815.

On the other hand, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a with respect to the slits 815 on both sides, and the inclined surface 280 with the inner inner wall.
Since the 3Ts are abutted (pressed) respectively, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in frictional resistance is remarkable. Since the inclined surfaces 2803T are in contact with the inner walls of the slits 815 on both sides from both directions in the short direction of the slits 815 on both sides, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the slide member 28
20 reach the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
156) can exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the damping by the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
Start to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied to the petals 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

195 is a front view of petal motion device 2800. FIG. 193 (
The figure shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues to rotate in the same direction from the state of b).

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal actuator 2800 can be rotated in the expanded position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise when viewed from the front) opposite to the rotating direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is applied to the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156).
156), the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the expanded position.

196(a), 196(b) and 197 are front views of the petal motion device 2800. FIG. 196(a), 196(b), and 197 show how the petals 802 move from the spreading position to the collected position in time series.

In FIG. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the positions of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotary plate 830. The rotational motion of 802 subsides and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the petals 802 can be automatically rotated at the spreading position and then returned to the collected position.

Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where it abuts against the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, ), contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, so it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

In addition, the restricting portion 2888 may be placed at a position where it does not contact the petals 802 at the gathered position or the fully opened position, or at a position where the petals 802 do not contact the petals 802 rotating at the fully opened position.
can slip through the regulating portion 2888 by slightly changing its posture, and can prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. can.

Further, as shown in this embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 expand, it can be used as a mark to determine whether the petals 802 pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position far from the star pattern. It is possible to make a difference between performing the rotation operation and performing the rotation operation by expanding halfway.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the degree of expectation for a big win varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. It is possible to make the pattern of the mold function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as part of the effect device.

Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be arranged at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 in terms of design, so the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting against the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing its posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win). In this case, depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating, or are rotating while abutting the restricting portion 2888 and causing a slight change in posture (flutteringly), it is possible to change the meaning and content conveyed to the player. .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion of the petals 802 when the posture changes will change. Therefore, even with the configuration in which the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture can be varied in a plurality of ways.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. FIG.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates along with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanded position has been described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 3810 and the slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 show, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal motion device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. 198(a). again,
198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b), the rotating plate 83
0 guide rails 832 are shown in phantom lines.

When rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Since it is the same as the twelfth embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together, exceeding the resistance applied, the description is omitted here.

198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view, the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 , so that the slide member 2820 that receives the load from the guide rail 832 Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional concave portions 3814a, 3815a, and 3815 are provided on the side for receiving the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is formed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 .
A central recessed portion 3814a that is recessed in such a manner as to increase the width of the central recessed portion 3814a, and a wall portion extending along the radial direction of both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 when viewed from the front. A clockwise side recessed portion 3815a that is recessed in the wall portion so as to widen the lateral width of both side slits 815, and a radial direction of both side slits 815 that are disposed on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in front view Both slits 81 in the wall on the clockwise side in front view
5, and a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in such a manner as to widen the width in the lateral direction.

The clockwise side recessed portion 3815a is located at the flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG.
3 slide rib 803a.

The central recessed portion 3814a is in the state shown in FIG. 198(a).
from the position facing the guide pin 822 of the slit member 3810 toward the center of rotation of the slit member 3810 (Fig. 19
8(a) bottom).

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and a radial length greater than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is located in the flat plate member 28 in the state shown in FIG.
03 toward the rotation center of the slit member 3810 (
It is formed continuously to FIG. 198(a) bottom).

The counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recessed portion 3814a.

The action when the rotating plate 830 of the petal motion device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198(a), the rotating plate 830
starts to rotate clockwise in front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(b)).

As a result, the contact between the counterclockwise side walls of the both-side slits 815 and the flat plate member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in front view, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move toward the contact portion between the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side and the slide rib 803a (the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810, with the first contact point) as a fulcrum, rotate counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 199(a) and Fig. 199(b)
)reference).

The center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.
03, contact between the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the threaded portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

Further, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are recessed to a depth that does not abut the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A turning side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199(b), the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of threaded portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are perpendicular to each other. When the radial center side slide rib 803a housed in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts against the walls of the both side slits 815, the sliding member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move around the abutting portion as a fulcrum when viewed from the front. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a is removed.
moves counterclockwise in front view from the base end of the recessed portion 3815a on the clockwise side.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194).
(a)), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction by continuously rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise in the front view.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. , the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the attitude of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

As a result, the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) can be made to perform movements that could not be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 194(b) )), and until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 280
3 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIGS. 195 and 196).
(a) and FIG. 196(b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the opening operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (Fig. 198 ( a)), and by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in front view, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be restored (see FIG. 199(b)).
. That is, until the changed posture is restored, the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 193(a)) are rotated (rotated along with the slit member 3810). can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed during the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (Fig. 198(a)), rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or attitude)
By rotating clockwise from the front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are gathered from the position of the flat plate member 2803 that matches the arbitrary state (phase or posture) and the petal 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803. It can start moving towards a position.
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (FIG. 1)
93(a)) rotates (see FIG. 195) during expansion (see FIG. 198(a)) and then gathers toward the gathered position (see FIG. 197). , so that the motion of the petal motion device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 200 to 203. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed of a plate with no opening has been described.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326 of the . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figures 200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202(a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202(b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state. A state in the middle of changing from state 1 to state 2 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operating device 8300 in this embodiment is different from the lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operating devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained, and other configurations have been mostly explained in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described below, and other configurations will be limited to a few supplementary descriptions.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is bored in a substantially oval shape at the left-right central position. and a first through hole 8326a formed on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400. When viewed in a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom plate portion 321 has a horizontally long rectangular cross-sectional shape. A pair of second through holes 8326b drilled along the bottom plate portion 321 and connecting the upper surface and the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at surface positions, and a pair of third through holes 8326b drilled at the left and right corners to have a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a through hole 8326c.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the downward passage of liquid such as drinking water, and the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign objects inserted into gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. and a through hole. For example, a coin-shaped foreign object may cause a player to stop the operation of the tilting device 300 when he/she feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is a hindrance, or may cause the tilting device 310 and the upper frame to interfere with the tilting device 310 and the upper frame. Member 33
0 may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310 .
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be smoothed, but on the other hand, the gap V13
, V14.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is arranged at the rear end of the ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end. It is configured to easily shift (deform) to the left or right near the end on the front side. Note that this misalignment (deformation) includes, for example, misalignment using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and misalignment caused by slightly deforming each member. (variant) is included.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the gap V13 is designed so as not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (eg, a 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 can be displaced to either the left or the right (eg, to the left). In this case, the gap V13 created on the other side (for example, the right side) is
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, and can be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object.

That is, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame members 330 on both left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right, a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted.

Also, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also adjusted by utilizing the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14(b)) of the tilting device 310.
If a load directed toward the back side is applied to 10 to shift (deform) the position, the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, so that a coin-shaped foreign object can be inserted into the gap V14 as well.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is either left or right.
Alternatively, if the tilting device 310 tilts while a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320 .

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are formed in a shape that narrows left and right inward toward the vertical center, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 202(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V13 protrudes outward from the constriction of the case main body 311. A downward load is applied from the lower frame member 8320, making it easier to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. FIG. In addition, rubbing between the coin-shaped foreign matter and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may interfere with the light emission effect.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended effect with the operation device 8300. Therefore, the gap V13,
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately. had to disassemble.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, so that coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
03(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 on line CCIIId-CCIIId of FIG.
FIG. 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203(a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the horizontal direction as the center in the horizontal direction of the vibrating device 5400, and is drilled with a lateral width larger than the lateral width of the vibrating device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of the vibrating device 5400, see FIG. 58). be. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured into the vicinity of the left-right central position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. Liquids can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400 .

The lower edge of the first through-hole 8326a is the extended portion 311h (FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
) is placed below the top surface of the Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign object fitted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (horizontally when viewed vertically in the second state). The tilting device 3 is curved toward the
Inclination D81 downwardly inclined toward the left-right center in the first state of 10, and the tilting device 310
is tilted, coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

As a result, the size required for the first through hole 8326a can be minimized while the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed, so that the lower frame member 8320 can be designed freely. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily ensured compared to the case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be widened to the left and right.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the same as that of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) has a size equal to or greater than the size of an object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [m].
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is an LED device 341f.
(See FIG. 25). In this embodiment, the spherical shell portion 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are continuously provided on the left, right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (the mirror-finished member is fixed), Light passing through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the first through hole 8326a is used to make a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player. In particular, the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that weakens the amount of light, so that the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

When a coin-shaped foreign object is placed at a position that partially closes the first through hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visually recognized by the player is It is weaker than when there is no foreign matter (a coin-shaped foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, since it is possible to make it easy to notice that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 by using the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as a clue, the coin-shaped foreign matter is not noticed and the lower frame can be easily detected. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. Note that this effect is
The same applies not only to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c, but also to the case of viewing through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through-hole 8326b allows a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 321.
It is configured as a through-hole that can be discharged in a direction along one plane. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral width of the second through hole 8326 is about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is formed with a width of about 2 [mm] in the normal direction.

Since the second through-hole 8326b is arranged near the center of the bottom plate portion 321 in the left-right direction, even after a coin-shaped foreign object slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321, it can be easily removed. Coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed immediately.

Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, for example, the liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be utilized for forward outward discharge.

The central axis of the third through hole 8326c is arranged along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 20).
3(a)), it is formed as a through-hole through which a coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 can be removed while the device is in the standing state (orientation).

That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be set to a size that allows coin-shaped foreign matter to be discharged when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. , the third through-hole 8326c has a length of about 30 mm and a width of about 2 mm when viewed along the surface of the bottom plate 321 .

When removing the coin-shaped foreign matter, the covering cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is opened.
0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can open the through holes 8326a to 8326c.
can be accessed. In addition, the covering cover 370 is attached to the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371 .
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by screws inserted in the front-rear direction, and the drooping portion 372 is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate in which the concave portion 15a is formed by screws inserted in the vertical direction. Therefore, the covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be shortened.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to easily remove coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 without disassembling the operation device 8300 .

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens outward to the right at the lower right corner of the body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
. Including each embodiment described above, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a coin-shaped foreign object cannot be taken out, the operation can be easily performed by removing the screw that fastens the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Device 8300 can be removed from front frame 14 . Therefore, if a replacement for a normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which a coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be quickly replaced with a normal operation device 8300 .

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object enters the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped due to malfunction, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly restarted.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, a fourteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
A case has been described where the board support device 600 does not receive the load from the front frame 14 when it is in a fixed state, but the board support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is arranged so as to be able to abut against the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. Note that FIG. 204 (
204(b) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and FIG. The states are illustrated. The shape of the inner frame 12 is shown in FIG. 204(a), and the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 in FIG. 204(b) are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment includes a load transmission device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 arranged so that the front side of the plate portion (the plate portion arranged on the rear side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 can be vertically displaced; The vertical displacement member 2651
A front-rear displacement member 2652 disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the front-rear displacement member 2652 supported so as to be displaceable in the front-rear direction;
52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two front and rear positions, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a. a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force toward
Prepare.

The vertical displacement member 2651 can be switched between a state in which it abuts against the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board support device 600 and a state in which it separates. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204(a), it retreats from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. Deform the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204(a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at a position with a slight gap from the torsion spring NBb at the lower position. is set.

The front-rear displacement member 2652 is placed at a front position (see FIG. 204(a)) where it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and at a position where it is pushed backward by the front frame 14. 204(b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 and is inclined downward toward the end side. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 in a state where the front-back displacement member 2652 is arranged at the front position.
52 is a slanted surface that continuously extends to the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 when 52 is placed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652a is positioned in front of the front-rear displacement member 2652 so that the vertical displacement member 2651
is positioned at the lower position, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is positioned at the upper position at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, and the inclination angle and formation range are set.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is arranged at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load is increased by the thickness in the front-rear direction. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to increase the load that the post-rotation pawl member 640 applies to the game board 13 from the rear side, making it easier to maintain the state in which the game board 13 is in contact with the hanging back plate portion 621d of the pre-rotation pawl member 620. The distance D14 between the front surface of the game board 13 and the rear surface of the front frame 14 (the rear surface of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the downflow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required for the board support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, namely that the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of fixing, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 toward the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses it against the hanging back plate portion 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so a spring having a lower elastic modulus than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb can be reduced, and the load required when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced. Since the force can be reduced, the operator's freedom of choice, and
Workability can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, a fifteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
Harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid over the reverse cup portion 178 to prevent the intrusion into the inside of the reverse cup portion 178 by melting it with a heated piano wire.
Although a case has been described in which the tampering detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment detects that the reverse cup portion 178 is burnt by the heated piano wire and attempts to detect fraud at an early stage, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is used when the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire. In addition, the heat is detected and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are configured to prevent burnout.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. FIG. Note that FIG.
In b) the shape memory spring 2288 is shown maintained in a reduced shape, FIG.
5(c) shows a state in which the stretched shape (the memorized shape) is restored by the application of heat. 205(b) and 205(c), the fraud detection device 2280
It is cross-sectionally viewed at an intermediate position before and after 281 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box-like shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side.
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the opening on the rear side of the main body box part 2281.
A space is formed between 1 and the back cover member 2282 .

The body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material and extends from the lower right corner to form the reverse cup portion 217 .
8, a constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284. It is housed in a projecting portion 2285 projecting upward from the body box portion 2281 and a recess recessed from the back side in the left side wall portion of the body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the body box portion 2281, and the other end being the body box A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
1, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281, the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281, and the first conduction a second conductive portion 2287 formed with a length that can contact the upper surface of the portion 2286;
and a shape memory spring 2288 that rides on the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 , is supported by the projecting portion 2285 , and is arranged below the second conducting portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are each connected at one end of separate wiring to the portion protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wiring is connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conducting portion 2286 and the second conducting portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c) see) cuts the continuity,
It is controlled to output an error signal with the fact that the continuity is cut off as an input.

When the error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the ball dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) stops the dispensing of balls, etc., and continues. It is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game by

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205( a ) to 205 ( c ), the body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178 . Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is displaced to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the long cover member 173 and the elongated cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire still covers the long cover member 173. can be prevented from penetrating.

According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and advances further is guided by the constricted portion 2284 and reaches the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged at the upper opening of the constricted portion 2284. be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining its deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to its pre-memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . Note that in this embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
, the transformation temperature is set to about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178 (approximately 80°), and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205(c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is disconnected and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extension portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and is drilled in the front and back direction in the back cover member 2282, and extends to the front side. overhang. When the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the low temperature state after being in the tension state, the operator pushes down the extension part 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and contract the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205(b)). ) can be changed back again. That is, even after the fraudulent act is discovered, it can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 206, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the eighth embodiment,
A case has been described in which even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces. The right panel unit 2500 in the 16th embodiment has recesses with different shapes in different regions. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 206(a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206(b) is an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIb of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(c) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206(c) schematically shows the downward recessed portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of a light guide member 2540 schematically shown in FIG. 206(a), and FIG. 206(e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206(e) schematically shows an upward concave portion 2543e provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIe of FIG. 206(a). It is a partially enlarged perspective view. Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) arranged on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line according to the shape of the light guide member 2540. FIG.

On both surfaces of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment.
3 shape can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, the area CCVIb is arranged above and on the side of the inner lens member 530, and the area CCVI is arranged above and on the side of the outer lens member 550.
The shape of the recessed portion 2543 is changed by the region CCVid arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543b refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c is heat-pressed in a posture in which a flat surface is arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543c refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(d), a downward concave portion 2543d is formed in the area CCVId by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543d has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and curved surfaces on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2
543d refracts light exclusively at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206(a).

As shown in FIG. 206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e is formed by hot-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ⅛ equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the incident light is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2
543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits the light to the inner lens member 530 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of its curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction, as shown in FIG. 206(a).

The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom circle diameter of approximately 1 mm cone). Therefore, the inner lens member 5 is removed from this portion.
The light emitted to 30 or the outer lens member 550 is slightly refracted vertically and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to the present embodiment, with the configuration described above, as shown in FIG. 206(a), the light is allowed to travel toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction in which the light is collected, and toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction in which the light spreads. can be made That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to give a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof.
While suppressing the left and right width of 0, the production effect of the light emission production can be improved.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed downward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force of returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so that the torsion spring 3
15 can be dispensed with.

In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the end of the push has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for effects (for example, a "button that cannot be pushed" effect can be performed. can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 has moved to the end of the operation (the end of the extension operation), the voice coil motor 352 cannot move because of the dimensional relationship that causes a slight gap between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 . and the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an impact sound due to the collision with the lower frame member 320 when the voice coil motor 352 operates. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is protruding in advance, and it is possible to make the player aware that the tilting device 310 is in the state of "the button that cannot be pushed" only after the tilting device 310 is pushed. can.

In the first embodiment, the case where the engaging rib 344c of the disk cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344 . In this case, for example, it is possible to change the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other. It is possible to change the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347 . Therefore, it is possible to form more operation states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be sequentially switched) by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the drive motor 342 and perform a complex operation mode in which the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched to a raised position.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310
Although the case where the operation timing of is controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilting device 310 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that drives the weight member 5412 to rotate may be controlled by the operating speed and the operating direction of the tilting device 310 . For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the end of pushing (
During the downward movement), the driving motor 5411 is fixed in such a posture that the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is arranged above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end and immediately before it starts to move upward. , the driving motor 5411 may start rotating. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced while the tilting device 310 is repeatedly pushed, and the repulsive force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be increased when the tilting device 310 starts to move upward. .

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the tilting device 310 has a housing member 543
0 may be fixed and the vibrating device 5400 may be operated therein. tilting device 31
0, the projecting leg portion 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321, for example.
, and the projecting leg portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the end of the push, so that the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400 is changed to switch whether or not the weight member 5412 can come into contact with the housing member 5430 .

In this case, the flexible member 5420 arranged inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated. By increasing the amount of deformation of the weight member 5412, a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, the player can feel the vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the push end, but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed. It is possible to increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button." A great chance.", it is possible to provide an effect for the player to specify how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, by setting whether or not the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in a designated way as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player,
It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the button (tilting device 310) in a designated manner of pressing, and prevent the button (tilting device 310) from becoming monotonous.

As for the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420, the degree of pushing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in a manner in which they can come into contact with each other. In this case, the slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition for the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 to be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing the tilting device 310 by force, and prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 by force.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibrating device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut against the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
On the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of movement, the weight member 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 . In this case, the tilting device 31
Vibration can be transmitted to the player in the state where 0 is not operated, and the performance can be lively.
By stopping the vibration when pressing the button, the player can see the change in the presentation mode (
To produce a feeling of premium that only the player who is playing the machine can perceive the change in the performance mode, excluding the surrounding players, because the difference in expectations can be recognized. can be done.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they cannot contact each other.
It is desired that both the 412 and the housing member 5430 are arranged so that they can continuously contact each other. For example, two different cases can occur due to the difference in the direction of rotation of the weight member 5412 .

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the disc cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed so that the disc cam 5344
Although the case where frictional force is generated by contact between 44 and release member 346 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed partially protrudes toward the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially tilted and deformed. can be In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, a greater frictional force is ensured between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 than when the disc cam 5344 and the operable releasing member 346 are in contact with each other. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 may be configured to contact the front frame 14 . For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board support device 600 may be chamfered so that it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600, the game board 13
Although the case in which the vertical position of is not changed has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front side, and the front side end portion of the support bottom portion 12c is the board surface support device 60 in the released state.
0 may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and the game board 13 is supported in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom. 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or a combination of bending back and forth and left and right. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Directly behind 3, it is preferable to form a long path in the front and rear direction because the ball can be ejected smoothly. In addition, by making the path curved back and forth, the range of the foul ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed, thereby preventing interference between the launch path and the foul ball passage portion 145. can be made easier.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 is concave has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. for example,
A convex surface may be formed at a position facing the opening 524 . In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. Moreover, the light guide member 540 does not need to be curved vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

In the above-described eighth embodiment, the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 form a vertically curved path, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the bending direction of the path may be left or right, or may be a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 contacts the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi form the back side wall portion 461H.
It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which they are spaced apart by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. in this case,
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the clamping resistance exerts a load on the speaker connection wire 453 in the direction of pulling it out of the speaker assembly 450. Even if it is hung, the speaker connection line 4
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451 .

Further, the auxiliary projection 481Ha abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H within a projection length range corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage recess 464, but the projection beyond that contacts the inner side surface 461Hi. In the range of length, a step may be formed in the middle such that the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H are separated from each other by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range where the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to the speaker chambers, and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to the duct. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by extending the width of the intermediate body portion 461M in the front-rear direction to the same extent as that of the proximal side body portion 461B and the distal side body portion 461T, the proximal side body portion 461B and the intermediate body portion 461
A large speaker room may be configured jointly by M and the tip side body portion 461T.

In addition, although the base end side body portion 461B has been described as having a larger volume than the tip end side body portion 461T, the size relationship may be reversed, or they may be configured with the same volume. speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be at the center in the left and right direction, or may be between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467a to 467a to 467a constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487
67e, 487a to 487e, the adjacent ribs are in the left-right direction (the direction connecting the proximal side main body portion 461B and the distal side main body portion 461T, the opening of the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491) A direction intersecting the direction) has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the horizontal direction. In this case, the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze.
1 and the rear side recessed portion 491 to insert a fine metal wire such as a piano wire into the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491, and to make it difficult to commit a fraudulent act of intruding the tip of the wire into the game area, and to prolong the time required for the fraudulent act. Unauthorized acts can be suppressed. In addition, here, suppression of fraud means suppression of fraud itself and gaining fraudulent profit from fraud (successful fraud).
is exemplified.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is connected to the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 may be meshed. in this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotating operation of the petal motion device 800 but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. can. As a result, the petals 802 can be slid in the radial direction and the decorative member 884 can be rotated at the same time, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotary plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract as the rotating plate 830 rotates, or may rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 830 .

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting a driving force through the slide plate 930 that slides according to the operation of the drive arm member 910, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal motion device 800 and the tip of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal motion device 800. can be In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the above eighth embodiment, when the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the case where the operation portion back surface member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing regulation portion 159 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface supporting device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation part back member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to contact each other in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing regulation part 159. Also good. In this case, even if the lower board surface support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts toward the front side, the game board 13 is arranged to face the operation unit back member 155.
Since the portion is also displaced to the front side, the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 can interfere with each other. This prevents the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12 .

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 6
00 is in a fixed state or not is determined by the relationship between the game board 13 and the operation part back member 155 arranged opposite to the board support device 600 on the lower side, and the board placed above the inner frame 12 When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the closing of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 can be restricted. As a result, the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multifunctional cover member 171, so that the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171 can be improved. can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
be chamfered). In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 made of synthetic resin collides with the board support device 600 made of metal, and the multifunctional cover member 171
Since the risk of breakage of the multifunctional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long period of time for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover).

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 from which the light irradiated to the end surface of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 540 is arranged at the right end and front side of the front frame 14 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86 . In this case, for example, a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side and a case in which the other surface is arranged on the front side can be switched (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about an axis, it is possible to switch the mode of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 . Also, the aspect of the light irradiated to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
It is possible to diversify the production by switching the correspondence with the moving accessory that protrudes inward.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged such that one surface faces the front side and the other surface Consider switching between the case of being arranged on the front side and the case of being arranged on the front side. inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory arranged opposite to the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the location near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member 560 side of the moving accessory emits light. When the surface faces the moving role, the moving role that is arranged to face the wide area of the opening 565 (wider range than the top opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting position of the moving accessory.

In this case, for example, by moving the moving accessory in time with the timing of the change in the light-emitting part, it is possible to improve the presentation effect. For example, at the timing when the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the moving accessory, the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 is reduced and changed so as to fit in the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the side of the outer cover member 560 faces the moving accessory. At the timing of turning the right panel unit 500, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. As a result, it is possible to change the position to emit light in accordance with the action of the moving accessory by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a that controls light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness increases, the amount of light increases, and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side becomes clear). Diffused (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emitting target (liquid crystal or moving accessory)
can change the light emission mode.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is arranged on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). , the front side end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture that is arranged on the back side of the support plate portion 510).
It is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or liquid crystal while irradiating light in a narrow state). As a result, it is possible to light up a wide range of positions away from the moving role and the liquid crystal while only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal are illuminated.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145
Although the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the thread Y8, and the broken portion is so fragile that it falls, and the detection sensor is arranged at a position through which the broken portion falls. Also good. In this case, due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, an alarm is issued and the launch of the ball is forcibly stopped. It is possible to minimize the profit (loss suffered by the gaming machine hall) obtained by a person who commits fraudulent acts.

In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations that improve frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810). The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810 .

Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the both side slits 815 arranged to face the inclined surface 2803T are provided with
A concave portion may be formed to the extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, it is possible to improve the motion resistance by inserting the inclined surface 2803T into the recessed portion.

In the sixteenth embodiment described above, by changing the shape of the recessed portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the direction in which light travels can be changed to the direction in which the light is collected or the direction in which the light is spread. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the direction of travel of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is the direction of each region CCVIb.
Since the direction is upwardly slanted in all of CCVIe, it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the line of sight of a person walking to select a machine to play. As a result, the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Further, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV that are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in Ie, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId, which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. FIG. In this case, the light that travels in the opposite direction to the player playing pachinko 8010, and the light that is emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward. While it is possible to make it easier for the light to travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the floor, the light that travels toward the player side and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a downwardly inclined direction. Therefore, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball look gorgeous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the players playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers of the pachinko machine 8010 .

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. for example,
Once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times), including the pachinko machine (commonly known as double-rights and triple-rights). ) may be implemented. Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, arepachi, majang balls, slot machines,
It may be implemented as various game machines such as a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button), or
When a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixed display is performed, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the combination of the identification information at the time of stopping is a specific one. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever,
For example, due to the operation of a stop button or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the variation of the symbols is stopped, and a predetermined game value is given to the player under the necessary condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols. is generated, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player on the lower receiving tray. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 287. FIG. Note that the first control example will be described by partially changing the configuration of each of the above-described embodiments. are omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example. As shown in FIG. 207, the game board 13 in the first control example has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, pinwheels, and rails 76. , 77, general ball entrance 63, second ball entrance 640, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, sorting device 700, etc. (See FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood by pasting together thin plate materials, and is formed so that various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The openings 710a of the general ball entrance 63, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display unit 80, and the sorting device 700 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. , are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. Further, although the details will be described later, inside the sorting device 700, a first ball entrance 64 and a right second ball entrance 640r through which a ball can enter are provided. A ball entering the opening 710a is sorted by the sorting device 700 to either the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r (see FIG. 208).

The central portion of the front surface of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c of the front door 5 (see FIG. 1). Mainly referring to FIG. 207, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 77 is placed inside the outer rail 77. An arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin-made outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize-winning opening, etc. area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 218) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 76 (upper left part in FIG. 207) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right in FIG. 207) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37a and 37b having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area in front view (lower left side in FIG. 207). The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 218), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this first control example, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b determine whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is configured so that it can be used properly according to the situation. Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37a operates, while the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 or the right second ball entrance. When winning 640r, the first symbol display device 37b is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b use the LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. The lighting state indicates whether the stopped pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot (jackets A, C), the pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot (jackpot B), or the winning pattern, or the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, A 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is conducted when any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r wins. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, 16R time-saving 100 times jackpot (jackpot A), 16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot (jackpot B1), 16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot (jackpot B2), 2R probability variable jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. ing. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “16R time-saving 100 times jackpot” (jackpot A) means that the maximum number of rounds is 16 after being notified that the third pattern is a jackpot by stopping and displaying the same even-numbered pattern. After the round jackpot game, it shifts to a low probability state, and during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), it is a jackpot that becomes a time-saving state. "16R probability variable odd number jackpot" (jackpot B1) means that the third pattern is finally stopped and displayed with the same odd number pattern, and then the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot and is in an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. “16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot” (jackpot B2) means that the third pattern is finally stopped and displayed with the same even number pattern, and the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds. It is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot (until the next jackpot game is executed) and becomes an electric support state until the next jackpot game is executed. "2R probability variable jackpot" (jackpot C) means that the third pattern is finally displayed in a combination of specific patterns (chance eye), and then the maximum number of rounds is 2 rounds after the jackpot. (Until the next big winning game is executed) It is a probability variable big winning. It should be noted that, if the jackpot C, the electric support state is not set after the jackpot game.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In addition, the "power supply state" in the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the lottery probability of the second symbol is set high and the fluctuation time of the second symbol is also set short. "Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains the same, but only the probability of hitting the second symbol is increased, and the second entrance 640 refers to a game state in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

During the electric sapo during the probability change (during the electric sapo game state) or during the time saving, not only the probability of winning the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. Changed and set to a longer time than normal. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 during the electric sapo during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, 1 A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessary 640a is opened by winning the game. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and once per hit. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times to perform. In addition, during the probability change or during the time saving, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per time is not set, and the second symbol is used. Only the winning probability may be changed so as to be increased compared to normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general ball entrances 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are triggered by the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r (start winning). A third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in , and the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for variably displaying the second pattern is provided.

A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 . The third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the center frame 86 . The center frame 86 protrudes toward the front side of the game board 13 and surrounds the third symbol display device 81 to prevent the game ball from contacting the third symbol display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), so that, for example, upper, middle and lower three patterns are displayed. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37a and 37b is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbol (see Fig. 207)) for a predetermined period of time. It performs a variable display that makes it possible. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric role object 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the power support during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the electric power support and during the time saving during the probability change, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more chances to open the electric accessory 640a of the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the electric sapo during the probability change and during the time saving.

In addition, during the electric sapo during the probability change or during the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one hit, etc. When the state is such that the ball can easily enter the ball entrance 640, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board on both sides of the variable display unit 80 . The through gate 67 is configured so that part of the balls flowing down the game board 13 among the balls shot to the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. be. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls for passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8). Also, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Also, the mounting position of the through gate is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be below the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a sorting device 700 is arranged in which balls can win. When a ball enters a prize through the opening 710a of the sorting device 700, the entered ball is alternately sorted to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. be done. When the ball enters (enters) the first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. As a result, the main controller 110 (see FIG. 218) draws a lottery for a big win, and the first symbol display device 37a displays the result of the lottery. Also, when the ball enters the second right ball entrance 640, the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, as in the case of the second right ball entrance 640r. Then, due to the turn-on of the second entrance switch, a lottery for a big win is made in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37b.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided below the sorting device 700 when viewed from the front. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second ball entrance switch. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 238), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed by the first symbol display device 37b. Normally, the second ball entrance 640 prevents (difficult to enter) the game ball by regulating the entry of the game ball in a state in which the left and right electric accessories 640a configured in the shape of wings stand upright. ), and when a normal pattern to be described later is hit, the electric accessory 640a rotates about 45 degrees in the outward direction as an opening operation in a certain operation pattern and becomes an inverted eight. A game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 640 and is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r each pay out five balls as prize balls when a ball wins, and the second ball entrance 640 receives two balls as prize balls. It is also one of the prize-winning openings that are paid out as balls. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640r is set to a different number, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters 640 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second right ball entrance 640r may be the same number.

The second entrance 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), which makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the electric sapo during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time taken to display the variation of the second symbol is short, so the variation of the second symbol In the display, the "○" pattern is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the probability change or during the time saving than during normal times.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is often closed, and it is difficult to win the second ball entrance 640. A jackpot lottery is executed by entering a ball and distributing the entered ball to the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r.

On the other hand, during the electric sapo during the variable probability or during the time saving, by passing the ball through either the left or right through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is likely to be in an open state. Since it is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball hole 640, the ball entering the opening 710a is distributed to the first ball hole 64 or the right second ball hole 640r. A jackpot lottery associated with the entry of the ball into the mouth 640 is also facilitated to be executed. Therefore, the chances of winning a big winning lottery are increased compared to the normal period, which is more advantageous to the player than during the normal period.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides a , can change the way the ball is launched. Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of any one of the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the right second ball entrance 640r becomes a jackpot, a predetermined time (variable After the elapse of time), the first symbol display device 37a or the first symbol display device 37b is turned on so as to become a jackpot stop symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot. , indicates the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific prize winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged. , for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80 .

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not enter any of the entrances 63, 64, 65a, 640, 640r are guided through the exit 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the sorting device 700 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

Main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, display controller 114, payout controller 111, launch controller 112, power supply 115, and card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100-104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover unopenably by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 238). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 238) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 218, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the startup process (FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (FIG. 253) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effects. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the touch sensor 290, the setting switch 291, the RTC 292, the firing sensor 293, the frame button 22, and the like. there is

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, changes the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 238). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 208, the sorting device 700 will be described. FIG. 208 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting device 700. FIG. As shown in FIG. 208 , the sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80 of the game board 13 . A through hole formed in the game board 13 accommodates a flow passage portion through which a game ball entering the opening portion 710a flows down, and a flow passage portion through which a game ball that enters the second ball inlet 640 flows down. The base member of the sorting device 700 is configured to be screwed to the game board 13 from the front side.

The prize winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described opening 710a positioned at the upper center in the left-right direction, the electric accessory 640a positioned below the opening 710a, and the electric accessory 640a. Through-holes (not shown) located on both sides in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and lower insertion holes (not shown) located below the through-holes and penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed. Formed by the Lord.

The distribution member 760 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box-like body with an open front side. In addition, the distribution member 760 is bent at a substantially center position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outer side in the left-right direction. Both ends of the sorting member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

The distributing member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 that incline downward from the central position in the left-right direction in a front view toward both left and right sides, and a distributing member 762 that is arranged at the center of each of the inclined surfaces 761 and the distributing member 762 . and a ball-throwing opening formed above.

The distribution member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three protrusions 762a projecting outward from the outer edge thereof at intervals of 90 degrees around the axis, and is inserted through the inside of the annular shape. and a shaft portion 762b.

The shaft portion 762b is a shaft support portion for rotating the distribution member 762 around an axis, is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is inserted through the inner side of the circular ring of the distribution member 762 . In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the intervening member and the distribution member 760, so that the distribution member 762 is arranged rotatably around the shaft portion 762b.

The projection 762a is a projection for alternately distributing the ball one by one to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the ball that has passed through the opening 710a is thrown. The ball is thrown to the left and right opposite sides. That is, the ball thrown from the opening 710a can be thrown in the left-right direction by the projection 762a in the central portion. The projections 762a protruding from both ends restrict the displacement of the distribution member 762, and the weight applied when the ball passes through displaces the direction in which the tip of the central projection 762a is positioned (distribution member 762 ), and the rotation of the distribution member 762 is restricted by contact between the tip surface of the projection 762a and the inclined surface. On the other hand, when the projection 762a that is not in contact with the inclined surface is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided ball collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the projection 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the distal end of the downwardly displaced projection 762a comes into contact with the inclined surface to restrict its displacement.

The inclined surface is the rolling surface of the path along which the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 roll and are thrown (hereinafter referred to as “third ball throw route KR3”). It is formed so as to slope downward from the center position in the left-right direction toward the outside. As a result, the balls distributed to the left and right by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760 are rolled on the inclined surface 761 and sent (rolled) to the end of the inclined surface 761 on the downward side.

At the end on the lower side of the inclined surface 761, the side surface on the back side is formed to be inclined in the direction of approaching the interposition member so that the thickness increases forward toward the end. As a result, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is thrown to the end of the inclined surface 761 passes through the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r of the intervening member disposed in front of the sorting member 760. can be thrown to More specifically, the ball distributed to the left side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the first ball entrance 64 . On the other hand, the ball distributed to the right side in front view by the distribution member 762 and rolled on the inclined surface 761 is thrown (entered) to the right second ball entrance 640r.

The intervening member is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the first ball entrance 64 which penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side, and the right side. A right second ball inlet 640r penetrating in the longitudinal direction and these first ball inlets 64 are mainly formed.

The first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r are formed on the front sides of the left and right ends of the sorting member 760, respectively, and on the rear side of the through holes 731 of the winning member 730. As shown in FIG. Therefore, the spaces at the left and right end portions of the sorting member 760 and the internal space of the through hole of the winning member 730 are connected via the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, the ball rolling on the upper part of the inclined surface 761 of the distribution member 760 described above passes through the first ball entrance 64 and is thrown to the through hole of the prize winning member 730, and the right second ball entrance 640r. , and a path for throwing the ball to the through-hole of the winning member 730 can be formed.

The sorting device 700 configured as described above is thrown as follows. A ball entering through the opening 710a is thrown to a distribution member 760, and is thrown to a third ball path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the distribution member 762 of the distribution member 760. FIG. A ball thrown through the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4. Here, the game ball that has entered the first ball entrance 64 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and the entry of the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is detected.

On the other hand, a ball that is thrown along the leftward third throwing path KR3 reaches the end of the third throwing path KR3. The ball is thrown to the fourth throwing route KR4 inside the . Here, the game ball that has entered the second ball entrance 640 is detected by a detection switch (sensor), and it is detected that the game ball has entered the right second ball entrance 640r.

In this way, game balls entering the opening 710a are alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 by the distribution member 762, so that the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640 are evenly distributed. It is possible to uniformly generate reserved balls by allowing game balls to enter the right second ball inlet 640r. Thereby, the reserved balls of the first special pattern and the reserved balls of the second special pattern can be generated evenly, the number of reserved balls on one side becomes the upper limit, and the overflow that is not stored as the reserved balls can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to change at the same time. By configuring in this way, lotteries for more games can be executed in a short time, and the determination results can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

The third pattern is composed of main patterns of numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of special symbols performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 238) described later is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned. , the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbols is "big hit B1", one of the odd numbered main symbols "1, 3, 4, 7, 9" is stopped and displayed in a grid. A variable display is performed. In addition, if it is a "jackpot A" or a "jackpot B2", a variable display is performed in which one of the even-numbered main symbols "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" is aligned in a grid pattern. Further, in the case of the jackpot C, the chance number composed of the combination of "341" is displayed. It should be noted that this chance combination is configured not to be selected if the lottery result is a loss. In the present embodiment, the chance numbers are configured to be displayed in a combination of specific third symbols. ) may be displayed as one or a combination of a plurality of them, or characters such as "Chance" may be displayed for notification.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 209 to 217, an effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 209(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The lower 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. Approximately the center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and the third symbols stop on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 during each game. Is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally below the main display area Dm, and is divided into two sub-areas Ds1 to Ds2 in the horizontal direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an execution display area in which, when the ball held in the main display area Dm is variably displayed (dynamically displayed), the variably held symbols are moved and displayed. be. The pending symbols moved to the execution display area are displayed as symbols larger than the pending symbols so that it can be identified that the variation of the corresponding special symbols is being executed. In addition, when the variation is executed, by varying the color of the symbol or varying the pattern of the symbol, it is configured to indicate the lottery result of the varying special symbol.

The small area Ds2 is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation has not been performed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640. This is an area for displaying the number of balls and a preview effect image. A character display area C is set in the small area Ds2 in which a character's advance notice effect image is displayed when the number of reserved balls reaches a predetermined number or more.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 209(b), a total of three main patterns of the third pattern are stop-displayed in the main display area Dm. In addition, when the variable display is performed, in addition to the main symbols displayed in the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbols are also displayed so that a maximum of 9 main symbols are displayed. In some cases. In the sub-display area Ds, the small area Ds1 displays an active pedestal symbol m0 indicating that it is an area in which the held ball corresponding to the special symbol being executed is moved and displayed. When the variation of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is executed as shown in a), a round symbol is displayed. Among the reserved patterns (circular patterns) displayed in the small area Ds2, the leftmost circular pattern indicating that the reserved order is first is hidden, and then the small area A circle design having a larger diameter than the reserved design is displayed on Ds1. In this case, the reserved symbols displayed in the small area Ds2 are displayed after the reserved symbols displayed side by side are moved to the position where the hidden leftmost reserved pattern was displayed. be done. When the reserved pattern moves to the small area Ds1 and is displayed as the pattern being executed, a predetermined effect lottery is executed based on the lottery result of the special pattern that starts to fluctuate, the selected fluctuation pattern, and the like. Then, the color and pattern of the pattern being executed are determined and displayed. With this configuration, the player can quickly determine the lottery result of the special symbols to start varying and the selected variation pattern from the symbols being executed displayed in the small area Ds1. can improve the interest of In addition, the pattern being executed displayed in the small area Ds1 is not limited to the effect of changing the color, pattern, etc. at the start of the fluctuation, but the effect of changing the special pattern within the period when the special pattern is fluctuating is also executed. For example, the timing when the third symbol switches from high-speed variation to low-speed variation, or the ready-to-win display mode (the display mode in which the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped with the same symbol and the middle symbol is scrolled). It is executed at the timing or the timing at which a specific effect (for example, when a predetermined movie effect is executed) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 209(b), in the small area Ds2, there is a first reserved symbol pedestal m1 indicating that it is an area in which a reserved symbol indicating that the reserved order is the first in the order of variation is displayed. displayed on the left side. On the right side of the first reserved symbol pedestal m1, there are a second reserved symbol pedestal m2 indicating that the reserved order is second, a third reserved symbol pedestal m3 that indicates that the reserved order is third, and a reserved order. 4th reserved symbol pedestal m4 indicating that is the 4th, 5th reserved symbol pedestal m5 indicating that the reserved order is 5th, 6th reserved symbol pedestal indicating that the reserved order is 6th m6, the seventh reserved symbol pedestal m7 indicating that the reserved order is seventh, and the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 indicating that the reserved order is eighth are in a state where no reserved symbols are displayed. is also displayed.

Above the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, when a predetermined number or more of reserved symbols are not displayed, a reserved number suggesting pattern P is displayed respectively. The reserved number suggesting pattern P is formed in a variable lid shape on which the character "5" indicating that the reserved order is the fifth is displayed on the upper part of the fifth reserved pattern pedestal m5. Similarly, the upper part of the sixth reserved symbol pedestal m6 displays the character "6" indicating that the reserved order is 6th, and the upper part of the 7th reserved symbol pedestal m7 displays the reserved order of 7. The character "7" indicating that it is the 8th reserved order is displayed, and the character "8" indicating that the reserved order is the 8th is displayed on the upper part of the 8th reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is composed of the pattern of

As shown in FIG. 209(b), when the reserved number is 0, the reserved number suggesting pattern P extends over the area from the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8. It is displayed, and is constructed so that the player can recognize that the maximum reserved number is eight in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of four is set for the first special design, and a maximum of four is set for the second special design. Also, in this control example, the maximum number is set for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of overflow by doing so.

On the right side of the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8, there is displayed a character display pedestal C1 indicating that it is an area where a notice character is displayed. With this configuration, the player can confirm in advance the area where the character is displayed even when the character for announcement is not displayed, and the game can be played in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), when the third symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed in the main area Dm (during the variable display period of the special symbol), the first entrance 64 or the right When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, if the number of reserved balls corresponding to the entered special symbol is less than the maximum value, the upper part of the pedestal display corresponding to the reserved order A reserved pattern is displayed in . FIG. 210(a) shows the display of reserved symbols when the number of reserved symbols is three.

As shown in FIG. 210(a), until the number of reserved balls is 3, the reserved number suggesting pattern P is displayed in the display area where the 5th to 8th reserved patterns are displayed. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 210(b), when the number of reservations is 4, the variable lid pattern that displays the 5th reservation of the reservation number suggesting pattern P is hidden and variably displayed. . By constructing in this way, when the reserved pattern is displayed up to the vicinity of the variable lid pattern, it is hidden, and the player misunderstands the variable lid pattern as the reserved pattern and suppresses the problem of misunderstanding the actual number of reserved balls. can. Also, as shown in FIG. 210(b), when the number of held balls reaches 4, not only is the variable lid design hidden in the display area for the fifth held ball, but a girl is displayed in the character display area C. It is configured so that a character pattern is displayed.

The character displayed in the character display area C is configured to display a comment display suggesting the number of remaining balls up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls by using a speech balloon. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner. Specifically, when the number of pending balls reaches 7, the message "1 more ball" is displayed in the comment display. This suggests that the 8 held balls are in a memorized state. By configuring in this way, the player can easily recognize the number up to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls, and when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit, the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the right By entering a ball into one of the second ball entrances 640r (a ball entrance corresponding to a special symbol that is not the upper limit of retention), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow that is not retained and stored.

In this control example, when a game ball enters the opening 710a of the distribution device 700, the game ball that has entered is alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64 (the first ball entrance 64) by the distribution member 762 of the distribution device 700. 1 special symbol) and the right second entrance 640r (corresponding to the second special symbol). As a result, the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are easily accumulated alternately and evenly. As a result, the player can play the game to the opening 710a without worrying about the overflow even when the total number of reserved balls (combining the first special symbol and the second special symbol) becomes seven. The game can be continued so as to enter the ball.

Furthermore, when the number of held balls reaches the upper limit, the character "MAX" is displayed to indicate that the number of held balls has been stored up to the upper limit, and the player can continues to shoot game balls and suppresses the problem of overflow of held balls.

In FIG. 211(a), the fourth reserved ball is stored, and the winning ball is determined by the look-ahead processing (Z320: see FIG. 249) in the starting prize-winning processing (Z105) of FIG. Information on the selected variation pattern type is output as a winning command to the audio ramp control device 113, and based on the information, for example, when it is determined that it is a big hit or a variety of super reach, the player The display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the white reserved pattern is changed to red) as an effect to make the player expect a big hit, and the fifth variable lid pattern of the reserved number suggesting pattern P is also non- Display as it is without displaying it. Furthermore, an effect is executed in which a girl is displayed in the character display area C and the characters "as is" are displayed to suggest that the number of reserved characters should not be increased any further. Here, when the fifth held ball is memorized, as shown in FIG. In both cases, a notification is given as if an overflow had occurred. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the fourth held ball will be variably displayed. It is possible to suppress wasteful shooting and consumption of game balls by a player.

As shown in FIG. 212(a), in a short period of time (for example, 5 seconds), when the number of 0 held balls is stored up to 4, at the timing when the 4th held ball is stored, The 5th and 6th figures of the variable cover pattern P of the reserved number suggesting pattern P are hidden, a girl is displayed in the character display area C, and the character "early" is displayed, and the reserved period is reached. Since it is short, the information suggesting that the reserved number suggesting pattern P is specially changed and displayed is executed. Here, normally, when the number of reserved balls is four, the fifth variable cover pattern of the reserved number suggesting pattern P is hidden, but 0 reserved balls are displayed within 5 seconds. Since the number has increased to 4, there is a special display rule that the 5th and 6th variable cover patterns are displayed as non-display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect to be executed depending on the period during which the number of held balls is increased or the interval at which the held balls are stored, and the player can be notified that the number of held balls has occurred in a short period of time of a predetermined number or more. is easily recognizable. In addition, in this control example, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is configured to be different from the normal display mode, but this is not restrictive. It may be configured to vary the color, pattern, and shape of the reserved design.

Next, with reference to FIG.212(b), the example of a variable display of the variable cover pattern P in a time saving game state is demonstrated. In the time-saving game state (high probability of success/failure determination of normal symbols), unlike the normal game state (low probability of success/failure determination of normal symbols), when the fourth reserved ball is stored, FIG. 212(b). 5, the fifth (m5) and sixth (m6) variable cover patterns P are hidden. Then, a character of a girl is displayed, and characters are displayed to prompt the player to play the game so as to memorize up to the 6th reserved ball, ie, "Put up to 6" in a balloon. In the time-saving game state, the success/failure determination probability of the normal symbols is set to a high probability, and the variation time of the normal symbols is also set to a short time, so that the normal electric accessories (electric sapo) 640a are easily set to the open state, It becomes easier for a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. Therefore, during the time-saving game, overflow of the reserved balls is likely to occur. Therefore, during the time-saving game, unlike during the normal game, many variable cover patterns P are hidden, and the upper limit value of the reserved balls is 8. By urging the player to play the game so that the number of balls is six, which is less than the number of pieces, the game can be played so as to suppress the state where the reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit value and the overflow is likely to occur. can. In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the number of reserved balls is the fifth, the variable cover pattern P of the seventh ball (m7) is hidden, and when the number of the reserved balls is the seventh, the variable cover pattern of the eighth ball (m8) is displayed. P is hidden.

In addition, in this control example, during the time-saving game, the seventh variable cover pattern P is hidden when the fifth ball is held. The configuration may be such that the first and eighth variable cover patterns P are maintained in the displayed state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game in an attempt to generate 6 or more reserved balls.

In addition, when the fourth reserved ball is stored, the sixth and seventh variable cover patterns are hidden according to the content of the winning command, and the girl is encouraged to increase the reserved balls to the sixth ball. It may be configured to display the characters "Insert up to 6" suggesting . In this way, by notifying the player in advance of the type of jackpot game (probability variable win or normal win) as a privilege by entering up to 6, the player will be motivated to accumulate reserved balls. can be increased.

As shown in FIGS. 213(a) and 213(b), the type of the girl displayed in the character display area C is configured to be variable according to the prefetch result (information indicated by the prize winning command) of the held balls stored. It is The example shown in FIG. 214(a) is an example in which a girl character that is normally displayed when there are four held balls is displayed, and the example shown in FIG. 213(b) shows four balls. Shown is an example in which a special girl character different from the usual one is selected and displayed based on the fact that the lottery result of the look-ahead result is a specific result when the eye ball is memorized. there is Here, the specific result is the result of winning a lottery that determines the type of girl different from the normal time, and if the result of the look-ahead is a big hit or a super reach, the winning probability is set high. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the level of expectations for a big win based on the character type of the girl displayed to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), a description will be given of a display mode in the case where the number of pending prizes reaches the maximum value and then over winnings are made. In FIG. 214(a), when the number of pending items is stored up to the upper limit, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C displays a balloon comment indicating that the number of pending items is the upper limit. characters are displayed. After that, when game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and an overflow occurs, the girl character J1 displayed in the character display area C is changed to the character J2. is displayed, and the characters "overflowed" are displayed to indicate that it has overflowed. In this way, in the event of overflow, frequent occurrence of overflow can be suppressed by informing the player of the occurrence of overflow in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this control example, the type of character is changed and displayed for the purpose of suppressing overflow. Depending on the type and the content of the comment, the result of the winning judgment of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, the prefetching result of the stored held ball (winning judgment result, etc.), and the current gaming state (normal gaming state or probability variable gaming state ) may be configured to notify the type. By constructing in this way, the player can enjoy various performances by playing the game while generating the overflow, and the player can generate the overflow which is disadvantageous to the player while enjoying it.

With reference to FIGS. 215(a) and 215(b), a description will be given of a display mode when the in-reach suspension effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 215 (a), when the variation of the variation pattern (various types of normal reach, various types of super reach) to be the reach display mode is executed, a predetermined lottery (see Z2324 in FIG. 262) is executed, and by lottery When it is determined to execute the special holding effect, as shown in FIG. 215, when the ready-to-win display mode is set, the display mode of the pending effect during the reach is set. When the ready-to-reach suspension effect is executed, regardless of the number of suspended balls, the fifth and sixth variable lid patterns P are hidden, the girl character J1 is displayed, and a balloon comment says, "Save up to 6. ' is displayed to suggest to the player that he should store 6 balls while the reach is fluctuating.

As shown in FIG. 215(b), when actually accumulating up to 6 pending balls during the ready-to-win display, the ready-to-win symbol of even number symbol "6" becomes the odd number symbol "7" which is the symbol type that is advantageous to the player. Displayed as variable. Furthermore, the girl character J1 displays a character "Well done" in a speech balloon, and the color of the sixth pending pattern is changed (for example, from blue to red). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping the shooting of the game ball and play the game even during the ready-to-win, and the profit of the game parlor side can be increased.

In addition, in this control example, when the number of reserved balls becomes the specified number (6 pieces), an example of changing the reach pattern is shown, but the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, and the hit type corresponding to the even number pattern is shown. In some cases, instead of changing the ready-to-win pattern to odd-numbered patterns, the effect of swimming a shoal of fish from right to left in the main display area Dm is displayed, and the degree of expectation for a big win is determined by the number, color, etc. of the fish. It is configured to perform an advance notice display suggesting the success/failure determination result such as "Congratulations".

216(a) and 216(b), the display mode of the lucky hold effect will be described. When a specific variation (variation that wins the advance notice lottery that executes the lucky suspension effect) is executed, the number of retained balls when the retained balls corresponding to the variation were stored in the previous big hit is stored. 216(a) is displayed on the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the number of held balls, and corresponds to the mark pattern n6 of "Aim for 6" from the girl character J1 in the character display area C. A notification is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls up to the reserved number. As shown in FIG. 216(b), when up to 6 reserved balls are memorized during the lucky reserved effect, the text "Well done" is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22, the main display area Dm is displayed. A character (announcement display mode) indicating that the probability variation jackpot is given in the special pattern during fluctuation called "probability variation fixed" is displayed.

In this way, it is configured to notify the jackpot type when the jackpot game is achieved. In this control example, it is configured so that the main effect is executed in the case of a big hit. The type may be determined, the type may be notified, and the expectation of a big win may be made.

In the lucky holding effect, when the holding balls stored in the variable lid pattern P (5 to 8 holding) become a hit, the number of the holding balls is stored, and the lucky prize is executed when the next big hit variation is executed. It is configured to appear as a pending number. By constructing in this way, the player can be made aware of how many reserved numbers were stored when the previous big win occurred, and the player can keep the reserved number as large as possible and make the lucky reservation. A game can be played so that the performance can be easily executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 216 (a), the reserved design has a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls at the time of winning (the total value of the reserved number of the first special design and the second special design) (the number of reservations at the time of winning: Figure 216) is given and displayed. When the reserved pattern is digested (variation of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved pattern is started), the number of reserved patterns at the time of winning is slid to the reserved pattern display area with a lower fluctuation order (variable). is displayed with the same number. By configuring in this way, even when the fluctuation starts, it is possible to confirm the number of pending prizes at the time of the fluctuation.

In addition, in the event of a jackpot, the number of pending prizes for the jackpot game that is being executed in the production during the jackpot game (opening production, round production, ending production, etc.) is displayed by numbers, patterns, etc., and notified. It may be configured as

Next, with reference to FIGS. 217(a) to (b), a long-time winning (a winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is in an open state for a longer period of time than normal winning) is one of the winning types of normal symbols. ), the display mode of the holding effect when the long open effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 217(a), when the long-time win of the normal symbol is won and the long-time win game is started, a comment "Now open" is displayed in the main display area Dm. This display informs the player that a long-time winning game is being executed, and the player can receive the first ball entrance 64 or the right second entrance without shooting a game ball during the long-time winning game, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to suppress the problem of missing an opportunity for a game ball to enter the ball opening 640r. In addition, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during this long-time winning game, the reserved pattern corresponding to the entrance ball is black different from the normal time. It is displayed as a reserved pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to distinguish between the held balls stored during a long-time game and the held balls stored during other periods.

As shown in FIG. 217(b), when the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols stored during the long winning game is started, the scroll display of the third symbol is started in synchronism. , a symbol of a treasure chest is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the words ``If the treasure chest opens, you have a great chance!!'' are displayed. It is suggested to the player that there is a high expectation that the lottery result of the special symbol will be a big win.

By constructing in this way, when a long-time win of a normal symbol is executed, the presentation of the reserved ball is varied, and a special presentation is also performed during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball. , the performance of the game can be greatly varied by executing the winning for a long time, and the game with freshness can be provided.

Returning to FIG. 207, the description continues. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the lottery of the normal symbols performed with the passing of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, and stops after the variability ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display is provided in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "○"), the electric accessory 640a is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time. As a result, the configuration is such that a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example. And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the maximum number of balls that can be held through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but three times or less, or It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

A sorting device 700 is arranged below the variable display device unit 80, and inside the sorting device 700, game balls entering the opening 710a are alternately sorted by a sorting member 762 to A first ball entrance 64 and a second right ball entrance 640r are provided. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, the first ball entrance switch and the second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. Then, due to the turning on of the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch, the main controller 110 draws the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the display according to the lottery result is the second. It is indicated by the LED 37a of the 1-symbol display device 37. FIG. Also, the first ball entry hole 64 and the right second ball entry hole 640r are also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is the same, but the number of prize balls may be different. good. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, three prize balls are generated, and when a ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r, four prize balls are generated. The number of balls may be set larger than the number of prize balls for the first ball entrance 64 .

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged below the sorting device 700, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated the number of times set for the type of jackpot game to be executed (for example, 16 times (16 rounds) for jackpot A). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 218). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 218) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 218, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 218 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 219, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the special winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (reach hit type, off other than reach (off length A, off short A), reach off type), variation pattern selection and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 255). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special pattern 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is provided respectively, and a special pattern holding common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the right second ball entrance 640r.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 957), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 957 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 957). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special winning random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-957, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-957. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 255).

The value of the special hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is equal to the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) for special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)) for special symbol low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing.

Here, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is out. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A", "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2", and "jackpot C". One of "jackpot B1", "jackpot B2" and "jackpot C" is determined. Then, a display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 957. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the probability of a special symbol is low, and the random number "0 to 2" is a special symbol big winning random number table for when the probability is low. 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that become a big hit is 3 among the total number of random number values of 958, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "3/958".

On the other hand, there are 27 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot when the probability of the special symbol is high, and the values "0 to 26" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability. . In this way, when the probability of special symbols is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 27 among the total number of random numbers of 958, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "27/958".

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. And, as shown in FIG. 222(a), in the jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1 and the first A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2 referred to corresponding to the lottery of 2 special symbols is set respectively.

In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped, the lottery result in the variation is a jackpot, and the special symbol set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A determination value for collation (determination) with the value of the winning type counter C2 is stored in association with the big winning type.

FIG. 222(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1. In the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, the jackpot type when the random number in the obtained special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "40 to 75", the jackpot type was "jackpot B1", and when the value was "76 to 79", the jackpot types were "jackpot B2" and "80 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot C" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is

In addition, the special figure 2 big hit type selection table 202d2 is set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lottery result in the variation is a big hit. A determination value for collation (determination) with the value of the special hit type counter C2 is stored in association with the jackpot type.

FIG. 222(c) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2. In the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, the jackpot type when the random number in the acquired special hit type counter is "0 to 39" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "40 to 87", the jackpot type was "jackpot B1", and when the value was "88 to 91", the jackpot types were "jackpot B2" and "92 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot C" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type to be selected when the determination result is a jackpot between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the player can choose between the first special pattern and the second special pattern. can be of interest in which of the lotteries is being run. In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (60%), the probability variation ratio is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the gaming machine It is possible to suppress the problem that the probability variation rate is not constant as a whole. In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot C in the second special pattern is set low, the probability of the 16R probability variable jackpot being selected is set higher than in the first special pattern, which is advantageous to the player. there is

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 A pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 255), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 220b) that stores random values for determining the variation time of symbol variation from the values (random values) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is It is provided in the ROM 202 .

As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in the game state (normal game state) when the success/failure determination probability of normal symbols is low. , and time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in the game state (high-probability game state or time-saving game state) when the winning/failure determination probability of normal symbols is high probability are set respectively. Further details will be given in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio ramp control device 113, which will be described later. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 223 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter A value of CS1 is assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 223, when the win/loss determination result is a win, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the number of retained balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of retained balls regardless of), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 50", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "51 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 60”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "61 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach for "101 to 198" A jackpot E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach, which is a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 1 to 4, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 5 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , Outlier Short A (Variation No. 11) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 supersedes "0 to 198" When reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the judgment is out, the number of held balls is small (if it is 1 to 4) and the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is set to be easily selected, so during that time the second By entering the game ball into the 1st ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r, it becomes easier for the ball to be held, and a period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped occurs (the lottery game is not performed). It is configured to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game due to the occurrence of a period. In addition, when the number of held balls is large, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low, when the number of held balls is large, variation of normal reach and super reach is executed, so that the player can see the success judgment result. can be expected to be a hit.

Next, referring to FIG. 224, it is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery results of special symbols, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special hit type counter C2) is set. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 224, when the win/loss determination result is a win, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the number of retained balls is 1 to 8 (that is, the number of retained balls regardless of), if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 90", the normal reach jackpot A (variation No 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "91 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot B1" or "jackpot B2", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 100”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value “0 to 198” of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "101 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 250" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected for the value "0 to 100" of the variation type counter CS1, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach for "101 to 198" A jackpot E (fluctuation No. 6) is selected.

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern of normal reach or super reach, which is a long variation time, is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for 1 to 2 pending balls, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 Normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198", and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 199" for the number of held balls 3 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , short deviation B (variation No. 12) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198" When reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the variation time (variation period) in the short deviation B variation pattern is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. there is As a result, when the result of the judgment is out and the number of pending balls is 3 or more, the out short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbols can be changed a lot in a short time. , the period until a big win is determined (the period between big wins) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number set by the normal winning random number table 202c matches, it is determined as a normal symbol winning. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) is for when the probability of normal symbols is low (a period in which normal symbols are in a normal state), and when the probability of winning normal symbols is higher than when the probability is low. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently. Further, as for the types of normal symbol wins, normal wins and long-time wins are set, and the values of the normal win random number counter C4 are set respectively.

Here, the normal winning of the normal symbol is in the normal game state (low probability game state), and in the jackpot game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state with the opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the time saving period, during the variable probability period, the operation of opening the electric accessory 640a in the opening time of 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time win is a win in which the action of opening the electric accessory 640a in an open state for 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the game state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed during the variable probability period during normal winning is set to be the same as the opening operation during long winning. may be opened. Specifically, for example, the open state operation may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the ball more into the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r during a long winning period, and during the normal game, the variation in the second special symbol is possible. The execution of the display can be facilitated, and the change of the game performance can be enjoyed by the player by the variable display of the second special pattern in which a fresh advance notice display or the like is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 221(c), when the probability of the normal symbol is low, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained is any one of 5 to 6, the normal winning of the normal symbol is determined to be Also, if it is one of 7 to 8, it is determined that it is a long-time hit of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal winning of the normal design. In addition, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the long-time hit of the normal pattern is not set, but when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as that of the long-time hit. The hit is substantially the same as the long time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the players and increase the profit of the game parlor. On the other hand, during the short time period and the variable probability period, which are high probabilities, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of “1/1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the right second entrance It is possible to increase the chance of entering the 640r. Therefore, it is possible to suppress consumption of game balls by the player and set a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can spend more time playing the game.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal patterns, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the variable normal patterns. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 8", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , the symbol "○" is illuminated. Then, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal win. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times". If the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is "21 to 28", the right second entrance 640r is opened only "2 seconds×2 times" as a long win.

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 221(c)). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , and the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is high, compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, the variable display time is very short, from 30 seconds to 3 seconds. Since the open period becomes very long as "0.2 seconds x 1 time -> 2 seconds x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the right second ball entrance 640r is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter (value = 0 to 239) that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4, and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 255).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 218, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 219, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 255) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 254) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 220(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 contains the above-described special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 221), variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 221(b)), In addition to the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)) and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIGS. 222(a) to (c)), a winning command table 202e is set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, etc., in addition to the above.

FIG. 225 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202e. The winning command table 202e is determined in the pre-reading process (S320: FIG. 249) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, and the determination result such as the variation pattern selected when the stored ball starts to vary is determined. It is a table for determining a winning command corresponding to a result. As shown in FIG. 225, when the result of the lottery in the look-ahead is a big win, a winning command corresponding to the determined big win type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. Thereby, not only the variation pattern type and the success/failure determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202e for the variation pattern types of long loss A, short loss A, and short loss B as loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, open number counter 203g, long open flag 203i, time saving medium counter 203j, variable execution It has a flag 203k, a variable probability flag 203m, a mid-jackpot flag 203n, a fluctuation order storage area 203p, and another memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to reservation areas (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see Z404 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see Z205 in FIG. 33).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see Z206 in FIG. 33 and Z405 in FIG. 35). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the right second ball entrance 640r, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of held balls in the displayed variable display, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. (See Z504 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see Z406 in FIG. 250).

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Z505 in FIG. 252). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Fig. 252 Z503: No).

The number-of-opening counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The long time open flag 203i is a flag indicating that the long time is in progress. This long time open flag 203i is set to ON in the process of Z429 in the normal design fluctuation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. Also, in the processing of Z403 in the normal symbol variation process (Z106: FIG. 250), when the variation of the normal symbol is newly started (after the game is executed for a long time, the variation of the next normal symbol is started is set to off).

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. be done. That is, when a special symbol jackpot is won, a new value corresponding to the jackpot type is set regardless of the value of the time saving medium counter 203j.

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether the variation of the first special symbol is to be performed or the variation of the second special symbol is to be performed. In this control example, variation is started in accordance with the order of entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second right ball entrance 640r (the order that is reserved and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol stops and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (Z204: FIG. 245) Based on the order data of the reserved storage stored in the fluctuation order storage area 203p to be described later, the fluctuation stored next is the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. 245, and the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (Z245, Z247 in FIG. 245).

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This variable probability flag 203m is, in the processing of Z1113 in the jackpot control processing (Z1104: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when it is determined that the jackpot game being executed is other than jackpot A ( Z1111: No), it is set to ON. In addition, in the process of Z220 in the special symbol variation process (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, it is set to OFF when stopping the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit.

The jackpot middle flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game state is a jackpot game. This jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set in the processing of Z221 of the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Also, in the process of Z1114 of the jackpot control process (Z256: FIG. 256) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game end timing comes.

The change order storage area 203p is an area for storing the reservation order when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the right second ball entrance 640r and is stored as a reserved ball. In this control example, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. Also, in this control example, since the distribution device 700 is configured to alternately distribute the first ball entrance 64 and the right second ball entrance 640r, fluctuations are started in the order in which they were reserved and stored. As a result, even in the variation of the special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately executed, and only one of the reserved balls is digested, so that the reserved ball of the special symbol is It is possible to suppress the problem of overflow.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control unit 110 are set, but details thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 253) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a pending change selection table 222b, a pending effect mode selection table 222c, a pending lid range selection table 222d, and a pending lid command selection table. Table 222e, pending lid color change selection table 222f, lucky pending command table 222g, background mode selection table 222h, pending character selection table 222i, pending character change table 222j, balloon selection table 222k, during reach drawing lottery table 222m, reach start time A calculation table 222n and a lucky reservation lottery table 222p are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

The pending change selection table 222b determines whether or not the pending symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is to be changed and displayed based on the received winning command, and is necessary for the effect to be executed according to the content of the change. 2 is a selection table for obtaining a valid pending change value;

FIG. 227(a) schematically shows the contents of this pending change selection table 222b. In the pending change selection table 222b, the value of the effect counter 223h is assigned to the type of the received winning command, and the display of changing the pending symbol in the sub-display area Ds according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. A mode (see FIG. 211(a)) and a pending change value are set. Incidentally, the acquired pending change value will be described in detail in the pending effect mode selection table 222c, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the prize winning command type is out, when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 180", the display mode of the reserved pattern is not changed from the normal reserved pattern. is determined and the pending change value gets zero. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "181 to 198", the display mode of the reserved design is changed from the white circle design (the normal display mode of the reserved design) to the blue circle design (change A). and the pending change value gets 1.

If the winning command type is out of normal reach, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "51-100", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any one of "101 to 198", it is decided to change the white circular pattern to a green circular pattern and display it, and 2 is obtained as the pending change value.

If the winning command type is out of super reach, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 30", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "31-90", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any of "91-198", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2;

When the winning command type is the normal reach jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 20", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere between "21-90", change A is determined and the pending change value gets 1; If it is any of "91-198", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2;

When the winning command type is the super ready-to-win jackpot, if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 10", no change is determined and 0 is acquired as the pending change value. If it is anywhere from "11 to 100", change A is determined and the pending change value gets one. If it is anywhere from "101 to 189", change B is determined and the pending change value gets 2; If it is any one of "190 to 198", it is decided to change the white circle pattern to a red circle pattern and display it, and 3 is acquired as the pending change value.

In this way, by receiving the winning command, the color of the reserved pattern is changed and displayed according to the contents thereof, so that not only the special pattern being changed but also the reserved pattern being displayed are reserved and stored. It is possible to predict the success/failure determination result corresponding to the reserved design. In addition, since it is possible to inform the player in advance that the ready-to-win display mode will be displayed when the variable display is performed by the change B, even if the special symbol is in the state before the change, it is possible to hold and store it. In this case, the player can expect that the variation will start, and even if the variation of the special symbol that is to be missed is executed during that time, it is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game. Furthermore, by setting a hold change value for each reach type, even the same hold change can be developed into a ready-to-win production through different execution productions, and an unexpected production can attract the player. It is possible to attract.

The pending effect mode selection table 222c is a table for selecting a plurality of modes prepared according to the pending changes displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

FIG. 227(b) schematically shows the contents of this pending effect mode selection table 222c. In the pending effect mode selection table 222c, the pending effect mode is set according to the value (range) of the pending change value acquired in the pending change selection table 222b (see Z2404 in FIG. 266). Specifically, when the pending change value is "0", the normal mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. The normal mode is when all the reserved patterns being displayed are not changed (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the interval between the reserved patterns and the variable lid pattern P is one. This is a variable display mode (see FIG. 210(b)).

When the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the notice A mode is determined (selected) as the pending effect mode. Notice A mode is when any change (any of change A to change C) is set in the pending pattern being displayed (state), and if the number of pending balls is 4 or more, This is a holding effect mode in which the pattern and the display range of the variable lid pattern P are displayed without a gap (see FIG. 211(a)). Strictly speaking, FIG. 211(a) is not a display mode representing the notice A mode, but an example of a display mode of a pending effect mode of the notice B mode, which will be described later. In the advance notice A mode, the contents of the displayed comment are different from those in the state of FIG. 211(a). In the advance notice A mode, when a reserved ball is generated after the reserved pattern with a variable color and the reserved pattern is displayed, one variable lid pattern P is also hidden (for example, the state of FIG. 211(a)). By increasing (generating) one reserved ball from , the variable cover pattern P with the letter 5 is hidden), and the comment indicating the expectation of the big hit for the reserved pattern with the variable color Display is performed by a callout. In this way, in the advance notice A mode, after the colors of the reserved symbols are changed, the game is played so as to generate the reserved balls. It is configured to inform the degree of expectation of.

When the pending change value is "3", the notice B mode is determined as the pending effect mode. Notice B mode is when there is a change in the reserved pattern being displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, any change in the reserved pattern being displayed (Change A , change B, or change C) is set (state), and when the number of reserved balls is 4 or more, the display range of the reserved pattern and the variable lid pattern P is displayed without a gap. Or (see FIG. 211(a)), it is a mode in which a reserved design is displayed on the display range of the variable cover design P (see FIG. 211(b)).

By configuring in this way, not only the color of the reserved design can be changed, but also the display range of the variable cover design P can be changed in various ways according to the increase or decrease in the number of reserved balls. It is possible to spread the enjoyment of playing and attract players. In addition, unlike the advance notice A mode, it is a holding effect that allows the player to continue the game so as not to generate any more holding balls. Expectations can be heightened by concentrating on the start of the variation (dynamic display) of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols. Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The reserved lid range selection table 222d includes a plurality of data tables for acquiring the reserved lid range value necessary for setting the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. is set.

Here, the special effects performed during the normal mode will be explained. In the normal mode, as special effects, a short-term winning effect, a reach pending effect, and a lucky pending effect are provided.

The short-term winning effect is a effect that is executed when the required time from when the number of reserved balls is 0 to when the number of reserved balls is stored and changed to 1 and then to 4 is less than 5 seconds, and is normal. In the mode, the interval between the reserved lid pattern P and the reserved pattern is set to be one reserved ball (the reserved lid pattern P is variably displayed), but in the short-term winning effect, FIG. The number of reserved lid symbols P is changed and displayed so that the interval between the reserved lid symbols P and the reserved symbols is two, and a girl character J0 indicating a short-term winning effect is displayed. It is a production in which the comment "It's early" is displayed. In the short-term winning effect, when the game state is the normal state, no other special effect is executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the value of the number of pending balls has changed from 0 to 1 or more. , the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (see Z2425 in FIG. 267) when the number of reserved balls reaches 4 before the short-term prize winning timer 223q for measuring the elapsed time passes 5 seconds. ) to start execution (see FIG. 212(a)), and when the short-term prize winning timer 223q has passed 5 seconds, the special effect status storage area is set to 0 (see Z2606 in FIG. 270), and the effect to end the execution is.

Retention production during reach is an effect that sets a notice display mode that prompts the player to play the game so that the number of reservations is accumulated to a predetermined number (for example, 6 in FIG. 215(a)) during reach fluctuation. . In this ready-to-reach pending effect, when the variation type is ready-to-win, the possibility of execution is selected based on a ready-to-win effect lottery table 222m described later, and when the execution becomes possible, the reach start time calculation to be described later. The value of the pending effect start timer 223r, which is set based on the variation type by the table 222n, becomes 0 after a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed, and at the timing when the ready-to-win effect starts, another special effect is executed. If not (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the special effect status storage area is set to 2 (see Z2327 in FIG. 262) to start execution (see FIG. 215 (a)), It is a production that ends when the fluctuation ends.

Lucky pending effect is to store the number of pending balls (reserved patterns) when they are stored (displayed), and when a big hit (specific judgment result) occurs, the big hit is the held ball. A predetermined mark pattern (see FIG. 216(a)) is displayed in the reserved pattern display area corresponding to the number of reserved balls stored at the time the ball enters the entrance, and the reserved balls are stored up to the mark pattern. This is an effect for displaying a notice display mode for prompting the player to play the game. When reserved symbols are stored up to the mark pattern, as shown in FIG. An effect to notify the state (normal game state) is executed. In the lucky reservation performance, when other special performances are not executed (the value of the special performance status storage area 223n is 0), and a big win is achieved as a result of the success/failure determination of the start prize in the past, the value of the number of pending balls. is 5 or more, a lottery is drawn based on a lucky reservation lottery table 222p to determine whether or not execution is possible. , the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (see Z2307 in FIG. 261) to start execution (see FIG. 216(a)), and end at the start of the next variation.

In this way, even in the normal mode where there is no change in the hold, the hold effect related to the hold design can be set according to the time interval between the start winning prizes, the number of pending balls during reach fluctuation, and the result of winning or failing determination due to the past start winning prizes. Various presentations can be provided depending on the stored content and the like, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 228(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the reserved lid range selection table 222d. The reservation cover range selection table 222d includes a normal reservation cover range selection table 222d1, a notice A mode reservation cover range selection table 222d2, a notice B mode reservation cover range selection table 222d3, a short-term winning reservation cover range selection table 222d4, and a ready-to-win effect. A reservation lid range selection table 222d5 and a time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6 are provided.

The normal pending lid range selection table 222d1 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the normal mode. FIG. 228(b) schematically shows the contents of the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1. In the normal reserved lid range selection table 222d1, the reserved lid range value is obtained for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is normal mode, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), and the game state is the normal state (low probability game state (low probability of jackpot probability, non-time saving In the case of acquiring the holding lid range value in the game state)) (see Z2354 in FIG. 263), and in the case of the lucky holding production (the value of the special production status storage area 223n is 3), the holding lid range value is acquired (FIG. 263) (see Z2346 of )).

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "4", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", 2 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "2", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 0 is obtained as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The notice A mode pending lid range selection table 222d2 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the prior notice A mode. FIG. 228(c) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2. In the advance notice A mode reserved lid range selection table 222d2, the reserved lid range value is acquired (see Z2351 in FIG. 263) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 3", 4 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "4", 4 is obtained as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "3", 3 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "2", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "1", 1 is acquired as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "0", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The notice B mode pending lid range selection table 222d3 is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when the pending effect mode is the prior notice B mode.

FIG. 228(d) schematically shows the contents of the advance notice B-mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3. In the notice B-mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3, a reserved lid range value is acquired (see Z2349 in FIG. 263) for the value (range) of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the reserved notice counter.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the value of the pending lid range value of 4 is obtained when the value of the pending notice counter is "0 to 4". When the value of the number of pending balls is "5 to 8", when the value of the pending notice counter is "1 to 4", 4 is acquired as the pending lid range value, and the value of the pending notice counter is "5". In this case, 3 is acquired as the holding lid range value, and 2 is acquired as the holding lid range value when the holding notice counter value is "6", and when the holding notice counter value is "7", 1 is acquired as the pending lid range value, and 0 is acquired as the pending lid range value when the value of the pending notice counter is "8".

The short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222d4 (FIG. 229(a)) is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value when executing the short-term winning effect. FIG. 229(a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term winning reserve lid range selection table 222d4. In the short-term winning pending lid range selection table 222d4, the pending lid range value is obtained (see Z2342 in FIG. 263) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "4", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", 1 is obtained as the reserved lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "6 to 8", 0 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The during-reach effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 is a table used for acquiring the pending lid range value in the case of the during-reach pending effect. FIG. 229(b) schematically shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222d5. In the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222d5, the pending lid range value is acquired (see Z2344 in FIG. 263) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "0 to 8", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value.

The reservation lid range selection table 222d6 for time saving is that the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the reservation effect mode is the normal mode and the game state is the time saving state (the value of the counter during time saving is other than 0 ) is a table used to acquire the pending lid range value.

FIG. 229(c) schematically shows the contents of the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6. In the time-saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6, a reservation lid range value is obtained (see Z2353 in FIG. 263) with respect to the value (range) of the number of reservation balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of retained balls is "0 to 6", 2 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", 1 is acquired as the retained lid range value. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", 0 is obtained as the retained lid range value.

By configuring in this way, the display range of the variable lid pattern P to be displayed can be changed in various ways according to the determination of success or failure at the time of starting winning and the holding effect switched according to the variation type. It is possible to express a production effect that enhances participation by using.

The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the display range of the variable lid pattern P displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 from the reserved lid range value acquired in the reserved lid range selection table 222d. is a table used to select commands for

FIG. 230(a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved lid command selection table 222e. The reserved lid command selection table 222e sets the reserved lid command to be transmitted to the display control device for the reserved lid range value (range) acquired from the reserved lid range selection table 222d.

Specifically, when the reserve lid range value is "0", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF00, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P becomes the shortest display (see FIG. 214(a)). When the reserved lid range value is "1", the reserved lid command is determined to be BF01, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 1 (only the reserved 8 area). When the reserve lid range value is "2", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF02, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 2 (reserved 7 to 8 area (see FIG. 212(a))). When the pending lid range value is "3", the pending lid command is determined to be BF03, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 3 (reserved 6 to 8 areas (see FIG. 213(a))). When the reserve lid range value is "4", the reserve lid command is determined to be BF04, and the display range of the variable lid pattern P is 4 (area from reserve 5 to 8 (see FIG. 211(a))).

The setting of the reserve lid command is performed in the reserve lid setting process (Z2229) executed in the prize command reception process (Z2209) at the time of start winning, and in the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202) at the start of fluctuation. This is performed in the holding lid setting process (Z2229). Therefore, the display of the variable lid pattern P can be changed by setting a display reserved lid command (see Z2355 in FIG. 263) based on the reserved lid range value every time the number of reserved balls changes.

The pending lid color change selection table 222f shows that when the advance notice effect suggesting not to increase the pending number shown in FIG. 4) is a data table for determining the reserved lid pattern P corresponding to the area where the reserved pattern is displayed when the reserved ball is generated. The reserved lid pattern P determined by the reserved lid color change selection table 222f is normally (normally, the inside is white with transparency with a black frame, and the number indicating the number of reservations corresponding to the reserved display area is displayed inside Display mode) is changed to a specific color (internal color is green with transparency). In the reserved lid color change selection table 222f, the secondary display of the third design display device 81 is performed based on the reserved notice counter 223g for recognizing the display position of the reserved design whose color has been changed, which will be described later, and the current number of reserved balls. It is a table for selecting a command for setting the range of color change of the reserved cover design P displayed in the area Ds.

FIG. 230(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the reserved lid color change selection table 222f. The reserved cover color change selection table 222f specifies a color change range for the value (range) of the reserved notice counter 223g and the value (range) of the number of reserved balls when the reserved effect mode is the notice B mode. set a hold lid command (see Z2348 in FIG. 263) for changing the display range of the variable lid pattern P from the normal white display mode to green according to the change range (see FIG. 211(b)). do.

Specifically, if the value of the pending notice counter 223g is any one of "0 to 4", if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the pending lid command is Not set, no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF10 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area of the number of reserved balls of 5. When the value of the number of retained balls is "6", BF11 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 5 to 6 retained balls. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", the retained lid command is determined to be BF12, and the range of 5 to 7 retained balls is designated as the color change range. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", BF13 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 5 to 8 retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "5", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "5", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", BF20 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of reserved balls is 6.

When the value of the number of retained balls is "6", BF21 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 6 to 7 retained balls. When the value of the number of retained balls is "7", BF22 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of 6 to 8 retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "6", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "6", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "7", BF30 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area of the number of reserved balls of 7. When the value of the number of retained balls is "8", BF31 is determined as the retained lid command, and the color change range is specified in the range of seven to eight retained balls.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "7", when the value of the number of reservation balls is "7", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", BF40 is determined as the reserved lid command, and the color change range is designated by the area where the number of reserved balls is 8.

When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is "8", when the value of the number of reserved balls is "8", the reservation lid command is not set and there is no color change range.

In this way, by varying the display mode in an area different from the reserved symbols varied by the determination of the winning/failure determination result in the previous winning (pre-reading determination), it is possible to further increase the attention of the player. At the same time, the player can freely determine the degree to which the number of reserved balls is to be increased depending on whether or not to stop hitting, so that the state of the reserved symbols and the later fluctuation notice effect can be widely enjoyed.

The lucky reservation command table 222g is a table for selecting a command for varying the display mode of the variable lid symbol P displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the target number of reserved balls.

FIG. 231 schematically shows the contents of the lucky pending command table 222g. In the lucky reservation command table 222g, when the lucky reservation effect is being performed, the area of the target number of reserved balls is stored by the lucky reservation storage value 223p, and the display reservation lid command is set based on the value (see FIG. 261). (see Z2306 of ).

Specifically, when the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 5, the reserved lid command FB50 is determined, and the area of 5 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled. When the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 6, the reserved lid command FB51 is determined, and the area of 6 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be circled (see FIG. 216(a)). When the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 7, the reserved lid command FB52 is determined, and the area of 7 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle. When the lucky reserved storage value 223p is 8, the reserved lid command FB53 is determined, and the area of 8 of the variable lid pattern P is varied so as to be surrounded by a circle.

In this way, by announcing the number of pending balls that resulted in a big win in the previous start-up prize, the interest in the game is enhanced, and at the same time, when the number of pending balls is small (less than 5), the player is notified. It is possible to work to encourage the player to win a prize, and to realize an effect that improves the operation.

The background mode selection table 222h is a table for selecting the background displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the background mode storage area 223i. FIG. 232(a) schematically shows the contents of the background mode selection table 222h. The background mode selection table 222h selects the background mode for the value of the background mode storage area 223i.

Specifically, when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 0, background A (sea background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 1, background B (mountain background) is determined. When the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 2, background C (river background) is determined, and when the value of the background mode storage area 223i is 3, background D (city background) is determined. .

The reserved character selection table 222i selects the content (type) of the reserved character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the background, the reserved effect mode, and the effect counter 223h. It is a table for selecting (determining) by

FIG. 232(b) schematically shows the contents of the reserved character selection table 222i. The pending character selection table 222i selects a pending character for the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the pending effect mode stored in the pending effect mode storage area 223m, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. is set (see Z2363 in FIG. 264). The reserved characters are J0 a girl with short hair (see FIG. 210(b)), J1 a girl with tied hair (see FIG. 213(a)), and J2 a girl with long hair (see FIG. 213(b)). ), and J3 is a blond girl with long hair (not shown).

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 (see FIG. 210(b)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 189", J1 (see FIG. 213(a)) is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 213(b)) is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50". If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "100 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character.

When the background mode is one of "background B", "background C", and "background D", and when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 150". In either case, J0 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 189", J1 is determined as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character. When the pending effect mode is "notice A mode" or "notice B mode", J0 is determined as the pending character when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50". If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 99", J1 is determined as the reserved character. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "100 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character.

In this way, depending on the difference between the suspension production mode and the background that have changed since the start winning, by determining the suspension characters with high expectations, the display mode of the suspension production with high expectations can be displayed without spoiling the atmosphere of the background production. It becomes possible. In addition, the player can recognize the announcement with high expectation by combining the change contents of the reserved symbols and the change of the reserved characters.

In addition, the number of fluctuations executed as the game is played, the number of jackpot hits, the number of times super reach is executed, and the patterns and characters to which the points displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the game performance are acquired. It is also possible to store history information such as the number of points obtained by , and change the character to be selected in consideration of the history information. With this configuration, the more the game is played, the more the character to be selected can be changed, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Also, an RTC (real time clock) may be provided so that the selected character can be changed according to the date and time information. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the selected character according to the passage of time after the pachinko machine 10 is introduced, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored with the game.

The pending character change table 222j changes the contents of the pending character (girl) displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 into the background, pending effect mode, current pending character, and effect counter 223h. Table for selection based on

FIG. 233 schematically shows the contents of the reserved character change table 222j. The pending character selection table 222i includes the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223i, the pending effect mode stored in the pending effect mode storage area 223m, the current pending character in the display mode, and the value of the effect counter 223h. The content of the pending character to be changed is set for (range). The change of the reserved character is selected when the starting prize is won when the number of reserved balls is the upper limit value and the over prize is won (Z2366: Yes), and the character command for display is set (see Z2267 in FIG. 264). . Also, if the selected character is different from the currently displayed reserved character, the character will be changed (variable), and if the selected character is the same as the currently displayed character, the reserved character will be changed. (Variable) It becomes a mode that does not.

Specifically, when the background mode is "background A", when the pending effect mode is "normal mode", and when the current pending character is "J0", the value of the effect counter 223h is " 0 to 180”, J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "181 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "190 to 199", J2 (see FIG. 214(b)) is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 190", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "191 to 189", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the pending effect mode is either "Notice A" or "Notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 80" , J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "81 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 90", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "91 to 199", J2 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J2", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J2 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

If the background mode is one of "background B", "background C", or "background D", if the pending effect mode is "normal mode", if the current pending character is "J0" , if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 150", J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "151 to 199", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 170", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "171 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. If the pending effect mode is either "notice A" or "notice B", if the current pending character is "J0", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 50" , J0 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "51 to 189", J1 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J1", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 70", J1 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change. When the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "71 to 199", J3 is determined and changed as the reserved character. When the current reserved character is "J3", if the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 199", J3 is determined as the reserved character and there is no change.

In this way, by changing the reserved character due to the over winning, the player can have a means of confirming the winning result within the current number of reserved balls by the over winning, and the interest in the game can be increased. can. In addition, the pending characters to be changed are set to characters with higher expectations after the change than before the change, and if the pending production mode is other than normal mode, the percentage of pending characters to be changed is set high. Therefore, when there is a change in the pending effect mode, the player can have a means of knowing the result of the win/fail judgment through the means of intentionally generating an over-winning, and it is possible to provide a game feature that enhances the operation. becomes.

The balloon selection table 222k includes a plurality of data tables for setting balloon (comment) contents (see FIG. 211(a)) displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

FIG. 234(a) is a diagram showing the structure of the balloon selection table 222k. The speech balloon selection table 222k includes a normal speech balloon selection table 222k1, a notice A speech balloon selection table 222k2, a notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3, a short-term winning speech balloon selection table 222k4, a ready-to-win presentation speech balloon selection table 222k5, a lucky hold speech balloon selection table 222k6, A time saving balloon selection table 222k7 is provided. The content of the speech balloon to be set is the content of the comment displayed by the reserved character in the character display area C. FIG.

The normal balloon selection table 222k1 is displayed when the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (see FIG. 210(b)), and the game state is the normal state. , is a table used to acquire balloon contents.

FIG. 234(b) schematically shows the contents of the normal balloon selection table 222k1. In the normal balloon selection table 222k1, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2393 in FIG. 265) for the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is not acquired (see FIG. 210(b)), and the value of the number of pending balls is "5". If the value of the number of pending balls is "6", two more balloons are acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", One more balloon content is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "8", MAX (see FIG. 214(a)) is acquired as the balloon content.

The notice A balloon selection table 222k2 is a table used for acquiring the contents of the notice balloon when the suspension effect mode is the notice A mode (see FIG. 211(a)).

FIG. 234(c) schematically shows the contents of the announcement A balloon selection table 222k2. In the announcement A balloon selection table 222k2, balloon contents are acquired (see Z2390 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the result of determination of whether the winning information command is correct.

Specifically, if the value of the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 3", the content of the balloon is not acquired, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "4", the result of the judgment is not obtained. In the case of winning, heart-pounding balloon contents are acquired, and in the case of losing, heart-pounding balloon contents are acquired. When the value of the number of reserved balls is "5", the content of the balloon is expected to be obtained when the result of the judgment is a win, and the content of the balloon is expected to be obtained when the result is a loss. When the value of the number of pending balls is "6", if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the content of the balloon is the expected degree of 70%? is acquired, and if it is out of line, the content of the balloon is the expected degree of 60%? is obtained. When the value of the number of pending balls is "7", if the result of the hit/fail judgment is hit, the content of the balloon is the expectation level of 80%? is obtained, and if it is out of line, the content of the balloon is the expected level of 70%? is obtained. If the value of the number of pending balls is "8", and if the result of the win/fail judgment is hit, the contents of the balloon will be intense heat! is obtained, and if it is out, what happens to the speech bubble content! is obtained.

Although configured in this way, the notice A balloon selection table 222k2 refers to the value (range) of the value (range) of the effect counter 223h in addition to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the winning information command, and selects the content of the balloon. Further, it may be provided as an effect to express various expectations.

The notice B balloon selection table 222k3 is a table used for acquiring the contents of the notice balloon when the pending effect mode is the notice B mode (see FIG. 211(b)).

FIG. 234(d) schematically shows the contents of the announcement B balloon selection table 222k3. In the announcement B balloon selection table 222k3, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2388 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the pending effect counter.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is obtained as it is (see FIG. 211(a)), and the value of the number of pending balls is "5". In the case of , if the value of the pending effect counter is any of "0 to 4", the content of the balloon is OVER (see FIG. 211 (b)), and the value of the pending effect counter is "5". STOP is acquired as the content of the balloon, and if the value of the number of pending balls is “6”, if the value of the pending effect counter is any of “0 to 5”, the content of the balloon is OVER. When the value of the pending effect counter is "6", STOP is acquired as the content of the balloon, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the value of the pending effect counter is "0 to 6". In either case, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon, and STOP is determined as the content of the balloon if the value of the pending effect counter is "7", and if the value of the number of pending balls is "8", , MAX is acquired for the contents of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the prize winning when the change in the highly anticipated reserved pattern occurs by the content of the balloon, and the number of reserved balls is increased by continuing the hitting from the current value of the number of reserved balls. It is possible to notify the player of the determination as to whether or not to increase the number, suppress the generation of useless launches, and make it possible to play the game efficiently. Moreover, even when a change in the highly anticipated reserved symbol occurs, the setting of the content of the balloon may be changed to continue the ejection.

The short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4 is a table used to acquire the contents of balloons in the case of short-term winning (see FIG. 212(a)).

FIG. 235(a) schematically shows the contents of the short-term prize balloon selection table 222k4. In the short-term winning balloon selection table 222k4, balloon contents are obtained (see Z2382 in FIG. 265) for the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is "4", the content of the balloon is fast! (See FIG. 212(a)) is acquired, and when the value of the number of pending balls is "5", the content of the balloon is very fast! is acquired and the value of the number of pending balls is "6", the content of the balloon is very fast! is obtained, and the value of the number of pending balls is "7", the content of the balloon is the speed of sound! ! is acquired and the value of the number of pending balls is "8", the content of the balloon is fast! ! ! is obtained.

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the extent to which the interval between the start prizes is short and the number of reserved balls has increased greatly by the balloon of the reserved character, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222k5 is a table used to acquire the contents of the balloon during the ready-to-win effect (see FIG. 215(a)).

FIG. 235(b) schematically shows the contents of the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222k5. In the ready-to-win effect balloon selection table 222k5, balloon contents are acquired (Z2384 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the pending effect counter and the value (range) of the number of pending balls.

Specifically, when the value of the pending effect counter is "0", if the value of the number of pending balls is "0 to 4", the contents of the balloon are stored up to 6! (See FIG. 215(a)) is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", OK is acquired for the balloon content, and "7-8 ”, the content of the balloon is OVER, and if the value of the pending effect counter 223h is “other than 0”, if the value of the number of pending balls is any of “0 to 4” , Save up to 6 balloon contents! is acquired, and in the case of "5", one more balloon content is acquired, and in the case of "6", the balloon content is acquired (see FIG. 215(b)), and "7 8”, OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, by changing the balloon of the suspended character during the ready-to-win production, it is possible to encourage the launch when the number of pending balls is small, and in the ready-to-win production during the pending production, the balloon is changed. You can play the game without getting bored by changing it.

The lucky pending balloon selection table 222k6 is a table used to acquire the content of the balloon during the lucky pending effect (see FIG. 216(a)).

FIG. 236(a) schematically shows the contents of the reserved lucky balloon selection table 222k6. In the lucky reserved balloon selection table 222k6, a value corresponding to the reserved ball number is set as a lucky reserved ball number (refer to Z2444 of Z268) when the result of winning in the past is a big win. , the value (range) of the number of retained balls, and the value (range) of the retained change value are acquired (Z2386 in FIG. 265).

Specifically, when the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p is "5", when the value of the number of reserved balls is "0 to 4", the reservation change value is "0 to 3". In either case, the content of the balloon is acquired as aiming for 5, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "5", if the value of the pending change is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, If the hold change value is one of "1 to 2", the content of the balloon is acquired as GOOD, and if the hold change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired as well, and the number of pending balls is any of "6 to 8", and if the pending change value is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the balloon content.

If the value of the reserved lucky storage value 223p is "6", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 5", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the balloon is 6 (see FIG. 216(a)) is obtained. If the pending change value is one of "1 to 2", the content of the balloon is determined to be GOOD, and if the pending change value is "3", the content of the balloon is acquired, If the value of the number of pending balls is any of "7 to 8" and if the value of the pending change is any of "0 to 3", OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the reserved lucky storage value 223p is "7", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 6", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the speech balloon is acquired as aiming for 7, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "7", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2”, the content of the balloon is GOOD, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is “Good job” and the value of the number of pending balls is “8”. ', if the pending change value is any of '0 to 3', OVER is acquired as the content of the balloon.

If the value of the reserved lucky storage value 223p is "8", if the value of the number of reserved balls is any of "0 to 7", if the reserved change value is any of "0 to 3" , the content of the balloon is acquired as aiming for 8, and if the value of the number of pending balls is "8", if the pending change value is "0", the content of the balloon is acquired as OK, and the pending change value is " 1 to 2”, the content of the speech balloon is acquired as GOOD, and when the pending change value is “3”, the content of the balloon is acquired as well done.

In this way, by changing the contents of the balloon according to the difference in the number of reserved lucky balls, the player can enjoy the game aiming at the number of reserved balls to win. When the lottery result hits a big hit within the range of 5 to 8 reserved balls, the result of judging whether or not the number of reserved balls thus started winning a prize is a big hit, the display mode of the lucky reservation can be updated without getting bored. You can continue playing.

In the time saving balloon selection table 222k6, the special effect is not being executed (the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0), the pending effect mode is the normal mode, and the game state is the time saving state (the value of the counter during time saving is other than 0). This is a table used to acquire balloon contents.

FIG. 236(b) schematically shows the time saving balloon selection table 222k7. In the time saving balloon selection table 222k7, the content of the balloon is acquired (Z2392 in FIG. 265) with respect to the value (range) of the number of retained balls.

Specifically, if the number of pending balls is any of "0 to 5", the content of the balloon is obtained up to 6 (see FIG. 212(b)), and the number of pending balls is "6 to 7". In either case, OK is obtained for the content of the balloon.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the optimum number of reserved balls during time saving, and the player can grasp the transition state of the number of reserved balls according to the notification mode. If you can maintain the optimum number of balls on hold, you can avoid the situation where the fluctuation is interrupted and the time is inefficient due to the standby state, and the occurrence of over-winning when the number of balls on hold exceeds the upper limit of the number of balls held. It can be used as a criterion for determining whether a game can be played efficiently.

The during-reach effect lottery table 222m is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the pending display effect during reach displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 215(a)).

FIG. 237(a) schematically shows the contents of the in-reach effect lottery table 222m. In the during-reach effect lottery table 222m, whether or not to execute the during-reach pending effect is determined with respect to the value (range) of the number of pending balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h. (See Z2324 in FIG. 262) Specifically, when the value of the number of balls on hold is one of "0 to 3", when the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 99", during reach The pending effect is not displayed, and in the case of "100 to 199", it is possible to display the pending effect during reach. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "4 to 5", when the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 140", the pending effect during reach is not displayed, and "141 to 199" is displayed. , it is possible to display a reach pending effect. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "6 to 8", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is "0 to 199", the pending effect during reach is not displayed. In this way, by setting a high ratio of displaying the pending performance during reach when the number of pending balls is small, an effect is executed to urge the player to accumulate the pending when the pending is small.

The ready-to-win start time calculation table 222n is a ready-to-win display mode (a display mode in which symbols in the left and right symbol columns are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) with the same third symbol) to be executed. It is a data table for determining the start time (start period) to start the pending effect during reach in the time (period) to be the display mode. In the ready-to-win start time calculation table 222n, a holding effect start timer is selected based on whether or not the ready-to-reach holding effect (see FIG. 215(a)) obtained by the ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed and the variation type.

FIG. 237(b) schematically shows the contents of the reach start time calculation table 222n. The ready-to-win start time calculation table 222n is set by the pending effect start timer based on the variation type when it is determined that the ready-to-reach pending effect acquired by the ready-to-reach effect lottery table 222m can be executed (Fig. 262 (see Z2326 of ).

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000ms, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, the pending effect start timer is determined to be 10000ms, When the variation type is the super reach jackpot B, 10000 ms is determined for the pending effect start timer, and when the variation type is the super reach jackpot C, the pending effect start timer is determined at 12000 ms, and the variation type is the super. When the ready-to-win jackpot D is reached, 12000 ms is determined for the reserved performance start timer, and when the variation type is the super ready-to-win jackpot E, the suspended performance start timer is determined to be 20000 ms and the variation type is the normal ready-to-win deviation A. In this case, 10000 ms is determined for the pending effect start timer, and 10000 ms is determined for the pending effect start timer when the variation type is normal reach out B, and when the variation type is normal reach out C, the pending effect A start timer of 10000 ms is determined.

The lucky reservation lottery table 222p acquires whether or not the lucky reservation effect (see FIG. 216(a)) can be executed based on the number of reserved balls and the effect counter 223h. FIG. 237(c) schematically shows the contents of this lucky reservation lottery table 222p. In the lucky reservation lottery table 222p, whether or not the lucky reservation effect can be executed is acquired (see Z2304 in FIG. 261) with respect to the value of the number of reserved balls and the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Specifically, when the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "0 to 2", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 99", the lucky pending effect is executed. is not performed, and if the value is any one of "100 to 199", execution of the lucky holding effect becomes possible. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "3 to 4", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 189", the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed, and " 190 to 199", it is possible to execute the lucky holding effect. When the value of the number of pending balls is any one of "5 to 8", and when the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 199", the execution of the lucky pending effect is not performed. In this way, by setting the ratio of the lucky reservation effect to be high when the number of reserved balls is small, an effect is executed to urge the player to accumulate the reserved balls when the number of reserved balls is small.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 226(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e. , winning information storage area 223f, pending notice counter 223g, effect counter 223h, background mode storage area 223i, SW valid time counter 223k, pending effect mode storage area 223m, special effect status storage area 223n, lucky pending storage value 223p, short-term winning At least a timer 223q, a pending effect start timer 223r, a sensor effective time counter 223s, a touch counter 223t, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see Z2207 in FIG. 259). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2221 in FIG. 260), and the third symbol It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see Z2502 in FIG. 269). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (Z2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 258), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see Z2204 in FIG. 2590), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see Z2506 in FIG. 269). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223f includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223f. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding , various information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223f when the winning information command is received, and information included in the received winning information command A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223f is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of a reserved symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, by executing various effects (read-ahead effects) based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f, the player can be notified of each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The reserved notice counter 223g changes the reserved number when the reserved color of the reserved design displayed on the third design display device 81 is changed (the display position of the reserved design whose reserved color has changed due to the digestion of the reserved ball). (Also changes), it is a counter for determining the position of the reserved symbol whose display color has been changed. The value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command receiving process (see Z2209 in FIG. 266) which is executed when the special symbol winning command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received. If there is (Z2403: YES), the pending change value obtained from the variation type of the received special symbol winning command is other than 0 (Z2405: No) If there is a change in the pending symbol (see FIG. 211 (a) ), the reserved ball value is set (see Z2406 in FIG. 266). For example, as shown in FIG. 211(a), when the value of the number of pending balls at the start winning is 4, the pending notice counter 223g is set to 4. The set pending notice counter 223g is decremented by 1 each time the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the fluctuation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) executed at the start of fluctuation, and the subtracted value was 0. In the case (Z2225: YES), by setting 0 to the pending change value and clearing the pending effect mode storage area (Z2226), the above-described pending effect mode is set to the normal mode.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 in the range from 0 to 198 and updated repeatedly. Specifically, the selection tables for various effects selected using the effect counter 223h include a pending change selection table 222b, a pending character selection table 222i (holding character), a pending character change table 222j (holding character), a reach There are an effect lottery table 222m (whether or not a reach pending effect is executable) and a lucky reserve lottery table 222p (whether or not a lucky hold effect is executable), and various effects are selected according to the value (range) of the effect counter 223h.

Also, when making these selections, in order to avoid synchronizing the update cycle of the effect counter 223h and other counters and timer values, the update range is set to a prime number (199), and the selection results are limited to I try not to be biased towards the selection results.

The background mode storage area 223i is a storage area in which numerical values necessary for distinguishing the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored. Regarding the switching of the background display mode, it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) whether it is in a standby state in which a demo screen is displayed (Z2801), and when it is determined that it is in a standby state (Z2801: Yes) , it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2802: Yes), 1 is added to the contents of the background mode storage area 223i and set (Z2804). Then, a display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (Z2804), and when the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. For the background images, different background images recognizable by the player are prepared, for example, the background A is the sea, the background B is the mountains, the background C is the river, and the background D is the city.

The SW effective time counter 223k is a counter for counting the effective time (effective period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanying the depression of the frame button 22 that is performed while the special symbol is fluctuating. In the SW valid time counter 223k, when the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), a variation pattern accompanying pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed. If set (Z2803: Yes), based on the set fluctuation pattern, SW valid time is set (Z2804). If the set SW valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is subtracted (Z2802), and if the frame button 22 is pressed (Z2805: Yes), the SW When the value of the valid time counter 223k is not 0 (Z2806: Yes), if the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is reset (set to 0), and the notice display command for display is issued. is set (Z2811), and a predetermined effect is executed.

The pending performance mode storage area 223m contains information for determining a plurality of pending preliminary announcement modes prepared according to the pending change when executing the preliminary announcement performance related to the pending symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. remembered.

The pending effect mode storage area 223m is stored when the pending notice counter 223g is 0 in the winning command reception process (see Z2209 in FIG. In the case (Z2403: Yes), the pending effect mode is set (Z2404) by the value (range) of the pending change value acquired for the variation type of the received special symbol winning command. As described above, if the hold change value is "0", the hold effect mode is set to the normal mode, if the hold change value is "1 to 2", the notice A mode is set, and if the hold change value is "3" advance notice B mode is set.

The content of the pending effect mode storage area 223m is the value of the pending notice counter 223g that is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol starts to fluctuate in the variation pattern reception process (see Z2202 in FIG. 260) that is executed when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. becomes 0 (Z2225: YES), the pending effect mode is changed to the normal mode by setting 0 to the pending change value and clearing the pending effect mode storage area 223m (Z2226).

The special effect status storage area 223n stores information for determining the content of the special effect to be executed when the pending effect mode is the normal mode. The special effects include, as described above, a short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212(a)), a ready-to-win pending effect (see FIG. 215(a)), and a lucky pending effect (see FIG. 216(a)). Yes, and a special effect is executed according to a change in the special effect status storage area 223n. Incidentally, the special effect status is a status (state data) for indicating (determining) the type of the pending effect being executed.

The short-term winning effect is performed when the game state is normal (Z2421: Yes) in the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed when the winning command is received, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0. Yes (Z2422: Yes), the number of reserved balls of special symbols is 4 (Z2423: Yes), and a short-term winning timer that counts the time (5 seconds) generated from the time when the number of reserved balls of special symbols is 0 is other than 0 (Z2424: Yes), 1 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2425), and the execution of the short-term winning effect is started. On the other hand, during the short-term winning effect, in the short-term winning management process (Z2111), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes) and the short-term winning timer is 0 (Z2605: Yes) , the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2606), and the short-term winning effect ends.

Reach suspension production is performed when the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation in the reach suspension performance setting process (Z2228) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation. When (Z2321: Yes), when the pending effect mode is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), by the reach during effect lottery table 222m When it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2325: Yes), the pending effect start timer 223r is set based on the variation type (Z2326), and the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 2 (Z2327). With the passage of time, when the pending effect start timer 223r becomes 0 (Z2704: Yes) in the pending effect management process during reach (Z2112), set the display command for notice to perform the pending effect during reach (Z2706) By doing so, the execution of the hold production during reach is started. During execution of the pending performance during reach, the special performance status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2708) at the timing of ending the variation of the special symbol (Z2707: Yes), and the pending performance during reach is completed.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227), when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), the normal mode is in effect (Z2302: Yes), and the lucky suspension storage value is displayed. is 0 (Z2303: Yes), and if the result of the execution effect drawn based on the lucky reservation lottery table 222p is allowed (Z2305: Yes), 3 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n. (Z2307) is performed, and execution of the lucky suspension effect is started. During execution of the lucky pending effect, when the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes) in the lucky display determination process (Z2227) at the start of the next fluctuation after the start of the effect, The special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2309), and the lucky pending effect ends.

Lucky reservation storage value 223p is stored at the time of winning corresponding to the reserved ball determined as the big win when the winning information command output at the timing of the start winning is determined as the big win (determined in advance). is a storage area in which the value of the number of held balls is stored. Lucky reservation storage value 223p is stored when the winning lottery result is a jackpot (Z2442: Yes ), if the value of the number of reserved balls is 5 or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls is set in the lucky reserved storage value 223p (Z2444). Further, as described above, when the pending effect mode is the lucky pending effect, the pending lid command for display is set (see Z2306 in FIG. 261) based on the lucky pending storage value 223p, and the lucky pending effect is displayed. (See FIG. 216(a)).

The short-term prize winning timer 223q is a timer for counting the elapsed time from when the value of the number of reserved balls of special symbols changes from 0 to 1 or more until it reaches 4 or more. The short-term winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds as a timer value when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0 (Z2601: Yes), and when it is other than 0 (Z2601: No), the short-term until it becomes 0 The winning timer 223q is decremented by 1 (Z2602). As described above, the short-term winning effect is displayed until the short-term winning timer 223q becomes 0 when the pending effect mode becomes the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212(a)). In this way, the short-term winning effect is performed in the remaining time (remaining period) of the short-term winning timer 223q, so that the shorter (faster) the period until four prizes are won, the longer the execution period of the short-term winning effect becomes. It is possible to recognize the speed of the period required to win four prizes.

Note that the short-term prize effect may be configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) after four prizes have been won. By doing so, there is an effect that the player can easily recognize that four prizes have been won within five seconds.

The pending effect start timer 223r is a timer for counting the timing of executing the pending effect during reach (see FIG. 215(a)), which is the effect related to the pending symbol during the ready-to-win fluctuation of the special symbol.

Retention effect start timer 223r is, in the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) to be executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) to be executed at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the variation type of the special symbol is reach variation. If there is (Z2321: Yes), the pending effect mode is the normal mode (Z2322: Yes), and if the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), the in-reach effect lottery table 222m (Z2325: Yes), a timer value is set by the reach start time calculation table 222n (Z2326).

When the timer value is set to the pending effect start timer 223r, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 ( In Z2701: Yes), when the pending effect start timer 223r is not 0 (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted. Also, as described above, when the value of the timer after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), other special effects are not performed, and the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes ), by setting (Z2706) the advance notice display command for performing the pending effect during reach, execution of the pending effect during reach is started.

The sensor valid time counter 223s is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The sensor valid time counter 223s gives an advance notice when the sensor valid time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (Z2107). When effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor valid time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor valid time counter 223s (Z2823). If the set sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0, it is decremented (Z2824), during which touch sensor detection becomes valid. When the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes), the touch sensor is turned on (Z2825: Yes), and the value obtained by adding 1 to the touch counter 223t (Z2826) reaches the upper limit value. (Z2828: Yes) is reset (Z2809).

The touch counter 223t is a counter for counting the number of times the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When the sensor valid time counter 223s is not 0 (Z2821: Yes) in the sensor input process (Z2813) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (Z2107), the touch counter 223t detects that the touch sensor 290 is activated. If it is ON (Z2825: Yes), 1 is added (Z2826), and if the added value is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), it is reset (Z2829).

The other memory area 223z is an area for setting or storing various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 259) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) is controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 253).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 238, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 238 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed after the boot process (see Z3001 in FIG. 275) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 242) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the power is turned on.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 274).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image (see FIG. 239) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a. It is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power-on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, and if it is ``a big hit with a special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed for a certain period after stopping the variable performance, and if it is ``no special pattern'', an image showing it is displayed to stop the variable performance. It will be displayed for a certain period of time later.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball entry is detected in the first ball entrance 64, the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b, and the images showing "O" and "X" are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 as follows. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected while the time main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation performance is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can be done.

Returning to FIG. 238, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns (see FIG. 209) with numerals "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable effect. First, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boys" and "girls" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. Therefore, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the display control device 114 stores the character in the resident video RAM 235. The image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image by reading the image data pre-resident in the pattern area 235e. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. If it is either, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is entered, a jackpot of the normal symbol is produced and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second ball. If it becomes easier to enter the ball opening 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand, or in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if the game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. In this effect, the third pattern consisting of the main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the people involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 240 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type.

The MPU 231 selects one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (sea, beach, preparation period background, time production background) according to the background type. A rear image corresponding to the specified stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the passage of time.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether or not the back surface image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 240) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each rendering mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the rendering mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is generated for each frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that should be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 241). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning is specified (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 241).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 241, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 243) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 243, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 (see Z3005 in FIG. 274). Then, at the stage when all the resident target image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see Z4705 in FIG. 285(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see Z3301 in FIG. 276(b)). When the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see Z3308 in FIG. Z3309 of H.276(b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed.

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see Z4601 in FIG. 285(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 285(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 242) is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 242), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 242) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing (Z3303 in FIG. 283) is executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed. reference), pointer update processing (see Z4305 in FIG. 284(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list, which will be described later. (see FIG. 242), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, thereby enabling the display to be performed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Details of the draw list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 242 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (FIG. 276(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see Z4307 in FIG. 283). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see Z4809 in FIG. 286). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see Z4810 in FIG. 286). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see Z4902 in FIG. 287).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of drawing the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed (see Z4902 in FIG. 287) each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately specifying the parameters, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 243 to 256. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 243 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (Z101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the RAM 203. stored in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (Z103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, each is 299 , 99, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (Z104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 is executed (Z105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (Z106), and the through gate passage process associated with the ball passing through the through gate 67 is executed. (Z107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 251 and 252. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (Z108), and further, other processing to be periodically executed is executed (Z109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the special symbol variation process (Z104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 244 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (Z104). This special symbol variation process (Z104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big win (Z201). Here, it is determined whether or not the big-hit flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big-hit is in progress. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating. If not (Z202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (Z203). . After obtaining the value of each counter, the change execution determination process is executed (Z204). Details of the variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 245, but in this variation execution determination process (Z204), a process of determining the special symbol that will be the next variation order is executed.

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is the special figure 1 (first special symbol) (Z205), and the variation execution in the special figure 1 (first special symbol) If so, subtract 1 from the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (Z206), and set a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation ( Z207). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z208). In the process of Z208, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process is executed to start the variation display on the first symbol display device (Z209). The special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), processes such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting variation of the first special symbol are executed.

In the process of Z205, if it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (Z204) is not variation execution in special figure 1 (Z205: No), special figure 2 (second special (Z210). In addition, if it is not the variation execution of the special figure 2 (Z210: No), that is, since the reserved ball is not stored in both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is a variable execution in the special figure 2 (Z210: Yes), the same processing as the above-described processing for the special symbol 1 reserved ball is performed for the special symbol 2 reserved ball.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (Z211), and the reserved ball indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation. A number command is set (Z212). According to the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (Z213). In the process of Z213, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 2 variation start process is executed for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device (Z214). Incidentally, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (Z215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (Z215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (Z216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (Z217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) described later with reference to FIG. 246 or the special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery for special designs will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the first special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the special winning type counter C2 It is determined whether it will be a big win A, a big win B1, a big win B2, or a big win C, and if it is a big win of the second special symbol, it will be a big win A according to the value of the special win type counter C2. It is determined whether it will be a big win B1, a big win B2, or a big win C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. When the jackpot C is achieved, a red LED and a blue LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of Z217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (Z218). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (Z218: Yes), a jackpot start is set (Z219), the variable probability flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 (Z220). After that, the jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON (Z221), a stop command is set (Z224), and this process is terminated. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (Z218: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 1 or more (Z222), and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is equal to or greater than 1 (Z222: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203j is decremented by 1 (Z223), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203j is 0 (Z222: No), the process of Z223 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the variation execution determination process (Z204) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing the change execution determination process (Z204). This variation execution determination process (Z204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute

In the variation execution determination process, first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to OFF ("0" as a value) to initialize (Z241), and the data in the variation order storage area 203p stored in the RAM 203 is obtained. (Z242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (Z243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244). If the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (Z244: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to variation execution with special figure 1 (Z245), and this process is terminated.

In the process of Z244, if the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (Z244: No), the data in the execution area determines whether the variation is performed in the special figure 2 (Z246), and in the special figure 2 If the variation execution (Z246: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to the variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z247), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of Z246, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 2 (Z246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 246 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209). This special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired. (Z251). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (Z252). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not it is the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203m is on. This variable probability flag 203m is set to ON based on the completion of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B1, jackpot B2, and jackpot C. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

When it is determined that the probability is changing (Z252: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability changing state of the special symbol, the process proceeds to Z253. In the process of Z253, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 221(a)), the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol big winning is determined. Acquire (Z253). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, 27 numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the variable probability game state (special game state), and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these If the winning random number matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

On the other hand, in the process of Z252, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with special symbols (Z252: No), the process of Z254 is executed. In the process of Z254, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z251 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As the random number value that becomes the special symbol jackpot in the normal game state (low probability game state), three numbers of "0 to 2" are set, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random number that is the hit of these When the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z255.

In the process of Z255, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of Z253 or Z254 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a Matches the set judgment value) is determined (Z255), and when it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (Z255: Yes), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 , the display mode at the time of the big win is set (Z256). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z251 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202d1, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 75" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot), and if it is in the range of "76 to 79", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 222(b)).

In this process of Z256, the display mode (LED 37a lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z257). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z257, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot B2, and jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the process of Z255, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z255: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (Z258). In the process of Z258, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z259). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of Z258, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the processing of Z257 or Z259 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z257 or Z259 is set (Z260). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z275 or Z259 is set (Z261). When the process of Z261 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (Z104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 247 is a flow chart showing the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214). This special symbol 2 variation start process (Z214) is a process that is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol loss" is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed in .

In this special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (Z214), similarly to the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (Z209), first, the special symbol 2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b acquired by the process of Z271. Each value of the hit random number counter C1 and the special hit type counter C2 is acquired (Z271).

Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (Z272). Since it is in the variable probability state, the process proceeds to Z273. In the process of Z273, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z273). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 958 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, 27 numbers of "0 to 26" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become the hits match. In that case, it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

On the other hand, in the process of Z272, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the variable probability state (Z272: No), the process of Z274 is executed. In the process of Z274, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of Z271 and the special symbol big winning random number table 202a, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol big winning is obtained (Z254). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 978 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. Three random numbers of "0 to 2" are set as the random numbers for the jackpot of special symbols, and when the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers for these winnings match, the special symbol is selected. It is determined that it is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to Z275.

In the process of Z275, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of Z273 or Z274 is a special symbol jackpot (Z275). Yes), based on the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271, to set the display mode at the time of the big hit (Z276). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of Z271 is compared with the random number value stored in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202d2, and the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (16R jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "40 to 87" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B1 (16R probability variable odd number pattern jackpot), and if it is in the range of "88 to 91", it is determined to be a jackpot B2 (16R probability variable even number pattern jackpot), and in the range of "92 to 99" If there is, it is determined to be a jackpot C (see FIG. 222(c)).

In this process of Z276, the display mode (LED 37a lighting state) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 (Z277). When the variation pattern is set in the process of Z277, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode as long as the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", various types of "missing normal reach", various "missing super reach", and various "missing special reach" are defined. ing. As variation patterns for the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

In the process of Z275, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (Z275: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (Z278). In the process of Z278, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Based on, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (Z279). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similar to the process of Z278, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

When the processing of Z277 or Z279 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of Z277 or Z279 is set (Z280). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of Z277 or Z279 is set (Z281). When the processing of Z281 ends, it returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the start winning process (Z105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 248 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (Z105). This start winning process (Z105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243) to determine whether or not there is a win to the first ball entrance 64 (start winning). , Reservation processing of values indicated by various random number counters, and processing for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values indicated by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (Z105: see FIG. 248) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (Z301). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (Z302). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z303).

Then, there is no winning to the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (Z303: No), an over winning information command is set (Z304), and the process proceeds to Z309. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first ball entrance 64 (Z301: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (Z303: Yes), special symbol 1 reserved The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (Z305). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (Z306).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 255), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of Z306, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation area 1 to reservation area 4) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (Z307). In the processing of Z307, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is the first area. Next, special figure 1 is set to the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203p (Z308), and the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. The prefetch processing (Z320) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, for Z309 to Z316, for each of the processes Z301 to Z320 described above, the process for winning the first ball entrance 64 is the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640. Since the same processing is executed only by changing the processing for each case, detailed description thereof will be omitted. It should be noted that when a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 It is acquired and stored in the empty reservation area of the corresponding special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

Thus, for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the right second ball entrance 640r or the second ball entrance 640, the same special winning random number counter C1 and special winning type counter as for the first special symbol By acquiring the values of C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a random number common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so the first special symbol and The winning probability can be made constant even with the second special symbol.

After executing the process of Z308 or the process of Z316, the prefetching process (Z320) is executed. Details of the look-ahead processing (Z320) will be described with reference to FIG. 249 as described above. Based on the values of various counters acquired for the incoming ball, a process of determining in advance each lottery result to be executed at the start of fluctuation is executed.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 249, the look-ahead process (Z320), which is one process in the starting winning process (Z105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing this prefetch processing (Z320).

In the look-ahead process (Z320), first, based on the value of the obtained special hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not it is appropriate at the start of fluctuation (Z351). In this propriety determination, the processing of Z255 in the above-described special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246) and the processing of Z275 in the special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247) are executed. . It should be noted that this propriety determination is the propriety determination (discrimination) at the start of variation (Z255 processing in special symbol 1 variation start processing (Z209: see FIG. 246), Z275 in special symbol 2 variation start processing (Z214: see FIG. 247) processing)). Next, it is determined whether the determination result executed in the process of Z351 is a win (also called a specific determination result) (Z352). If it is determined that the determination result is a win (Z352: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired from the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 (discrimination) (Z353). Next, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202e (Z354), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z352, when it is determined that the result of the judgment is out (Z352: No), based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 The type is acquired (Z355). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set out of the winning command table 202e (Z356), and this processing ends.

In this way, before the start of the variation, the result of the judgment in advance is output as a prize winning command to the audio ramp control device 113 each time the ball is held, so the audio ramp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the judgment of success or failure and the type of hit. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, notice effect to inform the player in advance of the winning judgment result of the reserved ball (for example, change the color of the reserved symbol to a color that informs Production such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the success/failure determination result in the held ball) can be executed. In addition, since one winning command is output for each reserved ball each time a reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize establishment of a reserved ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 250, the normal symbol variation process (Z106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (Z106). This normal symbol variation processing (Z106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and is accompanied by the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (Z401). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (Z401: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (Z401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (Z402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (Z402: No), the long-time open flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding fluctuation display in normal symbols) (Z404). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (Z405), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (Z405: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (Z405: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (Z406).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (Z407). In the process of Z407, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal per random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (Z408).

Next, normal design fluctuation start processing is executed (Z409), and this processing ends. Incidentally, the normal symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Dynamic display time) is determined, and if the result of the win/fail determination is a hit, the process of setting the opening operation of the electric accessary 640a (movement pattern of the normal figure winning game) corresponding to the hit type, etc. Run.

In the process of Z402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (Z402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (Z410). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the processing of Z437 or Z438 in FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variable time has not elapsed (Z410: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z410, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (Z410: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (Z411). In the process of Z411, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of Z427 or the process of Z431 in FIG. The device 83 is set to stop display (light display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of Z435 in FIG. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of Z411, when the second symbol display update process (see Z1007) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. 251, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the processing of Z427, Z431, or Z435 of FIG. In this control example, it is configured to light up and display the "○" symbol even in the case of a long-time hit or a normal hit, but not limited to that, a symbol corresponding to the type of hit in the normal pattern is lit and displayed (for example, , If it is a long-time hit, it may be configured to be "◎", and if it is a normal win, it will be "○").

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is discriminated (Z412). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol hit (Z412: Yes), the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (Z413), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of Z412, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see Z1005) of the main process (see FIG. 255) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the processing of Z430 or Z434 of FIG. 251 are completed. In addition, in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: see FIG. 251) to be described later, since the opening operation data of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the normal symbol winning type is set, in Z413, the normal symbol winning type is configured to set open/close control corresponding to On the other hand, in the process of Z412, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (Z412: No), the process of Z413 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 251, the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation start process (Z408). This normal design fluctuation start processing (Z408) is the setting at the time of normal design fluctuation start executed in the normal design fluctuation processing (see FIG. 251) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243) It is a process for execution.

At present, it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z421). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z421: Yes), the process proceeds to Z424. In the process of Z421, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (Z421: No), it is determined whether it is during probability variation or time reduction (Z422). If it is neither probability variation nor time saving (Z422: No), the process proceeds to Z424.

If it is during probability variation or time reduction (Z422: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state, so the normal winning acquired in the processing of Z407 in FIG. 250 Based on the value of the random number counter C4 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol hit is obtained (Z423). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 221(c)).

In the process of Z424, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of Z407 in FIG. , Based on the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 221(c)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol hit is obtained (Z424). Specifically, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 221(c)). As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that it is a normal hit of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239" , it is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 221(c)).

In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of special symbols, it is difficult to win the lottery of normal symbols. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to enter the second ball entry hole 640 as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball-entering hole 640, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the second ball-entering hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second ball-entering hole 65a A large number of balls enter the ball entrance 640 . As a result, in most cases, the number of held balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is shifting to the special game state.

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of Z423 or Z424 is a normal symbol hit (Z425), and when it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (Z425: Yes) , It is determined whether the winning type of the normal symbol is a long time winning (Z426). The winning type of the normal symbol is determined by collating the value of the normal winning type counter acquired when passing through the through gate 67 (not shown) and the preset determination value. In this control example, the value of the normal per type counter is in the range of 0 to 198, and is repeatedly updated at the timing synchronized with the other special per type counter C2, and the value of the normal per type counter obtained is If it is any of "0 to 3", it is determined to be a long-time win, and if it is any of "4 to 198", it is determined to be a normal win.

When it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is long-time winning (Z426: Yes), the display mode for long-time winning is set (Z427). In the processing of Z427, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol). Next, a long-time hit start command is set (Z428), and the long-time open flag 203i is turned on (Z429). Then, the processing shifts to Z430.

In the process of Z426, when it is determined that the winning type of the normal symbol is normal winning (Z426: No), the display mode for normal winning is set (Z431). Next, it is determined whether or not it is during probability variation or time saving (Z432). Then, if it is during probability variation or time saving (Z432: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently occurring (Z433). As a result of determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z433: Yes), the process proceeds to Z434. In this embodiment, during the special symbol jackpot, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 as much as possible, even when the normal symbol wins, it is the same as when the normal symbol comes off. , the number of times of opening and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

In the process of Z433, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (Z433: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of openings is set to 2 times. Set (Z430) and move to the processing of Z436. In the process of Z430, 2 is set in the open number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203h.

In the process of Z432, if it is neither probability variation nor time reduction (Z432: No), it will transfer to the process of Z434. In the process of Z432, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special pattern, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal pattern. The time is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of openings is set to 1 (Z434), and the process proceeds to Z436. In the process of Z434, 1 is set in the open number counter 203g, and a value corresponding to 0.2 seconds is set in the open time counter 203h.

On the other hand, in the process of Z425, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (Z425: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (Z435). In the process of Z435, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process moves to Z436.

In the process of Z436, it is determined whether or not the probability variation is in progress (Z436), and if the probability variation is in progress (Z436: Yes), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (Z437) , the process ends. On the other hand, if the process of Z436 is not in the probability change (Z436: No), the change time of the change display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (Z438), and this process is finished. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 .

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening time and the number of times of opening in a long time are the same operation as when the normal pattern hits in the variable probability state and the time saving state. It may be configured to set

Next, the through gate passage processing (Z107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 252 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (Z107). This thru gate passage processing (Z107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243). This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (Z502). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Z503).

The ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (Z501: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503 : No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (Z501: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (Z503: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (Z504). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in Z103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Store it in the area (Z505), and terminate this process. In addition, in the processing of Z505, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

253 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (Z801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 254, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (Z902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (Z903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 208) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (Z904), and if it is turned on (Z904: Yes), the process proceeds to Z913. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905), and if not stored (Z905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to Z913.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (Z906). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the process of Z1014 in FIG. 255, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of Z913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (Z913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of RAM 203 (Z914, Z915).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing (Z914, Z915) is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), initialization processing (Z914, Z915) of the RAM 203 is executed. . In the RAM initialization process (Z914, Z915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (Z914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (Z915). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to Z911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (Z904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (Z905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( Z907: Yes), a status command is transmitted based on the long time open flag 203i (Z908). Next, while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (Z909). Next, the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) transmits a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning to the game state at the time of drive power interruption (Z910), and shifts to the processing of Z911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of Z911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, the interrupt is permitted (Z912), and the main process to be described later is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of Z1001 to Z1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of Z1010 and Z1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 243), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (Z1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of Z101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 243), and if there is winning detection information, it responds to the payout control device 111 with the number of winning balls. Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 244) and the start winning process (see FIG. 248). In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the prize winning command set in the starting prize winning processing and the look-ahead processing (see FIG. 249). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (Z1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (Z1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (Z1004). Details of the jackpot control process (Z1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (Z1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of Z412 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 250), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (Z1006). In the first symbol display update process, Z257 process or Z259 process of special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see Figure 246), or Z277 process or Z279 process of special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see Figure 247) When the pattern is set, the first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display corresponding to the variable pattern. In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (Z1006), the Z257 process or Z259 process of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 246), or the Z277 process of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 247) or When the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processing of Z279 is completed, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and Z256 of the special symbol 1 variation start processing (see FIG. 246) or Z258 process, or Z276 process or Z278 process of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (see FIG. 247), the stop symbol (first symbol) to the first symbol display device 37 Stop display (lighting display).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (Z1007). In the second symbol display update process (Z1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of Z437 or the process of Z438 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 251), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of Z410 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 250), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. After finishing the fluctuation display, the stop design (second design) is stopped and displayed on the second design display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of Z427 or the processing of Z431 of the normal design variation start processing (see FIG. 251). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main processing, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (Z1009: Yes), the process moves to Z1001, and the above-described processes after Z1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (Z1009: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (Z1010, Z1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (Z1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of Z1002 (Z1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process from Z1001 to Z1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the processing of Z1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (Z1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. 253 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after Z1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (Z1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). and transmit (Z1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (Z1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (Z1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of Z1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in Z1001 to Z1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of Z1010 and Z1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. We can start with the processing of Z1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of Z1001 as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (Z901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), processing can be started from Z1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (Z1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (Z1004). This jackpot control processing (Z1004) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 255), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, execution of various effects according to the jackpot This is a process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (Z1104: see FIG. 256), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (Z1101). The process of Z219 of the special symbol variation process (Fig. 244) is executed, the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, and when the special symbol jackpot is started (Z1101: Yes), the opening command is set ( Z1115), this processing ends.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (Z1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of Z1102, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (Z1102: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1102, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (Z1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (Z1103). If it is time to start a new round (Z1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is released (Z1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (Z1105). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1103, if it is not the time to start a new number of rounds (Z1103: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (Z1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is met.

In the processing of Z1106, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (Z1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (Z1107), and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not satisfied (Z1106: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (Z1108). Specifically, when a special game state (16 rounds or all 2 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of Z1108, if it is time to start the ending effect (Z1108: Yes), an ending command is set (Z1109), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed during the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 255) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1108, if it is not the ending start timing (Z1108: No), it is determined whether or not it is the jackpot end timing (Z1110). The jackpot end timing is the timing after a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. If it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z1110, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (Z1110: Yes), in the process of Z1111, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A (Z1111). If the jackpot type this time is jackpot A (Z1111: Yes), the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 100 (Z1112). Next, the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to OFF (Z1114), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type this time is not the jackpot A (Z1111: No), set the probability variation flag 203m to ON (Z1113), then set the jackpot medium flag 203n to OFF (Z1114), this End the process.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 273. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 257, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process is executed upon power-on (Z2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing of Z2118 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (Z2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 258, when the audio lamp controller 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see Z2115 in FIG. 258), it executes power-off processing in Z2118. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of Z2118 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (Z2002: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the Z2118 was powered off. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of Z2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If destruction of the data in the RAM 223 is confirmed (Z2003: Yes), the process proceeds to Z2004, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (Z2003: No), the process proceeds to Z2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to Z2004. On the other hand, whether the startup process this time was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off process of Z2118 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the processing is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (Z2003: No), and the process proceeds to Z2208.

If the power-off processing flag is on (Z2002: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process of Z1318, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process shifts to Z2004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of Z2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (Z2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (Z2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (Z2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (Z2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (Z2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of Z2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (Z2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed (see Z2117 in FIG. 258). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of Z2118 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power failure process of Z2118 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (Z2009) to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (Z2010), an interrupt Permission is set (Z2011), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of Z2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because, for example, the startup process this time was started after the power supply was completely shut off, and Z2008 is started via the processes of Z2004 to Z2006. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (Z2008: No), skip Z2009, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, and shift the processing to Z2010. (Z2011) to shift to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from main controller 110 (Z2012). In addition, this state command indicates whether or not the normal design is winning for a long time based on the long time open flag 203i in the process of Z908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 254) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. is a command. In the process of Z2012, if it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2012: Yes), the long-time open flag 203i is set based on the received state command, and this process ends (Z2013). . Here, if the received status command indicates that the long time hit is in progress, the long time open flag 203i is turned on, and if it indicates that the long time hit is not hit, the long time open flag 203i is turned on. Set to off.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not the normal symbol is in the long-term hit state, so that the sound lamp control unit 113 side can also determine the state. can be done.

The reason why the clearing process of Z2009 is skipped is that when the process of Z2008 is reached from Z2004 via the process of Z2006, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of Z2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 258, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the current process of Z2101 was executed (Z2101), and 1 msec or more has passed. If not (Z2101: No), the process proceeds to Z2113 without performing the processes Z2102 to Z2112. In the processing of Z2101, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has passed, because Z2102 to Z2112 are mainly processing related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , Z2113, the variable display setting process of Z2114, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of Z2111 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of Z2112 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of Z2101 (Z2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of Z2103 to Z2114 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of Z2108 described later (Z2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (Z2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to Z2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of Z2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (Z2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (Z2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (Z2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (Z2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of Z2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (Z2110), and the process proceeds to Z2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of Z2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of Z2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of Z2110 ends, short-term winning management processing is executed (Z2111). This short-term prize winning management process (Z2111) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. ) is executed.

After executing the short-term winning management process (Z2111), the processing of the pending effect management process (Z2112) during reach is executed. This reach pending effect management process (Z2112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A process of setting a specific effect (announcement effect) for notifying the player that the game is played so as to accumulate up to is executed.

When the processing of Z2112 ends, command determination processing is executed (Z2113). Details of this command determination processing (Z2113) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (Z2113), the variable display setting process is executed (Z2114). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the processing of Z2114 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (Z2115). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of Z2115 (Z2115: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (Z2117), and the power-off processing is executed (Z2118). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in-progress flag is turned off (Z2119), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of Z2115 (Z2115: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (Z2116), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (Z2116: No), the process returns to Z2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (Z2116: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination processing (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 259 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing (Z2113). This command determination process (Z2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). When a variation pattern command is received (Z2201: Yes), variation pattern reception processing is executed (Z2202), and this processing ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2201, if the variation pattern command has not been received (Z2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received (Z2203). When the stop type command is received (Z2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (Z2205), and this process is terminated. .

In the process of Z2203, if the stop type command has not been received (Z2203: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received (Z2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (Z2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (Z2207). After that, this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2206, if the reserved ball number command is not received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol is received (Z2208). When the special symbol winning command is received (Z2208: Yes), the winning command receiving process is started (Z2209), and this process ends. Details of the winning command reception process (Z2209) will be described later with reference to FIG. is executed, and a setting process is executed for executing each pending effect determined to be executed based on the result of the preliminary determination. On the other hand, in the process of Z2208, when the special symbol winning command is not received (Z2208: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 260, the details of the variation pattern reception process (Z2202), which is one process in the command determination process (Z2113: FIG. 259), will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (Z2113), based on the received variation pattern command, a detailed special symbol variation pattern (effect mode), a notice display mode, a display mode of a pending notice, etc. are set.

In the fluctuation pattern reception process (Z2202: FIG. 260), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2221), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2222). After that, the previous notice display command for display is set in the variation pattern (Z2223), and the value of the pending notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z2224). Here, the display notice display command is a command for instructing display of various notice effects determined based on the variation pattern (for example, comment notice or mini-character notice suggesting the result of success/failure determination).

When the process of Z2224 is completed, it is determined whether or not the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225). When it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2225), the pending change value is set to 0, and the pending effect mode storage area 223m is cleared (Z2226). When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is 1 or more (Z2225: No), the process of Z2226 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2227. Next, a lucky display determination process (Z2227) is executed. By configuring in this way, as shown in FIG. 213(b), even if an effect of changing the color of the pending ball is performed based on the result of the prefetch determination, the value of the pending notice counter 223g determines whether the ball is retained. After the display position is changed according to the digestion and the change of the special pattern corresponding to the reserved ball whose color is changed is started, it is hidden due to the stop of the fluctuation, and the reserved change value can also be set to an initial value of 0. Therefore, even when the color of the reserved ball is changed, the order in which the variable display of the reserved ball is started can be correctly notified to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 261, the lucky display determination process (Z2227) performed in the variation pattern reception process performed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flow chart showing this lucky display determination process (Z2227). In this lucky display determination process (Z2227), the number of pending balls at the time of winning a big hit in the past is determined, and processing such as setting a mark pattern (holding effect) to be displayed in the display area corresponding to the number of pending balls is performed. Run.

In the lucky display determination process (Z2227: FIG. 261), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2301). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2301: Yes), it is determined whether the normal mode is in progress (Z2302). If the normal mode is not in effect (Z2302: No), this processing is terminated. In the processing of Z2302, if it is determined that the mode is normal mode (Z2302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the lucky reserve storage value 223p provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2303). If it is determined that the lucky reservation storage value 223p is 0 (Z2303: Yes), this process is terminated. Here, when the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p is 0, it indicates that the number of reservation balls at the time of winning the special symbol determined as the big hit is not stored.

If it is determined that the value of the stored lucky reserve value 223p is equal to or greater than 1 (Z2303), it is determined whether or not the effect is possible based on the lucky reserve lottery table 222p (see FIG. 237(c)) provided in the ROM 222. Acquire (Z2304). Here, in the lucky reservation lottery table 222p, a process of acquiring the value of the production counter 223h and determining whether or not to execute the lucky reservation production based on the determination value of the production counter 223h set corresponding to the current number of holding balls. is executed.

Based on the processing of Z2304, it is determined whether or not the lucky reservation effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2305). If it is not possible (Z2305: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the execution effect is possible (Z2305: Yes), based on the value of the lucky reservation storage value 223p, the display reservation lid command is set from the lucky reservation command table 222g (Fig. 231) (Z2306). ). Next, the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 3 (Z2307), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2301 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2301: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky holding effect was executed in the previous variation. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2308: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is cleared (0 is set as the initial value) (Z2309), and this process is performed. exit. Incidentally, in the process of Z2309, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2308: No), this process ends. In this way, the lucky pending effect is set at the start of the variation, and is ended by setting the special effect status to the initial value at the start of the next variation. In this control example, the lucky holding effect is performed during the period in which the special symbol is varied once, but it is not limited to this, and may be performed in the period in which the variation is performed multiple times. may The number of fluctuations of the special symbols to be executed at the start of the lucky reservation performance may be determined, and may be terminated when the variation of the number of times is executed, or a lottery may be conducted to decide whether to end the lucky reservation performance at each variation. is executed, and the effect may be terminated when the end lottery is won, or when all the reserved balls are consumed or a demonstration display is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 260, the description continues. After executing the lucky display determination process (Z2227), the during-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) is executed. In the reach pending effect setting process (Z2228: FIG. 261), when the variation of the special symbol to be the ready reach display mode is executed, the ready reach hold is performed so as to store the pending balls during the ready reach display mode. A process for executing an effect (one of the special pending effects) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 262, the during-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing the on-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228).

In reach holding effect setting processing (Z2228: FIG. 262), first, it is determined whether or not reach is fluctuating (Z2321). If it is determined that the reach is not fluctuating (Z2321: No), this process ends. If the reach is fluctuating (Z2321: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation is in the normal mode (Z2322). If it is determined that the mode is not the normal mode (Z2322: No), this process is terminated. If the change is normal mode (Z2322: Yes), it is determined whether the value in the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2323). That is, it is determined whether or not the state is a normal state in which a special holding effect is not executed. If the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 or more (Z2323: No), this process is terminated. Here, when the special effect status is 1 or more, it means that another special pending effect is being executed, so the determination of Z2323 is executed in order to prevent further overlapping of the pending effect. . If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2323: Yes), based on the number of pending balls and the value of the effect counter 223h, the during-reach effect lottery table 222m (see FIG. 237(a)) is executed. Acquire whether or not the effect is possible (Z2324). Here, in the during-reach effect lottery table 222m, the determination value of the effect counter 223h is set for the current number of pending balls, and whether or not the during-reach pending effect can be executed is determined based on the determination value.

By the processing of Z2324, it is determined whether or not the on-reach pending effect (execution effect) can be executed (Z2325). When it is determined that the execution effect is not executable (Z2325: No), this process ends. When it is determined that the execution effect can be executed (Z2325: Yes), based on the variation pattern type (variation type) of the special symbol, the reach start time calculation table 222n (Fig. 237 (b)), the pending effect The value of the start timer 223r is set (Z2326), the data indicating the special effect status 2 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2327), and the process ends.

In this way, according to the ready-to-reach pending effect setting process (Z2228), the variation pattern type (dynamic display mode type) to be the ready-to-win display mode is determined, and other special pending effects are not executed. If so, a lottery is executed as to whether to execute the pending production during reach, and by winning the lottery, the timing of starting execution of the pending production during reach is set, so the fluctuation of the special symbol that becomes the ready-to-win display mode. When it is started, the execution frequency of the ready-to-win pending effect is set to be higher as the current number of pending balls is smaller, and it is possible to suppress the player from stopping the shooting of the game balls during the ready-to-win, and the game parlor's side. Profits can be increased. Also, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

Next, return to FIG. 260 to continue the description. After executing the on-reach holding effect setting process (Z2228), the holding lid setting process (Z2229) is executed. In this reserved lid setting process (Z2229), necessary processes for displaying the variable lid pattern P displayed in the sub-display area Ds are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the reservation lid setting process (Z2229) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing this reservation lid setting process (Z2229).

In the reservation lid setting process (Z2229: see FIG. 263), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 1 (Z2341). That is, it is determined whether or not a short-term winning effect (short-term winning pending effect), which is one of the special pending effects, is set. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2341: Yes), the short-term win-time suspension in the suspension lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228(a)) provided in the ROM 222 A reserved lid range value is obtained based on the lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229(a)) (Z2342). Based on the pending lid range value acquired in the process of Z2342, a pending lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this process is terminated. Thus, when the value of the special effect status is 1 and the execution of the short-term winning effect (see FIG. 212(a)) is set, the display range of the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the current reserved ball By selecting and setting a value (display mode) from the short-term winning reserve lid range selection table 222d4 (see FIG. 229(a)), the display mode of the variable lid pattern P different from the normal time (normal time is reserved It is possible to set the display mode of displaying with the rule of displaying the pattern and the space of one reserved pattern, or the rule of displaying the pattern with the space of two reserved patterns.

As a result, when the period required for storing one to four held balls is within the predetermined period, the variable cover pattern P is displayed according to a rule different from the normal time. From the display mode of P, it is possible to recognize that the period required for memorizing the ball on hold is short. Therefore, it is possible to induce the player to play the game so as to memorize the reserved ball more quickly, and the efficiency of the game can be improved. Also, the interest in the game can be improved.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2341, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2341: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the hold effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2343: Yes), the ready-to-win effect pending lid range selection table 222d5 ( (See FIG. 229(b)) to acquire the reserved lid range value (Z2344). Based on the pending lid range value acquired in the process of Z2344, the pending lid command for display is set (Z2355), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display control device 114 receives the holding lid command for display indicating the holding lid range value acquired in the ready-to-win production holding lid range selection table 222d5, the ready-to-win showing that it is the timing to execute the holding production during ready-to-win By receiving a notice display command for carrying out a middle reservation notice effect, the variable lid pattern P is changed and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display reservation lid command.

In this way, when the execution of the ready-to-reach holding effect is determined, the mode of changing the display of the variable cover pattern P is set, and the display mode is set in accordance with the execution timing of the ready-to-reach holding effect. Since the variable cover pattern P is variably displayed in , it can be determined that a special holding performance different from the normal time is executed by the variable cover pattern P. - 特許庁

On the other hand, when it is determined in the action of Z2343 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2343: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2345). . That is, it is determined whether execution of a lucky pending effect, which is one of the special pending effects, is set. In the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 3 (Z2345: Yes), the normal reservation lid range selection table 222d1 (see FIG. 228) in the reservation lid range selection table 222d (see FIG. 228) 228(b)), the pending lid range value is obtained (Z2344). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends. In this way, when the execution of the lucky holding effect (see FIGS. 216(a) and 216(b)) is set, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P (displayed A display mode in which one reserved pattern is vacated from the last reserved pattern that is displayed) is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2345, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2345: No), it is determined whether the advance notice B mode is set (Z2347). That is, as shown in FIGS. 211(a) and 211(b), when there are four or more reserved balls and the colors of the reserved symbols are variable, the player is suggested not to enter any more reserved balls. It is determined whether or not a pending performance is being executed. If it is the advance notice B mode (Z2347: Yes), the display showing the color change of the variable lid pattern P is based on the reserve lid color change selection table 222f (see FIG. 230(b)) provided in the ROM 222. A hold lid command for use is set (Z2348). Here, as shown in FIG. 211(b), the reserved symbols are displayed in variable colors, and notice B notifies the player that the game will be played so as to restrict the number of reserved balls from increasing further. A variable cover pattern at a position where the variable cover pattern P and the displayed reserved pattern overlap when more reserved balls are stored in a mode (the number of reserved balls is four or more) being played. A setting is executed to change the display color of P to a different color (for example, green) from the normal display color. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize in an easy-to-understand manner that the game has been played contrary to the notification mode in which the game is played without memorizing the reserved ball.

After executing the process of Z2348, the reservation lid range value is acquired (Z2349) based on the advance notice B mode reservation lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228(d)), the above-described processing of Z2355 is executed, and this End the process. According to the advance notice B mode reserved lid range selection table 222d3 (see FIG. 228(d)), if there are 4 reserved balls as shown in FIG. It can be constructed such that the variable lid pattern P corresponding to the position of the item is displayed according to a special rule such that the variable cover pattern P is hidden but displayed. As a result, in the advance notice B mode in which the reservation effect is performed to instruct not to increase the number of reserved balls, the variable cover pattern P is used to make the player feel as if the four reserved balls are the upper limit. can let Therefore, it is possible to notify that the upper limit value of the held balls is variable depending on the display mode of the variable lid pattern P.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2347 that the mode is not the advance notice B mode (Z2347: No), it is determined whether the mode is the advance notice A mode (Z2350). That is, the number of reserved balls is four or more, the color of the reserved pattern is set or set in a variable manner, and the variable cover pattern P is different from the normal mode (normal state) with the reserved pattern. It is determined whether or not a holding performance to display without intervals is being executed.

If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2351: Yes), the reservation lid range value is acquired based on the advance notice A mode reserve lid range selection table 222d2 (see FIG. 228(c)) ( Z2351). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2350, if it is determined that the mode is not the advance notice A mode (Z2350), it is determined whether or not it is during the time saving (Z2352). Here, whether or not the game is in the time saving mode is determined by the game state data attached to the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110 . In the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, in addition to the variation type (out of reach, hit) data, the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state (electric support gaming state), or a probability variable gaming state (high Data indicating whether the state is a game state with probability power supply) or a normal game state (game state without low probability power supply) is also attached and output.

(Z2352: Yes), when it is determined that it is during time saving (a state in which the time saving game state or probability variable game state is set), based on the time saving reservation lid range selection table 222d6 (see FIG. 229 (c)) to acquire the reserved lid range value (Z2353). After that, the process of Z2355 described above is executed, and this process ends. In addition, during time saving (state with electric sapo), unlike the normal game state, in the state of 0 to 6 reserved balls, the variable lid pattern P is the 7th reserved ball and the 8th reserved pattern. is displayed, and the number of reserved balls is 7, so that the variable cover pattern P displayed at the position where the 7th reserved pattern is displayed is hidden, and the number of reserved balls is 8. As a result, the variable lid symbol P displayed at the position where the eighth reserved symbol is displayed is set to non-display. As a result, the variable lid pattern P is configured to be displayed less than in the normal game state during the time saving with the electric sapo that the electric accessory 640a is likely to be in the open state, and in the state in which many reserved balls are frequently generated. , an increase in the load of display control of the variable lid pattern P is suppressed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2352, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving mode (Z2352: No), that is, if it is determined that it is in the normal mode suspension effect, the normal suspension lid range selection table 222d1 (Fig. 228(b)), the pending lid range value is obtained (Z2354), the processing of Z2355 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 260, the description continues. After executing the pending lid setting process (Z2229), the pending character setting process (Z2230) is executed. In this reserved character setting process (Z2230), a process for determining a girl character or the like to be displayed in the character display area C of the secondary display area Ds is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 264, the pending character setting process (Z2230) executed in the variation pattern reception process (Z2202; FIG. 260) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing this reserved character setting process (Z2230).

In the reserved character setting process (Z2230), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2361). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal mode, which is the normal state, is set as the state of the holding effect. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status is not 0 (Z2361: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special effect status is 0 (Z2361: Yes), it is determined whether the number of held balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362). Here, when the number of held balls has changed from 3 to 4, even if one held ball is digested by newly starting fluctuation, the first ball entrance 64 which is the starting port , the right second ball entrance 640r, or the second ball entrance 640, the number of reserved balls was three (special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223a). 223b is 3), the number of reserved balls is 4 (the sum of the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is 4). It is a state that is changing into a state.

When it is determined that the number of pending balls has changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: Yes), the content of the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 and the set pending effect mode and the effect counter 223h, a suspended character is selected from the suspended character selection table 222i (see FIG. 232(b)), a display character command is set (Z2363), and this processing ends. Thus, when there are four reserved balls, the character type of the girl is determined by lottery based on the background mode selected in the character display area C and the set reserved performance mode, and displayed. . As a result, the character displayed can be changed according to the background type and the pending effect mode, and the pending effect can be diversified. Further, in addition to the configuration of this control example, it may be configured such that the determined character type is variable depending on the determination result of the special symbol being changed and the variation pattern type (for example, super reach). By configuring in this way, if a character with a high selection rate is set when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a hit, depending on the character type, a special pattern during fluctuation or a hit while being held can be determined in advance. The player can recognize that the reserved balls that have been stored are stored. In addition, if a character with a high selection rate is set according to the character type when it is displayed in super reach, the display of that character will perform super reach, which is a variation pattern with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. can be expected early.

In addition, even in this control example, the notice A mode and notice B mode are set when the variation pattern type (for example, super reach type) with a high degree of expectation for a big hit is determined by the prefetch judgment, or when the result of the judgment in advance is a big hit. Therefore, by displaying the J2 character and the J3 character, the player can expect that the super ready-to-win type will be executed and that the success/failure determination result will be a big hit.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of held balls has not changed from 3 to 4 (Z2362: No), it is determined whether the number of held balls is less than 4 (Z2364). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 (Z2364: Yes), a display character command for clearing the reserved character is set (Z2365), and this processing ends. In this way, the character is set to be non-display at the timing when the number of reserved balls becomes less than four, so that the player can be notified of the decrease in the number of reserved balls in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the process of Z2364, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 or more (Z2364: No), it is determined whether or not over winning has occurred (Z2366). Here, whether or not an over-winning has occurred is determined by determining whether or not an over-winning information command output from the main control device 110 when the starting winning exceeds the upper limit value of the number of reserved balls is received. be. When it is determined that an over winning has occurred (Z2366: Yes), based on the contents of the background mode storage area 223i, the pending effect mode, and the effect counter 223h, the reserved character change table 222j is used to change. A reserved character is selected, a display character command is set (Z2267), and this processing is terminated. Incidentally, if it is determined at Z2366 that the over-winning has not occurred (Z2366: No), this processing is terminated as it is. As described above, in this control example, when an over-win occurs, the character displayed in the character display area C is changed. As is clear from the pending character change table 222j (see FIG. 233), the character change is configured to be determined based on the currently set character. When the judgment result is a big hit (hit) or when the expectation of a big hit is high in the variation pattern type, it is easy to set. is configured so that characters other than J3 are not selected. Further, when the character J2 is selected, or when the character J0 or J1, which is difficult to be selected in the notice A mode or the notice B mode, is selected, the character J2 or J3 is selected. designed to be easy. That is, it is configured to be able to step up to J3, which is set as a high degree of expectation in which a big hit or a variation pattern type with a high degree of expectation is selected, and the player enjoys the pending performance by causing over winning. configured to be able to The change of this character corresponds to a privilege advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 260, the description continues. After executing the reserved character setting process (Z2230), the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) is executed, and this process ends. In this balloon setting process (Z2231), the process of selecting the content of the comment displayed in the balloon from the character displayed in the character display area C, etc. is executed.

Next, the speech balloon setting process (Z2231) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing this balloon setting process (Z2231).

In the balloon setting process (Z2231), first, it is determined whether or not 1 is set as the value of the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2381). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize winning performance is set. If it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2381: Yes), short-term winning balloon selection in balloon selection table 222k (see FIG. 234(a)) provided in ROM 222 Based on the table 222k4 (see FIG. 235(a)), the contents of the balloon are acquired (Z2382). After executing the process of Z2382, the balloon command for display is set (Z2394) based on the contents of the acquired balloon, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2381 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2381: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold effect during reach is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2383: Yes), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the balloon selection table 222k5 (see FIG. 235(b)) during the reach effect (Z2384), and the above Z2394 Execute the process and terminate this process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2383 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2383: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385). . That is, it is determined whether or not the lucky holding effect is set. If the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 3 (Z2385: Yes), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the lucky reservation balloon selection table 222k6 (see FIG. 236(a)) (Z2386), and the process of Z2394 described above is performed. and terminate this process.

In the processing of Z2387, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 3 (Z2385: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387). If it is determined that the advance notice B mode is set (Z2387: Yes), the speech balloon content is acquired based on the notice B speech balloon selection table 222k3 (see FIG. 234(d)) (Z2388), and Z2394 described above is obtained. is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of Z2387, if it is determined that the advance notice B mode is not set (Z2387: No), it is determined whether the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389). If it is determined that the advance notice A mode is set (Z2389: Yes), balloon contents are acquired based on the advance notice A balloon selection table 222k2 (see FIG. 234(c)) (Z2390), and Z2394 described above is obtained. is executed, and the process ends.

In the process of Z2389, when it is determined that the advance notice A mode is not set (Z2389: No), it is determined whether or not the time saving mode (time saving game state or probability variable game state) is set (Z2391). When it is determined that the time saving is set (Z2391), the content of the balloon is acquired based on the time saving balloon selection table 222k7 (see FIG. 236 (b)) (Z2392), and the processing of Z2394 described above is performed. Execute and terminate this process.

In the process of Z2391, if it is determined that the time saving is not set (Z2391: No), the balloon content is acquired based on the normal balloon selection table 222k1 (see FIG. 234(b)) (Z2393), The processing of Z2394 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In this way, since the comment corresponding to each reservation performance mode is controlled so as to be selected, the content of the comment corresponding to the reservation performance mode can be displayed to improve the amusement of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 266, winning command reception processing (Z2209), which is part of the command determination processing (Z2113: see FIG. 259) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing this winning command reception process (Z2209). This winning command reception process (Z2209) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 259) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the winning command reception process (Z2209), first, the winning information indicated by the received command is set in the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2401). Next, based on the variation type of the received command and the obtained value of the effect counter 223h, the pending change value is acquired from the pending change selection table 222b (FIG. 227(a)) provided in the ROM 222 (Z2402). .

Next, it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter 223g provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2403). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice A mode or the advance notice B mode in which the color of the reserved symbol is variable is set. When the value of the reservation notice counter 223g is not 0 (Z2403: No), the processing of Z2404 to Z2406 is skipped and the processing of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the pending notice counter 223g is 0 (Z2403: Yes), based on the pending change value, the pending effect mode from the pending effect mode selection table 222c (see FIG. 227(b)) is set (Z2404). Next, it is determined whether the pending change value is 0 (Z2405). If it is determined that the pending change value is 0 (Z2405: Yes), the process of Z2406 is skipped and the process of Z2407 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pending change value is not 0 (Z2405: No), the pending notice counter 223g shows the current pending ball numerical value (special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a and special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223b). ) is set (Z2406).

When the processing of Z2406 is completed, short-term winning judgment processing is executed (Z2407). Details of the short-term winning judgment processing (Z2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. If so), a process of setting the execution of the short-term winning pending effect is executed. Next, lucky reservation processing is executed (Z2408). The details of the lucky reservation storage processing (Z2408) will be described later with reference to FIG. Set the execution of the lucky pending effect. Next, the pending lid setting process (Z2409), the pending character setting process (Z2410), and the balloon setting process (Z2411) described above are executed, and this process ends. Note that the reservation lid setting process (Z2409) is the same as the contents already described with reference to FIG. 263, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Also, the balloon setting process (Z2411) is the same as the contents already described with reference to FIG. 265, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 267, the short-term winning determination process (Z2407) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing this short-term winning judgment process (Z2407). This short-term winning determination process (Z2407) is executed in the winning command receiving process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the short-term winning determination process (Z2407), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is the probability variable gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (Z2421). When it is determined to be the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state (during time saving) (Z2421: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the probability variable gaming state or the time saving gaming state (Z2421: No), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2422). If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 0 (Z2422: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 0 (Z2422: Yes), it is determined whether the number of pending balls is 4 (Z2423). If it is determined that the number of held balls is not four (Z2423: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 4 (Z2423: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424). When it is determined that the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is 0 (Z2424: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is not 0 (Z2424: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 1 (Z2425), and this process is terminated. In this way, when the period required until the establishment of the four reserved balls is less than 5 seconds, the special effect status 1 is set to indicate that the execution of the short-term winning pending effect is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing this lucky reservation storage process (Z2408). This lucky reservation storage process (Z2408) is executed in the winning command reception process (see FIG. 266) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the lucky reservation storage process (Z2408), first, the lottery result of the winning prize is acquired from the contents of the winning information storage area 223f provided in the RAM 223 (Z2441). Next, in the process of Z2441, it is determined whether or not the obtained lottery result is a big win (Z2442). When it is determined that the obtained lottery result is not a big win (2442: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a big hit (Z2442: Yes), it is determined whether the number of held balls is 4 or more (Z2443: No). If it is determined that there are four or more (Z2443: Yes), the value of the current number of reserved balls is set in the lucky reserved storage value 223p (Z2444), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current number of balls on hold is 4 or less (Z2443: No), this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 269 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (Z2114). This variable display setting process (Z2114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z2501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (Z2501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, Z2505 Go to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (Z2501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (Z2502), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2503).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (Z2504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to Z2505.

In the processing of Z2505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z2505). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (Z2505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (Z2506), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (Z2507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (Z2508), and the process proceeds to Z2509.

In the processing of Z2509, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (Z2509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the processing of Z2509 is executed, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 270, the short-term winning management process (Z2111), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing this short-term winning management process (Z2111). In this short-term prize winning management process (Z2111), a process of measuring a period until four reserved balls necessary for determining whether or not to execute a short-term prize pending effect is executed.

In the short-term winning management process (Z2111), first, it is determined whether or not the current number of pending balls is 0 (Z2601). When it is determined that the number of pending balls is not 0 (Z2601: No), the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is subtracted by 1 (Z2602). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of pending balls is 0 (Z2601: Yes), the value of the short-term prize winning timer 223q is set to 5 seconds (Z2603), and the process proceeds to Z2604.

In the processing of Z2604, it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604). That is, it is determined whether or not the short-term prize winning effect has already been set. If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 1 (Z2604: Yes), it is determined whether the number of pending balls is less than 4 (Z2605). If it is determined that the number of balls on hold is less than 4 (Z2605: Yes), the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is set to 0 (Z2605), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2604 that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is not 1 (Z2604: No), or in the process of Z2605 it is determined that the number of held balls is greater than 4. If so (Z2605: No), the process of Z2606 is skipped and this process ends.

In this way, when the short-term winning pending effect is already set, the special effect status is set to 0 and set to the initial value based on the fact that the number of reserved balls is less than 4 balls. In addition, not limited to that, the special effect status is set to 0 at the timing when the execution of the short-term winning reservation effect is completed (the timing when the remaining period has passed after 4 balls have been entered in less than 5 seconds) can be configured to

Next, with reference to FIG. 271, the on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the on-reach suspension effect start process (Z2112). In this on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), a process for determining the execution timing of the on-reach pending effect and setting the display mode of the on-reach pending effect at the execution timing is executed.

In the on-reach pending effect management process (Z2112), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701). That is, it is determined whether or not the execution of the suspension effect during reach is set. If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2701: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2701: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pending effect start timer 223r provided in the RAM 223 is 0 (Z2702 ). When it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is 1 or more (Z2702: No), 1 is subtracted from the value of the pending effect start timer 223r (Z2703). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the pending effect start timer 223r calculated in the process of Z2703 is 0 (Z2704). When it is determined that the value of the hold effect start timer 223r after calculation is 1 or more (Z2704: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r after subtraction is 0 (Z2704: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705). If it is determined that the value in the special effect status storage area 223n is not 2 (Z2705: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special effect status storage area 223n is 2 (Z2705: Yes), an announcement display command indicating execution of the pending effect during reach is set (Z2706). After that, this process ends.

In the process of Z2702, when it is determined that the value of the pending effect start timer 223r is 0 (Z2702: Yes), the timing when the fluctuation time (fluctuation period) of the special symbol during fluctuation ends (the fluctuation period has passed (Z2707). When it is determined that it is time to end the fluctuation (Z2707: Yes), 0 is set in the special effect status storage area 223n (Z2708), and then this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2707, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation end timing (Z2707: No), this processing ends. In this way, in the ready-to-win suspension performance, the special performance status is set to 0 at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol, which is the ready-to-win variation mode, elapses, and the suspension performance is initially set to the normal mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 272, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 258) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107). In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is discriminated, and the execution of the notice effect etc. is set based on the depression.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: see FIG. 272), first, it is determined whether or not a value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223k as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period) (Z2801). ). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2801: No), if it is determined that the value greater than 0 is set in the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2801: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2802). Thereafter, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (operated) (Z2805). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2805: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806). If it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2806: No), 1 is added to the background mode and set in the background mode storage area 223i provided in the RAM 223 (Z2807). Next, a display switching command for switching to the variation pattern corresponding to the background mode set in the processing of Z2807 is set (Z2808). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. This sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z2806, if it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223k is greater than 0 (Z2806: Yes), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (during the announcement effect). (Z2809). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2809: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223k provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2810), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is displayed. Set a command (Z2811). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, the sensor input processing (Z2813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing sensor input processing (Z2813) which is one processing in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z1307: FIG. 272) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In this sensor input process (Z2813), the operation (input) state of the touch sensor 290 is determined, and execution of various effects and the like is set based on the operation.

In the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor valid time counter 223s is set to a value greater than 0 (Z2821). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation (input) of the touch sensor 290 is valid. When it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is 0 (Z2821: No), it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect display using the touch sensor 290 is set (Z2822). When it is determined that the advance notice effect display is set (Z2822: Yes), the sensor effective time set for the notice effect is set in the sensor effective time counter 223s (Z2823), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2822 that the advance notice effect display is not set (Z2822: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2821 that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is greater than 0 (Z2821: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s is decremented by the elapsed time and updated (Z2824 ). It is determined whether the touch sensor 290 is on, that is, whether the player has operated the touch sensor 290 by bringing his or her hand close to it (Z2825). If it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (Z2825: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is updated by adding 1 (Z2826), and a notice for display corresponding to the updated value of the touch counter 223t is displayed. A display command is set (Z2827). It is determined whether or not the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value set for the selected touch announcement effect display (Z2828). When it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is the upper limit value (Z2828: Yes), the value of the touch counter 223t is reset to 0, which is the initial value (Z2829). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the touch counter 223t is not the upper limit value (Z2828: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 272, the description continues. In the process of Z2801, if it is not waiting (Z2801: No), or if it is determined in the process of Z2802 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2802: No), the SW effective time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805). If the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 1 or more (Z2805: Yes), the SW valid time counter 223k is decremented (Z2806). Next, it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807). When it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the announcement effect is being executed (during the announcement effect) (Z2808). When it is determined that the notice effect is being performed (Z2808: Yes), the value of the sensor effective time counter 223s provided in the RAM 223 is reset (Z2809), and the notice for display indicating the notice effect determined by lottery is displayed. A command is set (Z2810). Next, sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. Note that the sensor input processing (Z2813) has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. 273, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z2808, if it is determined that the advance notice effect is not being performed (Z2808: No), the processing of Z2803 and Z2804 already described is executed, and then this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of Z2807 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (Z2807: No), the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 is skipped, and the sensor input processing (Z2813) already described with reference to FIG. 273 is performed. is executed to terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2805, if it is determined that the value of the SW valid time counter 223k is 0 (Z2805: No), it is determined whether a variation pattern has been set (Z2811). If it is determined that a variation pattern has been set (Z2811: Yes), based on the set variation pattern, the SW valid time is set in the SW valid time counter 223k (Z2812), and sensor input processing (Z2813) is performed. Execute and terminate this process. In addition, in the process of Z2811, when the variation pattern is not set (Z2811: No), the process of Z2812 is skipped, the sensor input process (Z2813) is executed, and this process ends. Here, in the variation pattern, there are those in which the effect using the frame button 22 is set and those in which it is not set. be done.

<Regarding control processing in the display control device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 to 287. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (Z3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 275, boot processing (Z3001) will be described. 275 is a flowchart showing boot processing (Z3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (Z3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (Z3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of Z3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of Z3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (Z3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (Z3104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the completion of this boot processing (see Z3001 in FIG. 275). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see Z3002 in FIG. 274) (Z3105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (Z3001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 275, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of Z3101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of Z3101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. A predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a by Z3101. and Z3102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes Z3103 to Z3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may execute the processes Z3103 to Z3105 without executing the processes Z3101 and Z3102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (Z3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. Further, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (Z3003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of Z3004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (Z3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 285(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see Z4602 in FIG. 285(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 276(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 239 is drawn. Determination processing (see Z3308 in FIG. 276(b)) and simple display setting processing (see Z3309 in FIG. 276(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via the device 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of Z3005, interrupt permission is set (Z3006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of Z3006, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(a). FIG. 276(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (Z3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 276(b). FIG. 276(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 242) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 276(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z3301). If it is off (Z3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81, the command determination process (Z3302) is executed, and then the display setting process (Z3303) is executed.

In the command determination processing (Z3302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display setting process (Z3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (Z3302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (Z3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (Z3303) or the simple display setting processing (Z3309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (Z3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, even when a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (Z3306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (Z3304), and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (Z3305), 242, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (Z3307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the processing of Z3307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command; The stop type counter is compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3301 that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (Z3301: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (FIG. 239) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (Z3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (Z3309) is executed, and the process of Z3304 is executed. to

Next, with reference to FIGS. 277 to 282, details of the command determination process (Z3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277), as shown in FIG. 277, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (Z3401). (Z3401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (Z3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (Z3402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (Z3403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (Z3404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (Z3404: Yes), the variation pattern Execute command processing (Z3405) and return to processing of Z3401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 278(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (Z3405) will be described. FIG. 278(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the variation pattern command process (Z3405: FIG. 278(a)), first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a distance of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. It could be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of Z3501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device actually produces a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third pattern display device 81 is displaying the variation performance according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for the next display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in Z3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of Z3501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (Z3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of Z3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z3504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (Z3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of Z3505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the clock counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of Z3504 is used to measure the time for the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of Z3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (Z3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (Z3406), If there is a display variation type command (Z3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (Z3407), and the process returns to Z3401.

Details of the stop type command process (Z3407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 278(b). FIG. 278(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (Z3407: FIG. 278(b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B1, jackpot B2, jackpot C) indicated by the display stop type command is determined. (Z3601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (Z3602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of Z3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. Set to off (Z3603). After that, the processing returns to Z3401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , Z3602 offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of Z3602 is described. In the above-described task processing (Z3304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of Z3602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by Z3603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of Z3406 that there is no stop type command for display (Z3406: No), then it is determined whether there is an advance notice display command for display among the unprocessed commands (Z3408). If it is determined that the advance notice display command for display has been received (Z3408: Yes), advance notice effect display processing is executed (Z3409). Details of the advance notice effect display processing (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. Also, setting of a notice display mode for notifying the player of a big win or the like is executed.

Here, the advance notice effect display process (Z3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 279(a). FIG. 279(a) is a flow chart showing this advance notice effect display process (Z3409).

In the advance notice effect display process (FIG. 279(a), Z3409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received advance notice display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z3701). Determines a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for advance notice set for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received advance notice display command for display, and sets it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (Z3702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z3703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by the clock counter. 233h (Z3704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z3705).

In this manner, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the notice display and the display timing, but not limited to this, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether there is a switch command for display among unprocessed commands (Z3410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (Z3410: Yes), mode switching processing is executed (Z3411). Details of this mode switching process (Z3411) will be described with reference to FIG.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 279(b) (Z3411). FIG. 279(b) is a flow chart showing this mode switching process (Z3411). In the mode switching process (Z3411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3801). It is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (Z3802). When it is determined that the special symbols are changing (Z3802: Yes), the background mode display data table buffer corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (Z3803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (Z3802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (Z3804).

In this way, if the special symbols are changing, the display mode is switched to a changing pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbols are stopped, the background of the standby state display mode is set to be displayed in the set background.

Note that the process of changing the background etc. according to the background mode may be configured as follows.

A back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back faces A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image classification indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image discrimination flags are turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag to be set is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag to be set. Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the set back face image discrimination flag is used at that time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received first may be turned on, or A back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the processing of Z3410, if it is determined that there is no display switching command (Z3410: No), it is determined whether there is a display holding lid command (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserve lid command for display (Z3412: Yes), a reserve lid command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, with reference to FIG. 280, the pending lid command process (Z3413) will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing this pending lid command process (Z3413).

In the pending lid command process (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the pending lid of the display effect corresponding to the received pending lid command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z3901). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in Z3901 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z3902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set by the processing of Z3901 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other holding lids are set to ON (Z3903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z3901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z3904 ), initializes the pointer 233f to 0, and (Z3905) returns to the command determination processing.

When a hold lid command is received, based on the time data indicated by the hold lid command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the added time is specified. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the display data table is added to the already set display data table, but a new display data table may be set.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of Z3412, if it is determined that there is no pending lid command for display (Z3412: No), it is determined whether there is a pending character command for display (Z3412). If it is determined that there is a reserved character command for display (Z3412: Yes), a reserved character command process is executed (Z3413).

Here, the suspended character command process (Z3415) will be described with reference to FIG. 280(b). FIG. 280(b) is a flow chart showing this pending character command process (Z3415).

In the pending character command process (Z3413: FIG. 280), first, the display data table for the pending character of the display effect corresponding to the received pending character command for display is determined, and the display data set in the display data table buffer is determined. Add to the table and set (Z4001). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in Z4001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for the reserved character set by the processing of Z4001 is turned on, The data table determination flags corresponding to the display data tables for other reserved characters are set to OFF (Z4003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of Z4001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4004 ), initializes the pointer 233f to 0 (Z4005), and returns to the command determination processing.

When a pending character command is received, the display mode of the variable pattern set corresponding to the additional time is specified based on the time data indicated by the pending character command, the set variable pattern, and the background mode. to set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the display data table is added to the already set display data table, but a new display data table may be set.

Returning to FIG. 277, the description continues. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display reserved character command (Z3414: No), it is determined whether there is a display balloon command (Z3416). If it is determined that there is a balloon command for display (Z3416: Yes), balloon command processing is executed (Z3417).

Here, the balloon command processing (Z3417) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing this balloon command processing (Z3417).

In balloon command processing (Z3417: FIG. 281), first, the display data table for the balloon of the display effect corresponding to the received display balloon command is determined, and added to the display data table set in the display data table buffer. (Z4101). Here, the display data table is set in addition to the display data table corresponding to the selected background mode (the display data table of the display data table buffer 233d currently set to be active). be. The position to be added is additionally set before the END data.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the balloon display data table set in Z4101 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4102). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table set by the processing of Z4101 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the balloon display data table is set to OFF (Z4103).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the balloon display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of Z4101, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4104). , the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4105), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When a balloon command is received, based on the time data indicated by the balloon command, the set variation pattern, and the background mode, the display mode of the variation pattern set corresponding to the additional time is specified. , set the display data table. With this configuration, even when it is necessary to switch between different display modes in a plurality of modes, the display mode after the addition time can be set to a display mode corresponding to the set background mode. The control load of the MPU 231 of the control device 114 can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the display data table is additionally set, but a new display data table may be set.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of Z3414, if it is determined that there is no display balloon command (Z3416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (Z3414). If (Z3414: Yes), execute error command processing (Z3415) and return to the processing of Z3415.

Details of the error command processing (Z3415) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process (Z3415: FIG. 282), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (Z4201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set off (Z4202). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of Z4201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of Z4202, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of Z4202, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by each error command are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. If it is determined in the process of Z3414 that there is no error command (Z3414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (Z3416), and the process returns to the process of Z3401.

In the process of Z3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is again determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (Z3401: Yes ), and the processing of Z3402 to Z3416 is executed again. Then, the processing of Z3401 to Z3416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (Z3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 278 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 278 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 278(a)) executed in this case, in the processing of Z3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of Z3502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the details of the display setting process (Z3303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 283, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (Z4301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of Z4302 to Z4304 is skipped, and the processing shifts to Z4305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (Z4301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag off (Z4302), Z4303 to Z4304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of Z4303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (Z4303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is ON (Z4303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (Z4304).

Here, with reference to FIG. 284(a), details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 284(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (Z4401).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

In the warning image setting process, after the process of Z4401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (Z4402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the warning image setting process (Z4304), or when it is determined in the process of Z4303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (Z4303: No), the process proceeds to Z4305.

In Z4305, pointer update processing is executed (Z4305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 284(b). FIG. 284(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (Z4501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of Z4501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (Z4502). As a result, if it is End information (Z4502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (Z4503). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (Z4505), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z4503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (Z4503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( Z4506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of Z4502, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (Z4502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 284 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (Z4306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of Z4306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (Z4307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (Z4308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (Z4308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (Z4308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (Z4309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (Z4309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (Z4310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4313). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (Z4314), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (Z4315), return to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 can be caused to display various types of effect images.

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the processing of Z4315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (Z3304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by Z4315, along with specifying the stop design of the variation production performed one before, The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the processing of Z4309, if the fixed display flag is not off but on (Z4309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (Z4316). If the demonstration display flag is off (Z4316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the finalized display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (Z4317), and then the contents thereof are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z4318). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (Z4319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z4320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (Z4321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of Z4316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (Z4316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (Z3309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 239) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, the details of the transfer setting process (Z3305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 285(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is ON (Z4601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (Z4601: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 have not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. Execute the processing (Z4602), terminate the transfer setting processing, and return to the V interrupt processing. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 285(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of Z4601, that is, if it is turned off (Z4601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (Z4603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (Z4602), which is one processing of the transfer setting processing (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 285(b). FIG. 285(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (Z4602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (Z4701). ), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (Z4702). In the process of Z4702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4702 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4702: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4702: Yes), the process proceeds to Z4703. Also, as a result of the processing of Z4701, even if a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (Z4701: No), the processing proceeds to Z4703.

In the process of Z4703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (Z4703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (Z4704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of Z4703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (Z4703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (Z4705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 276(b)), the command determination process (see Z3308 in FIG. 7276b) and the simple display setting process (see Z3309 in FIG. (See FIGS. 277 to 282) and display setting processing (See FIGS. 283 to 284(b)) are executed, so that normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the normal image. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 (refer to Z4601: No in FIG. 285(a)) by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 286).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 286, the normal image transfer setting process (Z4603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (Z3305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (Z4603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (Z4305) of the previously executed display setting process (Z3303) is used. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (Z4801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (Z4802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( Z4803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (Z4804), and the process proceeds to Z4805.

Also, in the process of Z4802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (Z4802: No), the processes of Z4803 and Z4804 are skipped and the process proceeds to Z4805. In the process of Z4805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (Z4805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (Z4805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (Z4806).

In the processing of Z4806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. . If it is determined by the process of Z4806 that the transfer process has not ended (Z4806: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (Z4806: Yes), the process proceeds to Z4807. Also, as a result of the process of Z4805, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (Z4805: No), the process proceeds to the process of Z4807.

In the processing of Z4807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is ON (Z4807). is turned off (Z4808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of Z3603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to Z4809. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (Z4807: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of Z4809, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (Z4809). The determination in the processing of Z4809 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of Z4809 (Z4809: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (Z4810). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of Z4810, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (Z4811), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the details of the drawing process (Z3306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (Z3304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency, alpha blending information 242 is generated from the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (Z3305) (Z4901). That is, in the processing of Z4901, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (Z3304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (Z3305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (Z4902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the images in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops the images in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information by overwriting. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of Z4902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (Z4903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 276(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing for the image for one frame.

In the above control example, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the control example described above, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is judged by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. , and if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (either the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the construction of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) that connects the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and is composed of a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the above control example, the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), or PRAM (Phase change RAM), and a first program storage area may be provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in this area. However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). , a first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided thereon, and the MPU 231 may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, a case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected directly. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the received image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when a resident area and a normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately according to the received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 has been described as a case where its contents are kept without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity sufficient to complete transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above control example, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the stored image data is transferred from another buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read out from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114 so that the display control device 114 detects the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to transmit and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

In addition, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when it is determined by the sound ramp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. Upon receipt of an error command conveying a magnetic field error from main controller 110 or audio ramp controller 113 , display controller 114 may display the warning image on third graphic display 81 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error generation flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used, the error message image that is resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay as the third symbol. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the third symbol display device 81 displays an error message image to immediately inform the player of the magnetic field error, thereby preventing the player from making an illegal action. can be deterred.

In the case where the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third pattern display device 81 to The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time are associated with the addresses expressed in units of the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for the frame is displayed. It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data required when drawing an image according to the drawing contents defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case of specifying only the drawing content corresponding to the super reach selected by is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be specified in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be used to specify The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be provided efficiently.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) of a one-frame image at which drawing processing ends will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and also determines the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded and the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above control example, after the finalized display data table corresponding to the finalized display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the finalized display effect is completed, the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demo command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, the finalized display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to continue displaying the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above example of control, the case where the demonstration effect is to change the rear image and to stop display the third pattern consisting of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached has been explained. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns without numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a after the power is turned on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, a simple variable display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image to be transferred at that time. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is specified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn which is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the sprite-type image data is stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. The MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, only the image data corresponding to the "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is made resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. However, the control is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of the super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone with the passage of time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) obtained at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as the pending ball number command. Although the case of inclusion has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and information on various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 may notify you.

In the above control example, when executing the variable performance, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . In addition, in the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, it is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one. As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the design as identification information on the display screen of the third design display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Here, the outline of the first control example will be described. The game board 13 is provided with a first ball entrance 64, a second right ball entrance 640r, and a second ball entrance 640 as starting ports (ball entry means, starting means). By entering either ball, a lottery (judgment) is executed to win or lose with a predetermined lottery probability. When the lottery result (judgment result) is hit (specific judgment result), a jackpot game (privilege game advantageous to the player) is executed. A plurality of types are set for the jackpot game, and different benefits are given to the player depending on the types. For example, the difference in the number of jackpot rounds, the winning type in which a high-probability game state (first special game state) is set after a jackpot game, and the time-saving game state after a jackpot game (when the player's profit is smaller than in the first special game state) A second special game state) is set, and the winning type and the like are set.

The success/failure determination result is the third symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the first symbol (special symbol (identification information)) displayed on the first symbol display device 37. After a variable display (dynamic display) is performed in a predetermined variable display period (dynamic display period), the judgment result is notified to the player by stopping display in a display mode for showing the win/fail judgment result (judgment result). . When a game ball enters the starting hole during the variable display period, the right to be drawn as a reserved ball is stored in the lottery for the entered ball. Up to 4 balls are held for entering the first entrance 64 (lottery for the first special symbol), and up to 4 balls are entered for the right second entrance 640r and the second entrance 640 (second special A total of four balls are stored as the upper limit value for each symbol lottery).

When the reserved balls are stored, one reserved pattern (identification pattern, identification information) is displayed for one reserved ball. For the reserved ball, prior to the variable display of the special pattern indicating the lottery result corresponding to the reserved ball, the success judgment result (judgment result) determined at the start of the fluctuation and the variable display mode of the special pattern. (Variation pattern type) is pre-determined to perform pre-discrimination. When the preliminary determination result is a specific determination result (for example, winning or super reach type is determined), the color of the pending symbol is changed (changed to a specific display mode) and displayed. When the colors of the reserved symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a special type of reserved effect is set according to the set color or the like. As one of the special holding effects, when the color of the holding pattern changes, further holding balls are generated, or by generating an overflow prize that enters the starting port more than the maximum number of holding balls, variable holding A comment display (announcement display mode, suggestion mode) suggesting the expected degree of hitting against the ball, the type of variation pattern to be executed, etc. is displayed (notice A mode). As a result, the player can enter more game balls into the starting hole, and the profit of the game parlor can be increased. In addition, by entering a game ball into the starting hole, a comment display is displayed, and the result of the judgment result, the variation type, etc. can be determined from the contents of the comment, so that the player can receive benefits (information that will be benefits). It can be given, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, as one of the special holding effects, a holding effect (announcement B mode) is set so that the game is played so as not to generate the reserved ball from the state where the color of the reserved ball is changed. In this holding performance, the variable lid pattern P is displayed in the display area where the reserved pattern is displayed, and the position of the reserved pattern displayed when the variable lid pattern P wins next to the reserved pattern whose color is changed. By displaying , the player is notified that the game will be played so as not to cause the ball to be held. In addition, the content suggesting that the number of held balls is not increased is also displayed by the comment display.

In addition, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is four, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and the total number of reserved symbols up to eight is the third symbol display device 81 (display area of the display means). , and an area in which the reserved pattern is displayed is secured and set in advance. In the area where the reserved design is displayed, the pedestal design is displayed at the position where the reserved design is displayed, and even if the reserved design is not displayed in the area where the reserved design is displayed configured to be identifiable. In the area where the fifth to eighth reserved patterns are displayed, four variable lid patterns P are displayed corresponding to the positions where the reserved patterns are displayed even at normal times, and each variable lid is displayed. In the pattern P, numbers corresponding to the number of reserved balls are displayed so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved balls can be identified.

By displaying the variable cover pattern P in this way, it is possible to determine that the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is 8 even in a state where the reserved pattern is not displayed by the numerical information of the variable cover pattern P. can do. Furthermore, the display mode of the variable lid pattern P is also varied by generating the reserved ball and displaying the reserved pattern. In the normal mode holding effect, the variable cover pattern P displayed at the position where the fifth holding pattern is displayed is changed to non-display when the number of the holding balls becomes three. After that, similarly, the 6th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 4 reserved balls, the 7th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 5 reserved balls, and the 8th variable cover pattern P is hidden with 6 reserved balls. The variable lid pattern P is variably displayed so as not to be displayed, that is, the variable lid pattern P is variably displayed so that two reserved patterns are available for three or more reserved balls. be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to show the player that the display area of the reserved symbols is variable depending on the number of reserved balls.

In addition, a special holding performance is executed in which the variable rule of the variable cover pattern P is changed according to the period during which the held ball is generated, or the variable rule is changed according to the variation type displayed variably. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize that a special holding effect is being executed according to the variable rule of the variable cover pattern P. In addition, the special pending effect is also set according to the result of the judgment result of the pending preliminary judgment, the variation type, and the result of the judgment result of the special symbol displayed in a variable manner and the variation type being executed. By varying the variable rule of the variable lid pattern P, it is possible to expect a win or predict the type of variation.

In addition, in this control example, even if the game ball is launched to the left or right side of the third symbol display device 81, the first ball entrance 64, the right second ball entrance 640r, the second ball entrance 640 (motorized role) 640a is in the open state), but this is not the only option. Arrangement of nails or the like may be set so as to form a flow path that easily bends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a lottery operation using only the second special symbol, or to perform a game such as a game in which a game ball is not allowed to enter the second ball entrance 640.例文帳に追加Furthermore, as an effect, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the player to enter the ball into the second ball entrance.

<Second control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 324. FIG. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example is configured so that the first special symbol and the first special symbol are alternately varied, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example, the first special symbol is prioritized. It is different from the first control example in that the state to be varied and the order of the first special symbol and the first special symbol are varied depending on the game state. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 288 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. In the first control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are installed inside the sorting device 700, and when a ball enters from the opening 710a, the sorting device 700 controls the first ball entering Although the balls are distributed to the port 64 and the second ball entrance 640, in the second control example, the distribution device 700 is not installed, and the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are used as they are. It is different in that it is configured to be installed. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 293, the electrical configurations of main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller in this second control example will be described. In this second control example, the effect display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 is partially changed from the first control example described above, and the content of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. The difference is that the content of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 289 to 291. FIG. In the first control example, the special symbols in which the start of variation is executed are configured so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are alternately performed, but in the second control example, the second special symbol is preferentially varied. The difference is that it is changed so that execution is performed.

Figures 289(a) and 289(b) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of special symbol variation and continuous effect in the second control example. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), when the special symbol variation continues the variation execution in the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 291 (b), the effect display is continuous effect to run. A continuous effect is a period set for a plurality of fluctuations. In addition, this continuous effect can be extended based on winning during execution of the continuous effect.

FIG. 291(a) is a diagram showing how the third symbol fluctuates during the continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 291(a), in the second control example, a small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds provided under the third symbol display device 81 displays the pedestal symbol m0 during execution. In the region Ds2, the first reserved symbol pedestal m1 to the eighth reserved symbol pedestal m8 and the reserved symbols are displayed. Characters G1 to G3 and the like are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm. By executing an effect having a story with these characters G1 to G3, the player can easily recognize that the continuous effect is being executed. Also, even during the continuous performance period, the player can change the background mode by operating the frame button 22. - 特許庁A detailed description of the background mode change during the continuous effect period will be given later with reference to FIGS. 290 and 292. FIG.

Next, the flow of production when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous production will be described. Figures 291 (c) and (d) are diagrams showing the flow of effects when the second special symbol variation is executed during continuous effects. In this second control example, as shown in FIG. 289(c), when the second special symbol variation is executed during execution of the first special symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 289(d), in the first special symbol is interrupted, and a special performance with a second special symbol variation is performed during the suspension period. Next, when the special effect period ends, the continuous effect period with the first special symbol is resumed.

FIG. 291(b) is a diagram showing how the continuous effect period is interrupted and the third symbol changes during the special effect period. During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 291(b), the ball on hold is displayed in red. Further, in the display area Dm, shellfish K1, shellfish K2, and shellfish K3 are displayed in a display mode with a story. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that it is the special effect execution period. Furthermore, white reserved symbols are displayed on the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5. , the continuous effect period interrupted by the special effect period is resumed.

Next, the flow of production when the second special symbol variation is executed during the continuous production period will be described with reference to FIGS. 289(c) and (d). In the second control example, if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 even during execution of the variation with the first special symbol, the variation with the second special symbol is preferentially performed. As shown in Figure 289 (c), while the continuous effect in the first special symbol is being executed, when there is a variation execution in the special figure 2, as shown in Figure 289 (d), the first special symbol The continuous performance during the execution of the variation is interrupted, and the special performance is executed during the variation execution in the second special pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 291(b), there is a variation execution in the second special symbol, and when the special effect is started, the number of pending balls is configured to change the color only during the special effect period. there is Shell-like characters K1 to K3 are displayed in the corners of the display area Dm, and a story-telling effect is executed. By configuring in this way, it becomes easy for the player to understand that the player has entered the special presentation period from the continuous presentation period, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. Further, the continuous performance with the first special symbol that has been executed is interrupted at the same time as the start period of the special performance with the second special symbol, and is restarted as soon as the special performance period ends. Specifically, the reserved balls of the third reserved symbol pedestal m3 to the fifth reserved symbol pedestal m5 are on standby to execute the interrupted continuous effect period. The variable execution of the running pedestal symbol m0 to the second reserved symbol symbol m2 during the special performance period is completed, the reserved ball of the third symbol reserved symbol pedestal m3 moves to the execution pedestal m0, and the special performance period The interrupted continuous performance period is resumed.

With reference to FIG. 290, the relationship between continuous effects and background display will be described. FIGS. 290(a) to (c) are diagrams showing the effect display mode during special symbol variation and the flow of the background display at that time. As described above, the player can change the background by operating the frame button 22 even during the continuous effect period. In the second control example, when the background mode in which the continuous effect is being executed is changed to another background mode, the normal effect for the changed background mode is displayed.

FIG. 292 is a diagram showing a display mode when the background is changed during the continuous rendering period. As shown in FIG. 292, in the display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 during the variation of the third symbol, the background mode is set to the mountain mode from the sea mode which was the period of the continuous effect. As described above, in the mountain mode, the normal effect of the mountain mode is displayed instead of the continuous effect, but when the player operates the frame button 22 and the background is changed to the sea mode again, the continuous effect for the sea is restored. . In this second control example, when the sea mode is in the continuous performance period, the display area Dmb displays "Continuous performance in the sea mode is being executed!", telling the player that the sea mode is in the continuous performance period. It is configured so that it can be easily recognized. Also, in the display area Dma, a message "Push the button to change the background" is displayed so that the player can easily recognize that the background can be changed even when the third symbol is changing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this second control example, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 are partially changed. is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 293(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 293(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example. This second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that a continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is added.

The continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is a data table for determining (determining) whether or not to perform continuous effect (FIG. 291(a)). In the winning information related process (see Z2255 in FIG. 300), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to OFF. If there is (Z5004 in FIG. 300: No), it is read out (Z5005 in FIG. 300) and used to determine execution of the continuous effect (Z5006 in FIG. 96).

In this continuous effect execution selection table 222aa, the value of one effect counter possessed by the effect counter group 223aa, the current number of pending balls, and the lottery result of the special symbol included in the winning information received this time are stored. Presence or absence of execution of continuous production is defined. Specifically, the greater the number of currently held balls, the easier it is for continuous effects to be executed. It is stipulated that the continuous effect is more likely to be executed than in the case of indicating .

By configuring in this way, it becomes easier to execute a continuous performance with a long execution period (the number of times of special symbol fluctuations to be executed), and when the continuous performance is executed, the player has a sense of expectation for a big win. can be raised. Therefore, the player can play the game for a long time with high expectations for the big win, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, when the continuous effect ends, that is, when the variable effect corresponding to the winning information determined to execute the continuous effect ends (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value of the number counter 223a is read (Z5104 in FIG. 301), and when it is determined that the read counter value is 2 or more (Z5105 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is configured to determine whether or not the continuous effect is to be executed again. Also in this case, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa (Z5109 in FIG. 301).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the continuous production even for a game ball newly winning during the execution of the continuous production, so that the frequency of executing the continuous production can be increased. In addition, since the period in which the continuous performance is executed can be made longer than the reserved upper limit number (four) of the special symbol 1, the player can be informed which reserved symbols the continuous performance is being executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend, and to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the game.

In addition, in this control example, the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is defined as described above, but other contents may be defined. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with a clock means (for example, a real-time clock (RTC)) for clocking the current time, and the rate at which the continuous effect is executed is changed in correspondence with the timing contents of the clock means. may be stipulated.

In this case, during a predetermined period (for example, one hour from 10:00 am), it is preferable that the continuous performance is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win. With this configuration, even if the same continuous performance is executed, the degree of expectation for the big win varies depending on the timing (time) at which the continuous performance is executed, so that the player can play the game early. It is possible to suppress getting tired of. Furthermore, during the above-mentioned predetermined period, a guidance and notification means for notifying the player that the continuous effect will be executed only when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and the remaining period (or elapsed period) of the above-mentioned predetermined period. It is preferable to provide a period reporting means for reporting. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the continuous performance to be executed.

In addition, a means for discriminating the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) operable by the player and a discriminating means for discriminating the game ball shooting situation (or ball entering situation) are provided. It may be specified to change the rate at which the continuous effect is executed in association with the determination result of (1), or the plurality of contents described above may be appropriately combined or each may be used individually.

Furthermore, in this control example, stop command processing (see FIG. 3017) using the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa referred to when determining whether or not to execute continuous performance in the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) However, although it is configured to determine whether or not to execute continuous production, when determining whether to execute continuous production in winning information related processing (see FIG. 300) and stop command processing (see FIG. 301) It is also possible to configure the selection table to be referred to differently. In this case, for example, the selection table referred to in the stop command process (see FIG. 301) is a special symbol jackpot when the continuous effect is executed rather than the selection table referred to in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300). It is good to specify the contents of the selection table so that the degree of expectation is high. As a result, the longer the period during which the continuous performance is continuously executed, the higher the degree of expectation for the big win, and the more the amusement of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 293(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second control example will be described. FIG. 293(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the second control example. In the second control example, in contrast to the above-described first control example, an effect counter group 223aa, a continuous effect flag 223ab, a continuous effect in progress flag 223ac, a continuous effect interruption flag 223ad, a continuous effect update area 223ae, The difference is that an effect number counter 223af, an effect setting prohibition flag 223ag, a setting prohibition release flag 223ah, a time reduction counter 223ai, a fluctuation number counter 223j, an operation invalid flag 223ak, and a state storage area 223az are added. ing.

The production counter group 223aa is composed of a plurality of production counter means. The effect counter group 223aa is a plurality of counters used for selecting a variation pattern for effect (variation pattern of the third symbol), selecting various advance notice effects, and the like. Each of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa has a range of 0 to 198 obtained from a random number generation IC (not shown) electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113. A random value is stored. The operating clock (operating frequency) of the IC for random number generation is an IC capable of operating at an operating clock (e.g., 1 MHz) at least for each performance counter, which can be updated to separate random values and execute judgment. is adopted.

The values of the plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are used by the sound lamp control device 113 to determine the effect variation pattern (the variation pattern of the third symbol), whether or not continuous effect can be executed, and the determination of various types of advance notice effect. The counter values are updated so that they are not synchronized. A plurality of counters included in the effect counter group 223aa are composed of 1-byte loop counters that are updated in the range of 0 to 149, and each time main processing 2 of the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. Every second (every 1 msec), an update process is performed so that the values are different.

In this control example, when selecting a plurality of effects based on the value of the effect counter, since a plurality of effect counters with different update values are used, a plurality of effects are selected within one main process. Even in such a case, the same counter value is referred to, and it is suppressed that the selected effects are biased. If it is desired to synchronize the aspects, the same effect counter may be used to select the effect mode.

In addition, in this control example, a plurality of counters with different counter value update patterns are used. may be configured to select With this configuration, the number of counters included in the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In this case, for example, of the updated value of the production counter, the value of the last digit, the value of the second digit, and the value obtained by multiplying the value of the first digit by the value of the second digit It is preferable to calculate each value without regularity, such as a value obtained by adding the value of the second digit.

The continuous effect flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing the continuous effect is satisfied. Specifically, in the winning information related processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 300), when it is determined to execute the continuous effect (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the stop command processing of the audio lamp control device 113 ( In FIG. 301), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5110 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 300), and the effect setting process of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) 304 Z5204) When the continuous effect setting process (Z5306 in FIG. 305) is executed, it is set to OFF (see Z5401 in FIG. 305).

That is, the continuous effect flag 223ab determines whether the continuous effect is executed based on the winning information included in the winning command output from the main controller 110 when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64. is determined, and the fact that the determination result indicates that the continuous performance is to be executed is held until the timing of setting the variation display corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol 1.例文帳に追加

In this control example, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), and the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008 in FIG. 300). ), the continuous effect is executed when the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed. When the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303) is executed in the set state, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not the continuous performance is to be started in the current variable display, and the continuous performance is performed based on the lottery result. may be configured to determine the variable display to start. By configuring in this way, the timing at which a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing at which the continuous effect is started are made different (the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64). After that, the continuous performance can be started with a variable display in which the continuous performance is not executed), and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the execution timing of the continuous performance.

Further, in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300), when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed may be changed to the continuous effect. By configuring in this way, the timing when a new game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the timing when the continuous performance is started can be made close to each other, so that the ball entering the ball to be the target of the continuous performance can be brought closer. It is possible to make the player easily comprehend. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous performance, it is possible to enter the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 enthusiastically during the fluctuation of the special symbol (during the execution of the fluctuation display), and the operation of the game can be enhanced. .

In addition, when changing the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed to a continuous effect, the display content or the elapsed period of the variable display being executed is determined, and the conditions under which the effect can be changed (for example, the third symbol display device The effect corresponding to the variable display being executed is changed to a continuous effect only when the variable display displayed in 81 has a display mode (during high-speed fluctuation) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. It should be configured as follows. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the sudden change in the effect being executed.

Further, instead of changing the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed to the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be added to the effect corresponding to the variable display being executed and displayed. In this case, it is preferable to provide a display area dedicated to the continuous effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even if the continuous performance is suddenly executed.

The continuous effect flag 223ac is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is being executed. Specifically, in the effect setting process (see Z5204 in FIG. 30300) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), the continuous effect setting process (see Z5306 in FIG. 304) is executed to set the continuous effect command for display. If it does (Z5406 in FIG. 305), it is set to ON (Z5408 in FIG. 305).

Then, it is referred to in the special effect setting process (Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (Z5505 in FIG. 306), and in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), no more When it is determined that the continuous effect will not continue (Z5106: No in FIG. 301, or Z5110: No), it is set to OFF (see Z5116 in FIG. 301).

The continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is a flag for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted, and is set to ON when the continuous effect is interrupted. Here, a brief description will be given of an event in which the continuous effect is interrupted. In this control example, the game state is a normal state (not a probability variable state or a time saving state), which is a special symbol variation that is substantially executed. configured to run. Further, in this control example, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is preferentially digested over the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is digested. It is configured so that the game property (the type of special symbol variation to be executed) is different between the probability variable state and the time saving state in which the ball is likely to enter and the normal state.

In addition, in this control example, even if the game state is normal, in order to temporarily make it easier to receive the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), part of the case where the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit , the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640a and regulating the entry of the game ball into the second ball entrance 640a is opened for a longer period (2 seconds) than usual (0.2 seconds). It is configured to execute a winning game.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640a while performing continuous performance using a plurality of pieces of winning information relating to the first special symbol, There was a case where the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol was executed with priority over the first special symbol. If such a situation occurs, the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol will be executed in spite of the fact that the continuous effect executed based on the winning information of the first special symbol is executed. There is a problem that the content of the effect being executed differs from the result of the lottery for the special symbols, which gives the player a sense of distrust.

Therefore, in this control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed while the continuous effect is being executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, and the first special symbol ( It is configured to restart the interrupted continuous performance when the variation of special figure 1) is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the content of the effect being executed and the lottery result of the special symbols are different from each other, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distrustful.

This continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set when the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON in the special effect setting process (see Z5311 in FIG. 304) for setting the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. If it is determined (Z5505 in FIG. 306: Yes), it is set to ON (Z5507 in FIG. 306). Then, when the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON, the "waiting" display (interruption display mode of FIG. 291(b)) for indicating that the continuous effect is interrupted on the third pattern display device 81 ma) is set (Z5508 in FIG. 306). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304), when the target special symbol is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (Z5301 in FIG. 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5304 in FIG. 304 ).

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the continuous effect set for the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), the first special symbol (special figure 1) is preferentially changed (lottery ) is performed when the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, the continuous production is interrupted, and the timing when the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed (special figure 2 Since it is possible to resume the continuous production that has been interrupted at the timing when the fluctuation of is completed), the fluctuation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) without being involved in the fluctuation situation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) It is possible to execute continuous production corresponding to.

In addition, when the continuous performance is interrupted based on the fact that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is changed during the execution of the continuous performance, the fact that the continuous performance is interrupted is given to the player. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable that the continuous performance is suddenly terminated, and allows the player to play while expecting the continuous performance to be resumed. be able to.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, when the continuous effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the continuous effect execution period, that is, when the frame button 22 is operated during the continuous effect execution period, the background of the display screen is changed to the "sea background". ” to another background (“mountain background”, “river background”), this area stores data for internally updating the continuous effect.

As described above with reference to FIG. 87(a), in this control example, the continuous effect is performed only when the "sea background (sea mode)" is selected as the background of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. configured to run. The background of this display screen can be variably set by the player operating the frame button 22. For example, the state in which the special symbol variation is not executed (standby state), or immediately after the start of the special symbol variation ( During high-speed fluctuation), the player operates the frame button 22 to change the background of the display screen to "sea background (sea mode)", "mountain background (mountain mode)" (see FIG. 292), or "river background ( river mode)”.

Then, as a variable effect corresponding to the set background, a variable effect dedicated to each background or a variable effect common to a plurality of backgrounds is executed. By configuring in this way, the effect mode of the variable effect for indicating the variation (lottery) result of the special symbol can be varied based on the display mode (background) that can be variably set by the player. Various performances can be provided for the game, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above, when the background of the display screen is variably set while the sea mode is being set and the sea mode exclusive variable performance (for example, continuous notice) is being executed. Then, a process of rewriting the display data relating to the variable effect is executed so that the variable effect corresponding to the background after being variably set is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Therefore, if the player erroneously operates the frame button 22 during execution of the continuous effect and switches the background of the display screen from the "sea mode" to the "mountain mode", the display data relating to the continuous effect is erased. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is operated again to switch the display screen to the "sea mode", the continuous effect is not executed, and the effect of the effect is lowered.

In order to solve such a problem, in this control example, a continuous effect update area 223ae is provided, and even if the background of the display screen is switched to other than the "sea mode" during execution of the continuous effect, the continuous effect execution data is temporarily stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae. mode", the rest of the continuous production can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuous effect disappears due to an erroneous operation by the player.

In the continuous effect update area 223ae, in the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305), after determining the effect mode of the continuous effect (Z5403, Z5404 in FIG. 305), it is determined that the background mode is not the "sea mode". If so (Z5405 in FIG. 305: No), display data relating to the determined effect mode is stored (see Z5409 in FIG. 305).

Then, when the background mode is switched to the "sea mode" (Z2871 in FIG. 308: Yes) in the effect return process (see FIG. 308) of the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (see FIG. 307), the The stored information is referred to, and a display effect command corresponding to the stored information is set (Z2874 in FIG. 308). After that, when the continuous effect ends, the information stored in the area (display data indicating the mode of effect) is erased (see Z5310 in FIG. 304).

The number-of-effects counter 223af is a counter for indicating a period during which continuous effects are executed (the number of special figure fluctuations). This effect number counter 223af, when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the received winning command is set (Z5010 in FIG. 300). Then, in the effect setting process (see FIG. 304) of the variable display setting process 2 (see FIG. 303), when it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (Z5305 in FIG. 304: Yes), continuous effect is set. A continuous effect setting process for is executed (Z5306 in FIG. 304).

The effect count counter 223af is decremented by 1 (Z5407 in FIG. 305) each time the continuous effect setting process (see FIG. 305) is executed. With this configuration, the period until the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous effect is executed by the winning information related processing (see FIG. 300), that is, the continuous effect flag 223ab is turned on. The continuous performance can be executed by using the period from the variable display executed in the set state to the execution of the variable display corresponding to the winning command determined to execute the continuous performance.

In this control example, the above-described period is used to execute the continuous effect, but other periods may be set as the period for executing the continuous effect. Continuous production may be started by varying the production mode of the variable display being executed at the timing determined to be executed, or the first special symbol (special figure 1 ) is changed twice, the continuous effect may be executed. Further, in a state where the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON, when setting a new display mode of the variable display (when executing the variable display setting process 2), it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect. Execution determination means may be provided, and the continuous performance may be executed when the execution determination means determines that the continuous performance is to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the continuous performance is started, and it is possible to provide an unexpected performance.

The effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is a flag for preventing a new continuous effect from being set during execution of the continuous effect, and is set to ON during the period during which the continuous effect is being executed. This effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011 in FIG. 300) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) (Z5007 in FIG. 300: Yes). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON, the process (processes of Z5005 to Z5007 in FIG. 300) for determining whether or not to execute continuous effects in the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new continuous effect from being set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied by starting a new continuous effect while the player is watching the progress of the continuous effect. Then, in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), when it is determined that the continuous effect has ended (the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON) (Z5102 in FIG. 301: Yes), it is set to OFF. (Z5103 in FIG. 301).

In addition, in this control example, determination of whether or not to execute the continuous effect is made at the timing when a new winning command is received, that is, at the timing at which the winning information related process (see FIG. 300) is executed, and the continuous effect is executed. Even when it is determined that the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5102: Yes in FIG. 301) in the timing of receiving the stop command for termination, that is, in the stop command processing (Z2259 in FIG. 301) configured to run. Therefore, in the stop command process (see FIG. 301), it is also set to ON (Z5111 in FIG. 301) when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed.

The time saving counter 223ai is a counter for grasping the remaining number of times the time saving state is set (remaining fluctuation number of special symbols) when the time saving state is set as the game state. This time saving counter 223ai is set to a value (100 in this control example) corresponding to the number of time saving times to be set when a state command indicating that the game state has shifted to the time saving state is received from the main controller 110. , In the stop command process (see Figure 301), when it is determined that the current gaming state is in the time saving (Z5101 in Figure 301: Yes) is executed during time saving process (see Figure 302) each time it is executed 1 is subtracted (see Z5151 in FIG. 302).

Then, in the time-saving process (see FIG. 302), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223ai is 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302), and when it is determined to be 0 (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), fluctuation 5 is set to the value of the number counter 223aj.

The fluctuation number counter 223aj is a counter for grasping the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the time saving state ends. In this control example, when the game state is the normal state and the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is performed, the special effect (see FIG. 291 (b)) is configured to be performed. ing. This is because in the normal state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuates. It is intended to give benefits and grants. However, when the game state is a time-saving state, that is, a state where the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 (a state where the electric accessory 640a is easy to open), the reservation of the special figure 2 is acquired, There is a case where the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to the reservation (special figure 2 reservation) is executed in the normal state after the end of the time saving. If the special performance is executed even in such a case, the special performance becomes frequent after the end of the time saving, and it becomes difficult to give the special feeling of the special performance to the player.

To solve the above-described problem, this control example is configured so that the special effect is not executed in the variable display of the second special symbol executed within a predetermined period after the end of the time saving. Specifically, a determination process is performed to determine whether the number of fluctuations in the special symbol executed after the end of the time saving has reached a predetermined number of times (5 times in this control example), and the predetermined number of times (5 times) has not been reached. It is configured not to set a special effect when it is determined that As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the special performance frequently occurs after the end of the time saving.

In addition, in this control example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed after the end of the time saving is 5 times, that is, the value larger than the upper limit (4) of the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set a predetermined number of times Because it is set as , even if the time saving state ends with the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern (special figure 2) at the upper limit, a special effect is executed by the special figure 2 holding ball acquired during the time saving state. However, conditions other than the above-described control example may be set as conditions for not executing the special effect, for example, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) A value (for example, 3) smaller than the upper limit (4) may be set as the predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, if the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit at the end of time saving, special performance will be executed, so that the player will willingly hold the ball of special figure 2. It can be made to accumulate, and the operation of a game can be improved.

In addition, in this control example, the condition using the number of fluctuations of the special design is set as the condition for not setting the special effect, but other conditions may be set, for example, after the time saving state ends A measuring means for measuring the elapsed time may be provided, and the fact that the elapsed time measured by the measuring means does not exceed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set as a condition for not setting the special performance. By setting the conditions based on the elapsed time in this way, for example, if the game is ended immediately after the time saving state ends (the time saving state ends and the game is played without changing the special symbol after it becomes normal is finished), it is possible to prevent the execution of the special effect from being restricted for the game played by the next player.

In addition, game state determination means for determining the game state at the timing when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is provided, and the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time saving state by the game state determination means. When it is determined that the ball has hit, it may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of the special effect as the variable display for the hit ball.

This fluctuation number counter 223aj is, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is 0 in the time saving process (see FIG. 302) (Z5152 in FIG. 302: Yes), the execution of the special effect is restricted (prohibited) Special A value (5 in this control example) indicating the number of times of pattern variation is set (Z5153 in FIG. 302), and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display setting process 2 (see FIG. 99) is executed. Then, in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) for setting the special effect, the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is referred to, and if it is determined that the value is not 0 (Z5502 in FIG. 312: No) , the effect mode of the normal effect is set without setting the effect mode of the special effect (Z5510 in FIG. 312).

The operation invalidation flag 223ak is a flag for indicating a period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated, and is set to ON during the period during which the operation for switching the background of the display screen is invalidated. In this control example, as described above, the special effect can be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol, and the background of the display screen can be switched during the period when this special effect is being executed. It is configured so that By configuring in this way, the player may erroneously operate the frame button 22 during the period when the effect (special effect) that is difficult to execute is being executed. It is possible to prevent the background of the display screen from being switched while the special performance is being executed.

This operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON when the effect mode of the special effect is set in the special effect setting process (see FIG. 306) (Z5504 in FIG. 306), and the first special symbol in the effect setting process (FIG. 304) (Special Figure 1) When setting the variable effect (Z5301 in Figure 304: Yes), it is set to OFF (Z5302 in Figure 304). While the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON, the processing for changing the background of the display screen (the processing of Z2803 to Z2852 in FIG. 307) is executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (see FIG. 103). Skipped.

The state storage area 223az is an area for storing state information indicating the current game state based on a state command output from the main controller 110 . Specifically, when it is determined in the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 299) that a status command has been received (Z2256 in FIG. 299: Yes), the status information is stored (Z2257 in FIG. 299). In this control example, each information stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be erased when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. 10, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main controller 110 outputs a state command indicating the current gaming state. etc.), the game state can be appropriately determined on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the second control example>
Next, control processing executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 297. FIG. In this second control example, special symbol variation processing (Figure 244) is special symbol variation processing 2 (Figure 294), special symbol 1 variation start processing (Figure 246) and special symbol 2 variation start processing (Figure 247) are special In the symbol variation start process 2 (Fig. 295), the starting winning process (Fig. 248) is changed to the starting winning process 2 (Fig. 296), and the look-ahead process (Fig. 249) is changed to the look-ahead process 2 (Fig. 297). This is the main difference.

With reference to FIG. 294, special symbol variation processing 2 (Z154) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 294 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (Z154). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (Z256: FIG. 295) in the second control example, the processing of Z203 to Z214 is the processing of Z330 to Z340 for the special symbol variation processing (Z104: FIG. 244) in the first control example. It differs in that it has been changed. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this special symbol variation process 2 (Z256: FIG. 295), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit (Z201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (Z201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not occurring (Z201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (Z202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. Otherwise (Z202: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is obtained (Z330).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the obtained special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 1 or more (Z331). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z331: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (Z332), and change the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter by calculation. A pending ball number command indicating the value (N2) of 203e is set (Z333). According to the pending ball number command set here, it is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (see FIG. 258), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z333, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z265). In the process of Z265, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340).

On the other hand, in the process of Z331, when it is determined that the acquired value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (Z331: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (Z335).

Next, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 1 or more (Z336). If it is determined to be 1 or more (Z336: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (Z337), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by calculation A pending ball number command indicating a value is set (Z338). The command for the number of pending balls set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (Z1001) of the main processing (see FIG. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of Z338, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (Z339). In the process of Z339, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, special symbol variation start processing 2 for starting variation display on the first symbol display device is executed (Z340). Incidentally, the special symbol variation start process 2 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z336, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter is 0 (Z336: No), this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 295, special symbol variation start processing 2 (Z340: FIG. 295) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in this second control example will be described. In the special symbol variation start process 2 (Z340: Figure 295) in the second control example, special symbol 1 variation start process (Z209: Figure 246) and special symbol 2 variation start process (214: Figure 247) in the first control example The difference is that the processing of is collectively performed. Since the contents of the processing are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 296, start winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the second control example will be described. In the starting winning process 2 (Z155: FIG. 296) in the second control example, Z308 and Z316 are not executed with respect to the starting winning process (Z105: FIG. 248) in the first control example. The difference is that the processing is collectively executed by the processing of Z360. Since the contents of the processing are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 297, the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), which is one process in the starting winning process 2 (Z155) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 297 is a flow chart showing the contents of this prefetching process 2 (Z360).

In the look-ahead process 2 (Z360), first, it is determined whether or not there is new winning information (Z361). If it is determined that there is no new prize winning information (Z361: No), this process ends. If it is determined that there is new winning information (Z361: Yes), special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, and variation type corresponding to this winning from the special symbol reserved ball storage area Each value of the counter CS1 is obtained (Z362). Next, among the determination results defined in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, the winning determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning random number counter C1 is obtained (Z363). Next, among the determination results defined in the jackpot type selection table 202d, the winning type determination result corresponding to the value of the acquired special winning type counter C2 is acquired (Z364).

Next, among the determination results defined in the stop type selection table, the stop type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (Z365). Next, among the determination results defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation type determination result corresponding to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired (Z366). Winning information including hit determination result information indicating the acquired hit determination result, hit type information indicating the hit type determination result, stop type information indicating the stop type determination result, and variation type information for indicating the variation type determination result. A command is set (Z367), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 298 to 308, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107), which is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, is performed in contrast to the first control example. The main points are that the process 2 (Z2151) is changed from the command determination process (Z2113) to the command determination process 2 (Z2152), and the variable display setting process (Z2114) is changed to the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). This is the difference.

Command determination processing 2 (Z2152) in main processing 2 executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 299 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 2 (Z2152).

In command determination processing 2 (Z2152), it is first determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (Z2201). If it is determined that the command has been received (Z2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2251), the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (Z2252), and this process ends. do. Since the processing of Z2203 to Z2207 is the same as that of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, when it is determined in the process of Z2206 that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (Z2206: No), it is determined whether or not winning command information has been received (Z2253). When the winning information command is received (Z2253: Yes), the winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2254). Next, the winning information related process (Z2255) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the winning information related process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of Z2253, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (Z2253: No), it is determined whether or not the status command has been received (Z2256). When it is determined that the state command has been received (Z2256: Yes), the state information indicating the gaming state corresponding to the received state command is stored in the state storage area 223az (Z2257), and this processing ends.

In the process of Z2256, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (Z2256: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received (Z2258).If it is determined that the stop command has been received (Z2258: Yes), stop. Execute command processing (Z2259). Details of the stop command processing (Z2259) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the stop display of the third symbol is set (Z2260), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2258, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received (Z2258: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 300, the winning information related process (Z2255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 300 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning information related process (Z2255).

The winning information related process (Z2255) first stores the information of the received winning information command in the corresponding winning information storage area 223f (Z5001). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read out (Z5002). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003). If it is not equal to or greater than 2 (Z5003: No), this processing ends.

In the process of Z5003, when the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5003: Yes), it is determined whether the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is ON (Z5004). If it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is ON (Z5004: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is off (Z5004), the continuous effect execution selection table 222aa is read (Z5505), and the execution of the continuous effect is determined (Z5006). Next, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous effect (Z5007). If the continuous effect is not to be executed (Z5007: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the continuous effect is to be executed (Z5007: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5008), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5009), and the value of the read counter is It is set as the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af (Z5010). Next, the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5011), and this process is terminated.

With reference to FIG. 301, the stop command process (Z2259), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (Z2152) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 301 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop command processing (Z2259).

In the stop command process (Z2259), first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is in time saving (Z5101). When it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z5101: Yes), the time saving process (Z5115) is executed, and this process ends. The details of the processing during time saving (Z5115) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of Z5101, if it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5101: No), it is determined whether the setting prohibition release flag 223ah provided in the RAM 223 is ON (Z5102). If the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is off (Z5102: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the effect prohibition release flag ah is ON (Z5102: Yes), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag and the setting prohibition release flag ah are set OFF (Z5103), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a (Z5104). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more (Z5105). If it is determined that the number is not equal to or greater than 2 (Z5105: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5105, if it is determined that the value of the read counter is 2 or more (Z5105: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is 2 or more, winning information Read is executed from the storage area 223f (Z5106). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information for a big hit (Z5107). When it is determined that there is no jackpot winning (Z5107: No), the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to OFF (Z5116), and this process ends. When it is determined that there is jackpot winning information (Z5107: Yes), the continuous performance execution selection table 222aa provided in the ROM 222 is read (Z5108), and the execution of continuous performance is determined (Z5109). After executing the processing of Z5109, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute a continuous effect (Z5110). If it is not the timing to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: No), the process of Z5116 described above is executed, and this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is time to execute the continuous effect (Z5110: Yes), the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to ON (Z5111), and the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is read (Z5112). Next, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a corresponding to the big hit is set as the value of the effect number counter 223af (Z5113), the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5114), and this processing is executed. finish.

With reference to Drawing 302, processing during time saving (Z5115) which is one processing in stop command processing (Z2259) performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 in this 2nd example of control is explained. FIG. 302 is a flow chart showing the contents of this time-saving process (Z5115).

In the time saving process (Z5115), first, the value of the time saving counter 223ai provided in the RAM 223 is subtracted by 1 (Z5151). Next, it is determined whether the value changed by the calculation is 0 (Z5152). If it is determined that the changed value is 0 (Z5152: Yes), the value of the variation number counter aj is set to 5 (Z5153), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 223ai is greater than 0 in the process of Z5152 (Z5153: No), the process of Z5153 is skipped and this process ends.

With reference to FIG. 303, the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153), which is one process in the main process 2 (FIG. 298) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 303 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153). The variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) in the second control example differs from the variable display setting process (Z2114) in the first control example in that processes Z5204 to Z5208 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z5202, the extracted variation pattern is acquired (Z5203). Next, effect setting processing (Z5204) is executed. Details of the effect setting process (Z5204) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a display variation pattern command is set (Z5205), the data in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted (Z5206), and it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207). If it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is greater than 1 (Z5207: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj (Z5208). In the process of Z5207, when it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5207: No), the process of Z5208 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z5209.

With reference to FIG. 304, the effect setting process (Z5204), which is one process in the variable display setting process 2 (Z2153) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 304 is a flow chart showing the contents of this effect setting process (Z5204).

In the effect setting process (Z5204), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301). If it is a change in the first special symbol (Z5301: Yes), the operation invalid flag 223ak provided in the RAM 223 is set to OFF (Z5302). Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303). When it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5303: Yes), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5304). On the other hand, in the process of Z5303, when it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to OFF (Z5303: Yes), the process of Z5304 described above is skipped.

After executing the processing of Z5304, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is greater than 0 (Z5305). If it is determined to be greater than 0 (Z5305: Yes), a continuous effect setting process (Z5306) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5305, when the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is 0 (Z5305: No), a variation pattern without continuous effects is determined (Z5307). Next, it is determined whether or not the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308). When the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to OFF (Z5308: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the effect setting prohibition flag 223ag is set to ON (Z5308: Yes), the setting prohibition release flag 223ah is set to ON (Z5309). Next, the information stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is cleared (Z5310), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z5301, when it is determined that the current variation is not the variation in the first special symbol (Z5301: No), special effect setting processing (Z5311) is executed. Details of the special effect setting process (Z5311) will be described later with reference to FIG.

With reference to Drawing 305, continuous production setting processing (Z5306) which is one processing in production setting processing (Z5204) performed by MPU221 of sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 305 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect setting process (Z5306).

In the continuous effect setting process (Z5306), first, the continuous effect flag 223ab is set to OFF (Z5401). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is 1 (Z5402). When it is determined that the value of the effect number counter 223af is 1 (Z5402: Yes), the continuous effect final mode corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is determined (Z5403). On the other hand, when the value of the effect number counter 223af is other than 1 (Z5402: No), the continuous effect continuation mode is determined (Z5404), and the process of Z5405 is executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the background mode is currently set to sea mode (Z5405). If it is determined that the setting is the sea mode (Z5405: Yes), a display continuous effect command for indicating the determined effect mode is set (Z5406). ), the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5408), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the set mode is not the sea mode (Z5405: No), the determined effect mode is stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae (Z5409), and a display notification command indicating that the continuous effect is on standby is issued. Set (Z5410). After that, the processing of Z5407 to Z5408 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 306, the special effect setting process (Z5311), which is one process of the effect setting process (Z5204) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example, will be described. FIG. 306 is a flow chart showing the contents of the special effect setting process (Z5311).

In the special effect setting process (Z5311), first, it is determined whether or not the current game state is during working hours (Z5501). If it is determined that the time is not being shortened (Z5501: No), it is determined whether the value of the variation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223aj is 0 (Z5502: Yes), the effect mode of the special effect corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5503), and the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON. (Z5504).

Next, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON (Z5505). If it is set to ON (Z5505: Yes), then it is determined whether the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5506). When it is set to OFF (Z5506: No), the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON (Z5507), and a display interruption command is set (Z5508). Next, a display effect command corresponding to the determined effect mode is set (Z5509), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Z5501, if it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z5501: Yes), or in the process of Z5502, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation counter 223aj is not 0 (Z5502: No), The production mode of the normal production corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is set (Z5510), the processing of Z5509 described above is executed, and this processing ends. Also, in the process of Z5505, if it is determined that the continuous effect in progress flag 223ac is turned off (Z5505: No), or if it is determined that the continuous effect interruption flag 223ad is set to ON in the process of Z5506 (Z5506: Yes), skip the processing of Z5507 to Z5508 described above, execute the processing of Z5509, and end this processing.

Frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (Z2151) in the main processing executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 307 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 2 (Z2151). This second control example differs from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) of the first control example in that the processing of Z2851 and the processing of Z2852 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z2851, it is determined whether or not the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851). When it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is off (Z2851: No), the same processing as Z2803-Z2804 of the first control example is executed, and then the effect return processing (Z2852) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 308, an effect return process (Z2852) which is one process in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 2 (Z2151) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example. will be explained. FIG. 308 is a flow chart showing the contents of the production return process (Z2852).

In the effect return processing (Z2852), first, it is determined whether or not the set background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871). If the background mode is not "sea mode" (Z2871: No), this process is terminated. When it is determined that the background mode is the "sea mode" (Z2871: Yes), the effect mode stored in the continuous effect update area 223ae is read out (Z2872). Next, it is determined whether or not there is stored information (Z2873). If there is no stored information (Z2873: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that there is stored information (Z2873: Yes), a display effect command corresponding to the stored effect mode is set (Z2874), and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 307, the description continues. Effect return processing (Z2852) is executed, then sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the operation invalid flag 223ak is set to ON (Z2851: Yes), sensor input processing (Z2813) is executed, and this processing ends.

<Third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 309 to 312, the above-described third control example will be described. In the above-described third control example, when the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started while the continuous performance is being executed, the continuous performance being executed is interrupted, and the variation of the special figure 2 A configuration is used in which the continuous performance that has been interrupted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol after the end of the is resumed. As a result, the continuous performance can be executed in correspondence with the variation of the first special symbol, and the continuous performance can be enjoyed to the end.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, when the continuous effect is interrupted, the continuous effect is always restarted after the lapse of a predetermined period (after the special figure 2 fluctuation ends), so whether the continuous effect is restarted Since it is not possible to make the player's heart beat faster, there has been a demand for further enhancing the presentation effect. On the other hand, in this third control example, based on the game content (the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2) and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous production, when the continuous production is interrupted It is configured to determine whether or not to resume the continuous performance in the middle, and to resume the continuous performance based on the determination result. By configuring in this way, when the continuous performance is interrupted, it is possible to predict whether or not the continuous performance will be resumed while enjoying the special performance executed as the variable performance of the special figure 2. You can increase the effect.

Furthermore, in the third control example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 to be the target of the continuous performance is a big hit, the continuous performance is configured to be easily restarted. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting the continuous performance to be resumed. Further, in the third control example, the smaller the number of special figure 2 fluctuations (the number of times of special performance execution) executed while the continuous performance is interrupted, the easier it is to resume the continuous performance. As a result, when the period from the interruption of the continuous performance to the restart is short, the continuous performance can be easily restarted, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

On the other hand, when a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the object of the continuous performance, is not successful, the player does not have unnecessary expectations for the big win. In order to do so, it is configured to make it difficult for the continuous performance to be restarted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this modified example will be described with reference to FIG. < Figure 309 >It is the typical figure which shows the contents of RAM223 of sound ramp control device 113 in this deformation example typically. In this third control example, in addition to the RAM223 of the second control example described above, the difference is that a special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is added. Other elements are the same as those in the second control example, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol. 1 is added (Z5551 in FIG. 312), and the value of the counter is referred to in the continuous effect return process (see FIG. 311) in the effect setting process 2 (see FIG. 310) (Z5602 in FIG. 311). In the process of Z5602, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is smaller than 3 (Z5602 of FIG. 311: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (of FIG. 311 Z5603). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is 3 or more (Z5602 in FIG. 311: No), that is, while the continuous production is interrupted, the second special symbol variation is executed 3 times or more. If so, it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a big hit in the winning information corresponding to the first special symbol (Z5605 in FIG. 311), and if it is determined that there is not (Z5605 in FIG. 311: Yes) , the value of the effect number counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606 in FIG. 311), and the processing of Z5603 described above is executed.

That is, in the continuous production return process (see FIG. 311), when the interrupted continuous production is restored, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 executed during the interruption of the continuous production is a predetermined number of times (three times) or more. , Based on the lottery result included in the winning information of the special figure 1 at that time, it is determined whether or not to restart the continuous performance, and when the performance result of the continuous performance is out, the continuous performance is restarted. However, since this only disappoints the player, the value of the performance number counter 223af is set to 0 so that the continuous performance is not restarted. As a result, when a long period of time has passed since the continuous performance was interrupted and the lottery result of the special figure 1, which is the target of the continuous performance, is not successful, the player is given a sense of unnecessary expectation for the big win. In addition, when the continuous performance is restarted, expectations for a big win can be made, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

<Regarding control processing by the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to FIGS. 310 to 312, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, the content of the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304), which is one process in the variable effect setting process 2 (Z2153: FIG. 303), is partially changed with respect to the second control example. Mainly different. Other processes are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Effect setting process 3 (Z5204), which is one process of the variable display setting executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example, will be described with reference to FIG. Effect setting process 3 (Z5204: FIG. 310) in the third control example differs from the effect setting process (Z5204: FIG. 304) in the second control example in that the process of Z5310 is not executed and the special effect process ) and the addition of continuous effect return processing (Z5351). Other processing is the same as in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The continuous effect return process (Z5351) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the contents of the continuous effect return process (Z5351).

In the continuous production return process (Z5351), first, the reading of the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is executed (Z5601). Next, it is determined whether the value of the read special figure 2 variation counter is less than 3 (Z5602). When it is determined that it is greater than 3 (Z5602: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is set to 0 (Z5603), and this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223ba is less than 3 (Z5602: No), the winning information corresponding to the special figure 1 stored in the winning information storage area 223f is executed. (Z5604). Next, it is determined whether or not there is a win in the read win information (Z5605). When it is determined that there is no winning (Z5605: No), the value of the number-of-effects counter 223af is set to 0 (Z5606), then the process of Z5603 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z5605, when it is determined that there is a win (Z5605: Yes), the process of Z5603 is executed, and this process ends.

The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. The special effect setting process 2 (Z5320: Figure 312) in the third control example executes the process of Z5504 for the special effect setting process (Z5311) in the second control example, and then the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 223ba The difference is that a process of adding 1 to the value (Z5551) is added. Other processing is the same processing as in the second control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 to 324. FIG. The fourth control example is different from the above-described control examples in that it has adjusting means for allowing the player to adjust the sound volume of the pachinko machine 10 .

First, with reference to FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example. As shown in FIG. 313, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a, right volume button 23b) for adjusting the volume are provided. They are different and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

Here, the real-time clock (RTC) 292 provided in the audio ramp control device 113 will be explained. The RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and consists of a real-time clock capable of measuring the current time. This RTC 292 has an input/output port, a device control section, and a register. Also, the RTC 292 is connected to a power supply for RTC. This power supply for RTC is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 292 different from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC 292 even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. For example, a button type battery is used as the RTC power supply 353, and is configured to be able to supply power to the RTC 292 for at least three years.

An input/output port and a register are connected to the device control unit of the RTC 292 . The input/output port is interconnected with the audio lamp controller 113 . The device control unit controls the register to perform various controls such as measuring the current time and writing data.

A register is a storage area in which data can be temporarily stored and operations can be performed on the stored data. The register includes at least a clock register and a time information storage area.

The clock register is a register for clocking the current time, and the register value is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 1/4096 seconds). Based on the clock information clocked in the clock register, it is determined whether or not it is the execution period of the time presentation.

In this embodiment, based on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the power is turned on, the value of the clock register (clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area of the RAM 223. ) or to store the clock information stored in the time information storage area. That is, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is depressed, the clock information stored in the time information storage area is stored in the power-on time storage area. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without pressing the RAM erase switch 122, the value of the clock register (clock information corresponding to the current time clocked by the RTC 292) is stored in the input time storage area. .

As a result, the pachinko hall clerk turns on the power all at once without pressing the RAM erase switch 122 of each pachinko machine 10 at the opening time of the hall, etc., so that each pachinko machine 10 can grasp the elapsed time since the power was turned on. can be matched. Therefore, in each pachinko machine 10, the execution period of the time presentation can be matched. On the other hand, if the power to some of the pachinko machines 10 is cut off during the opening hours of the hall (for example, to cancel an error), when the power is turned on again, the RAM erase switch 122 must be depressed. By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the clock information stored in the time information storage area can be stored in the input time storage area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution timing of the time performance from being shifted between the pachinko machine 10 whose power supply is cut off and the other pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Next, with reference to FIGS. 314 and X, a display screen regarding volume adjustment displayed on the third pattern display device 81 will be described. Fig. 314(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, and Fig. 314(b) is a game not being played. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen (customer waiting screen) of the third symbol display device 81 in the standby state, and X(a) is a special symbol variation executed after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. X(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display screen during the first special symbol variation after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. be.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A comment "Please wait for a while" is displayed as the display mode S1 during recovery, and a volume gauge S2 for indicating the currently set volume is displayed. This volume gauge S2 is formed by a horizontally long gauge that visually displays the current volume and a set value display that numerically indicates the current volume on the right side of the gauge. 1” is displayed, and the hatched area corresponding to the set value “1” is displayed on the gauge. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the setting value "1" is set as the initial value of the volume setting value when the power is turned on.

Next, as shown in FIG. 314(b), when the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b is pressed while the normal customer waiting screen is displayed, the volume gauge S2 and the volume switching display S3 are displayed. be. The volume switching display S3 includes a "switch" display indicating that the volume can be switched, a volume decrease display mode S3a indicating that the volume decreases when the left volume button 23a is pressed, and a volume decrease display mode S3a which indicates that the volume decreases when the right volume button 23b is pressed. and a volume increase display mode S3b indicating that the volume is increased. The volume of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted by pressing the left volume button 23a and the right volume button 23b while the volume switching display S3 is being displayed.

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, when performing a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an act of illegally manipulating the control contents of the main control device 110 to aim for a big win), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once. Some turn off and cheat. In order to make it easier to detect such fraudulent actions, there is a countermeasure that emits a loud sound when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

However, there are many pachinko machines 10 in recent years that temporarily emit a loud sound as a method of enhancing the performance effect. There was a problem that the store clerk at the amusement arcade would miss hearing. On the other hand, in the fourth control example, from the minimum value of the setting range of the volume that can be variably set by the player, from the time when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the first special symbol variation is completed. It is also configured to output a small sound. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a game machine that normally emits a loud sound during a game emits an unnecessarily small sound, giving a sense of incongruity compared to the surrounding game machines. It can be made easy to be found by a store clerk in the game arcade.

Further, in this control example, since the player is not allowed to adjust the sound volume from when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the first special symbol variation is completed, illegal It is possible to prevent the player who performed the action from adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10 so as to output the same volume as the surrounding pachinko machines 10 by operating the volume button 23 after the power is turned on.

Specifically, as shown in X(a), on the customer waiting screen after the power is turned on, the same volume gauge S2 as in FIG. Configure. In this way, although a volume smaller than the volume setting value "1" is internally output, by displaying the volume gauge S2 corresponding to the setting value "1" on the display screen, an illegal It is possible to prevent the player performing the action from seeing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and perceiving that the pachinko machine 10 has anti-fraud measures.

Similarly, as shown in X(b), even if the volume button 23 is pressed during the special symbol fluctuation in the first rotation after the power is turned on (the volume output is smaller than the set value "1"). , the volume switching display S3 is not displayed, and the volume setting value cannot be changed by operating the volume button 23 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 316 to 318, the electrical configuration in this fourth control example will be described. The same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the control examples described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example. The control examples described above are different from each other in that volume buttons 23 (left volume button 23a and right volume button 23b) are provided, but otherwise are the same.

Next, referring to FIG. 317(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 317(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the fourth control example differs greatly from the ROMs of the above-described control examples in that a volume table 222ca is provided. Other elements are the same.

The volume table 222ca is a data table that defines volume setting values that can be set by operating the volume button 23 . Here, the contents of the volume table 222ca will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 318 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the volume table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 318, in the volume table 222ca, in addition to the set values (set values “1” to “4”) that can be set by operating the volume button 23, a predetermined condition after power-on is established. A set value (set value "A") that is set when the device is on is defined, and a predetermined set value is set according to the state.

Specifically, the set value "A" is set until the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) of the first rotation after the power is turned on is completed. When the set value "A" is set, a sound with a loudness of 15 db (decibel) is output. When the set value "1" is set by operating the volume button 23, a sound with a loudness of 30 db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "2" is set, a loud sound of 75 db (decibel) is output. When the set value "3" is set, a sound with a loudness of 85db (decibel) is output, and when the set value "4" is set, a sound with a loudness of 95db (decibel) is output. A sound is output.

In this control example, the set value "1" is set as the initial value after the power is turned on. For example, a flag that is set to ON only when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for the first time after shipment is provided, and when the flag is set to ON, the set value "3" is set as the initial value. Alternatively, the time when the power is turned on may be discriminated, and a different setting value may be set as the initial value based on the discrimination result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. In the third control example, a set volume storage area 223ca, a volume operation invalid flag 223cb, and a volume change waiting flag 223cc are added to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example described above. They are different in that respect. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The set sound volume storage area 223ca is an area for storing (storing) the set sound volume currently set, and is set in the initial sound volume setting process (see FIG. 320) of the startup process 4 (see FIG. 319). The set value is stored (Z6003, Z6004 in FIG. 320). Also, the setting value set in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) of the main process 4 (see FIG. 321) of the sound lamp control device 113 is stored (Z6106 in FIG. 322).

The volume operation disable flag 223cb is a flag for indicating a period during which the change in volume (change in set value) based on the operation of the volume button 23 is disabled. change) is disabled. This volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set when it is determined in the initial volume setting process (see FIG. 116) that the RTC time is during business hours (for example, from 10:00 am to 10:00 pm) (Z6002 in FIG. 320: Yes), it is set to ON (Z6005 in FIG. 320) and referred to in the volume setting process (see FIG. 322) (Z6107 in FIG. 322). If it is determined that it is set to ON in the processing of Z6107 (see Z6107 in FIG. 322), the volume gauge S2 (see FIG. 314(a)) is displayed without displaying the volume switching display S3 (see FIG. 314(b)). ) is set (Z6110 in FIG. 322). Then, it is set to off (Z5122 in FIG. 324) in the volume-related processing (see FIG. 324) executed in stop command processing 4 (FIG. 323). That is, when the special symbol variation is stopped and the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON, it is set to OFF.

The volume change waiting flag 223cc is a flag for indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23, and is set to ON when the volume can be adjusted. It is. In the third control example, when adjusting the volume of the pachinko machine 10, first, it is necessary to press the volume button 23 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the volume switching display S3. The volume is adjusted by operating the volume button 23 (the left volume button 23a or the right volume button 23b) while the volume switching display S3 is displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the volume of the pachinko machine 10 from being changed when the volume button 23 is erroneously pressed during a game.

In addition, when the control state of the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by executing the power-on operation with the RAM clear switch 122 operated (depressed state) at the time of power-on, the maximum A sound effect indicating that the RAM has been cleared may be output at a volume or a volume higher than the maximum volume set by operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent fraud such as illegally executing RAM clearing and aiming for a winning random value.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured to output the game sound at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation until one variation at the time of power-on is completed. When the special symbols are variably displayed at a volume lower than the minimum volume set by operation, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to output a sound such as BGM or a sound effect (audio for performance), and the volume is set to the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加may be displayed, and the volume may be maintained and output until the player operates the volume button 23 . By configuring in this way, when a game is started at the opening of the amusement arcade after the power is turned on, the sound is output according to the previous player's volume setting (the previous day's volume setting), resulting in a high volume. It is possible to suppress the problem that the player is surprised by being output in . Furthermore, by setting the volume lower than the minimum volume, the player can be made aware of the low volume while suppressing harm to the player, and the volume can be adjusted by operating the volume button 23. It can be made aware that it is configured. Note that the volume setting screen may be displayed by switching the volume to a level lower than the minimum volume by switching to the demo screen regardless of when the power is turned on. Furthermore, after the game is started (variation of the special symbols starts), the volume button 23 is not operated and the setting of the volume smaller than the minimum volume is continued, the changed special symbols The display color (volume pattern and volume button (volume up with right operation, volume down with left operation) pattern) on the volume setting screen is variable depending on the winning lottery result and the pending memory, but depending on the lottery result (prefetching result) It may be configured so that the degree of expectation for winning is notified by letting the player win. By constructing in this way, it is possible to enjoy a game with a quiet volume until a change or storage with a high degree of expectation is made, and to increase the volume at the timing when the degree of expectation becomes high.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the fourth control example>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 319 to Z324. In the fourth control example, compared to the first control example, initial volume setting processing (Z2051) is added to the startup processing, and volume setting processing (Z2171) and sound editing/output processing (Z2109) are added to the main processing. The main differences are the addition of processing and the addition of volume-related processing (Z5120) to the stop command processing, which is one of the processing in the command determination processing.

Referring to FIG. 319, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The startup process (FIG. 319) in the fourth control example differs from the startup process (FIG. 275) in the first control example in that an initial volume setting process (Z2051) is added. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 320, the initial sound volume setting (Z2051), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 319) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 320 is a flow chart showing the contents of this initial volume setting (Z2051).

In the initial volume setting, first, the RTC calculation time is read (Z6001). Next, it is determined whether it is during business hours (Z6002). If it is determined that it is not during business hours (Z6002: No), the set value 2 is read from the volume table 222ca provided in the ROM 222, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca provided in the RAM 223 (Z6003), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is during business hours (Z6004), the set value 1 is read from the volume table 222ca, stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6004), and then the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON. (Z6005), this processing ends.

Main processing 4 executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 321 . 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of main processing 4. FIG. The main processing (FIG. 321) in the fourth control example differs from the main processing (FIG. 258) in the second control example in that volume setting processing (Z2171) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 322, the volume setting process (Z2171), which is one process of the main process 4 (FIG. 321) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing the contents of this volume setting process (Z2171).

In the volume setting process (Z2171), first, it is determined whether or not the volume button has been operated (Z6101). If it is determined that the volume button has not been operated (Z6101), this processing ends. If the volume button has been operated (Z6101: Yes), it is determined whether the volume change standby flag 223cc provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z6102). If it is determined that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6102: Yes), the set value corresponding to the operation content is read from the volume table 222ca (Z6103). Next, a display volume change command for displaying a volume gauge corresponding to the read set value is set (Z6104). Next, an audio setting command for indicating the read setting value is set (Z6105), the read setting value is stored in the set volume storage area 223ca (Z6106), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z6102 that the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to OFF (Z6102: No), it is determined whether the volume operation disable flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107). When it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z6107: No), a display volume change command for showing the volume gauge and adjustment display is set (6108). Next, the volume change standby flag 223cc is set to ON (Z6109), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z6107, if the volume operation disable flag 223cb is set to ON (Z6107: Yes), a display volume command for showing the volume gauge is set (Z6110), and this process ends.

Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 323 is a flow chart showing the contents of this stop command process 4 (Z2259). Stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example differs from the stop command processing (FIG. 301) in the second control example in that volume-related processing (Z5120) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 324, volume-related processing (Z5120), which is one processing in stop command processing 4 (Z2259) in the fourth control example, will be described. FIG. 324 is a flow chart showing the contents of volume-related processing (Z5120).

In the volume-related processing (Z5120), first, it is determined whether or not the volume operation disable flag 223cb provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z5152). If it is determined that the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to ON (Z5121: Yes), the volume operation invalid flag 223cb is set to OFF (Z5122), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z5121 that the volume operation invalid flag is OFF (Z5121: No), the process of Z5122 is not executed and the present process ends.

<Regarding the fifth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 to 345. FIG. In the fifth control example, control processing regarding the operation of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 5) provided in the operation device 300 (see FIG. 5) will be described. Only differences with respect to the first control example will be described, and descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

In the fifth control example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the initial operation of the tilting device 310, error processing during the initial operation, control processing and error processing in the operation of the tilting device 310 during the normal game Processing will be explained.

With reference to FIGS. 325(a) and 325(b), the display mode of the abnormality notification displayed when an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. 325(a) shows that in the initial operation (tilting initial operation process (Z2907: FIG. 342) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 110) when the power is turned on, the tilting operation timer 223db of the tilting device 310, which will be described later, is set to 0 ( The display mode of the abnormality notification displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 (error display).

As shown in FIG. 325(a), even if the operation period for completing the initial operation of the tilting device 310 has passed, the origin sensor of the operation device 300 does not detect that the tilting device 310 has moved to the origin position. The text "Button return error A, please call a staff member" is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to notify hall employees or the like that an abnormality has occurred due to the initial operation of the tilting device 310. . In this control example, during the initial operation, if the tilting device 310 has not been moved to the origin position at the timing when the initial operation period ends, an error display as shown in FIG. 325(a) is displayed. there is In addition, although the details will be described later, the normal game in which the player may interfere with the operation of the tilting device 310 by holding down the operation with the hand etc. In some cases, even if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, an error is not displayed immediately, but a predetermined specific condition (for example, every three fluctuations of the special symbol, the tilting device 310 is operated four times, If an abnormality is continuously detected in the operation of the tilting device 310, etc.), an error is notified, and the progress of the game is continued even if it is not a mechanical abnormality. It is configured to be able to suppress defects that would otherwise interfere.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), the error display at the time of initial operation is identifiable as "button return error A", so that mechanical (including control-related) abnormalities are displayed. It is designed so that it can be easily identified.

As shown in FIG. 325(b), during the normal game (during the game after the initial operation of the tilting device 310 is completed), after the tilting device 310 is operated in the game effect, the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position. If the movement (movement) to the origin position is not detected by the origin sensor even after the movement to the origin position is completed, an error will not be displayed immediately, and an internal error will occur. is set to the status indicating the detected state, and thereafter, an operation to move to the origin position is performed every three fluctuations of the special pattern, and if it can be moved to the origin position four times in succession, the third pattern display device An error message is displayed in the main display area Dm of 81 to inform players and hall employees that an error has occurred in the tilting device 310. be done.

Here, by displaying a character "button return error B" different from that during the initial operation, it is configured so that an abnormality during normal game can be easily identified. As described above, in this control example, the error display is executed by executing the error display in consideration of the fact that the player is playing a game that interferes with the tilting motion 310 during the normal game. It is configured in such a way as to suppress frequently-executed failures. Also, when it is confirmed that the tilting device 310 does not have an abnormality by executing an error display during a normal game, the player is playing a game method that hinders the operation of the tilting device 310 for a long period of time. Therefore, the error operation of the tilting device 310 can be prevented at an early stage by the hall employee or the like confirming the game method.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 326 to 328, the relationship between the operation of the tilting device 310, the variation of the special symbols, and the touch sensor effects will be described. FIG. 326 shows a period during which the tilting device 310 moves to the origin position (origin 10 is a timing chart in an example in which detection is not made by the origin sensor even after the return is completed.

When the variable display of normal reach out A (variation time (variation period) 30000 ms) is determined, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and the determination value "0 to 149" set in the operation effect selection table 222da described later. and match with the value of the effect counter 223h that has been acquired, a later-described tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 (see FIG. 333(a)) is determined. The tilting motion scenario A table 222 (see FIG. 333(a)) shows the position where the tilting device 310 descends to the position shown in FIG. , and the highest position (see FIG. 32) are repeated at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and then the operation of descending to the origin position shown in FIG. 22 is executed (set).

When normal reach out A is executed, 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (T1), the third symbol is in the reach display mode (the third symbol in the left symbol row and the right symbol row is the same type of symbol. temporarily stopped (stopped). In the ready-to-win display mode, a pattern simulating the frame button 22 for suggesting that the frame button 22 is pressed is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 20 seconds after the start of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Here, for 3.5 seconds from 23.3 seconds (T3) to 26.8 seconds (T4) after the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the tilting operation 320 was pressed and the frame button 22 was pressed, which will be described later. An operation valid period (T5) is set during which the detection is determined to be valid when detected by the detection sensor 324 that does.

As shown in FIGS. 326 and 333(a), after 18 seconds (18000 ms) (T1) from the start of the normal reach deviation A, the drive motor 342 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 22) by 210 degrees. By step rotation, the disc cam 344 rotates 210 degrees clockwise from the origin position (position shown in FIG. 22) and is moved to the cam release position shown in FIG. 30 (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 333(a)). ). After that, the driving motor 342 is stopped for 3 seconds (3000 ms) (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 333(a))). After a stop period of 3 seconds, the drive motor 342 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 30) by 20 steps, so that the disk cam 344 rotates in the counterclockwise direction by 20 degrees to reach the unlocked position. (see FIG. 32) (see action pointer 3 (see FIG. 333) (a)).

Here, when moving from the cam disengaged position to the unlocked position, as already explained in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. As a result, the rotation claw member 347 is rotated clockwise, and the lock (engagement) between the tilting member 320 and the rotation claw member 347 is released, and the tilting device 310 is rotated by the torsion spring 315 . is raised by the biasing force of In this case, when the voice coil motor 352 is also driven, a force in the longitudinal direction is applied to the tilting device 320 to increase the lifting force and improve the lifting speed. The drive motor 342 is stopped for 0.5 seconds, and the period until the tilting device 320 moves to the highest position is waited (operation pointer 4 (see FIG. 333(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is driven 50 steps in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 32), so that the disc cam 344 rotates counterclockwise 50 degrees and moves downward from the highest position (see FIG. 32) by 50 degrees. It is moved to the swung downward position (see FIG. 33) (operation pointer 5 (see FIG. 333(a))). After 0.5 seconds, the drive motor 342 is driven backward (clockwise in FIG. 33) by 50 steps to rotate the disk cam 344 clockwise by 50 degrees, and the tilting device 320 is moved again. It is moved to the highest position (see FIG. 32) (operation pointer 6 (see FIG. 333(a))).

After that, 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 is driven again from the highest position to the tilted-down position (operation pointer 7 (see FIG. 333(a))), and 0.5 seconds later, the tilting device 320 moves from the tilted-down position to the maximum position. The tilting device 320 is driven to the raised position (operation pointer 8 (see FIG. 333(a))). After that, the drive motor 342 is stopped for one second (operation pointer 9 (see FIG. 333(a))). When the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is completed, the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 340) is executed, and driving is performed based on the origin detection operation A table 222d3 (see FIG. 334(a)), which will be described later. When the motor 342 is driven in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 32), the disk cam 344 is rotated counterclockwise, and the tilting device 320 is driven downward to the origin position. is transmitted.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 326, the tilting device 320 is held and fixed at the highest position so as not to be lowered by the player. In such a case, as already described in the first embodiment, the movable clutch 343c is separated from the transmission gear 343b and the transmission gear 343b is idly rotated so that the drive motor 342 is driven. Also, the disc cam 344 is configured not to rotate.

Here, the detection sensor 324 detects that the drive motor 342 is at the origin position even after the tilting operation timer 223db (1900 ms) set in the origin detection operation A table 222db3 (see FIG. 334(a)) has elapsed. If not, the tilting operation status is set to "4" as data indicating an internal (abnormal state not notified to the outside) tilting device 310 malfunction, which will be described later.

As described above, even if there is a possibility that the tilting device 320 cannot be returned from the highest position to the origin position due to being held by the player, the drive motor 342 (transmission gear 343b) can be operated by the structure of the movable clutch 343c. Damage to the drive motor 342, transmission gear 343b, etc. due to idling can be suppressed. Further, by configuring it so that it can be determined from the tilting operation status that there is an abnormality in the return-to-origin operation, it is possible to internally identify an abnormal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 327, when the effect of raising the tilting device 310 (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 326) is executed, the origin sensor is is not turned on, and the control executed after the tilting operation status is set to "4" will be described. FIG. 327 shows that when the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation for returning the tilting device 310 to the origin position is executed every time three variations of the special symbol (special symbol) are performed. It is a timing chart when

When the tilting operation status is set to "4", a retry operation is executed in which the driving motor 342 is operated so as to move the tilting device 310 to the origin position every three variations of the special symbol as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, until the origin sensor is detected, the value of the tilting operation status must be maintained at "4", and the origin sensor must be turned on by retrying four times (retrying every three fluctuations four times). , the error display shown in FIG. 325(b) is executed.

As a result, an effect in which the tilting device 310 rises is executed, and even if the origin detection operation of the tilting device 310 is executed, the player performs a game such as holding the tilting device 310 so as to hinder the operation and the origin position is detected. Even if an abnormality occurs in which the movement to is not performed, the retry operation is performed every time the special symbol variation is performed a specified number of times (three times) without immediately announcing the abnormality as in the case of the abnormality at the time of the initial operation. However, if it is determined that the player has not been able to continuously move to the origin position, an error is displayed. It is possible to suppress the problem of being busy.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, when the tilting operation status is set to "4" and the advance notice effect using the touch sensor 290 is selected and executed, the touch sensor 290 is turned on. The control when the origin detection operation (retry operation) is executed based on the timing when it becomes true will be described. FIG. 328 is a timing chart showing operations of the tilting device 310 that are executed when an effect using the touch sensor 290 is executed. A change in the special symbol is started, a notice effect is selected in which the operation of the touch sensor 290 becomes effective, and an effective period of the touch sensor 290 is set, and the player puts his/her hand over the touch sensor 290 or the like. At the timing when it is determined that the operation is performed and the touch sensor 290 is detected to be ON, the drive motor 342 of the tilting device 310 is driven to perform the origin detection operation. FIG. 328 shows a case where the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped at the timing when the origin sensor is turned on, and the tilting operation status is set to "0". On the other hand, if the origin sensor does not turn on even after the origin detection period (for example, 3600 ms) has passed, the driving of the drive motor 342 is stopped and the tilting operation status remains set to "4". . As a result, the retry operation is continuously performed every three fluctuations, and control for resolving the malfunction of the tilting device 310 can be performed.

The player normally operates the shooting handle with the right hand, and operates the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 290 with the left hand. When the player is playing a game while holding the tilting device 310 so as not to return to the origin position, it is conceivable that the tilting device 310 is held by the left hand. By causing the tilting device 310 to perform the origin detection operation in , the origin detection operation is executed in a state in which the tilting device 310 is released from being held, and the tilting device 310 can be moved to the origin position. In this control example, the origin detection operation is performed at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is on. The origin detection operation may be executed in such a manner that the origin detection operation is performed in a state in which the player's holding is more reliably released. In addition, not only the touch sensor 290, but also the frame button 290 may be used, and the third pattern display device 81 may execute an advance notice effect using both hands (for example, character display such as "raise both hands"). Alternatively, an effect may be executed in which a three-dimensional code or the like is read by a mobile phone or the like, and the origin detection operation may be executed during that period. Naturally, the effect may be such that the user is instructed to use both hands by voice.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334. FIG. FIG. 329 is a block diagram of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. In the fifth control example, a tilting device 310, a drive motor 342, a voice coil motor 352, and a detection sensor 324 are added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The tilting device 310 has the same structure as that already described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 85, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The drive motor 342 is composed of a stepping motor, and is driven so that when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position, the locking of the tilting device 310 at the lower limit position to prevent the upward movement is released. When the locking is released, the voice coil motor 352, which is driven in synchronization with the driving motor 342, is assisted by the vibration force in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 10, and is lifted to the highest position by the biasing force of the spring. .

On the other hand, when the tilting member 310 is at the highest position, the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the origin position by rotating the driving motor 342 in a direction opposite to the upward rotation. When the tilting device 310 is moved to the origin position, the bottom plate portion 311a is locked by the rotary pawl member 347 (see FIG. 22) to restrict the tilting device 310 from rising.

The detection sensor 324 is composed of the transmission type detection sensor already described with reference to FIG. 13, and is composed of a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R. , the left detection sensor 324L detects the left detection piece 311gL (ON state), and the right detection sensor 324R does not detect the right detection piece 311gR (OFF state). , it is possible to detect that the tilting device 310 has been moved to the lower limit position. Further, when the tilting device 310 is at the lower limit position and the player further presses it down, the right detection sensor 324R detects the right detection piece 311gR (ON state), and both the left detection sensor 324L and the left detection sensor 324L are turned ON. , that the tilting device 310 has been operated by the player at the lower limit position.

As a result, the tilting device 310 can be used in an effect of being pressed (operated) by the player not only when it is moved to the highest position, but also when it is regulated at the lowest position. It can be used for various performances. For example, if the tilting device 310 is raised and the effect of pressing down is set to have a high probability of being executed during the variation of the special symbol that is the winning judgment result, the tilting device 310 will increase the expectation of the winning judgment result. can be represented.

The voice coil motor 352 is arranged on the back side of the tilting device 310, and when driven, repeatedly vibrates the tilting device 310 from the back side to the front side, causing the tilting device 310 to vibrate. , the player can feel the vibration when touching the tilting device 310. Further, when the tilting device 310 is lifted, it is lifted by the urging force of the spring against the force of gravity. , the vibration from the voice coil motor 352 gives a lifting force, and the problem that the lifting force is weakened by its own weight can be suppressed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth control example, the content of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the first control example is partially changed, and the content of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 is partially changed. is different. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 330(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 330(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. This fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that an operation effect selection table 222da, a tilting motion scenario table db, an origin detection motion A table 222dcc, an origin detection motion B table 222dd, and an initial tilting motion table 222de are added. is doing.

The operation effect selection table 222da is a table for selecting operation data (operation details) for operating the tilting device 310 according to the variation type of the special symbol. FIG. 332(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation effect selection table 222da. The operation effect selection table 222da is set with a judgment value of the effect counter 223h for determining whether or not to execute the operation effect using the tilting device 310 with a predetermined probability according to the variation type of the special symbol. A tilt action scenario type is set for a determination value for executing an operation effect. The tilting action scenario includes an operation effect start time (operation effect start period), which is a timer value for determining the trigger for starting the operation effect of the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310. and an operation valid start time (operation valid start period) and an operation valid end time (operation valid end period), which is a timer value for determining that the period during which the operation of the tilting device 310 is valid ends. That is, depending on the action data selected from the operation effect selection table 222da, whether or not the effect using the tilting device 310 can be executed, and if it is to be executed, the start timing of the operation effect using the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 are determined. A valid period (T5) is set to effectively determine the operation when the button is pressed by the user.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "normal reach jackpot A" or "normal reach loss A", the value of the production counter 223h is acquired and the determination of whether to execute the operation production is operated. When it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed by executing the effect selection table 222da (when the value of the effect counter 223h acquired is any one of "0 to 149"), the operation scenario of the tilting device 320 is as follows. A tilting motion scenario A table 222bd1, which will be described later, is selected, the tilting motion timer 223db (T2) is set to 8800 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation presentation start time (T1) is set to 18000 ms, and the effective operation start time (T3) is set. ) is set to 23300 ms, and the valid operation end time (T4) is set to 26800 ms.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is "super reach jackpot A" or "super reach miss A", the value of the production counter 223h is acquired to determine whether to execute the operation production. When it is determined that the operation effect is to be executed by executing the selection table 222da (when the acquired value of the effect counter 223h is any one of "0 to 149"), tilting described later as an operation scenario of the tilting device The action scenario B table 222bd2 is selected, the tilt action timer 223db (T2) is set to 7900 ms (Z2923 in FIG. 341), the operation effect start time (T1) is set to 38000 ms, and the operation effective start time (T3) is set to 41500 ms. is set, and 45900 ms is set to the effective operation end time (T4). In this way, according to the variation type of the special symbol, the execution operation of the tilting device 310 and the period during which the operation is valid are set in advance, and the operation is performed with the passage of time.

The tilting motion scenario table 222db includes origin detection motion tables A and B for returning the tilting device 320 to the origin after executing the type of tilting motion scenario selected in the operation effect selection table 222da and the tilting motion scenario. A data table has been set up for the configuration.

FIG. 332(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the tilting motion scenario table 222db. The tilting motion scenario table 222db includes a tilting motion scenario A table 222db1, a tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, an origin detection motion A table 222db3, and an origin detection motion B table 222db4.

The tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is a table that defines the motion contents in the tilting motion scenario A, and can be selected when the variation pattern type is out of normal reach A or hit normal reach A, and when the tilting device 310 is movable. operation data is stored. As described above, the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 is set by lottery in the operation effect selection table 222da when the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 333(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the start of the variation of the special symbol, the operation of the tilting motion scenario A table 222db1 is started.

The operation of the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is to read the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer sequentially from "1" during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2953 in FIG. 343). ), the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes “10” (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (18000 ms) has come after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the operation pointer is "1" operation data (210 steps in the backward direction for 2100 ms ) is executed, and the cam disengaging operation (the releasing member 346 is rotated clockwise by the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 so that the second protruding portion 344c3 moves to the upper portion of the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 30). (ie, movement of the second projecting portion 344c3 to the upper portion of the releasing member 34 (see FIG. 30) without operating the rotary pawl member 347) to reach the disengaged position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (stopped for 3000 ms) whose operation pointer is "2". The operation data with the operation pointer "3" (20 steps in the forward rotation direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the unlocking operation (the second projecting portion 344c3 rotates the release member 346 downward to , rotating the rotary claw member 347 to release the engagement with the tilting device 320), the disk cam 344 is moved to the unlocking position, and the tilting device 320 starts to rise.

Next, the motion data with the motion pointer of "4" (suspended for 500ms) is executed, waits for rising, and the motion data with the motion pointer of "5" (50 steps can be moved forward for 500ms). ) is executed to the position shown in FIG. 33, and the movement pointer is set to "6" (movable 50 steps in the backward direction for 500 ms) is executed to execute the fanning movement to the position shown in FIG. The motion data with the motion pointer of "7" (50 steps can be moved forward during 500 ms) is executed, and the position shown in FIG. 33 is reached again. 33 again, and the motion data of the motion pointer "9" (1000 ms is stopped) is executed, stops at the position shown in FIG. 32, the operation pointer becomes "10", and the operation ends.

In this way, the operation of the tilting device 320 executed according to the tilting operation scenario A table 222db1 is such that the tilting device 320 is moved from the origin position to the highest position, and then the tilting device 320 reaches the highest position. After performing the fanning motion, the motion of returning to the origin position is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 326, when the tilting device 320 is pressed down and detected by the detection switch 324 for 3.5 seconds after the tilting device 320 starts to rise, the detection is considered valid. After being discriminated, the third symbol display device 81 displays a specific notice performance (for example, a performance notifying the degree of expectation of winning, etc.), and the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 27 also produce sound effects matching the notice performance. and the lamp lighting mode is lit. After the tilting device 320 starts to rise, if the player presses the tilting device 320 before the operation effective period (T5) of 3.5 seconds elapses, the tilting device 320 detects the origin. Before the return operation is executed by the operation A table 222db3, when the tilting device 320 is moved to the origin position by the pressing operation, and the tilting device 320 is locked by the rotating claw member 347 and held at the origin position, the origin is detected. An operation based on the operation A table 222db3 is executed to move the disc cam 344 to the initial position (origin position).

In addition, when the tilting device 320 is held by the player at a raised position or the like and the transmission gear 343b rotates idly, it is determined that the left side detection sensor 353L is turned ON, so that the position of the disk cam 344 is determined to be the initial position. to the origin position is executed.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is a table defining motion details in the tilting motion scenario B, and stores motion data when the tilting device 310 moves when the variation pattern type is super reach A. As described above, the tilting action scenario B table 222db2 is set by lottery in the operation effect selection table 222da when the special symbols start to fluctuate. FIG. 333(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2. When the operation effect start time set in the operation effect selection table 222da is triggered after the start of the variation of the special symbols, the operation of the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 is started.

The tilting motion scenario B table 222db2 sequentially reads out the motion contents corresponding to the motion pointer from "1" (Z2953 in FIG. 343) during the required time corresponding to the elapse of the tilting motion timer 223db. , the defined motion is performed until the motion pointer becomes "11" (tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, when the operation effect start time (38000 ms) has come after the start of the special symbol fluctuation, the operation pointer is "1" operation data (50 steps in the forward direction for 500 ms ) is executed, the lock is released, the operation data with the operation pointer "2" (stopped for 3000ms) is executed, the standby is performed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "3" (for 200ms 20 steps in the forward direction) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "4" (20 steps in the backward direction during 200 ms) is executed, and the motion data with the motion pointer "5" ( 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, the motion data with the motion pointer "6" (20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the motion pointer is "7". (movable 20 steps in the forward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and the operation data with the operation pointer "8" (movable 20 steps in the backward direction for 200 ms) is executed, and this operation Three repeated motions from pointers "3" to "8" are set as fanning motions, and the motion data with motion pointer "9" (120 steps forward in 1200 ms) is executed, and the position shown in FIG. , the operation data with the operation pointer "10" (stopped for 2000 ms) is executed, the operation is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 38, the operation pointer becomes "11", and the operation ends.

By configuring in this way, the tilting device 310 performs the tilting motion during the ready-to-win effect, prompting the player to operate, and changing the tilting motion according to the variation type, while the operation effect is being executed. Furthermore, by stopping the rising height (length) at different points, interest in the operation is generated, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In this control example, the type of tilting motion scenario is set according to the type of variation pattern. may be configured to change and set the selection rate depending on the success/failure determination result by allocating and setting the determination value of the effect counter 223h. With this configuration, for example, a tilting motion scenario is executed in which the probability of being selected is set to be higher when the result of the win/loss determination is a hit than when the result is a miss, thereby allowing the player to see the result of the win/fail determination. can be expected to be a hit.

In addition, as in the tilting motion scenario B table 222db2, a tilting motion scenario type is set in which the tilting motion is performed at the start of the motion, and then the robot is moved to the origin position without being raised to the highest position. good too. By configuring in this way, for example, the tilting motion scenario B is set to be easily selected when the result of the right/fail determination is a hit, and when the result of the right/fail determination is a failure, the tilting motion scenario of only the fanning motion is set. By setting it so that it is easy to be selected, it is possible to raise expectations for a big win by performing a fanning action.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 stores the tilting device 310 in the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting motion scenario A. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 334(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222db3. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation data is performed in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved forward in 1900 ms) is executed, the motion pointer becomes "2", and the motion ends.

The origin detection operation A table 222db3 is set when the operation of the tilting operation scenario A table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag is turned on (Z2957: Yes). Alternatively, when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2961: No), based on the origin detection operation A table 222db3, set 1900ms as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db and set 3 to the tilting operation status 223da. By doing (Z2959), the contents of the operation of the origin detection operation A table 222db3 are read out (Z2974) until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 in the effect backtracking operation processing (FIG. 344, Z2911), and the origin detection is performed. The return-to-origin operation is performed until there is (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2973: No).

The origin detection operation B table 222db4 stores the tilting device 310 at the original position (origin) when the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin after the tilting device 310 performs the operation of the tilting motion scenario B. Operation data for is stored.

FIG. 334(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db4. Similar to the operation of the tilting operation scenario table, the operation data is performed in order from the operation data whose operation pointer is "1" until the operation pointer becomes "2" (the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0).

Specifically, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "1" (190 steps can be moved forward in 1900 ms) is executed, the motion pointer becomes "2", and the motion ends.

In the origin detection operation B table 222db4, the operation of the tilting operation scenario B table is completed, the player operates the tilting device 310 during the operation valid period, and the tilting operation flag is turned on (Z2957: Yes). , or when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2961: No). Based on the origin detection operation B table 222db4, 1900ms is set as the value of the tilting operation timer 223db, and 3 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2959), so that in the return operation processing (Fig. 344, Z2911), Until the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0, the operation contents of the origin detection operation B table 222db3 are read (Z2974), and the origin is detected (Z2971: Yes) or the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No). ), the return-to-origin operation is performed.

The retry operation table 222dc stores operation data for repeating the origin detection when the origin detection operation is not performed after the tilting device 310 performs the tilting operation scenario. It is

FIG. 334(c) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the retry operation table 222dc. In the retry motion table 222dc, similarly to the motion of the above-described tilting motion scenario table, the motion pointer becomes “2” (the tilting motion timer 223db becomes 0) in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is “1”. This is performed until the origin is detected (Z2989: Yes).

Specifically, the retry operation table 222dc terminates when the tilting operation timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2973: No) in the origin detection operation described above, sets the tilting operation status 223da to 4 (Z2975), 3 is set to the detection variation counter 223dc (Z2976), and 4 is set to the detection check counter 223dd (Z2977). , When the detection check counter 223dd is 1 or more (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted (Z2983). The operation time (900 ms) is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2985), the detection check counter 223dd is decremented by 1 (Z2986), and if the value after the subtraction is 1 or more (Z2987: Yes), the detection variation counter 223dc is Set to 3 (Z2988). When the detection sensor 324 is not at the origin position (Z2989: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db is not 0 (Z2990: Yes), the corresponding operation content is read out (Z2991), and the retry operation is performed by the tilting operation timer. 223db becomes 0 or the detection sensor 324 reaches the origin position (Z2989: Yes). As shown in FIG. 327, the above operation is set once every three times when the special symbol changes, and if the origin detection is not performed, it is performed up to four times.

The tilting initial operation table 222dd stores operation data for setting the initial operation of the tilting device 310 when the power is turned on.

FIG. 334(d) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the tilting initial motion table 222dd. In the tilting initial motion table 222dd, similarly to the motion of the tilting motion scenario table described above, the motion pointer becomes “2” in order from the motion data whose motion pointer is “1”, and the tilting motion timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: Yes). or until the origin is detected (Z2933: Yes).

Specifically, when the contents of the RAM are normal (Z2205: Yes) in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, the operation time (7200 ms ) is set in the tilting operation timer 223db (Z2061), and the tilting operation status is set to 1 (Z2062), thereby starting the operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 331, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 331 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the third control example. In the second control example, unlike the first control example described above, a tilting operation status 223da, a tilting operation timer 223db, a detection variation counter 223dc, a detection check counter 223dd, a tilting operation flag 223de, and a The difference is that a timer 223df is added.

Information for determining the operation state of the tilting device 310 is stored in the tilting operation status 223da. The tilting operation status 223da is set to 1 (Z2062) when the initial operation setting of the tilting device 310 is performed in the start-up process (FIG. 335) executed when the power is turned on, and the initial operation state is entered.

The tilting action status 223da determines the process to be executed according to the value of the tilting action status 223da in the tilting device control process (Z2891) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 3 (Z2161). . Specifically, when the value of the tilting motion status 223d is "0" (Z2904: Yes), the operation effect setting process (Z2905) is executed, and the tilting motion is in a standby state waiting for the start of operation. When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "1" (Z2906: Yes), the tilting initial operation process (Z2907) is executed, and the tilting operation is being executed after the power is turned on. When the value of the tilting action status 223d is "2" (Z2908: Yes), the operation effecting process (Z2909) is executed, and the tilting action is in the operation effecting state during the special symbol variation. When the value of the tilting action status 223d is "3" (Z2910: Yes), the production backtracking action process (Z2911) is executed, and the tilting action is during the returning action after the scenario action.

When the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "4" (Z2912: Yes), retry operation processing (Z2913) is executed, and the tilting operation is being retryed to detect the origin. If the value of the tilting operation status 223d is other than that (Z2912: No), the value of the tilting operation status 223d is "5", and the execution of this process ends, but the initial operation and return operation described above are performed. In this error state, the tilting operation does not change until the power is turned on again.

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905: FIG. 341), as described above, when the operation effect start time is triggered after the start of the special symbol variation (Z2921: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 2. It is set (Z2922), and the tilting action is in the state of operation production during the fluctuation action of the special symbol.

In the tilting initial movement process (Z2907: FIG. 342), 0 is set when the tilting movement timer 223db reaches 0 (Z2933: Yes) and when the detection sensor 324 detects the origin (Z2933: Yes). The tilting operation is in a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2933: No), 5 is set and an error state occurs.

In the processing during operation rendering (Z2909: FIG. 343), when the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting operation flag is off (Z2957: No), when the detection sensor 324 detects the origin ( Z2961: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and the tilting operation enters a standby state.

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911: FIG. 344), when the detection sensor 324 has detected the origin (Z2971: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), the tilting operation is in a standby state, and this processing exit.

When the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) and the tilting operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 4, and the tilting operation is being retryed. becomes.

In the retry operation process (Z2913: FIG. 345), after the special symbol starts to fluctuate (Z2981: No), if there is an origin detection of the detection sensor 324 (Z2989: Yes), 0 is set to the tilting operation status 223da (Z2972 ), the tilting operation is in a standby state, and if the detection sensor 324 does not detect the origin (Z2989: No) and the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 ( Z2994), and the tilting operation becomes an error state.

The tilting motion timer 223db is a timer for counting the motions of the tilting device 310 . The tilting operation timer 223db is set to an initial operation time (Z2061) when the power is turned on. Each time the main process (FIG. 336) is executed, it is incremented by 1 and updated repeatedly.

In the standby state when the value of the tilting motion status is "0", the motion time is set according to the tilting motion scenario table (Z2923). When the value of the tilting action status is "2", the tilting action timer 223db is set to 0 (Z2951: No) and the tilting action flag is ON (Z2957: Yes) in the state during the operation effect, and the origin is reached. The time for the origin detection operation is set based on the detection operation table. During the retry operation when the tilting operation status value is "4", the retry operation time is set (Z2985) based on the contents of the retry operation table 222dc.

The detection fluctuation counter 223dc is a counter that counts the number of fluctuations while the tilting device 310 performs a retry operation when the origin is not detected in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection variation counter 223dc is tilted when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the production backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the tilting operation status value 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 3 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in retry operation.

During the retry operation, when the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2982: Yes) at the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbols (Z2982: Yes), it is determined that the retry operation remains, and the following determination processing is performed. conduct. First, the detected variation counter 223dc is decremented by 1 (Z2983), and if the subtraction result is 0 (Z2984: No), it is determined that the variation requires a retry operation, and the tilting operation timer is set based on the contents of the retry operation table. After setting (Z2985), if the result of subtracting 1 (Z2986) from the detection check counter 223dd is not 0 (Z2987: Yes), it is assumed that the retry operation has not reached the specified number of times (up to 4 times). , the detection variation counter 223dc is set to 3 (Z2988).

The detection check counter 223dd is a counter that counts the number of retry operations performed when the tilting device 310 does not detect the origin in the return operation after the scenario operation. The detection check counter 223dd is tilted when the origin is not detected by the detection sensor 324 (Z2971: No) in the production backtracking operation process (Z2911) executed when the value of the tilting operation status 223da is "3". When the operation timer 223db becomes 0 (Z2973: No), 4 is set (Z2976), and the tilting operation is in retry operation. Therefore, the retry operation is performed up to four times if the origin is not detected.

The tilting operation flag 223de indicates that when the tilting action scenario A or the tilting action scenario B is being executed, the tilting device 320 is pushed down by the player during the operation valid period and is moved to the origin position, and the rotating claw member is set. 347 is a flag indicating that it has been locked. The tilting operation flag 223de is detected by the detection switch 324 when the tilting device 320 is pressed during the operation effective period by the processing of Z2956 of the processing during operation rendering (Z2909) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. set to on when On the other hand, after the tilting operation flag 223de is determined to be ON by the processing of Z2957, the tilting operation status is set to 3, and after the return-to-origin operation is executed, it is set to OFF (see Z2960).

The pressing notice valid timer 223df detects that the tilting device 320 has been pressed as a switch for effect when the tilting device 320 is not raised (that is, when it is held by the rotating claw member 347 at the origin position). This is a timer for determining the valid period for validly determining the detection of the switch 324 . When the variation pattern is determined, the advance notice effect using the tilting device 320 as a switch for effect is determined as the advance notice effect, based on the start timing of the effective period. Data corresponding to the defined validity period is stored. Note that when data corresponding to the effective period is set in the depression notice effective timer 223df (Z2877: see FIG. 337), the cam disengagement operation is executed. As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that the tilting action scenario A table 222db1 will be executed by the operation sound of the cam disengagement, the vibration transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the player, and the like. Further, the pressing notice valid timer 223df is updated by being decremented by one by pressing Z2873 (see FIG. 337).

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the fifth control example>
Next, control processing by the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fifth control example, a part of the startup processing (Fig. 335) and the main processing (Fig. 336) are added to the first control example, and the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: Fig. 336) is added. 272) was changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), sensor input processing (Z2813: FIG. 273) was changed to sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338), retry processing during touch input (Z2860 : Fig. 339), tilting device control processing (Z2891: Fig. 340), operation effect setting processing (Fig. 341), tilting initial motion processing (Z2907: Fig. 342), during operation effect processing (Z2909: Fig. 343), effect backward motion The difference is that processing (Z2911: FIG. 344) and retry operation processing (Z2913: FIG. 345) are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 335, startup processing (FIG. 335) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. The startup process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example differs from the startup process (FIG. 257) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2061 to Z2062 are added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the startup process (FIG. 335) in the fifth control example, after executing the process of Z2012 or the process of Z2013, the tilting initial operation table 222de (see FIG. 334(d)) provided in the ROM 222 Based on this, the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is set (Z2061). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is set to 1 (Z2062), and main processing (FIG. 336), which will be described later, is executed.

In this way, since the tilting operation status is set to 1 when the power is turned on, the initial operation of the tilting device 320 is executed by tilting initial operation processing (Z2907: FIG. 342) described later when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the game can be started in a state in which the initial operation is executed and the game machine is moved to the origin position. Further, although not shown, the disk cam 344 is operated by the initial operation, and the step counter and the like are set to the initial values based on the turning on of the left side detection sensor 353L. Control can be stably performed.

The main process (FIG. 336) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In the main processing (FIG. 336) in the fifth control example, frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107) is replaced with frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161) in contrast to the main processing (FIG. 258) in the first control example. ) is changed to Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 337, regarding frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337) which is one processing of the main processing (FIG. 336) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example. explain. FIG. 337 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161).

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 3 (Z2161: FIG. 337), first, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the special symbol determined to execute the pressing notice is currently changing (pressing notice is being set). (Z2881). That is, it is determined whether or not execution of the advance notice of pressing has been decided. If it is determined that the press notice is being set (Z2881: Yes), it is determined whether the press notice is valid (Z2882). That is, it is determined whether or not the advance notice is being executed, and whether the push advance notice valid timer 223df is greater than 0 or not. If it is determined that the pressing notice valid period is in effect (Z2882: Yes), the pressing notice valid timer 223df provided in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 and updated (Z2883). Next, it is determined whether the tilting device 320 is pressed by the player and the detection switch 324 is on (Z2884). If it is determined that the tilting device 320 has been pressed (Z2884: Yes), a display press-down notice mode command is set (Z2885), and the process proceeds to Z2890. It should be noted that in the processing of Z2881, if the advance notice is not being executed (Z2881: No), or in the processing of Z2884, if it is determined that the player has not pressed the button (Z2884: No). , skip other processes, and shift to the process of Z2890.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2882, if it is determined that it is not during the press notice effective period (Z2882: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the press notice valid period, which is the start timing of executing the press notice ( Z2886). A start timer (not shown) is set when the special symbols start to fluctuate, and the start timing of the advance notice is determined by the value of the start timer (when updated to a specific value of "0").

If it is determined that it is time to start the effective period (Z2886: Yes), the effective period (for example, 5 seconds) defined as the value of the depression notice effective timer 223df is set, and the cam disengaging operation is 2100 ms. A backward rotation operation of the drive motor 342 is set (Z2887). With this configuration, the cam releasing operation is always performed even if the tilting device 320 does not perform the upward motion, even if the advance notice is given, so that the player can expect the upward performance to be executed.

If it is not the time to start the pressing notice effective period (Z2886: No), the process of Z2887 is skipped and the process of Z2888 is executed. Next, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the advance notice effective period of pressing (Z2888). Here, it is determined whether or not the value of the pressing notice effective period timer 223df is zero. If it is determined that it is time to end the pressing notice effective period (Z2888: Yes), the value of the pressing notice valid timer 223df is reset, and a 1500 ms backward rotation operation is set as the return-to-origin operation (Z2889). On the other hand, in the process of Z2888, if it is determined that the effective period has not ended (Z2888: No), the process of Z2889 is skipped and the sensor input process 2 (Z2890) is executed.

The details of this sensor input process 2 (Z2890) will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the tilting device control process (Z2891) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described later with reference to FIG.

With reference to FIG. 338, sensor input processing 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in this fifth control example will be described. In the sensor input process 2 (Z2890: FIG. 338) in the fifth control example, in contrast to the sensor input process (Z2813: FIG. 273) in the first control example, processes Z2826 to Z2829 are not executed, and retry during touch input. It differs in that processing (Z2860) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The retry processing during touch input (Z2860) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the contents of the retry processing during touch input (Z2860).

In the retry processing during touch input (Z2860: FIG. 339), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da provided in the RAM 223 is 4 (Z2861). If it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2861: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2861: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db provided in the RAM 223 is greater than 0 (Z2862). If it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2862: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2862: Yes), it is determined whether the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863). If it is determined that the detection sensor is not used for origin detection (Z2863: No), the drive motor is set in the one-step backward rotation direction (Z2864), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection sensor is detecting the origin (Z2863: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2865), and this processing ends.

The tilting device control process (Z2891) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing details of the tilting device control process (Z2891).

In the tilting device control process (Z2891: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2901: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the tilting action timer 223db. In the process of Z2901, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2901: No), the process of Z2902 is skipped and the process of Z2904 is executed. Next, it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 0 (Z2904). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223da is 0 (Z2904), operation effect setting processing (Z2905) is executed, and this processing ends.

As described above, when the tilting operation status indicating the origin return abnormality of the tilting device 320 is "4" at the timing when the touch sensor 290 is turned on, the origin return retry operation is executed. To make it easy to return a tilting device 320 to the origin by retrying the origin return at a timing with a high probability of using both hands (one hand for a shooting handle and the other hand for operating a touch sensor 290). can be done.

Here, with reference to FIG. 341, the operation effect setting process (Z2905), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 341 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation effect setting process (Z2905).

In the operation effect setting process (Z2905), it is determined whether or not the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921). If it is determined that the operation time rendering start time has not yet reached (Z2921: No), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the operation effect start time has been reached (Z2921: Yes), the value of the tilting motion status 223da is set to 2 (Z2922). Next, based on the tilting action scenario table 222db provided in the ROM 222, the value of the tilting action timer 223db is set (Z2923), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to off (Z2924), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 340, the description continues. When it is determined in the process of Z2904 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 0 (Z2904: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 1 (Z2906: Yes), tilting initial operation processing (Z2907) is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 342, the tilting initial operation process (Z2907), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the details of the tilting initial motion process (Z2907).

In the tilting initial motion process (Z2907), first, it is determined whether the value of the tilting motion timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2931). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2391: Yes), the operation content of the initial tilting operation table 222de is read (Z2932: Yes), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2931 whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2931: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933). When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2933: Yes), the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2934), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2933: No), the tilting operation status is set to 5 (Z2935). Next, the tilt error A command is set as the display error command (Z2936), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in the event of an abnormality during the return to origin in the initial operation executed when the power is turned on, unlike during a game, an error is immediately displayed (abnormality processing), so that the malfunction of the tilting device 320 can be found at an early stage. can.

Returning to FIG. 340, the description continues. In the processing of Z2906, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 1 (Z2906: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 2 (Z2908). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223da is 2 (Z2908: Yes), the process during operation effect (Z2909) is executed.

With reference to FIG. 343, the processing during operation rendering (Z2909), which is one processing of the tilting device control processing (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 343 is a flow chart showing the contents of the processing during operation rendering (Z2909).

In the operation rendering process (Z2909), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the tilting action timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2951: Yes), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (Z2952). If it is determined that it is set to ON (Z2952: Yes), this processing ends. When it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2952: No), the action content corresponding to the tilting action scenario table 222db is read (Z2953). Next, it is determined whether the operation is valid (Z2945). If it is determined that the operation valid period is not in effect (Z2954: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the operation is valid (Z2954: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a press detection (Z2955). If it is determined that no pressing has been detected (Z2955), this processing ends. If it is determined that the depression has been detected (Z2955: Yes), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2956), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2951 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2951: No), it is determined whether the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957). When it is determined that the tilting operation flag 223de is set to ON (Z2957: Yes), the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the origin detection operation B table 222dd provided in the ROM 222 ( Z2958). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 3 (Z2959), the tilting operation flag 223de is set to OFF (Z2960), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Z2957 that the tilting operation flag 223de is not set to ON (Z2957: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2961). If the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2961: No), the processes of Z2958 to Z2960 described above are executed, and this process ends. If it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2861: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2962), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 340, the description continues. In the process of Z2908, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 2 (Z2908: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 3 (Z2910). When it is determined that the value of the tilting action status 223da is 3 (Z2910: Yes), the effect backtracking action process (Z2911) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 344, the effect return operation process (Z2911), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described. FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing the details of the performance backtracking operation process (Z2911).

In the effect backtracking operation process (Z2911), first, it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971). When it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2971: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 0 (Z2972), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z2971 that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2971: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2973: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation B table 222dd is read out (Z2974), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2973, when it is determined that the value of the tilting action timer 223db is 0 (Z2973: No), the tilting action status 223da is set to 4 (Z2975). Next, the detection variation counter 223dc provided in the RAM 223 is set to 3 (Z2976), the detection check counter 223dd is set to 4 (Z2977), and this processing is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 340, the description continues. In the processing of Z2910, when it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 3 (Z2910: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is 4 (Z2912: Yes), retry operation processing (Z2913) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z2912 that the value of the tilting operation status 223da is not 4 (Z2912), this process ends.

The retry operation process (Z2913), which is one process of the tilting device control process (Z2891: FIG. 340), will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the contents of retry operation processing (Z2913).

In the retry operation process (Z2913), first, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981). If it is determined that it is the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2982: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2982: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the detection variation counter 223dc (Z2983). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detected variation counter 223dc changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2984). If it is determined that the value of the detected variation counter 223dc is greater than 0 (Z2984: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the detection fluctuation counter 223dc is 0 (Z2984: No), the tilting operation timer 223db is set based on the contents of the origin detection operation A table 222dc provided in the ROM 222. (Z2985), and the value of the detection check counter 223dd is subtracted by 1 (Z2986). Next, it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd changed by the calculation is greater than 0 (Z2987). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2987: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2987, the value of the detection check counter 223dd sets the value of the detection variation counter 223dc to 3, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2981, if it is determined that it is not the fluctuation start timing (Z2981: No), it is determined whether the detection sensor is at the origin (Z2989). When it is determined that the detection sensor is not at the origin position (Z2989: No), it is determined whether the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990). When it is determined that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is greater than 0 (Z2990: Yes), the operation content corresponding to the origin detection operation A table 222dc is read out (Z2991), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined at Z2990 that the value of the tilting operation timer 223db is 0 (Z2990: No), it is determined whether the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992). If it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is greater than 0 (Z2992: Yes), this process ends. When it is determined that the value of the detection check counter 223dd is 0 (Z2992: No), the tilt error B command is set as the display error command (Z2993). Next, the value of the tilting operation status 223da is set to 5 (Z2994), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2989, when it is determined that the detection sensor is at the origin position (Z2989: Yes), the value of the tilting operation status 223da is cleared (Z2995), and this process ends.

In addition, in the operation based on the tilting operation scenario A table in this control example, if the player presses or depresses the tilting device 320 at the start of the operation, the rotating claw member 347 immediately moves even if the unlocking operation is performed. As a result, the tilting device 320 is locked and cannot be lifted. As such a countermeasure, the number of movable steps is set to 10 (forward roll; required time 100 ms) as the motion data of the motion pointer 3 (see FIG. 333(a)), which is the unlocking motion. is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 31, and the tilting device 320 is configured to be lifted when the hand is released.

Furthermore, as another method, when the tilting operation status A is executed or when the unlocking operation is executed, the tilting device 320 is pushed down by the detection switch 324 or the upper surface of the tilting device 320 is pressed. A touch sensor is arranged to determine whether the touch sensor is ringing on, and if it is on (if it is pressed), it waits without unlocking and waits until it turns off. may be configured to perform the unlocking operation at the timing when the switch is turned off. In addition, when it is determined that the tilting device 320 is pressed down or touched by the player, the tilting device 320 is released from the tilting device 320 by display notification, voice, etc. may be configured to notify the

<Sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 346 to 370, a sixth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the first control example, when a jackpot A is executed in which the probability of success/failure determination is set to a low probability (an electric sapo is given up to 100 times) after the jackpot game, the even-numbered symbols are displayed, Although it was notified that it was the jackpot A, in the sixth embodiment, when the jackpot A is executed, if the reserved balls that will be the jackpot are stored, the jackpot will be executed first. The stop pattern of A, the performance during the big win, etc. are shown as if the big win B1 or the big win B2, and the performance as if a high probability game state (probability variable game state) is set even after the big win game. It differs from the first control example in that it is executed. In addition, in the sixth control example, even when the third pattern of the even-numbered pattern indicating the jackpot A is displayed, the jackpot type is actually set to the probability variable game state of the jackpot B1 or B2 during the jackpot game. A plurality of promotion performances for informing is set, the type of the promotion performance is determined by lottery at the start of the jackpot game, and the promotion to be executed after that according to the execution contents of the promotion performance (for example, the presence or absence of promotion, etc.) This is different from the first control example in that the types of effects are switched and set. Note that detailed descriptions of the same points as in the first control example are omitted.

With reference to FIG. 346, an example of the stop display mode of the special symbol of the win/loss determination result of the jackpot A in this control example will be described. FIG. 346(a) shows that the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) of the reserved pattern h1 stored as the first reserved ball is a jackpot A, and the reserved pattern h2 of the reserved ball displayed as the third This is an example showing a case where the look-ahead result is also a jackpot A. FIG. In this case, when the variation of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h1 is executed, the even numbered symbols are normally displayed, but the odd numbered symbols are stopped and displayed at the start of the variation. are switched to display. That is, the same stop symbols as when the variation of the special symbols for the big win B1 is executed are displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 346(b), it is suggested that the jackpot game will be executed in a short period of time by saying "Super jackpot!! Look forward to the next one!!" A notification as if it were a jackpot is executed. As a result, since the held ball that becomes the big win A is actually stored even when the big win A is executed, the performance as if the big win B1 was executed is executed even when the big win A is executed. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel that the ratio of execution of the big win B1 is higher than the design value, thereby improving the interest of the game.

With reference to FIG. 347(a), description will be given of an effect mode when the variation of the special symbol is executed in the time-saving game state (game state with low-probability electrical support) after the jackpot game in the example shown in FIG. FIG. 347(a) shows the state in which the time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot A is executed in the state where the reserved ball that becomes the jackpot A is stored (reserved pattern h2). It is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the design display device 81 .

As shown in FIG. 347(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "during super time" are displayed when the probability variable gaming state is in spite of the time-saving gaming state. is displayed, and further, the characters ``Increase in the degree of expectation for big win'' are displayed, and a display mode suggesting that the degree of expectation is high is displayed instead of actually setting the probability of success/failure determination to be high. As a result, the player is provided with a false notification that is different from the actual one, thereby suppressing a problem that significantly damages the player's trust. In this way, it is also possible to call the notification substantially similar to the variable probability gaming state as a pseudo notification mode.

FIG. 347(b) is an example showing a stopped display mode of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol h2 that has been suspended in FIG. 347(a). The reserved symbol h2 is the result of judging whether or not the jackpot A is successful, and the reserved balls that will be the jackpot (any one of the jackpot A, the jackpot B1, the jackpot B2, and the jackpot C) are not stored. In the same way as in , the even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed, and the notification indicating that the jackpot A is made is executed.

FIG. 348(a) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving gaming state set after the jackpot A jackpot game is executed in the example shown in FIG. 347(b) is set. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode; FIG. As a display mode indicating the time-saving gaming state, as shown in FIG. It is notified that the game is set. In addition, the number (number of times) is decremented by 1 each time the special pattern is changed once.

FIG. 348(b) is a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the big win game in the big win B1 or the big win B2 is executed. As a display mode suggesting that the variable probability game state is set, the characters "under super time (during variable probability)" are displayed to inform the player that the game state is the variable probability game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode is partially different between when the time-saving gaming state is set in the state where the reserved ball that becomes a big hit is stored and when the variable probability gaming state is set. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display the same characters (for example, only during supertime). In addition, the game state is notified by the background color without displaying the characters, and the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state are set in the state where the reserved ball that becomes the big hit is stored. , Similar colors (for example, red background color (probability variable game state), pink background color (time-saving game state in the state in which the retained balls that become big hits are stored))) may be configured to display. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the time-saving gaming state is as if it is a variable-probability gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 349 to 350, the promotion effect executed during the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described. FIG. 349(a) is an example of the display mode of the opening effect executed when the jackpot game is started. When the jackpot game is started, the characters "Big win!! Start!!" are displayed until the specific prize winning port 65a is opened to inform the player that the jackpot game has started.

FIG. 349(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in an over winning promotion effect, which is one of the promotion effects. The over-winning promotion effect is that 10 balls enter the specific winning port 65a in one round, which is the end condition for one round. Based on the fact that the game ball further wins the specific prize winning opening 65a during the period until the opening/closing door 65b is changed to the closed state, the promotion performance is executed in which the information on the jackpot type is reported.

In the over winning promotion effect, the third symbol display device 81 displays the characters "Put the ball into the attacker and get the key!!" There is a display suggesting that the symbol will be displayed (given to the player). In addition, by displaying the text "Treasure box chance when 11 keys are accumulated!" is notified to the player. Since one key is displayed each time the specific winning opening 65a is won, one over winning occurs at the timing when 11 keys are displayed. Therefore, the "Treasure box chance!!" is executed by over-winning. Here, "Treasure box chance!!" stores a reserved ball that, when the treasure box is empty and a treasure is displayed, the type of the jackpot game being executed is jackpot B2 or the above-described jackpot. It is reported that it is a big win A (promoted) in the state of being. Further, when no treasure is displayed in the treasure box, the type of the jackpot game being executed is not notified. When the type of the jackpot game being executed is the jackpot A, the effect of notifying the promotion is not executed. However, based on the memorization of the reserved ball that will become the big win during the big win game, the display mode (the effect of displaying the treasure in the treasure box) informing of the promotion is displayed. may

Next, with reference to FIG. 350, an example of the display mode displayed by the 3rd design display device 81 in the mid-round promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 350(a) shows that when the mid-round promotion effect is selected, when it comes to a specific round (the fifth round in this control example), during the round game, “promotion chance!! !!” is displayed, a mid-round promotion effect is executed, and by pressing the frame button 22, it is suggested (reported) that information regarding the jackpot game type is reported. Here, when the player presses the frame button 22, as shown in FIG. If it is A, a display mode in which a school of fish swims from the right to the left of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed, and it is notified that a high probability game state of "variable GET!!" will be set after the jackpot game. be done. It should be noted that, in the case of the jackpot A in the state in which the above-described jackpot holding ball is stored, the characters "Variable probability GET!!" Is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects will be described. FIG. 350(a) is executed at the end of the jackpot game (after the jackpot round of 16 rounds is finished (the conditions for closing the specific winning port 65a in the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds have passed) are established)). It is an example of a display mode in a normal ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, FIG. 351(b) is an example of the display mode in the ending promotion effect which is one of the promotion effects. When the ending promotion effect is selected, at the end of the jackpot game (the jackpot round of 16 rounds is finished (the closing condition of the specific prize winning port 65a of the 16th round (10 balls won or 30 seconds elapsed) is established)) Later, during the period in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game to be executed is being executed, the characters "LUCY!! Super chance time!!" A special display mode in which a shoal of fish swims (a school of fish) is displayed, and after the jackpot game, a variable probability game state or a time-saving game state in a state in which the above-mentioned reserved ball that will be the jackpot is stored. is displayed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Next, control processing by main controller 110 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 352 and 353. FIG.

The ROM of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that a promotion lottery table 222df is added to the first control example. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the promotion lottery table 222df will be described with reference to FIG. 352(b). FIG. 352(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of this promotion lottery table 222df. A promotion lottery table 222df determines whether or not to report promotion as an over-winning promotion performance based on the value of a performance counter 223h acquired based on occurrence of over-winning to a specific winning port 65a during a round. This is a lottery table for Specifically, when the jackpot game type being executed is the jackpot B2, or when the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm indicating that the player is suggested to execute the jackpot A as if the jackpot B2 was executed is on. , and if the value of the effect counter 223h is any of "0 to 59", a promotion effect indicating that the player has been promoted (in this control example, an effect in which a treasure is displayed in a treasure box) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 353, the contents of the RAM of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. FIG. 353 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM of the audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. In the sixth control example, in contrast to the first control example, the winning fluctuating flag 223dg, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh, the big prize counter 223di, the promoted flag 223dj, the promotion effect type storage area 223dk, and the pseudo probability change flag 223dm are respectively. The difference is that they are added. A detailed description of the same configuration as in the first control example is omitted.

The hit fluctuation flag 223dg is a flag for determining that the fluctuation of the special symbol to be the big hit A is being executed in a state where the reserved ball to be the big hit is not stored. When the hit fluctuating flag 223dg is on, if the variable display of the special pattern can be replaced at the timing when the holding ball that will be the big hit by the winning command is newly stored, the odd number pattern is set. A process of switching to a pattern is executed. As a result, the player can be made to think that even if there is a variation in the special symbol that results in a big win A, it is a big win B1.

The stop symbol replacement flag 223dh wins a replacement lottery executed with a predetermined probability when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big win A is started, and if the reserved ball that becomes the big win is already stored. This is a flag for instructing to switch the stop pattern to an odd numbered pattern. Based on the fact that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is ON, the odd symbols are switched and set when the special symbols start to fluctuate.

The big winning counter 223dj is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the specific winning opening 65a during one round in the big winning game.

The promoted flag 223dj is a flag indicating that a promoted effect (an effect of displaying a treasure from a treasure box) has been executed in the over winning promotion effect executed during the jackpot game. With this flag, it is possible to suppress the problem that the promotion effect is executed again even after the promotion effect is executed.

The promotion performance type storage area 223dk is a storage area in which the type of promotion performance to be executed during the jackpot game is determined when the jackpot game is executed, and the type data of the determined promotion performance is stored.

The pseudo-probability variation flag 223dm is such that, when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big hit A is started, the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped at the odd-numbered symbol in a state where the reserved balls that become the big win are already stored. It is a flag indicating that the replacement lottery controlled to be displayed has been lost. A promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game, or a performance (see FIG. 347(a)) is executed as if the time-saving game state set after the jackpot game is set to the probability variable game state.

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the sixth control example>
Referring to FIG. 354, control processing by the main controller in this sixth control example will be described. The sixth control example differs from the first control example in that the jackpot control processing (Z1004: FIG. 256) is changed to the jackpot control processing 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 354, the jackpot control process 2 (Z1004: FIG. 354) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in this sixth control example will be described. The jackpot control process 2 (Z1004) in the sixth control example differs from the jackpot control process (Z1006: FIG. 256) in the first control example in that the processes of Z1120 and Z1121 are added. Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z1110, if it is not the time to end the jackpot (Z1110: No), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the big winning hole (Z1120). If there is a ball entry (Z1120: Yes), a ball entry command is set (Z1121), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the process of Z1120 that there is no incoming ball (Z1120: No), this process ends. With this ball entry command, the voice lamp control device 113 can also determine the number of game balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a during the round, and can also determine over winning.

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the sixth control example>
Control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 366. FIG. In this sixth control example, command determination processing (Z2113: FIG. 259) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. 356), and variation pattern reception processing (Z2202: FIG. 260) is changed to variation pattern reception, in contrast to the first control example. Processing 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), winning command reception processing (Z2209: FIG. 266) is changed to winning command reception processing 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358), variable display setting processing (Z2114: FIG. 269) is changed to variable display setting processing 2 (Z2114 (Z2107: Fig. 365), frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: Fig. 272) has been changed to frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107: Fig. 366), stop pattern switching processing (Z2450: Fig. 357), Stop symbol change process (Z2460: Figure 359), jackpot related command reception process (Z2280: Figure 359), opening process (Z2282: Figure 360), winning ball process (Z2284: Figure 362), round process (Z2286: Figure 363) and ending processing (Z2288: FIG. 364) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 3 (Z2113) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z2113). The command determination process 3 (Z2113) in the sixth control example is different from the command determination process (Z2113) in the first control example in that the processes of Z2279 and Z2280 are added and the processes of Z2240 and Z2270 are changed. differ in

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 ( Z2279). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 355, variation pattern reception process 2 (Z2240: FIG. 355), which is one process in command determination process 2 (see FIG. 354) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the contents of variation pattern reception processing 2 (Z2240). The variation pattern reception process 2 in the sixth control example differs from the variation pattern reception process in the first control example in that processes Z2430, Z2431, and Z2450 are added. Other processes are the same as those of the first control example, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the processing of Z2226, it is determined whether or not there is a change in the game state (Z2430). Here, the game state is configured to be output from the main controller 110 attached to the variation pattern command. As the game state, a low-probability electric sapo no game state (normal game state), a variable probability game state (with an electric sapo), and a time-saving game state (a game state with a low-probability electric sapo) are set. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (Z2430: Yes), the corresponding game state is set in the background mode storage area 223i, the display state command is set (Z2431), and the process of Z2227 is executed. . On the other hand, in the process of Z2430, if there is no change in the gaming state (Z2430: No), the process of Z2431 is not executed, and the process proceeds to Z2227.

Referring to FIG. 357, stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357) which is one process in variation pattern reception process 2 (FIG. 356) executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 357 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol switching process (Z2450).

In the stop symbol switching process (Z2450: FIG. 357), first, it is determined whether the current variation is the variation of the jackpot A (Z2451). If it is determined that there is no variation in the jackpot A (Z2451: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current variation is that of the big win A (Z2451: Yes), it is determined whether there is another win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452). If it is determined that there is another hit (Z2452: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired and a replacement lottery is executed (Z2453).

After executing the process of Z2453, it is determined whether or not the player has won the replacement lottery (Z2454). When it is determined that the replacement lottery has not been won (Z2454: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2455), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the replacement lottery is won (Z2454: Yes), the stop symbol switching flag is set to ON (Z2456), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2452, if it is determined that there is no other win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2452: No), the win fluctuating flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2457), and this process ends. .

In this way, at the time when the variation of the special symbol that becomes the big hit A is started, if the reserved ball that becomes the big win is stored, a lottery (discrimination) is executed to determine whether to replace the stopped symbol. determination), the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh indicating that symbol replacement is to be executed is set to ON. On the other hand, if the replacement lottery is lost, stop display is performed with an even number of random numbers, the jackpot game is started, promotion performance is executed during the jackpot game, or whether the probability variable game state is reached after the jackpot game. A special notification such as

With reference to FIG. 358, winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 358) executed by MPU 221 of audio ramp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. The winning command receiving process 2 (Z2270) in the sixth control example differs from the winning command receiving process (Z2209: FIG. 266) in the first control example in that stop symbol change process (Z2460) is added. Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 359, the stop symbol change process (Z2470), which is one process in the winning command reception process 2 (Z2270: FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example, will be described. do. FIG. 359 is a flow chart showing the contents of the stop symbol change process (Z2470).

In the stop symbol change process (Z2460: FIG. 359), first, it is determined whether or not the hit fluctuating flag 223dg provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2461). If it is determined that the hit fluctuating flag 223dg is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (Z2461: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit fluctuating flag 223dg is set to ON (Z2461: Yes), it is determined whether the received winning information command is a big win (Z2462). If it is determined that the received winning information command is not a jackpot (Z2642: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the received winning information command is a jackpot (Z2462: Yes), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2463). After executing the process of Z2463, it is determined whether it is a high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464). If it is determined that it is the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: Yes), a display symbol replacement command is set (Z2465), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Z2464, if it is determined that the current period is not the high-speed fluctuation period (Z2464: No), the process of Z2465 is not executed and the process ends.

In this way, at the time when the special symbol that becomes the big hit A starts to fluctuate, even if the held ball that will become the big hit is not stored, the held ball that will become the big hit will be newly changed during the subsequent fluctuation (during the fluctuation). , if it is the high-speed fluctuation period of the special symbol, replacement of the stop symbol (replacement of the odd-numbered symbol with the odd-numbered symbol) is executed. In this way, since it is limited to the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to perform the replacement without discomfort.

Incidentally, even when the high-speed fluctuation period has ended, it may be controlled to replace the stop symbol by performing an effect such as slipping.

Referring to FIG. 360, jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 360) which is one processing in command determination processing 3 (Z2113: FIG. ) will be explained. FIG. 360 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280).

In the jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280: FIG. 360), first, it is determined whether an opening command has been received (Z2281). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (Z2281: Yes), an opening process (Z2282) is executed, and this process ends. Details of the opening process (Z2282) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, referring to FIG. 361, opening processing (Z2282: diagram 361) will be explained. FIG. 361 is a flow chart showing the contents of the opening process (Z2282).

In the opening process (Z2282: FIG. 361), first, the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired (Z2291). Next, based on the value of the effect counter 223h acquired in the process of Z2291, the promotion effect type is selected from the promotion lottery table 222df provided in the ROM 222 (Z2292). Next, an opening effect corresponding to the promotion effect type selected in the process of Z2292 is set by lottery (Z2293). Next, an opening command for display corresponding to the opening effect set in the process of Z2293 is set (Z2294), and the process proceeds to Z2295.

After executing the processing of Z2294, it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295). When it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2295: Yes), it is determined whether there is a big win in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296). If it is determined that there is a big win (Z2296: Yes), the game state is set to "big win" (Z2297), a display state command is set (Z2300), and this processing ends. In the process of Z2295, when it is determined that Z2295 is off (Z2295: No), the process of Z2296 is skipped and the process proceeds to Z2297. On the other hand, in the process of Z2296, when it is determined that there is no jackpot in the winning information storage area 223f (Z2296: No), the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to OFF (Z2298), and the gaming state is changed to the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm. It is set during the jackpot game which is in the OFF state (Z2299), the processing of Z2300 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of Z2281, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (Z2281: No), it is determined whether or not the entering-ball command has been received (Z2283). When it is determined that the ball-in command has been received (Z2283: Yes), the big prize winning-ball process (Z2284) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 362, a big prize winning ball process ( Z2284) will be explained. FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing the details of the big prize winning ball process (Z2284).

In the big winning ball process (Z2284: FIG. 362), first, 1 is added to the value of the big winning counter 223di provided in the RAM 223 (Z2311). Next, it is determined whether the type of promotion effect is over winning (Z2312). When it is determined that the type of promotion effect is not over winning (Z2312: No), a large winning command for display indicating the value of the big winning counter 223di is set (Z2313), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2312: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the big winning counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314). If it is determined that the value of the big win counter 223di is less than 10 (Z2314: No), a big win command for display indicating the value of the big win counter 223di corresponding to the over-win effect is set (Z2315), End this process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning prize counter 223di is greater than 10 (Z2314: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223h is acquired, and based on the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm or the jackpot type, the promotion lottery table 222df A promotion lottery is executed (Z2316).

After executing the processing of Z2316, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect is won (Z2317). When it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z2317: Yes), the value of the big prize counter 223di and the large prize winning command for display indicating the winning of the promotion effect are set (Z2318), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z2317: No), a large winning prize command for display indicating the discrepancy between the value of the big winning prize counter 223di and the promotion effect is set (Z2319), and this processing is executed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of Z2283, if it is determined that the enter-ball command has not been received (Z2283: No), it is determined whether or not the number-of-rounds command has been received (Z2285). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z2285: Yes), round processing (Z2286) is executed.

Here, referring to FIG. 363, round processing (Z2286) which is one processing in the jackpot-related command reception processing (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example. explain. FIG. 363 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round processing (Z2286).

In the round process (Z2286: FIG. 363), first, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect type is over winning (Z2331). When it is determined that the type of promotion effect is not over winning (Z2331: No), it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2332). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2332: No), it is determined whether the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333). When it is determined that the number of rounds is 12R (Z2333: Yes), a round command for display corresponding to the jackpot type or pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set (Z2334), and the SW valid time counter 223k corresponding to the round effect is set. (Z2335), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion effect type is over winning in the processing of Z2331 (Z2331: Yes), or if it is determined that the promotion effect type is ending in the processing of Z2332 (Z2332 : Yes), or if it is determined in the process of Z2333 that the number of rounds is not 12R (Z2333: No), a display command corresponding to the number of rounds is set (Z2336), and this process ends. .

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of Z2285, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z2285: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received (Z2287). If the ending command has been received (Z2288: Yes), ending processing (Z2288) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the ending process (Z2288) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2287, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (Z2287: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2289), and this processing ends.

Referring to FIG. 364, regarding the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364) which is one process in the jackpot-related command receiving process (Z2280: FIG. 360) executed by MPU 221 of sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example explain. FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing the contents of the ending process (Z2288).

In the ending process (Z2288: FIG. 364), first, it is determined whether or not the type of promotion effect is ending (Z2371). When it is determined that the promotion effect type is not ending (Z2371: No), it is determined whether the promoted flag 223dj provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (Z2372). When it is determined that the promoted flag 223dj is set to OFF (Z2372: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is the jackpot B2 (Z2373). When the jackpot type this time is the jackpot B2 (Z2373: Yes), an ending command for display indicating promotion is set (Z2375). On the other hand, in the process of Z2373, when it is determined that the jackpot type is other than the jackpot B2 (Z2373: No), it is determined whether the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374). When the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to OFF (Z2374: No), an ending command for display corresponding to this big hit type is set (Z2376). Incidentally, when it is determined in the process of Z2372 that the promoted flag 223dj is set to ON (Z2372: Yes), the above-described process of Z2376 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of Z2374, when it is determined that the pseudo probability variation flag 223dm is set to ON (Z2374: Yes), the process of Z2375 described above is executed. After executing the processing of Z2375 or Z2376, the game state is set to the end of the jackpot (Z2377), the state command for display is set (Z2378), and this processing ends.

Thus, in this control example, the type of promotion effect is determined at the execution timing of the jackpot game. Then, when the over-winning promotion effect is determined, it is determined during the jackpot game whether or not the content of the promotion by the over-winning promotion effect is notified, and if not executed, the ending promotion effect or the mid-round promotion effect is performed. The process of switching to is executed.

Thus, even if the over-winning promotion performance is determined, the promotion performance can be executed by switching to a different promotion performance even when the frequency of entering the specific winning hole 65a is low.

The variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114). In the variable display setting process 2 (Z2114) in the sixth control example, in contrast to the variable display setting process (Z2114: FIG. 269) in the first control example, the processes of Z2508 and Z2509 are not executed, and the processes of Z2511 to Z2515 are performed. The difference is that the Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of Z2507, it is determined whether the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511). When it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2511: No), the extracted stop type is set as it is (Z2512), the display stop type command is set (Z2513), End this process. On the other hand, in the process of Z2511, when it is determined that the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to ON (Z2511: Yes), the stop type is set with the odd jackpot symbol as the stop symbol (Z2514). Next, the stop symbol replacement flag 223dh is set to OFF (Z2515), the processing of Z2513 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 366, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107: FIG. 366) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 366 is a flow chart showing the contents of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107). The frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (Z2107) in the sixth control example does not execute the processing of Z2808 to Z2810 in contrast to the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (Z2107: FIG. 272) in the first control example. , Z2830, Z2831 and Z2840 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description is omitted.

In the process of Z2807, if it is determined that the frame button has been pressed (Z2807: Yes), it is determined whether or not the effect is being set (Z2830). When it is determined that the effect is being set (Z2830: Yes), the display effect command corresponding to the set effect is set (Z2831), and the sensor input process is executed (Z2813). After executing the sensor input process, other SW processes are executed (Z2840), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2830, if it is determined that the effect setting is not in progress (Z2830: No), the above-described processing of Z2803-2804 is executed, sensor input processing (Z2813), other SW processing (Z2840) and terminate this process.

<Regarding control processing by the display control device in the sixth control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 367 to 370. FIG. The sixth control example is different from the first control example in that command determination processing (Z3302: FIG. 277) is changed to command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (Z3302). The command determination process 2 (Z3302) in the sixth control example differs from the command determination process (Z3302: FIG. 277) in the first control example in that processes Z3430 to Z3435 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of Z3408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice display command for display (Z3408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a pattern replacement command for display (Z3430). When it is determined that there is a symbol replacement command for display (Z3430: Yes), symbol replacement setting processing (Z3431) is executed.

Here, the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431) will be described with reference to FIG. 368(a). FIG. 368(a) is a flow chart showing the details of the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431).

In the symbol replacement setting process (Z3431), first, the odd jackpot symbol stop type table is replaced and set (Z3441). Next, the stop type table and the stop symbol counter are compared to set the stop symbol (Z3442). Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the set stop symbol is set to ON (Z3443), and this process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 367, the description continues. In the process of Z3430, if it is determined that there is no display symbol replacement command (Z3430: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). When it is determined that there is a display state command (Z3432: Yes), game state setting processing (Z3433) is executed.

Here, the game state setting process (Z3433) will be described with reference to FIG. 368(b). FIG. 368(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the game state setting process (Z3433).

In the game state setting process (Z3433), first, the game state indicated by the command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (Z3451). Next, in the process of Z3451, the background color corresponding to the game state set in the background mode storage area 223i is set in the display data table (Z3452), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 367, the description continues. In the process of Z3432, when it is determined that there is no display state command (Z3432: No), it is determined whether there is a display jackpot related command (Z3434). When it is determined that there is a jackpot related command for display (Z3434: Yes), a jackpot related display process (Z3435) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 369, the jackpot related display processing (Z3435) will be described. FIG. 369 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big hit related display process (Z3435).

In the jackpot-related display process (Z3435), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command for display has been received (Z3461). If it is determined that an opening command for display has been received (Z3461: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the opening corresponding to the command is set (Z3462), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the large winning prize command for display has not been received (Z3461: No), it is determined whether or not the large winning prize command for display has been received (Z3463). When it is determined that the large winning command for display has been received (Z3463: Yes), the large winning processing (Z3464) is executed, and this processing ends. Details of the big winning process (Z3464) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z3463 that the large winning prize command for display has not been received (Z3463: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (Z3465). If it is determined that the round number command has been received (Z3465: Yes), a display data table for round display corresponding to the command round number is set, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3465, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (Z3465: No), it is determined whether or not the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467). When it is determined that the promotion round command for display has been received (Z3467: Yes), the display data table for the promotion round effect of the type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3468), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3467 that the promotion round command for display has not been received (Z3467: No), it is determined whether or not the ending command for display has been received (Z3469). If it is determined that a display ending command has been received (Z3469: Yes), the display data table of the ending type corresponding to the received command is set (Z3470), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3469, if it is determined that the display ending command has not been received (Z3469: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z3471), and this processing ends.

With reference to FIG. 370, the big winning process (Z3464: FIG. 370), which is one process in the jackpot related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), will be described. FIG. 370 is a flow chart showing the contents of the big winning process (Z3464).

In the big win process (Z3464), first, in the process of Z3463 of the big win related display process (Z3435: FIG. 369), it is determined whether or not the received big win command for display wins the promotion effect (Z3480). If it is determined that the promotion effect has been won (Z3480: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the number of winning prizes indicated by the received command and the winning effect is set (Z3481), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the promotion effect has not been won (Z3480: No), it is determined whether the received command is out of the promotion effect (Z3482). When it is determined that the received command is the loss of the promotion effect (Z3482: Yes), the display data table of over winning corresponding to the number of prizes indicated by the command and the loss effect is set (Z3483), and this processing is executed. finish.

On the other hand, in the process of Z3482, when it is determined that the received command is not out of the promotion effect (Z3482: No), it is determined whether the received command corresponds to the over winning effect (Z3484). When it is determined that the received command is a command corresponding to the over-win effect (Z3484: Yes), the over-win display data table corresponding to the number of wins indicated by the command is set (Z3485), and this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the processing of Z3484, if it is determined that the received command is not a command corresponding to the over winning effect (Z3484: No), it is determined whether the winning number indicated by the received command number is greater than 10 ( Z3486: No). When it is determined that the number of prizes won is greater than 10 (Z3486: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal over prize effect is set (Z3487), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Z3486 that the number of wins indicated by the number of commands received is less than 10 (Z3486), this process ends.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 371 to 379. FIG. In the first control example, a winning opening that triggers a lottery (fluctuation) based on a first special symbol and a lottery based on a second special symbol that is more likely to result in a lottery result that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol. In addition to the winning opening that triggers (fluctuation) and the sorting device 700 that alternately wins the ball, the electric accessory 640a is placed when winning for a long time as a result of the determination of whether the second special symbol normal symbol is successful. It is configured to be open for a long period of time (two seconds) so that the ball can easily enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加Then, when the normal pattern wins for a long time, the effect is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is made to win the ball in the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加It was constructed so that the player would be motivated to play the game (see FIG. 207).

Further, in the second control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. When the variation of the second special symbol is started at 10:00 a.m., a special effect (see FIG. 291(b)) is executed to give a special feeling to the player. Furthermore, in the second control example, for a predetermined period (for 5 fluctuations of the special symbol) after the time saving state ends, even if the normal state is set as the game state, the special effect is not executed. was configured to As a result, a predetermined number (maximum of 4) of the second special symbol reserved balls is secured (with the second special symbol reserved during the time saving state), and executed when the time saving state ends It is configured so that the above-described special effect is not executed in the second special symbol variation that is executed. This makes it possible to maintain the special feeling of the special performance.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, when winning for a long time, the game is played using the normal symbol fluctuation time (dynamic display period) corresponding to the lottery result. It is different from the first control example in that an effect (long-time open effect) is executed to suggest that a person has won a lottery of normal symbols for a long time.

In addition, it is different from the first control example in that the performance mode of the long open performance is made different according to the timing of winning for a long time as a result of the lottery of normal symbols. It should be noted that detailed descriptions of the same points as those of the control examples described above will be omitted.

The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 371 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 371, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example causes the ball to flow down to the left area (left area) of the variable display device unit 80 in contrast to the first control example described above. A character imitating a "fish" forms the surface of the game board 13 (or forms the surface of the game board 13) as a guidance display mode ZR1 that serves as a guideline for the position at which the ball is to be shot when a game (left-handed game) is played. If the member is made of highly transparent acrylic resin, it is decorated (arranged) inside the game board 13) so that the player can easily see the guidance display mode ZR1.

Further, when playing a game (right-handed game) for causing the ball to flow down to the right side area (right side area) of the variable display device unit 80, the guidance display mode ZR2 that serves as a guideline for the position at which the ball is to be shot is "turtle". is decorated (arranged) on the surface of the game board 13 (or inside the game board 13 when the member forming the surface of the game board 13 is acrylic resin with high transparency), and the player is configured so that the guide display mode ZR1 can be easily visually recognized.

With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp where on the game board 13 the ball should be shot to execute a right-handed game or a left-handed game. In addition, by decorating the surface of the game board 13 with characters (fish, turtle) for guiding the right-handed game and the left-handed game, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to see the game direction. In the case of executing an effect (guidance effect) that guides (a right-handed game or a left-handed game), it is possible to execute an effect that the player can easily grasp visually.

In addition, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is a region (electric accessory If 640a is in the opening operation, the control nail ZK1 is planted so that the rate of the balls flowing down the second winning hole 640 is low. On the other hand, there is a difference in that the nails are planted so that the percentage of balls passing through the opening 710 of the sorting device 700 is low when a right-handed game is played. By configuring in this way, aiming at the sorting device 700, aiming at the left-handed game (first game) for varying (lottery) the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and aiming at the second winning opening 640, the second A right-handed game (second game) in which only 2 special symbols are changed (lottery) can be provided to the player.

As in the first control example described above, when the normal state is set as the game state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is difficult to open. When the left-handed game is generally performed and the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is in a state where it is easy to open, so the player inevitably performs the right-handed game. In addition, for example, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit (4 pieces), the right-handed game is performed further. Even if it does, it is not possible to acquire the reservation of the special pattern (the right to draw (change) the special pattern), so a left-handed game can be played to acquire the reserved ball of the first special pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 372(a), in the present seventh control example, a description will be given of an effect mode displayed during normal symbol fluctuations when the normal symbol wins for a long period of time. FIG. 372(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode (long opening effect) of the third symbol display device 81 during the normal symbol variation that is won per long time. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, there is an effect (long opening effect) indicating that the normal symbol has been won for a long period of time. is displayed, and an opening target mode Za2 imitating the electric accessory 640a to be opened and a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "turtle" indicating the game direction to instruct the player are displayed. As a result, the electric accessary 640a is released to the player, so that the player can easily visually grasp that the right-handed game is to be played.

Further, when the long opening effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. In the seventh control example, when the long opening effect is executed, the third symbol is displayed in the reduced display area Za3. A determination means for determining whether the lottery result of the special symbol variation is a lottery result (big hit, small hit, etc.) advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result of the determination means, a long opening effect and a third pattern are provided. A priority display determination means for determining which of the variable effects is to be displayed preferentially, and a display control means for controlling the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 based on the determination result of the priority display determination means. You can set it. By configuring in this way, it is possible to preferentially display an effect display for showing a game result that is advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the above example, the effect determined to be displayed preferentially (prioritized effect) is displayed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, and the effect determined not to be displayed preferentially (non-prioritized effect) is displayed. It may be displayed in the reduced display area Za3, but in addition to this, for example, a plurality of reduced display areas are prepared with different areas, and non-prioritized according to the game result indicated by the effect determined as the non-prioritized effect. It may be configured such that the size of the area for displaying the effect is variable. Also, the effect display on the side determined as the non-prioritized effect may be configured so as not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Furthermore, in the above-described example, based on the lottery result of the special symbol during variation and the lottery result of the normal symbol during variation, the configuration for varying the display area of each effect (variation effect, long open effect) was shown. In addition to this, for example, a reserved ball number discriminating means for discriminating whether the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more is provided, and based on the discrimination result of the reserved ball number discriminating means It is also possible to change the display area of the long opening effect by using the

Next, with reference to FIG. 372(b), an effect mode during a long-time winning game of normal symbols (during long opening) will be described. FIG. 372(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during a long win (effect during long open). The same elements as those of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 372(b), the characters "OPEN" indicating that the long opening is currently being performed are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the opening object imitating the electric accessory 640a in the opening operation. Mode Za2 is displayed in a display mode indicating an open state. Further, similarly to FIG. 372(a), a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "tortoise" indicating the game direction to instruct the player is displayed, and a third pattern is displayed in the reduced display area Za3.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the long opening effect is regulated will be described. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when the long opening effect is regulated among the display modes of the third symbol display device 81 during a long winning. The same elements as those of the first control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the seventh control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, the long opening effect described above with reference to FIG. In the state where it is difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 640), when it becomes easy for the ball to win in the second winning port 640 (when winning a long time with normal symbols), the state that is advantageous to the player (the first It is configured to surely notify the player of the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol which is likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the special symbol.

When configured in this way, in the normal state immediately after the time saving state ends, for example, in the state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the normal symbol Even when winning for a long time, the above-described long opening effect is executed. Thus, in a state where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit, even if the electric accessory 640a is long-opened and a plurality of balls are entered into the second ball entrance 640, a new reserved ball is obtained. Therefore, there is a problem that the special feeling of the long opening effect cannot be provided to the player.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, even if the normal symbol is elected for a long time during the predetermined period after the time saving state ends (the period until the special symbol is changed five times), the above-described It is configured so that the long open effect is not executed (the effect during the long open effect regulation is executed). As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation for execution of the long opening effect.

As shown in FIG. 373, in the state where the long open effect is restricted, the long open effect shown in FIG. Is displayed. Then, a guidance display mode Za1 imitating a "fish" indicating a right-handed game is displayed as the game direction to be instructed to the player. In this way, even if the normal state is set as the game state, even if the normal pattern is won for a long time, the timing is for a predetermined period (after the time saving state ends, the special pattern changes 5 times. If it is within the period until it is executed), it is possible to surely suppress providing the meaningless long open effect to the player by preventing the long open effect from being executed. can. In addition, immediately after finishing the time saving state in which the variation of the second special symbol is the main, the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is excessively executed by acquiring a large number of reserved balls of the second special symbol again. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long open effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), a period (regulation period) for regulating the long open effect is set. , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special design is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state, that is, the variation of the special design is continuous. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times. In addition, during the regulation period described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), clear the regulation period described above and execute a long open effect can be configured to

Furthermore, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the short working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted according to other conditions. If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, or if continuous effects are set across multiple special symbol variations, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) When it is determined that the held ball contains prize winning information for winning a jackpot, the long opening performance may be restricted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the second control example in that a long release effect flag 223e1 is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the second control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Since the configurations of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 211 of the main control device 110 in the seventh control example are the same, various control processes related to the ball output of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example are the same as those in the first control example described above. is identical to On the other hand, various control processes (control example of the sound lamp control device 113) related to the effect of the seventh control example are the same as those of the second control example except for the points described above. Therefore, the same parts as in the first control example are given the same reference numerals for the various control processes related to ball delivery, and the explanation thereof is omitted. , and the description thereof is omitted.

Since the fluctuation number counter 223aj has been described above in the second control example, detailed description will be omitted, but when the time saving state ends, a predetermined value (5) is set, and the fluctuation display of the third symbol It is a counter that is decremented by 1 when set (when special symbols are changed). In the seventh control example, the long opening effect is not executed until the value of the variation number counter 223aj becomes zero.

The long opening effect flag 223e1 is a flag for indicating that the long opening effect is being executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the long opening effect is being executed. This long opening effect flag 223e1 is when a long-time opening command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and when it is determined that the fluctuation number counter 223aj is not 0 (Z2904 in FIG. 377: No) , is set to ON (see Z2907 in FIG. 377), and is set to OFF when the end command for a long period of normal design is received (Z2911 in FIG. 377).

<Regarding the control process by the main controller in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the main controller in this seventh control example will be described. The seventh control example differs from the first control example in that the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) is changed to a normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: see FIG. 375). Other processes are the same as those in the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 375, the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the seventh control example will be described. The normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) in the seventh control example differs from the normal symbol variation process (Z106: see FIG. 250) in the first control example in that the processes of Z451 to Z453 are added. . Since other processes are the same as those of the first control example, the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 375, when the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171) is executed, the same processes of Z401 and Z402 as those of the first control example are performed, and it is determined in the process of Z402 that the normal symbol is not fluctuating. If so (Z402: No), it is determined whether the long-time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451). This long-time open flag 203i is, as described above in the first control example, in the normal symbol fluctuation start process (Z408: FIG. 251), when it is determined that the normal symbol has been won for a long time (Z426: Yes) , is a flag that is set on (Z428).

In the process of Z451, if it is determined that the long time open flag 203i is set to ON (Z451: Yes), the long time open flag 203i is set to OFF (Z403), and the long time end command is set. (Z452), the process proceeds to Z404. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of Z451 that the long-time open flag 203i is not ON (it is OFF) (Z451: No), the processes of Z403 and Z452 are skipped and the process proceeds to Z404. Then, the same processing from Z404 to Z409 as in the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

In other words, as described above, the long-time open flag 203i is a flag that is set to ON from the timing when the variation of the normal symbol won for a long time starts until the long-time win ends.

In the process of Z402, when it is determined that the normal symbol is currently fluctuating (Z402: Yes), the process of Z410 to Z413 at the same position as the first control example described above is executed, and then a long time hit A middle command is set (Z453), and this processing ends. The long-time hitting command set in Z453 is output to the sound lamp controller 113 by the external output process (Z1001) of the main process (FIG. 255) of the main controller 110. FIG. The sound lamp control device 113 that has received the long-hitting command creates a display command for indicating to the player that the current long-hitting (long open) is in progress, and transmits it to the display control device 114. do. Then, the display control device 114 displays an effect display indicating that the game is being opened for a long time on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372(b)).

<Regarding control processing by the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example>
Control processing by the sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 376 and 377. FIG. In this seventh control example, command determination processing 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) is changed to command determination processing 4 (Z2181: FIG. 376), and long opening effect processing (Z2272) is changed from the second control example. The difference is that they are added. Other processes are the same as those in the second control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 4 (Z2181) executed by MPU 221 of sound ramp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 376 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (Z2181). Command determination process 4 (Z2181) in the seventh control example differs from command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) in the second control example in that processes Z2271 to Z2277 are added.

Here, when the command determination process 4 (Z2181) is executed, first, the same processes Z2201 to Z2209 as the command determination process 2 (Z2152: FIG. 299) of the second control example described above are executed. If it is determined that a special symbol winning command has not been received in the processing of Z2208 (Z2208: No), then it is determined whether a long-time pertinent command has been received (Z2271), and if it is determined that it has been received (Z2208: Yes), a long release effect process (Z2272), which will be described later, is executed, and this process ends. In this long opening effect process (Z2272), a process for setting the display mode of the effect to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the normal symbol wins for a long time is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2271, if it is determined that the related command has not been received for a long time (Z2271: No), Z2256 to Z2260 of the command determination process 2 of the second control example (Z2152: FIG. 299) Similar processing from Z2273 to Z2277 is executed, and this processing ends. That is, in this control example, the main control device 110 is configured to receive a command set based on the lottery result of the normal symbol, and a predetermined command command) is received, an effect can be set to notify the player to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272) will be described. FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing the contents of the long opening effect process (Z2272). This long open effect processing (Z2272) is for executing processing for setting the effect mode of the long open effect in the case of winning a long time per normal symbol, the current game state (normal state, time saving state Or, within a predetermined period after the end of the time-saving state), the production mode is set according to the operation state of the normal symbol (during fluctuation, during a winning game).

When the long opening effect process (Z2272) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long time hit related command received this time is a long time opening command (Z2901). This long-time opening command is a command that is set in the normal symbol variation start process (Z408: FIG. 251) of the main control device 110 when winning a long time of the normal symbol. If it is determined in the processing of Z2901 that it is a long-time open command (Z2901: Yes), then the current game state is extracted from the state storage area 223az (Z2902). Then, it is determined whether the extracted gaming state is in the time saving (the time saving state is set) (Z2903), and if it is determined that it is in the time saving (Z2903: Yes), the object to execute the long opening effect Since it is not a period, this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Z2903, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving (in the normal state) (Z2903: No), then it is determined whether the fluctuation number counter 223aj is greater than 0 (1 or more) ( Z2904). Since detailed description is given in the second control example described above, it will be briefly described, but this fluctuation number counter 223aj is a predetermined number (5 ) is set, and the value is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display setting process is executed, and the period from the end of the time saving state to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation a predetermined number of times (5 times) is a counter that is referenced to determine

In the process of Z2904, when it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Z2904: No), that is, at least five special symbol variations are executed after the time saving state ends If it is determined that the game state is set to the normal state, it is a period in which the long opening effect can be executed, so a long effect command for display is set (Z2906). , the long opening effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2907), and this process is terminated.

Here, the set display long effect command is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode showing a long open effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 372(a)).

On the other hand, in the process of Z2904, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223aj is greater than 0 (Z2904: Yes), that is, in the state where the variation of the special symbol is not executed 5 times after the time saving state ends If it is determined that there is, it is a period in which the long open effect cannot be executed in the state where the normal state is set as the game state, so the left hitting long effect command for display is set (Z2905), and this End the process.

Here, the set left-handed long effect command for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (Z2102: FIG. 258) of the main processing (see FIG. 258) of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. When the display control device 114 receives the display long effect command, it displays a display mode indicating that the long opening effect is being regulated on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 373).

In the process of Z2901, if it is determined that the long hit related command received this time is not the long hit release command (Z2901: No), then it is determined whether or not the long hit middle command has been received (Z2908). . This long-time winning command is set after setting the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary in the normal symbol variation process 2 (Z171: FIG. 375) of the main controller 110, and is set during the long-time winning game. This command indicates that there is

In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the command for a long hit has been received (Z2908: Yes), then it is determined whether the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909), and the long open effect flag is determined. 223e1 is set to ON (Z2909: Yes), a display long open command is set (Z2910), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of Z2909, if it is determined that the long opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (Z2909: No), the process of Z2910 is skipped and this process ends. .

Here, processing of Z2909 will be described. In the seventh control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, the winning lottery at the timing of starting the variation of the normal symbols (the timing at which the normal symbol variation start process is executed), and the electric accessory 640a at the time of winning. (whether long open or not) is determined, and an open command for a long time is set at that timing. Then, after the normal pattern fluctuation time (3 seconds at the shortest, 30 seconds at the longest) has elapsed after setting the open command for a long time, the stop display of the normal pattern (second pattern) is set, and then the electric It is configured to start controlling the operation of the accessory 640a.

Therefore, a time lag of 3 seconds at the shortest and 30 seconds at the longest occurs between receiving the open command for a long time and the command for a long time. In a state where the value of 223aj is greater than 0, the open command for a long time is set.

In the seventh control example, in such a state, in order to prevent the long opening effect from being executed in accordance with the long opening operation of the electric accessory 640a, the long opening command is received in the process when the long opening command is received. In a state where the opening effect flag 223e1 is not set to ON, even if a long-hit medium command is received, the display long opening command is not set. By configuring in this way, for example, the effect of the display mode based on the left-handed long effect command for display (see FIG. 373) suddenly changes to the effect of the display mode based on the long release command for display (FIG. 372(b)). ) can be suppressed from giving the player a sense of incompatibility.

Returning to FIG. 377, the description continues. In the process of Z2908, if it is determined that the command during the long hit is not received (Z2908: No), then it is determined whether the end command for the long hit is received (Z2911), and the end command for the long hit is received (Z2911: Yes), the long open effect flag 223e1 is set to OFF (Z1912), the long open end command for display is set (Z1913), and this processing ends.

In the process of Z2208, if it is determined that the special symbol winning command has not been received from the main controller 110 (Z2208: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 ( Z2279). When it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (Z2279: Yes), a jackpot-related command reception process (Z2280) is executed. The jackpot-related command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of Z2279, when it is determined that the jackpot-related command has not been received (Z2279: No), processing according to other commands is executed (Z2261), and this processing ends.

<Regarding control processing by the display control device in the seventh control example>
Next, control processing by the display control device 114 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 and 379. FIG. The seventh control example differs from the sixth control example in that command determination processing 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) is changed to command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378). Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Command determination processing 3 (Z3321: FIG. 378) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 378 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (Z3321). The command determination process 3 (Z3321) in the seventh control example differs from the command determination process 2 (Z3302: FIG. 367) in the sixth control example in that processes Z3441 to Z3442 are added. Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of Z3408, when it is determined that there is no preview display command for display (Z3408: No), the process of Z3441 is executed. In the process of Z3441, if it is determined that there is no display long open related command (Z3441: No), it is determined whether there is a display state command (Z3432). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a long release related command for display (Z3441: Yes), long release related processing (Z3442) is executed.

In the long release related process (FIG. 379, Z3442), first, the display data table for the long release effect corresponding to the received long release effect command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (Z6201). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table for the long release effect is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (Z6202).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (Z6203), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the setting display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is generated. The clock counter 233h is set (Z6204), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (Z6205).

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the normal state (the state in which the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is difficult to execute) is set as the game state, the normal symbol per long time When winning, it is configured to execute a long opening performance during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, the electric accessory 640a can be opened for a long time for the player, and the game in which the ball enters the second winning hole 640 can be played without fail.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, even if the normal state is set as the game state, there is a high possibility that many reserved balls of the second special symbol are acquired in the normal state, and a predetermined period after the end of the time saving. When it is within, it is configured to regulate the execution of the above-described long opening effect. Thereby, it is possible to improve the quality of the privilege given to the player when the long opening effect is executed (the privilege to easily secure the reserved ball of the second special symbol).

In addition, in this control example, in order to suppress the execution of the long open effect when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (4), a period (regulation period) for regulating the long open effect is set. , After the end of the time saving state, it is a period until the variation of the special design is executed 5 times, but in addition to that, for example, for a predetermined time after the end of the time saving state, that is, the variation of the special design is continuous. It may be a period until the time required to execute five times. In addition, during the regulation period described above, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes a predetermined number or less (for example, 2 or less), clear the regulation period described above and execute a long open effect can be configured to

Furthermore, in this control example, the long opening effect is restricted within a predetermined period after the end of the short working hours, but the long opening effect may be restricted according to other conditions. If the special symbol variation being executed has won a jackpot, or if continuous effects are set across multiple special symbol variations, special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) When it is determined that the held ball contains prize winning information for winning a jackpot, the long opening performance may be restricted.

Specifically, for example, in the process of Z2903 of the long opening effect process (see FIG. 377), after determining that Z2903: No, a process is provided to determine whether the continuous effect flag 223ac is set to ON. When it is determined that the effecting flag 223ac is set to ON, the processing may be terminated without executing the long open effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate effect without changing the order of priority with other effects to be executed.

Further, in the seventh control example, different game methods are displayed on the display screen depending on whether the long opening effect is restricted or when the long opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the long open effect is executed, the second winning device 640 is made to perform a right-handed game in order to win the ball, and when the long open effect is regulated, the distribution device 700 The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is set so as to perform a left-handed game in order to win the ball. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the upper limit (large), the left-handed game is aimed at the first winning opening 64 and the second right winning opening 640, and when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small. can be made to play a game aiming at the second winning hole 640 by a right-handed game.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the game board 13 is changed so that the easiness of the ball flowing down to the distribution device 700 and the second winning hole 640 is different depending on the right-handed game and the left-handed game. Although it is configured, it is not limited to this, for example, by shooting a ball weakly in a left-handed game, the ball can easily reach the second winning hole 640, and a strong left-handed game can be performed. Then, the game board 13 may be configured so that the balls can easily reach the sorting device 700 . As a result, the game result can be greatly changed by slightly changing the operation of the shooting device, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the seventh control example describes a configuration based on the control content of the main controller 110 in the first control example described above, but the control of the main controller 110 used in the first control example described above Without being limited to the content, the control content of the main control device 110 of the second control example, that is, even if it is used in a game machine of the type that executes the lottery (fluctuation) of the second special symbol with priority over the first special symbol good.

In addition, at the end of the game state with electric sapo (game state with low probability electric sapo (time-saving game state) or high probability electric sapo (variable game state)), a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more) of reserved balls Under the condition that the second special symbol is memorized, the performance of the normal symbol for a long time is prohibited (not executed) or the performance of prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64.例文帳に追加It may be configured to switch to and execute. By constructing in this way, even when switching to the normal game state, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbols is small, it is possible to perform the effect of winning the normal symbols for a long period of time, and the player is given a second chance. 2 It is possible to suppress the problem of depriving the player of the opportunity to win a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, when switching to the normal game state, until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 5 times), the effect of the normal symbol for a long time is not performed, or the normal symbol is not produced. is configured to switch to a different effect, but regardless of the game state, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is a predetermined number or more (for example, 3 or more), a long period of normal symbols It may be configured such that the win effect is not performed or the effect is switched to a different effect from the normal time. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to allow the player to play an advantageous game in accordance with the game state. Furthermore, as a condition for not performing a long-time performance of a normal symbol or switching to a different performance from the normal time, regardless of the number of balls held in the second special symbol, if a specific variation pattern is executed (for example , a variation pattern of a big hit, or a variation pattern of super reach) or the like. Alternatively, time information may be obtained from the RTC, and a switching condition may be set at a specific time close to closing (for example, 5 minutes before). The conditions for switching may be set by combining the conditions given in this control example.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 471. FIG.

In the eighth control example, using the rotating effect device 296 arranged on the lower side of the variable display device unit 80, at the end of the special game state (during the ending effect in the big win game), the benefits given after the end of the big win A rotation distribution effect is performed to suggest the amount (the degree of advantage of the player). Rotation distribution production is two passage holes provided in the rotation production device 296 (a first passage hole 296a that suggests 200 times of variable probability and time saving state, and 100 times of time saving state) Among the second passing holes 296b), the privilege given after the jackpot game depending on which passing hole the game ball passes (whether the game state after the jackpot is a variable game state or a time-saving game state) It suggests.

In addition to the conventional frame button press detection switch, a frame button sensor 297 is provided to detect the pressing state of the frame button in a variety of ways (for example, one press detects two presses, half press is detected). detection).

First, with reference to FIGS. 380 and 381, the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example will be described. 380 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 381 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 380, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general prize opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. FIG. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 380, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is affected by the movement of the balls. A playing area is created. The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

Two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 380) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 380) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In the eighth control example, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the lottery for the first special symbol is performed, and when the game ball enters the second ball entrance, the second special symbol is selected. is performed, and when the game ball passes through a normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, a normal pattern lottery is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case where the jackpot type is determined. When the special pattern jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 600, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or (until 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated 8 times (8 rounds) or 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of game balls enter the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 600, so that a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. A plurality of jackpot types are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and after the special game state ends, the game value (game value) according to the jackpot types is given to the player as added value after the jackpot ends. Granted.

In addition, when the lottery of the special symbols is performed, the variable display of the special symbols is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, a special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed. The pattern is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is maximum for each type of ball entrance. It is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display is finished on the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 remains, the lottery for the next special symbol is carried out. , the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the success or failure determination as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is performed. When the normal pattern is hit, the electric accessory attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. become a state. In other words, when the normal symbol wins, the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is likely to be performed.

Further, when the normal symbol lottery is performed, the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has passed, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed. The pattern is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is performing the variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37. It is also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. be.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting state whether or not the lottery for the special symbol that is performed when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is being executed. A variable display is performed, a special symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the variation is completed, or a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The lighting state indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which variation has not been executed among the balls.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbols are being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is four times at maximum. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to four. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of special symbols is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of variation, but also shows a special symbol corresponding to the big win type when the big win is achieved.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 triggers a variable display of a special symbol (first symbol). be done. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later. columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the lottery for the normal symbol performed with the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is being executed by the lighting state, or after the variation is completed. As the stop pattern, the normal pattern according to the lottery result of the normal pattern is indicated by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. is done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory associated with the second ball entrance 640 operates for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in a state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 is achieved. The number of passages of game balls passing through the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of balls that pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, as in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. You may set to the number of times more than times (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. When a game ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. Then, a lottery for a special symbol is made by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 shows a display according to the result of the lottery. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter.

Below the first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640 with an electric accessory 640a is arranged. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is arranged in the lower right portion of the variable display device unit 80, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (5-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated five times (five rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

A second specific prize winning port 600 is arranged on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 . The second specific prize winning port 600 has a bow-shaped opening and closing door, and this opening and closing door rotates clockwise around the lower end, so that the internal flow path of the second specific prize winning port 600 is played. It becomes an open state in which the ball can flow down. On the other hand, when the opening/closing door rotates counterclockwise around the lower end portion, a closed state in which the game ball cannot flow down into the internal flow path of the second specific winning hole 600 is achieved.

When the second specific winning port 600 is opened and a game ball enters the second specific winning port 600, the ball is detected by a ball sensor (not shown), and the ball enters the second specific winning port 600. (For example, payout of 15 prize balls) is performed.

In this control example, the second specific winning opening 600 is opened and closed in the first round of the special game state (jackpot game), and the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed in the second and subsequent rounds. The internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600 has a structure in which one game ball out of the entered game balls is held in the middle of the flow path. A rotation distribution performance is executed using the held game ball. Specifically, the rotation of the rotating effect device 296 is started during the ending effect, and the game balls held with respect to the rotating rotating effect device 296 flow down. The rotation speed and rotation direction of the rotation effect device 296 are controlled with respect to this flow down timing, and the game ball passes through the passage hole that matches the privilege after the big win game that has already been determined according to the big win type.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. When the LED 37a corresponding to the big win is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. A game state in which the second specific winning port 600 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times as a trigger may be formed as a special game state. The relationship between the specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 600 may be reversed, or a specific winning opening other than the specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 600 may be provided.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 381, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 394) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 382, the configuration of the frame button 22 in this control example will be described. FIG. 382(a) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the frame button 22 in this control example viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1 is a partially enlarged perspective view viewed from the side; FIG.

In the eighth control example, a frame button sensor 297 for detecting pressure is placed in contact with the bottom side of the frame button 22 . A depression detection switch (not shown) is provided inside the frame button 22 to determine that the frame button 22 has been depressed when the amount of depression exceeds a certain amount. By pressing the frame button 22 with a strength equal to or greater than a predetermined strength, the frame button 22 is pushed downward and the depression is detected by the depression detection switch (the frame button 22 is pushed to the depression detection position). When the frame button 22 is pushed downward by 2 cm, the push detection switch detects the push (the output is turned on).

The frame button sensor 297 is configured to detect pressing at least with an intensity lower than the strength with which the frame button 22 is pushed to the press detection position. In the eighth control example, by applying a load of 100 g or more to the frame button 22 from above, the button can be pushed to the depression detection position. On the other hand, the frame button sensor 297 is configured to detect pressing by applying a load of 50 g or more to the frame button 22 from above. Therefore, even if the frame button 22 is pressed within a range in which the frame button 22 is not detected to be pressed (i.e., the load applied to the frame button 22 is less than 100 g), the frame button sensor will detect the load as long as a load of 50 g or more is applied. A press is detected by 297 .

In the eighth control example, during execution of the variable display effect, there is a possibility that an effect (button depression effect) prompting the user to operate the frame button 22 is executed as a type of entertainment effect. This button pressing effect includes at least three types of effects: a single button pressing effect, a normal repeated hitting effect, and a double repeated hitting effect. In the one-shot button effect, an effect is executed to urge the player to press the frame button 22 once within a predetermined operation effective period (for example, 5 seconds). It is configured to execute an effect of a display mode according to (result of determination of success or failure). In addition, in the normal continuous hit effect and the double continuous hit effect, when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected for a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, 10 times) within a predetermined operation valid period (for example, 5 seconds), the fluctuation display is performed. It is configured to execute an effect of a display mode according to the type of (appropriateness determination result). Of these, in the double hit effect, in addition to the case where the depression of the frame button 22 is detected (that is, the case where the frame button 22 is pushed to the depression detection position), the depression is detected by the frame button sensor 297 described above. 1 is added to the number of presses. By configuring in this way, in the double hit effect, one operation of pressing the frame button 22 is performed to detect the depression of the frame button 22 and the detection by the frame button sensor 297 twice. Therefore, it is possible to repeatedly hit (depress the frame button 22) at substantially twice the speed. Therefore, even when a player who presses the frame button 22 at a slow speed is playing the game, the upper limit number of times can be easily reached.

In addition, even if the frame button 22 is not completely pressed, the number of pressing times is increased when the frame button sensor 297 is turned on. However, it is possible to proceed with the barrage. Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

FIG. 382(b) is a diagram showing a modification of the arrangement of the frame button 22 and the frame button sensor 297. As shown in FIG. In this modified example, a frame button sensor 297 for detecting pressure is placed in contact with the upper side of the frame button 22 . When deformed in this manner, the frame button sensor 297 can be configured to more easily detect pressing.

In addition, in the eighth control example and its modification, in addition to the case where the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected only during the execution of the double continuous hit effect, the number of presses is also calculated when the frame button sensor 297 detects the pressing. Although it is only configured to add 1 to (the number of repeated hits), it is not limited to this. For example, when the upper limit number of times is reached by detecting the depression by the frame button sensor 297, the details of the effect to be selected, the selection rate, etc. are different from the case of reaching the upper limit number of times by detecting the depression of the frame button 22. It may be configured to be variable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the mode of the double repeated hit effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 383 to 388, the internal flow path of the second specific prize winning port 600 and the rotation effect device 296 used in the rotation distribution effect will be described. The internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600 includes a holding area capable of holding one of the game balls that have entered and discharging the other game balls, and a game ball that has been held. to the rotation effect device 296.

First, with reference to FIG. 383, the details of the holding area in the internal channel of the second specific winning port 600 will be described. FIG. 383 is a partially enlarged front view of the holding area in the internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600. FIG. The internal channel of the holding area is composed of a guiding channel 700 , a holding channel 701 and a stopper member 294 . A performance area is provided at the tip of the stopper member 294, and whether or not the game ball can flow down from the holding area to the performance area is switched by switching the operating state of the stopper member 294.例文帳に追加

In the holding area, one game ball entering the second specific winning hole 600 is held, while the game balls entering after that are discharged without being held. Then, when the stopper member 294 is moved and the game ball can flow down from the holding area to the performance area, the held game ball flows down to the performance area.

First, referring to FIG. 383(a), the structure in which the game ball is held in the internal flow path will be described.

A game ball that has entered the second specific winning hole 600 first flows down the guiding channel 700 and is guided to the holding channel 701 . Specifically, the bottom portion (the surface on which the game ball rolls) of the guide flow path 700 is formed in the lower left direction from the ball entrance of the second specific winning port 600 . The bottom portion of the guide channel 700 has a length that allows one game ball to roll, and the bottom portion is discontinued beyond that point (leftward in front view). Therefore, the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel 700 rolls a distance corresponding to one game ball, and then naturally falls downward.

A holding channel 701 is formed that is inclined downward to the left, starting at a position approximately two game balls below the position where the bottom portion of the guide channel 700 is cut off. The holding channel 701 receives the game ball that naturally falls downward after rolling in the guiding channel 700 . The bottom surface of the holding channel 701 (the surface on which the game ball rolls) is also the length of one game ball, and a stopper member 294 movable in the vertical direction is arranged at the tip (left side in front view). . When the stopper member 294 is in the raised position (see FIG. 383(a)), the game ball received by the holding channel 701 is prevented from flowing leftward by the stopper member, and the holding channel 701 A game ball is held.

With reference to FIG. 383(b), when the game ball is already held in the internal flow path, the structure (flow-down path) in which the game ball entering the second specific winning hole 600 is discharged after that will be described. do.

In a state in which one game ball is held in the holding channel 701, when the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 600, the game ball (M2) guided (naturally dropped) to the holding channel 701 is released. By colliding with the upper right portion of the game ball (M1) already held in the holding channel 701, it repels rightward in the front view. Since the holding channel 701 is formed at a position two game balls below the guide channel 700, even if the game ball (M1) is held in the holding channel 701, (That is, above the held game ball (M1)) a space for one game ball is generated. Therefore, the game ball (M2) that collides with the game ball (M1) already held in the holding channel 701 and repels in the right direction in the front view passes through the space for one game ball and moves downward. will flow down. As a result, while the game ball (M1) is held in the holding channel 701, the game ball that enters after that can be discharged without being held.

Next, with reference to FIG. 384, the details of the rendering area in the internal channel of the second specific winning opening 600 will be described. FIG. 384 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the rendering area in the internal flow path of the second specific prize winning port 600, with the upper left side facing the front side.

FIG. 384(a) shows a state in which the stopper member 294 is moved to the lowered position, and the game ball held in the holding area (holding flow path 701) flows down to the production area (production flow path 702). FIG. 384(b) is a diagram showing a state in which a rotation apportionment effect is being performed as to which passage hole of the rotation effect device 296 the game ball that has flowed down to the effect area passes through. be.

The production area is composed of a production channel 702, a rotating production device 296, and a post-production flow channel 710, and a game ball that has flowed down the production channel 702 passes through any of the rotation production device 296 through holes (definite variable It passes through the passage hole 296a suggesting that the gaming state is imparted, or the passage hole 296b) suggesting that the time-saving gaming state is imparted, and flows down the flow path 710 after presentation. A stopper member 294 is provided on the right side of the effect flow path 702 in front view, and the further right side thereof serves as a holding area for the internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600 shown in FIG.

As described above, when the stopper member 294 is in the raised position, only one of the game balls entering the second specific winning port 600 is held in the holding flow path 701, and then the second specific winning A game ball entering the opening 600 is ejected downward from the path on the right side of the holding channel 701 in front view.

When one game ball is held by the holding channel 701 and the stopper member 294, by moving the stopper member 294 to the lowered position, the game ball held in the holding channel 701 is released as a performance stream. It flows down into channel 702 (see FIG. 384(a)).

The effect channel 702 has a U-shaped cross section and is formed so that the open portion faces upward, and is arranged so as to be gently inclined in the lower left direction. On the back side of the left end of the effect path 702, a passage opening through which the game ball can flow out of the effect path 702 is provided. The moving surface) is provided with an inclined surface 702a so that the rear side is lower than the front side. With this inclined surface 702a, the game ball that has flowed down to the left end of the effect path 702 can be reliably discharged to the outside from the passage port. The game ball that has flowed down to the production flow path 702 in this way flows down from the right side to the left side in front view, and flows out from the passage port on the back side by the inclined surface 702a at the left end.

Here, a rotating effect device 296 is arranged on the back side of the effect path 702 with a small gap (2 mm) therebetween. This rotation effect device 296 is provided with a first passage hole 296a and a second passage hole 296b through which one game ball can pass from the front side to the back side. When the first passage hole 296a or the second passage hole 296b is arranged at a position facing the passage port portion of the effect channel 702, the game ball is discharged from the passage port on the back side of the effect channel 702. Then, the game ball flows down to the rotation effect device 296 (see FIG. 385(a)). On the other hand, when neither the first passage hole 296a nor the second passage hole 296b faces the passage opening portion of the effect flow path 702, the game ball comes into contact with the front side of the rotation effect device 296. . As a result, the game ball is not discharged from the passage port on the back side of the effect path 702, and the game ball stays in the inclined portion 702a (see FIG. 384(b)).

FIG. 384(b) shows a state in which none of the passage holes (the first passage hole 296a and the second passage hole 296b) in the rotating effect device 296 are arranged at positions facing the passage opening portion of the effect path 702. A case is shown as an example. As shown in FIG. 384(b), when the game ball flows down to the passage port in a state where none of the passage holes in the rotation effect device 296 faces the passage port, the inclination formed by the inclined portion 702a causes the front view Gravity acts in the direction of being guided to the back side (back side). As a result, the game ball comes into contact with the side surface of the rotation effect device 296 on the front side (the surface orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation effect device 296). That is, the game ball flowing down the effect path 702 is temporarily held between the inclined portion 702a and the side surface of the rotating effect device 296 on the front side when viewed from the front. This state continues until the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 296 progresses and one of the passage holes is arranged at a position facing the passage opening. The held game ball flows into the passage opening based on being placed in the passage.

Next, referring to FIG. 385, the game ball passes through the first passage hole 296a out of the plurality of passage holes (the first passage hole 296a and the second passage hole 296b) provided in the rotation effect device 296. The path along which the game ball flows will be explained. FIG. 385(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the first passage hole 296a rotates to a position facing the passage opening in the effect path 702 when the game ball reaches the inclined portion 702a. In this control example, when the rotation effect device 296 is rotated so that the first passage hole 296a is at the highest position (the highest position in the height direction when viewed from the front), the first passage hole 296a is positioned on the effect path. It was configured to face the passage opening at 702 . In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged at a position facing the passage opening in the effect path 702 is replaced with the state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the uppermost position. is called.

When the first passage hole 296a rotates to a position facing the passage opening, the game ball rolls along the slope of the inclined portion 702a and flows into the first passage hole 296a through the passage opening.

The game ball that has flowed into the first passage hole 296a flows out to the back side of the first passage hole 296a (that is, the back side of the rotation effect device 296) due to the gravity acting on the inclination of the inclined portion 702a.

Here, with reference to FIG.385(b), the path|route which the game ball which flowed out to the back side of the rotation production|presentation apparatus 296 flows down is demonstrated. FIG. 385(b) is a partially enlarged top view of the position where the rotating effect device 296 is arranged (the effect area in the internal channel of the second specific prize winning port 600).

As described above, the rotating effect device 296 is arranged on the back side of the effect channel 702 . A post-effect passage 710 is disposed on the back side of the rotating effect device 296, and the position in the height direction is such that the top surface of the post-effect flow channel 710 is the lowest point (bottom portion) of the rotating effect device 296. It is located at the same height as

This post-effect flow path 710 is a flow path for discharging the game balls flowing out to the back side of the rotation effect device 296 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . Since the top surface of the flow path 710 after production is the same height as the lowest point (bottom part) of the rotation production device 296, the rotation production device 296 rotates with the ball in the passage hole, and the first passage Even when the position of the hole 296a (or the second passing hole 296b) is rotated (that is, when the position flowing out from the rotation effect device 296 changes downward), the game ball flowing out from the rotation effect device 296 can flow down to the channel 710 after presentation.

The post-effect passage 710 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its size is the depth (front-rear direction in top view) and height (vertical direction in top view) of about one game ball (15 mm). , the width (horizontal direction in top view) is about 10 game balls (120 mm). Furthermore, the upper and lower surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped are provided with openings through which the game balls can pass, respectively. The game ball that has flowed down into the flow path 710 and flowed down the inside of the flow path 710 after the effect is discharged to the outside of the flow path 710 after the effect from the opening of the lower surface, and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. be.

The opening on the upper surface side of the post-effect channel 710 has a right end portion of the first passage hole 296a in a state where the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the uppermost position (see FIG. 385(a)). It is configured to be on the right side of the right end. In addition, the left end of the opening is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged in the uppermost position (that is, the first passage hole 296a is in the leftmost position). Arranged state) (see FIG. 386(a)) so as to be on the left side of the left end of the first passage hole 296a. In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the leftmost position is assumed to be the state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the leftmost position. It is said to be in a state where

In other words, the width of the opening on the upper surface side of the post-effect flow path 710 is the left and right width of the movable first passage hole 296a in the range from the angle at which the first passage hole 296a is at the uppermost position to the angle at which the first passage hole 296a is at the leftmost position. It is configured to be wider than the width in the direction. Specifically, the width of the opening in this control example is about 50 mm.

As a result, even if the first passage hole 296a is arranged at any position from the uppermost position to the leftmost position, the game ball that has flowed out from the first passage hole 296a to the back side is the upper surface side of the channel 710 after the effect. It becomes possible to flow down from the opening of the For example, when the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the uppermost position, the game ball flowing out to the back side of the first passage hole 296a flows down to the post-effect passage 710 through the uppermost position path 710a (Fig. 385(b)).

The state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the leftmost position is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the leftmost position (that is, the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the lowest position). state) (rotation effect device 296 rotates), the movable range of the first passage hole 296a in the left-right direction in top view is the same range as in the case of moving from the uppermost position to the leftmost position. becomes. As a result, even if the first passing hole 296a is arranged at any position from the highest position to the lowest position, the game ball flowing out from the first passing hole 296a to the back side is placed on the upper side of the channel 710 after the effect. It becomes possible to flow down from the opening into the interior thereof.

On the other hand, the opening 710c on the lower side of the post-effect flow path 710 is provided at the left end of the post-effect flow path 710, and is large enough for one game ball to pass through (for example, a diameter of 12 mm). ing. A discharge channel for discharging the game balls that have flowed down to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is connected to the lower surface side opening 710c of the after-effect channel 710, and the discharge channel and the lower surface side of the after-effect channel 710 are connected. A connection with the opening 710c is provided with a rotation ball switch 295 for detecting passage of a game ball by a change in magnetism (magnetic field).

By this rotation entry ball switch 295, in the internal flow path of the second specific winning port 600, the game ball held in the holding area flows down to the production area, and one of the passage holes of the rotation distribution device 296 (second It is determined that the first passage hole 296a or the second passage hole 296b) has been passed.

Details will be described later, but when the first passage hole 296 is at the top position, the game ball can flow down to the back side (post-effect flow path 710), while the second passage hole 296b is at the top position. , the outflow of the game ball is hindered, and when placed at the leftmost position, it is possible to flow down to the back side (post-effect flow path 710).

In any passing hole, the timing at which the game ball can flow in is when it is arranged at the uppermost position, so the game ball flows into the first passing hole 296a and then flows out to the post-effect flow path 710 ( That is, after the game ball flows into the second passage hole 296b, it flows out to the flow path 710 after the effect (that is, it is detected by the rotating ball switch 295). is longer than before

By utilizing the time difference that occurs depending on whether the first passage hole 296a or the second passage hole 296b is passed, it is possible to accurately determine which passage hole has been passed by one rotation ball switch 295. can be discriminated. As a result, the number of switches can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 386, the game ball passes through the second passage hole 296b among the plurality of passage holes (the first passage hole 296a and the second passage hole 296b) provided in the rotation effect device 296. The path along which the game ball flows will be explained. FIG. 386(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the second passage hole 296b rotates to a position facing the passage opening in the effect path 702 when the game ball reaches the inclined portion 702a. In this control example, when the rotation effect device 296 is rotated so that the second passage hole 296b is at the highest position (the highest position in the height direction when viewed from the front), the second passage hole 296b is positioned on the effect path. It was configured to face the passage opening at 702 . In the following description, for the sake of simplification, the state in which the second passage hole 296b is arranged at a position facing the passage opening in the effect path 702 will be replaced with the state in which the second passage hole 296b is arranged at the uppermost position. is called.

When the second passage hole 296b rotates to a position facing the passage opening, the game ball rolls along the slope of the inclined portion 702a and flows into the second passage hole 296b through the passage opening. Here, on the back side of the second through hole 296b and on the rotation center side (the surface on which the game ball rolls when the second through hole 296b is arranged at the uppermost position), a protrusion 296c is provided. (See FIG. 387(a)). The projecting portion 296c prevents the game ball that has flowed into the second passage hole 296b from flowing out to the rear side, and the game ball is held in the second passage hole 296b.

FIG. 386(b) shows a state in which the game ball that has flowed into the second passage hole 296b is held in the second passage hole 296b, and the rotation effect device 296 has rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (second passage hole 296b is arranged at the leftmost position).

When the second passage hole 296b is arranged at the leftmost position, the surface on which the game ball rolls (surface on the vertically downward side) changes. Specifically, when the second through hole 296a is the uppermost position, the surface on which the protrusion 296c is provided is the surface on which the game ball rolls, while the second through hole 296b is the leftmost. In the case of the position, the surface on which the protrusion 296c is not provided becomes the surface on which the game ball rolls. The surface on which the protrusion 296c is provided rotates to the right in front view (see FIG. 387(b)). That is, when the second passage hole 296b is arranged to the leftmost position, the game ball held in the second passage hole 296b is not hindered from rolling by the protrusion 296c, so the second passage It becomes possible to flow out from the hole 296b.

Here, the surface on which the game ball rolls when the second passage hole 296b is arranged at the leftmost position is provided with an inclination so as to descend from the front side to the back side. As a result, the game ball (the game ball held in the second passage hole 296b) that is no longer hindered from rolling by the protrusion 296c is pushed out of the second passage hole 296b by the gravity acting on the game ball due to the inclination. It flows out to the back side.

In this control example, when the second passage hole 296b is arranged at the leftmost position, the surface on which the game ball rolls is inclined downward from the front side to the back side. is not limited to For example, the height of the front side and the back side may be the same (that is, the plane may be horizontal). Thereby, when the second passage hole 296b is arranged at the leftmost position, the game ball can flow out from either the front side or the back side of the second passage hole 296b. In this case, depending on whether it flows out from the front side or the back side, by performing an effect that suggests the privilege to be given after the jackpot game (changing the suggested effect), the player can receive the maximum It is possible to make the player interested in the direction (front side or back side) in which the game balls flow out from the passage hole 296b arranged at the left position, thereby enhancing the interest of the player. Also, by inclining from the back side to the front side, the game ball may naturally flow out to the front side from the second passage hole 296b arranged at the leftmost position.

When the game ball can flow out from the front side of the second passage hole 296b arranged at the leftmost position, a flow path having an opening equivalent to the post-effect flow path 710 is provided on the front side of the rotation effect device 296. should be placed in The flow path arranged on the front side may be configured to extend to the left side in the front view and merge with the flow path 710 after the performance, or may be extended to the bottom in the front view so that the game ball that has flowed down It may be constructed such that it is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without passing through the passage 710 after presentation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 386(c), the path along which the game ball flows down the post-effect flow path 710 will be described. FIG. 386(c) is a partially enlarged top view of the position where the rotating effect device 296 is arranged (the effect area in the internal channel of the second specific prize winning port 600).

As described above, the rotating effect device 296 is arranged on the back side of the effect channel 702 , and the post-effect channel 710 is arranged on the back side of the rotating effect device 296 . As shown in FIG. 386(c), when the game ball flows out from the second passage hole 296b arranged at the leftmost position, it is placed on the left side in the front view compared to the case where it is arranged at the uppermost position. Game balls flow out. This outflow path is referred to as the leftmost position path 710b.

Even when the game ball flows out from the second passage hole 296b through the leftmost position path 710b, the opening of the post-effect passage 710 is provided to the left side of the left end of the second passage hole 296b at the leftmost position. Therefore, the outflowing game ball can be made to flow down to the channel 710 after the effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 387, the case where the game ball passes through the second passage hole 296b will be described. In the explanation in FIG. 386, the case where the game ball passes through the second passing hole 296b will be explained in detail, so it will be briefly explained, but in FIG. FIG. 387(b) is an enlarged front view of the rotating effect device 296 when the second passage hole 296b is positioned at the leftmost position. be.

As shown in FIG. 387(a), when the second passage hole 296b is arranged at the uppermost position, the game ball that has flowed into the second passage hole 296b from the front side flows out to the back side by the protrusion 296c. is inhibited.

After that, when the rotation effect device 296 rotates and the second passage hole 296b becomes the leftmost position, as shown in FIG. Outflow of the game ball in 296b to the back side cannot be inhibited. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the second passage hole 296b is held until the position of the second passage hole 296b changes from the uppermost position to the leftmost position, and then flows out to the rear side.

Next, referring to FIG. 388, the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 296 (the operation of changing the position of the passage hole) will be described. Fig. 388(a) is an enlarged front view of the rotation effect device 296 when the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the highest position, and Fig. 388(b) is a state where the first passage hole 296a is at the highest position. 10 is an enlarged front view of the rotation effect device 296 when rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from .

This rotation effect device 296 is moved (rotated) by one of the operation patterns defined in the rotation device operation table 222d. Details of the operation will be described later, but each operation pattern in the rotating device operation table 222d defines the direction of the rotation operation, the speed of the rotation operation, the number of steps of the rotation operation, etc. for the value of the operation pointer. there is By controlling the rotation of the rotation effect device 296 based on the information such as the direction of the rotation operation according to the value of the action pointer, a predetermined rotation distribution effect can be performed.

Specifically, in the rotation distribution effect, the rotation of the rotation effect device 296 is controlled such that the state in which the first passage hole 296a is arranged at the uppermost position (see FIG. 388(a)) is the initial position. be.

Rotation control is executed based on information such as the direction of rotation corresponding to the value (1) of the first motion pointer defined in the rotation motion table, whereby the first passage hole 296a is positioned at the uppermost position. to an angle that results in a 45 degree counterclockwise position. Next, based on information corresponding to the value (2) of the second motion pointer, rotation is controlled (for example, stop control), and rotation is stopped at that position (angle) for a predetermined time. (See FIG. 388(b)). After this, the rotation apportionment performance is executed by sequentially setting the motions according to the value of the motion pointer.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 393, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this eighth control example will be described. FIG. 389(a) is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 389(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen. , and FIG. 389(b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen.

The third pattern is composed of nine types of main patterns numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is configured to imitate numbers from "1" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "1" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, furoshiki, helmets, etc. that cover almost the entire front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of , in green, small, and to be displayed in front of the attached symbols.

When the lottery result of the special symbols is a big win, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned, and after the variable display is finished, a big win occurs. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, the number of pending balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3, and three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the activated line L1, and the third symbols stop on the activated line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is maintained for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (one second or more), the player can determine whether or not the combination of the third symbols corresponds to the big win (the lottery result of the special symbol is the big win). presence or absence) can be suppressed from being overlooked.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a held ball, a variable display corresponding to a lottery based on the held ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. . In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is maintained until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or until a new start winning is detected (a game ball is newly inserted into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640). continue until the ball is entered). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. It is rare for a player to shoot game balls continuously for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) and not enter either the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In most cases, the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds), the player quits the game and the pachinko machine 10 does not play the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and a demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a game ball newly enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, it corresponds to the new ball entrance. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 is the number of held balls, which is the number of game balls (hold balls) that have not been changed among the game balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , and the small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the preview effect image.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) normally performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or another character ( For example, a character 711 that imitates a robot, etc.) appears to perform an announcement effect.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of ball entries is reserved up to four times for each type of ball inlet, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37 and is also indicated in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. That is, when one reserved ball pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball patterns are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates 4 balls. Further, when the reserved ball number pattern is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. The left half of the small area Ds1 displays a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of held balls based on the number of balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the right half of the small area Ds2 displays the number of held balls. It is configured to display a reserved ball number pattern indicating the number of reserved balls based on the number of balls entered into the 2-ball entrance 640 . FIG. 389(b) exemplifies a case where there are four holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which are both maximum values. As shown in FIG. 389(b), for the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number patterns m1 to m4 imitating a bird's face are displayed as the reserved ball number patterns corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. As the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the reserved ball number symbols m5 to m8 imitating an egg are displayed. In addition, on the left side of each reserved ball number symbol in the front view, an execution pattern m0 is displayed for indicating to which entrance the currently executed variation display is based on the reserved ball corresponding to which entrance. be. FIG. 389(b) exemplifies the case where the variable display corresponding to the entry into the first special symbol 64 is executed, and a symbol imitating a bird's face is displayed as the executed symbol m0.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each suspended up to four times. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391, the display mode (effect mode) displayed during the jackpot ending period in the eighth control example will be described. Here, in the eighth control example, as described above, in the first round of the jackpot, the game ball that has won the second specific winning port 600 and is held in the holding channel 701 in the holding area is During the ending period, an effect is executed to flow down to the effect flow path 702 side and pass through any one of the passage holes 296a and 296b provided in the rotation effect device 296. - 特許庁The type of passage hole through which the game ball passes is determined by lottery according to the game state (type of jackpot) provided after the jackpot is completed. Although details will be described later, in this eighth control example, only 100 times of time saving state is given after the end of the jackpot, and the jackpot type (jackets A, C) where the probability change state is not given, and the time saving state after the jackpot end, and the probability change There are provided jackpot types (jackpots B and D) in which both states are given 200 times. When one of the jackpots A and C is achieved (that is, when only the time-saving state is given 100 times after the jackpot ends), a rotation performance device 296 is executed as a rotation apportionment performance executed during the jackpot ending period. Of these, an effect in which the game ball passes through the second passage hole 296b to which the number "100" is attached is always determined. On the other hand, when either the jackpot B or D is reached (that is, when both the variable probability state and the time saving state are given 200 times after the jackpot ends), the game ball is called "LUCKY" as a rotation distribution effect. The effect of passing through the first passage holes 296a with letters is determined at a rate of about 76%, and the effect of passing through the second passage holes 296b with the number "100" is determined at a rate of about 24%. be done. In addition, the 200-time variable state and the time-saving state are given (that is, during the execution of the jackpots B and D), the second passage hole 296b with the number "100" attached in the rotation distribution effect (i.e., an effect suggesting a shift to a disadvantageous game state) is executed, then the game state is changed to an advantageous game state (variable probability of 200 times, and time saving state). is executed (see FIG. 392(a)).

First, FIG. 391(a) is a diagram showing a display mode when the jackpot ending period is started. As shown in FIG. 391, when the ending period of the jackpot has started, the game ball enters the first passing hole 296a of the rotary display device 296 as the ending effect on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. A display content is displayed that suggests that the player will be in an advantageous state by throwing the ball. That is, an image simulating the first passing hole 296a is displayed, along with the text "If the ball enters, the chance time is doubled!?" Also, in the lower right portion of the display screen, the characters "attention" and an image resembling an arrow pointing in the lower right direction (that is, the direction in which the holding channel 701 is provided) are displayed. With these display contents, attention can be drawn to the flowing direction (type of passage hole through which the game ball is held in the holding channel 701) in the first round of the jackpot. In addition, by passing through the first passage hole 296a, it shifts to a more advantageous game state (a game state in which both the variable probability state and the time saving state continue until the lottery of 200 special symbols is completed after the end of the big hit). The player can easily understand that. In the eighth control example, the period in which the normal symbol working hours are set (that is, the period in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed) is all referred to as "chance time". That is, both the probability variable state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols and the low probability state of the special symbols and the time saving state of the normal symbols are both called "chance time".

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(b), a description will be given of a display mode when a button pressing effect is executed, which is a type of display mode that can be executed (displayed) during execution of the rotation distribution effect. The button pressing effect is a effect that allows the player to determine the timing at which the stopper member 294 moves to the lowered position during execution of the rotation apportionment effect. More specifically, a predetermined validity period is set during which the operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 is valid, and the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected within the valid period (the player presses the frame button 22). In this case, the stopper member 294 is moved to the lowered position at the timing when the depression is detected. This button effect sets a relatively advantageous game state as compared to the case where a relatively unfavorable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big win (that is, only the 100 time reduction state is set). (That is, both the variable probability state and the time saving state are set to 200 times) are configured so that the ratio of execution is higher (see FIG. 412(a)). Therefore, when the button-pressing effect is executed, the player's expectation for setting an advantageous game state can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 390(b), when the button pressing effect is executed, the characters "Aim!" is displayed, and a gauge-like image indicating the length of the remaining time of the period (effective period) for accepting pressing of the frame button 22 is displayed. This gauge-like image is controlled so that its length becomes shorter with the passage of time, and the gauge disappears (the length becomes 0) when the effective period expires. According to these display contents, by pressing the frame button 22 while the gauge indicating the effective period remains, the game ball held in the holding area can be made to flow down toward the rotation effect device 296. can be easily understood by the player. Therefore, the player can press the frame button 22 at a desired timing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 391 and 392, the display mode when the result display effect of displaying the result of the rotation apportionment effect is executed will be described. FIG. 391(a) is a diagram showing the display mode of the result display effect displayed when passing through the second passage hole 296b to which the number "100" is attached in the spin distribution effect. As shown in FIG. 391(a), when passing through the second passage hole 296b to which the number "100" is attached in the rotation distribution effect, a female character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Along with the characters being displayed, the characters "100 chance times" are displayed on the right side of the display screen. As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the number of chance times given after the end of the big win is likely to be relatively small (that is, 100 times). As described above, in the eighth control example, in some cases (approximately 24%) when shifting to a relatively advantageous game state (that is, when the number of chance times given is relatively large) , an effect in which the game ball passes through the second passing hole 296b suggesting 100 chance times is executed. In this case, after the display mode shown in FIG. 391(a) is once displayed, a transition to an advantageous game state is notified by a resurrection effect (see FIG. 392), which will be described later. By configuring in this way, even when 100 chance times are notified by the rotation apportionment performance, it is possible to expect the resurrection performance to occur, so that the ending period can be extended until the end of the ending period. It is possible to keep the expectation of transitioning to an advantageous game state (200 chance times awarded).

FIG. 391(b) is a diagram showing a display mode of the result display effect displayed when passing through the first passage hole 296a to which the character "LUCKY" is attached in the spin distribution effect. As shown in FIG. 391(b), when passing through the first passage hole 296a to which the character "LUCKY" is attached in the rotation distribution effect, a female character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Along with the character being displayed, the text "Chance time 200 times" is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The female character displayed on the display screen has a more flashy appearance than the character displayed when 100 chance times are reported. With these display modes, the player can easily understand that the game state will be shifted to a more advantageous game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 392, the chance time revival effect that may be executed after 100 times of the chance time is announced in the result display effect will be described. This chance time resurrection performance is a case where 200 chance times (shorter working hours for normal symbols) are provided after the end of the big win, and the second passing hole 296b with the number ``100'' attached as a rotation apportionment performance. When the effect of passing through (a passing hole suggesting 100 chance times) is executed, it is executed in the result display effect. That is, it is a display mode that is displayed after the display mode shown in FIG. 391(a) is once displayed.

As shown in FIG. 392, when the chance time resurrection effect is executed, characters “×2” are displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, a sound effect in the form of a voice “Queen” is output from the voice output device 226 . To make a player easily understand that 100 times of chance time has been doubled (that is, 200 times of chance time has been given) by these performance modes (display mode and sound mode). can be done. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 393, a composite touch effect, which is a type of interest effect in the eighth control example, will be described. Here, in the eighth control example, at least two types of configurations (operating devices) of the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are provided as configurations that can be operated by the player. In the eighth control example, an input effect for prompting an operation (input) to at least one operation device can be executed during execution of the variable display effect. The composite touch effect is a type of input effect, and is a mode of effect prompting the user to operate both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 .

FIG. 393(a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of the composite touch effect. As shown in FIG. 393(a), when the composite touch effect is started, a character 711 imitating a robot is displayed in the small area Ds2. In addition, the text "Combined Chance!!" is displayed in the small area Ds3, and a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical display area is displayed below it. The characters "PUSH" are displayed on the left side of the display area, and the characters "TOUCH" are displayed on the right side of the display area. In addition, in the main display area Dm, an image imitating the frame button 22 (frame button image) is displayed in front of the changing third pattern, and below the frame button image, the text "Move your right hand" is displayed. Is displayed. These display contents allow the player to understand that pressing the frame button 22 can move the right hand of the robot-like character 711 . Further, on the right side of the frame button image, an image imitating the touch sensor 290 (touch sensor image) is displayed, and below the touch sensor image, the characters "Move your left hand" are displayed. These display contents allow the player to understand that the left hand of the robot-like character 711 can be moved by touching the touch sensor 290 . For example, 5 seconds is set as a period for accepting operations on the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 (operation valid period). By operating the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 during the operation valid period (5 seconds), the character 711 performs an action indicating the degree of expectation for the big win.

FIG. 393(b) is a diagram showing a display mode when the composite touch effect is executed and the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) before the touch sensor 290 is pressed. As shown in FIG. 393(b), when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) first, an effect is executed in which a character 711 imitating a robot moves its right hand up and down. This effect of moving the right hand up and down continues until the composite touch effect ends. Furthermore, the display area (left half) to which the letters "PUSH" are attached in the oblong substantially elliptical display area displayed in the small area Ds3 appears to be turned off. Also, in the main display area Dm, the image simulating the frame button 22 and the characters displayed therebelow disappear. With these display modes, the player can understand that the reception of the operation (pressing) on the frame button 22 has started the effect in which the character 711 moves its right hand up and down.

FIG. 393(c) shows a display mode when it is detected that the player has touched (operated) the touch sensor 290 while the frame button 22 has already been pressed during execution of the composite touch effect. It is a diagram. Here, during the execution of the composite touch effect, if both the action of pressing the frame button 22 and the action of touching the touch sensor 290 (manipulation of each operation device) are executed within a predetermined valid period, a character 711 imitating a robot is executed. performs an action (drawing mode) in accordance with the timing at which each operation means is operated. More specifically, a character 711 that imitates a robot performs an action content of moving both hands symmetrically up and down (first presentation mode), and an action content of moving both hands asymmetrically up and down (second presentation mode). Aspect) and one of the effects. The effect of the operation content (first effect mode) in which both hands are symmetrically moved up and down is configured so that the ratio of determination is high when the variation display of the big win is being executed, while the left and right hands are asymmetrically moved. The effect of the operation content (second effect mode) to move up and down in the second direction is configured so that the ratio of determination is high when the variation display of the loss is being executed. More specifically, when an operation to the second operating device is detected within one operation effective period in the composite touch effect, the first effect mode effect is executed at a rate of 60% in the case of a big win ( The production of the second production mode is executed at a rate of 40%), while the production of the first production mode is executed at a rate of 10% in the case of failure (the production of the second production mode is executed at a rate of 90%). The production of the production mode is executed). Therefore, when the composite touch effect is executed, the player can play the game expecting that the effect of the first effect mode will be executed. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplification of the description, the effect of the first effect mode (the content of the motion in which both hands are symmetrically moved up and down) will be referred to as a matching motion.

FIG. 393(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when a matching operation is executed by the player touching the touch sensor 290 after pressing the frame button 22. FIG. As shown in FIG. 393(c), with the frame button 22 pressed first (see FIG. 393(b)), the timing corresponding to the matching operation (matching defined in the composite determination table 222h is determined). When it is detected that the player has touched the touch sensor 290 at a timing within the range of the random number value), a character 711 imitating a robot moves both hands symmetrically up and down, and the character 711 says "Banzai!" is executed. In addition, the characters "matching" are displayed in the small area Ds3, and the image simulating the touch sensor 290 displayed in the main display area Dm is erased. These display contents make it possible for the player to easily understand that the timing of touching (operating) the touch sensor 290 coincides with the timing corresponding to the matching operation, and the matching operation has been executed. As described above, the ratio of execution of the matching operation is higher in the case of a big win, so the player's expectation for the big win can be enhanced.

In the eighth control example, when two operating devices are operated within a predetermined effective period, the timing of operating the second operating device does not coincide with the predetermined execution timing of the matching operation. (if the value of the composite timing counter 223ab acquired at the timing of detecting the operation matches the random value corresponding to the matching action defined in the composite determination table 222h), the matching action is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the matching operation based on the type of operating device that is operated first (that is, the order in which each operating device is operated). More specifically, for example, at the start of execution of the matching action (or at the start of variation), the matching action becomes executable (when the second operating device is operated, whether or not to execute the matching action is determined). The order of operation of the operation means for executing the determination (whether the frame button 22 is operated first or the touch sensor 290 is operated first) is determined by lottery. If the order of operations determined by the lottery and the order of operations actually performed by the player are contrary to each other, an operation (robot operation) different from the matching operation is performed regardless of the timing at which the second operation device is operated. A character 711 that imitates the character 711 moves both hands up and down in a left-right asymmetrical state). That is, only when each operation device is operated in an operation order that matches the operation order determined by lottery within the effective period of the composite touch effect, the composite determination table 222h (see FIG. 421(b)) and the second operation It may be configured to determine whether or not the matching operation can be executed according to the value of the composite timing counter 223ab acquired at the timing of operating the device. With this configuration, even if the matching action is not executed, the player can be made to think that the operation order is different from the operation order decided by lottery. , even if the matching operation is not executed, it is possible to keep the expectation for the big win.

Further, for example, the method of determining whether the matching operation can be executed may differ depending on the order of operation of each operation device (the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290). More specifically, for example, when the operation devices are operated in the first operation order (for example, the operation order of touching the touch sensor 290 after pressing the frame button 22), matching is performed in the case of a big win. The rate at which the action is performed is high (e.g., matching action is performed 80% of the time), but the rate at which matching action is performed in the case of a miss is also high (although not as much as in the case of a jackpot) ( For example, the matching operation may be performed at a rate of 40%). On the other hand, if the operation devices are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order (for example, an operation order in which the frame button 22 is pressed after touching the touch sensor 290), a big win is made. In the case of , the ratio of executing the matching operation is low (for example, the matching operation is executed at a rate of 20%), but the expectation of the jackpot when the matching operation is executed is extremely high. good too. That is, in the case of deviation, the matching operation may not be performed at all, or the matching operation may be performed only at an extremely low probability (for example, only at a rate of 0.01%). That is, a composite determination table 222h having different prescribed contents (that is, the ratio of determining that the matching operation is performed for each lottery result is different) is provided for each operation order, and the matching operation is performed according to the operation order. It may be configured to vary the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the case of winning. By configuring in this way, the ratio of executing the matching operation is high, but the possibility of losing due to the execution of the matching operation is high, and the ratio of executing the matching operation is low. The player himself/herself can be allowed to select the playability that will almost result in a big win when executed, depending on the order of operation of the operating device. Therefore, since the game performance when the composite touch effect is executed can be changed according to the player's preference, the game performance can be realized according to the player's preference.

In the eighth control example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the matching operation is performed based only on the timing at which the player operates the second operation device, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is configured to determine whether or not to permit the determination of whether or not the matching operation can be executed when an operation on one operating device is detected during one effective period of the composite touch effect. Then, when it is determined not to permit the determination of whether or not the matching operation can be executed, control is performed so as not to perform the lottery itself as to whether or not the matching operation can be executed even if an operation on another operating device is detected. If it is determined that the determination of whether or not the matching operation can be executed is permitted at the time of operation on the operating device, when an operation on another operating device is detected, similar to the eighth control example described above, the composite determination table 222h A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the matching operation can be executed. Alternatively, for example, when an operation to each operating means is detected, a determination (lottery) using the composite determination table 222h is executed, and matching operation is executed for all determinations (lottery). The matching operation may be configured to be executed only when it is determined. By adopting a configuration in which the lottery as to whether or not the matching operation can be executed is executed in a plurality of stages in this way, even when performing the first operation within the validity period, the user can perform the operation with a sense of expectation that the matching operation will be executed. can be done. Further, in this case, the ratio of determination to execute the matching operation may be varied within the validity period. Specifically, for example, during the first 1 second (within 1 second after the valid period starts) or the last 1 second (4 seconds after the valid period starts) in the operation valid period of 5 seconds If the two operating devices are completely operated at the same time, the proportion of execution of the matching operation in the case of a big win may be higher (for example, 80%) than in other cases. Also, for example, the matching operation is executed when the first operating device is operated during the first second and the second operating device is operated during the last second. It is good also as a structure which makes the ratio which is carried out high.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 394, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 394 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 395, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the display on the second symbol display device 83, and the setting of the display on the third symbol display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the special winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type are selected. A special hit type counter C2 to be used, a stop type selection counter C3 for determining the stop type of special symbols (reach hit type, off other than reach (off length A, off short A), reach off type), variation pattern selection and an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1. Also, a normal winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and a normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 427), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 439). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved first to fourth areas) for storing the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol. A special pattern 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) for holding is provided, and a special pattern holding common to the first special pattern and the second special pattern is provided. A ball execution area is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special winning random number counter C1, a special winning type counter C2, a stop type selection counter C3, and a variation type counter are provided in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. Each value of CS1 is stored. Similarly, for each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, similar values are stored in accordance with the ball entry timing to the second ball entrance 640, respectively.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the second entrances (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The special hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 65535), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 65535 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 65535). It is configured to return. In particular, when the special winning random number counter C1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special winning random number counter C1.

The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special winning random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0-65535, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0-65535. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 427) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 439).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM203. The value of the random number that becomes the special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 397(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special symbol jackpot random number counter C1. is equal to the value of the random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined as a special symbol jackpot. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high. The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 397(a)) for special symbol high probability and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 397(a)) for special symbol low probability , are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 .

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and is incremented one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). , and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot, that is, the special symbol is out. If it is a random number, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol is out.

On the other hand, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in , is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the special winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. . In this embodiment, four types of jackpot types are set: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D". One of "jackpot B", "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" is determined. Then, the display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

The special winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 65535. FIG. In this special winning random number counter C1, there are 328 random numbers that become a special symbol jackpot when the probability of special symbols is low, and the random numbers "0 to 327" are the special symbol jackpot random number table for when the probability is low. 202a. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 328 among the total number of random numbers of 65535, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "328/65535".

On the other hand, when the probability of special symbols is high, there are 329 random numbers for the special symbol jackpot, and the values "0 to 328" are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability. . In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 329 out of the total number of random numbers of 65535, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "329/65535".

The reason why the jackpot probability is composed of a poor difference between the low probability state and the high probability state is that 100 fluctuations in the low probability short time state and 200 fluctuations in the high probability short time state, Each has a similar (or the same) production mode, and in the low-probability time-saving state and high-probability time-saving state, within the same number of fluctuations (100 times), there is no sensible difference in winning the jackpot, while on the other hand (high probability In order to make the time saving state) a variation mode (variation 200 times) in which the superior game state continues for a long time, such a configuration is used.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the random number value to be a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time and the random number value to be the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time. In order to prevent duplicate values, random numbers are set for each jackpot. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), the random number value for the big win is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

Further, the value of the special winning type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. And, as shown in FIG. 398(a), a jackpot type selection table 202d for determining the jackpot type is set.

The jackpot type selection table 202d, when the variation of the special symbol stops, determines that the lottery result in the variation is a jackpot, and the value of the special hit type counter C2 set (acquired and stored) in the special symbol holding ball execution area. A determination value for collation (determination) with the value is stored in association with the jackpot type.

FIG. 398(a) is a data table schematically showing the contents of this jackpot type selection table 202d. In the jackpot type selection table 202d, the jackpot type when the random number in the obtained special hit type counter C2 is "0 to 24" is "jackpot A". In addition, when the value was "25 to 46", the jackpot type was "jackpot B", and when the value was "50 to 74", the jackpot type was "jackpot C" and "75 to 99". As for the jackpot type in each case, "jackpot D" is set.

Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that four types of winning (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2. It is

In addition, since the selection ratio of the jackpot type to be selected when the determination result is a jackpot between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, the player is provided with the first special pattern and the second special pattern. The player can enjoy the game without worrying about which of the two is used for the lottery.

In addition, since the selection ratio of the probability variation jackpot to which the probability variation is given for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same (50%), the probability variation ratio is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, The game machine as a whole is configured so that the probability variation ratio is constant. In addition, when the type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of a big hit is the blue symbol and the case of the red symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variable jackpot is the same (50%). Therefore, even when a blue symbol hits the jackpot, it is configured so as not to impair the expectation of the probability variable jackpot.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, and super reach are determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 described above. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 A pattern variation mode is determined. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 439) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 397 (b)) storing a random value for determining the variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 .

As shown in FIG. 397(b), the variation pattern selection table 202b includes a normal variation pattern selection table 202b1 used in the game state (normal game state) when the success/failure determination probability of normal symbols is low. , and time-saving variation pattern table 202b2 used in the game state (high-probability game state or time-saving game state) when the winning/failure determination probability of normal symbols is high probability are set respectively. Further details will be given in the explanation of the selection of the variation pattern in the audio ramp control device 113, which will be described later. Based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, rough fluctuation pattern contents (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and fluctuation time are determined, and a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined contents is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 399 to 400, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when main controller 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 399 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. In the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1, various variation patterns are set corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter A value of CS1 is assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the special hit type counter C2 that has been acquired) is set. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for each of the number of held balls (1 to 4 or 5 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 399, when the success/failure determination result is a win, if the jackpot type is any one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C", hold If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 50" for 1 to 8 balls (that is, regardless of the number of held balls), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "51 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot D", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is either "0 to 60" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "61 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected, and the variation The super reach jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 198".

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern with a long variation time of normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "0 to 209" for the number of held balls 1 to 4, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for the number of retained balls 5 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , Outlier Short A (Variation No. 11) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "210 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 245", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198" Out-of-reach A (variation No. 9) is selected, and when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is one of "246 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

In this way, if the result of the judgment is out, the number of held balls is small (if it is 1 to 4) and the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is set to be easily selected, so during that time the second By entering the game ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it becomes easier for the ball to be held, and a period during which the special symbol fluctuation is stopped occurs (a period during which the lottery game is not performed) (occurs), which can suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game. In addition, when the number of held balls is large, by setting the selection rate of normal reach and super reach low, when the number of held balls is large, normal reach and super reach are changed, so that the player can see the success judgment result. can be expected to be a hit.

FIG. 400 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the time saving variation pattern table 202b2. In the time saving variation pattern table 202b2, various variation patterns are set in correspondence with the lottery results of the special symbols, and for each of the variation patterns, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 and values are assigned. Also, if the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the special hit type counter C2 that has been acquired) is set. Further, when the result of the judgment is out, a variation pattern is set for the number of held balls (either 1 to 2 or 3 to 8) at the start of variation.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 400, if the result of the win/fail judgment is a win, if the jackpot type is any one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C", the If the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 90" for 1 to 8 balls (that is, regardless of the number of held balls), the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "91 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected.

If the jackpot type is "jackpot D", the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 100" for 1 to 8 pending numbers (that is, regardless of the number of pending balls) , the normal reach jackpot A (variation No. 1) is selected for the value "0 to 198" of the variation type counter CS1. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "101 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot A (variation No. 2) is selected, and the variation Super reach jackpot B (variation No. 3) is selected when the value of the type counter CS1 is "101 to 159", and super reach jackpot C (variation No. 4) is selected when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "160 to 198". selected. When the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 100" and the super reach jackpot D (variation No. 5) is selected, and the variation The super reach jackpot E (variation No. 6) is selected for the value of the type counter CS1 of "101 to 198".

In this way, when the success/failure determination result is a big hit, a variation pattern with a long variation time of normal reach or super reach is selected regardless of the number of reservations. Therefore, by executing a variation pattern with a long variation time, it is possible for the player to expect that the win/loss determination result will be a big win.

On the other hand, if the success/failure determination result is out, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 209" for 1 to 2 pending balls, the variation type counter When the outlier length A (variation No. 7) is selected for the value of CS1 "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "210 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 When normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected for the value "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is When super reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected for "0 to 198" and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is " 0 to 198”, super reach out B (variation No. 10) is selected.

Also, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "0 to 199" for the number of held balls 3 to 8, the value of the variation type counter CS1 "0 to 198" , short deviation B (variation No. 11) is selected, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "200 to 229", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198" When the normal reach out A (variation No. 8) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "230 to 239", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super to "0 to 198" When reach out A (variation No. 9) is selected and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is any one of "240 to 250", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is super reach with respect to "0 to 198" Outlier B (Variation No. 10) is selected.

Here, the variation time (variation period) in the short deviation B variation pattern is set to 2000 ms (2 seconds), which is shorter than the variation time that can be selected in the normal variation pattern selection table 202b1. there is As a result, when the success/failure determination result is out and the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, the out short B is selected with a high probability, so that the special symbols can be changed a lot in a short time. , the period until it is determined to be a big win (the period between big wins) can be easily shortened, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The normal hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the normal winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 397 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is If the value of the random number set by the normal winning random number table 202c matches, it is determined as a normal symbol winning. In addition, this normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 397(c)) is for when the probability of the normal design is low (period in which the normal state of the design is normal) and the probability of winning the normal design from the low probability time. It is divided into two types, one for high probability (a period in which normal symbols are in a time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that will be a big hit included in each is set differently. Further, as for the types of normal symbol wins, normal wins and long-time wins are set, and the values of the normal win random number counter C4 are set respectively.

Here, the normal winning of the normal symbol is in the normal game state (low probability game state), and in the jackpot game state, the operation of operating the electric accessory 640a to the open state with the opening time of 0.2 seconds is executed once. It is a hit. In addition, during the time saving period, during the probability variable period, the operation of opening the electric accessory 640a in the open state for 2 seconds is repeated twice. On the other hand, the long-time win is a win in which the action of opening the electric accessory 640a to the open state for 2 seconds is repeated twice regardless of the game state.

In the present embodiment, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a executed during the variable probability period during normal winning is set to be the same as the opening operation during long winning. may be opened. Specifically, for example, the open state operation may be performed once for three seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enter the ball more into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 during a long winning period, and during the normal game, the variable display of the second special symbol is possible. can be easily executed, and the player can enjoy the change of the game performance by the variable display of the second special symbol in which a fresh notice display or the like is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 397(c), when the probability of the normal design is low, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 6, the normal winning of the normal design is determined to be Also, if it is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that it is a long time hit of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the probability of the normal design is high, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is any one of 5 to 204, it is determined that the normal winning of the normal design. In addition, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the long-time hit of the normal pattern is not set, but when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is the same as that of the long-time hit. The hit is substantially the same as the long time hit.

In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be reduced, and the frequency with which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to increase the consumption of game balls by the players and increase the profit of the game parlor. On the other hand, during the short time period and the variable probability period where the probability is high, the opportunity for the electric accessory 640a to operate can be given with a probability of “1/1.2”, and the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 It is possible to increase the chance of entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress consumption of game balls by the player and set a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can spend more time playing the game.

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal patterns, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the second pattern display device 83 displays the variable normal patterns. Runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 6", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , the symbol "○" is illuminated. Then, if the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is "5 to 6", the electric accessory 640a is opened (opened) only "0.2 seconds x 1 time" as a normal win. In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the electric accessory 640a is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols are won. The time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 397(c)). In this way, when the probability of special symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the variable display of the normal symbols is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning is done, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) , and the electric accessory 640a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short from 30 seconds to 3 seconds, and the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→2 seconds×2 times”, the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 . In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "2 seconds x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 427). , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 439).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 394, the description continues. The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power interruption (including the time of power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 439) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 438) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 437) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

As shown in FIG. 396(a), the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 contains the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 397(a)) and the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 397(b)). See), normal per random number table 202c (see FIG. 397 (c)), jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 398 (a)), state setting table 202e (see FIG. 398 (b)), prize command table 202f is set. Although omitted in this control example, the ROM 202 stores various data necessary for the game, programs, etc., in addition to the above.

FIG. 398(b) is a data table schematically showing the contents of the state setting table 202e. The state setting table 202e includes an ending command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 based on the jackpot type of the lottery result, and a time-saving medium counter 203j which is a parameter necessary for setting the game state after the jackpot of the special symbol is finished. A variable probability counter 203i and a variable probability flag 203m are set.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", the ending command is set to ending A, the content of the variable probability counter 203j is set to 100, and the content of the probability variable counter 203i is 0 is set, and the content of the variable probability flag 203m is set to OFF.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C" or "jackpot D", the ending command is set to the ending B, the content of the variable probability counter 203j is set to 200, the content of the variable probability counter 203i is set to 200, The content of the variable probability flag 203m is set to ON.

FIG. 401 is a data table schematically showing the contents of the winning command table 202f. In the winning command table 202f and the look-ahead processing (S520: FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the determination results such as the variation pattern selected at the start of variation of the stored held ball are determined, and the determination result is determined. is a table for determining winning commands corresponding to . As shown in FIG. 401, when the result of the lottery in the look-ahead is a big win, a winning command corresponding to the determined big win type and the selected variation pattern type is determined. Thereby, not only the variation pattern type and the success/failure determination result but also the jackpot type can be notified by the winning command, and more detailed information can be notified. Further, when the lottery result is a loss, a winning command corresponding to each variation pattern type is determined. It should be noted that the same winning command "C100" is set in the winning command table 202f for the variation pattern types of long loss A, short loss A, and short loss B as loss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 396(b), the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, an opening number counter 203g, an opening time counter 203h, a probability variable counter 203i, and a time saving medium counter. 203j, a variation execution flag 203k, a probability variation flag 203m, a big hit flag 203n, a variation order storage area 203p, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the first special symbol and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored. Also, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a normal random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area ) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( ), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (waiting number of times) of the variable display performed on the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. 1 is added (see S505 in FIG. 432). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S206 in FIG. 428).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S207 in FIG. 428 and S506 in FIG. 432). . The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640, and other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

The voice lamp control device 113, whenever the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are changed, the main controller 113 according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of pending balls in the variable display that is held in 110 . As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the displayed number of held balls deviates from the displayed actual number of held balls, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and every time the number of held balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of held balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The normal design reserved ball number counter 203f counts the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal design (second design) performed by the second design display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to 4 times. A counter that counts up to The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. See S704 in FIG. 436). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 434).

When the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding variable display in normal symbols) is less than 4, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 436). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (Fig. 436 S703: No).

The number-of-opening counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of times the electric accessory 64c is opened. The opening time counter 203h is a counter for counting the opening time of the electric accessory 64c.

The variable probability counter 203i is a counter that counts the number of times the game state of the special symbol changes in the variable probability game state (high probability game state). The probability variable counter 203i has an initial value set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set ( (see S1111 in FIG. 440).

Specifically, 0 is set for the jackpot A or jackpot C, and 200 is set for the jackpot B or jackpot D. During the probability change counter 203i that has been set, when the value of the probability change counter 203i is not 0 in the game state update process (Fig. 431: S209) that is executed when stopping the variable display of the special symbols that are out 1 is subtracted (S406).

The time saving medium counter 203j is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state, and if the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern time saving state. If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203j is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols. The initial value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, and each time a special symbol jackpot is determined, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set. (See S1111 in FIG. 440).

Specifically, 100 is set for the jackpot A or the jackpot C, and 200 is set for the jackpot B or the jackpot D. The set time-saving medium counter 203j is set to 0 (S220) when stopping the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit, and is executed when the variable display of the special symbol that becomes a loss is stopped. (Fig. 428: S223), when the value of the counter 203j during time saving is not 0, 1 is subtracted (S402). If the result of the subtraction is 0 (S403: Yes), the state command indicating the normal state to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S404).

The variation execution flag 203k is a flag for identifying whether the variation of the first special symbol is to be performed or the variation of the second special symbol is to be performed. In this control example, variation is started in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 (the order that is reserved and stored). Here, when the variation of the special symbol is stopped and the variation of the next special symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is started, variation execution determination processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (S204: FIG. 429) Based on the order data of the reserved storage stored in the fluctuation order storage area 203p to be described later, the fluctuation stored next is the reserved data corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the corresponding variation execution flag 203k is set to ON according to the determination result (S245, S247 in FIG. 429).

The probability variation flag 203m is a flag for determining whether the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state. This variable probability flag 203m is set (S1111) based on the jackpot type in the jackpot control process (S1104: FIG. 440) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In addition, in the processing within the special symbol variation processing (S104: FIG. 428) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, when stopping the variation display of the special symbol that becomes a big hit, it is set to OFF (S220), and it is out. In the game state update process (Fig. 431: S223) executed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, when the value of the probability changing counter 203i becomes 0 (S407: Yes), set to OFF ( S408) is done, and the game state of the special symbol becomes the normal game state (low probability game state).

The jackpot middle flag 203n is a flag indicating that the game state of the special symbol is a jackpot game. In the process of S221 of the special symbol variation process (S104: FIG. 428) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, this jackpot middle flag 203n is set to ON when the start of the jackpot game is set. Also, in the process of S1112 of the jackpot control process (S1004: FIG. 440) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends.

The change order storage area 203p is an area in which the reservation order is stored when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball. In this control example, the variation of the special symbols is configured to be executed in the order in which they are reserved and stored, and one of the special symbols is not preferentially executed. By starting the fluctuation in the order in which they are held and stored, it is possible to prevent the held balls to be digested from being biased to one side, so the overflow of held balls (detection of incoming balls exceeding the upper limit of the number of held balls) can be made less likely to occur.

In the other memory area 203z, necessary flags, counters, storage data, etc. in other control processes executed by the MPU of the main control unit 110 are set, but details thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 437) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle 51b is turned off (not operated) to stop the shooting of the ball. A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the background mode displayed at the time of super reach. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the content of the presentation.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 402(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 contains a variation pattern selection table 222a, a rotation performance selection table 222b, a rotation operation time setting table 222c, a rotation device operation table 222d, and a result display determination table 222e. , an input effect setting table 222f and an effective timer setting table 222g are stored.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is a selection table for determining variation patterns based on variation pattern commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. A plurality of variation patterns are set corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the variation pattern type, and one variation pattern is determined by acquiring a counter value for selection (not shown).

Rotation production selection table 222b, based on the ending command output from main control device 110, rotation operation (execution operation) set to rotation production device 296 during execution of rotation distribution production, and its rotation vibration. This is a table for setting a display command corresponding to a rotation motion (execution motion) during execution of a minute effect. This rotating effect selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 412(a).

FIG. 412(a) schematically shows the contents of the rotating effect selection table 222b. In this rotating effect selection table 222b, the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is assigned to the type of the ending command received from the main controller 110, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is divided into the ending From the start of the production (see FIG. 390 (a)), refer to set the display rotation production execution command for displaying the production corresponding to the execution operation of the rotation production device 296 and the rotation operation of the rotation production device 296 By pressing the frame button 22, it is possible to cancel the type of the data table (one of the rotation operation A table 222d3 to rotation operation C table 222d5, which will be described later) and the storage state of the game balls held by the stopper member 294. The contents of the button release flag 223m that determines whether or not to execute the button pressing effect (see FIG. 390(b)), the data table of the switching operation for switching the rotating motion after the button pressing effect, and the rotation effect device 296 are executed. Result display command for display for specifying the result display corresponding to the operation (Fig. 391 (a), Fig. 391 (b), Fig. 392), and when the jackpot is made during the time saving state, or the time saving state has ended In this case, the content of the reversal return operation flag 223n necessary for determining whether or not to perform the return operation of the rotation effect device 296 is set.

Specifically, the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 190" for the "ending A" (that is, the ending of the jackpot type with 100 chance times after the jackpot). In this case, the execution performance A1 is determined as the rotation performance execution command for display, the rotation motion A table (entering the second passage hole 296b) is determined as the execution motion of the rotation performance device 296, and the contents of the button release flag 223m. is determined to be OFF (no button depression effect), no switching operation of rotation operation is determined, result display A (100 times (see FIG. 391(a))) is determined as the result display command for display, and the reversal return operation is determined. It is determined that the flag 223n is turned on (there is a reverse return operation). If the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 198", the execution effect A2 is determined as the display rotation effect execution command, and the rotation operation A table ( The ball enters the second passage hole 296b) is determined, ON (there is a button depression effect) is determined as the content of the button release flag 223m, the switching operation A table is determined for the switching operation of the rotation operation, and the display result display command Result display A (100 times (see FIG. 391(a))) is determined as the above, and ON (reverse return operation is present) is determined as the reverse return operation flag 223n.

For "ending B" (that is, the ending of the jackpot type with 200 chance times after the jackpot), if the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 100", it is displayed. Execution performance B1 is determined as the rotation performance execution command for rotation performance, rotation motion B table (entering the first passage hole 296a) is determined as the execution motion of the rotation performance device 296, and the content of the button release flag 223m is OFF (button pressed No effect) is determined, no rotation operation switching operation is determined, result display B1 (200 times (see FIG. 391(b))) is determined as the result display command for display, and the reverse return operation flag 223n is turned off ( no reverse return operation) is determined. If the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "101 to 150", the execution effect B2 is determined as the display rotation effect execution command, and the rotation operation C table ( The ball enters the second passage hole 296b) is determined, the content of the button release flag 223m is determined to be off (no button depression effect), the rotation motion switching motion is determined to be absent, and the result display B2 is determined as the result display command for display. (Resurrection effect to 200 times (see FIG. 392)) is determined, and the reversing return operation flag 223n is determined to be OFF (no reversing return operation). If the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "151 to 190", the execution effect B3 is determined as the display rotation effect execution command, and the rotation operation B table ( The ball enters the first passage hole 296a) is determined, the content of the button release flag 223m is determined to be ON (there is a button depression effect), the switching motion of the rotation motion is determined in the switching motion B table, and the result display command for display is determined. Result display B1 (200 times (see FIG. 391(b))) is determined as a result, and OFF (no reverse return operation) is determined as the reverse return operation flag 223n. If the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "191 to 198", the execution effect B4 is determined as the display rotation effect execution command, and the rotation operation C table ( The ball enters the second passage hole 296b) is determined, ON (button depression effect) is determined as the content of the button release flag 223m, the switching motion A table is determined for the switching motion of the rotation motion, and the display result is displayed. The result display B2 (resurrection effect to 200 times (see FIG. 392)) is determined as a command, and OFF (no reversal return operation) is determined as the reversal return operation flag 223n.

When it is time to start the ending period of the jackpot, the execution operation (the aspect of the rotation operation during the execution of the distribution rotation effect, and the effect mode) according to the ending type indicated by the ending command and the value of the effect counter 223f ) is selected.

Returning to FIG. 402(a), the description continues. The rotation operation time setting table 222c sets the operation time of the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 296 during execution of the rotation distribution effect (value of the operation timer 223q) and the time until the execution of the result display effect in the rotation distribution effect is started. It is a data table that defines the longest waiting period (result display waiting time). Details of the rotation operation time setting table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 401(b).

FIG. 401(b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the rotation time operation setting table 222c. In this rotation time operation setting table 222c, a rotation distribution effect is stored for each rotation operation content determined at the start of the ending period (that is, at the start of the rotation distribution effect) by referring to the rotation effect selection table 222b. During the execution of the rotation operation execution time (timer value of the rotation operation timer 223q), and when the state of not being detected by the rotation entry switch 295 continues, the longest until the execution of the result display effect is started. A timer value corresponding to the waiting time (result display waiting time) is defined.

Specifically, when the rotation operation is the rotation operation A table, the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is determined to be 26200 ms, and the result display waiting time is determined to be 23000 ms. When the rotation operation is the rotation operation B table, the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is determined to be 29400 ms, and the result display waiting time is determined to be 26200 ms. When the rotation operation is the rotation operation C table, the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is determined to be 29400 ms, and the result display waiting time is determined to be 26200 ms.

Returning to FIG. 402(a), the description continues. The rotation device operation table 222d is a data table referred to for controlling the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 296. FIG. In this rotating device operation table 222d, the contents of the rotating operation of the rotating effect device 296 for each elapsed time (rotating operation timer 223q) are defined. Details of the rotating device operation table 222d will be described with reference to FIGS. 413 to 418. FIG.

FIG. 413(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the rotating device operation table 222d. As shown in FIG. 413(a), the rotating device operation table 222d includes an initial operation table 222d1, a reverse return operation table 222d2, a rotation operation A table 222d3, a rotation operation B table 222d4, a rotation operation c table 222d5, and a switching operation A. A table 222d6 and a switching operation B table 222d7 are provided.

The initial operation table 222d1 is a table for setting the contents of the operation to be executed by the rotation effect device 296 when the power is turned on. The initial operation table 222d1 is referenced in the start-up process (see FIG. 441) executed when the power is turned on, and the value (14800 ms) of the rotation operation timer 223q, which is the execution operation time, is read and set in the rotation operation timer 223q. be. The execution motion based on this initial motion table 222d1 is started by setting 1 to the rotation motion status storage area 223q in which data indicating the state (status) of the rotation effect device 296 is stored. The execution motion based on the initial motion table 222d1 is read out in the rotation initial motion processing (S2504: FIG. 449) (see S2602 in FIG. 449), and the motion is started at low speed in the forward rotation direction for 6400 ms. 50 PPS) and rotates 320 steps counterclockwise (operation pointer 1 (see FIG. 413(b))). After that, it is in a stopped state for 2000 ms (operation pointer 2 (see FIG. 413(b))). After that, during 6400 ms, it rotates 320 steps in the backward direction at low speed (50 PPS) to make two clockwise rotations (operation pointer 3 (see FIG. 413(b))).

The reversal return operation table 222d2 is a data table referred to when the rotation effect device 296 is rotated counterclockwise by half (180 degrees backward rotation operation). The reversal return operation table 222d2 is executed when the jackpot starts or when the game state changes from the time saving state (low probability time saving state or high probability time saving state) to the normal state. , is set as a table showing the operation contents of the execution operation when the content of the reversing return operation flag 223m, which will be described later, is ON (S2442). ), the execution operation specified in the reverse return operation table 222d2 is started. The execution operation of the reversing operation table 222d2 is read out (S3002) in the reversing operation (S2510: FIG. 453), and for 1600 ms after the start of the operation, the operation is performed at a low speed (50 PPS) in the backward rotation direction at 80 By rotating stepwise, the rotation rendering device 296 rotates counterclockwise by 180 degrees.

The rotation operation A table 222d3 is a data table that defines the operation contents (execution operation) of the rotation effect device 296 for entering the game balls stored in the holding area into the second passage hole 296b. As described above, the rotation operation A table 222d3 is set when the ending command received from the main controller 110 is "ending A". S2461) is performed, and 2 is set in the rotation operation status storage area (S2469), thereby starting the operation.

FIG. 414 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation operation A table 222d3. The operation of the rotation operation A table 222d3 is to read the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer (S2702) for the required time corresponding to the elapsed time of the rotation operation timer 223q in order from "1" of the operation pointer. The defined (prescribed) operation is performed until the pointer reaches "28".

Specifically, after the start of the ending of the jackpot, the action data with the action pointer set to "1" (960 steps forward at 100 PPS for 9600 ms) is executed and counterclockwise at high speed. Rotate 6 times. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer set to "2" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data with the motion pointer set to "3" (100 PPS for 200 ms and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, the counterclockwise direction is rotated 45 degrees at high speed, and the initial position (Fig. 388 388(a)) is moved counterclockwise by 45 degrees (see FIG. 388(b)). Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "4" (suspended for 600 ms).

Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "5" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the robot rotates 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, 90 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "6" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "7" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps forward rotation) is executed, and the robot rotates counterclockwise at high speed by 45 degrees, 135 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "8" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "9" (100 PPS for 200 ms, and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the robot rotates counterclockwise at high speed by 45 degrees, and rotates 180 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise.

Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "10" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "11" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, 225 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "12" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "13" (100 PPS for 200 ms, and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the robot rotates counterclockwise at high speed by 45 degrees, and rotates 270 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "14" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "15" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, 315 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "16" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "17" (100 PPS for 200 ms and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and it rotates counterclockwise at high speed by 45 degrees to reach the initial position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "18" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "19" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, 45 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "20" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "21" (100 PPS for 200 ms, and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed, and the robot rotates counterclockwise at high speed by 45 degrees, and rotates by 90 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (suspended for 600 ms) whose operation pointer is "22". Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "23" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, 135 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "24" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "25" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, and 180 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise.

Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "26" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "27" (movable 320 steps forward at 50PPS for 6400ms) is executed, and the robot rotates counterclockwise twice at a low speed, 180 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. After that, the operation pointer becomes "28" and the operation ends. As a result, the operation of the operation contents shown in FIG. 403 is realized.

It should be noted that, in the operation of the rotation operation A table 222d3 when the execution effect A1 is selected, when 17.6 seconds of the storage standby time (t2) elapses after the operation is started, the flow path storing the balls The solenoid 294 is actuated, the retention is released (see FIG. 384(a)), and the ball falling through the flow path 702 is positioned so that the rotation effect device 296 can enter the second passage hole 296b. (From the initial position to 180 degrees counterclockwise (Fig. 386(a)) (action pointer ``22'' to ``24'') When the rotation effect device 296 reaches a position where the ball can be entered into the second passage hole 296b (the operation of the action pointer "25" is completed), the ball enters the ball entrance (296b). (See FIG. 386(a)).

As for the operation of the rotation operation A table 222d3 when the execution effect A2 is selected, the button effective period (t4) is 4.8 seconds after the stored standby time (t3) of 13.4 seconds has elapsed since the operation started. Seconds, pressing the frame button 22 activates the channel solenoid 294, making it possible to release the stored balls. 2.4 seconds after the start of the button effective period is the switching effective period (t5), and if the frame button 22 is pressed during this period, the switching timing is 15.8 seconds after the start of the operation. At (tk), the operation of a switching operation A table 222d6, which will be described later, is started. As a result, the operation contents illustrated in FIG. 405 are realized.

Also, if the frame button 22 is pressed within the button valid period after the switching valid period has passed, the stored ball is released at the timing of pressing the frame button 22, but the operation after that is the same as the case described above. Similarly, the ball passes through the flow path 702 and is stored in the front side surface of the rotation effect device 296 and the flow path 702a, and enters the ball entrance (296b). As a result, the operation contents illustrated in FIG. 404 are realized.

It should be noted that during the operation pointer "17" to "18" (800 ms) during the button valid period, the rotating effect device 296 passes through the position (initial position) where the ball can enter the first passage hole 296a. Even if the channel solenoid 294 is moved by pressing the frame button 22 during this time to release the storage, the time required for the ball to reach the first passage hole 296a via the channel 702 is longer than this operation. Since it is longer than the time (800 ms) during which the pointers "17" to "18" are executed, even if the frame button 22 is operated at the right timing, it is impossible to make the ball enter the first passage hole 296a. ing.

The rotation operation B table 222d4 is a table that defines operation contents for the rotation effect device 296 to enter the ball stored in the flow path solenoid 294 into the first passage hole 296a (see FIG. 385(a)). . As described above, the rotation operation B table 222d4 can be set when the ending command received from the main controller 110 is "ending B". S2461 of 447) is performed, and 2 is set in the rotational operation status storage area (S2469), thereby starting the operation.

FIG. 415 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation operation B table 222d4. The operation of the rotation operation B table 222d4 is to read out the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer (S2702) during the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the rotation operation timer 223q in order from "1" of the operation pointer, and perform the operation. The defined operation is performed until the pointer reaches "36".

Specifically, after the start of the ending of the jackpot, the motion data starting with the motion pointer "1" is executed. 222d3, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "27" (100 PPS for 200 ms and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed and 225 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "28" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "29" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, and 270 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "30" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "31" (100 PPS for 200 ms, 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed, 315 degrees from the initial position. It will be in a position where it has moved counterclockwise. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "32" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "33" (100 PPS for 200 ms and 20 steps in the forward rotation direction) is executed to rotate 45 degrees in the counterclockwise direction at high speed to reach the initial position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "34" (suspended for 600 ms). Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "35" (320 steps in the forward rotation direction at 50 PPS for 6400 ms) is executed to rotate counterclockwise two times at a low speed to reach the initial position. After that, the operation pointer becomes "36" and the operation ends. As a result, the operation contents illustrated in FIG. 406 are realized.

It should be noted that, in the operation of the rotation operation B table 222d4 when the execution effect B1 is selected, when 17.6 seconds of the storage waiting time (t2) elapses after the operation is started, the flow path storing the balls The solenoid 294 is actuated to release the storage (see FIG. 384(a)), and the ball falling through the flow path 702 is sent to the ball entrance 296a of the first ball hole by the rotation effect device 296. Until the position where the ball becomes possible (initial position (see FIG. 385(a))) (operation pointer ``30'' to ``32'') is stored in the front side of the rotation effect device 296 and the flow path 702a (See FIG. 384(a)), and when the rotation effect device 296 reaches a position where the ball can be entered into the first passage hole 296a (the action of the action pointer "33" is completed), the ball entry hole Enter the ball into 296a (see FIG. 385(a)).

As for the operation of the rotation operation B table 222d4 when the execution effect B3 is selected, the button effective period (t4) is 4.8 seconds after the stored standby time (t3) of 13.4 seconds has elapsed since the operation was started. Seconds, pressing the frame button 22 activates the channel solenoid 294, making it possible to release the stored balls. A period of 2.4 seconds after the start of the button effective period is a switching effective period (t5), and if the frame button 22 is pressed during this period, the switching timing is 19.0 seconds after the start of the operation. At (tk), the operation of a switching operation A table 222d6, which will be described later, is started. As a result, the operation contents illustrated in FIG. 409 are realized.

Also, if the frame button 22 is pressed within the button valid period after the switching valid period has passed, the stored ball is released at the timing of pressing the frame button 22, but the operation after that is the same as the case described above. Similarly, after passing through the flow path 702 and stored in the front side surface of the rotation effect device 296 and the flow path 702a, the ball enters the first passage hole 296a. As a result, the operation contents illustrated in FIG. 408 are realized.

It should be noted that during the operation pointer "25" to "26" (800 ms) during the button valid period, the rotating effect device 296 passes through the position (initial position) where the ball can enter the second passage hole 296b. Even if the channel solenoid 294 is moved by pressing the frame button 22 during this time to release the storage, the time required for the ball to reach the second passage hole 296b via the channel 702 is Since it is longer than the execution time (800ms) of the pointers "25" to "26", even if the frame button 22 is operated at the right timing, it is impossible to make the ball enter the second hole 293b. It's becoming

The rotation operation C table 222d5 is a table that defines operation contents for the rotation effect device 296 to enter the ball stored in the flow path solenoid 294 into the second passage hole 296b. Also, the operation until the game ball M1 enters the second passage hole 296b is the same as that of the rotation operation A table 222d3, but the rotation operation A table 222d3 is different in that the position where the movement stops at the end of the operation becomes the origin position. different from

As described above, the rotation operation C table 222d5 is set when the ending command received from the main controller 110 is "ending B", and is selected by the rotation effect selection table 222b at the end of the jackpot (S2461 in FIG. 447). 2 is set in the rotation operation status storage area (S2469), and the operation is started.

FIG. 416 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the rotation operation C table 222d5. The operation of the rotation operation C table 222d5 is to read out the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer (S2702) for the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the rotation operation timer 223q in order from "1" of the operation pointer (S2702). The defined operation is performed until the pointer reaches "28".

Specifically, after the start of the ending of the jackpot, the motion data starting with the motion pointer "1" is executed. 222d3, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the motion data of which the motion pointer is "27" (movable 400 steps in the forward rotation direction at 50 PPS for 8000 ms) is executed, rotates counterclockwise at low speed two and a half times, and reaches the initial position. . After that, the operation pointer becomes "28" and the operation ends. As a result, the operation contents illustrated in FIG. 407 are realized.

Regarding the operation of the rotation operation C table 222d5 when the execution effect B2 is selected, the operation contents from the start of the operation until the ball enters the second passage hole 296b (see FIG. 386(a)). has the same operation contents as the execution effect A1, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Also, regarding the operation of the rotation operation C table 222d5 when the execution effect B4 is selected, the operation from the start of the operation until the ball enters the second passage hole 296b (see FIG. 386(a)). Since the contents are the same as those of the execution effect A2, detailed description thereof will be omitted, but the execution actions are defined so as to realize the contents of the actions shown in FIG. 410 or 411. FIG.

The switching operation A table 222d6 is a table that defines the operation contents of switching the execution operation of the rotation effect device 296 in the middle and making the ball enter the second passage hole 296b. As described above, the switching action A table 222d6 is based on the ending command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223f. , the rotation operation C table 222d5. That is, an execution action that may be executed when the button pressing effect occurs during execution of the execution effect A2 or B4 and the player presses the frame button 22 is defined. This switching action A table 222d6 is referred to after the switching timing (tk) when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected during the switching valid period (t5) in the execution effect A2 or B4 (the execution action is read out). can be used).

FIG. 417 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the switching operation A table 222d6. In the operation of the switching operation A table 222d6, the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer are read (S2907) in order from "17" for the required time corresponding to the passage of time of the rotation operation timer 223q (S2907). The defined operation is performed until the pointer reaches "24".

Specifically, after the switching timing (tk), the motion data starting with the motion pointer “17” is executed, but the motion data with the motion pointer “17” (reverse rotation at 100 PPS for 200 ms) 100 step movement in the direction) is executed, and it is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction at a high speed, resulting in a position moved counterclockwise by 270 degrees from the initial position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "18" (suspended for 600 ms). The motion data of which the motion pointer is "19" (100 steps in the backward rotation direction at 100 PPS for 200 ms) is executed, and the robot is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction at high speed, and 225 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position. Moved position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "20" (suspended for 600 ms). The motion data of which the motion pointer is "21" (100 steps in backward rotation direction at 100 PPS for 200 ms) is executed, rotates clockwise at high speed by 45 degrees, and moves counterclockwise by 180 degrees to the initial position. position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data (suspended for 600 ms) whose operation pointer is "22". The motion data with the motion pointer of "23" (320 steps forward rotation at 50PPS for 6400ms) is executed, rotates counterclockwise twice at low speed, and rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position. Moved position. After that, the operation pointer becomes "24" and the operation ends.

In this way, the switching operation A table 222d6 is moved in the opposite direction while the rotation effect device 296 is moving counterclockwise to the position where the ball enters the first passage hole 296a, so that the ball enters the second passage hole 296b. is configured to In addition, even after entering the second passing hole 296b, the result of displaying the game state after the big win may be different (see FIGS. 391(a) and 391(b)), and until the end of the big win operation, the game It is possible to produce a production that attracts the attention of.

The switching operation B table 222d7 is a table that defines the operation content of switching the execution operation of the rotation effect device 296 on the way and making the ball enter the first passage hole 296a. As described above, the switching action B table 222d7 is based on the ending command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223f. can be selected in some cases. That is, an execution action that may be executed when the button pressing effect occurs during execution of the execution effect B3 and the player presses the frame button 22 is defined. This switching motion B table 222d7 is referred to after the switching timing (tk) when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected during the switching valid period (t5) in the execution effect B3 (execution motion is read). . After starting the ending and after the switching timing (tk), the action is performed by reading out the execution action (S2907).

FIG. 418 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the switching operation B table 222d7. The operation of the switching operation B table 222d7 is to read out the operation contents corresponding to the operation pointer (S2907) for the required time corresponding to the lapse of time of the rotation operation timer 223q in order from "25" of the operation pointer (S2907). The defined operation is performed until the pointer reaches "32".

Specifically, after the switching timing (tk), the motion data whose motion pointer is "25" is executed. 100 step movement in the direction) is executed, and it is rotated 45 degrees in the clockwise direction at a high speed, resulting in a position moved counterclockwise by 90 degrees from the initial position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data with the operation pointer of "26" (suspended for 600 ms). The motion data with the motion pointer "27" (100 steps in the backward direction at 100 PPS for 200 ms) is executed, and the robot rotates 45 degrees in the clockwise direction at high speed, and rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position. Moved position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "28" (suspended for 600 ms). The motion data of which the motion pointer is "29" (100 steps in the backward rotation direction at 100 PPS for 200 ms) is executed, and it rotates clockwise at high speed by 45 degrees to reach the initial position. Next, the standby operation is performed by executing the operation data whose operation pointer is "30" (suspended for 2200 ms). The motion data of which the motion pointer is "31" (movable forward 320 steps at 50 PPS for 6400 ms) is executed, rotates counterclockwise at high speed two times, and reaches the initial position. After that, the operation pointer becomes "32" and the operation ends.

In this way, the switching operation B table 222d7 is moved in the opposite direction while the rotation effect device 296 is moving counterclockwise to the position where the ball enters the second passage hole 296b, so that the ball enters the first passage hole 296a. , and the player can enjoy the moment when the ball is confirmed to enter the first passing hole 296a with interest.

The result display determination table 222e determines whether the content of the ball entering either the first passage hole 296a or the second passage hole 296b matches the result display content set based on the lottery result of the game. is a table for determining

The result display determination table 222e detects the ball with the rotation ball switch 295 after the ball enters either the first passage hole 296a or the second passage hole 296b in the central part of the rotation effect device 296. Depending on the timing, depending on the operating position of the rotation effect device 296, the result contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (Fig. 391(a), Fig. 391(b), Fig. 392) are displayed in the rotation effect selection table 222b described above. It is a table for judging whether or not the content of the selected execution operation (result display command for display) matches.

FIG. 419 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the result display determination table 222e. The result display determination table 222e is an operation position storage area for storing the operation position of the rotation effect device 296 when a ball is detected by the rotation entry switch 295 during execution of the rotation distribution effect (S2802: Yes). Based on the content of 223r, the result display determination content is selected, and at the start of the ending, the content of the execution operation (result display command for display) acquired in the rotation effect selection table 222b and selected from the result display determination table 222e. The result display determination contents are compared, and if the contents match, the result display command for display acquired from the rotation effect selection table 222b is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is notified of the game result.

Specifically, when the motion position storage area 223r has a value (range) of "0" to "90", the result display B1 is selected as the result display determination content, and the execution motion content obtained at the start of the ending is selected. If it matches, the result display command for display is set, and the game state of "200 times" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 392(b)).

When the value (range) of the operating position storage area 223r is from "135" to "180", irregular winning is selected as result display determination contents, the result display command for display is not set, and the third symbol display is performed. The game state is not displayed on the device 81, and the jackpot ends.

When the action position storage area 223r has a value (range) from "225" to "270", the result display A or B1 is selected as the result display determination content, and the content of the execution action acquired at the start of the ending is displayed as the result. If it is A, the result display A is set as the result display command for display, the game state of "100 times" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 391(a)), and is acquired at the start of the ending. If the content of the executed action is the result display B1, the result display B1 is set as the result display command for display, and the display of the game state of "resurrection effect ~ 200 times" (Fig. 392) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. done.

When the value (range) of the operating position storage area 223r is "315", irregular winning is selected as result display determination content, the result display command for display is not set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in the game. The jackpot ends without displaying the status.

The input effect setting table 222f is the contents of the input effect (see FIG. 393(a)) performed using the frame button 22, the frame button sensor 297, and the touch sensor 290, which are executed according to the variation type of the special symbol. This is a table for selecting

FIG. 420 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the input effect setting table 222f. The input effect setting table 222f selects the frame button 22, the frame button sensor 297, and the touch sensor as input operation types based on the variation type of the special symbol and the effect counter 223f selected based on the success/failure determination result. 290 defines a value for determining which input device is to be operated, an operation start time of the input device, and a valid timer value that is a valid period of the operation of the input device.

Specifically, when the variation type is the normal reach jackpot A, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 150", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u. , no input effect is performed. When the value (range) of the production counter 223f is any one of "151 to 198", 1 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the production (single-shot button) of operating the frame button 22 only once is executed. 20000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 4000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

When the variation type is the super reach jackpot A, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 150", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "151 to 190", 2 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and effect (normal repeated hits) of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is performed. 45000 ms is determined as the start time and 5000 ms as the valid timer value. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is one of "191 to 198", 3 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are activated by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22. An effect for further detection (double hits) is performed, 45000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 5000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

When the variation type is super reach jackpot B, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any of "0 to 100", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "101 to 190", 4 is set in the input type storage area 222u, the effect (normal touch) of operating the touch sensor 290 is performed, and the operation is performed. 45000 ms is determined as the start time and 5000 ms as the valid timer value. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is one of "191 to 198", 5 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the effect of operating both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor (composite touch ( 393)) is performed, 45000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 5000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

When the variation type is the super ready-to-win jackpot C, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 100", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done.

When the variation type is the super reach jackpot D, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 100", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done.

When the variation type is the super reach jackpot E, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 100", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done.

When the variation type is the deviation length A, if the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 150", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is executed. can't break When the value (range) of the production counter 223f is any one of "151 to 198", 1 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the production (single-shot button) of operating the frame button 22 only once is performed. 1000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 3000 ms is determined as the effective timer value.

When the variation type is normal reach out A, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 150", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is executed. can't break When the value (range) of the production counter 223f is any one of "151 to 198", 1 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the production (single-shot button) of operating the frame button 22 only once is performed. 20000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 4000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

When the variation type is super reach out A, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any of "0 to 190", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "191 to 195", 2 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and effect (normal repeated hits) of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 is performed. 45000 ms is determined as the start time and 5000 ms as the valid timer value. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "196 to 198", 3 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are activated by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22. An effect for further detection (double hits) is performed, 45000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 5000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

When the variation type is super reach out B, when the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is one of "0 to 180", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is Not done. When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "181 to 195", 4 is set in the input type storage area 222u, the effect (normal touch) of operating the touch sensor 290 is performed, and the operation is performed. 45000 ms is determined as the start time and 5000 ms as the valid timer value. If the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "196 to 198", 5 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the effect of operating both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor (composite touch ( 393)) is performed, 45000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 5000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

When the fluctuation type is short A, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "0 to 190", 0 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the input effect is executed. can't break When the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is any one of "191 to 198", 1 is set in the input type storage area 222u, and the effect (single-shot button) of operating the frame button 22 only once is performed. 1000 ms is determined as the operation start time, and 3000 ms is determined as the valid timer value.

The valid timer setting table 222g is a table in which target RAMs for valid timers to be set are defined according to the type of input effect.

FIG. 421(a) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the effective timer setting table 222g. The effective timer setting table 222g stores the target RAM of the effective timer to be set (S3206) based on the contents of the input type storage area 223u set in the input effect setting table 222f. In the effect of operating the frame button 22, the SW effective time counter 223h is defined as the RAM to be set, and in the effect of operating the touch sensor 290, the sensor effective time counter 223i is defined as the RAM to be set.

Specifically, when the content of the input type storage area 223u is 0, there is no execution of the input effect and there is no valid time setting target RAM. When the content of the input type storage area 223u is 1, the SW valid time counter 223h is determined as the valid time setting target RAM in order to perform an effect (single-shot button) in which the frame button 22 is operated only once. be. When the content of the input type storage area 223u is 2, the SW effective time counter 223h is determined as the effective time setting target RAM in order to perform the effect of repeatedly hitting the frame button 22 (normal repeated hitting). When the content of the input type storage area 223u is 3, the valid time setting target is set in order to perform an effect (double hit) in which detection is performed by both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 by repeatedly hitting the frame button 22. A SW effective time counter 223h is determined as RAM. When the content of the input type storage area 223u is 4, the SW valid time counter 223h is determined as the valid time setting target RAM in order to perform the effect of operating the touch sensor 290 (normal touch). When the content of the input type storage area 223u is 5, in order to perform an effect of operating both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor (compound touch (see FIG. 393)), SW is set as the valid time setting target RAM. Valid time counter 223h is determined.

The composite determination table 222h is a table that defines lottery contents of the advance notice effect to be executed in the composite chance (see FIG. 393) in which both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are operated.

FIG. 4201(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the composite determination table 222h. The composite determination table 222h determines the action of the character 711 displayed in the small area Ds2 provided in the upper portion of the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the success/failure determination and the value (range) of the composite timing counter 223ab. is selected.

Specifically, when the result of the winning/failure determination is a win, if the value (range) of the composite timing counter 223ab is anywhere from "0 to 40", it is determined that there is no matching of the composite notice display, and the frame button 22 is operated and the advance notice action is performed when the touch sensor 290 is operated. When the value (range) of the composite timing counter 223ab is any one of "41 to 99", it is determined that there is matching of the composite notice display, and the notice action executed when the frame button 22 is operated and the touch The forewarning action executed when the sensor 290 is operated is combined, and the combined action (see FIG. 393(c)) is performed in the small area Ds2.

If the pass/fail determination result is out, if the value (range) of the composite timing counter 223ab is any of "0 to 97", it is determined that there is no matching for the composite advance notice display, and the frame button 22 is operated. Separate actions are performed for the advance notice action executed when the touch sensor 290 is operated and the advance notice action executed when the touch sensor 290 is operated. When the value (range) of the composite timing counter 223ab is one of "98 to 99", it is determined that there is matching of the composite notice display, and the notice action executed when the frame button 22 is operated and the touch The forewarning action executed when the sensor 290 is operated is combined, and the combined action (see FIG. 393(c)) is performed in the small area Ds2.

By configuring in this way, when the result of the winning/failing determination is a hit, the setting is made so that the combined advance notice display is easily matched, and the player operates (presses) the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 290. Depending on the timing, it is possible to predict the degree of expectation for the success/failure determination result, thereby increasing interest in the operation and enhancing the amusement of the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 402(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d. , Winning information storage area 223e, effect counter 223f, background mode storage area 223g, SW effective time counter 223h, sensor effective time counter 223i, touch counter 223j, button release flag 223k, reversing operation flag 223m, origin detection counter 223n, rotation Operation status storage area 223p, rotation operation timer 223q, operation position storage area 223r, spin ball completed flag 223s, switching operation storage area 223t, input type storage area 223u, composite operation flag 223v, repeat counter 223w, irregular winning flag 223x , a short remaining time counter 223y, a switching flag 223aa, a composite timing counter 223ab, and a memory area 223z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a variable display of the first special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and is the first symbol reserved by the main controller 110. A counter that counts the number of pending balls (waiting times) for variable effects of special patterns up to 4 times for each type of special pattern. Update according to the timing of increase or decrease.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, is a variable display of the second special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). , A counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the second special symbol variable effect suspended in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol, and when a winning information command is received, It is updated according to the timing when the number of held balls increases or decreases, such as when a variation pattern command is received.

As described above, the voice ramp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 Cannot get value. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b Then, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of pending balls of the variable display is added, or the variable display in the special symbol is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of the pending balls is subtracted. If so, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special symbol 2 reserved ball from the reserved ball number command The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the counter corresponding to the command, out of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S2207 in FIG. 443). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110. While synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, the values can be updated.

The values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223 a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223 b are used to display the reserved ball number symbols on the third symbol display device 81 . That is, the voice lamp control device 113, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b after storage, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

When the display control device 114 receives this display pending ball number command, the value of the pending ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113, or the special symbol 2 pending ball number counter 223a The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the value of the ball counter 223b is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As described above, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a changes its value while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is mainly While synchronizing with the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the control device 110, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 is also the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while synchronizing. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the first special symbol fluctuation pattern command or the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2301 in FIG. 458), and the third symbol. It is turned off when the variable display is set on the display device 81 (see S3502 in FIG. 458). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output processing (S2102) of the main processing (see FIG. 442), It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is used to perform the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2204 in FIG. 443), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. is turned off (see S3506 in FIG. 458). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The winning information storage area 223e includes one execution area, four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the first special symbol, and four areas (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the second special symbol. 4 areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the start winning for the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a special winning random number counter C1 obtained in response to the start winning, From each value of the special hit type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1, various information (win or not, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the start winning is performed. The main controller 110 predicts (estimates), and the predicted various information is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of winning information commands.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information (win or fail, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223e. More specifically, the extracted winning information is divided into four areas (first area to 4th area) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

In addition, in the first control example, in the main controller 110, based on various information obtained when a lottery of special symbols corresponding to the start winning is performed (win or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, variation pattern) Although the winning information command is set and notified to the audio lamp control device 113, other configurations may be used.

For example, when a starting prize is generated, various information already stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in various information predicted corresponding to the start prize. a setting means for setting a winning information command by adding a winning information command; various types of information (winning information) already stored in the winning information storage area 223e when the winning information command is received; A determination means for determining whether or not the various information (winning information) matches may be provided. This makes it possible to determine whether the various information (winning information) stored in the winning information storage area 223e is properly stored.

In addition, in the first control example, when a new start winning occurs, a winning information command is set and notified to the sound lamp control device 113. However, the winning information command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 The timing of notification is not limited to the timing described above (the timing at which the winning information command is set). (For example, 5-second intervals), when the game conditions are variable (for example, when the game state changes from the time-saving state to the normal state, when the jackpot game starts or ends, etc.), or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate (or A configuration may be used in which the winning information command stored in the storage means is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 when the game is stopped. With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately execute an effect (so-called prefetch effect) using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223e.

In this control example, based on each piece of winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223e, setting of an effect mode such as a change in the display color of a pending symbol is executed as a prefetch effect. In this way, various effects (read-ahead effects) are executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223e, so that the player can see each reserved ball before the start of the variable display. It can give you a sense of anticipation for a big hit. Also, it is possible to execute a long-term effect using a plurality of variable display periods.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selecting various effects. Every time the main process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 in the range from 0 to 198 and updated repeatedly. Specifically, the selection table of various effects selected using the effect counter 223f includes a rotating effect selection table 222b (execution operation of the rotating effect device 296) and an input effect setting table 222f (operation setting of input effect). Various effects are selected depending on the value (range) of the effect counter 223f.

In addition, when making these selections, in order to avoid synchronizing the update period of the effect counter 223f with other counters and timer values, the update range is set to a prime number (199), and the selection result is limited to I try not to be biased towards the selection results.

The background mode storage area 223g is a storage area in which numerical values necessary for distinguishing the background mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are stored. As for the switching of the background display mode, it is determined in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) whether it is in a standby state in which a demo screen is displayed (S3101), and if it is determined that it is in a standby state (S3101: No). , it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3114), and if it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S3114: Yes), 1 is added to the contents of the background mode storage area 223g and set (S3115). Then, a display switching command corresponding to the set background mode is set (S3116), and when the display switching command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the background image is displayed. For the background images, different background images recognizable by the player are prepared, such as a background A of the sea, a background B of mountains, a background C of a river, and a background D of a city.

The SW effective time counter 223h is a counter for counting the effective time (effective period) during which the operation is possible in the effect accompanying the depression of the frame button 22 performed during the fluctuation of the special symbols. In the SW effective time counter 223h, in the operation timer setting process performed when both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are not in the effective period (S3112: No) in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), When the operation start time is reached during the variation of the special symbol (S3203: Yes), if the effect is to operate the frame button 22, setting (S3206) is performed.

The set SW effective time counter 223h is decremented (S3102) when the value of the SW effective time counter 223h is not 0 (S3101: Yes), and executed when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected (S3110: Yes) In the frame button operation processing (S3111), the effect of a compound touch (the value of the input type storage area is 5) or a single button (the value of the input type storage area is 1) that detects the frame button 22 only once. It is reset (S3312) when the number of repeated hits reaches the upper limit while the effect of double hits (the input type storage area is 3) is being executed (S3106: Yes).

The sensor valid time counter 223i is a counter that counts the time during which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. Similar to the SW valid time counter 223h, the sensor valid time counter 223i changes the special symbol during the operation timer setting process performed when both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are not in the valid period (S3112: No). When the operation start time is reached (S3203: Yes), if the effect is to operate the frame button 22, setting (S3206) is performed. If the set sensor effective time counter 223i is not 0, it is decremented (S3113), and the effect of normal touch (the value of the input type storage area is 4) that detects the touch sensor 290 only once is being executed. Also, if the touch sensor is on, it is reset (S3407).

The touch counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times the detection of the touch sensor 290 is turned on during the period in which the detection of the touch sensor 290 is valid. The touch counter 223j, in the operation timer setting process that is performed when both the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are not in the effective period (S3112: No), when the operation start time is reached during the fluctuation of the special symbol ( S3203: Yes) is reset (0 is set (S3208)), and when the touch sensor 290 is on during the valid period of the touch sensor (S3401: Yes) (S3402: Yes), the upper limit value 1 is added (S3405) until

The button release flag 223k is a flag for determining whether or not the balls stored in the passage solenoid 294 can be released by pressing the frame button 22 in the rotation distribution effect that operates the rotation effect device 296 at the end of the big win. be. The button release flag 223k is set to the content (on or off) defined by the rotation effect selection table 222b described above based on the ending command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223f at the end of the jackpot (S2465). ) is done.

When the button release flag 223k is ON, pressing the frame button 22 during the button effective period (t4) during which the rotation effect device 296 is operating releases the channel solenoid 294 (see FIG. 384(a)). ), and the ball M1 stored in the flow path solenoid 294 (see FIG. 383(a)) can be manually released. On the other hand, when the button release flag 223k is off, the release operation of the flow path solenoid 294 is automatically performed at the switching timing (tk) when the rotation effect device 296 is in operation.

The reversal return operation flag 223m is a flag for determining whether to move the rotation effect device 296 to the origin position (FIG. 388 (a)) at the time of the jackpot during the time saving game state or at the end of the time saving state. . The reversal return operation flag 223m is set to the content (on or off) defined by the rotation effect selection table 222b described above based on the ending command received from the main controller 110 and the effect counter 223f (S2468). be.

When the reversal return operation flag 223m is turned on, the game proceeds at the position (FIG. 387(a)) where the rotation effect device 296 moves counterclockwise by 180 degrees from the initial position at the end of the jackpot. After that, when the reversing return operation flag 223m is on, when the jackpot starts or when it becomes a normal state (no low probability time saving), in order to return the rotation effect device 296 to the origin position, the above-described reversing return operation table is set (S2442), and the rotating effect device 296 is returned to the initial position. Therefore, when the big win starts, the rotation performance device 296 is returned to the initial position, so that the rotation apportionment performance executed when the big win ends can be started from the state where the rotation performance device 296 is at the initial position. In addition, after the result display of the rotation distribution production at the end of the jackpot (100 times of time saving (see FIG. 391 (a))) is performed, the game ball M1 does not pass through the second passing hole 296b until the time saving state ends. Then, the rotating effect device 296 is stopped at a position moved counterclockwise by 180 degrees from the initial position, and the result of the rotating apportionment effect can be known from the stop position of the rotating effect device 296. - 特許庁

The origin detection counter 223n is a counter for counting the number of times the origin detection sensor 299 is detected while the rotation effect device 296 is performing the initial action. The origin detection counter 223n has an initial value of 0 (S2010) during the start-up process (see FIG. 441) executed when power is turned on. The origin detection counter 223n is incremented by 1 when the origin detection sensor 299 detects the origin detection sensor 299 (S2604: Yes) while the rotation effect device 296 is performing the initial operation after the power is turned on. Since the initial operation is to make two rounds in the forward direction and then two rounds in the backward direction, if the normal operation is performed, the origin detection counter 223n becomes 4 (S2906: Yes), and the initial operation ends.

The rotation operation status storage area 223p stores a numerical value for determining the operation type content of the rotation effect device 296. FIG. When the rotation effect device 296 performs an initial action when the power is turned on, when 1 is set in the rotation action status storage area 223p (S2013), a rotation initial action process (S2504) is executed, and the rotation effect device 296 initial operation is set (S2602). When the initial operation of the rotating effect device 296 is performed normally, 0 is set in the rotating motion status storage area (S2607), and when an abnormality occurs in the operation of the rotating effect device 296, 5 is set in the rotating motion status storage area. It is set (S2610), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of the rotating effect device 296, and the operation setting is not performed until the power is turned on again.

When the rotation effect device 296 performs the rotation distribution effect at the end of the big win, 2 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2470), the rotation effect process (S2506) is executed, and the rotation effect device 296 is set (S2702). When the rotation effect device 296 ends the operation without performing the switching operation during the rotation distribution effect, 0 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2715), and the rotation distribution of the rotation effect device 296 is performed. The motion of the production ends.

Further, when the rotation effect device 296 performs the switching operation during the rotation distribution effect, 3 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2709), the switching operation process (S2508) is executed, and the rotation effect is performed. The operation of device 296 is set (S2902). After that, when the switching operation of the rotation effect device 296 ends, 0 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2909), and the switching operation of the rotation effect device 296 ends.

When the rotation effect device 296 finishes executing the rotation distribution effect, the operation position of the rotation effect device 296 is moved to the left by 180 degrees from the initial position (the reversal return operation flag 223m is turned on). When the jackpot is hit during the time saving state, or when the reversing return operation is performed at the end of the time saving, 4 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2444), the reversal return process (S2510) is executed, and the rotation effect The reverse return operation of device 296 is set (S3002). After that, when the reversal return operation of the rotation effect device 296 is completed, 0 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2909), and the reversal return operation of the rotation effect device 296 is completed.

The rotation operation timer 223q is a timer that counts the operation time of the rotation effect device 296. The rotation operation timer 223q is set when the operation of the rotation effect device 296 is started, and is decremented by one (S2502) and updated repeatedly each time the rotation operation control process (see FIG. 448) is executed.

In the initial operation when the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "1", the operation time is set according to the initial operation table (S2012).

In the rotation distribution effect when the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "2", the operation time corresponding to the rotation operation table is set (S2469). In the switching operation when the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "3", the content of the rotation operation timer 223q for the rotation apportionment effect continues to be counted. In the reversal return operation when the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "4", the operation time is set according to the reversal return operation table (S2442).

The motion position storage area 223r is a storage area in which the motion position of the rotating effect device 296 is stored. The contents of the motion position storage area 223r are updated every time the read PPS moves 45 degrees according to the motion contents of the rotating effect device 296. FIG.

In the initial motion when the value of the rotational motion status storage area 223p is "1", the motion position is set according to the initial motion table (S2603). In the rotation distribution effect when the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "2", the operation position is set according to the rotation operation table (S2703). When the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "3", when the switching flag 223aa is ON (S2901: Yes), a rotation distribution effect is performed, and the operation position is set according to the rotation operation table. (S2903), and when the switching flag 223aa is off (S2901: No), the switching operation is performed, and the operation position is set according to the switching operation table (S2908). In the reversal return operation when the value of the rotation operation status storage area 223p is "4", the operation position is set according to the reversal return operation table (S3003).

The contents of the operating position storage area 223r are used to acquire the result display determination contents selected by the detection timing of the rotation entry switch 295 in the result display determination table 222e described above at the timing of displaying the ending result. Used. If the acquired result display determination content matches the content of the display result display command acquired at the start of the ending (S2806: Yes), the effect result (Fig. 391 (a), Fig. 391 ( b), set the display result display command for displaying FIG. 392).

The rotation completion flag 223s is a flag for determining whether or not the game ball has passed through the first ball entry hole or the second ball entry hole in the rotation distribution effect operated by the rotation effect device 296. is. This spin-entered ball completion flag 223s is cleared (S2471) at the start of the ending when the spin apportionment performance is started. Based on the contents of the area 223r, the content of result display determination is selected, and at the start of the ending, selected from the content of the execution operation (result display command for display) obtained in the rotating effect selection table 222b and the result display determination table 222e. If the contents match with the contents of display determination as a result, it is set to ON (S2809). In addition, even if there is no detection of the spin ball entry switch 295 while the spin distribution effect is being executed, the result display waiting time (tw) has passed and there is no irregular winning (S2804). It is set (S2809).

The switching motion storage area 223t stores the contents of the switching motion table, which is executed when the rotation effect device 296 switches the motion at the switching timing (tk) during execution of the rotation motion.

The input type storage area 223u stores data (numerical values) for determining the type of operation effect executed using each input device of the frame button 22, the frame button sensor 297, and the touch sensor 290 while the special symbol is fluctuating. remembered.

The composite operation flag 223v determines whether any one of the input devices is operated in the operation performance (composite touch) executed using the input device of the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 while the special symbol is fluctuating. is a flag for

The repeated hitting counter 223w is a counter that counts the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed within the effective period in the repeated hitting effect for operating the frame button 22 .

The irregular winning flag 223x indicates the position of the ball (first hole or second hole) when the ball enters the first hole or the second hole in the rotation distribution effect. It is a flag for determining whether the ball hole) matches the contents of the rotation operation obtained according to the result of the judgment.

The irregular winning flag 223x is a result display obtained from the result display determination table described above when the game ball passes through the first ball entry hole or the second ball entry hole based on the contents of the operating position storage area 223r. At the start of the ending, the content of the display result display command obtained from the above-described rotation effect selection table is compared based on the success/failure determination result, and if the results do not match (S2806: No), set to on.

If the irregular winning flag 223x is ON (S2804: Yes), the result display of rotation distribution effect (Fig. 391(a), Fig. 391(b), Fig. 392) is not performed, and the irregular winning flag 223x is If it is off (S2804: No), the result display command for display is set (S2808), and the result of rotation distribution effect is displayed.

Remaining time reduction counter 223y is a counter that counts the number of remaining fluctuations in the time reduction state when the game state of the special symbol is the time reduction state (low probability time reduction state or high probability time reduction state). When the ending is started, the short remaining time counter 223y is set to 100 or 200 (S2473) based on the ending command for display, which is set based on the success/failure determination result. The remaining time short counter 223y is decremented by 1 until it reaches 0 (S2306) when the special symbols start to fluctuate.

The in-switching flag 223aa is set when the rotation effect device 296 presses the frame button 22 in the button pressing effect (FIG. 390(b)) during execution of the rotating motion, and the switching motion is determined. It is a flag for determining whether to read the contents of the rotation operation before performing the rotation. The switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S2710) when the frame button 22 is pressed during the switching valid period of the button pressing effect (2708: Yes) in the rotating action that has been executed since the start of the ending. , When the switching operation is executed at the switching timing (tk) (S2905), it is set to OFF, and the switching operation of the rotation effect device 296 is read out (S2907).

Composite timing counter 223ab, at the timing when frame button 22 or touch sensor 290 is operated, when an effect (compound touch (see FIG. 393)) of operating both frame button 22 and touch sensor 290 is performed, It is a counter that counts to determine whether or not to perform a composite effect (see FIG. 393(c)).

The other memory area 223z is an area for setting or storing various data, flags, counters, etc. in the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 443) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 437).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 422, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 422 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. 2 kilobytes). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR flash memory 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed first.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address pointing to the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, is previously set to the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR flash memory 234d. From the program, the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234a. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. Programs and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the program and its control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and process the instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S4002 in FIG. 459) executed after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 459) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored. can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 21) sent from the MPU 231 to be described later, and stores the frame in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 45(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, since image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are used for image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S4003 and S4004 in FIG. 459).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 423 . FIG. 423 shows the power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 423(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command shown in FIG. 423(b). As shown in FIG. 423(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit with a special design", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 423(b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 422, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams for explaining two kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. FIG. 18B shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 18, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the rear image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the position a to the position c by scrolling repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 18(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often played without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the deep sea stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed within the range from position a to position a', and from position a including the initial position to position a Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the initial position of the back B is immediately displayed in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 for the rear B is stored in a rear image exclusive sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see FIG. 422). As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

In addition, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between position b' and position b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 422, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 4) imitating the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third patterns, are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily implement diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for informing the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short period of time for normal symbols) given to the player after the end of the big win, or the reserved special symbol. This is an effect for notifying the player that the result of the lottery will be a big win in the lottery.

A player can easily recognize the time period of normal symbols by informing the time period of normal symbols in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, so the chances of lottery for the normal pattern are increased and the chances of winning the normal pattern are also increased. . Therefore, the electric accessary 64a is often opened as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery of the special symbols is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is entered, a jackpot of normal symbols is produced, and the electric accessory 64a is released, and the ball is placed in the first position. When it becomes easier to enter the ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of sub-patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening effect, round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables. Display data tables corresponding to each game menu screen are also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table for variable effects (variation display data table) among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing the insertion of a character, characters used for various effects, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display one of the back surfaces A and B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from the back surfaces A and B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 19) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect image becomes more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load on transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 459) executed by the MPU 231 (see S4005 in FIG. 459). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S5605 in FIG. 469(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S4301 in FIG. 461(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 461(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S4308 in FIG. 461(b) S4309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 462 to 466) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 467 to 468) are executed.

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S5501 in FIG. 469(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data not stored in resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 469(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 470) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 21) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 draws an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 21) describing the content of image rendering instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing for one frame of image is completed (see FIG. 461(b)). )), pointer update processing (see S5205 in FIG. 467) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 21), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed on the backmost side (backmost drawing layer), and the last drawn sprite is placed on the frontmost side (foremost drawing layer). can be placed in When the comment display function is turned on, the image arranged on the foremost side (the foremost drawing layer) is a character image forming the comment. By arranging the comment on the frontmost side (the frontmost drawing hierarchy), the comment can be visually recognized more clearly by the player.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, transfers the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S5207 in FIG. 467). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The storage image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S4002 in FIG. 459) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 470) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the containment state corresponding to the other sprites to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S5709 in FIG. 470). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S5710 in FIG. 470). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing object buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing object buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S5802 in FIG. 471).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 461(b)) is executed (see S5802 in FIG. 471).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The background mode storage area 223k is a storage area for storing information indicating the background mode being set. The background data of the background mode corresponding to the data stored in the background mode storage area 223k is set as the background image. This background mode storage area 223k is updated with data corresponding to the background mode notified by the received command each time a display switching command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 (see S4804 in FIG. 464).

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the eighth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 427 to 440. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 427, timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the eighth control example.

In the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 427), first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (65535 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment). Store in the corresponding buffer area.

Further, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, each is 65535 , 99, 239) are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and then, A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 428 to 433.

After executing the start winning process (S105), the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the ball in the normal entrance (through gate) 67 is displayed. Through-gate passage processing associated with passage is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 434 to 436. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 290 detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 428, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 428 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 427), and the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, , the process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the third pattern display device 81, and the like.

In this special symbol variation process (see FIG. 428), first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big win (S201). Here, it is determined whether or not the big-hit flag 203n is on, and if it is on, it is determined that the big-hit is in progress. During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e are acquired (S203). . After acquiring the value of each counter, a change execution determination process is executed (S204). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 429, this variation execution determination process (S204) discriminates the type of special symbol to be varied next (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol). This is a process for

Next, it is determined whether the next variation order determined by the variation execution determination process (S204) is special figure 1 (first special symbol) (S205), and the variation display to be executed next is special figure 1 (first 1 special symbol) (S205: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S206), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter changed by calculation A pending ball count command indicating the value of 203d is set (S207). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 439), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S207, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S208). In the process of S208, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process is executed to start the variation display on the first symbol display device (S209). Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 430, but in the special symbol variation start process (S209), a process such as selection of a variation pattern (variation period) necessary for starting the variation of the special symbol is executed. be done.

In the process of S205, when it is determined that the next variation order determined in the variation execution determination process (S204) is not the variation display of special figure 1 (S205: No), special figure 2 (second special symbol ) is the order of the variable display (S210). If the special figure 2 is not executed (S210: No), it means that the reserved ball is not stored for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, if it is determined that it is the variation order in the special figure 2 (S210: Yes), the second special symbol reserved ball is processed in the same manner as the above-described first special symbol reserved ball. process.

Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S211), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 439), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S212, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S213). In the process of S213, the data stored in the reservation areas 1 to 4 of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of reservation area 1→execution area, reservation area 2→reservation area 1, reservation area 3→reservation area 2, reservation area 4→reservation area 3, and so on. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display on the first symbol display device (S214), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S209), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , A lottery for special designs will be held. More specifically, it is determined whether or not there is a special symbol jackpot according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, the jackpot is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2. It is determined whether A, B, C, or D will be awarded.

In this control example, when the jackpot A is achieved, the first symbol display device 37 lights the blue LED, and when the jackpot B is achieved, the red LED is lit. When the jackpot C is obtained, the red LED and the blue LED are lit, and when the jackpot D is obtained, the blue LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (S209, S214) (this It is determined whether the lottery result) is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), a jackpot start is set (S219), the variable probability flag 203m is turned off, and the value of the counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 (S220). After that, the jackpot medium flag 203n is set to ON (S221), a stop command is set (S224), and the process ends. That is, during the jackpot game, a low-probability game state is set, the electric support game state (time-saving game state) is also canceled, and the non-electric support game state (normal pattern normal state) is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the special symbol (S218: No), it is determined whether the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 1 or more (S222), and during time saving If the value of the counter 203j is 1 or more (S222: Yes), by updating the time saving counter 203j, the probability variation counter 203i, and the probability variation flag 203m, according to the number of fluctuations in the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot A game state update process for updating the game state is executed (S223), and this process ends. Details of this game state update process (S223) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the processing of S222, when it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 0 (S222: No), the processing of S223 is skipped and the processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 429, the variation execution determination process (S204) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 429 is a flow chart showing the change execution determination process (S204). This variation execution determination process (S204) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 428) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 427), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display The effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the device 81 is based on the values of various counters stored in either the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining whether to execute

In the variation execution determination process (see FIG. 429), first, the variation execution flag 203k is set to OFF (“0” as a value) to initialize (S241), and the variation order storage area stored in the RAM 203 is initialized (S241). 203p data is acquired (S242). Next, the data in the change order storage area 203p is shifted (S243). Next, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S244). If the data in the execution area is the special figure 1 (S244: Yes), the variation execution flag 203k is set to the variation execution with the special figure 1 (S245), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S244, if the data in the execution area is not the variation execution in the special figure 1 (S244: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is the variation execution in the special figure 2 (S246), If it is variable execution in 2 (S246: Yes), the variable execution flag 203k is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S247), and this process is completed. In addition, in the process of S246, when it is determined that the data in the execution area is not the variable execution in the special figure 2 (S246: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the special symbol variation start process (S209) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S209). This special symbol variation start process (S209) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 428) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 427), and the execution of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the area, a lottery (win/fail judgment) of "special pattern jackpot" or "special pattern loss" is performed, and the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variable effect pattern) of the variable effect to be performed.

In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S209), first, each value of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in the variable probability period (high probability game state) (S302). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not it is the variable probability period is executed by determining whether the variable probability flag 203m is on. This variable probability flag 203m is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot B and the jackpot D. On the other hand, it is set to OFF based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the variable probability period is in effect (the variable probability flag 203m is ON) (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols, so the process proceeds to S303. do. In the processing of S303, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability defined in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 397(a)) , the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained (S303). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 329 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. As described above, 329 of "0 to 328" are set as the random number value that becomes a special symbol jackpot in the probability variable gaming state (special gaming state), and the value of the special winning random number counter C1 and these If the winning random number matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big win. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal game state with special symbols (the variable probability flag 203m is off) (S302: No), the process of S304 is executed. In the processing of S304, based on the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired in the processing of S301 and the jackpot determination value at the time of low probability in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined. Acquire (S304). Specifically, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the 328 random numbers stored in the special symbol big winning random number table 202a. 328 numbers of "0 to 327" are set as the random numbers that become the special symbol jackpot in the normal game state (low-probability game state). If the numerical value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (that is, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 that has been acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a match the set determination value) is determined (S305), and when it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is determined (S305: Yes), the value of the special winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 , the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), the type of jackpot is discriminated. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 24", it is determined that it is a jackpot A (8R normal jackpot, short time 100 times), and if it is in the range of "25 to 49" For example, it is determined that it is a jackpot B (8R variable jackpot, time saving 200 times), and if it is in the range of “50 to 74”, it is determined to be a jackpot C (16R normal jackpot, time saving 100 times), “75 to 99”, it is determined that it is a jackpot D (16R probability variable jackpot, time saving 200 times) (see FIG. 398(a)).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D). In order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) are set as stop types.

Next, the variation pattern for the big win is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202b (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the jackpot symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the pattern variation such as normal reach, super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relation between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the type of symbol variation is specified in the variation pattern selection table 202b. Specifically, when the jackpot type determined this time is jackpot A, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 50", it is normal reach, and if it is in the range of "51 to 250" Determining the fluctuation pattern of super reach.

In addition, in the variation pattern, the main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for informing the success/failure determination result, and notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the variation time. The sound ramp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variable display mode to be actually displayed on the third pattern display device 81 according to the variation time and the success/failure determination result. Even if the main controller 110 is in the out-of-reach display mode, the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to switch between the out-of-reach display mode and the non-out-of-reach display mode if the fluctuation time is the same. As a result, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

For example, as the variation pattern for failure, "miss (for long time)", "miss (for short time)", "miss normal reach", "miss super reach", and "miss special reach" are defined. ing. As fluctuation patterns for the jackpot A, the jackpot B, the jackpot C, and the jackpot D, various types of "normal reach" and various types of "super reach" are defined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on, the fluctuation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, as in the processing of S308, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is checked, and based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3, normal reach, super Determine the variation time of symbol variation such as reach.

After the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S309 is set (S311). When the processing of S311 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing (S104).

Next, with reference to FIG. 431, details of the game state update process (S223) described above will be described. This game state update process (S223) is, as described above, a process for updating to a corresponding game state in accordance with the number of fluctuations in the special symbol after the end of the big win.

In the game state update process (see FIG. 431), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203j is 1 or more (S401), and the value of the time saving counter 203j is not 1 or more (that is, 0 Yes) (S401: No), the process for updating the value of the time saving counter 203j (each process of S402 to S404) is skipped, and the process proceeds to S405.

On the other hand, in the process of S401, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 1 or more (S401: Yes), first, subtract 1 from the value of the counter 203j during time saving (S402), then, It is determined whether or not the counter value after the subtraction has reached 0 (S403). In the process of S403, if it is determined that the value of the counter 203j during time saving has become 0 (S403:: Yes), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol has ended (that is, high probability time saving state or low probability means that the time-saving state has ended), so a state command indicating that the normal state (low-probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols) is set (S404), and the process proceeds to S405. Transition. The status command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 439) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the actual game state from the state command.

Also, in the processing of S403, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j after the update (subtraction) by the processing of S402 is not 0 (that is, it is 1 or more) (S403: No), the game state does not change, the process of S404 is skipped and the process proceeds to S405.

In addition, in the process of S405, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203i is 1 or more (S405), and if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203i is not 1 or more (that is, it is 0) (S405: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S405, if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203i is 1 or more (S405: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203i is updated by subtracting 1 (S406), and after the subtraction (S407).

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203i after subtraction has become 0 (S407: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203m to OFF, the special symbol low probability from the probability variation state of the special symbol state (S408), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S407, if it is determined that the value of the probability variable counter 203i after the update (subtraction) by the process of S406 is not 0 (S407: No), the special symbols are displayed after the next variable display. Since it means that the variable probability state continues, the process of S408 is skipped and the process ends as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 432, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 432 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 427), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a starting prize, a process for holding values indicated by various random number counters, and a process for executing prefetching of lottery results in special symbols from the values shown by the reserved various random number counters.

When the starting winning process (S105: see FIG. 432) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S501). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S501: No), the process proceeds to S508. On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S501: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N1 ) is acquired (S502), and it is determined whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S503).

In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit value is 4) (S503: No), the over winning information command is set. (S504), the process proceeds to S508. In the processing of S503, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S503: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Add (S505). Then, a first special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S506).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 439), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S506, each value of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation area 1 to reservation area 4) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S507). In the process of S507, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2 is the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3 is the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 is the first area. Next, the special figure 1 is set at the bottom of the fluctuation order storage area 203p (S508), and the prefetching process (S520) is executed. The prefetching process (S520) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Regarding the processing of S508 to S516 and S520, the processing executed in response to winning the first ball entrance 64 in the processing of S501 to S507 and S520 described above is the right second ball entry. The process is only changed to the process executed in response to the winning of the game 640, and the same processes as the processes of S501 to S507 and S520 are executed, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. . When a game ball wins the second ball entrance 640 and is stored as a reserved ball, each value of the special winning random number counter C1 and the special winning type counter C2 is obtained and the corresponding special symbol is obtained. It is stored in the empty reservation area of the 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

In this way, for the second special symbol based on the entry (winning) of the ball into the second ball entrance 640, the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection similar to the first special symbol By acquiring the values of the counter C3 and the variation type selection counter CS1, the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, so the first special symbol and the second special symbol However, the probability of winning can be fixed.

After executing the process of S508 or the process of S514, the prefetching process (S520) is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on, it is a process for determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation.

In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is selected based on the incoming ball, but it may be configured to be selected at the start of variation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the values of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, some counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be configured to be acquired at the start of fluctuation. By configuring in this way, the counter related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired at the time of entering the ball, and the counter not related to the winning/failure determination can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored can be reduced while maintaining the fairness of the game. can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 433, the look-ahead process (S520), which is one process in the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 433 is a flow chart showing this prefetching process (S520).

In the look-ahead process (S520), first, based on the value of the acquired special hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not it is determined when the variation starts (S551). In this propriety determination, the same processing as the processing of S305 in the above-described special symbol variation start processing (S209: see FIG. 430) is executed. It should be noted that this propriety judgment corresponds to the prior propriety judgment (preliminary judgment) executed prior to the propriety judgment (discrimination) at the time of fluctuation start (processing of S305 in special symbol fluctuation start processing (S209: see FIG. 520)) do. Next, it is determined whether the determination result of the win/deny determination executed in the process of S551 is a hit (also referred to as a specific determination result) (S552). If it is determined that the determination result is a hit (S552: Yes), the variation pattern type is acquired (determined) from the variation pattern selection table 202b based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and variation type counter CS1 ( S553). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set (selected or generated) from the winning command table 202f (S554), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S552, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is out (S552: No), based on the acquired stop type counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation pattern from the normal fluctuation pattern selection table 202b1 The type is acquired (S555). Next, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a winning prize information command is set out of the winning command table 202e (S556), and this process is terminated.

In this way, before the start of fluctuation, the result of the judgment in advance is output as a winning command to the audio lamp control device 113 each time the number of reserved balls increases (establishment of starting winning), so the audio lamp The control device 113 can recognize in advance the result of winning/failing determination and the winning type. Therefore, by the voice lamp control device 113, based on the winning command, the advance notice effect that notifies the player of the winning judgment result of the reserved ball in advance (for example, the color of the reserved symbol is changed to the color that informs the winning judgment result Production such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of determination of whether the ball is on hold) can be executed. As for the winning command, one winning command is output for each pending ball increase (start winning establishment). ) can be immediately recognized.

Next, referring to FIG. 434, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 434 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 434), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol entrance 640 are accompanied by This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S601). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607).

Next, normal design fluctuation start processing is executed (S608), and this processing ends. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 435, but this normal symbol variation start process (S608) executes the determination of whether the normal symbol (second symbol) is normal, and based on the result of the determination, the normal symbol If the variation period (variation time or dynamic display time) is determined, and the result of the success/failure determination is hit, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a corresponding to the hit type (movement pattern of the game per normal figure) , etc., is executed.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S609). Incidentally, the variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S653 or S655 in FIG.

In the process of S609, if the variable time has not elapsed (S609: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S609, when the variable display being executed has elapsed and it is determined that it is other (S609: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S610). In the process of S610, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode at the time of winning is set by the process of S657 in FIG. It is set so that it is stopped (lighted up). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S658 in FIG. displayed). When the stop display is set by the process of S610, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 439) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. 435, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stop-displayed (lighted-up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S657 or S658 of FIG.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 434) is the normal symbol. It is determined whether it is a hit (S611). In the process of S611, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is the normal symbol (S611: No), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 remains closed. End this process. On the other hand, in the process of S611, if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol hit (S611: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203j is 1 or more ( S612), if the counter value is 1 or more (S612: Yes), the operation of "2 seconds x 2 times" is started as the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640. (S613), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S612, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 (S612: No), the opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 640a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The operation is set to start (S614), and this process ends.

In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, compared to when the probability of the normal symbol is low, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 is "0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 2 times per second", so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 435, the details of the normal symbol variation start process (S608) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 435 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation start process (S608). This normal design fluctuation start processing (S608) is executed in the normal design fluctuation processing (see FIG. 434) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 427), and is the processing for setting the normal design fluctuation start time. be.

In this normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 435), first, it is determined whether or not the counter 203j during time saving is 1 or more (S651), and if the value of the counter 203j during time saving is 1 or more (S651: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state, the value of the normal winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 in FIG. 434 and the normal winning random number table 202c for high probability (FIG. reference), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (S652). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 397(c)). As described above, when the probability of the normal design is high (during the time saving state), if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, "0 4, 205 to 239", it is judged to be out of the normal design (see FIG. 397(c)). Then, the normal symbol variation time is set to 3 seconds (S653), and the process proceeds to S656.

On the other hand, in the processing of S651, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203j is 0 (S651: No), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols, so S607 of FIG. Based on the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 obtained in the process and the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 397 (c)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal design hit is obtained ( S424). Specifically, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random value stored in the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 397(c)). As described above, when the probability of the normal design is low (during the normal state), if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal design, and "0 4, 7 to 239”, it is determined that the pattern is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 397(c)).

In addition, in this control example, the counter 203j during time saving is set to 0 at least until the jackpot ends after the jackpot of the special symbol. As a result, during the special symbol jackpot, the normal symbol lottery is less likely to win. This is because during the special symbol jackpot (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball to win the specific winning hole 65a, so the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened. This is to prevent the ball that is to be entered into the specific winning hole 65a from entering the second ball entering hole 640 (obstructing the winning of the specific winning hole 65a) as much as possible. In addition, since the specific winning hole 65a is provided immediately below the second ball-entering hole 640, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second ball-entering hole 640 during the special symbol jackpot, the second ball-entering hole 65a A large number of balls enter the ball entrance 640 . As a result, in most cases, the number of held balls for the second ball entrance 640 becomes maximum (4 times) while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state.

In the process of S656 executed after the process of S653 or S655, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal design obtained by the process of S652 or S654 is a hit of the normal design (S656), and it is a hit of the normal design. When it is determined that (S656: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning the normal symbol is set (S657), and this process is terminated. In the process of S657, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S656, when it is determined that the acquired lottery result is the normal symbol out (S656: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S658), and this process is finished. In the process of S658, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Next, with reference to FIG. 436, details of the through gate passing process (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 436 is a flow chart showing the through gate passage processing (S107). This thru gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 436) to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the thru gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the counter C4.

In the through gate passing process (see FIG. 436), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

The game ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S501: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4. (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) (S704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set to the first of the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the area (S705), and the process ends. In addition, in the processing of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

437 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, referring to FIG. 438, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 438 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S910.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 439, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203. FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main controller 110 executes the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S911, S912).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S911, S912) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S913.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S913. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S913, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S913). Then, the interrupt is permitted (S914), and the process proceeds to the main process which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 439, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 439 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 427), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 427). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 428) and the start winning process (see FIG. 432). Also, the winning command set in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 433) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). Details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, an electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 640a is set by the processing of S613 or S614 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 434), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 640a is started.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 430), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process (S1006), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 430) ends, the first End the variation display being executed in the symbol display device 37, in the display mode set by the processing of S306 or the processing of S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 430), the stop symbol (first symbol) to the first 1 The symbol display device 37 is stopped (lighted up).

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process (S1007), when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S657 or the process of S658 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 435), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Also, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S610 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 434), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. After finishing the fluctuation display, the stop design (second design) is stopped and displayed on the second design display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S657 or the processing of S658 of the normal design variation start processing (see FIG. 435). (lit display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, The initial value random number counter CINI1, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the special winning random number counter C1 , the initial value of the normal winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S1008, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 253 is executed, so the power-off process from S1012 onwards is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1012), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1013). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1008 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the processing can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 440 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 439), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process (S1104: see FIG. 440), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the processing of S219 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 428) and the special symbol jackpot is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set. (S1113), this processing ends.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing (see FIG. 439) executed by the MPU 201. sent to. Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1102). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1102, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1102: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1102, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1103). If it is time to start a new round (S1103: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is released (S1104), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1105). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 439) executed by the MPU 201, voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1103, if it is not the time to start a new number of rounds (S1103: No), it is determined whether or not the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is met (S1106). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is established.

In the processing of S1106, when it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1106: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1107), End the process. On the other hand, if the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is not met (S1106: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1108). Specifically, when the special game state (16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in normal times is completed, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect (S1108: Yes), the ending command corresponding to the jackpot type of this time is specified based on the state setting table 202e, and the specified ending command (Ending command corresponding to either Ending A or Ending B) is set (S1109), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 439). It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the ending command, the sound lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223f of the RAM 223. FIG. Then, an ending command for display corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1108, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start the ending (S1108: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the jackpot (S1110). Here, the timing of the end of the jackpot is the timing when a predetermined ending period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. In the processing of S1110, if it is determined that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1110: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1110, if it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the jackpot (S1110: Yes), in the processing of S1111, the setting value corresponding to the jackpot type this time (shortening counter 203j, variable probability counter 203i , and the value to be set in each probability variation flag 203m) is read and set (S1111). Next, by setting the flag 203n during the big win to OFF, the end of the big win is set (S1112), and this process is ended.

<Control processing of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 441 to 458, each control process executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 441, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S2117 (see FIG. 442) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 442, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2114 in FIG. 442), it executes power-off processing in S2117. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2117 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

In the processing of S2002, if it is determined that the power-off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the current start-up processing was started after the power was completely shut off, or a momentary power failure occurred. or after the power-off processing of S2117 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (a power-off command from the main controller 110 is received). (without doing). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), it will transfer to S2004 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to S2008.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S2117 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the startup processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off processing in S2117, the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined as normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2117 is executed (see S2116 in FIG. 442). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2117 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM (an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110) is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp controller 113. (S2009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), interrupt permission is set (S2011). Then, the timer value (the timer value corresponding to 14800 ms) specified in the initial operation table 222d1 of the rotating device operation table 222d is set in the rotation operation timer 223q (S2012). Then, by setting 1 to the rotation operation status storage area 223p, the start of the initial operation of the rotation effect device 296 is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to the main process. By executing the processes of S2011 and S2013, the initial operation of the rotation effect device 296 defined in the initial operation table 222d1 (after rotating in the forward direction at a low speed (50 PPS) for 320 steps (two turns), It can be stopped for 2000 ms, and then a rotating motion of rotating 320 steps (two revolutions) at a low speed (50 PPS) in the backward direction can be started.

On the other hand, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the work area clearing process of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2010. After setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S2010), Execute each process and shift to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S2009 is skipped is that when the process of S2008 is reached from S2004 via the process of S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S2004, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 442, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or since the previous process of S2101 was executed (S2101). If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2112 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2111. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S2102 to S2111 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , the command determination processing in S2112, the variable display setting processing in S2113, and the processing for updating various counter values (not shown) are preferably executed in short cycles. By executing the process of S2112 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2113 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2103 to S2113 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2105 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. The details of this frame button input/effect processing (S2107) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110), and the process proceeds to S2111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

When the processing of S2110 ends, a rotation motion control processing for controlling the rotation motion of the rotation effect device 296 is executed, and the processing proceeds to S2112. Details of this rotation operation control processing (S2111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S2111 is completed, command determination processing is executed (S2112). Details of this command determination process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the command determination process (S2112), the variable display setting process is executed (S2113). In the variable display setting process (S2113), a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the process of S2113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2114 (S2114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2116), and the power-off processing is executed (S2117). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S2118), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. Also, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2114 (S2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2115: No), the process returns to S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main process is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the pachinko hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 443 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2112). This command determination process (S2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 439) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process (S2112: FIG. 443), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2201). When a variation pattern command is received (S2201: Yes), variation pattern reception processing is executed (S2202), and this processing ends. Details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2201, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received (S2203). When the stop type command is received (S2203: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2204), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S2205), and this process is terminated. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S2203, if the stop type command is not received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command is received (S2206). When the reserved ball number command is received (S2206: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command and stored in the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (S2207). After that, this process is terminated. Here, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. Stored.

On the other hand, in the process of S2206, if the pending ball number command is not received (S2206: No), it is determined whether or not the winning command of the special symbol is received (S2208). When the winning command of the special symbol is received (S2208: Yes), the winning information notified by the command is stored in the winning information storage area 223e (S2207), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2208, if the winning command of the special symbol is not received (S2208: No), whether a command related to winning (opening command, round number command, and ending command) was received It is determined whether or not (S2210), and if it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2210: Yes), a win-related process for performing control according to the type of win-related command is executed. (S2221), this processing ends. The details of this win-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Also, in the process of S2210, if it is determined that a win-related command has not been received (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not a state command has been received (S2212). In the process of S2212, if it is determined that the state command has been received (S2212: Yes), then it is determined whether the game state notified by this command is the normal state (S2213), and in the normal state If it is determined that there is (S2213: Yes), it is determined whether or not the rotation effect device 296 is shifted from the initial arrangement, and if it is shifted from the initial arrangement, the rotation effect device 296 is reversed and returned. A reversing operation setting process (S2214) is executed (S2214), and this process ends. The details of this reversing operation setting process (S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2213 that the state command received this time is not a command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state (S2213: No), the processing of S2214 is skipped and the present processing ends as it is. .

If it is determined in the process of S2212 that the status command has not been received (S2212: No), the process corresponding to other commands is executed (S2261), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 444, the details of the variation pattern reception process (S2202), which is one process in the command determination process (S2112: FIG. 443), will be described. FIG. 444 is a flow chart showing this variation pattern reception process. In this variation pattern reception process (S2202), based on the received variation pattern command, a detailed special symbol variation pattern (effect mode), a notice display mode, a display mode of a pending notice, etc. are set.

In the fluctuation pattern reception process (S2202: FIG. 444), first, the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2301), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received command (S2302). After that, set a notice display command for display indicating the notice effect to be executed for the extracted variation pattern (S2303), then, the variation pattern (variation type) extracted in the process of S2302 and the value of the effect counter 223f The corresponding operation setting (presence or absence of operation effect, start timing, etc.) is selected from the input effect setting table 222f, and set as the operation setting during execution of the current variation pattern (S2304).

When the processing of S2304 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the short remaining time counter 223y is 1 or more (that is, whether it is in the time saving state of the normal symbol) (S2305), and the value of the short remaining time counter 223y is 1. If it is determined that it is above (S2305: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223y is updated by subtracting 1 (S2306), and the remaining time reduction number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is updated. A remaining time reduction command for displaying is set (S2307), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, if it is determined that the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223y is 0 (S2305: No), it means that the current state is normal, and the number of times of reduction in time is not displayed (that is, , there is no need to update the display of the number of times of reduced working hours), the processing of S2306 and S2307 is skipped and the present processing is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 445, details of the above-described win-related processing (S2411) will be described. FIG. 445 is a flow chart showing this win-related processing (S2411). This win-related process (S2411), as described above, when receiving various commands related to win from the main controller 110 (one of the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command), It is a process for executing the control that

In this hit-related processing (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2401). A display opening command for starting is set (S2402), it is determined whether or not the rotating effect device 296 is displaced from the initial arrangement, and if it is deviated from the initial arrangement, the reversing return operation of the rotating effect device 296 is performed. Inverting operation setting processing is executed (S2403), and this processing ends. In the process of S2403, the same process as the process of S2214 of the command determination process (see FIG. 443) is executed. Details of the reversing operation setting process (S2403, S2214) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S2401, if it is determined that the opening command is not included in the command received from the main controller 110 (S2401: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received. (S2404), if the round number command is received (S2404: Yes), display for updating the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 to the display mode according to the number of rounds indicated by the received round number command A command for the number of rounds for use is set (S2405), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S2404, if it is determined that the command received from main controller 110 does not include the number of rounds command (S2404: No), then whether the ending command was received from main controller 110 It is determined whether or not (S2406), and if it is determined that the ending command has been received (S2406: Yes), the jackpot end setting process for setting the rotation operation etc. at the end of the jackpot is executed (S2407), and this End the process. The details of this jackpot end setting process (S2407) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2406 that the ending command has not been received (S2406: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 446, details of the reversing operation setting process (S2403, S2214) described above will be described. This reversing operation setting process (S2403, S2214) returns to the initial arrangement when the arrangement of the rotation effect device 296 is deviated from the initial arrangement (the arrangement where the rotation angle of the outlet 296a is 0 degree) as described above. This process is for

In the reversing operation setting process (see FIG. 446), first, it is determined whether or not the reversing return operation flag 223m is on (S2441). ), which means that the arrangement (rotational position) of the rotating effect device 296 is reversed 180 degrees from the initial arrangement. and then) each process of S2442 to S2444 for returning to the initial arrangement is executed. More specifically, the rotation motion (motion scenario) defined in the reverse return motion table 222d2 is set as the rotation motion of the rotation effect device 296 (S2442). Next, the reversing return operation flag 223m is set to OFF (S2443), and the rotation operation start is set by setting 4 to the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2444) (S2444), and this processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, in the process of S2441, if it is determined that the reversal return operation flag 223m is off (S2441: Yes), it means that the rotation effect device 296 is already in the initial arrangement, so S2442 to S2444. skip each process of , and terminate this process.

In addition, in this eighth control example, when the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state (when the state command indicating the normal state is received) and at the start of the jackpot (when the opening command is received), Although this reversal operation setting process (see FIG. 446) was configured to be executed, the effect using the rotating effect device 296 is executed during the jackpot game state (even if the rotating effect device 296 is reversed during the normal game Since it does not affect the game), the reversal operation setting process (see FIG. 446) may be uniformly executed at the start of the jackpot (not executed at the end of the time saving state). By configuring in this way, the control program can be simplified. Moreover, the processing load at the end of the time saving state can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 447, details of the above-described jackpot end setting process (S2407) will be described. This jackpot end setting process (S2407) is a process executed when an ending command is received from main controller 110 in the jackpot related process (see FIG. 445). This is a process for setting

In this jackpot end setting process (see FIG. 447), first, of the six types of execution operations specified in the rotation effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 412), the type of ending effect notified by the ending command (ending A or ending B) and the value of the effect counter 223f (S2461). It is determined whether the device 296 cannot operate normally (S2462).

In the processing of S2462, if it is determined that 5 is not stored in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2462: No), it means that the rotation effect device 296 is in a state in which it can operate normally. , to set a display rotation effect execution command for executing the display mode corresponding to the execution action selected in the process of S2461 (S2463). More specifically, as described above, when the ending command indicating "ending A" is received, if the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 190", the display rotation effect A command indicating the execution effect A1 is set as the execution command, and if the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is within the range of "191 to 198", a command indicating the execution effect A2 is set as the rotation effect execution command for display. be. On the other hand, when the ending command indicating "ending B" is received, if the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 100", the execution effect B1 is indicated as the rotation effect execution command for display. If the command is set and the value (range) of the effect counter 223f is within the range of “101 to 150”, the command indicating the execution effect B2 is set as the display rotation effect execution command, and the value (range) of the effect counter 223f ) is within the range of “151 to 190”, a command indicating the execution performance B3 is set as the rotation performance execution command for display, and the value (range) of the performance counter 223f is within the range of “191 to 198”. For example, a command indicating the execution effect B4 is set as the rotation effect execution command for display.

After the processing of S2463 is finished, next, the rotation operation table (one of the rotation operation A table 222d3 to the rotation operation C table 222d5) specified for the execution operation selected in the processing of S2461 is read from the rotation device operation table 222d. is set as the rotation operation to be executed this time (S2464). Next, the state of the button release flag 223k is set from the execution action selected by the process of S2461 (S2465), and the switching action table corresponding to the selected execution action is stored in the switching action storage area 223t (S2466). Next, a result display command for display corresponding to the selected execution operation is acquired and set (S2467), and the reversal return operation flag 223m is set to the state corresponding to the selected execution operation (S2468).

After the processing of S2468 is completed, the value of the rotation operation time timer 223q corresponding to the rotation operation set in the processing of S2464 is read from the rotation operation time setting table 222c and set in the rotation operation time timer 223q. The result display waiting time is acquired from the time setting table 222c (S2469). Next, by setting 2 in the rotational movement status storage area 223p, the start of the rotational movement set in the process of S2464 is set (S2470), and the rotational entry completion flag 223s is cleared (S2471). Then, the irregular winning flag 223x is cleared (S2472), and the process proceeds to S2473.

On the other hand, in the process of S2462, if it is determined that 5 is stored in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2462: Yes), it means that the rotation effect device 296 cannot operate normally. Instead of executing each process of S2463 to S2472 for setting the effect operation using the rotating effect device 296, the result display command for display specified in the execution operation acquired by the process of S2461 is set (S2474 ), and the process proceeds to S2473. That is, the setting of the effect operation using the rotation effect device 296 is not performed, and only the display setting of the result (notification of the game state after the end of the jackpot) is performed. In the process of S2473 executed after either the process of S2472 or S2474 is executed, the value of the short remaining time counter 223y is updated to the value corresponding to the result display command for display (S2473), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 448, the details of the rotation operation control process (S2111), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 442), will be described. This rotation motion control process (S2111) is a process for controlling the rotation motion of the rotation effect device 296, as described above. In the rotation operation control process (see S2111), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 1 or more (S2501). S2501: Yes), the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is updated by subtracting 1 (S2502), and the process proceeds to S2503. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2501 that the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 0 (S2501: No), the process of S2502 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2503.

In the processing of S2503, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the rotation operation status storage area 223p is 1 (that is, the initial operation of the rotation effect device 296 is being executed) (S2503), and the rotation operation status is determined. When it is determined that the value stored in the storage area 223p is 1 (S2503: Yes), rotation initial operation processing is executed for advancing the initial operation of the rotation effect device 296 in accordance with the defined contents of the initial operation table 222b1. (S2504), and the process ends. The details of this rotation initial operation process (S2504) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the processing of S2503 that the value stored in the rotational operation status storage area 223p is not 1 (S2503: No), then the value stored in the rotational operation status storage area 223p is 2. (S2505). In the processing of S2505, if it is determined that 2 is stored in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2505: Yes), the rotation effect based on any one of the rotation operation A table 222d3 to the rotation operation C table 222d5 is being executed. Since it means that it is, the rotation production|presentation process for advancing a rotation production|presentation is performed (S2506), and this process is complete|finished. Details of this rotation effect processing (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the processing of S2505 that the value stored in the rotational operation status storage area 223p is not 2 (S2505: No), then the value stored in the rotational operation status storage area 223p is 3. (S2507). In the processing of S2507, if it is determined that 3 is stored in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2507: Yes), the switching operation based on the switching operation A table 222d6 or the switching operation B table 222d7 is being executed. This means that switching operation processing for advancing the switching operation is executed (S2508), and this processing ends. The details of this switching operation process (S2508) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the processing of S2507 that the value stored in the rotational operation status storage area 223p is not 3 (S2507: No), then the value stored in the rotational operation status storage area 223p is 4. (S2509). In the processing of S2509, if it is determined that 4 is stored in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2509: Yes), it means that the reversing return operation is being executed. is executed (S2510), and the process ends. Details of this reversal return process (S2510) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that 4 is not stored in the rotation status storage area 223p (S2509: No), it means that 0 is stored in the rotation status storage area 223p. Since the rotation motion is not set for the effect device 296, this process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 449, details of the rotation initial operation process (S2504) described above will be described. This rotation initial motion process (S2504) is one process in the rotation motion control process (see FIG. 448) of the main process (see FIG. 442). is executed.

In the rotation initial operation process (see FIG. 449), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 1 or more (S2601). (S2601: Yes), next, the operation contents of the initial operation table 222d1 are read out (S2602), and the data stored in the operation position storage area 223r are updated according to the operation contents corresponding to the current timer value ( S2603).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is at the detection position of the origin detection sensor (S2604), and if it is not at the detection position (S2604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S2604, if it is determined that the position is detected by the origin detection sensor (S2604: Yes), the value of the origin detection counter 223n is updated by adding 1 (S2605), and the updated origin detection counter is updated. 223n is determined to be 4 (S2606). If the value of the origin detection counter 223n is 4, it means that the rotation effect device 296 has rotated four times (performed two rotations in each of the forward and backward directions). That is, it means that the initial operation of the rotation effect device 296 is completed, so by setting 0 to the rotation operation status storage area 223p, the end of the initial operation of the rotation effect device 296 is set (S2607), End this process. Regardless of the value of the rotation operation timer 223q, when the value of the origin detection counter 223n reaches 4, the initial operation is terminated (the rotation effect device 296 is stopped). The production device 296 can be reliably placed at the origin position. Therefore, when a big win is made after that, the rotation operation can be started from the normal arrangement (origin position).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the rotation timer 223q is 0 (S2601: No), all the rotation operations specified in the initial operation table 222d1 (see FIG. 413) should have ended. Since it means that the elapsed time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the arrangement of the rotation effect device 296 is at the detection position of the origin detection sensor (that is, whether the output of the origin detection sensor is turned on), If it is at the detection position of the origin detection sensor (S2608: Yes), it means that the rotation effect device 296 has returned to the origin position at the timing when the execution period of the rotation effect device 296 ends, and the initial operation is Since the process has been completed normally, the process proceeds to S2607 to set the end of the initial operation of the rotating effect device 296 based on the initial operation table 222d1.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2608, when it is determined that the rotation effect device 296 is not arranged at the detection position of the origin detection sensor (S2608: No), all the operations specified in the initial operation table 222d1 are finished. It means that the rotation effect device 296 has not returned to the detection position in spite of the timing at which it should be (that is, it should have returned to the detection position of the origin detection sensor), and an abnormality such as a failure has occurred. Since there is a high possibility that an error has occurred, an error command for display is set (S2609), data 5 indicating that an error has occurred is set in the rotating operation status storage area (S2610), and this processing ends. When the display error command is received, the display control device 114 executes error notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the operation of the rotation effect device 296 . As a result, it is possible to detect the occurrence of a problem at an early stage.

In the eighth control example, when the rotation effect device 296 is not located at the origin position when the rotation operation timer 223q reaches 0, the error is notified by immediately setting the error command for display. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that the rotation effect device 296 is not placed at the origin position when the rotation operation timer 223q reaches 0, the rotation operation is continued by adding a predetermined step (for example, 10 steps). If it is placed at the origin position within a prescribed step, the initial movement is terminated. On the other hand, even if the additional movement for the prescribed steps is completed, if the origin position is still not reached, an error is reported. may be configured. By configuring in this way, due to aging deterioration of the rotation motor 298, etc., minor abnormalities such as the number of steps for making one rotation of the rotation effect device 296, the operating speed, etc. deviate from the design values. If it is, the initial operation can be terminated as it is, but if a serious problem such as the rotation motor 298 completely stopping has occurred, repair must be carried out. can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 450, details of the rotation effect processing (S2506) will be described. This rotation production process (S2506) is, as described above, a process for advancing the rotation production. In this rotation effect processing (S2506), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 1 or more (S2701). No), 0 is set in the rotational operation status storage area 223p (S2715), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 1 or more (S2701: Yes), the operation contents of the rotation operation table currently being set are read, and the read operation contents are sent to the PPS. (S2702). Next, the data in the operation position storage area 223r is updated according to the read action contents (S2703), and it is determined whether the button release flag 223k is ON (S2704), and the button release flag 223k is OFF. (S2704: No), it is determined whether or not it is time to release the flow path solenoid 294 (S2713). If it is determined that it is not the time to release the flow path solenoid 294 (S2713: No), the process proceeds to S2714. On the other hand, in the process of S2713, if it is determined that it is time to release the flow path solenoid 294 (S2713: Yes), the process proceeds to S2712 to set the release operation of the flow path solenoid 294 (S2712).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2704 that the button release flag 223k is ON (S2704: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current operation valid period for the frame button 22 is in effect (S2705). In the process of S2705, if it is determined that the operation valid period of the frame button 22 is not reached (S2705: No), the process proceeds to S2714. If it is determined in the process of S2705 that the operation effective period for the frame button 22 has expired (S2705: Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation (pressing) for the frame button 22 has been detected (S2706). Then, if an operation on the frame button 22 is not detected (S2706: No), the process proceeds to S2714.

In the processing of S2706, if it is determined that an operation on the frame button 22 has been detected (S2706: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the switching operation is a rotation operation set (S2707), and the switching operation is set. If so (S2707: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is during the switching valid period (S2708). Then, if it is determined that it is during the switching effective period (S2708: Yes), 3 is set in the rotation operation status storage area 223p (S2709), and the switching flag 223aa is set to ON (S2710), and processing is performed. to S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2707 that the switching motion is a rotation motion for which the switching motion is not set (S2707: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S2708 that it is outside the effective switching period, (S2708: No), the processes of S2709 and S2710 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2711.

In the process of S2711, the button release flag 223k is set to OFF (S2711), the release operation of the channel solenoid 294 is set (S2712), and the process proceeds to S2714. In the process of S2714, the result display process for displaying the result corresponding to the execution operation of the rotating effect device 296 is executed (S2714), and the process ends. The details of this result display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing result display processing (S2712). This result display process (S2712) is a process for displaying a result corresponding to the execution operation of the rotation effect device 296, as described above. In the result display process (S2712), first, it is determined whether or not the spinning flag 223s is ON (S2801). Since it means that , this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2801, if it is determined that the spin-entered ball completion flag 223s is off (S2801: No), next, whether or not the game ball has passed through the spin-entered ball switch 295 (passage has been detected). (S2802). Then, in the process of S2802, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the rotation entry ball switch 295 (S2802: No), the currently set rotation operation table (rotation operation A table 222d3 to rotation operation C table 222d5) has elapsed based on the value of the rotation operation timer 223q (S2803). Specifically, in the case of the rotating motion based on the rotating motion A table 222d3, it is determined whether 23000 ms has elapsed as the result display waiting time, and in the case of the rotating motion based on the rotating motion B table 222d4 and the rotating motion C table 222d5, , determine whether 26200 ms has elapsed as the result display waiting time.

In the processing of S2803, if it is determined that the result display waiting time corresponding to the rotation operation this time has not elapsed (S2803: No), it is not the time to set the result display, so this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2803, if it is determined that the result display waiting time has elapsed (S2803: Yes), it is determined whether the irregular winning flag 223x is ON (S2804), and the irregular winning flag 223x is set. If it is determined to be on (S2804: Yes), the ball is rotated in a state where the entrance corresponding to the content of the result display that was supposed to be executed in this rotation is not in a rotational position where the ball can be entered. Since the passage of the game ball through the entrance switch 295 is detected, there is a possibility that the game ball has entered a ball entrance contrary to the contents of the result display, or the game ball has been damaged from a route other than the regular route. It may have reached the turn-in ball switch 295 . Therefore, in this case, if the result is displayed, there is a possibility that the displayed content will be inconsistent with the ball entrance into which the game ball entered, which may confuse the player. Terminate this process without setting the result display. On the other hand, in the process of S2804, if it is determined that the irregular winning flag 223x is off (S2804: No), the process proceeds to S2808.

On the other hand, in the process of S2802, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the rotation entry ball switch 295 (S2802: Yes), then from the result display determination table 222e (see FIG. 419), the operation position storage The content of the result display (result display judgment content) corresponding to the data stored in the area 223r is read. Furthermore, from the rotating effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 412(a)), the contents of the result display (contents of the result display command for display) corresponding to the currently executed operation are read out, and the contents of each result display are read out. are compared (S2805). Then, it is determined whether or not the contents of the two display results compared by the process of S2805 match (S2806), and if the comparison results match (S2806), the process proceeds to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2806, if it is determined that the comparison result does not match (S2806: No), the irregular prize winning flag 223x is set to ON (S2807), and the process of S2808 for setting the result display is skipped. Then, the process moves to S2809. Here, the reason why the processing of S2808 is skipped is the content of the result display that was scheduled to be displayed and the type of the ball entrance through which the game ball passed during the jackpot (input with the letters “LUCKY” attached). If there is a discrepancy between the ball hole 296a and the ball hole 296b marked with the character "100"), displaying the result may confuse the player. This is because Therefore, in the eighth control example, when there is a discrepancy between the content of the result display that was scheduled to be displayed and the type of the entrance through which the game ball passed during the jackpot (the irregular winning flag 223x is turned on) is set), execution of a predetermined result display is avoided. As a result, the result recalled from the characters attached to the ball entrance into which the game ball entered (whether the time saving state of 100 times is given or the variable state of 200 times is given) is displayed. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from being confused by the content of the result display that is different from the displayed result.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the irregular winning flag 223x is turned off in S2804, or in the process of S2808 executed after the process of S2806, from the rotating effect selection table 222b (see FIG. 412(a)), the The result display command for display corresponding to the executed operation is read out and set as a command to be output to the display control device 114 (S2808). Next, the spin-entered flag 223s is set to ON (S2809), and the process ends.

By this result display processing (see FIG. 451), the result of the effect using the rotating effect device 296 can be appropriately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 452, details of the switching operation process (S2508) described above will be described. This switching operation process (S2508) is, as described above, a process for advancing the switching operation (rotational operation in the backward roll direction) that may be set after the button effect.

In the switching operation process (see FIG. 452), first, it is determined whether or not the switching flag 223aa is on (S2901). If it is determined that the switching flag 223aa is on (S2901: Yes), Then, the operation contents of the rotation operation table being set are read, and the read operation contents are set according to the PPS (S2902). Next, the data in the motion position storage area 223r (data indicating the rotation angle of the rotation effect device 296) is updated according to the contents of the read motion (S2903). When the processing of S2903 ends, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the switching operation (S2904). ), and the process proceeds to S2910. On the other hand, in the process of S2904, if it is determined that it is not the switching operation start timing (S2904: No), the process of S2905 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2910.

In the processing of S2901, if it is determined that the switching flag 223aa is off (S2901: No), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 1 or more (S2906), and the rotation operation timer If the value of 223q is 1 or more (S2906: Yes), the operation contents of the switching operation table (either switching operation A table 222d6 or switching operation B table 222d7) set for the current rotation operation are read. , and sets the read operation contents according to the PPS (S2907). Next, the content of the motion position storage area 223r is updated according to the read motion content (S2908), and the process proceeds to S2910.

In the process of S2910, the result display process is executed (S2910), and the process ends. This result display process (S2910) is completely the same as the process executed in the process of S2714 of the rotation effect process (see FIG. 450), and has already been described in detail with reference to FIG. Details of the processing contents are omitted. In addition, in the process of S2906, if it is determined that the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 0 (S2906: No), the end of the rotation operation is set by setting 0 in the rotation operation status storage area 223p ( S2909), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 453, details of the reversal return processing (S2510) described above will be described. FIG. 453 is a flow chart showing this reverse return processing (S2510). This reversal return process (S2510) is, as described above, a process for advancing the reversal return operation.

In the reverse return process (see FIG. 453), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the rotation timer 223q is 1 or more (S3001). (S3001: Yes), next, the operation contents corresponding to the reversal return operation table 222d2 are read, and the read operation contents are set according to the PPS (S3002). Next, the data (data indicating the rotation angle of the rotation effect device 296) stored in the motion position storage area 223r is updated according to the read action content (S3003).

After the processing of S3003 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the origin detection sensor has detected the origin position (S3004). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3004 that the origin detection sensor has detected the origin position (S3004), and if it is determined that the value of the rotation operation timer 223q is 0 in the processing of S3001 (S3001 : No), by setting 0 in the rotation operation status storage area 223p, the reversing return operation is terminated (S3005), and this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the details of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 442), will be described. FIG. 454 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107). As described above, this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107) is set to monitor the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and to perform a corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2107: see FIG. 254), first, a value greater than 0 (that is, 1 or more) is set in the SW valid time counter 223h as the SW (switch) valid time (valid period). (S3101). When it is determined that the value of the SW effective time counter 223h is 1 or more (S3101: Yes), the value of the SW effective time counter 223h is updated by subtracting 1 (S3102). It is determined whether or not it is detected that the output of is turned on (S3103). In the process of S3103, if it is determined that the output of the frame button sensor 297 is ON (S3103: Yes), is 3 stored in the input type storage area 223u (that is, if the current SW valid period (S3104), and if it is determined that 3 is stored in the input type storage area 223u (that is, the double continuous hit effect is being executed) (S3104). : Yes), the control (each process of S3105 to S3109) corresponding to the depression in the double hit effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3104 that a value other than 3 is stored in the input type storage area 223u (S3104: No), and in the process of S3103 it is determined that the output of the frame button sensor 297 is off. If so (S3103: No), there is no need to perform pressing control during the double hit effect, so the processes of S3105 to S3109 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3110.

In the process of S3105, the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w is updated by adding 1 (S3105), and it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w after the addition is the upper limit value (S3106). In the processing of S3106, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w is the upper limit value (S3106: Yes), a notice display command for display indicating a notice effect according to the lottery result of this special symbol is set (S3107 ). More specifically, an effect is executed in which the character 711 displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 utters a line suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit in the current variable display. There are multiple types of lines that suggest expectations, and if the lottery result of the special pattern is a big hit, the percentage of lines that suggest high expectations (for example, the line "hot heat") is displayed. When the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the rate of displaying lines suggesting low expectations (for example, lines such as "chance?") increases. After the process of S3107, the value of the SW valid time counter 223h is reset to 0 (S3108), and the process proceeds to S3110.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3106, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w after addition does not reach the upper limit value (S3106: No), the display mode for updating the display mode according to the counter value after addition is displayed. A notice display command is set (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3110.

In this way, during the execution of the double hit effect, even when the frame button 297 is turned on, the repeated hit counter 223w is updated, and pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (when the frame button 22 is completely pushed in). It is configured to execute the same production as the case). With this configuration, in the double hit effect, one operation of pressing the frame button 22 performs two detection operations, that is, the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 and the detection by the frame button sensor 297. It is possible to set an announcement effect for repeated hits for each detection action. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly hit (depress the frame button 22) at substantially twice the speed. Also, the number of presses (the counter value of the repeated hitting counter 223w) can easily reach the upper limit.

Also, even if the frame button 22 is not completely pressed, if the frame button sensor 297 is turned on, the number of presses (the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w) is incremented. Even when is playing a game, it is possible to proceed with repeated hits (increase the counter value of the repeated hit counter 223w and change the effect mode). Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In the process of S3110, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3110). If it is determined that pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S3110: Yes), pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected. A frame button operation process for performing control according to the situation is executed (S3111), and the process proceeds to S3118. Details of this frame button operation processing (S3111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

If it is determined in the process of S3101 that the SW effective time counter 223h is 0 (S3101: No), it is determined whether the value of the sensor effective time counter 223i is 1 or more (S3112). If the value of the effective time counter 223i is 1 or more (S3112: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the sensor effective time counter (S3113), and the process proceeds to S3115. On the other hand, in the process of S3112, if it is determined that the value of the sensor effective time counter 223i is 0 (S3112: No), each operation means (frame button 22, touch sensor 290) is executed (S3114), and the process proceeds to S3115. Details of this operation timer setting process (S3114) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S3115 executed after the process of S3113 or S3114, it is determined whether or not pressing (operation) on the frame button 22 has been detected (S3115). ), the data indicating the background mode stored in the background mode storage area 223g is updated by adding 1 (S3116), and the display switching command indicating the background mode corresponding to the added data is set (S3117). ), and the process proceeds to S3118. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3115 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S3115: No), the processes of S3116 and S3117 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3118.

In the process of S3118, the output of the touch sensor 290 is monitored, and the sensor input process for executing the corresponding control when the output of the touch sensor 290 is turned on is executed (S3118), and the process ends. . Details of this sensor input processing (S3118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 455, details of the operation timer setting process (S3117) will be described. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing operation timer setting processing (S3117). In this operation timer setting process (S3117), as described above, a variable display effect in which a predetermined operation effect (effect to prompt pressing of frame button 22, effect to prompt touch to touch sensor 290, etc.) is set is executed. This is a process for setting a period (operation valid period) during which the operation for each operation means (the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290) is valid when the operation is enabled.

In this operation timer setting process (see FIG. 455), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display effect is currently being executed (S3201). ), and since there is no possibility of executing the operation effect, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the variable display effect is being executed (S3201: Yes), then whether the execution of the operation effect is set for the current variable display effect (i.e. , whether or not the input operation type is selected from the input effect setting table 222f at the start of fluctuation (S3202). In the process of S3202, if the execution of the operation effect (input operation type) is not set (S3202: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S3202, if execution of the operation effect is set (S3202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the operation start time of the set operation effect (input operation type) has reached ( S3203), if it is determined that the operation start time has not been reached (S3203: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the S3203 process, when it is determined that the operation start time has been reached (S3203: Yes), next, among the operation settings set for the current variable display effect, A set value (parameter) to be set is set in the input type storage area 223u (S3204). Next, the setting target RAM (type of valid time counter for setting the valid time) corresponding to the setting value (parameter) set in the input type storage area 223u is specified (acquired) from the valid timer setting table 222g (S3205), Data corresponding to the valid timer value in the operation settings set for the current variable display effect is set in the specified (obtained) setting target RAM (valid time counter type) (S3206). Next, the continuous hit counter 223w is reset (S3207), the touch counter 223j is reset (S3208), the composite operation flag 223v is set to OFF (S3209), and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the details of the frame button operation process (S3111) will be described. This frame button operation process (S3111) is, as described above, a process for executing corresponding control when an operation on the frame button 22 is detected. In the frame button operation process (S3111), first, it is determined whether or not the setting value (parameter) stored in the input type storage area 223u is 5 (that is, whether or not the composite touch effect is being executed) ( S3301), if it is determined that 5 is stored in the input type storage area 223u (that is, the composite touch effect is being executed) (S3301: Yes), then whether the composite operation flag 223v is on ( That is, in the composite touch effect, it is determined whether or not the operation of the touch sensor 290 has already been detected before the pressing detected this time (S3302), and if the composite operation flag 223v is on (S3302: Yes), read out the aspect of the compound announcement effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f from the compound determination table 222h (see FIG. 421(b)) (S3303), set the announcement display command for display indicating the read condition ( S3304), and the process proceeds to S3311. More specifically, when the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 is the timing at which matching is determined (the value of the effect counter 223f is within the range of values determined as matching), a robot is simulated. While executing an effect in which the character 711 makes a banzai (matching motion in which the motion of the left hand and the motion of the right hand are symmetrical) After the start of the touch effect, by touching the touch sensor 290 first, the right hand starts to move up and down at a timing that is left-right asymmetric (shifted) from the right hand that has already repeated the up and down motion periodically. (A non-matching operation is initiated). As mentioned above, the timing at which matching is determined is wider in the case of the variation pattern of the big win than in the case of the loss, so the possibility of performing the matching operation is higher in the case of the big win. Become. Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be operated in anticipation of the matching action, the player's interest in the game can be improved when the composite touch effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3302 that the composite operation flag 223v is off (S3302: No), the composite operation flag 223v is set to on (S3305), and then the A preview display command for display indicating the first operation in the composite preview display is set (S3306), and the process proceeds to S3312. Here, the first action corresponding to the frame button 22 specifically indicates the action of the robot-like character 711 displayed in the small area Ds2 raising its right hand (see FIG. 393(b)).

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the setting value (parameter) stored in the input type storage area 223u is not 5 (S3301: No), the setting value stored in the input type storage area 223u is It is determined whether it is 1 (that is, whether the one-shot button effect is being executed) (S3307), and if 1 is stored in the input type storage area 223u (S3307: Yes), this special symbol lottery result (S3308), and the process proceeds to S3312.

On the other hand, in the process of S3307, if it is determined that the setting value (parameter) stored in the input type storage area 223u is not 1 (S3307: No), 2 or 3 is stored in the input type storage area 223u ( 1 is added to the repeated hitting counter 223w (S3309). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w after updating is the upper limit value (S3310), and if it is the upper limit value (S3310: Yes), an advance notice effect corresponding to the lottery result of this special symbol is displayed. A display advance notice display command is set (S3311), and the process proceeds to S3312.

In the process of S3312, which is executed after one of the processes of S3304, S3305, S3308, and S3311 is executed, the SW valid time counter 223h is reset to 0 (S3312), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3310, if it is determined that the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w after the update by the process of S3309 is less than the upper limit value (S3310: No), the display mode according to the counter value after addition is displayed. The advance notice display command for display is set (S3313), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when it is detected that the frame button 22 is pressed during the execution of the normal repeated hit effect or the double repeated hit effect, regardless of whether the normal repeated hit effect or the double repeated hit effect is performed. , adds 1 to the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w, and executes an effect according to the number of repeated hittings. Furthermore, as described above, in the eighth control example, when it is detected that the output of the frame button sensor 297 is turned on during execution of the double hit effect in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 454). In addition, 1 is added to the value of the repeated hit counter 223w, and an effect corresponding to the number of repeated hits is executed. With this configuration, in the double hit effect, one operation of pressing the frame button 22 performs two detection operations, that is, the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 and the detection by the frame button sensor 297. It is possible to set an announcement effect for repeated hits for each detection action. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly hit (depress the frame button 22) at substantially twice the speed. Also, the number of presses (the counter value of the repeated hitting counter 223w) can easily reach the upper limit.

Also, even if the frame button 22 is not completely pressed, if the frame button sensor 297 is turned on, the number of presses (the value of the repeated hitting counter 223w) is incremented. Even when is playing a game, it is possible to proceed with repeated hits (increase the counter value of the repeated hit counter 223w and change the effect mode). Therefore, convenience for the player can be improved.

In the eighth control example, when it is detected that the frame button sensor 297 is turned on during execution of the double hit effect, exactly the same operation as when it is detected that the frame button 22 is pressed is executed. However, it is not limited to this. When it is detected that the output of the frame button sensor 297 has been turned on, the number of times that the frame button 22 has been turned on is counted until the next time the frame button 22 is pressed. is detected, the number of ON times of the frame button sensor 297 that has been counted may be added and reflected in the repeated hitting counter 223w. In other words, until the frame button 22 is pressed, the frame button sensor 297 is configured not to reflect the number of repeated hits corresponding to the ON state, and when the frame button sensor 297 is detected to be pressed, the output of the frame button sensor 297 is turned ON. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of repeated hits is formally reflected in the number of repeated hits. By configuring in this way, during execution of the double hit effect, the effect mode does not change (the effect is repeated until the frame button 22 is pushed to the position where the frame button 22 is pushed to the position where the press is detected). ), the player can easily recognize that the pressing amount of the frame button 22 was small. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably press the frame button 22 to the press detection position. In addition, the player who has grasped the pressing amount of the frame button 22 until the pressing is detected can be made to press the frame button 22 to the pressing detection position with each repeated hit during execution of the double repeated hitting performance. That is, during execution of the double hit effect, a situation is generated in which repeated hit detection in response to pressing of the frame button 22 and detection of repeated hits in response to the output of the frame button sensor 297 being turned on are alternately performed. Since it can be easily performed, the number of repeated hits can be counted earlier than the normal repeated hit production. Further, by turning on the frame button sensor 297 and continuously operating the frame button 22 to such an extent that the pressing of the frame button 22 is not detected, the number of consecutive hits is accumulated, and the frame button 22 is pressed at a desired timing. It is also possible to play a game by pressing the button to increase the number of consecutive hits at once. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game method during execution of the double continuous hitting effect, so that each player can select his or her favorite continuous hitting method. Furthermore, in this case, if the frame button sensor 297 is turned on and the maximum number of repeated hits is reached during the effective period of the double hit effect, an effect prompting the user to strongly press the frame button 22 (double A special display mode different from the display mode that prompts the user to press the frame button 22, which is displayed during execution of the continuous hit effect, may be executed. By configuring in this way, the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 not reaching the pressing detection position is performed the number of times corresponding to the upper limit value of the repeated pressing counter 223w (that is, when the frame button 22 is pressed to the pressing detection position). Therefore, it is possible to prevent continuous hitting beyond the number of times that triggers the display of the effect mode indicating the result of the repeated hitting effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing useless pressing (operation). As an effect to encourage pressing the frame button 22 strongly, in addition to changing the display mode to a special display mode, the appearance of the frame button 22 itself (color development, light emission mode, protrusion amount of the frame button 22, etc.) ) may be varied in a manner different from usual.

Next, with reference to FIG. 457, details of the sensor input processing (S3114) will be described. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing sensor input processing (S3114). This sensor input process (S3114) is a process for executing control according to the output of touch sensor 290, as described above.

In the sensor input process (S3114: FIG. 457), first, it is determined whether or not the sensor effective time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S3401). That is, it is determined whether or not the operation (input) to the touch sensor 290 is within a valid period. In the process of S3401, if it is determined that the value of the sensor valid time counter 223i is 0 (S3401: No), regardless of whether or not the touch sensor 290 is operated, there is no possibility of displaying the advance notice. End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3401, if it is determined that the sensor effective time counter 223i is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S3401: Yes), is the touch sensor 290 turned on? It is determined whether or not the player has operated the touch sensor 290 by bringing his or her hand close to it (S3403), and if it is determined that the touch sensor 290 is on (S3402: Yes), the input type is stored in the input type storage area 223u. It is determined whether the data (parameter) is 4 (that is, whether the normal touch effect is being executed) (S3403). In the process of S3403, if it is determined that 4 is stored in the input type storage area 223u (that is, the normal touch effect is being executed) (S3403: Yes), then the value of the touch counter 223j is the upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is the value (S3404), and if it is the upper limit value (S3404: Yes), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3404 that the value of the touch counter 223j is less than the upper limit value (S3404: No), the value of the touch counter 223j is updated by adding 1 (S3405). The advance notice display command for display corresponding to the value of the touch counter 223j is set (S3406), and this processing ends.

In addition, in the sensor input process (see FIG. 457), if it is determined in the process of S3403 that the set value stored in the input type storage area 223u is not 4 (the normal touch effect is not being executed) (S3403 : No), the value of the touch counter 223j is reset to 0 (S3407), and then it is determined whether or not the composite operation flag 223v is ON (S3408). Then, when it is determined that the composite operation flag 223v is off (S3408: No), the composite operation flag 223v is set to on (S3409), and the display indicating the first operation of the composite notice display corresponding to the touch sensor 290 is displayed. An advance notice display command for use is set (S3410), and this process ends. Here, the first action corresponding to the touch sensor 290 specifically indicates the action of the robot-like character 711 displayed in the small area Ds2 raising its left hand.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3408, if it is determined that the composite operation flag 223v is ON (S3408: No), the composite determination table 222h (see FIG. 421(b)) shows the composite notice effect corresponding to the value of the effect counter 223f. mode is read out (S3411), a display advance notice display command indicating the read mode is set (S3412), and this process is terminated. More specifically, when the player's operation timing is the timing at which matching is determined (the value of the effect counter 223f is within the range of values determined as matching), the character 711 imitating the robot is displayed. (Perform a matching motion in which the motion of the left hand and the motion of the right hand are symmetrical). is pressed, the right hand starts to move up and down (a non-matching motion starts) at a timing that is left-right asymmetrical (shifted) from the left hand, which has already periodically repeated up and down motions. As mentioned above, the timing at which matching is determined is wider in the case of the variation pattern of the big win than in the case of the loss, so the possibility of performing the matching operation is higher in the case of the big win. Become. Therefore, since the frame button 22 can be operated in anticipation of the matching action, the player's interest in the game can be improved when the composite touch effect is executed.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 458 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2113). This variable display setting process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 439) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

In the variable display setting process (S2113: FIG. 458), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3501). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, is off) (S3501: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, S3505 Go to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3501: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S3502), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is It is acquired from the RAM 223 (S3503).

Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S3504). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223f are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2505.

In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S3505). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S3505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3505: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S3506), and the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is Acquired from the RAM 223 (S3507). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S3508), and the process proceeds to S3509.

In the process of S3509, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S3509). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled. After the processing of S3509 is executed, this processing ends.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the eighth control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 459 to 471. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 459, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 459 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S4001), and the display control device 114 is operated so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 460, the boot processing (S4001) will be described. 460 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S4001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S4101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S4102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101.

By setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S4102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S4102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S4103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S4104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S4001 in FIG. 459) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S4002 in FIG. 459) (S4105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S4001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding the NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 460, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S4101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S4103 to S4105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S4101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a in step S4101. and the processing of S4102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S4103 to S4105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 has been described as having a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S4103 to S4105 without performing the processes of S4101 and S4102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 459 . After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S4002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S4003). This transfer instruction contains the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4003, then the power-on variation image is transferred. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S4004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S4005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 469(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4602 in FIG. 469(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 461(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 423 is drawn. Determination processing (see S4308 in FIG. 461(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S4309 in FIG. 461(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When received via the device 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, a power-on variation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance is performed. can be done. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third symbol display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S4005, interrupt permission is set (S4006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S4006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 461(a). FIG. 461(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S4201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 461(b). FIG. 461(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 426) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 461(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S4301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S4302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S4303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S4302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the display setting process (S4303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S4302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 467 and 468. FIG.

After the display setting process (S4303) is executed, task processing is executed (S4304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S4303) or the simple display setting processing (S4309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S4305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the continuous notice is sent to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S4306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305), 426, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the buffer information to be drawn. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S4307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S4307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) indicated by the display stop type command; A stop type counter is compared with the stop type counter, and a stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S4301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (see FIG. 423) on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S4308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S4309) is executed, and S4304 is executed. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 462 to 466, details of the command determination process (S4302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 462 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process (S4302: FIG. 462), first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S4401). Terminate the determination process and return to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S4303) that the new command has been processed is set to ON (S4402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S4403).

Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S4404), and if it is determined that there is a display variation pattern command (S4404: Yes), the variation pattern Command processing is executed (S4405), and the processing returns to S4401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S4405) will be described with reference to FIG. 463(a). FIG. 463(a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process (S4405: FIG. 463(a)), first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is stored in the data table. The data is read from the area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S4501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S4501 is turned on, and other variation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S4503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S4503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S4506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S4505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S4501 , extracts the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S4504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. 462 . In the processing of S4404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S4406), If there is a display variation type command (S4406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S4407), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the stop type command process (S4407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 463(b). FIG. 463(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command process (S4407: FIG. 463(b)), first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined. (S4601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 461(b)) is executed, and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Finally, the stop pattern after the variable effect is set (S4602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It is set to off (S4603). After that, the process returns to S4401 in FIG.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S4602. In the above-described task processing (S4304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S4602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S4603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 462, the description continues. In the process of S4406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S4406: No), then it is determined whether there is an advance notice display command for display among the unprocessed commands (S4408). When it is determined that the advance notice display command for display is received (S4408: Yes), during the variable display of the special symbols, the degree of expectation for the big hit displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the fact that it is a big hit. A notice effect display process for setting a notice display mode for notifying the player of a notice or the like is executed (S4409).

Here, the advance notice effect display processing (S4409) will be described with reference to FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(a) is a flow chart showing the advance notice effect display processing (S4409). In the advance notice effect display process (FIG. 464(a), S4409), first, the display data table corresponding to the received advance notice display command for display is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S4701). Determines a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for advance notice set for display at the display timing based on the display timing of the advance notice display indicated by the received advance notice display command for display, and sets it in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S4702).

Next, the data table discrimination flag is set to ON (S4703), and based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the time data representing the fluctuation time is counted by the clock counter. 233h (S4704), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4705).

In this manner, the advance notice display is set based on the display advance notice display command output from the sound lamp control device 113, and is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 at the designated timing. Therefore, various display modes can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and even the same variation pattern can be shown to the player as if they were different display modes.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 selects the contents of the notice display and the display timing, but not limited to this, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 is configured to execute the selection of the notice display. You may

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table for advance notice is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

Returning to FIG. 462, the description continues. In the process of S4408, if it is determined that there is no advance notice display command for display (S4408: No), it is determined whether there is a switch command for display among unprocessed commands (S4410). If it is determined that there is a display switching command (S4410: Yes), mode switching processing is executed (S4411). In this mode switching process (S4411), the process of switching to the display mode corresponding to the background mode is executed based on the operation of the frame button 22. FIG.

Here, the mode switching process will be described with reference to FIG. 464(b) (S4411). FIG. 464(b) is a flow chart showing this mode switching process (S4411). In the mode switching process (S4411), first, the background mode corresponding to the received command is set in the background mode storage area 223i (S4801). It is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating (S4802). When it is determined that the special symbols are changing (S4802: Yes), the background mode display data table buffer corresponding to the background mode corresponding to the received command is set to active (S4803). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is stopped (S4802: No), the background data is changed to the background data corresponding to the received command and set (S4804).

In this way, if the special symbols are changing, the display mode is switched to a changing pattern corresponding to the background mode. On the other hand, if the special symbols are stopped, the background of the standby state display mode is set to be displayed in the set background.

Note that the process of changing the background etc. according to the background mode may be configured as follows.

A back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process of the change of the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command is set to ON. Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off, the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag to be set is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag to be set. Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in a predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the set back face image determination flag is used at that point in time. The type of back image to be displayed is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. If it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received first may be turned on, or A back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the received back image command may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Returning to FIG. 462, the description continues. In the process of S4410, when it is determined that there is no display switching command (S4410: No), it is determined whether there is a display rotation effect execution command (S4412). When it is determined that there is a rotation effect execution command for display (S4412: Yes), a rotation effect execution command process for setting the start of execution of the rotation effect is executed (S4413), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, details of the rotation effect execution command process (S4413) will be described with reference to FIG. 465(a). FIG. 465(a) is a flow chart showing the rotation effect execution command process (S4413).

In the rotation effect command process (S4413: FIG. 465(a)), first, the display data table for executing the rotation effect of the display effect corresponding to the received display rotation effect execution command is determined and set in the display data table buffer. (S4901).

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for execution of rotation effect set in the process of S4901 is determined, read out from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4902). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each data table for executing the rotating effect corresponding to each rotating effect, the data table determining flag corresponding to the display data table for executing the rotating effect set by the processing of S4901 is selected. Along with turning on, the data table determination flag corresponding to the other display data table for execution of rotation effect is set to off (S4903).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for the holding lid set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S4901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S4904 ), the pointer 233f is initialized to 0, and (S4905) the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 462, the description continues. In the process of S4412, when it is determined that there is no display rotation effect execution command (S4412: No), it is determined whether there is a display result display command (S4414). If it is determined that there is a result display command for display (S4414: Yes), the result display command process is executed (S4415), and the process returns to S4401.

Here, the result display command process (S4415) will be described with reference to FIG. 465(b). FIG. 465(b) is a flow chart showing this result display command process (S4415).

In the result display command process (S4413: FIG. 465(b)), first, the display data table for result display corresponding to the received display result display command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S5001).

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table for result display set in S5001 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5002). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each display data table for result display corresponding to each result display, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table for result display set by the process of S5001 is turned on. At the same time, the data table discrimination flags corresponding to other display data tables for result display are set to OFF (S5003).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the display data table for reserved characters set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5001, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5004). ), initializes the pointer 233f to 0 (S5005), and returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 462, the description continues. In the processing of S4414, if it is determined that there is no display result display command (S4414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S4416), and the error command If there is (S4416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S4417), and the process returns to S4401.

Details of the error command processing (S4417) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 466 is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process (S4417: FIG. 466), first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S5101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S5102, error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 462 . If it is determined in the process of S4416 that there is no error command (S4416: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S4418), and the process returns to the process of S4401.

In the process of S4401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S4401: Yes ), and the processing of S4402 to S4418 is executed again. Then, the processing of S4401 to S4418 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S4308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 461(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 463 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 463 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 463(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S4501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S4502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 467 and 468, the details of the display setting process (S4303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 467 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 467, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S5301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination processing to be executed first, the processing of S5202 to S5204 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S5205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S5201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S5202), S5203-S5204 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S5203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S5203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S5203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S5204).

Here, with reference to FIG. 468(a), details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 468(a) is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S5301).

In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the warning image are identified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle are determined. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S5301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S5302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 467 . After the warning image setting process (S5204), or if it is determined in the process of S5203 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S5203: No), then the process proceeds to S5205.

In S5205, pointer update processing is executed (S5205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 468(b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the respective buffers of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S5401). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S5401, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S4502). As a result, if it is End information (S5402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the substance data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S5403). The time data corresponding to the performance time of the display data table for demonstration set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S5404), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S5405), and this processing ends. and return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S5403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S5406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is displayed. is always expanded, the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S5402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S5402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, return to FIG. 467 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5206). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S5206 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the types of sprites (display objects) that make up the image are specified, and the display coordinates are determined for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S5207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S5208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S5208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S5208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S5209).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S5209: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S5210), and then the content is cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S5212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S5214), the content of the stop symbol discrimination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S5215), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

Incidentally, the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before, and in the variable display data table, the variation based on the data table Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S4304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S5215, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S5209, if the fixed display flag is ON instead of OFF (S5209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S5216). If the demonstration display flag is off (S5216: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233d is set in the buffer 233d (S5217), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5218). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S5219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S5221), the process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the process of S5216, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S5216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is finished, and that demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is finished as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S4309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 461(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 423) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 469 and 470, details of the transfer setting process (S4305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 469(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5501: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S5502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 469(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S5501, that is, if it is turned off (S5501: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S5503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S5502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 469(b). FIG. 469(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S5502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been given to the image controller 237 (S5601). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S5602). In the process of S5602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing in S5602 that the transfer processing has not ended (S5602: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so the resident image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5602: Yes), the process proceeds to S5603. Also, as a result of the process of S5601, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been transmitted to the image controller 237 (S5601: No), the process proceeds to S5603.

In the process of S5603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S5603). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S5604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the transfer data information about the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S5603, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S5603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S5605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in V interrupt processing (see FIG. 461(b)), command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 462 to 466) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 467 to 468(b)) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device A normal image is displayed in 81 . Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 470) (see S5501: No in FIG. 469(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 470, the normal image transfer setting process (S5503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S4305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 470 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S5503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S5205) of the previously executed display setting process (S4303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is obtained (S5701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S5702). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S5703), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer is to be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S5704), and the process proceeds to S5705.

Also, in the processing of S5702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S5702: No), the processing of S5703 and S5704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S5705. In the process of S5705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S5705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S5705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S5706).

In the process of S5706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing has not ended by the processing of S5706 (S5706: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so the normal image transfer setting is performed. End the process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S5706: Yes), the process proceeds to S5707. Also, as a result of the process of S5705, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S5705: No), the process proceeds to S5707.

In the processing of S5707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S5707). is turned off (S5708), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S4603 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S5709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not ON, but OFF (S5707: No), this process ends.

In the process of S5709, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S5709). The determination in the process of S5709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

If the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5709 (S5709: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S5709 (S5709: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S5710). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S5710, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S5711), and this normal transfer setting processing ends. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination processing, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, whereby the predetermined address is obtained according to the display data table. image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 471, details of the drawing process (S4306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 287 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S4304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information 423 is generated from the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S4305) (S5801). That is, in the process of S5801, from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in task processing (S4304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of the sprite is stored are specified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S4305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S5802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the first-drawn sprite can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the last-drawn sprite can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Further, while expanding the image drawn in one of the frame buffers, the image drawn from one of the frame buffers can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and drawing processing and display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

In the rendering process, after the process of S5802, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S5803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 461(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

In the above control example, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are provided separately, but instead, the respective devices 113 and 114 may be integrated and provided as one device.

In the above control example, first, a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be issued is determined and then sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 . On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is determined in the display control device 114. Then, a command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113 .

In the control example described above, the image controller 237 transfers image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234 , read image data from the character ROM 234 , and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In this case, the MPU 231 temporarily stores the image data read from the character ROM 234 in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is unused. If unused, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 as the transfer destination.

In this case, whether or not the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 of the transfer destination is unused is judged by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being in use). and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, that it is in use). ) is provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

Alternatively, the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signals transmitted and received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 are monitored by the MPU 231, and the resident It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts accessing the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or terminates the access, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time so that the MPU 231 can Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third pattern display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is during the blank period. , and if the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third pattern display device 81 and judges whether or not it is unused, so that judgment can be easily made.

In this case, the MPU 231 stores transfer data that is not null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. If the information exists, image data may be read out from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, etc., the sprite can be drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for normal operation can be stored in the normal video RAM 236 without fail. Using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading out the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process executed by the MPU 231 or in the loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute image data transfer processing using the time during which important processing in the display control device 114, such as command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, is not being performed. Further, since the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing are executed with priority over the display main processing and the like, the MPU 231 can process the image data without affecting the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing. transfer processing can be executed.

In the above control example, the MPU 231 does not use the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 to manage each video RAM, but uses the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 in common. Each video RAM may be managed by assigning a different address area to each video RAM in the address system provided. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (either the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address. Image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . That is, when the MPU 231 designates the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate the address set in the common address system. It is possible to simplify the structure of the instruction that makes the specification. For example, in the drawing list sent from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in the common address system is simply used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the configuration of the drawing list can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) connecting the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 has been described. 237 may be provided. A bridge circuit is provided to convert the input/output specifications of the character ROM 234 to the input/output specifications of the mask ROM, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. good too.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM can be used as it is, and the NAND type flash memory 234a can be used. A configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be configured to directly access the character ROM 234 .

In the above control example, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. may be Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by configuring the display control device 114 as described in the above control example, the image can be displayed at the desired time without problems. be able to.

In the control example described above, the character ROM 234 is provided with the NOR type ROM 234d, and the first program storage area 234d1 stores part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. The first program storage area is provided in a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the first program storage area is stored in the area after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. part of the boot program to be executed in the . For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, the character ROM 234 may be provided with FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like. A part of the boot program that is executed first may be stored.

In the above control example, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in that area. However, the memory is not necessarily limited to this, and the internal bus (bus line 240) is a memory configured by a non-volatile storage medium capable of read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a. , the memory may be provided with a first program storage area, and a part of the boot program that is first executed in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released may be stored in the area. For example, in place of the NOR type ROM 234d, FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided on the internal bus (bus line 240). may store part of the boot program that is executed first after the system reset is released.

In the above control example, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. After that, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read out from the buffer RAM 234c and transferred to the internal bus (bus line 240). 240) to the MPU 231. In this case, when the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" to the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H". Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section or the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started. can be done.

In addition, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1 The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be directly read out from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", so that the display main processing can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the display control device 114 or the third pattern display device 81 can be immediately started. can be done. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In the above control example, a case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A direct connection to line 240) may also be provided. When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the bridge circuit, even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to directly connect the resident video RAM 235, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected directly. RAM 235 can be easily provided in display controller 114 .

In the above control example, the display control device 114 is provided with one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Alternatively, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each of them, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are composed of a 1-port type (one input/output port) DRAM has been described. type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. It is possible to parallelize the process of writing the received image data to the normal video RAM 236 . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

In the above control example, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by separate memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be divided so that the same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are stored in each area. In addition, when the resident area and the normal area are configured in one RAM, the input/output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by either the resident area or the normal area during read or write processing. , it is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above control example is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. . In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately according to the received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferably resident in video RAM 235 .

In the above control example, a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. You may In this case, the image data stored in the temporary character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, so the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. may

In the above control example, the resident video RAM 235 has been described as a case where its contents are kept without being overwritten while the power is turned on. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated on a predetermined occasion, such as when the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is greatly changed based on the command received from the good. In this case, while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as a transition period. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is kept held in the resident video RAM 235 without being updated even when other resident images are updated. You can leave it. While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. The data may be transferred while not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transitional image is not read). Alternatively, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 transmits to the image controller 237 a transfer instruction (transfer data information) for image data to be newly resident, and the image controller 237 sends the transfer instruction (transfer data). image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use (that is, while the image data corresponding to the transition image is not being read). You may make it

When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the transition image is updated using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. It may be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81 . While the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Alternatively, the image controller 237, which has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231, accesses the character ROM 234, reads image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while the transition image is being displayed, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In the above control example, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are resident, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. In the display main processing or main processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after power-on, the RAM judgment value is confirmed before starting to transfer main image data at power-on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that image data to be resident in resident video RAM 235 continues to be stored normally. It may be configured to In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. As a result, even if a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure, and the MPU 231 starts executing the main display process or the main process, the data in the resident video RAM 235 can be stored normally. In this case, image data can be prevented from being wastefully transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for recovery from power failure can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. FIG. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in the present modification, if the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is possible to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, the normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored may be used to determine the validity of the data.

In the above control example, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be provided outside the image controller 237. FIG. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and configured to be directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Furthermore, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit with the buffer RAM. In this case, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit. transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by

In the above control example, the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memory 234a. For example, among the scanning periods of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the buffer The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity sufficient to complete transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 that occur during this blank period. .

In the above control example, a case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236. may be configured. Also, one buffer RAM is divided into two or more areas, and while image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 . In either case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 into the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written into the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. The time required for the processing can be shortened.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, image data corresponding to the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to display the power-on main image while transferring the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . can do. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

Similarly, in the above control example, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. 235b, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, by using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the power-on image, while the character ROM 234 Image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 during this period, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the use state of the resident video RAM 235. Transfer can be completed quickly, and processing can be simplified.

In the above control example, the case where the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to . may be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. After the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to turn on the power. If the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the main image, The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

Similarly, in the above control example, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. Although the case of transferring to the image area 235b has been described, while the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is being transferred, image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. good too. Further, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on main image stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored in the normal video RAM 236 . By causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image at power-on using the image data corresponding to the variable image, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the image data is not read out from the character ROM 234, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without passing through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed more quickly without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In the above control example, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the sound lamp control device 113 generates the back image change command and the frame button operation command, and the display control device 114 generates the back image change command and the frame button. Although the case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the effect mode of Super Reach based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the game state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the game state, for example, according to the change of the game state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the game state of the gaming machine 10 and change the back image and the effect mode of super ready-to-win according to the game state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a partial range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. , the rear image can be immediately displayed from the resident range using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after change is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, composite data table, and display data table. You may Here, when the image data of the rear image is transferred according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the synthesized data table, or the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original rear image is stored is stored. The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that the new rear image is stored in the sub-area. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined such that a new rear image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image. An increase in load can be suppressed.

In the above control example, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration error, an error command is sent to the display control device 114. Although the case where the warning image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by the display control device 114 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Control device 110 may detect a vibration error, and main control device 110 may transmit an error command notifying the error to either audio lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 . When an error command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the error to the display control device 114. may

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error generation flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error generation flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 283). A warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing a warning image setting process (see FIG. 284(a)) when is determined. In this case, since it becomes unnecessary to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

In addition, in the above control example, the case where the vibration sensor is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described. good too. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the ball from being changed by the magnetic field of a magnet or the like and to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the ball entrance. , and the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any one of the main controller 110 , the sound lamp controller 113 and the display controller 114 . When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, when the main controller 110 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is corrected. A signaling error command may be sent from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 or directly to the display controller 114 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound ramp control device 113, when it is determined by the sound ramp control device 113 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13, the magnetic field An error command may be sent from the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 to communicate the error. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third pattern display device 81 is resident. Upon receipt of an error command conveying a magnetic field error from main controller 110 or audio ramp controller 113 , display controller 114 may display the warning image on third graphic display 81 . Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 114, when the display control device 114 determines that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 114 , the warning image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is used to display the error message image informing the magnetic field error without delay as the third pattern. It can be displayed on the display device 81 . Therefore, when the player applies a magnetic field to the game board, the third symbol display device 81 displays an error message image to immediately inform the player of the magnetic field error, thereby preventing the player from making an illegal action. can be deterred.

In the case where the additional data table or the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary to change the color tone of part or all of one effect, the additional data table or the display data table can be used in the third pattern display device 81 to The type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed and the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed at that time are associated with the addresses expressed in units of the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which the image for the frame is displayed. It may define color information that designates color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is to be changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be used is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing with color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in one effect, the display data table allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image for one frame. is displayed as one unit (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). It may define the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 stores the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and If the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is defined, various sprites defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

Further, in the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the transfer data information of the image data required when drawing an image according to the drawing contents defined in the display data table has been described. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when drawing an image according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is associated with identification information ("additional effect 1", "additional effect 2", etc.) for identifying effects that can be additionally displayed for each address, and is added. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the effect to be additionally displayed is determined, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and the additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. can be configured to

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the sprite image data to be used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance according to the drawing list before the image data is used. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 easily and reliably. Further, by using the additional transfer data information specified in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of an image based on the additional drawing content. The drawing of many sprites can be specified by additional drawing contents. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can display various effects.

In the above control example, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all super reach that can be selected by the player are specified in the display data table, Although the case where only the drawing contents corresponding to the super reach selected by is specified is described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and the drawing contents corresponding to the selected super reach are added to the display data table. may As a result, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to prescribe drawing contents corresponding to all super reach in the display data table, it is possible to prevent the data size of the display data table from increasing.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described, but the display data table is not necessarily limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. However, the additional drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, an additional data table buffer may be provided in the work RAM 233, and when a performance to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the performance may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, even if the additional data table defines not only the additional drawing content but also the transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the additional drawing content. good. As a result, it is possible to specify the drawing content of the effect to be additionally displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the drawing, so that the additional data table and the transfer data table for addition can be used to specify The processing load required for the specification can be reduced compared to the case of specifying the drawing content and the transfer data information respectively.

In the above control example, the case where the display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command in the display control device 114 has been described. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "variation startup", "high speed variation", "notice effect", "normal reach", "super reach", and according to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command After specifying the elements necessary for the variable performance, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variable performance are combined into one to generate the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern. You may do so. "Variable start-up", "High-speed fluctuation", "Normal reach", etc. are often displayed in common with each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by dividing the variable effect into elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be provided efficiently.

In the above control example, a common pointer 233f is used in the display data table and the transfer data table, and the drawing content and transfer data information are specified from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. A pointer may be provided.

In the above control example, a case where the image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above control example) of a one-frame image at which drawing processing ends will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above control example, the image controller 237 identifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image should be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and also determines the image information rendered earlier from the other frame buffer. is read out and sent to the third pattern display device 81, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. are alternately selected, and the previously developed image information is read out from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third pattern display device 81 . Further, every time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third pattern display device 81, it outputs the image information to the frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded and the third pattern display device 81. You may make it replace with the frame buffer which carries out.

In the above control example, after the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, by the time the fixed display effect ends, the main controller 110 through the sound lamp control device 113 When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received, the demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d As explained above, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Also, in this case, until either the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) or the demonstration command (demonstration command for display) is received from the main controller 110 via the sound lamp controller 113, the fixed display effect is not performed. Each time it ends, the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the fixed display effect until the variation pattern command or the demonstration command is received from the main control device 110 .

In the above control example, the explanation was given for the case where the demonstration effect is to change the back image and to stop display the third pattern consisting of the main patterns to which the numbers "0" to "9" are not attached. The present invention is not limited to this, and a third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above control example, in the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 and the power-on main image area 235a after the power is turned on. When transferring to the time-varying image area 235b, displaying the main image at the time of power-on on the third pattern display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and then transferring the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control device 114, after the power is turned on, only the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image when the power is turned on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation has started without any problems when the power is turned on.

In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on this, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a simple variable display using the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image stored in the power-on variable image area 235b. It is desirable to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image to the power-on varying image area 235b immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to quickly perform the variable display using the power-on variable image.

In the above control example, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time expressed in units of 20 milliseconds, and the content of the image to be drawn at that time (drawing content) and the content of the image to be transferred at that time. Although a case has been described in which image data information (transfer data information) is specified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, as long as the display content is specified for each predetermined time interval. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 . For example, when the frame rate of the third pattern display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third pattern display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third pattern display device 81 is 1/30 Since one frame image is displayed every second, the display data table may define the display contents for every 1/30 second interval.

In addition, in the display data table, as the sprite type to be drawn which is defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the address of the character ROM 234 where the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. may be specified. In the display control device 114, the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores the image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. manages the addresses of Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval, the sprite can be associated with each sprite type. Since there is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In the above control example, the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114 is provided with the stored image data determination flag 233i, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when instructing transfer of image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and transfers the predetermined image data. is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not stored, an instruction to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and the image data of the sprite type is stored. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In the above control example, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the storage image data determination flag 233i. In the above description, the MPU 231 determines whether or not the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the processing of not executing the transfer processing. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237 . In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite is determined. may be stored. Also, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 . In this case, if image data of a predetermined sprite type needs to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal-use video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 regardless of the image data storage state in the normal-use video RAM 236. On the other hand, transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In the above control example, the case where only the image data corresponding to "back side A" among the plurality of back side images is made resident in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. For example, the image data of the rear image used in part of super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. FIG. In particular, by making the back image of Super Reach, which appears frequently or is expected to be high, resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, image data transfer processing from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times

In the above control example, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 outputs the transfer command at a predetermined time defined by the display pointer. Although the case where the image controller 237 is controlled to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, the display data table is not necessarily limited to this. Information about the sprite type required in the table is described, and the MPU 231 transfers the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of the image type is normally displayed from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

In the above control example, the case where the color tone of a part of the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, changes with time has been described, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time good. In addition, the back image is not limited to one that scrolls or changes color tone with the passage of time. It may be something that moves or changes.

In the above control example, the information of various counters (special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2) obtained at the time of start winning notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the main control device 110 is used as the pending ball number command. Although the case of inclusion has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and information on various counters (special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is sent to the sound lamp control device 113 may notify you.

In the above control example, when executing the variable effect, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols S1 to S3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. , all the patterns S1 to S3 may be displayed in such a reduced size that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the patterns S1 to S3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In the above control example, the case where the game board 13 is provided with one first ball entrance 64 for starting the lottery for the special symbol jackpot when a ball enters has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances, each of which is independently detected to start a jackpot lottery. In this case, when there is a hold at each of the first ball entrances, the number of held ball commands sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 indicate which of the first ball entrances is being held. May contain information. In addition, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting the variation also includes information indicating which of the first entrances is the suspended variation effect. good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball counter is prepared for each first ball entrance, and when a holding ball number command is received, the first ball entering indicated by the holding ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set in the number of held balls counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, if the number of held balls counter for the first entrance indicated by the variation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entrance The number of held balls can be counted every time.

In the above control example, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the main controller issues a reserved ball number command. Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203 d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In the above control example, the winning to the first ball entrance 64 and the passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in the above control example, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the design as identification information on the display screen of the third design display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example, during the ending period of the jackpot, the rotational distribution effect using the rotation effect device 296 suggests the degree of advantage after the end of the jackpot (game state to be shifted). and In this rotation distribution effect, the game balls that have been used in the jackpot game (the game balls that have entered the second specific winning port 600 in the first round and the payout of prize balls based on the entered balls have been completed) are reused. The performance is executed. That is, only one game ball entered into the second specific winning hole 600 is held during the jackpot, and two passing holes (200 The effect of passing through one of the first passing hole 296a suggesting the time saving state and the time saving state and the second passing hole 296b suggesting the time saving state of 100 times is executed. As a result, the player is notified of the game state (privilege after the end of the big win) corresponding to the passing hole through which the held game ball passes, so attention is paid to the type of the passing hole through which the game ball passes. A game can be played during the ending period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the ending period. Since this rotation apportionment effect can be executed if there is only one game ball, it is almost certain that the game ball is shot into the second specific winning port 600 in an attempt to win the prize ball during the big win. It is possible to secure a game ball for production.

In addition, in the eighth control example, when the frame button 22 is pressed, the frame button 22 itself is pushed to the depression detection position and the depression can be detected. The pressing of the frame button 22 can also be detected by the frame button sensor 297 provided. Further, the frame button sensor 297 is configured to be able to detect pressing with a load (eg, 50 g) smaller than the load (eg, 100 g) required to push the frame button 22 to the pressing detection position. As a result, even if the force of pressing the frame button 22 by the player is weak, the pressing can be detected by the frame button sensor 297, so that even a player with weak force can detect the pressing of the frame button 22.例文帳に追加. In addition, with one operation of pressing the frame button 22, two detection operations, that is, the detection of the pressing of the frame button 22 and the detection by the frame button sensor 297, can be performed, so the speed is substantially doubled. It is possible to repeatedly hit (press the frame button 22) with . Therefore, even when a player who presses the frame button 22 at a slow speed is playing the game, the upper limit number of times can be easily reached.

In addition, in the eighth control example, it is possible to execute a combined touch effect that prompts the player to operate (press) the frame button 22 and operate (touch) the touch sensor 290 within one effect. In this composite touch effect, every time one operating device is operated, an effect is executed in which the character 711 performs an action corresponding to the operating device on the third pattern display device 81 . The effect modes executed when the two operation devices are completely operated include a first mode (a matching action mode in which the character 711 moves both hands symmetrically) and a second mode (the character 711 A mode in which both hands are moved asymmetrically) is provided, and in the case of a big win, the ratio of execution of the first mode is high. This allows the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290 to be operated in anticipation of execution of the matching operation.

In the eighth control example, when two operating devices are operated within a predetermined effective period, the timing of operating the second operating device does not coincide with the predetermined execution timing of the matching operation. (if the value of the composite timing counter 223ab acquired at the timing of detecting the operation matches the random value corresponding to the matching action defined in the composite determination table 222h), the matching action is executed. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to perform the matching operation based on the type of operating device that is operated first (that is, the order in which each operating device is operated). More specifically, for example, at the start of execution of the matching action (or at the start of variation), the matching action becomes executable (when the second operating device is operated, whether or not to execute the matching action is determined). The order of operation of the operation means for executing the determination (whether the frame button 22 is operated first or the touch sensor 290 is operated first) is determined by lottery. If the order of operations determined by the lottery and the order of operations actually performed by the player are contrary to each other, an operation (robot operation) different from the matching operation is performed regardless of the timing at which the second operation device is operated. A character 711 that imitates the character 711 moves both hands up and down in a left-right asymmetrical state). That is, only when each operation device is operated in an operation order that matches the operation order determined by lottery within the effective period of the composite touch effect, the composite determination table 222h (see FIG. 421(b)) and the second operation It may be configured to determine whether or not the matching operation can be executed according to the value of the composite timing counter 223ab acquired at the timing of operating the device. With this configuration, even if the matching action is not executed, the player can be made to think that the operation order is different from the operation order decided by lottery. , even if the matching operation is not executed, it is possible to keep the expectation for the big win.

Further, for example, the method of determining whether the matching operation can be executed may differ depending on the order of operation of each operation device (the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290). More specifically, for example, when the operation devices are operated in the first operation order (for example, the operation order of touching the touch sensor 290 after pressing the frame button 22), matching is performed in the case of a big win. The rate at which the action is performed is high (e.g., matching action is performed 80% of the time), but the rate at which matching action is performed in the case of a miss is also high (although not as much as in the case of a jackpot) ( For example, the matching operation may be performed at a rate of 40%). On the other hand, if the operation devices are operated in a second operation order different from the first operation order (for example, an operation order in which the frame button 22 is pressed after touching the touch sensor 290), a big win is made. In the case of , the ratio of executing the matching operation is low (for example, the matching operation is executed at a rate of 20%), but the expectation of the jackpot when the matching operation is executed is extremely high. good too. That is, in the case of deviation, the matching operation may not be performed at all, or the matching operation may be performed only at an extremely low probability (for example, only at a rate of 0.01%). That is, a composite determination table 222h having different prescribed contents (that is, the ratio of determining that the matching operation is performed for each lottery result is different) is provided for each operation order, and the matching operation is performed according to the operation order. It may be configured to vary the degree of expectation of the jackpot in the case of winning. By configuring in this way, the ratio of executing the matching operation is high, but the possibility of losing due to the execution of the matching operation is high, and the ratio of executing the matching operation is low. The player himself/herself can be allowed to select the playability that will almost result in a big win when executed, depending on the order of operation of the operating device. Therefore, since the game performance when the composite touch effect is executed can be changed according to the player's preference, the game performance can be realized according to the player's preference.

In the eighth control example, the determination as to whether or not to execute the matching operation is performed based only on the timing at which the player operates the second operation device, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is configured to determine whether or not to permit the determination of whether or not the matching operation can be executed when an operation on one operating device is detected during one effective period of the composite touch effect. Then, when it is determined not to permit the determination of whether or not the matching operation can be executed, control is performed so as not to perform the lottery itself as to whether or not the matching operation can be executed even if an operation on another operating device is detected. If it is determined that the determination of whether or not the matching operation can be executed is permitted at the time of operation on the operating device, when an operation on another operating device is detected, similar to the eighth control example described above, the composite determination table 222h A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the matching operation can be executed. Alternatively, for example, when an operation to each operating means is detected, a determination (lottery) using the composite determination table 222h is executed, and matching operation is executed for all determinations (lottery). The matching operation may be configured to be executed only when it is determined. By adopting a configuration in which the lottery as to whether or not the matching operation can be executed is executed in a plurality of stages in this way, even when performing the first operation within the validity period, the user can perform the operation with a sense of expectation that the matching operation will be executed. can be done. Further, in this case, the ratio of determination to execute the matching operation may be varied within the validity period. Specifically, for example, during the first 1 second (within 1 second after the valid period starts) or the last 1 second (4 seconds after the valid period starts) in the operation valid period of 5 seconds If the two operating devices are completely operated at the same time, the proportion of execution of the matching operation in the case of a big win may be higher (for example, 80%) than in other cases. Also, for example, the matching operation is performed when the first operating device is operated during the first second and the second operating device is operated during the last second. It is good also as a structure which makes the ratio which is carried out high.

In the eighth control example, when it is detected that the frame button sensor 297 has been turned on during execution of the double continuous hit effect, exactly the same operation as when the pressing of the frame button 22 is detected is performed. However, it is not limited to this. When it is detected that the output of the frame button sensor 297 has been turned on, the number of times that the frame button 22 has been turned on is counted until the next time the frame button 22 is pressed. is detected, the number of ON times of the frame button sensor 297 that has been counted may be added and reflected in the repeated hitting counter 223w. In other words, until the frame button 22 is pressed, the frame button sensor 297 is configured not to reflect the number of repeated hits corresponding to the ON state, and when the frame button sensor 297 is detected to be pressed, the output of the frame button sensor 297 is turned ON. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of repeated hits is formally reflected in the number of repeated hits. By configuring in this way, during execution of the double hit effect, the effect mode does not change (the effect is repeated until the frame button 22 is pushed to the position where the frame button 22 is pushed to the position where the press is detected). ), the player can easily recognize that the pressing amount of the frame button 22 was small. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably press the frame button 22 to the press detection position. In addition, the player who has grasped the pressing amount of the frame button 22 until the pressing is detected can be made to press the frame button 22 to the pressing detection position with each repeated hit during execution of the double repeated hitting performance. That is, during execution of the double hit effect, a situation is generated in which repeated hit detection in response to pressing of the frame button 22 and detection of repeated hits in response to the output of the frame button sensor 297 being turned on are alternately performed. Since it can be easily performed, the number of repeated hits can be counted earlier than the normal repeated hit production. In addition, by turning on the frame button sensor 297 and continuously operating the frame button 22 to such an extent that the frame button 22 is not detected as being pressed, the number of consecutive hits can be accumulated, and the frame button 22 can be pressed at a desired timing. It is also possible to play a game by pressing the button to increase the number of consecutive hits at once. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game method during execution of the double continuous hitting effect, so that each player can select his or her favorite continuous hitting method. Furthermore, in this case, if the frame button sensor 297 is turned on and the maximum number of repeated hits is reached during the effective period of the double hit effect, an effect prompting the user to strongly press the frame button 22 (double A special display mode different from the display mode that prompts the user to press the frame button 22, which is displayed during execution of the continuous hit effect, may be executed. By configuring in this way, the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 not reaching the pressing detection position is performed the number of times corresponding to the upper limit value of the repeated pressing counter 223w (that is, when the frame button 22 is pressed to the pressing detection position). Therefore, it is possible to prevent continuous hitting beyond the number of times that triggers the display of the effect mode indicating the result of the repeated hitting effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from performing useless pressing (operation). As an effect to encourage pressing the frame button 22 strongly, in addition to changing the display mode to a special display mode, the appearance of the frame button 22 itself (color development, light emission mode, projection amount of the frame button 22, etc.) ) may be varied in a manner different from usual.

In the eighth control example, the second specific winning opening 600 is opened in the first round of the jackpot, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the second specific winning hole 600 is opened in the final round, and the game ball that wins at the end of the final round is used for the rotation distribution effect during the ending effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to shorten the period in which the game ball that has entered the second specific winning hole 600 during the jackpot game is held in the holding area, so that the game ball that has been held due to vibration or the like can be shortened. It is possible to suppress problems such as dropping and being discharged. Therefore, the game ball held during the big win can be more reliably used for the rotation distribution effect.

In the eighth control example, the description has been given on the premise that the game ball is held during the jackpot. If not, it may be configured to execute an alternative effect. Specifically, for example, the configuration may be such that the result display effect is started when the ending effect is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the rotation effect device 296 from being rotated even though the game ball is not held, resulting in an incomprehensible effect content. Therefore, even if the game ball is not held, it is possible to realize an effect mode that is easy for the player to understand.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 472 to 480. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example described above, the button pressing effect (see FIG. 390(b)) for allowing the player to operate the frame button 22 (first operating means), the touch sensor 290 (second operating means), ) was configured to execute a touch effect for operating. Then, the timing at which the above-described button pressing effect and touch effect can be executed, that is, the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is effectively determined as the button pressing effect (when the value of the SW effective time counter 223h is greater than 0) set period) and the period during which the operation of the touch sensor 290 is effectively determined as the touch effect (the period during which the value of the sensor effective time counter 223i is set to a value greater than 0) overlap. was constructed so as to execute overlapping effects according to the details of the player's operation on each operation means (frame button 22, touch sensor 290).

In the eighth control example configured as described above, when the execution timings of a plurality of individually executable operation effects satisfy a predetermined condition, that is, when the execution periods of a plurality of operation effects coincidentally overlap, Since a special effect is executed, it is possible to provide a special feeling to the executed effect.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, a plurality of operation means (frame button 22, touch sensor 290) are operated within a predetermined period, and different effects are executed according to the operation result. there is

Then, if the player performs a predetermined operation before the lapse of an initial operation period (for example, 5 seconds) set in advance as an operation period (operation effective period) for operating a plurality of operation means, that operation is performed. The initial operation period is shortened, and an effect (complex operation effect) is executed in accordance with the operation result including the shortened period.

Further, when it is determined that the player is performing an operation similar to a predetermined operation after a preset initial operation period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, the operation period is extended. It is constructed so as to make it easier for the player to perform a predetermined operation within the operation period.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, the effect mode of the complex operation effect executed based on the operation result of each operation means within a predetermined operation period (operation valid period) is determined by the special symbol lottery result (win/fail judgment result). It is configured to be variable according to

By constructing in this manner, the performance data of the composite performance is combined with the performance data of the success pattern and the performance data of the failure pattern according to the lottery result of the special symbol and the operation content of the player during the operation valid period. (effect image) can be set.

In addition, in the ninth control example, when it is determined that the player's operation content satisfies the extension condition after the initial operation period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed, the operation period is extended. Configure.

The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example in that the configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. The point is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed. Other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the eighth It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the control example. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as in the first control example, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Various display commands set by the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example are the same as the various display commands set in the eighth control example described above. In order to output to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (see S2102 in FIG. 442) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 442) of the lamp control device 113, and to display on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 Since the detailed processing content is the same as that of the eighth control example, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 472, the contents of the “Natsukase effect”, which is the effect executed in the ninth control example, will be described. Here, in the ninth control example, as an operation effect for allowing the player to operate a plurality of operation means (the frame button 22 and the touch sensor 290), the "familiarity effect" is configured to be executable. This "familiar effect" is the first half part, which is an operation determination period (operation valid period) for validly determining the operation of the operation means, and the effect execution period executed based on the operation content in the first half part. It is a complex operation production consisting of the second half part.

FIG. 472(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the "Natsukase effect", which is an operation effect for allowing the player to operate a plurality of operating means, is executed. FIG. 472(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the "familiarity chance" executed in the first half of the "familiarity effect". In the schematic diagram showing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the same elements as in the eighth control example described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Note that in the ninth control example, the operation level is set according to the operation order of the operation performed on the touch sensor 290 and the operation performed on the frame button 22, and the number of operations. Based on the set operation level and the judgment result of the special symbol, the effect mode of the "result effect" which is the second half part of the "familiar effect" is set.

When the "Familiarization effect" is executed, as shown in FIG. 472, a character resembling a dog is displayed in the small area Ds2, and the main display area Dm displays "Familiarity Chance" to indicate the content of the current effect. Tame the dog within the period of time.”, a button display form imitating the frame button 22 and a touch display form imitating the touch sensor 290 for indicating the operation means that the player can operate. Is displayed. Further, in the small area Ds3, a remaining period display mode is displayed for indicating the period during which the operation means can be operated.

During the "Natsukase Chance" indicating that the player can operate the operating means, as shown in FIG. It is displayed in the display area Dm. According to the example shown in FIG. 472(b), a display mode indicating that the touch sensor 290 is being operated is displayed.

After that, when the "Natsukase Chance" ends, as shown in FIG. 473(a), the small area Ds2 displays a comment "Are you familiar?" Then, the dog-like character displayed in the main display area Dm performs an effect according to the operation contents during the "Natsukase Chance". Although the details will be described later, in this ninth control example, the content of the effect is determined according to the operation content for the operation means during the period in which the player can effectively operate the operation means and the result of the judgment result of the special symbol. are configured to be different.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 473(b), when the rendering mode according to the initial instruction content, that is, when the dog-like character is displayed in the main display area Dm, " The character "successful" is displayed, and it is configured to notify that the "Natsukase production" this time is a successful production.

In addition, in this ninth control example, according to the lottery result of the special symbol (result of judgment), it is configured to execute the "Natsukase effect", and when the "Natsukase effect" is a successful effect It indicates that the player has won the jackpot, but other than that, it is acceptable if it gives a privilege advantageous to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 474, the contents of the “familiar effect” in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 474(a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow when the "familiar effect" is executed. The example shown in FIG. 474(a) shows a case in which a 17-second effect is executed as a "familiar effect".

This "Natsukase effect" is composed of the first half of the "Natsukase chance" and the second half of the "Result effect", and the first half is the period during which the player can effectively operate the operation means (operation valid period). period), and the effect mode of the "result effect" in the second half part is made different based on the operation contents in the first half part.

In the example shown in FIG. 474(a), an operation judgment period (5 seconds) for judging the operation contents to be operated during the first half part (operation valid period), and an effect execution period (12 seconds) of the second half part. , formed from The operation determination period is formed from an operation period 1 (3 seconds) and an operation period 2 (2 seconds). In the ninth control example, if a specific operation is performed on the operation means before the operation period 1 of the operation determination period elapses, the operation period 2 is omitted and the 14-second effect execution period is set. It is configured so that the set production is executed.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the ninth control example, when it is determined that the operation content of the operation means is slightly less than the specific operation at the time when the operation determination period (5 seconds) has elapsed, is configured to extend the operation determination period by a predetermined period (1 second).

Even if the operation determination period is extended by a predetermined period (one second), the effect display (“Natsukase Chance” display) for indicating the operation determination period is fixed to five seconds. As a result, a predetermined period (one second) after the effect display for indicating the operation determination period ends can be set as the operation determination period. Able to provide a dramatic performance. Note that, unlike the configuration of the ninth control example, when the operation determination period is extended, an effect display for indicating the operation determination period may also be extended and displayed.

Further, as described above, in the ninth control example, if a specific operation is performed on the operation means before the operation period 1 of the operation determination period elapses, the operation period 2 is omitted, Although it is configured to execute an effect with a set effect execution period of 14 seconds, even if the operation determination period is shortened based on the operation result of the operation means performed during the operation period 1 , an effect display (“Natsukase Chance” display) indicating that it is the operation determination period may be displayed.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 174(a), the production execution period (12 seconds) is composed of four production periods (production periods 1 to 4). 1 (3 seconds), production period 2 (2 seconds), production period 3 (2 seconds), production period (5 seconds) are set. In this way, one effect execution period (12 seconds) is formed by using a plurality of short-term unit effect periods, so that one effect execution period (12 seconds) can be produced in a plurality of effects. Data can be combined and created.

Here, the effect data (image data) used in the effect execution period (12 seconds) of the "Natsukase effect" executed in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of effect data (image data) used for the effect of the ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 474(b), in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113, different performance data is set corresponding to each performance execution period when setting the performance mode of "Natsukase performance". Information is stored for

Specifically, as the success pattern effect data of the “Natsukase effect”, effect data for 3 seconds in which a character resembling a dog displayed in the small area Ds2 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 turns around, and 2 seconds of performance data showing a shy expression, 2 seconds of performance data of the character becoming affectionate, and 5 seconds of performance data showing the success of the "Natsukase performance" showing that the character is getting used to it, and the character is surprised. 2-second performance data showing facial expressions and 1-second performance data showing exciting facial expressions of the character are stored.

In addition, as the failure pattern effect data of the "familiar effect", the effect data for 3 seconds which is ignored by the dog-like character displayed in the small area Ds2 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the threatening action of the character. 2 seconds of the performance data of the character barking, 2 seconds of the performance data of the character barking, 5 seconds of the performance data of the character running away indicating the failure of the "familiarity performance", and 2 seconds of the performance data of the character trembling, and the current situation. 1-second effect data that continues the facial expression of .

In this way, by combining a plurality of effect data each having a length of 1 to 5 seconds to create a series of effects during the effect execution period, It is possible to easily create an effect according to the length of the effect execution period that is variable by the control.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, the effect data used in the "familiar effect" are stored in the order in which they are likely to be actually used. That is, the performance data are stored in order from the beginning along the order of execution when the most standardly used performance execution period of 12 seconds (see FIG. 474(a)) is set.

Thus, when a series of performance modes are set by combining a plurality of performance data, the performance data can be combined according to the contents in the order in which they are stored, so that the performance data can be easily set. can be done.

In this ninth control example, the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is configured to store the effect data used in the "Natsukase effect". A command indicating the operation content may be transmitted to the display control device 114, and based on the received command indicating the operation content on the display control device 114 side, the effect mode of the “familiar effect” may be determined. Further, in this case, the display control device 114 may directly receive the operation contents of the operation means without going through the sound lamp control device 113 .

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 475 and 476. FIG. First, referring to FIG. 475(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 475(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 475(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the ninth control example is the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-described eighth control example (see FIG. 402(a)) with the addition of an effect content setting table 222za. It is different in that Here, the contents of the effect content setting table 222za will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 476 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content defined in the effect content setting table 222za.

In this effect content setting table 222za, the effect contents to be executed as a result effect of the "familiar effect" corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol (result of determination of success or failure) and the result of operation determination during the operation valid period are defined. It is

Specifically, when the success/failure determination result is “hit” and the operation determination result is “operation 1”, the “result effect” with a effect period of 12 seconds is displayed. If the operation determination result is "operation 2", the effect content "loss 1 → failure 2 → success 3 → success 4" with a performance period of 12 seconds is set as the "result performance". is stipulated. In both cases where the operation determination result is "operation 1" and "operation 2", the "result effect" with the effect period of 12 seconds is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 475(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 475(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 475(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above eighth control example (see FIG. 402(b)). The difference is that a content storage area 223zb, an operation level storage area 223zc, and an operation extension flag 223zd are added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 223 in the eighth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The familiarity production flag 223za is for indicating that the variation pattern to be executed this time is a variation pattern for executing the "nostalgia production", and when it is set to ON, it is executed this time. This indicates that the variation pattern is to execute the "familiar effect".

This nostalgic effect flag 223za is set when it is determined in the variation display setting process 9 (see S2153 in FIG. 479) that the current variation pattern is to execute the "nostalgic effect" (S3551 in FIG. 479: Yes) It is set to ON in the familiar effect setting process (see S3552 in FIG. 480) (S3702 in FIG. 480). Then, it is referred to in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137 in FIG. 477) which is executed periodically (every 1 millisecond) in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (see S3151 in FIG. 477). ).

Here, when it is determined that the familiarity effect flag 223za is set to ON (S3151 in FIG. 477: Yes), the frame button input monitoring and effect processing for the "lovely effect" is executed. Then, when the setting of the effect mode to be executed during the "Natsukase effect" is completed, it is set to OFF (see S3613 in FIG. 478).

The operation content storage area 223zb is a storage area for storing the operation content (operation information) executed by the player within the operation valid period during the "familiar effect". 22, the order and the number of times of operating the touch sensor 290) are stored. In the operation content storage area 223zb, the operation content (updated operation content) determined in the frame button input monitoring/rendering process 9 (see S2137 in FIG. 477) is stored. Then, the stored (updated) operation content (operation information) is predetermined specific operation information (for example, information that the frame button 22 is pressed five times and information that the button 22 and the touch sensor 290 are alternately operated). 477). Then, when the effect mode of "Natsukase effect" is set (S3612 in FIG. 478), the stored contents are initialized (cleared).

The operation level storage area 223zc is a storage area for temporarily storing information for determining the operation content of the operating means during the period when the "familiarity effect" is being executed. ” is stored according to the operation content executed within the operation effective period (during the period during which the operation to the operation means is effectively determined) set during the execution period.

Then, according to the operation level stored in the operation level storage area 223zc, an effect mode during the operation execution period, which is the latter part of the "familiar effect", is set. In addition, in the ninth control example, the effect mode is set according to the operation level stored in the operation level storage area 223zc and the result of determination of whether the corresponding special symbol is appropriate.

This operation level storage area 223ac stores information indicating that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137 in FIG. 477) or in the operation level determination processing (S3165 in FIG. 478). If so, the corresponding manipulation level is stored.

The operation extension flag 223zd indicates that the operation content (operation information) executed by the player within the operation valid period during the "familiar effect" is partially insufficient for predetermined specific operation information (upper limit information). It is a flag to indicate that the operation validity period is to be extended when it is determined that the is set to In the ninth control example, predetermined specific operation information is set as the upper limit information, and operation information in which one operation for the operating means is short of the upper limit information is set as the semi-upper limit information. ing.

Then, when the operation valid period (predetermined initial operation valid period (5 seconds)) in the "Natsukase effect" has passed, the operation information stored in the operation content storage area 223zb is read, and the information is Determine whether it is semi-upper limit information. When the result of the determination is determined to be the semi-upper limit information, it is set to ON, and the effective period of operation during the "familiar effect" is extended for a predetermined period (1 second). As a result, the operation effective period can be extended and set only for the player who can execute the predetermined specific operation in a little while, so that the player's willingness to operate the operation means can be increased. .

The operation valid time counter 223ze is a counter for measuring the operation valid period set during the "familiar effect", and is set with a value indicating the period during which the operation to the operation means is effectively determined. The value is configured to be decremented periodically (every 1 millisecond).

Further, it is referred to when determining whether or not the timing at which a specific operation is performed on the operation means is within a predetermined period (first half period) within the operation valid period during the "Natsukase effect".

This effective operation time counter 223ze is set to 5000 in the familiar effect setting process (see S3701 in FIG. 480) executed in the variable display setting process 9 (see S2153 in FIG. A value is set (see S3701 in FIG. 480), and the value is subtracted by 1 (see S3153 in FIG. 477) each time frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137 in FIG. 477) is executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 477 to 480. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 477, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137) is a process executed in place of the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 454) in the eighth control example.

When frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the familiar effect flag 223za is set to ON (S3151). Here, if it is determined that the nostalgic effect flag 223za is not set to ON (S3151: No), it is not the frame button input monitoring and effect processing during the period when the nostalgic effect is being executed, so other processing is performed. (S3166) is executed, and this processing ends. It should be noted that the processing of S3166 is for executing the various processing executed in the above-described frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 454) of the eighth control example, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. .

On the other hand, in the process of S3151, if it is determined that the familiar effect flag 223za is set to ON (S3151: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze is greater than 0 (S3152 ). That is, it is determined whether or not the present is during the nostalgia effect and the player can operate the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 290 . In the ninth control example, since the player can operate the frame button 22 or the touch sensor 290 for five seconds after the familiarization effect is executed, the familiarity effect is executed. When the variable display is set, a value of 5000 corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze.

In addition, in the ninth control example, a value is set in the operation effective time counter 223ze at the time of setting the processing for setting the variation pattern by the sound ramp control device 113, but this is not the only option. As in the process of setting the values of the SW effective time counter 223h and the sensor effective time counter 223i in the eighth control example (see FIG. 455), the value of the operation effective time counter 223ze is set after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the variable display. It may be set.

Furthermore, in the ninth control example, the period during which the player can operate each operation means (frame button 22, touch sensor 290) is the same, but each operation means can be operated as in the eighth control example described above. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which different periods can be set separately. In this case, for example, during a predetermined period (5 seconds), a period during which the operation on the first operating means (frame button 22) is effectively determined and an operation on the second operating means (touch sensor 290) is effectively determined. A plurality of valid period setting patterns can be set, and even if a player performs the same operation in a predetermined period, different operation results are obtained according to the set valid period setting pattern. You can

By configuring in this way, even when the player performs the same operation, it is possible to execute an effect based on a different operation result.

Returning to FIG. 477, the description continues. When it is determined in the process of S3152 that the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze is greater than 0 (S3152: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze (S3153), and the process proceeds to S3154. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3152 that the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S3152: No), the process of S3153 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3154.

As described above, in the ninth control example, in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, each time the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 9 (see S2137 in FIG. 477) is executed every millisecond. It is configured to subtract 1 from the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze. That is, when 5000 is set as the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze, the time required for the value to become 0 is 5 seconds.

In the process of S3154, it is determined whether the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze is 0 (S3154). Here, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze is not 0 (S3154: No), that is, the operation valid for determining the operation of the operation means by the player is valid during the current "Natsukase effect". If it is determined that it is the period (the period from the display of FIG. 472(a) to the display of FIG. 472(b)), processing based on the player's operation content for the operation means during the operation valid period. , the process proceeds to S3155.

In the process of S3155, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 290 and the frame button 22 have been operated (S3155). Accordingly, the information in the operation content storage area 223zb is updated to update the operation content (S3156). Then, a display operation command corresponding to the operation content is set (S3157), and this process is terminated.

After that, the information in the updated operation content storage area 223zb is read (S3158), and it is determined whether or not the read information indicates the upper limit information (S3159). Here, the upper limit information determined in the process of S3159 is information corresponding to the case where the player has sufficiently operated the operation means during the valid operation period. That is, in the process of S3159, it is determined whether or not the player has sufficiently operated the operating means during the valid operation period based on the information stored in the operation content storage area 223zb.

In the processing of S3159, if it is determined that the upper limit information is included (there is upper limit information) (S3159: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze is greater than 2000 (S3160). . When it is determined in the process of S3160 that the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze is greater than 2000 (S3160: Yes), that is, after the valid operation time is set (5000 is set to the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze). If 3 seconds have not elapsed (the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze has not been decremented by 3000), the value of the valid operation time counter 223ze is decremented by 2000 (S3161), and the process proceeds to S3162.

Here, by executing the processing of S3161, if sufficient operations are performed before the first 3 seconds of the preset 5-second operation valid period elapse, the operation valid period is reduced to 3 seconds. will be shortened to This makes it possible to change the operation effective period according to the operation contents of the operation means during the operation effective period.

In the process of S3162, it is determined whether the upper limit information included in the operation content storage area 223zb is upper limit information based on the operation of the touch sensor 290 (touch operation). In the process of S3162, if it is determined that the upper limit information is for the touch operation (S3162: Yes), the operation level 5 is set in the operation level storage area (S3163), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3163 that the upper limit information for the touch operation is not set (S3162: No), the operation level storage area is set to operation level 6 (S3164), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 478, the contents of the operation level determination process (S3165) will be described. FIG. 478 is a flow chart showing the contents of the operation level determination process (S3165).

First, when the operation level determination process (S3165) is executed, the information stored in the operation level storage area 223zc is read out (S3601), and it is determined whether the stored operation level is 5 or 6 ( S3602), if it is determined that the operation level is not 5 or 6 (S3602: No), information stored in the operation content storage area 223zb is read out (S3603). Next, it is determined whether the operation extension flag 223zd is set to ON (S3604), and if it is determined that the operation extension flag 223zd is not set to ON (S3604: No), the operation content information is semi-upper limit information. It is determined whether there is (S3605).

This semi-upper limit information is information indicating that the player's operation content is slightly insufficient with respect to the above-described upper limit information. When the case of operating five times is set, the state of operating the frame button 22 three times and the touch sensor 290 four times is set as the semi-upper limit information.

In the process of S3605, if it is determined that the operation content information is the semi-upper limit information (S3605: Yes), the operation extension flag 223zd is set to ON (S3606), and 1000 is added to the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze. (S3607), set a display extension command for 1 second (S3608), and terminate this processing. By executing this processing, it is possible to extend the operation valid period when the operation valid period ends in a state where a sufficient number of operations are almost completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3605 that the semi-upper limit information is not (S3605: No), then the number of touches (the number of times the touch sensor 290 is operated) is the number of button presses (the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed). number of times) (S3609), and if it is determined that the number of touches is greater (S3609: Yes), the operation level 2 is set in the operation level storage area 223zc (S3611), and the process proceeds to S3612. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of touches is not large (S3609: No), the operation level storage area 223zc operation level 1 is set (S3610), and the process proceeds to S3612.

In the processing of S3612, an effect mode corresponding to the operation level is set based on the effect content setting table 222za (S3612), a corresponding display command is set (S3613), and an operation content storage area 223zb and an operation level storage area 223zc are set. information is cleared (S3614), the familiar effect flag 223za is set to OFF (S3615), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the operation extension flag 223zd is ON (S3604: Yes), 11 seconds is set as the presentation period (S3616), the operation extension flag 223zd is set to OFF (S3617), and touched. It is determined whether the number of times (the number of times the touch sensor 290 has been operated) is greater than the number of times the button has been pressed (the number of times the frame button 22 has been pressed) (S3618), and if it is determined that the number of touches is greater (S3618: Yes) , the operation level 4 is set in the operation level storage area 223zc (S3620), and the process proceeds to S3612. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of touches is not large (S3618: No), the operation level storage area 223zc operation level 3 is set (S3619), and the process proceeds to S3612.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3602, if it is determined that the operation level is 5 or 6 (S3602: Yes), 14 seconds is set as the presentation period (S3621), and the process proceeds to S3612.

Next, referring to FIG. 479, the contents of the variable display setting process 9 (S2153) will be described. FIG. 479 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 9 (S2153). This variable display setting process 9 (S2153) is different from the variable display setting process (see S2113 in FIG. 458) of the above eighth control example in that a process related to the "familiar effect" is added. there is Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 9 (S2153) is executed, the same processes of S3501 to S3503 as the variable display setting process of the eighth control example (see S2113 in FIG. 458) are executed. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the "familiar effect" (S3551).

In the processing of this S3551, although detailed description is omitted, based on the information on the variation time included in the acquired variation pattern, the information on the success/failure determination result, and the information on the effect pattern determined by lottery at the time of acquiring the variation pattern It is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a nostalgic effect.

In the process of S3551, when it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time is a variation pattern corresponding to the "familiar effect" (S3551: Yes), the familiar effect setting process is executed (S3552), and then the above-described The same processing of S3505 to S3509 as the variable display setting processing (see S2113 in FIG. 458) of the eighth control example is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 480, the contents of the familiar effect setting process (S3552) executed in the variable display setting process 9 (see S2153 in FIG. 479) will be described. FIG. 480 is a flow chart showing the contents of the familiar effect setting process (S3552).

When the familiarization effect setting process (S3552) is executed, first, the value of the operation valid time counter 223ze is set to 5000 (S3701), and then the familiarity effect flag 223za is set to ON (S3702). Then, it is determined whether or not the current variation is a winning variation (S3703), and if it is determined to be a winning variation (S3703: Yes), a display variation pattern command indicating winning is set as the final effect period. (S3704), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3703 that there is no hit variation (S3703: No), a display variation pattern command indicating a failure is set as the final effect period (S3705), and this process ends.

As described above, in the familiar effect setting process (S3552), based on the result of determination of suitability for the current variation, among the effect contents to be executed as variable display, the effect for directly indicating the result of suitability determination is selected. It is configured to set only the performance mode during the final performance execution period in which the final performance is executed. As a result, in the case of executing an operation effect that greatly changes the effect content according to the operation content of the operation means by the player, only the final effect is set at the time of setting the variable display content (at the time of starting the change of the special symbol). can be set in advance, it is possible to reliably prevent the player from being erroneously notified of the win/loss determination result.

In the ninth control example, the effect data corresponding to the success/failure determination result is stored. However, the present invention is not limited to this. An operation performance selection means is provided for selecting a performance mode to be executed as an operation performance from among a plurality of performance modes before the variable display corresponding to the familiar performance is executed, and the performance mode selected by the operation performance selection means is selected. Accordingly, it may be configured such that the success/failure determination result and the effect data to be used are different.

Specifically, it is configured such that one of two effects can be selected from a "familiar effect" in which a character imitating a dog is made to become familiar with the character, and a "flying effect" in which a character imitating a dog is chased away. If "effect" is selected, success effect data and failure effect data are defined as shown in FIG. 474(b) of the ninth control example shown in FIG. 474(b). good.

By configuring in this way, the player can select the relationship between the performance to be executed and the result of the success/failure determination.

Furthermore, the type of effect to be executed this time ("Natsukase effect" or "Remove effect") is determined according to the operation content during the operation valid period, and the operation effect is performed without informing the player of the result. You can configure it to run. By configuring in this way, even if the content of the effect to be executed is grasped, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the type of the effect being executed. It is possible to prevent the game result from being easily predicted based on this. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the reliability of each performance data used in the content of the performance to be executed is biased, that is, the ratio of selection of each performance data differs depending on the result of the determination of success or failure. can do.

All or part of the above-described embodiments and control examples may be combined.

Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the control example described above. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, after the big winning pattern is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepachi, jangkyu, a so-called game machine combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine may be implemented.

As a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that confirms and displays the symbols after variably displaying a sequence of symbols, and does not have a handle for hitting balls. things are mentioned. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In addition, all or part of the configurations of the above-described embodiments may be implemented in combination.

Below, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic group A> (The point where the player's pushing direction is the direction from the back to the front)
In an operation device having operation means that a player pushes in, the operation device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and a position in which the operation means protrudes from the first state with respect to the player. and a biasing means for biasing the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the depth side to the front side for the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). ). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the performance is performed in a manner that heightens the player's expectation of a big win at the advance position, the player can easily operate the operation means at the advance position with a large acceleration. , it was necessary to design the operating means with high strength. In this case, there is a problem that the operation means becomes heavy as a whole and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player, so that a straightforward up and down linear motion is performed. By causing the slippage between the player's hand and the operating means, the momentum of pushing can be released.

In addition, considering the game posture of the player, when pushing the operation means around the shoulders and elbows, it becomes difficult to apply force in the front direction, so the force applied to the operation means by the player should be naturally weakened. can be done.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axial rod arranged on the far side for the player, tilts up and down about the axial rod, and has the operation means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized by comprising a tilting means, wherein the tilting means is arranged so that the operating means faces the opposite direction of the player in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured in a manner to rotate, and in the second state, the operation means is arranged in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent a person from performing an operation of hitting the operating means.

In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be easily pushed in, so that a new pushing operation method that is less likely to be accelerated can be provided. , it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

The new push operation method is, for example, placing the outer side of the little finger of the left hand near the shaft, placing the hand near the operation means with the palm up and down, and then turning the thumb side toward the operation means. A method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and the palm is placed facing the operation means, and then a method in which the palm is dropped toward the operation means is exemplified. be done.

A gaming machine A3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means is vertical.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means in the first state is the vertical direction. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the game machine A3, the operation device is configured so that the operation means can be automatically operated, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it acts in the direction of one side and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force is directed in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. can be prevented from working. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the player's operation.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pushed, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being pulled in the opposite direction by the player when the button is retracted and receiving a high load.

In the game machine A4, a maintenance state that maintains the operation device in the first state or the second state can be formed, and the maintenance means is operated by the driving means. a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of phase change between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained; In the first phase and the second phase, when the maintenance state is canceled, the range in which the operation means can move is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation A gaming machine A5 configured to be capable of canceling the maintaining state.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effects of the game machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintaining means is kept in the maintained state, and in the phase after the change, the movement to release the maintained state is rotated. The movement width of the operation device can be changed by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases in accordance with the rotational speed of the rotating means. , a game machine A6 configured such that the operating means moves following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is caused only by the urging force, so the mode of movement is limited to one way. Since it is possible to add a moving mode of moving following the maintaining means to the operating means, it is possible to increase the types of moving modes of the operating means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

In any one of the game machines A1 to A6, light-emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player is provided, and the second state is more favorable than the first state. However, from a player's point of view, the game machine A7 is characterized in that the area of the operating means is reduced and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is more illuminated by the light emitting means from the player's point of view than the first state. Since the irradiation range of the emitted light is expanded and the area of the operation means is reduced, the player can be made to pay attention to the light and the performance effect can be improved, and at the same time, it is difficult to press the operation means unless aiming. By adopting this mode, it is possible to reduce the power of the player at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means is changed by moving the operating means toward and away from the display means. Characterized game machine A8.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effects of the game machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means to emit light from the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from reflecting on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Characteristic group B> (Points that make it possible to respond to repeated hits while reducing the repulsive force under normal conditions)
In an operation device having an operation means that allows a player to perform an operation up to an end position, a first state and a second state in which the range of motion of the operation up to the end position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state; and biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state. A game machine B1 characterized by comprising a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the player's operation.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operation means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the automatic operation of the operation means is performed by the drive motor. However, in that case, the return of the operating means is delayed, and if the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to repeat the operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. 2
By pushing back the operation means with the drive means, the return can be made faster, so that the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The game machine B1 is provided with repeated hitting determination means for determining whether or not a repeated hitting operation is being performed based on a sensor detection value of the stroke operation means within a predetermined time, and the second driving means is operated based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means. A gaming machine B2 characterized by determining whether or not to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the repeated hitting determination means, so the player does not perform repeated hitting operations (for example, single pressing operation, long pressing, and so on). It is possible to prevent the second driving means from operating even when the player is performing an operation, etc., and the player feels the load of pushing back the hand.

In the gaming machine B2, terminal detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and whether or not the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position shifted by a predetermined amount from the terminal position. position difference detection means for detecting; and movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the terminal end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; a game machine B3 characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the direction of movement determined by is the direction from the end of the push-in to return to the first state.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction from the end of the push to return to the first state, that is, when the player's hand moves away from the button. Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separation, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second driving device from operating in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and placing a high load on the player's hand.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Game machine B4 to play.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor can be effectively used to generate the driving force for moving the operating means.

In any one of game machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation means is provided, and the second drive means includes a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame. a supporting means, wherein the driving force for moving the operating means from the position of the first state toward the position of the second state increases as the operating means approaches the terminal position. The game machine B5 is characterized in that the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame in a state in which the operating means is arranged at the terminal position, thereby generating a driving force.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By generating it separately from the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is unnecessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the rotation of the drive motor can be maintained.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame based on the arrangement of the operation means at the end position. A game machine B6 characterized by.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of the game machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame. By doing so, the drive motor can be moved away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means. As a result, the support means for supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (the direction toward the operation means), so that the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Characteristic group C> (Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration production device)
A detection sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensors, and the measurement means threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold; The driving force generated by the repulsion means increases when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Characteristic gaming machine C1.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, if the player's light operation is emphasized, the operation resistance will be low, and there is a risk that the operation means will be damaged by the player's operation. Although the speed can be reduced and the possibility of damage to the operating means can be reduced, there is a problem that the force required for the player's operation increases, and the operation of the operating means becomes a burden for weak players. .

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and if it is equal to or higher than the threshold, the drive force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, the operation resistance can be reduced when the speed of the operation means is equal to or less than the threshold, and the operation means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, it is possible to improve operability and prevent destruction by the repulsion means.

In the game machine C1, the repulsive means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when the threshold measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, , before the control for pushing out the voice coil motor to the extended position is executed and the operating means is arranged at a position capable of coming into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized by driving the voice coil motor in advance.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and the operating means can be arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before moving, it is possible to suppress the impact generated between the operating means and the voice coil motor.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, the operation means is controlled to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor. While suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, the degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be able to come into contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operation means by means of spring elasticity. .

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by means of spring elasticity. can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold value determining means when the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value to the case where the value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. A gaming machine C5 is characterized in that a movable area of an end portion of said repulsion means opposite to a side contacting said operation means is narrowed.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects of the game machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means, which is the end opposite to the side that contacts the operation means, is narrowed, thereby making it possible to operate the operation means. A higher velocity can increase the elastic force generated by the repulsive means.

<Characteristic group D> (Damage of the driving means is prevented by blocking the transmission of the driving force with the clutch)
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means releasing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means through the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. A gaming machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured in such a manner that an operation means that can be operated by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-14421
8). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the operation means is automatically operated for the effect, if the operation means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the drive system. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the canceling means cancels the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is automatically operating, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. can.

In the game machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the game machine is being driven in the second direction.

Here, when whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the operating means is operated by the player while driving the driving means in an operation direction in which transmission of the driving force cannot be released, there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the driving means. Therefore, the degree of freedom of performance is reduced when the operating means is operated to effect performance.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member that locks the button is moved in the unlocking direction or in the unlocking direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward. Toggles whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, two modes of button operation can be created (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the driving force must be interrupted in both cases.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both driving directions regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. , it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of action in the effect of automatically operating the operating means.

It should be noted that, as a method of releasing the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes biasing means for biasing the driving means and the transmission means to a state in which the driving force can be transmitted, and the release means is a contact portion between the driving means and the transmission means. and engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force when they are engaged with each other. A game machine D3, characterized in that the game machine D3 has a shape that tapers away from the contact surface and is inclined with respect to the contact surface.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmission means, and the release means applies the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surfaces of the pressing means. On the other hand, since both surfaces facing the direction of movement of the driving means are provided with engaging teeth that are tapered away from the abutment surfaces, the engagement between the engaging teeth causes the transmission means to move from the driving means. They can be separated, thereby canceling the transmission of the driving force.

Further, a biasing force is constantly applied by the biasing means between the driving means and the transmitting means, and when the transmitting means is separated from the driving means, the biasing force acts in the direction of movement of the driving means via the engagement teeth. load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is cancelled.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging tooth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means increases, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically reinstated, rather than completely de-resistance away. As a result, when the player releases the button, the button can be started to operate within a short period of time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is driven "as an effect",
It goes through one phase of the button action. In addition, if the player releases his hand in the middle of the game, if the player moves from the end of the first phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and "
The player's feeling of "starting to move because the load on the player is relieved" is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operation means can be started within a short period of time after the player releases the hand and the load is released. As a result, it is possible to produce a feeling that the player starts to move because the load on the player is relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from sawtooth shapes that engage with each other.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the release means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmission means at an early stage.
That is, when the tip of the engaging surface has a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move toward and away from each other, the transmission means and the release means collide with each other at this plane, and the release means is disengaged. It is possible to suppress the movement along the direction of approaching and separating from the means to be stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be started to operate early.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operating means differs between when the driving means is continuously operated in the forward direction and when the driving means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5 characterized by:

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means, the driving force transmission can be canceled without being limited to any one operation mode. It can be carried out.

In the game machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is the following for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means when there is a difference between whether the driving means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D6 is similar in that the operation after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effects of the game machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode for a predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means is the same. Since the action after the predetermined period of time has elapsed is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by combining the difference in the operating mode of the operating means with information that is beneficial to the player, such as the degree of expectation for a big win, the player is instructed to operate the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operating mode of the operating means changes. can be supervised.

In addition, since the difference in operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the degree of expectation for the big win without watching the operation of the operation means. can be done. However, the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the direction of action cannot be recognized from the vibration sound. can be made to watch over the operation of the operating means.

<Characteristic group E> (Change the position of the protrusion of the cam based on the rotation of the cam)
An operation device having operation means operated by a player, wherein the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means, first means configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing a change in the position of the operating means from the first position; biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. terminating means for variably forming the movement terminating end of the first means, wherein the first means suppresses a change in the position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means; 1 means includes releasing load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement with the operating means, and releasing the engagement by the releasing load means and terminating the movement of the operating means in the terminating means. A game machine E characterized in that the change is performed by a single driving means.
1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a cam-operated and movable operating means is fixed at a first position, and the fixing is released by a release load means, whereby the urging force of the urging means expands and operates. , There is a game machine that can change the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation by the termination means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the amount of displacement of the overhanging operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam when the fixation is released, the phase of the cam when the fixation is released varies in various ways. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixation are driven by separate driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required and the space for arranging the driving means becomes large.

On the other hand, in the game machine E1, the releasing load means for releasing the fixation of the operating means is driven by the driving means for driving the operating means. As a result, the driving means for changing the terminal position of the operating means by the terminal means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used together, so the number of driving means can be reduced.

A game machine E2 characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transmission means.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, the position of the release load means can be changed based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. As a result, the number of detecting means such as position sensors for detecting the state of the load release means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

As a method for switching the state of the load release means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the load release means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational cycle of the cam and the projection. , a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection in other phases, etc.
exemplified.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load given from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is arranged operably with respect to the transmitting means, and is characterized in that whether or not the releasing load means and the transmitting means are synchronously operated is switched by the operation of the load releasing means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, the release load means is arranged to be operable with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means is operated by the operation of the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not to operate synchronously with the transmission means, the synchronous state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

In the game machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotating shaft of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member. A gaming machine E4 comprising members, wherein the rotation periods of the first rotating member and the second rotating member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so that the second rotating means can be operated at a predetermined speed. A plurality of phases of the first rotary member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, it is possible to prepare a plurality of types of end positions when the operating means is held at the first position and then released and moved toward the second position. ,
You can expand the range of performance. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position away from the first position or an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Characteristic group F> (Vibration device supported by a soft case)
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device has a first position for the operation means and a second position reached by the operation means when the player performs an operation from the first position. A game machine comprising vibrating means having a vibrating portion configured to be movable between and vibrating; and receiving means disposed so as to be in contact with the vibrating portion, wherein the operating means is disposed at the first position Then, the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which it cannot abut against the receiving means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operating means that can be operated by the player and vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not, when the vibration means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operation means or the frame of the game machine. Alternatively, since it is transmitted to the player who touches the frame of the game machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means,
It is necessary to operate the vibrating means after detecting the operation of the operating means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the operation means. mode), there is a problem that the vibration may not start in time before releasing the hand, and the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating portion contacts the receiving means is determined depending on whether the operating means is placed at the first position or is placed at the second position by being operated by the player. Since it changes, even when the vibrating portion is continuously vibrated, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of operation by the player. Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged to protrude in the occupation area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position in the separated state, and the operation means moves to the second position. The game machine F2 changes to the abutting state by moving the vibrating means out of the occupied area.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operation means, thereby changing from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed,
The intensity of transmitted vibrations can also be varied. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibrating means without any particular change in the driving mode.

A game machine F3 characterized in that, in the game machines F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via support means having spring elasticity.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, the support means can perform positioning with respect to the receiving means while suppressing the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the receiving means. As a result, it is possible to separate the receiving means and the vibrating means, prevent transmission of vibration, and suppress displacement occurring in the vibrating means during vibration.

A game machine F4 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, in the contact state, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the extension and contraction of the supporting means can give momentum when the vibrating part moves in the direction of approaching the receiving means.

In the game machine F3, the support means has deformation resistance along the operating direction of the operation means,
A gaming machine F5 characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is made lower than that.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operation means is operated and interferes with the support means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the support means. can.

Thus, even if the amount of movement of the operating means is slightly different, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the receiving means can be made different. .

As a method for differentiating the deformation resistance, in the case where the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending rubber legs along the movement direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibrating means. A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding to change the deformation resistance for each direction when it is composed of a rubber member; , and a coil spring that biases the vibrating means along the operating direction of the operating means.

A game machine F6 characterized in that, in the game machine F3, the portion with which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operation means, but the vibration is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is separate from the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the vibration of the vibrating means from being transmitted to the driving means via the operating means and the transmitting means, thereby suppressing a state in which a load is applied to the driving means. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

In addition, since it is possible to suppress the vibration from being transmitted to the hand of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

As the receiving means, for example, among the frame parts of the game machine, the part near the upper tray to which the game balls are supplied, the edge part of the glass frame, etc. Examples include a portion that may be touched by hands, a housing portion that partially encloses the operation means, and the like.

<Feature G group> (One-touch attachment between cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the attachment part.)
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is operated by a player. and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operation means, wherein the transmission means comprises a deformation portion that elastically deforms due to an overload. Gaming machine G1 to play.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means. There is a game machine provided (for example, see JP 2014-144218)
. However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when the player holds and fixes the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that a load is accumulated in the connecting portion between the transmission means and the driving means, and these connecting portions may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformable portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to relax the load applied to the connection part with.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member that is rotatably supported, the deforming portion constitutes a connection portion of the cam member with the rotating shaft, and the elasticity of the deforming portion causes the cam member to move toward the rotating shaft. A game machine G2 characterized in that a fixing force of is generated.

According to the game machine G2, the deforming portion plays a role of a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft of the transmission means, a role of a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotating shaft,
Prepare. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the transmission member by sharing the functions. For example, separate securing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a projecting portion projecting in parallel with the rotation shaft, the projecting portion and the operating means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to On the other hand, a gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the rotating shaft is tilted.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it becomes difficult to construct the cam member and the projecting portion as one member, and the number of members may increase.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotating shaft tilts with respect to the cam member. Compared to the case where the cam member is slid relative to the cam member, the cam member can be easily constructed from a single member, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the elastic deformation resistance of the deforming portion is greater than that of the rotating shaft in comparison with the first rotating direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotating shaft and the projecting portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which rotation is performed around a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the projecting portion and an extending direction of the rotation shaft. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation portion different for each direction, the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed when viewed from the rotation axis direction is more Compared to the state before elastic deformation, the projecting tip of the projecting portion can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the cam member. As a result, the projecting portion of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the projecting portion is to move, so that the elastic deformation of the deformation portion relieves the load generated between the projecting portion and the operating means. can do.

The game machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member arranged at a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, wherein the deformation portion elastically deforms to change the posture of the cam member, The game machine G5 is characterized in that the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformable portion elastically deforms, thereby changing the attitude of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member are brought into contact with each other. contact, the movement resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the gaming machine G6 comprises detection means for detecting that at least part of the cam member is tilted with respect to an axis.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of a deviation from , it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before the occurrence of the overload is detected. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting displacement deviation becomes smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complicated the structure of the detection means and the higher the cost. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to provide a configuration that can detect the occurrence of an overload at a low cost and at an early stage.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member is tilted with respect to the axis. Therefore, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time when the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member, without the need to drive the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detecting means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the driving means when an overload occurs.

<Characteristic group H> (Structure to prevent balls with threads)
In a game machine provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls flowing back toward a launching device, among game balls shot into a game area, can pass, the foul ball passage permits passage of the falling game balls. The game machine H1 is characterized by comprising a one-way obstruction means for obstructing the movement of objects flowing backward.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine, where a thread cutting blade is arranged inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and the game ball with the thread connected is driven into the game area. There is a game machine with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (for example, JP 2015-02
4179). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the thread is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is shot, and the thread is cut by the tension generated at that time. It may be returned to the player side as a foul ball.
For this reason, for example, a cheating tool is prepared in which game balls are connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string is shot with a weak firing strength to flow into the foul ball passage and be returned to the player. By hitting the other game ball connected to the other end of the string into the game area while gripping one of the game balls that have been drawn, the string can be removed from the guide path and passed through the foul ball passage to the other side. Since it is possible to create a state in which one game ball and the other game ball are connected by a string, a load is applied from the outside to the string connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain illicit profits by manipulating the

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed, the one-way obstruction means However, by interfering with the movement of the string in the reverse direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illicit profits.

A game machine H2 characterized in that the foul ball path in the game machine H1 has a bent portion for bending a downflow path of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, the string guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the string can be quickly cut.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion is provided with a load means which does not apply a load to the game balls flowing down, but applies a load to the objects flowing backward, on the inner corner side of the bending.
.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effects of the game machine H2, it is possible to apply a load to the backflowing object (for example, a thread-like member) by the load means.

In the game machine H3, the game machine H4 is characterized in that the load means is arranged in a concave portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of the game machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed part, collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine H3 or H4, the gaming machine H5 comprises regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the restricting means restricts the outward movement of the load means in the foul ball passage. When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the on-line member from weakening due to the deformation of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H5, a receiving tray is provided as a tray on the front side of the front door for the foul balls to reach first, and the receiving tray is a portion for discharging the game balls paid out from the payout device. The game machine H6 is characterized in that the ball discharge part is arranged above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines H1 to H5, the game balls paid out from the payout device pass in front of the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage. To reduce the durability of the string by intentionally hitting the put out game ball to apply the load when the string guided to the game area is used to apply the load to the other game ball. be able to.

In any one of the game machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the put-out ball discharge part that discharges the game balls put out from the pay-out device to the receiving tray, which is the tray where the foul balls reach first on the front side of the front door. , a game machine H7 characterized by being positioned below the lower end of the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines H1 to H6, a cheating act was performed in which a string guided to the game area through the foul ball passage was used to apply a load to the other game ball. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the game balls that are paid out.

<Characteristic group I> (Structure of board holding down)
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means receives the game means. A state changing means is provided for changing the gaming means from the unusable state to the usable state, wherein the state changing means changes the gaming means to the usable state. A gaming machine I1 characterized by comprising an approach means for approaching the game means from the one side when setting the above.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board is rotatable in a rotational direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame, and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a game machine provided with a fixing means for holding (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2005-230420). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the fixing means is configured to be able to change its state only after the game board is pushed into the position of the use state. Therefore, there is a problem that the work efficiency may be lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine I1, since the state changing means has a means for approaching the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into use, the pushing of the game board is prevented. Even if it is halfway, the proximity means contacts the game board and adds a pushing force,
The effect is that the game board can be pushed to the position of the use state.

In the game machine I1, the state changing means displaces the game means to the one side as the game means is changed to an unusable state. .

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1, the game means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) as the game means is changed to the unusable state, so that the game means can be removed. It is effective in improving the working efficiency of the work.

In the game machine I1 or I2, the state changing means makes the game means unusable and the proximity means retreats to the outside of the game means. Gaming machine I3.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effects of the game machine I1 or I2, the proximity means retracts to the outside of the game means, so that it is possible to improve the working efficiency of the work of removing the game means. Since this is performed along with disabling the means, the working efficiency can be further improved.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I3, the game machine I4 is provided with contact means for receiving a load from the game means when the state changing means is changed to the usable state.

According to the game machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means to change the state of the state changing means to the usable state, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means causes the usable state as a series of flows. can change state to

In the game machine I4, the game means is supported by a shaft on one side of the receiving means and is received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means is the receiving means. A gaming machine I5 characterized in that it is arranged on the other side of the.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effects of the game machine I4, the width dimension of the game means is used to
A load can be efficiently applied to the abutment means via the game means.

In any one of the game machines I1 to I5, there is provided blocking means for blocking the opening on the one side of the receiving means, the blocking means being unusable by the state changing means making the game means unusable. The gaming machine I6 is characterized by comprising a closing regulation part that prevents the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means puts the gaming means into a usable state depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. You can decide whether to As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means is maintained in an unusable state.

<Feature J group> (Inverted cup and harness band prevent piano wire from getting stuck)
A game means used during a game, and a receiving means which is open on one side facing the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means being connected to the game means. A game machine J1, characterized in that it comprises an arranging means arranged on a path that communicates with the outside, wherein the arranging means is constructed so as to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent acts of inserting a piano wire from the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP-A-2016-
26573). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, there is only one anti-fraud section, and there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the game machine J1, the arranging means is arranged in the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points, thereby preventing fraud. can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes first means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a first location, and second means for suppressing entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing entry of members from the outside by a different method.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of members from the outside between the first location and the second location. Entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed as compared with the case where the number of is increased.

In addition, the method of suppressing the intrusion from the outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of restricting entry by blocking a route, or a method of suppressing fraudulent activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the game machine J3 is characterized in that the arrangement means comprises an intrusion control portion formed in a cup shape that opens outward of the receiving means.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effects of the game machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in the shape of a cup, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further intrusion.

In the game machine J3, the arrangement means includes support means for supporting electric wiring, and the support means is arranged downstream of the entry control section in a route from the outside to the game means. Characterized game machine J4.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effects of the game machine J3, when a fraudulent act of penetrating the entry control portion with high heat occurs, changes in the wiring caused by the high heat (disconnection due to heat, etc.) are detected. It is possible to easily produce the effect of suppressing the entry of the member.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means arranges the members entered from the outside,
The gaming machine J5 is characterized by comprising elimination means for guiding to an elimination area far from the gaming means.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the member entering from the outside is guided to the resolution area far from the game means by the arranging means. Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the members entering from the outside from reaching the game means.

<Characteristics K group> (Structure of decorative plate with 5-piece structure, including fraud prevention)
a first means and a second means arranged oppositely along a first direction and connected by at least one side; A gaming machine comprising a third means for connecting the first means and the second means, wherein the connection direction of the connecting part is set in a second direction that intersects the first direction A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, first means and second means arranged to face each other and connected on at least one side, and disposed between the first means and second means along the first direction There is a gaming machine comprising a third means that
However, in the above-described conventional game machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as adhesion or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, the load along the first direction is the first. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being hung up on the third means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the third means It is possible to reduce the load applied from Thereby, it is possible to prevent the third means from being damaged.

A game machine K2 characterized in that, in the game machine K1, the connecting portion is arranged apart from the third means.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 comprises connected means connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, wherein the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means A gaming machine K3 characterized by being connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in a third direction of approaching and fitting them to each other.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connected means connected to the other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and The resistance to decomposition of the second means can be improved.

A gaming machine K4 characterized in that, in the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of the game machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means are arranged to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
Thereby, even if a fraudulent act of breaking the fitting portion and disassembling the first means and the second means occurs, the fraudulent act can be detected early.

In the game machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening and fixing direction is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of game machines K3 to K5, light irradiation means for irradiating light toward said first means or second means side and fixed to said connected means, and one of said first means or second means a light guiding means fixed to a member of the light emitting means and capable of introducing the light emitted by the light emitting means.

According to the game machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent positional deviation between the first and second means and the light guide means.

A game machine K7 characterized in that a game machine K7 is characterized by comprising contact means for surface contact in a region facing the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means.

According to the game machine K7, in addition to the effects of the game machine K6, a space corresponding to the size of the abutting means is maintained in the opposing region between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. can be done.
This prevents the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced. can be done.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from changing even if the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposing direction when an illegal attempt is made to disassemble the first means or the second means. can do.

<Characteristic group L> (Point L to utilize curved light guide means. Not achieved as a point)
A light guide means formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in an irradiation direction of light passing through the interior, and a projecting means arranged opposite to the light guide means and onto which the light that has passed through the light guide means is projected, The game machine L1 is characterized in that the projected means comprises a concave facing portion arranged to face the concave surface portion of the light guide means, and a convex facing portion arranged to face the convex surface portion of the light guiding means.

2. Description of the Related Art Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end surface (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the light guide plate is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface-emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projected means has the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion Department and
It is possible to change the emission intensity of the projection target means.

In the game machine L1, the projection target means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave surface facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed at the concave facing portion. The production effect of the production by the light can be improved.

In the gaming machine L2, a reverse projection means is provided on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guide means therebetween, and the light passing through the light guide means is projected. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light means facing the concave surface and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex surface are made of a material having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, the part of the counterprojection means arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide means and the part arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide means emit light. Since they are made of a material with substantially the same transmittance, by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the means to be projected and the rendering mode of the light visually recognized through the opposite projection means can be achieved. can be different from

<Characteristic group M> (arrangement structure of bass reflex speaker)
first means and second means arranged opposite to each other and fixed to form an internal space in the fixed state; acoustic means disposed so as to enter at least a portion of the internal space; A gaming machine M1, characterized by comprising bending means for constructing a bending path in an internal space.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, there are game machines in which speakers are arranged at the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are performed by the sound output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1
6088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left-right central position of the gaming machine and sent out of the gaming machine,
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is regulated by the left-right width of the game machine, where the effect of making the bass sound is likely to be performed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending means constitutes a curved path in the internal space of the first means and the second means, by configuring a path longer than the length of one piece, the By removing the restriction on the left-right width, it is possible to make the vibration wave travel an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that loads are applied in opposite directions, and the bending means is a rib-like member extending from at least one of the first means and the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2, characterized in that it has a protruding part protruding from the second means, and a protruding tip of the protruding part abuts on the other of the first means and the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1, the projecting tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means are connected in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the projecting portion and the other of the first means and the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluid such as vibration waves from passing through the gap in the curved path.

In the game machine M1 or M2, an opening connecting the internal space and the outside is provided, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the sound means. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that it is closed by

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, so it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member. The walls forming the internal space can be closed appropriately in a state where the passage member passes from the internal space to the outside.

The gaming machine M4, wherein the opening is arranged closer to the sound means than the protruding portion in the gaming machine M3.

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the projecting portion and broken. be able to.

In any one of game machines M1 to M4, support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and second means is fastened and fixed, and presentation means arranged below the support fastening means for performing presentation accompanying a game. and wherein the effect means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the effect means from below, so that the supporting and fastening means does not have to press the space used for the effect. things can be adopted.

<Feature N group> (Movable unit, reverse-rotating flowers, petals that stop in the middle)
a base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a displacement direction; A second displacing state switchable between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacing direction of the first displacing means
and a displacement means, wherein at least when the second displacement means is in the following state, the third displacement means is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the drive means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as the first displacement means expands and contracts, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the expansion and contraction of the first displacement means, while the first displacement means operates in the vicinity of the extension end. When doing so, there is a game machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion and contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, since the directions of displacement of the first displacement means and the second displacement means are the same when the first displacement means expands and contracts, the performance becomes slow and the performance effect is not sufficient. there was a point

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 is characterized by comprising resistance means for generating resistance against the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Game machine N2 to play.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means by the action of the resistance means, and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of modes of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Game machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means. be able to.

A game machine N4 characterized in that, in the game machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and is visually recognized by the player. It can also serve as a performance device.

The gaming machine N4 is characterized by comprising a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, the shaft means coaxially and rotatably supporting the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means. Gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, since the shaft means functioning as the rotating shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, the first displacement means, To prevent the displacement resistance from increasing excessively because the attitude of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, and the attitudes of the other members or means follow and change. can be done.

<Characteristics Group O> (Utilization of shell buttons and punched holes. Not achieved as a point)
In a game machine comprising first means and housing means capable of housing the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: a first opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or larger than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are provided with operation means that can be operated by a player and an upper plate that covers the operation means from below, and that the operation means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate. See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, when a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, there is a problem that the foreign object remains inside and may induce a malfunction. .

On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 is provided with the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the accommodating means and the first means. It can be easily removed to the outside of the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which foreign matter remains inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is arranged on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. game machine O2.

According to the game machine O2, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support part.

A gaming machine O3, in the gaming machine O1 or O2, wherein the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

According to the game machine O3, in addition to the effects of the game machine O1 or O2, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening before the water reaches the low water resistance portion. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of allowing a predetermined solid object to pass through and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
The solid object can be easily removed through the second opening because the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the solid object in the opposite direction.

A gaming machine O5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is arranged closer to the player than the first means.

According to the game machine O5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object can be visually recognized by the player when the second opening is partially blocked by the solid object. can be made As a result, it is possible to make the player aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will continue to remain. .

<Characteristic P group> (G2 advance notice control)
Judgment means for executing judgment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and identification information for showing the specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means. In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player in the case where the Determining means for determining that the specific effect is to be executed by the effect executing means for the dynamic display of the continuous identification information, and the determining means determines that the specific effect is to be executed. and interruption means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the specific condition, when the game machine P1 is in the state of the game machine P1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, by executing a special effect for a plurality of continuous variable effects, a series of effects using a plurality of variable effects are provided to the player to enhance the interest of the game. A game machine capable of improving the is proposed (Patent document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., by executing a plurality of continuous variable effects, if a notification effect, etc. that should be executed in the meantime occurs irregularly, etc., the execution is delayed, etc., causing the player to lose interest in the game. There is a risk that the content will be difficult to understand. This technical idea was made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to easily understand the content of the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, even when the determination means determines that a specific effect is to be executed for each of the plurality of dynamic displays of the identification information, the specific effect is executed based on the establishment of the specific condition. is interrupted until the return condition is met. Therefore, even if the execution of a specific effect is determined, the execution can be interrupted and necessary control, etc. can be performed. Easy game can be provided. Further, when the return condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific performance is resumed, so that the player can be notified that the specific performance is not finished in the middle, thereby providing the player with a performance that is easy for the player to understand. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine P1, there are operating means that can be operated by the player, switching means that can switch and set settings when the operating means is operated, and based on the settings that are set by the switching means. a dynamic display mode determining means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started by the game machine P2.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. It is possible to change the dynamic display mode by a player's operation, to increase the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed, and to prevent the player from getting tired of the game early. There is

In the gaming machine P2, the specific condition is established by switching the setting by the switching means when execution of the specific effect is determined by the determining means. Game machine P3.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P2, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is displayed. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is executed in the same way, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that it is difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any one of the game machines P1 to P3, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering means, and its acquiring means. and storage means for storing the information acquired by the game machine, wherein the determination means executes the determination based on the information stored in the storage means. P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the game ball whose information is acquired by entering the game ball into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

In the gaming machine P4, the ball-entering means includes at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the obtaining means is the first ball-entering means. When a game ball enters the second ball entering means, the first information can be acquired, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second information can be acquired, and the dynamic display The means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result when the determination means determines the first information, and when the determination means determines the second information. dynamically displays the second identification information for indicating the determination result, and the determining means preferentially performs the determination on the second information rather than the first information stored in the storage means. is executed, and the specific condition is a state in which execution of the specific effect is determined for dynamic display of the first identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times, and the second A gaming machine P6 characterized by being established when the identification information is dynamically displayed.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times, the second ball entry is performed. Even if a ball is entered into the means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is given priority. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize that the game has been started.

In the gaming machine P7, the first ball entering means is configured to allow the game ball to enter more easily than the second ball entering means when in the first gaming state, and the second ball entering means , a gaming machine P8 characterized in that the game machine P8 is constructed such that, in a second game state different from the first game state, the ball is easier to enter than the first ball-entering means.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P7, when in the first gaming state, game balls easily enter the first ball entering means, so the first identification information is continuously moved. There is an effect that the target display is facilitated, the specific performance can be easily executed many times, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Feature Q group> (G production)
Judgment means for executing judgment, display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and identification information for showing the specific judgment result is statically displayed on the display means. a special game executing means for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player, in which a special effect is executed for a plurality of continuous dynamic displays of the identification information. A game machine Q1 characterized by having a performance executing means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of pachinko machine, etc., there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the game machine B1, even if the identification information is dynamically displayed which does not result in a specific determination result, it is possible to show the identification information for a plurality of times as one dynamic display, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. .

In the gaming machine Q1, when the specific effect execution means is executing the specific effect, an interrupting means for interrupting the execution of the specific effect until a return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition; A gaming machine Q2 characterized by having:

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the execution of the specific effect is suspended until the return condition is satisfied based on the establishment of the specific condition, so that the player can know that the specific condition is established. There is an effect that it can be shown easily. In addition, when the return condition is met, the execution of the specific performance is resumed, so that the specific performance is terminated in the middle, and the content of the performance is halfway, which confuses the player. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an operating means that can be operated by a player, a switching means that can switch and set settings when the operating means is operated, and the settings that are set by the switching means dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information when the dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the above.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the setting can be switched by the player operating the operation means, and the dynamic display mode of the identification information is determined by the setting. The dynamic display mode can be changed by the player's operation, the variation of the dynamic display mode to be executed can be increased, and the player can be prevented from becoming bored with the game early. has the effect of

A game machine Q4 characterized in that, in the game machine Q3, the specific condition is established by switching the setting by the switching means when the specific effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q3, when the setting is switched by the player, the specific effect is interrupted and the dynamic display mode based on the setting switched by the player is displayed. It can be started, and even if the player switches the setting, the specific effect is executed in the same way, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that it is difficult to understand that the setting has been switched.

In any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q4, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and its acquiring means. and storage means for storing the information acquired by the gaming machine Q5.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the game ball whose information is acquired by entering the game ball into the ball entering means is allowed to enter the ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in.

A gaming machine Q6 characterized in that, in the gaming machine Q5, the game machine Q6 is characterized by comprising preliminary determination means for executing determination prior to the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q5, since the preliminary determination is executed by the preliminary determination means, the determination result can be identified before the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is

In the gaming machine Q5 or Q6, the ball-entering means includes at least a first ball-entering means and a second ball-entering means different from the first ball-entering means, and the obtaining means comprises the first ball-entering means. When a game ball enters the ball means, the first information can be acquired, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the second information can be acquired, and The target display means dynamically displays the first identification information for indicating the determination result when the first information is determined by the determination means, and the second information is determined by the determination means. the second identification information is dynamically displayed to indicate the determination result, and the specific condition is that the second identification information is displayed dynamically after the first identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine Q7 characterized in that it is established when a mark is displayed.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, when a specific effect is determined for the dynamic display of the first identification information that is continuously executed a plurality of times, the second Even if a ball is entered into the ball entering means and the dynamic display of the second identification information is preferentially executed, the execution of the specific effect is interrupted, so the dynamic display of the second identification information is given priority. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player recognize that the game has been started in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the game machine Q7, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball by varying the shooting force based on the player's operation, and a game ball shot with a first shooting force by the shooting means are configured to flow down. and a game ball that has flowed down through the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and a game ball that has been fired with a second firing force different from the first firing force can flow down. and a second flow path, wherein the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second ball entering means is the A game machine Q8 characterized in that it is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter.

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q7, there is an effect that the player can intentionally easily establish the specific condition by adjusting the shooting force of the game ball.

<Feature R group> (If special figure 2 remains after the end of time saving, it will not shift to charge effect until 5 fluctuation)
A first ball-entering means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entering means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. an acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entering means; , storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means on a display means, and identification information for indicating the specific result of determination on the display means is stopped and displayed. and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player, wherein the second ball-entering means is changed from the second state to the first state. Determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; Effect means for executing an effect for indicating the result of determination by the determining means; effect determination means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect to be executed by; prohibition means for prohibiting execution of the specific effect by the effect determination means when a prohibition condition is satisfied; A gaming machine R1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., when a special period is set in which it is easier to enter the ball into the starting hole than usual, an effect is executed to inform that the special period will be executed in advance or during the period. A gaming machine has been proposed (Patent document: JP-A-2011-229733). When there is a high possibility that a large number of held balls are generated immediately after the state in which it is easy to enter the starting hole, the player is notified that it is not advantageous. There is a possibility that a problem may occur that the interest in the game will be reduced. This technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine R1, when the prohibition condition is satisfied, the execution of the specific effect indicating that the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entering means is not executed. It is possible to execute an effect that meets the needs of the player, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

The game machine R1 has state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is set to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in a normal state. and the prohibition condition is set as at least one condition, which is a first condition that is satisfied when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine R2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the first condition based on the end of the special state in which the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entering means is set as the establishment condition as the prohibition condition. Therefore, a lot of the second information is stored, and even if the game ball is entered into the second ball entering means, the specific performance is executed during a period when the profit for the player is low, thereby suppressing the inconvenience of lowering the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine R2, the prohibition condition is such that a predetermined number or more of the second information are stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. The gaming machine R3 is characterized in that the second condition is set as at least one condition.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, when the special state ends, the condition is that a predetermined number or more of the second information is stored. The prohibition condition is established only in the stored state, and there is an effect of suppressing the problem that the player's profit is lost because the specific performance is not executed even though the number of stored second information is small. .

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the determination means includes a specific first determination result that causes the second ball-entering means to change to the first state for a first period, and During a second period, it is configured to be able to determine a specific second determination result that is varied to the first state, and the effect determination means determines the specific state based on the fact that the specific second determination result is determined. The gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it determines the performance.

According to the gaming machine R4, by executing a specific effect in any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, it is possible to notify the player that it is a more advantageous period, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be.

<Feature S group> (volume control)
A game machine having a performance execution means capable of executing a performance and a privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to a player when a specific performance is executed by the performance execution means. a sound output means capable of outputting sound as a part of the effect executed by the effect execution means; a first state in which the sound is output from the sound output means based on the sound volume set by the sound volume setting means; and the sound at a predetermined volume regardless of the sound volume set by the sound volume setting means. output control means for switching between a second state in which sound is output from the output means; and a return state in which power supply to the game machine is started from a power failure state in which the power supply for operating the game machine is interrupted. and initial setting means for setting the second state when a game machine S1 is reached.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a game machine has been proposed in which the volume of sound effects, voices, etc. output as effects can be variably set according to the operation of the player or the settings of the game parlor (patent document: Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2011-200511). In this type of game machine, there has been a demand for a game machine capable of more suitable volume control. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims at providing a game machine capable of suitable sound volume control.

According to the gaming machine S1, when the power is turned on, the second state is set in which output is performed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume set by the volume setting means. This has the effect of enabling the user to recognize the sound in a suitable manner and to perform suitable volume control.

In the gaming machine S1, the second state is a state in which the volume is set so as to be smaller than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, in the second state, the volume is set to be smaller than the lowest volume set by the volume setting means. There is an effect that the noise in the game parlor can be reduced. In the game machine S1 or S2, the game machine S3 is characterized in that the output control means continuously sets the second state until the effect executing means finishes execution of one effect.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the second state is continuously set until the execution of the 1st effect is completed, so that the power supply is turned off during the period when the effect is not executed. Even if it is turned on, there is an effect that it is possible to recognize that it is the performance executed after the power is turned on by the sound volume of one performance to be executed later.

In one of the game machines S1 to S3, an initial state setting means for setting the state of the game machine to an initial state on the condition that a predetermined operation from the outside is performed when the game machine is powered on. The game machine S4, wherein the sound output means outputs a predetermined notification sound at a maximum volume when the initial state is set.

According to the game machine S4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines S1 to S3, it is possible to confirm that the game machine has been initialized by a notification sound. also has the effect of being able to detect fraud at an early stage.

<Characteristic T group> (Reserved pattern display area variable control)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information is stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. A pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each piece of information, and a display mode of an area in which the pattern is displayed on the pattern display means is varied according to the number of the information stored in the storage means. A game machine T1, characterized by comprising a symbol display area changing means.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, the display area in which the reserved ball information is displayed becomes difficult to understand when the reserved ball information is not displayed. was wanted. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and aims to provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

According to the game machine T1, since the display mode of the area where the pattern is displayed is varied depending on the number of information stored in the storage means, the pattern is stored according to the display mode of the display area where the pattern is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize the number of pieces of information and provide an easy-to-understand gaming machine.

In the gaming machine T1, the pattern display means displays area information indicating the area in which the pattern is displayed even in a state where the pattern is not displayed, and the pattern display area changing means is provided. is a gaming machine T2 characterized in that the area information is displayed in a variable manner.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, the area information is displayed while being varied according to the number of stored information. , has the effect of being easy to understand.

In the game machine T1 or T2, the game machine T3 is characterized in that the symbol display means displays identification information capable of identifying an upper limit number of the information that can be stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine T3, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1 or T2, the upper limit number can be recognized by the identification information, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from being played so that the acquisition condition is satisfied when the upper limit number is exceeded. .

In the game machine T3, the identification information is set to non-display when the symbols corresponding to the upper limit number are displayed.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, the identification information is not displayed when the maximum number of symbols is displayed, so that the display of the symbols is suppressed. , there is an effect that the pattern can be easily identified.

In any one of game machines T1 to T4, a period discriminating means for discriminating a period in which a predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied, and a display mode of an area in which the pattern is displayed according to the period discriminated by the period discriminating means. and rule changing means for changing the variable display rule.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines T1 to T4, the display rule for changing the display mode of the area where the pattern is displayed is varied depending on the period until the predetermined number of acquisition conditions are satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the period during which the acquisition condition is satisfied by changing the display mode, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any one of the game machines T1 to T5, the symbol display area changing means displays the first display mode until the first number of the symbols are displayed, and when the first number is exceeded, the first display mode is displayed. A gaming machine T6 characterized in that the display is changed to a second display mode different from that of the game machine T6.

According to the game machine T6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines T1 to T5, the first display mode is displayed until the first number is displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the willingness to establish the, and to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic U group> (Release display of pending number)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information is stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. a pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to each piece of information; and a display mode changing means for varying a display mode displayed on the pattern display means based on a period in which a predetermined number of pieces of the information are acquired by the acquisition means. A gaming machine U1 characterized by having:

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the held ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine U1, since the display mode displayed on the symbol display means is varied depending on the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information are obtained, the player is also interested in the period until the predetermined number of pieces of information is obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to make it have and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine U1, the display mode changing means changes the display mode in the display area in which the symbols are displayed based on the period.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1, the display mode of the display area in which the symbols are displayed is varied based on the period. It has the effect of being recognizable.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the display area in which the symbols are displayed in the symbol display means has a suggesting mode suggesting that the symbols are displayed even during a period when the symbols are not displayed. A game machine U3 characterized in that it is set to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, by displaying the suggestive mode even during the period when the symbols are not displayed, it is possible to quickly confirm that the information has been acquired. has the effect of

A gaming machine U4 in the gaming machine U3, wherein the display mode varying means varies the suggesting mode corresponding to the period.

According to the game machine U4, in addition to the effects of the game machine U3, the suggestion mode is varied in accordance with the period required for storing the predetermined number of information, so the frequency at which the information is stored according to the suggestion mode has the effect of being able to confirm

In the gaming machine U3 or U4, the suggestive mode is regularly changed and displayed based on the number of displayed symbols, and the display mode changing means displays based on the period. The gaming machine U5 is characterized in that the special suggesting mode different from the suggesting mode corresponding to the number of symbols present is variably displayed.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U3 or U4, the acquisition frequency of information can be confirmed by the special suggestion mode, and the suggestion mode varies regularly and irregularly. There is an effect that the game can be played while enjoying the situation.

<Feature V group> (hold navigation)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information before being judged by the judgment means is stored in the storage means. A game machine V1 characterized by having a performance executing means capable of executing a specific performance based on the number or more of stored performances.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the held ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine V1, since the specific effect is executed by storing a predetermined number or more of information in the storage means, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the determination result but also in the number of information stored. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1, prior determination means for executing a determination before the determination means determines the information stored by the storage means; A game machine V2, characterized by comprising an effect determination means capable of determining the type of the specific effect based on a determination result.

According to the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the preliminary determination result in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, so the identification information is stored before the specific effect is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest the determination result of the information that is present, and that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on period information corresponding to a period until a predetermined number of the information is stored by the storage means. .

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine V2, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the period information corresponding to the period until the predetermined number of information is stored in the storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to identify the frequency with which information is stored by the presentation.

Any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3 has history information storage means for storing game history information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific effect is the history information stored in the history information storage means. A game machine V4 characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined based on.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V3, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the game history information, so the type of the specific effect can be changed by continuing the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

In any one of the game machines V1 to V4, the game machine V5 is characterized in that the specific effect is continuously executed until the number of the information stored in the storage means becomes equal to or less than a specific number. .

According to the gaming machine V5, in any of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the specific effect is continued until the number of stored information becomes equal to or less than the specific number. There is an effect that it is possible to motivate

In any one of the game machines V1 to V5, a pattern display means for displaying a corresponding pattern for each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means; and symbol display area varying means for varying the display mode of the area in which the symbols are displayed on the symbol display means in accordance with the number of the information displayed.

According to the game machine V6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines V1 to V5, the display mode of the area where the pattern is displayed is varied in accordance with the number of information stored. There is an effect that the number can be easily identified.

<Characteristic W group> (Lucky number)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, wherein the information is stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means. pattern display means for displaying a pattern corresponding to each piece of information; A number information storage means for storing number information corresponding to the number of the information stored before being judged by the judgment means, and a specific performance is executed based on the number information stored in the number information storage means. A game machine W1 characterized in that it has an effect executing means capable of

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the right to execute a lottery is stored as reserved ball information by entering a game ball into a starting hole during a period in which a variable performance is being executed, and the number of the reserved ball information is stored. is proposed on the display means (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the display mode in which the held ball information is displayed is constant, and the player quickly becomes bored with the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine W1, when information is stored, number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored at the time the information is stored is stored for the stored information, and identification based on the number information is stored. Since the performance is executed, there is an effect that the interest can be further improved when the information is stored.

In the game machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result.

According to the game machine W2, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, the specific effect is executed based on the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result. It is possible to make the player interested in the number information at the time when the stored information is stored, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In the gaming machine W2, the specific effect is executed in a mode indicating the area where the pattern corresponding to the number information stored for the information determined as the specific determination result is displayed. A gaming machine W3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W2, it is possible to confirm the number information stored with respect to the information previously determined as the specific determination result by the specific performance when the symbols are displayed. , there is an effect that the game can be played expecting that the pattern will be displayed in the area indicated by the specific effect.

A game machine W4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines W1 to W3, the symbol is provided with a suggestive mode corresponding to the number information.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, a suggestive mode corresponding to the number information is attached to the symbol. Also, there is an effect that the stored count information can be recognized in a suggestive manner.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, type determination means for determining the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means, and the number information of the specific effect when the privilege game is being executed. and reporting means for reporting suggestion information suggesting type information corresponding to the type of the privilege game being executed based on the fact that the information is stored in the memory number corresponding to Gaming machine W5.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines W1 to W4, suggestive information suggesting the type of privilege game being executed by storing information up to the number of memories corresponding to the specific effect is reported. Therefore, the game can be played so as to store the information even during the privilege game, and there is an effect that the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The game machine W6 is characterized in that the game machine W5 is configured such that the type of the privilege game is difficult to identify from the identification information indicating the specific determination result.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W5, the identification information makes it difficult to identify the type of the privilege game, thereby increasing the value of the suggestive information reported. be.

<X group> (charge effect derivative)
A first ball-entering means that allows a game ball to enter at all times, and a second ball-entering means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. an acquisition means capable of acquiring first information when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and acquiring second information when the game ball enters the second ball entering means; , storage means for storing the first information and the second information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the first information or the second information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of determination by the determination means on a display means, and identification information for indicating the specific result of determination on the display means is stopped and displayed. and a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player, wherein the second ball-entering means is varied from the second state to the second state. Determining means for determining whether a specific condition is satisfied; Effect means for executing an effect for indicating the result of determination by the determining means; and an effect determination means capable of determining a specific effect as the effect to be executed by the game machine X1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine, etc., a movable member such as a vane shape that regulates the entry of a ball into the starting hole and releases the regulation when the opening condition is satisfied so that the game ball can be easily entered. A game machine has been proposed in which the is attached to the start port (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229733). In the above-described pachinko machine or the like, even if the opening condition is simply satisfied and the movable member is moved, there is a possibility that the player may become bored with the game. This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims at providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing the problem that a player quickly becomes bored with the game.

According to the game machine X1, the player can easily determine that the specific condition is established by the specific performance, and plays the game expecting not only the specific determination result but also the execution of the specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine X2 is characterized in that the game machine X1 has prohibiting means for prohibiting the determination of the specific effect by the effect determining means when the avoidance condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, the fulfillment of the avoidance condition prohibits the determination of the specific performance, so that the reckless execution of the specific performance can be suppressed. effective.

a state setting means capable of setting a special state in which the second ball entering means is set to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in a normal state in the gaming machine X1 or X2; wherein the avoidance condition is set as at least one condition based on the fact that the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. Gaming machine X3.

According to the game machine X3, in addition to the effects of the game machine X1 or X2, at the timing when the special state is set to the normal state, there is a high possibility that a large amount of the second information is stored in the storage means. can be easily established, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of excessive ball entry into the second ball entry means.

In the game machine X3, the avoidance condition is that the second information is stored in the storage means when the normal state is set from the state in which the special state is set by the state setting means. A gaming machine X4 characterized in that at least one condition is set.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effect of the game machine X3, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the second information is excessively stored.

In any one of the game machines X2 to X4, a shooting means capable of shooting a game ball by varying the shooting power based on the player's operation, and a game ball shot by the shooting means with the first shooting power. and a game ball shot with a second firing force different from the first firing force, configured to make it difficult for the game ball that has flowed down the first channel to flow down. and a second flow path configured to be able to flow down, wherein the first ball entering means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path can enter, and the second entering means The ball means is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path can enter, and when the avoidance condition is satisfied, the game ball flows down to the first flow path. The gaming machine X5 is characterized in that it notifies the player of suggesting information suggesting that the game be played.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effect exerted on any one of the gaming machines X2 to X4, when the avoidance condition is met, the information suggesting that the game ball flows down to the first flow path is notified. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that a player enters a game ball into the second ball entering means that has been changed to the first state.

<Y group> (button pop-out control)
An operation means having an operation surface that a player can operate, a movement means for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and an operation control means for controlling the operation of the movement means, The moving means is configured to be capable of executing a first action of moving the operation surface of the operating means in a first movement manner and a second action of moving the operation surface of the operation means in a second movement manner different from the first movement manner. and the motion control means performs the first motion when a first condition is satisfied, and the moving device performs the second motion when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Y1 characterized in that it controls the operation of .

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operation means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operation means can be varied, or the type of background can be changed. A game machine configured to be switched has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine Y1, since the operation control means can move the operation surface of the operation means in different movement modes, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation means. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect using the operation means, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Y1, the moving means moves the operating surface of the operating means from a predetermined initial position to a specific operating position.

According to the game machine Y2, since the movement mode of moving the operation surface of the operation means to a specific operation position can be varied by the operation control means, the process of moving the operation surface of the operation means can also be performed. can make people interested.

In the gaming machine Y2, the movement means moves the operation surface of the operation means so that the movement period in the second action is longer than the movement period in the first action. Gaming machine Y3.

According to the game machine Y3, since the movement period can be changed according to the control content of the operation control means, the player can be more interested in the process of movement of the operation surface of the operation means.

In game machines Y1 to Y3, the moving means comprises driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. and the operation control means executes a plurality of drive controls on the drive means, and changes the operation contents of the moving means according to the contents of the drive control to be executed. Characteristic game machine Y4.

According to the game machine Y4, it is possible to vary the operation contents of the moving means by varying the contents of the drive control to the driving means. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control contents of the operation control means.

In the game machine Y4, the driving means generates the driving force by a rotational movement, and the operation control means is a first driving control for rotating the driving means in a first direction as the plurality of driving controls. and a second drive control for rotating in a second direction different from the first direction, and the moving means is capable of executing the first drive control when the first drive control is executed by the control means. A gaming machine Y5 characterized in that it executes one action, and executes the second action when the second drive control is executed.

According to the gaming machine Y5, the moving means performs different operations by rotating the driving means in different directions, so that the movement mode for moving the operating surface of the operating means can be easily varied.

A gaming machine Y6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine Y5, it has speed varying means capable of varying the rotation speed of the driving means.

According to the gaming machine Y6, since the rotation speed is varied by the speed varying means, it is possible to easily diversify the movement mode for moving the operation surface of the operation means, and to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the operation means. can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine Y6, the second movement mode moves the operation surface of the operation means to the specific operation position according to the rotation speed of the driving means varied by the speed varying means. Characteristic game machine Y7.

In game machines Y1 to Y7, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination when a discrimination condition is satisfied, and a benefit granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. and suggestive effect executing means for executing a suggestive effect for suggesting that the determination result of the determining means is the predetermined determined result, and the moving means operates as the suggestive effect. , the game machine Y8, wherein the operation control means determines the content of the operation control according to the determination result of the determination means.

According to the game machine Y8, since the determination result of the determination means can be suggested by the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means to be executed, the player can pay attention to the movement mode of the operation surface of the operation means. Become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance using the operation means.

<Feature Z group> (Prevention of button pop-out destination)
Operation means having an operation surface that can be operated by a player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied, condition determination means for determining whether a predetermined movement condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means determine the predetermined movement. moving means capable of moving the operating surface of the operating means from the retracted position to the projecting position when a condition is satisfied; movement control means for controlling the moving means; and effect executing means for executing a effect based on the operation of , wherein the moving means includes a first action for moving the operating surface of the operating means to the projecting position; and a second action of moving the operation surface of the operation means to the projecting position, and the movement control means causes the effect execution means to perform the predetermined operation by the operation means. The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the first action is executed when the effect becomes executable.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . In this type of pachinko machine or the like, an operation means such as a switch that can be operated by the player is provided, and the content of the variable effect executed by the player operating the operation means can be varied, or the type of background can be changed. A game machine configured to be switched has been proposed (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-075741). In this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the player quickly becomes bored with the game simply by operating the operating means. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the game machine Z1, regardless of whether or not the operation surface of the operation means is moved, the operation control means causes the movement means to perform the first movement. By grasping whether or not it is, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing it in advance, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

Moreover, there is an effect that the player can expect that the second action will be performed by performing the first action.

In the game machine Z1, the moving means includes a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the operation surface of the operating means by a rotating operation, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means. and the movement control means includes, as the plurality of movement controls, first drive control for rotating the drive means in a first direction, and rotation in a second direction different from the first direction. and a second drive control to cause the moving device to execute the first drive control when the movement control device executes the first drive control, and the second drive control is executed. A game machine Z2 characterized in that the second action is executed when the game is played.

According to the game machine Z2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Z1, the operation surface of the operation means can be configured not to move even if the drive means is driven, and the position of the drive means can be changed according to the state of the operation surface. There is an effect that it can be changed without moving.

The game machine Z2 has a control means that can be changed between a control state that controls the movement of the operation surface of the operation means by the movement means and a release state that cancels the control, and the content of control of the movement control means is controlled by the movement control means. The first operation executed by the moving means in response is an operation for changing the restricting means to the released state, and the second operation moves the operating surface of the operating means to the projecting position. Game machine Z3 characterized by motion.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Z2, the movement of the moving means is restricted by the restricting means. Then, the moving means is operated so as to vary the state of the restricting means in accordance with the content of control executed by the motion control means. Therefore, even if the moving means is operated, it is possible to reliably control whether or not the operation surface of the operating means is moved.

In the gaming machine Z3, the transmission means includes a rotating member capable of rotating in synchronism with the rotating motion of the driving means, and an action member connected to the operating means and on which the rotating motion of the rotating member acts. and, the rotating member has a projecting portion that can come into contact with the acting member, and the restricting means rotates the driving means in the first direction to move the projecting portion to the acting member. A game machine Z4 characterized in that it can be changed to the released state by bringing it into contact with.

In the gaming machine Z4, the restricting means is not changed to the released state when the driving means is rotated in the second direction to bring the projecting portion into contact with the action member. Gaming machine Z5.

In the gaming machine Z5, the position where the protrusion stops is the same when the first drive control is executed by the operation control means and when the second drive control is executed. Game machine Z6 to play.

In game machines Z1 to Z6, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, and a benefit granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a predetermined discrimination result. and suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect for suggesting that the determination result of the determination means is the predetermined determination result, and the predetermined movement condition according to the determination result of the determination means. The game machine Z7 is characterized in that

<Characteristics α group> (Over winning at the time of jackpot)
discrimination means capable of making a decision; display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result obtained by the reverse part acquisition means; a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game when displayed; a first privilege game in which a first privilege advantageous to a player is given as the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means; A second privilege game in which a second privilege more advantageous to the player than the first privilege is given, and a determining means capable of deciding either of the above, wherein the privilege game is played by the privilege game execution means. is executed, a type determination means for determining, from a plurality of types, a notification type for notifying the player of notification information for notifying the type information of the privilege game being executed. Gaming machine α1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of game machine, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine α1, when the privilege game is executed, the notification type for suggesting the privilege game type is determined from a plurality of types, so that the notification type is variously executed and the interest of the game is enhanced. have the effect of improving

In the gaming machine α1, variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the open state; and variable control means for causing an open game in which the variable ball entry means is varied until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in an open state, and the notification type exceeds the predetermined number. A gaming machine α2 characterized by including at least a first notification type for notifying the notification information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine α2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α1, it is possible to increase the value of allowing the variable ball entry means to enter more than a predetermined number of game balls, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. be.

In the gaming machine α2, the privilege game is to execute the open game a plurality of times, and when the first notification type is determined, based on the execution of the open game a predetermined number of times, A gaming machine α3 characterized by having notification type switching means for switching to another notification type.

According to the gaming machine α3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α2, even when the first notification type is determined, it can be switched to another notification type during the privilege game, so that the number of game balls exceeding the predetermined number There is an effect that it is possible to switch so that the notification information is notified even when it is difficult to enter the ball.

In the gaming machine α3, the notification type switching means switches to the other notification type on condition that the specific notification information is not notified in the first notification type. α4.

According to the gaming machine α4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine α3, the notification type can be switched on the condition that the specific notification information is not notified, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of overlapping notifications. .

<Feature β group> (Directing normal hits as variable hits)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means means, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means for a predetermined period, and identification for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. and a bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, and the information is stored before the determination means based on the information stored in the storage means. If the information that is determined as the specific determination result by the preliminary determination execution means when the privilege game is executed by the preliminary determination execution means for executing the determination and the privilege game execution means is stored , and a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a big win effect on a liquid crystal screen according to the lottery result. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. (Patent document: JP-A-2010-075741). In this type of game machine, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of the game. This technical idea was made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that improves the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the privilege game is executed, if it is further determined that the privilege game will be executed after that, the specific effect is executed, so that the specific effect is executed. There is an effect that the player can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine β1, the privilege game includes a first privilege game in which a normal game state is set after execution, and a higher probability that the player will determine the specific determination result than the normal game state after execution. At least a second privilege game in which a special game state is set is set, and the specific effect is configured in a manner suggesting that the special game state is set. gaming machine β2.

In the gaming machine β2, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode as a stop display mode indicating that the second privilege game is executed, and the first privilege game is executed. stop display switching means capable of stopping display in the specific stop display mode when the information determined as the specific determination result is stored when the identification information is dynamically displayed A game machine β3 characterized by being a thing.

According to the gaming machine β, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine β2, even when the first privilege game is executed, it is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, so it seems as if the second privilege game is executed. There is an effect that it can make you think.

In the gaming machine β3, the stop display switching means stores the information determined as the specific determination result when the identification information for executing the first privilege game is dynamically displayed. is not displayed, and is switched to the specific stop display mode based on the fact that the information determined as the specific determination result is stored during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Gaming machine β4.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine β3, the stop mode can be switched even after the dynamic display is started, so there is an effect that the chances of displaying in the specific stop mode can be increased. be.

<Characteristic AA group> (Refill chance)
determination means capable of executing determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating determination results by the determination means; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; variable ball-entering means capable of changing between a first state in which ball-entering is possible and a second state in which ball-entering is more difficult than in the first state; and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means. a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game that changes the variable ball-entering means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied when is stopped and displayed , a storage means capable of storing game balls that have entered the variable ball entry means; a storage control means for releasing storage by the storage means based on the establishment of a first condition; a guiding means for guiding the game ball guided by the guiding means; a first ball entering means for informing first information when the game ball guided by the guiding means enters; and a game ball guided by the guiding means. a second ball-entering means for informing second information different from the first information when the player enters the game machine AA1.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a pachinko machine that performs a lottery when a game ball enters a starting hole and displays a variation effect or a winning effect according to the lottery result on a liquid crystal screen. In such effects, various patterns of effects are executed, such as effects to give the players a sense of expectation and effects to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, to improve the interest in the game. . Among pachinko machines of this type, a plurality of different game states are set, and a game machine has been proposed that suggests the game state to be set in advance (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-206594). .

In this type of pachinko machine or the like, there is a risk that the game will become monotonous if the game state is simply notified on the display device or the like, and the player will soon become bored with the game.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the specific game is executed, the game ball entering the variable ball entering means is stored, and is stored in the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means when the first condition is established. Since the game balls that have been played are guided and the first information or the second information corresponding to the ball entering means is notified, the game balls that have been stored even during execution of the specific game are transferred to the first ball entering means and the second information. It is possible to make the player interested in which one of the two ball-entering means the ball is to be entered, improve the interest in the game, and suppress the problem of early boredom of the player.

In the gaming machine AA1, first game information corresponding to the first information and second game information corresponding to the second information are set as game information set after the specific game execution means executes the specific game. A gaming machine AA2 characterized by having one game information determining means capable of determining at least one of:

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to recognize in advance the game information set after the specific game is executed, so that the more guided game ball enters. You can get interested in the means.

In a game machine AA1 or AA2, a rotating body on which the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means are arranged, a rotating means for rotating the rotating body, and the rotation of the rotating body by the rotating means are controlled. and a rotation control means for controlling the rotation speed or the rotation direction based on the timing at which the storage by the storage means is released.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the game ball guided by the guiding means is directed to either the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means by rotating the rotating body. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether a ball is going to enter, and that interest in the game ball guided by the guiding means can be maintained.

In the gaming machine AA3, it is possible to detect a first flow path through which a game ball that has entered the first ball entering means can flow down to the back side of the rotating body, and a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path. and a control means, wherein the second ball-entering means detects the game ball entering the second ball-entering means as the second ball-entering means when the rotating body is rotated by a predetermined amount. A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be discharged out of the ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA3, the path through which the game ball flows differs depending on whether the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. , it is possible to distinguish whether the ball has entered the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means with a small number of detecting means.

In the gaming machine AA4, a first effect is executed based on detection of a game ball during a predetermined specific period by the first detection means, and a game ball is detected by the first detection means during the specific period. effect executing means capable of executing a second effect if the game information determining means has determined the game information corresponding to the second information; and prohibiting means for prohibiting execution of the first effect when a game ball is detected by the detecting means.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA4, when a game ball enters the first ball entering means although the game information corresponding to the second information is determined, Since the execution of the first effect is prohibited, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of misleading the player.

<Characteristics AB group> (touch effect)
A game machine capable of being operated by a player, having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when the specific performance is executed by the performance executing means. A first operation means, a second operation means that can be operated by the player by executing an operation different from the first operation means, and a first operation detection means for detecting that the first operation means is operated. and the second operation detection means for detecting that the second operation means has been operated, and the both detection period in which the operation is detected by each of the first operation detection means and the second operation detection means A game characterized in that it has a detection determination means for determining and the effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the timing when the both detection period is determined by the detection determination means. Machine AB1.

Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, a variable performance is executed according to the result of the lottery, and an operation means capable of being pressed by a player is arranged to operate during the variable performance. A pachinko machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying characters, comments, etc. is executed in addition to a variable effect executed by operating (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-228798).

In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the repetition of the same operation makes the game monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AB1, a special effect corresponding to the timing at which the detection determination means determines the both detection period is executed, so that the player is interested in the timing of operating the first operation means and the second operation means. This has the effect of improving the amusement of the game and suppressing the problem of early boredom of the player.

In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, the first operation means is configured to be detected as being operated by the first operation detection means when the player presses down, and the second operation means is operated by the player. is configured to be detected as being operated by the second operating means by executing a predetermined non-contact operation on the second operating means by the player Machine AB3.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB1 or AB2, the first operation means is operated by the player in contact, and the second operation means can be operated without contact. By performing different operations, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience of confusing the operations of the first operating means and the second operating means.

The game machine AB4 is characterized in that, in any one of the game machines AB1 to AB3, the second operation means is arranged on the upper surface of the first operation means.

According to the game machine AB4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB3, the effect that it is possible to easily operate so as to detect that both the first operation means and the second operation means have been operated. There is

<Characteristic AC group> (Nora mode production)
determining means capable of executing a determination; display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determining means; dynamic display means for statically displaying the identification information in a manner for indicating the identification information; Specified game execution means, effect execution means capable of executing effects during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, effect determination means for determining effects to be executed by the effect execution means, and can be operated by the player. and an effect variable means for varying the effect executed by the effect execution means based on the operation of the operation means, wherein the effect determination means comprises the operation means based on the content of the operation, switching between a first effect corresponding to the specific determination result and a second effect corresponding to the result other than the specific determination result. game machine AC1.

Conventionally, a lottery is carried out when a game ball enters a starting hole, and according to the result of the lottery, a winning performance corresponding to the winning lottery result and a losing performance corresponding to the losing lottery result are determined in advance. machines have been proposed. (Patent document: JP-A-2013-202053).

In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the lottery result can be predicted before the lottery result is notified by the selected effect, and there is a fear that the player gets tired of the game early.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AC1, the first effect corresponding to the specific determination result and the second effect corresponding to the other than the specific determination result are switched depending on the operation content of the operating means. It is possible to switch and set the effect to be executed in a certain case, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game and suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

In the gaming machine AC1, the operation means is composed of a plurality of operation means, and the operation content is determined by the operated operation means among the plurality of operation means. Gaming machine AC2.

According to the game machine AC2, since the effects can be switched by the operated operating means, there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the operating means comprises at least a first operating means that can be operated by pressing down by the player and a second operating means that can be operated by the player without contact. A gaming machine AC3 characterized by:

According to the game machine AC3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AC1 or AC2, the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated by different operation methods, and the effect that confusion of operations can be suppressed. be.

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC3, when the first effect and the second effect are switched and determined by the effect determining means, the first effect corresponds to a result other than the specific determination result. and displaying a second suggesting mode suggesting that the second effect corresponds to the specific determination result. Gaming machine AC4.

<Characteristic AD group> (Fusion of press button and touch sensor)
An operation means having an operation unit that can be pressed by a player, an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, and an effect that varies the effect executed by the effect execution means based on the pressing of the operation means. A game machine having variable means, comprising detecting means capable of detecting that a player has touched the upper surface of the operation unit, and the effect executing means detects the contact when the detecting means detects the contact. , a game machine AD1 capable of executing a first effect, and thereafter capable of executing a second effect based on pressing of the operation unit while the contact state is maintained.

Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, a variable performance is executed according to the result of the lottery, and an operation means capable of being pressed by a player is arranged to operate during the variable performance. A pachinko machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying characters, comments, etc. is executed in addition to a variable effect executed by operating (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-228798).

In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the repetition of the same operation makes the game monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine AD1, when the player presses the operation means, the first effect is changed before the pressing operation is executed, so that the operation means can be operated. can be recognized before pressing , the game can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner, and the problem of early boredom of the player can be suppressed.

The gaming machine AD1 has effect determination means for determining the effect to be executed by the effect execution means from a plurality of effects, and the operation of the operation means is determined to be valid for the effect determined by the effect determination means. The game machine AD2 is characterized in that an operation effect is set in which an operation valid period is set.

According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, the effective period is set by executing the operation presentation, so that the player can easily understand that the presentation uses the operation means. There is

Information storage means for storing first information by executing the first effect and storing second information by executing the second effect in the game machine AD1 or AD2; and the information storage means. and notification means for notifying determination information corresponding to the determination result of the determination means when information corresponding to the first information and the second information stored in is predetermined information. A gaming machine AD3 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the judgment information corresponding to the judgment result of the judging means is notified based on the history of the game using the operating means, so that the game using the operating means can be performed. There is an effect that it can be done voluntarily.

In any one of the game machines AD1 to AD3, the effect execution means can execute a third effect based on the fact that the contact is no longer detected by the detection means after the operation means is pressed. A gaming machine AD4 characterized by:

According to the game machine AD4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the game machines AD1 to AD3, the effect is executed at three timings from when the operation means is pressed until the contact of the operation means is released. effect can be executed with a small number of operations.

<Characteristic AE group> (touch effect derivative)
A game machine capable of being operated by a player, having a performance executing means capable of executing a performance and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when the specific performance is executed by the performance executing means. A first operation means, a second operation means that can be operated by the player by executing an operation different from the first operation means, and a first operation detection means for detecting that the first operation means is operated. a second operation detection means for detecting that the second operation means is operated; a determination means capable of determining detection by the first operation detection means and the second operation detection means; and a determination means for the determination means. a performance type determining means for determining the type of the performance to be executed by the performance executing means based on the determination result of (1).

Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, a variable performance is executed according to the result of the lottery, and an operation means capable of being pressed by a player is arranged to operate during the variable performance. A pachinko machine has been proposed in which an effect of displaying characters, comments, etc. is executed in addition to a variable effect executed by operating (Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-228798).

In this type of pachinko machine or the like, the repetition of the same operation makes the game monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will quickly become bored with the game.

This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the game machine AE1, since the performance is determined based on the operation of a plurality of operating means, various performances can be executed according to the operating conditions, thereby eliminating the problem of early boredom with the game. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball into a starting hole, a variable performance is executed according to the result of the lottery, and an operation means capable of being pressed by a player is arranged to operate during the variable performance. In addition to the variable effect executed by operating , a pachinko machine has been proposed in which effects such as characters and comments are displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2008-228798 A) .
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises a performance executing means capable of executing a performance, and a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game when a specific performance is executed by the performance executing means. a first operating means operable by the player; a second operating means operable by the player by performing an operation different from the first operating means; First operation detection means for detecting that the first operation means has been operated; Second operation detection means for detecting that the second operation means has been operated; and the first operation detection means and the second operation. and detection determination means for determining whether it is a two-way detection period in which an operation is detected in the detection means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the effect executing means capable of executing the effect, and the specific game executing means capable of executing the specific game when the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means. a first operation means operable by a player, a second operation means operable by a player by performing an operation different from the first operation means, and the first operation means. A first operation detection means for detecting that the is operated, a second operation detection means for detecting that the second operation means is operated, and the first operation detection means and the second operation detection means and detection determination means for determining whether it is a two-way detection period in which an operation is detected.
Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
114 display control device (dynamic display means)
203a Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (storage means)
Z255, Z275 determination means
Z307, Z315 acquisition means
Z1004 privilege game executing means
Z2106 pattern display means
Z2229 pattern display area variable means

Claims (1)

Acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition;
a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
determination means for performing determination based on the information stored in the storage means;
dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on the display means for a predetermined period;
a bonus game executing means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means,
The identification information is composed of a plurality of identification pattern rows, and is configured to indicate that the determination result by the determination means is the specific determination result by displaying a combination of specific identification patterns. ,
The dynamic display means is a specific dynamic display capable of displaying, of the plurality of identification pattern strings, the identification pattern strings other than one identification pattern string in a ready-to-win display mode that can be combined to indicate the specific determination result. It is possible to dynamically display the identification information in a display mode,
a pattern display means capable of causing the display means to display a notification pattern corresponding to each of the information stored in the storage means before being judged by the judgment means;
a pattern display area changing means capable of changing the displayed state of the area information indicating the area in which the notification pattern is displayed to a non-display state ,
The game machine is
It is possible to display area information indicating an area in which the notification pattern is displayed even in a state where the notification pattern is not displayed,
Having means capable of executing a specific effect under a situation where the area information of the area where the notification pattern is not displayed is variable,
A first specific effect may be executed as the specific effect when the area information of the area where the notification pattern is not displayed is changed from the displayed state to the non-display based on the establishment of the first condition. It is possible, and when the area information of the area where the notification pattern is not displayed is changed from the displayed state to the non-display based on the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition, the specified It is possible to execute a second specific effect different from the first specific effect as the effect ,
The second condition is not satisfied during a period in which the area information is changed based on the satisfaction of the first condition, and the area information is changed based on the satisfaction of the second condition. is configured so that the first condition is not satisfied during the period,
The storage means stores the information up to a predetermined specific number under a situation in which the area information is changed to non-display based on the establishment of the second condition during the period displayed in the ready-to-reach display mode. is stored, it is possible to notify that the information has been stored up to the specific number in a notification mode different from the notification pattern,
Among the displayed area information, the area information indicating that the notification pattern corresponding to the specific number of the information is displayed is displayed in the second display mode during the period when the ready-to-win display mode is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be changed to non-display and displayed based on the establishment of a condition .

Images